JP7237276B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine provided with light emitting means (Patent Document 1).

JP 2015-208360 A

However, the conventional game machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement in the mode of light emission. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of making the mode of light emission suitable .

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 comprises light emitting means, irradiated means configured to be rotatable around a predetermined rotation axis and irradiated with light from the light emitting means, and the predetermined light emitting means. and an operation means capable of rotating together with the irradiation means about the rotation axis of the irradiation means, and during the rotational movement of the irradiation means and the operation means, the outer shape of the irradiation means viewed from a predetermined direction is determined. Equivalently , the brightness of a predetermined portion of the member provided in the operation means is changed when viewed in the predetermined direction, the light from the light emitting means via the operation means is allowed to pass through the irradiated means, and the rotation is performed. During operation, the outer shape of the irradiated means as viewed in the predetermined direction is maintained in a symmetrical shape centering on the specific portion of the predetermined rotation axis, and the appearance of light through the irradiated means can be changed. , the light emitting means is disposed outside the irradiated means and the operating means.

According to the game machine of claim 1, the mode of light emission can be made suitable .

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line VIb-VIb of FIG. 6(a). (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7(a). FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of arrow VIII in FIG. 6; FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of arrow IX in FIG. 7; It is a front perspective view of an operation device. It is a back perspective view of an operation device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an operation device. It is a back exploded perspective view of an operation device. (a) is a front view of the tilting device, (b) is a side view of the tilting device viewed in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the tilting device on line XIVc; It is a front exploded perspective view of a tilting device. Fig. 10 is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid of the tilting device; (a) is a front view of the driving device, and (b) is a side view of the driving device viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. 17(a). It is a front exploded perspective view of a drive. It is a front exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft. 18. (a) is a side view of the left disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow XXa in FIG. 18, and (b) is a side view of the left disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow XXb in FIG. (a) and (b) are front views of a release member and a rotary pawl member. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 39 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXXIX-XXXIX of FIG. 38; FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); (a) is a side view of a slide claw member in a second embodiment, (b) is a side view of a rotary plate member, and (c) is a side view of a releasing member. (a) and (b) are side views of a release member, a rotary plate member, and a slide claw member. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); It is a side view of the tilting device in 3rd Embodiment. (a) and (b) are side views of the operation device. (a) and (b) are side views of the operation device. It is a side view of the tilting device in 4th Embodiment. (a) and (b) are side views of the operation device. (a) and (b) are side views of the operation device. FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of an operation device according to a fifth embodiment; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lower frame member and a vibration device. (a) is a side view of the lower frame member, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member taken along line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59(a), and (c) is FIG. 59(a). is a partial top view of the lower frame member as viewed in the direction of the arrow LIXc. 59(a) and 59(b) are sectional views of the vibrating device taken along line LXa-LXa of FIG. 59(a). 59(a) and 59(b) are cross-sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 taken along line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59(a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive. (a) is a front perspective view of a right disc cam, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the right disc cam. It is a front exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft. (a) is a front view of the right disc cam viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam taken along line LXVb-LXVb in FIG. c) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam taken along line LXVc-LXVc of FIG. 65(a). 66(a) is a front view of the right disc cam viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and (b) is a sectional view of the right disc cam taken along line LXVIb-LXVIb in FIG. 66(a). 67(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and (b) is a partial rear view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIb in FIG. 67(a); is. 68(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and (b) is a partial rear view of the operation device viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. 68(a); is. It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive device in a sixth embodiment. FIG. 4 is a front exploded perspective view of a disk member, a ring member and a second transmission member of the left disk cam; FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); (a) is a front view of a right disc cam in a seventh embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the right disc cam. 74(a) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam taken along line LXXVa-LXXVa in FIG. 74(a), and (b) is a partial side view of the right disc cam viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. 74(a). is. (a) is a front view of the ring member, (b) is a rear view of the ring member, and (c) is a side view of the ring member viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIc in FIG. 76(a). (a) is a front view of an engaging member, and (b) is a side view of the engaging member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIb in FIG. 77(a). (a) is a front view of the right disc cam, (b) is a side view of the right disc cam viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb in FIG. 78 (a), and (c) is a right disc cam. 78(d) is a side view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIId in FIG. 78(c); (e) is a front view of the right disc cam; (f) [ Fig. 78 ] is a side view of the right disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIf in Fig. 78(e) ; 7(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6. FIG. 7(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6. FIG. FIG. 7 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6; 7(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6. FIG. 7(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6. FIG. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device on a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6; FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device on a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6; It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine showing a state in which an inner frame is opened (deployed) with respect to an outer frame; FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine showing a state in which an inner frame is opened from an outer frame and a back pack is opened from the inner frame (deployed); FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine showing a state in which an inner frame is closed with respect to an outer frame and a front frame is opened (deployed); FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine with a front frame removed; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame, in which constituent members arranged below the window portion of the front frame are shown exploded; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame in which constituent members arranged below the window portion of the front frame are shown exploded; (a) is an exploded rear perspective view of a front frame, and (b) is a front perspective view of a movable binding member in which a released state and a fixed state of the movable binding member are shown side by side. (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame taken along line XCIVb-XCIVb of FIG. 94(a). (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame taken along line XCVb-XCVb of FIG. 95(a). (a) is a rear schematic view schematically illustrating the movable binding member and the harness, (b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96(a), and (c) is the movable binding member and the harness. 96(d) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96(c). FIG. (a) And (b) is a front frame which illustrates a binding movable member and a harness typically, an inner frame, a binding movable member, and the upper surface schematic diagram of a harness. It is a front view of a passage formation unit. It is an enlarged front view of a first bending region. It is a front exploded perspective view of a front frame. It is a rear exploded perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded back perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit. It is a front view of a support plate part. It is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate unit. 112(a) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the right panel unit taken along line CXIIb-CXIIb of FIG. 112(a). 113(a) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit taken along line CXIIIb-CXIIIb of FIG. 113(a). (a) is a side view of the right panel unit, (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit, and (c) is a side view of the right panel unit. 115(a) is a schematic side view of the light guide member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the light guide member taken along line CXVb-CXVb of FIG. 115(a). It is a partial rear view of the right panel unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of an upper frame member; It is an exploded rear perspective view of an upper frame member. 1 is an exploded front perspective view of a speaker assembly; FIG. Fig. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the speaker assembly; (a) is a rear view of the front assembly, and (b) is a front view of the rear assembly. (a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly taken along line CXXIVb-CXXIVb of FIG. 124(a), and (c) is a view of FIG. FIG. 124D is a top view of the speaker assembly viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVc, and FIG. 124D is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVd in FIG. 124(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front side assembly, the rear side assembly, the upper frame member, the body frame and the upper side plate member taken along the line CXXVa-CXXVa of FIG. 124(a); is a partial cross-sectional view of the front side assembly, the rear side assembly, the upper frame member, the body frame and the upper side plate member taken along line CXXVb-CXXVb of FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an inner frame. (a) is a back view of the game board, and (b) is a front view of the inner frame. 127(a) and 127(b) are cross-sectional views of the inner frame taken along line CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa in FIG. 127(b). (a) and (b) are side views of the board support device and the game board, schematically showing the board support device and the game board. (a) is a front perspective view of a board support device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board support device. (a) is a front perspective view of a board support device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board support device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a board support device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the board support device. (a) and (b) are side views of the board support device. (a) and (b) are side views of the board support device. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI of FIG. 86; FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI of FIG. 86; FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI of FIG. 86; FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI of FIG. 86; FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. (a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting unit. (a) and (b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball launching unit. (a) to (c) are front views of the ball launching unit showing in chronological order how the ball is delivered by the ball delivery device. 1 is a front perspective view of a metal member for cutting; FIG. 146(a) is a front view of the ball shooting unit, and (b) is a partial top view of the ball shooting unit viewed in the direction of arrow CXLVIb in FIG. 146(a). 147(a) is a front view of the ball shooting unit, and (b) is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member showing the relationship between the thread and the cutting metal member in the state of FIG. 147(a). FIG. 10 is a partial front view of the ball launching unit, inner rail and outer rail after launching the ball; It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of the production operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the production operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the production operation unit. It is a front view of a petal motion device. FIG. 154 is a cross-sectional view of the petal motion device taken along line CLIV-CLIV of FIG. 153; Fig. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal motion device; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal motion device. (a) is an exploded front perspective view of a petal, a flat plate member and a slide member, and (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal, the flat plate member and the slide member. It is a front view of a slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slit member. Fig. 2 is a front perspective view of a slide member and a drive motor; (a) and (b) are rear perspective views of a slide member and a drive motor. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the central shaft rotating device and loose fitting device; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central shaft rotating device and loose fitting device; It is a back perspective view of a petal motion device, a drive-side arm member, and a driven-side arm member. Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the back plate; It is an exploded front perspective view of a back plate, a side base material, and a 2nd production|presentation member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive-side arm member, a slide plate, and a second effect member. It is a front view of a petal motion device, an advancing/retreating motion unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal motion device and an advancing/retreating motion unit. It is a front view of a petal motion device, an advancing/retreating motion unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal motion device and an advancing/retreating motion unit. It is a front view of a petal motion device, an advancing/retreating motion unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal motion device and an advancing/retreating motion unit. (a) is a front perspective view of the petal motion device, (b) is a front view of the petal motion device, and (c) is a transparent front view of the petal motion device with the central shaft rotating device omitted. It is a figure and (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (a) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal motion device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal motion device. is a rear perspective view of the. (a) is a front perspective view of the petal motion device, (b) is a front view of the petal motion device, and (c) is a transparent front view of the petal motion device with the central shaft rotating device omitted. It is a figure and (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (a) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal motion device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal motion device. is a rear perspective view of the. (a) is a front perspective view of the petal motion device, (b) is a front view of the petal motion device, and (c) is a transparent front view of the petal motion device with the central shaft rotating device omitted. It is a figure and (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (a) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal motion device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal motion device. is a rear perspective view of the. FIG. 20 is a front perspective view of a passage forming unit in a ninth embodiment; It is a back perspective view of a passage formation unit. Fig. 2 is a front view of the ball launching unit; Fig. 2 is a front view of the ball launching unit; FIG. 20 is a front perspective view of a passage forming unit according to a tenth embodiment; It is a front perspective view of a passage forming unit. It is a front perspective view of a passage forming unit. It is a front view of an inner frame and a dish passage formation member in an 11th embodiment. Fig. 3 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of an outer rail; Fig. 3 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of an outer rail; (a) and (b) are partial front enlarged views of a foul ball passage. It is a partial front enlarged view of a foul ball passage. FIG. 32 is a rear perspective view of a loose fitting device according to a twelfth embodiment; (a) and (b) are front views of the petal motion device. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged front views of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front view of a petal motion device. (a) and (b) are front views of the petal motion device. It is a front view of a petal motion device. FIG. 21 is a partially enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member in another example of the twelfth embodiment; 4 is a partially enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member; FIG. FIG. 32 is a front perspective view of an operation device according to a thirteenth embodiment; It is a front perspective view of an operation device. (a) and (b) are front perspective views of the operation device. (a) is a front view of the operation device, (b) is a side view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of arrow CCIIIb in FIG. 203(a), and (c) is a bottom view of the operation device, 203(d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device along line CCIIId-CCIIId in FIG. 203(a), and FIG. 203(e) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device along line CCIIIe-CCIIIe in FIG. 203(a). 87(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame in the fourteenth embodiment taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) and (c) are rear views of the fraud detection device. 206(a) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit according to the sixteenth embodiment, and (b) schematically represents an upward recess recessed in the light guide member in region CCVIb of FIG. 206(a). FIG. FIG. 206C is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member, and FIG. 206C is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVIc of FIG. 206A; 206(d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion provided in the light guide member in region CCVId of FIG. 206(a), and (e) is FIG. FIG. 11 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing an upward concave portion provided in the light guide member in the area CCVIe of (a); It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 17th Embodiment. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine; FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine; FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an exploded back perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front view of a front frame. 208(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along line CCXVa-CCXVa in FIG. 207. FIG. 208(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along line CCXVa-CCXVa in FIG. 207. FIG. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. It is a back perspective view of an operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation device. (a) is a front perspective view of a left front cover and a right front cover, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the left front cover and the right front cover. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lower tray unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower tray unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lower tray unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower tray unit. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of a right reinforcing rib, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of a left reinforcing rib. (a) is a top view of a lower tray unit, and (b) is a front view of the lower tray unit. (a) is a bottom view of the lower tray unit, and (b) is a rear view of the lower tray unit. (a) is a right view of the lower tray unit as viewed in the direction of arrow L, and (b) is a left view of the lower tray unit as viewed in the direction of arrow R. FIG. It is a rear view of a lower tray unit. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit along line CCXXXIIIa-CCXXXIIIa in FIG. 229(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit along line CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb in FIG. 229(a); 229(c) is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit taken along line CCXXXIIIc-CCXXXIIIc in FIG. 229(a). FIG. 229(a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit taken along line CCXXXIV-CCXXXIV of FIG. 229(a); It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded back perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the presentation effect device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the presentation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the presentation effect device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the presentation device. (a) is a front view of a rear unit, and (b) is a front view of an electrical board. It is an exploded front perspective view of the rear unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear unit. 241 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partitioning member, the electrical board, the back support member, and the acoustic device along line CCXLIVa-CCXLIVa in FIG. 241; It is a partial sectional view of a decoration board, a back support member, and an acoustic device. (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partitioning member, the decorative substrate, the back support member, and the acoustic device along line CCXLVa-CCXLVa in FIG. 241; It is a partial sectional view of a decoration board, a back support member, and an acoustic device. 241 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partitioning member, the electrical board, the back support member, and the acoustic device along line CCXLVIa-CCXLVIa in FIG. 241; It is a partial sectional view of a decoration board, a back support member, and an acoustic device. It is a side view schematic diagram of a performance effect device. FIG. 241 is a cross-sectional view of the rear unit taken along line CCXLVIII-CCXLVIII of FIG. 241(a); It is an exploded front perspective view of a front side unit. It is an exploded back perspective view of a front side unit. (a) is a front view of the partitioning unit and the guided unit, and (b) is a rear view of the partitioning unit and the guided unit. (a) is a front view of the partition unit, and (b) is a rear view of the partition unit. (a) is a front view of the plate guiding unit, and (b) is a rear view of the plate guiding unit. (a) is a sectional view of the partitioning unit and the guided unit along the line CCLIVa-CCLIVa in FIG. 251(b), and (b) is a partitioning unit and the guided unit along the line CCLIVb-CCLIVb in FIG. 251(b). 251(c) is a cross-sectional view of the partitioning unit and the guided unit taken along line CCLIVc-CCLIVc in FIG. 251(b). FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the partitioning unit and the guided unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the partitioning unit and the guided unit; (a) is a front view of the optical transmission unit and the outer frame member, and (b) is a rear view of the optical transmission unit and the outer frame member. (a) is an exploded front perspective view of the optical transmission unit and the outer frame member, and (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the optical transmission unit and the outer frame member. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the optical transmission unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the optical transmission unit; FIG. (a) is a front view of a transparent tubular member, (b) is a top view of the transparent tubular member, (c) is a bottom view of the transparent tubular member, and (d) is a It is a right view of the transparent tubular member as viewed in the direction of arrow L, and (e) is a rear view of the transparent tubular member. (a) is a front view of an optical transmission unit, (b) is a top view of the optical transmission unit, (c) is a bottom view of the optical transmission unit, and (d) is an optical transmission unit. 1 is a right side view as viewed in the direction of arrow L, and (e) is a rear view of the optical transmission unit. FIG. 242 is a partial cross-sectional view of the rear unit, acoustic device, and optical transmission unit taken along line CCLXIII-CCLXIII in FIG. 241; (a) is a schematic front view schematically illustrating the arrangement of a first lighting unit, and (b) is a schematic front view schematically illustrating the arrangement of light visually recognized through the optical transmission unit. . It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a horizontal effect device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a horizontal effect device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the horizontal effect device. (a) is a front view of a base member and an electrical board, (b) is a left side view of the base member, (c) is a right side view of the base member, and (d) is a 269(e) is a bottom view of the base member, and (f) is a cross-sectional view of the base member and the illumination board taken along line CCLXIXf-CCLXIXf in FIG. 269(a). FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the covering unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the covering unit; (a) is a front perspective view of a light receiving member, (b) is a front view of the light receiving member, and (c) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member. 272(a) is a partially enlarged view of the light receiving member in range CCLXXIIIa of FIG. 272(a), and (b) is a partially enlarged view of the light receiving member in range CCLXXIIIb of FIG. 272(b). (a) is a back perspective view of the light receiving member, (b) is a back view of the light receiving member, and (c) is a back perspective view of the light receiving member. 274(a) is a cross-sectional view of the lateral effect device taken along line CCLXXVa-CCLXXVa in FIG. 274(b), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the light receiving member taken along line CCLXXVb-CCLXXVb in FIG. 274(b). 4 is an exploded front perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member and a cover member; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member and a cover member; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member; (a) is a cross-sectional view of the base member, the illumination board, and the light-receiving member taken along line CCLXXXa-CCLXXXa of FIG. 272(b); (b) is a base member taken along line CCLXXXb-CCLXXXb of FIG. 272(c) is a cross-sectional view of the base member, the decorative substrate and the light receiving member taken along the line CCLXXXc-CCLXXXc in FIG. 272(b). FIG. 280(a) is a schematic diagram of a base member, an electrical board, and a light-receiving member, schematically showing the cross section of FIG. 280(a). FIG. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 18th Embodiment. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine; FIG. 284(a) is a cross-sectional view of the rendering device taken along line CCLXXXIVa-CCLXXXIVa in FIG. 282, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the illumination board of the rendering device viewed in the direction of arrow CCLXXXIVb in FIG. 284(a). FIG. 30 is a side view of the cover in the nineteenth embodiment; FIG. 230 is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit in the twentieth embodiment taken along line CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb of FIG. 229; FIG. 22 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame, operation device, and lower tray unit in the twenty-first embodiment; It is an exploded front perspective view of a lower tray unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower tray unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a vibration device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the vibration device. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of a vibration motor and a covering member; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of a vibration motor and a covering member; It is a front perspective view of a covering member. 4 is a front view of the covering cover member; FIG. 296(a) is a top view of the lower tray unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the lower tray unit along line CCXCVIb-CCXCVIb in FIG. 296(a). FIG. It is a rear view of a lower tray unit. FIG. 296(a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit taken along line CCXCVIII-CCXCVIII of FIG. 296(a); 299(a) is a schematic partial top view of the lower tray unit schematically illustrating the lower tray unit, and (b) is a partial schematic side view of the lower tray unit viewed in the direction of arrow CCXCIXb in FIG. 299(a). be. 300(a) is a schematic partial top view of the lower tray unit schematically illustrating the lower tray unit, and (b) is a partial schematic side view of the lower tray unit viewed in the direction of arrow CCCb in FIG. 300(a). be. It is a partial upper surface schematic diagram of the lower tray unit which illustrates a lower tray unit typically. FIG. 22 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine in a twenty-second embodiment; It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine showing a state in which the front frame is opened (deployed) with respect to the inner frame. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine with a front frame removed; FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board, a center frame, a lottery unit and an operation unit. It is an exploded back perspective view of the game board, the center frame, the lottery unit and the operation unit. (a) is an enlarged front view of the game board in area A5a of FIG. 302, and FIG. 307(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line CCCVIIb-CCCVIIb of FIG. 307(a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board, an outer edge member, and a metal plate-shaped member. It is an exploded back perspective view of a game board, an outer edge member, and a metal plate-shaped member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lottery unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the lottery unit. (a) is a side view of the engaging member viewed from the rotation axis direction, (b) is a front view of the engaging member as viewed in the direction of arrow CCCXIIb in FIG. c) is a cross-sectional view of the engaging member taken along line CCCXIIc-CCCXIIc in FIG. 312(b); Fig. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the body member, engagement member and drive unit; (a) and (b) are side views of an electric accessory, an engaging member, and an electromagnetic solenoid. 312(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the lottery unit along the line corresponding to the CCCXIIc-CCCXIIc line in FIG. 312(b). (a) is a top view of the operation unit, and (b) is a side view of the operation unit viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 302. FIG. It is a rear view of a game board and an operation unit. FIG. 303 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board and the operation unit taken along line CCCXVIII-CCCXVIII of FIG. 302; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit; FIG. Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the first operating unit; Fig. 10 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit; 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the first motion unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operation unit; Fig. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the front cover; Fig. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front cover; 331(a) is a front view of an electrical board and a board fixing plate, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the electrical board and a board fixing board taken along line CCCXXXXIb-CCCXXXXIb of FIG. 331(a). 332(a) is a front view of the illumination board and the board fixing plate, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the illumination board and the board fixing board taken along the line CCCXXXIIb-CCCXXXIIb of FIG. 332(a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a front side unit and a rear side unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a front side unit and a rear side unit. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of a front unit and a rear unit of the first operation unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of a front unit and a rear unit of the first operation unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of a first displacement member; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of a first displacement member; 319(a) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operation unit taken along line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc in FIG. 319(a) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operation unit taken along line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc in FIG. 319(a) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operation unit taken along line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc in FIG. 319(a) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operation unit taken along line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc in FIG. 319(a) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operation unit taken along line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc in FIG. 319(a) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operation unit taken along line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc in FIG. It is a rear view of a front side unit. 344(a) is a cross-sectional view of the first operation unit taken along line CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa of FIG. 339(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first operation unit taken along line CCCXLVIb-CCCXLVIb of FIG. 344(a); be. (a) and (b) are front views of the first operation unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the first operating unit; (a) and (b) are front views of the first operation unit. (a) and (b) are front views of the first operation unit. (a) and (b) are front views of the first operation unit. (a) and (b) are front views of the first operation unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the pin-equipped gear and the same-phase member, (b) is a front perspective view of the pin-equipped gear and the same-phase member on the left, and the pin-equipped gear and the same-phase member on the right. It is a rear perspective view. FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of a second displacement member; FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second displacement member; (a) and (b) are rear views of the rear unit. (a) and (b) are rear views of the rear unit. It is a rear view of a rear side unit. FIG. 356(a) is a cross-sectional view of the rear unit taken along line CCCLIX-CCCLIX of FIG. 356(a); FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing the rotation angles of the pinned gear and the in-phase member with reference to the initial angle; FIG. 4 is a front exploded perspective view of a second operation unit and a rear case; FIG. 11 is a front exploded perspective view of the second operation unit; FIG. 11 is a rear exploded perspective view of the second operation unit; It is a front exploded perspective view of a production unit. It is a back exploded perspective view of a production|presentation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body of the production unit. It is an exploded back perspective view of the rotating body of the production unit. It is a rear view of a 1st rotating member. (a) is a front exploded perspective view of a support portion, and (b) is a front exploded perspective view of a second support portion. (a) is a rear exploded perspective view of a support portion, and (b) is a rear exploded perspective view of a second support portion. It is a front exploded perspective view of an upper cover part and a box-shaped part. It is a front exploded perspective view of an upper cover part and a box-shaped part. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the box-shaped portion, upper layer transmission mechanism, and lower layer transmission mechanism; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the box-shaped portion, upper layer transmission mechanism, and lower layer transmission mechanism; FIG. (a) is a top view of an upper lid, a box-shaped portion, an upper layer transmission mechanism, and a lower layer transmission mechanism, and (b) is a front view of the upper lid, the box-shaped portion, an upper layer transmission mechanism, and a lower layer transmission mechanism. (a) is a front view of the first rotating member, (b) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in (a) of FIG. 376, and (c) is the first rotating member. 376(d) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 376(c). (a) is a front view of the first rotating member, (b) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in (a) of FIG. 377, and (c) is the first rotating member. 377(d) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 377(c). (a) is a front view of the first rotating member, (b) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in (a) of FIG. 378, and (c) is the first rotating member. 378(d) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 378(c). (a) is a front view of the first rotating member, (b) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in (a) of FIG. 379, and (c) is the first rotating member. 379(d) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 379(c). (a) is a front view of the effect unit, (b) is a top view of the effect unit viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 380(a), and (c) is a front view of the effect unit, (d) is a top view of the production unit as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 380(c). (a) is a front view of the effect unit, (b) is a top view of the effect unit viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 381(a), and (c) is a front view of the effect unit, (d) is a top view of the production unit viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 381(c). It is a front view of an annular front cover and a rotating body. FIG. 21 is a top schematic view schematically showing a first rotating member in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 32 is a rear view of the front unit in the twenty-fourth embodiment; 344(a) is a cross-sectional view of the first operation unit in the twenty-fifth embodiment taken along line CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa in FIG. 339(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view along line CCCXLVIb-CCCXLVIb in FIG. 1 is a cross-sectional view of the first operating unit on the line corresponding to FIG. (a) and (b) are front views of a displacement device in a twenty-sixth embodiment. (a) and (b) are rear views of the rear unit in the twenty-seventh embodiment. It is a rear view of a rear side unit.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 44. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. Balls (game balls) flow down in front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and the upper tray 17 discharges prize balls, rental balls, and the like. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operating handle 51 and an operating device 300 are arranged to be operated by the player to hit the ball to the front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. Note that the operation device 300 will be described later.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. , 62, a general prize-winning port 63, a first prize-winning port 64, a second prize-winning port 640, a variable prize-winning device 330, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc. 1) is attached to the back side of the The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through-holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. etc. is fixed.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided in the lower left part of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left part in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is won in the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (during variable probability) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 640 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means that the game is in a state of neither variable probability nor time reduction (state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the second pattern winning probability is increased).

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, and the time is longer than during normal. set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the balls enter the second winning port 640 more than when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 640, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 during the probability change or the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640a is released more than during normal times. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit are not set. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than normal.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning (starting winning) to the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is used as a trigger, and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol is displayed. It is composed of a third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variably displays the second pattern triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. A second pattern display device (not shown) is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, upper, middle and lower three patterns are displayed. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

The second pattern display device alternately lights up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is for variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. is configured to be activated (opened) only.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal gaming state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more opportunities to open the electric accessary 640a of the second winning opening 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one hit, etc. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the ball shot to the game board 13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is suspended up to a total of four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above, and is displayed on the second symbol suspension lamp (not shown). is also displayed. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less, or 5 or more (for example, 8). Also, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be, for example, one. Also, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right and left sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be below the variable display unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When a ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first prize winning port 64 in a front view, a second prize winning port 640 through which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball enters the second winning hole 640, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the second winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big win is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first prize winning port 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when is won may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second prize winning port 640 may be set to be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize winning port 640. - 特許庁This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state), which makes it easier for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, during the variable probability and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so in the variable display of the second symbol "○ ” is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer during the variable probability and the shorter working hours than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the variable probability and the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of winning a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning port 640 than when the ball enters the first winning port 64. is set. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second prize winning port 640, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory attached to the second prize winning port 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second prize winning port 640. Then, a ball is shot so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first prize-winning port 64, many chances of a big winning lottery are obtained, and a big win is achieved. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning port 640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning port 640 is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, the ball is shot toward the second prize-winning port 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), and is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. In addition, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is bilaterally symmetrical, it is possible to aim for the first winning hole 64 by "right-handed hitting" or to aim for the second winning hole 640 by "left-handed hitting". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment provides the player with information on how to shoot balls according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is in variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to eliminate the need to change the to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the annoyance of changing the way the ball is hit.

A variable prize winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is arranged below the first prize winning port 64, and a specific prize winning port 65a is provided substantially in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to cause the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B to be lit, and the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display the stop symbol corresponding to the big win, thereby indicating the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of the specific winning openings 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged. The left side of the variable display device unit 80 is not limited to the lower left side of the prize winning opening 64, for example.

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through an out opening 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A pair of out ports 71 are arranged on the left and right sides of the specific winning port 65a.

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side of the case rail 132; ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing driving and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side as a front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205 to send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other devices 228 include drive motor 342 and voice coil motor 352 .

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 changes the third pattern, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, the operation device 300 is arranged in the center of the inner frame 12 in the left-right direction (that is, the center of the pachinko machine 10 in the left-right direction) when viewed from the front.

The operation device 300 is provided with a tilting device 310 configured to be tiltable when pushed by the player, and is positioned in a region formed by a housing recess 17a recessed in the front-rear direction along the outer frame of the upper tray 17. are placed. When the player tilts (rotates) the tilting device 310, a signal is input to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1).

Between the tilting device 310 and the housing recess 17a, a clearance is provided that is at least large enough for a finger to be comfortably inserted. As a result, the player can prepare to operate the tilting device 310 in such a manner that the fingertip is placed on the back side of the top surface of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 7).

Since the player holds the operation handle 51 with the right hand, the tilting device 310 is often operated with the left hand. Therefore, in the following description, it is assumed that the player operates the tilting device 310 with the left hand.

6(a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along line VIb-VIb of FIG. 6(a), and FIG. 7(a). 7 is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 7(b) is a partial sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7(a).

6 and 7 partially show the vicinity of the operation device 300 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 6 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state (initial state in the present embodiment) in which the operation surface 312a1 faces the vertical direction, and FIG. A state in which the operation surface 312a1 is arranged in a second state in which the operation surface 312a1 faces upward and rearward is illustrated. Note that in FIG. 7, an example of a player's hand operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

The tilting device 310 is configured to be automatically operable between the first state and the second state by the driving force of the driving device 340 . Details of the driving device 340 will be described later.

An example of operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. The operation of the tilting device 310 is performed by the player when, for example, a specific display (for example, a display of "Push button") appears on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).

Here, for example, if the tilting device 310 is pushed in by dropping the hand downward forcefully as in the case of pushing a button that advances and retreats up and down, the position of the operation surface 312a1 moves forward depending on the degree of tilting. In this mode, the operation surface 312a1 is easily rubbed against the palm of the hand. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort, and to prevent the player from performing a pressing operation by dropping the hand downward forcefully.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, by placing the fingertip near the shaft portion 314 of the tilting device 310 and lowering the palm downward using the fingertip as a fulcrum, the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312a1. The tilting device 310 can be pushed in comfortably.

Therefore, the player can be guided to perform the operation by lowering the palm downward with the fingertip as a fulcrum so as not to drop the hand vigorously downward. As a result, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the player's operation can be reduced, and the possibility of damage to the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

The difference in how the tilting device 310 looks from the player's point of view will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 as viewed in the direction of arrow VIII in FIG. 6, and FIG. 9 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 as viewed in the direction of arrow IX in FIG. 8 and 9, the shape of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated by imaginary lines. In addition, in FIG. 9, an example of a player's hand pushing the tilting device 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the operation surface 312a1 of the tilting device 310 is visible in the first state from the player's point of view, while its area is reduced to such an extent that it is invisible in the second state. (the operation surface 312a1 is directed to the outside of the player's viewpoint). As a result, the appearance of the tilting device 310 can be greatly changed between the first state and the second state.

In this embodiment, the area of the protective lens member 311i gradually increases in the process of changing from the first state to the second state. 12) is visually recognized gradually, the difference in the amount of light visible to the player between the first state and the second state (the degree of brightness and darkness) increases, and the difference between the first state and the second state increases. , the appearance of the tilting device 310 can be greatly changed.

An example of operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the outer side of the little finger is placed near the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 7) of the tilting device 310, and the palm is lowered using the outer side of the little finger as a fulcrum. Thus (by rotating around the wrist), the tilting device 310 can be comfortably pushed in and operated while the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312a1.

Therefore, the player can be guided to perform the operation by dropping the palm downward with the outer side portion of the little finger as a fulcrum so as not to force the player to drop the hand downward. As a result, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the player's operation can be reduced, and the possibility of damage to the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

Next, the operation device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. FIG. 10 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the operation device 300. FIG. As shown in FIG. 10, the operating device 300 is rotatably supported around a shaft 314 on which the tilting device 310 is arranged at the rear end.

As shown in FIG. 11, a voice coil motor 352 that imparts an impact in the straight direction to the tilting device 310 and detection sensors 324L and 324R that detect the pushing operation from the first state move the tilting device 310 downward. It is arranged outside the lower frame member 320 that surrounds it from the side.

In this way, by arranging the sensor for detecting the position of the tilting device 310 and the voice coil motor for applying the driving force outside the lower frame member 320, a large area inside the lower frame member 320 can be used for tilting. Device 310 can be housed in lower frame member 320 . Thereby, a large movable amount of the tilting device 310 can be secured.

12 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 13 is a rear exploded perspective view of the operation device 300. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 having a ring member BR1 disposed at each of the left and right ends at the back side end (the far side end of the paper surface of FIG. 12), and a tilting device 310 having a ring member BR1. A lower frame member 320 that has a lower bearing portion 323 that supports the ring member BR1 of the device 310 from below and defines the pushing end of the tilting device 310, and a lower frame member 320 that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from above. It is a member that has a recessed portion that is arranged to face the lower frame member 320 and has a large opening in the center, and is fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 320 in a manner in which the tilting member 310 is arranged between the lower frame member 320 An upper frame member 330 that determines the arrangement of the tilting device 310 in the second state, and an arm member 345 that is fastened and fixed to the lower side of the lower frame member 320 and constitutes a link mechanism with the tilting device 310 to the tilting device 310. It mainly includes a driving device 340 that transmits a driving force, and a protective cover device 350 that is fastened and fixed to the driving device 340 and protects the driving device 340 by covering the driving device 340 from three sides, ie, the left-right direction and the rear.

The lower frame member 320 is a cup-shaped member configured such that the left and right portions of the bottom surface slope downward toward the front side, and the bottom plate portion 321 slopes downward toward the front side. A horizontal portion 322 composed of a plate-shaped member horizontally arranged at the upper end on the far side of the tilting device 310, and a semicircular receiving portion opened upward near the rear end of the horizontal portion 322, which is the tilting device 310. A lower bearing portion 323 that receives the shaft portion 314 from below, a left detection sensor 324L and a right detection sensor 324R that are arranged in pairs on the lower side of the bottom plate portion 321, and a horizontal It is mainly provided with an opening 325 which is an opening formed by cutting a portion arranged on the lower side of the portion 322 .

The bottom plate portion 321 abuts on the tilting device 310 to determine the end of movement of the tilting device 310, and has a plurality of openings through which the tilting device 310 can pass through the bottom plate portion 321. be.

The bottom plate portion 321 includes a transmission hole 321a drilled in the central portion on the front side, detection holes 321b drilled along the detection grooves of the left and right detection sensors 324L and 324R, and left and right and an insertion hole 321c drilled symmetrically.

The transmission hole 321a is arranged in front of the voice coil motor 352 of the protective cover device 350, and formed with a size that allows the overhang projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 310 to pass through. By driving the voice coil motor 352 in a state in which the protruding projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 310 protrudes below the bottom plate portion 321, the tilting device 310 can be provided with a driving force in the linear motion direction.

The detection hole 321b is a through hole through which detection pieces 311gL and 311gR projecting from the lower surface of the tilting device 310 can be inserted. The posture of the tilting device 310 can be detected by arranging the detection pieces 311gL and 311gR projecting from the detection hole 321b in the detection grooves of the detection sensors 324L and 324R.

The insertion hole 321c has a size that allows the shaft portion 311c arranged on the flange of the tilting device 310 and the arm member 345 of the driving device 340 to be inserted therein, and the arm member Through-holes are formed up to a position where interference with 345 can be avoided.

The horizontal portion 322 forms a flat surface for fastening and fixing the lower frame member 320 and the driving device 340, extends upward from the upper surface thereof, and has a U-shaped cross section with an open portion on the front side. A locking portion 322a is provided.

The locking portion 322a is a portion that locks one end of the torsion spring 315 of the tilting device 310 so that it does not move backward. By locking the torsion spring 315 with the locking portion 322a, the biasing force of the torsion spring 322a acts in the direction of moving the tilting device 310 to the second state.

The detection sensors 324L and 324R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the position of the tilting device 310 . In addition, the detection sensors 324L and 324R are arranged at positions where the separation distance (the position of the detection groove) from the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 is equal on the left and right.

In addition, a photocoupler type sensor is equipped with a light projecting part that projects light and a light receiving part that receives the light from this light projecting part, and a gap (slit, detection groove) into which the part to be detected can be inserted. means a sensor arranged in a substantially U-shape.

The opening 325 is a through hole that allows the LED device 341 f of the drive device 340 , the rotary claw member 347 , and the like to enter the lower frame member 320 . Therefore, the lateral width thereof is made larger than the lateral width of the pair of rotary pawl members 347 .

On the other hand, regarding the vertical width, since the driving device 340 is configured to project the LED device 341f to the upper front side (see FIG. 17(b)), the driving device 341f is positioned after the LED device 341f passes through the opening 325. By pushing up 340, the LED device 341f can be arranged above the opening 325, and the opening 325 is wider than the vertical width from the LED device 341f to the rotary claw member 347. The vertical width can be shortened.

The upper frame member 330 is arranged to face the opening 331, which is large enough to catch the extended portion 311h extending from the lower end surface of the tilting device 310 toward the front side, and the lower receiving portion 323 of the lower frame member 320. and an upper bearing portion 332 configured in a semicircular shape with an open bottom and an upper bearing portion 332 for supporting the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 .

The protective cover device 350 is structured to be vertically divisible and covered in three directions except for the front side. A voice coil motor 352 that is supported by the bottom plate and arranged on the front side so that the vibration surface faces obliquely forward and upward, a left detection sensor 353L that is a detection sensor having a detection groove on the upper side of the bottom plate of the main body cover 351, and a right side detection sensor 353L. A detection sensor 353R is mainly provided.

Note that FIG. 12 shows a state in which the main body cover 351 is partially broken so that the right detection sensor 353R arranged on the opposite side of the left detection sensor 353L with respect to the left-right center can be visually recognized.

The voice coil motor 352 is disposed in an assembled state (see FIG. 10) such that its vibration surface is substantially parallel to the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 . As a result, the driving force can be efficiently transmitted to the tilting device 310 by driving the voice coil motor 352 when the tilting device 310 protrudes downward through the transmission hole 321a.

The detection sensors 353L and 353R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the phases of the disk cams 344L and 344R of the driving device 340 . The disk cams 344L and 344R of the drive device 340 are arranged inside the detection grooves of the detection sensors 353L and 353R. Detecting whether the detection holes 344eL and 344eR of the disk cams 344L and 344R are arranged in the detection grooves of the detection sensors 353L and 353R, and detecting that the disk cams 344L and 344R are arranged in a specific phase. can be done.

In this embodiment, since the left and right disk cams 344L and 344R of the driving device 340 are provided with the detection holes 344eL and 344eR in different phases, there are two specific phases detectable by the detection sensors 353L and 353R. be a type.

Next, the tilting device 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16. FIG. 14(a) is a front view of the tilting device 310, FIG. 14(b) is a side view of the tilting device 310 as viewed in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. 14(a), and FIG. FIG. 14(a) is a cross-sectional view of the tilting device 310 along line XIVc-XIVc of FIG. 14(a). 15 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 16 is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid 312 of the tilting device 310. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 14 to 16, the tilting device 310 includes a case body 311 which is a box-shaped body having fan-shaped side surfaces and openings in the upper and lower sides, and the upper opening of the case body 311 is covered. Lid 312 fastened and fixed to case main body 311, spherical lens member 313 fastened and fixed to the front side end of lid 312 and hanging down, and a mode sandwiched between the rear ends of case main body 311 and lid 312. , a torsion spring 315 wound around the shaft 314, and a ring-shaped ring for fixing the case body 311 and the lid 312 indivisibly at the rear end of the case body 311 and the lid 312. and a ring member BR1.

The case main body 311 includes a bottom plate portion 311a inclined downward from the back side to the front side in the first state, an opening portion 311b opened in the center of the bottom plate portion 311a, and left and right sides of the opening portion 311b. A cylindrical shaft portion 311c extending toward the center in the left-right direction from a flange projecting downward along the edge of the shaft 311c, and a concave portion 311d having a semicircular cross-section supporting the shaft portion 314 at the rear end. , an insertion groove 311e which is a groove arranged at a position where both arm portions 315a of the torsion spring 315 can be inserted, and a hook-shaped portion 311f which is formed in a hook shape and locks the central portion 315b of the torsion spring 315. , a pair of left detection pieces 311gL and a right detection piece 311gR (see FIG. 15) which are extended below the bottom plate portion 311a, and extension portions which are extended from the front end portion of the bottom plate portion 311a to the front side by a predetermined amount. a provision portion 311h, a protective lens member 311i which is arranged on the upper side of the front end portion of the bottom plate portion 311a, has a shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314, and is formed of a light-transmitting material, and a bottom plate portion. 311a mainly includes an overhang projecting portion 311j projecting downward from the central portion in the left-right direction of the front side end portion of 311a.

The bottom plate portion 311a is a portion that comes into surface contact with the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 when the tilting device 310 is pushed downward by the player.

The opening 311b is configured as an opening through which the LED device 341f of the driving device 340 and the arm member 345 of the driving device 340 can be inserted.

The shaft portion 311c is a cylindrical member inserted through the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (see FIG. 17(b)) of the drive device 340, and serves as a portion that transmits driving force to and from the drive device 340. Prepare.

The left detection piece 311gL and the right detection piece 311gR are portions inserted into the detection grooves of the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection sensor 324R (see FIG. 15) of the lower frame member 320, respectively. is longer than the right detecting piece 311gR.

In the present embodiment, the angle from the tip of the right detection piece 311gR to the tip of the left detection piece 311gL is about 3° centered on the shaft portion 314 (from the first state (see FIG. 22) to the push end (see FIG. 22). 23)), the left detection piece 311gL is projected more than the right detection piece 311gR.

The extended portion 311h projects from the lower end portion of the protective lens member 311i toward the front side, and projects to a position where it is engaged with the opening 331 of the upper frame member 330 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10). configured in a manner.

The protective lens member 311i is curved when viewed from above (see FIG. 14(a)) and curved when viewed in the horizontal direction (see FIG. 14(c)). The structure is such that the load when pushing the tilting device 310 can be easily released (easy to flow). Thereby, the durability of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

The overhang projecting portion 311j projects perpendicularly from the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 311a and has a smaller cross-sectional shape than the transmission hole 321a of the lower frame member 320. In the state (see FIG. 29), it is inserted through the transmission hole 321a and the tip projects downward from the lower frame member 320. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 16, the lid 312 includes a top plate member 312a having an operation surface 312a1, an intermediate plate member 312b fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the top plate member 312a, and the intermediate plate member 312b connected to the top plate member 312a. and a cylindrical member 312c having a cylindrical shape and having a size to surround the LED device 341f in the first state (see FIG. 6).

The cylindrical member 312c improves the strength of the lid 312 by its rigidity in the axial direction. While it is fixed inside the member 312c, in the second state (see FIG. 7), such limitation is lifted, and the light from the LED device 341f can be widely irradiated.

The lens member 313 is made of a light-transmitting material, has upper and lower ends extending forward in a flange shape, and has a shape conforming to the curved shape of the protective lens member 311i. , and a spherical shell portion 313a formed in a spherical shell shape in the central portion.

The torsion spring 315 is wound around the shaft portion 314 at a pair of left and right twisted portions, and has both arm portions 315a extending rearward from the left and right outer ends of the twisted portions, and a central portion 315b connecting the pair of twisted portions. , provided.

Next, the driving device 340 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. FIG. 17(a) is a front view of the driving device 340, FIG. 17(b) is a side view of the driving device 340 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. 17(a), and FIG. is a front exploded perspective view of the.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the drive device 340 includes a main body member 341 that forms a frame by bending a plate-shaped sheet metal member, and a drive motor that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 341 and generates a driving force. 342, a transmission shaft rod 343 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 342, and a pair of disc cams 344 (left disc cam 344L, right disc cam 344L, right disc cam 344R), an arm member 345 pivotally supported by the connecting pin 344d of the disc cam 344, and an arm member 345 pivotally supported by the shaft portion 341c of the main body member 341, and the first projecting portion 344c1 and the second A release member 346 that abuts on the projecting portion 344c3 in the rotational direction, a rotary pawl member 347 that is coaxially and pivotally supported with the release member 346 and moves relative to the release member 346 as the release member 346 rotates, and the rotary pawl member 347 is tilted downward. A first spring SP1, which is a coil spring-like spring member that generates an urging force in the direction of releasing, and a torsion spring-like spring member that generates an urging force in the direction of separating the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 from each other. and a second spring SP2, which is a spring member.

The main body member 341 is formed at the same position of the motor accommodating portion 341a which is bent rearward on the left and right sides to form a U-shape when viewed from the top, and the plate portion of the motor accommodating portion 341a which is arranged to face the motor accommodating portion 341a. A shaft support hole 341b that supports the cam 344, and a shaft portion 341c that protrudes in the left-right direction at a position shifted to the front side from the shaft support hole 341b in a manner having an axis parallel to the axis of the shaft support hole 341b. , an extension portion 341d extending from the motor housing portion 341a below the shaft portion 341c, a lighting support portion 341e extending forward and upward from the motor housing portion 341a, and the lighting support portion 341e and an LED device 341f disposed at the upper end and having an LED light source disposed therein.

The LED device 341f has a triangular-shaped member on its upper surface, and has a light-refracting portion (a light-refracting portion). This makes it possible to evenly irradiate the light from the LED device 341f upward and forward.

The drive motor 342 includes a fixing member 342a that is fastened and fixed to the motor accommodating portion 341a inside the U-shaped portion of the motor accommodating portion 341a.

The fixed member 342a supports the rotary gear of the drive motor 342 and supports the transmission shaft 343 in such a manner that the transmission gear 343b meshes with the rotary gear.

One end of the arm member 345 has a perfectly circular shaft support hole 345a that is supported by the connecting pin 344d of the disc cam 344, and the other end of the arm member 345 has a rectangular shaft support hole 345a. and a guide hole 345b through which the shaft portion 311c (see FIG. 15) of the tilting device 310 is inserted.

The guide hole 345b is formed at a position where the opposite end of the shaft support hole 345a abuts against the shaft portion 311c in the first state of the tilting device 310, and the opposite end of the guide hole 345b is formed so that the disk cam 344 rotates more than once. It is formed in a position sufficient to allow rotation.

The transmission shaft rod 343 will be described with reference to FIG. 19 is a front exploded perspective view of the transmission shaft rod 343. FIG. The transmission shaft rod 343 has a cylindrical member 343a to which disc cams 344 (see FIG. 18) are fixed at both ends, and a transmission gear 343b which is pivotally supported by the cylindrical member 343a and meshes with the rotating gear of the drive motor 342. a movable clutch 343c capable of switching whether or not to transmit a driving force between the transmission gear 343b and the cylindrical member 343a by moving in the axial direction; a coil spring 343d that presses the movable clutch 343c against the transmission gear 343b; Mainly provide

The cylindrical member 343a has fixing portions 343a1 and 343a2 each having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disc cam 344 at both ends thereof, and the right fixing portion 343a2 is formed longer toward the center than the left fixing portion 343a1. be. Here, specifically, the fixed portion 343a2 is formed with a length that allows it to move to a position where it does not interfere with the transmission gear 343b when the movable clutch 343c moves against the biasing force of the coil spring 343d.

The transmission gear 343b has a perfect circular insertion hole 343b1 through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted, and a clutch in which unevenness along the axial direction is formed at the circumferential position of the shaft center from the surface facing the movable clutch 343c. and a portion 343b2.

Since the insertion hole 343b1 is perfectly circular, even when the cylindrical member 343a is fixed, the transmission gear 343b can rotate (idle) with respect to the cylindrical member 343a.

The movable clutch 343c has an angle fixing hole 343c1 having a D-shaped cross section through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted, and unevenness along the axial direction is formed at the circumferential position of the shaft center from the surface facing the transmission gear 343b. and a clutch portion 343c2 configured to be engaged with the clutch portion 343b2.

In the present embodiment, the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 are composed of mountain-shaped protrusions and recesses having a top angle of approximately 100°.

Since the angle fixing hole 343c1 has a D-shaped cross section, relative rotation of the movable clutch 343c with respect to the cylindrical member 343a is disabled, so that the clutch portion 343b2 of the transmission gear 343b and the clutch portion 343c2 of the movable clutch 343c are engaged. As a result, the driving force transmitted from the drive motor 342 to the transmission gear 343b is transmitted to the cylindrical member 343a via the movable clutch 343c. Accordingly, by rotating the drive motor 342, it becomes possible to rotate the disc cam 344 (see FIG. 18).

The movable clutch 343c is normally arranged at a position close to the transmission gear 343b by the biasing force of the coil spring 343d, and the engagement relationship between the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 is maintained. On the other hand, when an axial load is applied to the movable clutch 343c, it is configured to be movable along the fixed portion 343a2 so as to separate from the transmission gear 343b.

Disc cam 344 will be described with reference to FIG. As for the disk cam 344, the left disk cam 344L and the right disk cam 344R are substantially mirror images of each other, and the only difference is the positions of the detection holes 344eL and 344eR. description of the right disk cam 344R is omitted.

20(a) is a side view of the left disc cam 344L as viewed in the direction of arrow XXa in FIG. 18, and FIG. 20(b) is a side view of the left disc cam 344L as viewed in the direction of arrow XXb in FIG. be. 20(a) and 20(b) illustrate a state in which the driving device 340 is in the first initial state as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 20(a) and 20(b), the left disc cam 344L is a member having portions protruding from both sides of a perfectly circular disc, and is positioned at the center of the disc. A central shaft portion 344a protruding inwardly in a cylindrical shape, a circular rib 344b protruding inwardly as a ring-shaped rib centering on the central shaft portion 344a, and an outer side of the circular rib 344b. An engaging rib 344c projecting inward as a rib lower in height than the circular rib 344b and having two radially outward projecting portions, and an outer rib between the circular rib 344b and the engaging rib 344c. It mainly includes a connecting pin 344d projecting in a cylindrical shape in the direction and connected to the arm member 345 (see FIG. 18), and a detection hole 344eL drilled near the outer periphery.

The right disk cam 344R is different only in that the detection hole 344eR is arranged at a position forming an angle of 60° with the detection hole 344eL, and otherwise has a shape that mirrors the shape of the left disk cam 344L. .

The center shaft portion 344a has a D-shaped cross-section whose inner periphery is engaged with both ends of the cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 19), and whose outer periphery is fitted into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 18). Configured. That is, the disk cam 344 is rotatably supported in the shaft support hole 341b.

The circular rib 344b protrudes to a position where it can come into contact with the left and right wall surfaces of the motor housing portion 341a (see FIG. 18) when the disc cam 344 is supported by the shaft support hole 341b. As a result, misalignment of the disc cam 344 can be suppressed.

In the first initial state, the engaging rib 344c projects radially outward at a position shifted by 80° in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 20A) from the position where the detection hole 344eL is arranged. a protruding portion 344c1; At a position deviated by an angle θ2 (angle θ2=150° in this embodiment), the second projecting portion 344c3 projects radially outward again, and the second projecting portion 344c3 extends at an angle θ3 (angle θ3=20°), and a second lead-in portion 344c4 that retracts radially inward at a shifted position.

In the first initial state of the driving device 340, the connecting pin 344d is arranged at the position with the longest separation distance from the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state (see FIG. 22). That is, the connecting pin 344d is disposed on the opposite side of the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state with respect to the central shaft portion 344a.

The releasing member 346 and the rotary pawl member 347 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the releasing member 346 and the rotary pawl member 347 are arranged as a pair on the left and right, and the configurations thereof are the same on the left and right, so only one will be described.

21(a) and 21(b) are front views of the releasing member 346 and the rotating claw member 347. FIG. 21(a) shows a large angle state in which the rotary pawl member 347 is rotated with respect to the release member 346 to the terminal position in the biasing direction of the second spring SP2, and FIG. 21(b) shows the release member 346 A small angle state in which the rotary pawl member 347 is rotated to the terminal position against the biasing force of the second spring SP2 is illustrated.

The state in which the releasing member 346 is rotated by being brought into contact with the disk cam 344 is the state between the large angle state and the small angle state (when the projecting pin 346b is arranged at the intermediate position of the guide slot 347b). state) (see FIG. 35).

As shown in FIGS. 21(a) and 21(b), the release member 346 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member, and includes a shaft support hole 346a supported by a shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18), A protruding pin 346b projecting in the plate thickness direction in an arc shape centering on the central axis of the shaft support hole 346a, an insertion hole 346c through which the end of the second spring SP2 is inserted, and from the shaft support hole 346a and an engaging portion 346d configured as a portion projecting with the maximum diameter.

The engaging portion 346d is configured to be able to contact the engaging rib 344c (see FIG. 20) of the disk cam 344 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10). In the present embodiment, the outer periphery of the engaging portion 346d is curved, so that the contact with the engaging rib 344 can be performed smoothly.

The rotary pawl member 347 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member, and has a shaft support hole 347a that is supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18) and an arc shape centered on the central axis of the shaft support hole 347a. An elongated guide hole 347b is drilled along the guide pin 346b of the release member 346 (drilled with a size that includes the movement locus of the pin 346b), and the end of the second spring SP2. a hook-shaped portion 347d protruding downward at the end opposite to the shaft support hole 347a; and the end of the first spring (see FIG. 18). Mainly includes a pull-down hole 347e drilled in the.

In this embodiment, in the large angle state shown in FIG. 21(a), the release member 346 is arranged at the end position of the rotation claw member 347 in the backward rolling direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 21(a)). Therefore, in the large angle state, when a load is applied to the engaging portion 346d in the downward direction, the releasing member 346 and the rotary pawl member 347 rotate together in the backward rotation direction. When a load in the upward direction is applied to 346d, only the releasing member 346 can be rotated to maintain the attitude of the rotating claw member 347 until reaching the small angle state shown in FIG. 21(b).

Next, an operation example of the operation device will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 22 to 24, an operation example when the player performs the pushing operation when the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state will be described. In addition, in the following description of the operation example, the illustration of the lid 312 is simplified for easy understanding.

22 to 24 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). 22 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, FIG. 23 shows a state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 from the state shown in FIG. 22 to the terminal position, and FIG. 23 shows the state after the tilting device 310 has returned from the state of FIG. 23 to the first state. Also, FIGS. 22 to 24 show an example of a player's hand repeatedly operating the tilting device 310 .

As shown in FIG. 22, the tilting device 310 is subjected to an urging force in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) by the torsion spring 315, and the bottom plate portion 311a is hooked on the hook portion 347d of the rotating claw member 347. As shown in FIG. As a result, the posture of the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state. That is, in the first state, the tilting device 310 is always biased in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 22).

In the state shown in FIG. 22, the left detection piece 311gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left detection sensor 324L (ON state), while the right detection piece 311gR is arranged in front of the detection groove of the right detection sensor 324R. (OFF state, see FIG. 11).

As shown in FIG. 23, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 rotates forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 23) by about 3 degrees. In this state, the left detection piece 311gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left detection sensor 324L (ON state), and similarly, the right detection piece 311gR is inserted into the detection groove of the right detection sensor 324R (ON state).

Therefore, by determining a change in the detection states of the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection sensor 324R, it can be determined that the tilting device 310 has been pushed by the player from the first state.

Here, when the tilting device 310 is hit repeatedly, the state shown in FIG. 22 and the state shown in FIG. 23 are alternately repeated. is not returned in time, and the pushing operation is performed at an incomplete position, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

Conventionally, this can be dealt with by increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315 , but in this embodiment, when the spring constant of the torsion spring 315 is increased, the tilting device 310 moves against the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 . It is necessary to increase the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) for pushing down, and it is necessary to increase the size of the drive motor 342 . As a result, there are problems such as an increase in product cost and an inability to save space.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a voice coil motor 352 capable of effecting by vibrating motion is arranged at a position facing the overhang projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is pushed. be.

As shown in FIG. 24, by driving the voice coil motor 352 in the extension direction from the state shown in FIG. 23, the tilting device 310 can be quickly restored without increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315. can.

Here, when the voice coil motor 352 is always driven when the tilting device 310 is pushed, for example, when the player presses the tilting device 310 for a long time, the voice coil motor 352 is driven and the player cannot Since unnecessary load is applied, the player may feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state, the number of times the right side detection sensor 324R switches between the ON state and the OFF state in a predetermined period is calculated, and if the number of times is equal to or greater than the threshold value, the voice coil is turned on. By driving the motor 352, the load for returning the tilting device 310 can be improved only when the player performs a repeated hitting operation. This allows the player to comfortably operate the tilting device 310 .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 30, a case (first operation mode) in which the tilting device 310 starts to reciprocate vertically from the first state (tilting operation) will be described. 25 to 30 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a).

25 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and in FIG. 26, the disk cam 344 rotates forward by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. FIG. 27 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 rotates forward by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 29 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is pushed back and forth from the state shown in FIG. 28 to the terminal position, and FIG. The plate cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount to reach the second initial state in which the second projecting portion 344c3 of the engaging rib 344c contacts the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346. is illustrated. 28, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 27 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and FIG.

As shown in FIG. 25, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the upper end portion (prism portion) of the LED device 341f is accommodated inside the cylindrical member 312c of the lid 312. As shown in FIG. Therefore, while the amount of light irradiated in the radial direction of the cylindrical member 312c is suppressed by the thickness of the cylindrical member 312c, it is possible to ensure a large amount of light irradiated in the axial direction. Thereby, the cylindrical member 312c serves as a rib of the lid 312 to improve the strength, and in the first state of the tilting device 310, the light irradiation intensity of the LED device 341f can be adjusted.

As shown in FIG. 26, the disk cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in direction), the first projecting portion 344c1 of the disk cam 344 pushes down the engaging portion 346d of the releasing member 346, thereby rotating the releasing member 346 in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 26). Accordingly, the rotary pawl member 347 rotates in the backward rotation direction until it is disengaged from the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 .

The posture change of the releasing member 346 is continued until the disk cam 344 is rotated until the first retracted portion 344c2 of the engaging rib 344c and the engaging portion 346d face each other. It rises by the biasing force of the spring 315 (rotates clockwise in FIG. 26).

25 and 26, the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 is arranged at one end position of the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (the end position on the far side from the rotation shaft of the disc cam 344). Since the upward movement of the tilting device 310 is restricted by the arm member 345 , the upward movement of the tilting device 310 corresponds to the rotation angle of the disc cam 344 .

As shown in FIG. 27, when the disk cam 344 rotates forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 27) and the first retraction portion 344c2 of the disk cam 344 passes through the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346, By the biasing force of the first spring SP1, the releasing member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 rotate in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 27), and the rotating claw member 347 can be engaged with the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 27). 25). At this time, the biasing force of the second spring SP2 acts in the direction of increasing the angle between the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 (upper angle in FIG. 27). 347 rotates while maintaining the state shown in FIG. 26 (large angle state).

In this state, the lid 312 is retracted above the LED device 341f, and the area where the protective lens member 311i can be visually recognized from the player's viewpoint increases compared to the tilting device 310 in the first state. , the light from the LED device 341f can also be emitted in the front direction (the direction toward the player). Therefore, by changing the posture of the tilting device 310, the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED device 341f can be changed, and the lighting effect can be improved.

In this state, the right detection sensor 353R of the protective cover device 350 is turned ON, and the starting point of the vertical reciprocating motion can be detected.

As shown in FIG. 28, from the state shown in FIG. 27, the disc cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 28), and then the disc cam 344 is rotated by the same amount in the backward direction ( 28), the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly moved up and down within the range of the angle D1 shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to change how the tilting device 310 looks to the player, and to increase the player's attention to the operation device 300 .

In addition, the area of the portion of the protective lens member 313 projecting upward from the upper frame member 331 changes in accordance with the repeated vertical motion of the tilting device 310 within the range of the angle D1. Therefore, of the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light visible through the protective lens member 313 can be changed according to the operation of the tilting device 310. FIG. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 28, since the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313 is arranged on the front side of the LED device 341f (on the left side in FIG. 28), the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f is set in the front-rear direction. , and not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 28).

According to this embodiment, as described above, when the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state, the light from the LED device 341f travels upward, and the irradiation range is narrowed by the cylindrical member 312c. (See FIG. 25). On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 moves upward from the first state, the light from the LED device 341f is also emitted in the direction toward the player (frontal direction), and the irradiation range is widened by the lens member 313 .

That is, according to this embodiment, it is possible not only to change the irradiation direction of the light but also to change the irradiation range of the light at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 changes. As a result, the tilting device 310 attracts more attention.

As shown in FIG. 29, the player can push the tilting device 310 while the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. In the state of FIG. 28, the load applied from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction of lowering the tilting device 310 (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft portion 311c only moves the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and no load is generated).

Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 28, it is possible to prevent the player from being subjected to the driving force of the driving motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, only the load due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is given to the player. As a result, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a large load on the player, so that the player can operate the operation device 300 comfortably.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the process from the state shown in FIG. When the member 347 rotates backward (clockwise direction in FIG. 29) and the tilting device 310 is subsequently pushed in, the bottom plate portion 311a passes through the hook-shaped portion 347d. Return to engageable position (rotate forward). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving upward by the rotating claw member 347 .

Therefore, the tilting device 310 can be maintained in the first state when the player releases the tilting device 310 after the tilting device 310 is moved up and down as shown in FIG. .

In the state shown in FIG. 29, the voice coil motor 352 vibrates (repeatedly moves in the extension direction and in the contraction direction). As a result, after the tilting device 310 is pushed to the end of the pushing operation, an effect of transmitting vibration to the player who keeps putting his hand on the tilting device 310 can be performed.

That is, the purpose of the voice coil motor 352 is to generate a driving force for assisting the upward movement of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 24), and the purpose of vibrating the tilting device 310 arranged at the pushing end position to perform a vibration effect. can be used for

As shown in FIG. 30, when the player releases the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 returns to the first state, the protruding projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 310 moves from the lower frame member 320. It is buried in the lower surface and the contact with the voice coil motor 352 is released. Therefore, the vibration effect is effective only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the push end.

Therefore, compared to a game machine in which the operation button simply vibrates, the player who pushed the tilting device 310 can check whether or not the voice coil motor 352 vibrates at the end of the pushing operation when the tilting device 310 is pushed. can be comprehended only by

Here, whether or not the lottery is a big win does not depend on the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 . Therefore, some players may not operate the tilting device 310 at all.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the player can feel the vibration of the voice coil motor 352 only when the tilting device 310 is pressed.

Here, for example, by controlling the voice coil motor 352 to perform a vibration effect when a big win is confirmed, it is possible to improve the sense of anticipation when the player pushes the tilting device 310, and the tilting device 310 value as a look-ahead means of As a result, the tilting device 310 can be easily operated by the player, and the value of the tilting device 310 as operating means can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 30, from the state shown in FIG. 29, the disc cam 344 is rotated forward (reversed in FIG. The driving device 340 can be brought into the second initial state by rotating it clockwise) by a predetermined amount.

The second initial state is a state in which the engagement rib 344c and the release member 346 are in contact with each other in the rotational direction, as in the first initial state. In the first initial state, the first projecting portion 344c1 contacts the engaging rib 344c, while in the second initial state, the second projecting portion 344c3 contacts the engaging rib 344c.

29, the disk cam 344 is rotated backward (clockwise direction in FIG. 29) so that the first projecting portion 344c1 of the engaging rib 344c passes through the engaging portion 346d, and then reversely rotates. 29 can be returned to the first initial state shown in FIG. In this case, a load is applied to the release member 346 in a direction to push up the release member 346, and only the release member 346 can be rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 29) while the posture of the rotary claw member 347 is maintained. can.

Next, referring to FIGS. 31 to 34, when the tilting device 310 is moved up and down (tilting motion) from the state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the driving device 340 is in the second initial state ( Second operation mode) will be described. In this case, the tilting device 310 starts an operation (tilting operation) to reciprocate up and down after passing through the second state.

31 to 34 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). In FIG. 31, the disk cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 30, and the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 are rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. FIG. 32 shows a state where the disk cam 344 has rotated a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 31 and the tilting device 310 has reached the second state, and FIG. 33 shows the state shown in FIG. 34 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 reciprocates from the position shown in FIG. Also, in FIG. 33, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 32 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 31, when the disk cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. Device 310 operates in the upward direction.

At this time, since the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 extends (has a space) in the direction in which the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 moves, the tilting device 310 moves toward the disk cam 344 via the arm member 345. The tilting device 310 can be lifted with low resistance without being pulled by the tilting device 310, and the state of the tilting device 310 can be changed from the first state to the second state in a short time.

As shown in FIG. 32, by rotating the disk cam 344 by about 10 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 310 can be placed in the second state (posture in which the disc cam 344 is rotated 180 degrees from the first initial state). Therefore, when the tilting device 310 rises at a high speed and the tilting device 310 attempts to reach the second state from the state of FIG. It is possible to prevent the situation that the tilting device 310 takes a long time to reach the second state because the cam 344 is slow to rotate by a predetermined angle.

As shown in FIG. 33, from the state shown in FIG. 32, the disc cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 32), and then the disc cam 344 is rotated by the same amount in the backward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 32). 32), the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly moved up and down within the range of the angle D2 shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to change how the tilting device 310 looks to the player, and to increase the player's attention to the operation device 300 .

In addition, the area of the portion of the protective lens member 313 projecting upward from the upper frame member 331 changes in accordance with the repeated vertical motion of the tilting device 310 within the range of the angle D2. Therefore, of the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light visible through the protective lens member 313 can be changed according to the operation of the tilting device 310. FIG. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 33, the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313 is arranged on the front side of the LED device 341f (on the left side in FIG. 33), so that the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f is oriented forward and backward. , and not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 33).

That is, according to this embodiment, it is possible not only to change the irradiation direction of the light but also to change the irradiation range of the light at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 changes. As a result, the tilting device 310 attracts more attention.

The range of angle D2 shown in FIG. 33 is different from the range of angle D1 shown in FIG. That is, in the present embodiment, two types of vertical motion (tilting motion), namely, the vertical motion shown in FIG. 28 and the vertical motion shown in FIG. This can be done immediately after releasing the restriction on the upward movement of the device 310 . Therefore, it is possible to create two modes in which the tilting device 310 in the first state is operated by the driving force of the drive motor 342 .

As a result, compared with the case where the operation member 310 performs the same operation each time, the operation mode can have a different meaning (for example, a difference in the expectation of a big win), and the player's attention to the tilting device 310. degree can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 33, the player can push the tilting device 310 while the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. In the state of FIG. 33, the load applied from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction of pulling the tilting device 310 downward (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft portion 311c only moves through the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and there is no load to lift the shaft portion 311c from the arm member 345).

Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 33, it is possible to prevent the player from being subjected to the driving force of the driving motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, only the load due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is given to the player. As a result, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a large load on the player, so that the player can operate the operation device 300 comfortably.

As shown in FIG. 34, in the process of pushing the tilting device 310, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotating claw member 347, causing the rotating claw member 347 to rotate backward. When the bottom plate portion 311a passes through the hook-shaped portion 347d by rotating in the direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 34) and subsequently pushing the tilting device 310. As shown in FIG. The rotating pawl member 347 returns to a position where it can be engaged with the tilting device 310 (rotates in the forward rolling direction). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving upward by the rotating claw member 347 .

Therefore, after the player pushes down the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 34) from the state in which the tilting device 310 is moved up and down shown in FIG. can be maintained.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37, the operation of setting the disc cam 344 to the second initial state without releasing the regulation of the tilting device 310 by the rotary pawl member 347 after the pushing operation by the player will be described. do. By this method, it is possible to alternately perform two kinds of vertical motions (tilting motions) of the tilting device 310, or to perform one of them continuously.

35 to 37 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). 35 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 is rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 35) and the release member 346 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 35) from the state shown in FIG. 36, after rotating cam 344 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) beyond the state shown in FIG. 37, the disk cam 344 rotates forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG. A state in which the sensor 353L is in the ON state is illustrated. 35 to 37, an example of a player's hand swinging from above on the tilting device 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 35, when the disk cam 344 is rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 34) from the state shown in FIG. 346d. In this case, the engagement rib 344c pushes up the release member 346 to change the posture of the release member 346. It stops, and the rotary pawl member 347 is maintained in the posture shown in FIG.

35, the disk cam 344 is further rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 35) to release the engagement between the engaging rib 344c and the releasing member 346. Regulation of the upward movement of the tilting device 310 can be maintained.

35, the disc cam 344 is further rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 35), and then the rotating cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 35), thereby , the drive device 340 can be in a second initial state.

In this embodiment, since there is no sensor for detecting the second initial state, it is difficult to accurately stop the disk cam 344 in the state shown in FIG. It is possible. Therefore, by operating the disc cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. 36, it is possible to perform the vertical motion (tilting motion) from the second initial state within the range of the angle D2, as described above.

Here, the player who pushes the tilting device 310 can perform an action of keeping his hand on the tilting device 310 after the pushing operation, even if there is no special display such as "long press". be.

This is, for example, an action that occurs when the user forgets to release the hand that pushed the tilting device 310 too much to concentrate on the performance. Therefore, even if the disk cam 344 performs a reciprocating motion (forward/reverse switching motion) for moving the tilting device 310 up and down (tilting motion) within the range of the angle D2, the posture of the tilting device 310 cannot be changed. Can not. In this case, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is wasted, and if the rotation can be omitted, the life of the drive motor 342 can be extended.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG. While the state is maintained (while the tilting device 310 tilts to the first state or lower), the disc cam 344 is not rotated in the reverse direction, and the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover device 350, as shown in FIG. (See FIG. 14) is controlled to stop the rotation of the disc cam 344 (stop the drive of the drive motor 342) in the first initial state of the drive device 340 in which the drive device 340 is turned ON (see FIG. 14).

In the state shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the player's hand is placed on the upper side of the tilting device 310, so that the tilting device 310 does not move upward. A change occurs by rotating the drive motor 342 in one direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, the player's hand continues to be placed on the upper side of the tilting device 310, and the driving motor 342 is reciprocated (normal/reverse switching) until the tilting device 310 cannot be moved up and down. operation) can be avoided, the load on the drive motor 342 can be reduced, and the motor life can be extended.

It should be noted that when the disc cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount (to the state shown in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. Instead of rotating the plate cam 344, it may be controlled to immediately reversely rotate and return to the state shown in FIG. As a result, the driving device 340 can be quickly returned to the second initial state, and no unnecessary load is applied to the driving device 340, so that the motor life of the driving motor 342 (see FIG. 18) can be extended.

A device for preventing breakage of the driving device 340 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39. FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a), and FIG. 39 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along line XXXIX-XXXIX of FIG. 38, the player's hand holding and fixing the tilting device 310 in the second state is shown in phantom lines, and FIG. 39 shows the upper member of the body cover 351. Omitted.

As shown in FIG. 38, when the player grabs and fixes the tilting device 310, the movement of the arm member 345 is restricted, so the disc cam 344 cannot be rotated from the state shown in FIG. Therefore, when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) starts rotating, a high load is generated between the drive motor 342 and the transmission gear 343b. be.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the transmission gear 343b is configured to be idly rotatable with respect to the transmission shaft 343a that fixes the disk cam 344, so that the drive motor 342 can be prevented from malfunctioning.

That is, as shown in FIG. 39, the drive motor 342 starts to drive with the disk cam 344 fixed, and the transmission gear 343b is urged in the rotational direction, so that the transmission gear 343b is driven through the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2. Power is transmitted, and the movable clutch 343c moves away from the transmission gear 343b. As a result, the transmission gear 343b is disengaged from the movable clutch 343c, and the transmission gear 343b can be idled. As a result, it is possible to prevent the drive motor 342 from breaking down.

Note that when the player does not hold the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 goes through the first state by rotating the disk cam 344 once due to the structure of the operation device 300. FIG. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the left side detection sensor 324L of the lower frame member 320 does not turn ON while the driving motor 342 is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 360°) (when the tilting device 310 does not turn to the first state). In addition, it is determined that the player is intentionally performing an unnecessary operation of gripping and fixing the tilting device 310, and is notified by, for example, displaying on the third symbol display device 81 to stop the gripping operation. While doing so, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is stopped.

As a result, it is possible to select a case where the player intentionally performs an erroneous operation, and only at that time, it is possible to notify to stop the erroneous operation, and to stop the driving motor 342 early to prevent failure. be able to.

When the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c are separated from each other and a phase shift occurs, the initial phase of the drive motor and the initial phase of the disk cam 344, which is in phase with the movable clutch 343c, are shifted. Therefore, if the drive motor 342 is controlled continuously (with the number of steps, etc.) from the state before the phase shift occurs, the disc cam 344 cannot be operated accurately (the phase shift cannot be corrected).

In contrast, in the present embodiment, it is possible to specify that the driving device 340 has entered the first initial state by detecting that the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover member 350 has been turned ON. , by resuming the control of the drive motor 352 (resetting the initial phase of the drive motor 342) with that state as the initial position, even after the phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, Control can be performed in a state in which the phase of the drive motor 342 and the phase of the disk cam 344 are matched again.

As a result, when performing an effect by operating the tilting device 310, there is a discrepancy between the motion to be performed by the tilting device 310 by controlling the rotation of the drive motor 342 and the motion actually performed by the tilting device 310. prevented from occurring. Therefore, even after a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, the tilting device 310 can be properly operated to perform an effect.

Here, as shown in FIG. 39, the movable clutch 343c has a shape that idles with respect to the transmission gear 343b regardless of the rotation direction of the transmission gear 343b. The necessity will be explained below.

40, 41, 42 and 43 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a). 40 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 rotates 180 degrees in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 38, and FIG. 344 is shown rotated in the direction of arrow CCW. 42 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 has rotated 180 degrees in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 38, and FIG. 344 is shown rotated in the direction of arrow CW.

As shown in FIG. 41, when disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of arrow CCW, tilting device 310 moves through the first state shown in FIG. 40 to the second state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 43, when disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of arrow CW, tilting device 310 is configured to maintain the first state shown in FIG.

This is not only because the engagement rib 344c moves away from the release member 346 as it moves from the state shown in FIG. 42 to the state shown in FIG. In this case, even if the engaging rib 344c comes into contact with the releasing member 346, the fixation by the rotary pawl member 347 is not released. That is, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the engagement rib 344c contacts the release member 346 from below. A load in the direction of pushing up the member 347 is not generated. Therefore, the fixation by the rotating claw member 347 is never released.

Here, when the operation of the tilting device 310 is viewed from the player's point of view, the operations from FIG. 38 to the first state shown in FIGS. is a different operation from either FIG. 41 or FIG.

For example, the difference in the operation after the tilting device 310 reaches the first state may be generated by controlling the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39), but the drive noise caused by the change in the rotation speed of the drive motor 342 may be generated. Due to the difference in change, the player will notice the mode of the control being performed, and the player will grasp the effect that will be executed from now on, which may diminish the player's interest. Further, when the operation of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310 is performed by suddenly stopping the driving motor 342, the load on the driving motor 342 increases, and the durability of the driving motor 342 may decrease.

On the other hand, according to this embodiment, when the tilting device 310 moves from the state shown in FIG. Since only the direction is different, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the direction of rotation due to the drive mode (vibration, sound, etc.). For this reason, for example, when the degree of expectation for the presentation changes depending on whether the tilting device 310 is raised from the first state or is maintained in the first state, the tilting device 310 is moving toward the first state. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the change in the degree of expectation. Thereby, attention to the operation of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 reaches the first state and the driving motor 342 rotates, the player can confirm whether the tilting device 310 is raised or maintained in the first state. Since it is possible to grasp the change in the degree of expectation, it is possible for the player to understand the movement of the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 38) and is moved toward the first state by the drive motor 342. can be directed to watch over

That is, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state, it is possible to suppress the tilting device 310 from being held by the player. It is possible to prevent the device 340 from being overloaded.

In addition, since it is not necessary to suddenly stop the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) in order to perform the effect of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310, the load given to the drive motor 342 when the drive motor 342 is suddenly stopped is eliminated. The durability of the drive motor 342 can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 44, regarding the case where the tilting device 310 moves up and down without being restricted by the rotating claw member 347 even when the player pushes down the tilting device 310 (third operation mode). explain.

FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a). 44 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 is rotated forward by a predetermined amount (counterclockwise in FIG. 44) from the first initial state (see FIG. 25) of the drive device 340, and the first The outer shape of the tilting device 310 after the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 44) at an angle at which the protruding portion 344c1 does not pass through the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346 is illustrated by imaginary lines. .

As shown in FIG. 44, when the release member 346 is pushed down by the first projecting portion 344c1 of the disk cam 344, the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 are engaged with the releasing member 346. By reciprocatingly rotating the disc cam 344 while maintaining a positional relationship that does not pass through 346d, it is possible to reciprocate the tilting device 310 up and down while maintaining the posture of the release member 346. FIG.

In this case, the attitude of the rotating claw member 347 is maintained in a state of being rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 44) as the attitude of the release member 346 changes, so that the tilting device 310 can be operated in the manner shown in FIG. In the vertical movement, even if the player pushes the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 does not engage with the rotating claw member 347, and when the player releases the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 moves to the first state (rotation). It is possible to implement an operation mode in which the tilting device 310 is moved upward from the position where the tilting device 310 is restricted from rising when the claw member 347 engages with the tilting device 310 and the vertical motion is continued.

Therefore, for example, as the operation mode of the tilting device 310, the above-described first operation mode, the second operation mode, and the third operation mode shown in FIG. Manipulation of the device 300 can have non-traditional meanings. That is, according to the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first motion mode or the second motion mode only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 and then releases the tilting device 310. It is possible to know whether the robot was moving up and down in the third motion mode.

As a difference in production, when the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first action mode and the second action mode (when the tilting device 310 is pushed in and then released, the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state). case) is compared to the case where the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the third operation mode (the case where the tilting device 310 continues to move up and down even if the tilting device 310 is pushed in and then released). If a difference is provided in that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, the player recognizes the degree of expectation as to whether or not a big win will occur not only when the tilting device 310 is pushed in, but also when the player releases the tilting device 310. Since it is possible to obtain opportunities, it is possible to provide many timings at which the player pays attention to the operation device 300 . Thereby, the degree of attention of the operation device 300 can be improved.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 49. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the state of the rotating claw member 347 is maintained when the releasing member 346 is pushed up has been described. In addition, when the release member 2346 is pushed up, the slide claw member 2348 slides. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. First, differences from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG.

45(a) is a side view of the slide claw member 2348 in the second embodiment, FIG. 45(b) is a side view of the rotary plate member 2347, and FIG. 45(c) is a side view of the release member 2346. It is a side view.

46(a) and 46(b) are side views of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348, showing interlocking between the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348. FIG. .

FIG. 46(a) shows a large angle state in which the rotary plate member 2347 is rotated with respect to the release member 2346 to the terminal position in the biasing direction of the second spring SP2, and FIG. A small angle state in which the rotary plate member 2347 is rotated to the end position against the biasing force of the second spring SP2 is shown. The state in which the releasing member 2346 is rotated by being brought into contact with the disk cam 344 is the state between the large angle state and the small angle state (when the protruding pin 346b is arranged at the intermediate position of the long guide hole 347b). state) (see FIG. 48).

As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the driving device 2340 (see FIG. 47) includes a releasing member 2346, a rotating plate member 2347, and a rotating plate member 2347 as functional members pivotally supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 47). and a slide claw member 2348 disposed on the opposite side of the release member 2346 with the plate member 2347 interposed therebetween and configured to be slidable along an arc track centered on the rotation axis of the tilting device 2310 (see FIG. 47). , is mainly provided. In the releasing member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348, the same reference numerals are given to the structures having the same functions as in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 45(a), the slide claw member 2348 includes a curved portion 2348a formed in a curved shape so as to be slidably fitted in the rail portion 2347f, and an upper end portion of the curved portion 2348a. A hook-shaped portion 2348b that protrudes in a hook-like shape (to the left in FIG. 45), and the curved portion 2348a and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are stacked in the thickness direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 47(a)). Mainly, a reinforcing portion 2348c formed in a curved plate shape wider than the curved portion 2348a and a projecting pin 2348d projecting cylindrically toward the releasing member 2346 at the lower end of the reinforcing portion 2348c. Prepare.

The width of the curved portion 2348a is set to be slightly shorter than the separation width of the rail portions 2347f. Therefore, the curved portion 2348a of the slide claw member 2348 is slidably movable with respect to the rotating plate member 2347 in a state in which it is fitted in the rail portion 2347f.

The hook-shaped portion 2348b has the same shape as the hook-shaped portion 347d of the first embodiment, and a magnetic material is provided on the lower surface thereof. This magnetic material is a magnetic material for generating a magnetic force that attracts a bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310, which will be described later.

The reinforcing portion 2348c is a portion facing the surface of the rotary plate member 2347 opposite to the surface facing the slide claw member 2348 in the assembled state (see FIG. 46), and is wider than the curved portion 2348a. , which reinforce the slide claw member 2348 .

The protruding pin 2348d is a cylindrical member that is inserted through the functional elongated hole 2346e of the release member 2346, and is composed of a metal rod that is inserted through and fixed to the main body plate portion 2348e. When the releasing member 2346 rotates relative to the rotating plate member 2347, the projecting pin 2348d is pushed against the side surface of the functional long hole 2346e, and the slide claw member 2348 slides.

The rotary plate member 2347 includes a shaft support hole 347a, a guide elongated hole 347b, an insertion hole 347c, a pull-down hole 347e, a rail portion 2347f for guiding the sliding movement of the slide claw member 2348, and a slide. and a support long hole 2347g through which the projecting pin 2348d of the pawl member 2348 is inserted.

The rail portion 2347f is formed of a pair of plate-like portions extending from the upper end portion of the rotating plate member 2347. Side surfaces of the pair of plate-like portions facing each other are arranged such that the rotating plate member 2347 moves forward (see FIG. 3). 46 counterclockwise), it is formed in a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47).

Like the rail portion 2347f, the support long hole 2347g is formed in a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47). When the slide claw member 2348 is slid while the projecting pin 2348d is inserted through the long support hole 2347g, the slide claw member 2348 can be supported by the rail portion 2347f and the long support hole 2347g. wobble can be suppressed.

The releasing member 2346 includes a functional elongated hole 2346e that is elongated in the thickness direction, in addition to the pivot hole 346a, the projecting pin 346b, the insertion hole 346c, and the engaging portion 346d. .

The functional long hole 2346e is formed as a long hole having a width slightly wider than the diameter of the projecting pin 2348d of the slide pawl member 2348, and has a curved shape along an arc centered on the pivot hole 346a. It mainly includes a hole portion 2346e1 and a second long hole portion 2346e2 extending from one end of the first long hole portion 2346e in an inclined direction toward the opposite direction of the pivot hole 346a.

As shown in FIG. 46, when the release member 2346 rotates with respect to the rotary plate member 2347 and changes state between the large angle state and the small angle state, the slide claw member 2348 moves along the curved shape of the rail portion 2347f. slide to move.

Since the functional long hole 2346e is formed as a long hole slightly wider than the diameter of the projecting pin 2348d, there is no time delay with respect to the movement of the releasing member 2346, and the moving speed of the releasing member 2346 is the same as the movement of the projecting pin 2348d. reflected in speed.

That is, if the releasing member 2346 is rotated quickly, the slide pawl member 2348 slides quickly.

As shown in FIG. 46(a), in the large angle state, even if the slide claw member 2348 is pulled in the sliding direction, the first arc portion 2346e1 is shaped along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, the load applied from the projecting pin 2348d to the functional elongated hole 2346e is directed in the linear direction passing through the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, no force is generated to rotate the release member 2346, and the sliding movement of the slide claw member 2348 can be prevented.

That is, in this embodiment, even if the slide claw member 2347 slides due to the rotation of the release member 2346, the slide claw member 2347 slides when the slide claw member 2347 is pulled in the large angle state. No movement. Therefore, similarly to the first embodiment, when the tilting device 2310 is arranged in the first state, the tilting device 2310 can be restricted from rising by engaging the slide claw member 2348 with the tilting device 2310 .

FIGS. 47 to 49 are diagrams illustrating changes in the attitude of the tilting device 2310 in chronological order, and are cross-sectional views of the operation device 2300 along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). 47 shows a state in which the second retraction portion 344c4 of the disc cam 344 is arranged below the engagement portion 346d of the release member 2346, and FIG. is rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 47) and the engaging portion 346d of the release member 2346 is pushed up. 48 clockwise) and the release member 2346 is returned by the biasing force of the second spring SP2.

In this embodiment, the bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310 includes a magnet portion 2311a1 that is fixed to the upper side surface near the lower edge of the opening 311b and made of a magnetic material.

In the state shown in FIG. 47, the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are attracted by magnetic force. When the player pushes the tilting device 2310 from this state, the tilting device 2310 exerts a large load on the slide claw member 2348 because the attraction between the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b is released due to the change in posture of the tilting device 2310. you will not be

As shown in FIG. 48, when the release member 2346 is pushed up, the slide pawl member 2348 slides upward in conjunction with the operation. At this time, the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are attracted to each other by magnetic force, so that if the releasing member 2346 operates quickly, the tilting device 2310 also operates quickly.

Therefore, by causing the slide claw member 2348 to slide at a speed different from the speed at which the tilting device 2310 rotates in the upward direction due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315, the slide claw member 2348 rotates backward (clockwise in FIG. 48). The tilting device 2310 can be moved upward at a speed different from the upward movement when the tilting device 2310 is released from the upward movement restriction by rotating the tilting device 2310 (fourth operation mode). That is, the speed at which the tilting device 2310 moves upward can be changed.

As shown in FIG. 49, when the engagement between the disk cam 344 and the release member 2346 is released, the release member 2346 rotates backward (clockwise in FIG. 48) by the biasing force of the second spring SP2. As a result, the slide claw member 2348 is returned to the first state.

By enabling the operation modes shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, the tilting device 2310 can be operated in four operation modes in combination with the first to third operation modes described in the first embodiment. . As the number of operation modes increases, it becomes easier for the player to use the operation device 2300 as a means for foreseeing by associating the operation modes with the degree of expectation of the big win. Attention can be improved.

Further, according to this embodiment, when the tilting device 2310 is lifted by lifting the slide claw member 2348 as shown in FIG. Since the tilting device 2310 is lifted by the magnetic attraction between the load can be increased.

That is, normally, when the player puts his/her hand on the tilting device 2310 and the regulation by the slide claw member 2348 is released, the weight of the hand prevents the tilting device 2310 from rising. Also (even if the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is not large enough to lift the weight of the hand), if the magnetic force is large enough to lift the weight of the hand, the player's hand will be lifted in the state shown in FIG. The tilting device 2310 can be raised in a manner.

As a result, when the tilting device 2310 is lifted, it is possible to provide a difference in the load in the upward direction (the force for maintaining the posture of the tilting device 2310 against the downward load). Therefore, a player who plays a game by putting his hand on the upper part of the tilting device 2310 before pushing the tilting device 2310 can feel the difference in load.

For example, by associating the difference in load with the degree of expectation of a big win, it becomes easier for the player to use the operation device 2300 as a means of foreseeing. can be improved.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52. FIG. In the first embodiment, the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or pushed by the player. is configured in such a manner that detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 3310 is in the state between the first state and the state pushed by the player, or pushed by the player. be. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 50 is a side view of the tilting device 3310 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 50, the tilting device 3310 includes a right detection piece 311gR extending downward from the bottom plate portion 311a of the case main body 3311, and the same position as the left detection piece 311gL in the first embodiment (rotation of the tilting device 3310). and a left detection piece 3311gL extending at a position opposite to the right detection piece 311gR with respect to a plane perpendicular to the axis and arranged at the center position in the rotation axis direction. The left detection piece 3311gL has a longer extension length than the right detection piece 311gR, and has a shorter extension length than the left detection piece 311gL in the first embodiment.

51(a) and 51(b) are side views of the operation device 3300. FIG. 51(a) shows the tilting device 3310 in the first state, and FIG. 51(b) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is being pushed. 51(a) and 51(b), the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are shown in imaginary lines for easy understanding. The detection sensors 324L, 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines, and the overlapping portions of the detection sensors 324L, 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL, 311gR are schematically illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 51(a), when the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, the left detection piece 3311gL is not inserted into the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection piece 311gR is inserted into the right detection sensor 324R. None (the left detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

As shown in FIG. 51(b), when the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of being pushed from the first state to the end of pushing, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted into the left detection sensor 324L, while the right detection piece 3311gL is inserted through the left detection sensor 324L. The detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is ON and the right detection sensor 324R is OFF).

By detecting changes in the states of these detection sensors 324L and 324R, when the tilting device 3310 is in the state between the first state and the state pushed to the end of pushing, it is possible to detect the state in the middle of pushing. , or on the way back.

That is, when the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in the middle state between the first state and the state pushed to the end of pushing. By detecting that the left side detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in a state changed from the OFF state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the pushing operation.

52(a) and 52(b) are side views of the operation device 3300. FIG. Note that FIG. 52(a) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of pushing, and FIG. 52(b) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is in the process of moving from the end of pushing to the first state. . 51(a) and 51(b), the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are shown in imaginary lines for easy understanding. The detection sensors 324L, 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines, and the overlapping portions of the detection sensors 324L, 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL, 311gR are schematically illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 52(a), when the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of the push, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted through the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection piece 311gR is inserted through the right detection sensor 324R. (The left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the ON state).

As shown in FIG. 52(b), when the tilting device 3310 is in a state between the first state and the state arranged at the end of the push, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted into the left detection sensor 324L while the left detection sensor 324L is inserted. , the right detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is ON and the right detection sensor 324R is OFF).

When the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in the middle state between the first state and the state pushed to the end of pushing. By detecting that the sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right detection sensor 324R is in a state changed from the ON state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the process of returning to the first state.

Here, when the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 is transmitted to the tilting device 3310 to provide an auxiliary load for raising the tilting device 3310, the voice coil motor 352 is applied to the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 is moving downward. Collision of the voice coil motor 352 with the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 is moving up can provide a load for lifting the tilting device 3310 more effectively than colliding.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 52(b), the operation direction of the tilting device 3310 is determined from the detection history of the detection sensors 324L and 324R. By driving the voice coil motor 352 when it is not in use, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can be effectively transmitted to the tilting device 3310, and the rising speed of the tilting device 3310 can be improved.

Here, when the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18), the upward speed of the tilting device 3310 after the pushing operation of the tilting device 3310 from the first state is slow. Become. In this case, even if the player repeatedly hits the tilting device 3310, the rising motion of the tilting device 3310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the repeated hitting operation cannot be comfortably performed.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by effectively using the driving force of the voice coil motor 352, the tilting device 3310 is more stable than when the tilting device 3310 moves upward only by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. Since the rising speed can be improved, the tilting device 3310 can be comfortably hit repeatedly.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. FIG. In the first embodiment, the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or pushed by the player. 3 detects the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 while it is changing from the second state to the first state, and changes the driving method of the voice coil motor 352 according to the detection result. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 53 is a side view of the tilting device 4310 in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53, the tilting device 4310 includes a front detection piece 4311k projecting in a plate shape from the front side of the protruding projecting portion 311j of the case body 4311. As shown in FIG.

The front detection piece 4311k is configured to be able to pass through detection grooves (slits) of an upper detection sensor 4321d and a lower detection sensor 4321e (see FIG. 54) disposed on the bottom plate portion 4321 of the lower frame member 4320. This portion is for determining the operation speed of the tilting device 4310 based on the detection timing of the sensors 4321d and 4321e.

FIGS. 54(a) and 54(b) are side views of the operation device 4300 illustrating the depression operation of the operation device 4300 in chronological order. In addition, in FIG. 54(a), the tilting device 4310 is in the second state, and in FIG. 54(b), the tilting device 4310 is pushed from the state shown in FIG. It is shown passing down sensor 4321e. 54(a) and 54(b), the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are shown in phantom lines for easy understanding. Detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and voice coil motor 352 are shown in solid lines.

As shown in FIGS. 54(a) and 54(b), the lower frame member 4320 includes an upper detection sensor 4321d and a lower detection sensor 4321e on the front side portion of the bottom plate portion 4321. As shown in FIGS. The upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are photocoupler-type sensors, and are arranged in such a manner that the detection groove is oriented in a direction that allows the front detection piece 4311k to pass through. In this embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are arranged on an arc orbit around the rotation axis of the tilting device 4310 at intervals of 20°.

When the state shown in FIG. 54(a) is changed to the state shown in FIG. 54(b) by the player pushing the tilting device 4310, the front detection piece 4311k detects the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321d. 4321e in order. By detecting the timing interval of the passage, it is possible to determine whether the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 is large or small, and whether to drive the voice coil motor 352 is selected based on the determination.

Here, when the tilting device 4310 is pushed from the second position, the length of the push is long (because the acceleration period is long). The upper limit of the operating speed of 4310 is increased. Therefore, if there is no means of deceleration, the tilting device 4310 must be made strong as a safety measure for when the player pushes with all his might, and the tilting device 4310 tends to be heavy. A challenge arises.

It is also possible to incorporate an elastic spring that exerts a biasing force on the tilting device 4310 only when the tilting device 4310 is positioned near the push end, and the tilting device 4310 can be decelerated by the biasing force of the elastic spring. However, in this case, for a player with weak strength or a player who decides to perform the pressing operation softly, the increased reaction force in the vicinity of the pressing position becomes a burden on the pressing operation, and the player is likely to feel fatigued. Therefore, there is a possibility that the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 cannot be performed comfortably.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e determine whether to drive the voice coil motor 352 based on the timing interval between switching between the ON state and the OFF state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a strong reaction force from being applied to the tilting device 4310 even when it is not necessary.

That is, for example, when the interval between timings at which the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e switch between the ON state and the OFF state, respectively, is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), the voice coil motor 352 is turned on. While it is not driven, if the timing interval described above is shorter than the predetermined period, the voice coil motor 352 is controlled to be driven.

As a result, when the operation speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is slow, the reaction force that the player feels from the tilting device 4310 is only the urging force generated by the torsion spring 315, and the tilting device 4310 can be easily moved even with a weak force. Push operation is possible.

Furthermore, when the operation speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is high, the reaction force against the tilting device 4310 includes not only the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 315 but also the driving force generated by the voice coil motor 352 at the end of pushing. can be added. Therefore, the operation speed of the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54(b), the voice coil motor 352 is driven before the protruding projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 protrudes below the lower frame member 4320. Then, the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 is controlled in such a manner that it is pushed out in advance to the side close to the tilting device 4310 .

As a result, compared to the case where the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 collide while the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 is being pushed out, the impact applied to the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed.

55(a) and 55(b) are side views of the operation device 4300. FIG. FIG. 55(a) shows a state in which the tilting device 4310 is being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, and FIG. 55(b) shows a state where the tilting device 4310 has reached the pushing end. .

55(a) and 55(b), for ease of understanding, the outlines of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330 and the protective cover device 350 are shown in imaginary lines. Detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and voice coil motor 352 are shown in solid lines.

As shown in FIG. 55(a), when the tilting device 4310 is pushed in at high speed from the second state, the tilting device 4310 protrudes convexly in the middle of reaching the end of pushing from the first state. The setting portion 311j and the voice coil motor 352 are brought into contact with each other.

By pushing the tilting device 4310, the direction in which the projecting portion 311j moves the voice coil motor 352 becomes the direction along the extension direction D41 of the voice coil motor 352, so that the voice coil motor 352 is retracted. It is possible to consume the force of the pushing operation to move to. Therefore, while the tilting device 4310 continues to move, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can apply a load in the direction of pushing up the tilting device 4310, and the tilting device 4310 can be decelerated.

At this time, the voice coil motor 352 does not have a structure that applies a load by friction like a disc brake, but a structure that applies a load by electromagnetic force, so damage to members can be suppressed and durability can be ensured.

In the state shown in FIG. 55(a), the overhang projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 are already in contact with each other, so the state shown in FIG. By gradually increasing the current supplied to the voice coil motor 352 from the ON state, the reaction force applied from the voice coil motor 352 to the tilting device 4310 can be gradually increased.

Therefore, the tilting device 4310 decelerates from the first state to the end of pushing while suppressing the reaction force felt by the player at the timing when the overhanging projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 come into contact with each other. You can improve the effect.

As shown in FIG. 55(b), when the tilting device 4310 is placed at the push end position, the right detection sensor 324R is turned on. In this state, the tilting device 4310 comes into contact with the lower frame member 4320 in the rotational direction and stops descending. Therefore, it becomes unnecessary to decelerate the tilting device 4310 by the voice coil motor 352 .

In this embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 55(b), the voice coil motor 352 vibrates (moves in the extension direction and in the contraction direction repeatedly). As a result, after the tilting device 4310 is pushed to the end of the pushing operation, an effect of transmitting vibration to the player who keeps putting his hand on the tilting device 4310 can be performed.

That is, the voice coil motor 352 can be used for the purpose of reducing the speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 and for the purpose of vibrating the tilting device 4310 arranged at the pushing end position to perform a vibration effect.

Next, an operation device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 68. FIG.

In the first embodiment, by vibrating the voice coil motor 352, the vibration is transmitted to the player who pushes the tilting device 310, but the operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment , a drive motor 5411 for rotating a weight member 5412 arranged at a position where the center of gravity is eccentric. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. First, differences in configuration from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57. FIG.

56 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 57 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation device 5300. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the operation device 5300 has a lower frame member 320 as a lower frame member 5320 and a drive device 5340 as a drive device 5340, unlike the operation device 300 in the first embodiment. Along with this, the voice coil motor 352 is omitted from the protective cover member 350 . The tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 are configured in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

A vibrating device 5400 having a drive motor 5411 is arranged on the lower frame member 5320, and a disk cam 5344 fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 with one touch is arranged on the drive device 5340. As shown in FIG. First, the vibration device 5400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61, and then the disc cam 5344 will be described.

58 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame member 5320 and the vibration device 5400. FIG. As shown in FIG. 58, the vibration device 5400 contains a transmission device 5410 for rotationally driving a fan-shaped weight member 5412, the transmission device 5410, and a drive motor 5411 of the transmission device 5410, and is made of a flexible material. and a flexible member 5420 formed in the shape of a bottomed dish with an open upper surface, which accommodates the weight member 5412 and the flexible member 5420 in a partitioned manner, and is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 of the lower frame member 5320. 5430 and .

The transmission device 5410 includes a drive motor 5411 formed of a rotationally driven electric motor, and a weight member 5412 having a fan-shaped outer shape and having a portion corresponding to the pivot of the fan pivotally supported on the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411. and are mainly provided.

The drive motor 5411 is provided with a pair of left and right fixed portions 5411a formed from a metal material in a flange shape on the side surface on which the shaft protrudes.

The weight member 5412 has a radius Ra and is eccentrically supported with respect to the rotating shaft of the driving motor 5411 . Therefore, when the driving motor 5411 rotates, the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 changes, and the driving motor 5411 is configured to vibrate together.

The flexible member 5420 has a main body portion 5421 in the shape of a cylindrical container in which the drive motor 5411 is inserted along the axial direction and has a bottom on the side opposite to the side into which the drive motor 5411 is inserted. A pair of rib-shaped leg portions 5422 protruding in the left and right direction and downward in the radial direction of the main body 5421 and the rib-shaped leg portions 5422 protruding left and right on the open side of the main body 5421 are connected to each other. It mainly includes a posture maintaining portion 5423 in which the fixing portion 5411a is embedded, and a pair of projecting leg portions 5424 projecting upward from the upper surface of the main body portion 5421 in the form of columns.

The main body portion 5421 has the same depth as the length of the drive motor 5411 in the axial direction, and has a depth of a container shape. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 is fully inserted into the body portion 5421, the shaft side end face of the drive motor 5411 and the opening side end face of the body portion 5421 are formed on the same plane. Also, in this state, the fixing portion 5411a is embedded in the posture maintaining portion 5423 .

The rib-shaped leg portions 5422 are formed on the left and right sides and the lower side of the main body portion 5421, but the rib-shaped leg portions 5422 on the left and right sides are formed on the left and right sides by the amount of the posture maintaining portions 5423 arranged on the left and right sides. Deformation resistance is greater than that of the rib-like leg portion 5422 on the lower side.

Since the projecting leg portion 5424 is projectingly provided in a columnar shape, it is possible to easily concentrate the load on one point in contact with the tilting device 310 described later. Therefore, when the flexible member 5420 is deformed by tilting the tilting device 310, the resolution of the degree of deformation of the flexible member 5420 with respect to the tilting angle of the tilting device 310 can be made finer.

In the assembled state, the housing member 5430 includes a first housing portion 5431 housing the drive motor 5411 and the flexible member 5420, and a second housing portion adjacent to the first housing portion 5431 and housing the weight member 5412. 5432 and a recessed groove 5433 that is recessed downward from the upper surface of the connecting surface of the first accommodating portion 5431 and the second accommodating portion 5432 .

The depth of the first accommodating portion 5431 is determined by inserting the flexible member 5420 until the lower rib-shaped leg portion 5422 touches the bottom and releasing the load applied during insertion (assembly load released state). The depth is such that the projecting leg portion 5424 protrudes.

The depth of the second housing portion 5432 is a depth that is recessed to the outside of the rotation trajectory of the weight member 5412 in the assembly load release state, while the player applies a load to the protruding leg portion 5424 and the flexible member. The depth is such that it interferes with the rotational trajectory of the weight member 5412 when the weight member 5420 is deformed (in an assembly load state).

The recessed groove 5433 has a width slightly larger than the diameter of the rotating shaft of the drive motor 5411 and a depth extending slightly below the rotating shaft of the drive motor 5411 in the assembly load state. be.

59(a) is a side view of the lower frame member 5320, FIG. 59(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member 5320 along line LIXb-LIXb of FIG. 59(a), and FIG. ) is a partial top view of the lower frame member 5320 viewed in the direction of arrow LIXc in FIG. 59(a). In addition, in FIG.59(a), the part corresponding to the vibration apparatus 5400 is partially cross-sectionally viewed. Also, in FIG. 59(a), the first region S51, which is the region occupied by the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and the tilting device 310 are pushed three times by the player from the first state. The end region S52, which is the region occupied by the tilting device 310 when placed in the end position of the push, is shown in phantom lines.

As shown in FIG. 59(a), a projecting leg portion 5424 is projected in a direction along a circular orbit formed with the central axis of the circular arc of the lower bearing portion 323 as a rotation axis. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the maximum amount of deformation of the projecting leg portion 5424 with respect to the angle change of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 56).

As shown in FIG. 59( b ), the weight member 5412 is separated from the second accommodating portion 5432 in the assembled load-released state in which no load is applied to the projecting leg portion 5424 .

As shown in FIG. 59(c), the projecting legs 5424 are arranged symmetrically with respect to the center line of the lower frame member 5320 when viewed in the extension direction. Therefore, since the projecting leg portion 5424 can be evenly pushed in on the bottom surface of the tilting device 310, it is possible to prevent the flexible member 5420 from tilting to the left or right (inclining to the left or right in the plane of FIG. 59(b)) when pushed. The protruding leg portion 5424 can be pushed in while maintaining the posture shown in FIG. 59(b).

As shown in FIG. 59(c), the bottom plate portion 5321 of the lower frame member 5320 has a pair of through holes 5321d into which the projecting leg portions 5424 can be inserted. Since the through-hole 5321d has a lateral width slightly larger than the diameter of the projecting leg portion 5424, the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player, and the bottom surface of the tilting device 310 is projected. When pressed against the leg portion 5424, the lateral deformation of the projecting leg portion 5424 can be suppressed. Therefore, deformation of the shape of the protruding leg portion 5424 can be suppressed, and the main body portion 5421 can be easily moved downward (downward in FIG. 59B) together with the protruding leg portion 5424 .

60(a) and 60(b) are cross-sectional views of the vibration device 5400 along line LXa-LXa of FIG. 59(a). Note that FIG. 60(a) shows the assembly load released state, and FIG. 60(b) shows the protruding leg portion 5424 in a state where the tilting device 310 occupies the end region S52 (see FIG. 59(a)). The assembled load state after being pushed inwardly of the first receiving portion 5431 is illustrated. Note that the outlines of the second accommodating portion 5432 and the weight member 5412 are shown by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 60(a) and 60(b), a load is applied to the vibrating device 5400 from the assembly load release state, and when the assembly load state is reached, the projecting legs 5424 and the lower rib-like legs As 5422 deforms, drive motor 5411 and weight member 5412 are displaced downward.

In the assembly load state, as shown in FIG. 60(b), the flexible member 5420 is elastically deformed by being pushed by the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57). The elastic recovery force of this deformation acts as a force pushing back the tilting device 310, and the force increases as the tilting device 310 approaches the flexible member 5420. 310 can mitigate the impact when it collides with the lower frame member 5320 (see FIG. 57). Moreover, since the load is due to the elastic recovery force, the load can be generated without time delay even when the tilting device 310 moves at high speed.

Here, when the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 57), from the first state (the state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged at the rising end, see FIG. 38) The rising speed of the tilting device 310 after the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 is slowed down. In this case, even if the player repeatedly hits the tilting device 310, the rising motion of the tilting device 310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the repeated hitting operation cannot be comfortably performed.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 is effectively used, so that the tilting device 310 is more stable than when the tilting device 310 is raised only by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. Since the rising speed can be improved, the tilting device 310 can be comfortably hit repeatedly.

As shown in FIG. 60(a), in the assembly load released state, the weight member 5412 does not contact the inner wall of the second housing portion 5432 regardless of its posture. Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 starts to be driven in the assembly load-released state, vibration due to contact between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432 does not occur.

Further, the vibration of the drive motor 5411 itself and the slight vibration generated in the drive motor 5411 due to the movement of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 are absorbed by the flexibility of the flexible member 5420 and are prevented from being transmitted to the housing member 5430 . This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the drive start timing of the drive motor 5411 .

As shown in FIG. 60(b), in the assembly load state, the body portion 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is vertically displaced by deformation of the upper projecting leg portion 5424 and the lower rib-like leg portion 5422. Constructed in an acceptable manner.

When the flexible member 5420 moves downward, the state of the rib-like leg portion 5422 arranged on the lower side of the main body portion 5421 changes to a state of being more vertically compressed, and the rib-like leg portion 5422 hardens slightly. Therefore, the vibration damping effect of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 can be weakened, and the vibration generated by the vibrating device 5400 can be easily transmitted to the player.

In addition, the main body portion 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the lower rib-like leg portions 5422 extend along the axial direction of the cylinder of the main body portion 5421 and are spaced horizontally from the central axis at uniform intervals. Since the flexible members 5420 are arranged in a pair on the left and right, when the flexible members 5420 move downward, the radially outer ends of the rib-like leg portions 5422 move to the left and right outward (at the connection position between the main body portion 5421 and the rib-like leg portions 5422). (Refer to FIG. 60(b)). In this case, since the projecting direction of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 arranged on the lower side of the main body portion 5421 has a left-right component, the elastic force of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 can act in the left-right direction. . Therefore, in the assembly load state, the lateral load that may occur when the weight member 5421 collides with the second housing portion 5432 is reduced by the elastic force of the rib-like leg portion 5422 on the lower side of the main body portion 5421. can be effectively absorbed. As a result, it is possible to suppress displacement of the drive motor 5411 in the left-right direction.

Figures 61(a) and 61(b) are cross-sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 taken along line LIXb-LIXb of Figure 59(a).

FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b) show the assembly load state, FIG. 61(a) shows the state where the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is located above the rotation axis, and FIG. In b), the state in which the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged below the rotation axis is illustrated. 61(a) and 61(b) show the vibrating device 5400 in a state in which the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player and occupies the termination region S52.

The operation of transmission device 5410 based on the rotation of weight member 5412 will be described. First, in the present embodiment, when the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is positioned upward in the assembly load state, the driving motor 5411 rotates to a position where the distance from the lower base of the second housing portion 5432 is the distance Q1. Axes are placed. In this embodiment, the distance Q1 is equal to the radius Ra of the weight member 5412 (Q1=Ra).

That is, when the weight member 5412 rotates in the assembly load state, the outer peripheral side surface of the weight member 5412 abuts (rubbes) the second housing portion 5432 . Therefore, the vibration caused by the rotation of the weight member 5412 changes compared to the state in which the assembly load is released, and a different kind of vibration can be transmitted to the player.

Due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodation portion 5432, a force that moves the weight member 5412 upward (upward in FIG. 61(b)) is generated as a repulsive force. Here, since the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432 move toward and away from each other along the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57), the direction of the repulsive force is the direction along the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (upward). ) can be easily directed. This repulsive force causes the flexible member 5420 to move upward together with the drive motor 5411 supporting the weight member 5412, causing the flexible member 5420 to move the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward (along the movement direction of the tilting device 310). direction) can be reinforced.

In this way, the force that pushes the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward is divided into the force generated as the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 and the force generated by the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432. By combining the generated forces, the force pushing back the tilting device 310 can be adjusted.

That is, the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 pushes back the tilting device 310 during the period from when the tilting device 310 starts contacting the projecting leg portion 5424 until it moves toward the termination region S52 (see FIG. 59(a)). , and after the tilting device 310 reaches the end region S52, the repulsive force between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432 is added to the force pushing back the tilting device 310. As shown in FIG. As a result, the force pushing back the tilting device 310 can be particularly increased in the vicinity of the end region S52, so that the tilting device 310 can be easily operated and the impact during the pushing operation can be reduced. This adjustment can be performed while the drive motor 5411 is kept rotating. Therefore, complicated control can be made unnecessary.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the length of the left detection piece 311gL and the length of the right detection piece 311gR are different (see FIG. 57). ) is higher than a specific speed (for example, 40 km/h), and the placement of the weight member 5412 is changed according to the determined operating speed.

For example, when it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is greater than a specific speed, the flexible member 5420 provides the tilting device 310 with a It is desired to increase the load. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than a specific speed, the weight member 5412 is moved in advance so as to assume the downward posture (see FIG. 61(b)).

As a result, the lowering end of the driving motor 5411 can be raised to a position where the rotary shaft is raised by the radius Ra from the lower end of the inner wall of the second accommodating portion 5432 . As a result, compared to the case where the weight member 5432 is arranged upward (see FIG. 61(a)) (when it can be lowered downward from the state shown in FIG. 61(a)), the upper side of the drive motor 5411 The movable area of the flexible member 5420 can be narrowed in the vertical direction.

That is, the compression dimension of the flexible member 5420 and the upper portion of the driving motor 5411 can be increased when the projecting leg 5424 is pushed down by the tilting device 310 by the same amount. Therefore, the repulsive force applied from the flexible member 5420 to the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the load for braking the tilting device 310 can be increased.

Although not described in this embodiment, the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 generates the force to push back the tilting device 310 by keeping the driving motor 5411 stopped upward (see FIG. 61(a)). It is also possible to prevent the force due to contact between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432 from being generated.

Here, contact between the members occurs between the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 5320 , not between the tilting device 310 . Therefore, it is possible to change the vibration transmitted to the hand of the player who pushes the tilting device 310 and to widen the transmission range of the vibration. That is, the vibration can be transmitted to a portion other than the portion touching the tilting device 310, for example, the portion touching the frame of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

That is, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, the vibration can be transmitted to the lower frame member 5320, so that the palm or a part of the side of the hand placed on the lower frame member 5320 as a fulcrum for pushing can be moved. Vibration can be transmitted to the player through the device. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the vibration is not transmitted to the player.

As shown in FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b), the weight member 5412 is activated only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 56) and the vibrating device 5400 forms an assembly load state. and the housing member 5430 come into contact with each other to generate vibration.

Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is in a rotating state in advance, the timing at which the vibration is transmitted to the player can be limited to the timing at which the tilting device 310 is pushed. Vibration can be easily transmitted to the player as compared with the case where vibration is generated from the body.

That is, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in such a manner that the hand is released immediately after pushing the tilting device 310 (pulse pushing state), vibration is generated after detecting that the tilting device 310 has been pushed. In this case, there is a possibility that vibration cannot be generated (vibration is not started in time) before the player releases his/her hand, and the player may not be able to experience the effects of the vibration. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the drive motor 5411 rotates before the tilting device 310 is pushed in, and preparations for vibration generation are completed. As a result, the player can experience the effect of the vibration.

In addition, the flexibility of the flexible member 5420 can prevent the vibration of the main body of the drive motor 5411 from being transmitted to the first accommodating portion 5431 . Therefore, even if the driving motor 5411 is driven in advance, it is possible to prevent the vibration from being transmitted to the player before the tilting device 310 is pushed.

Therefore, by driving the drive motor 5411 in advance before the tilting device 310 is pushed, a state in which vibration is transmitted by pushing the tilting device 310 can be realized.

Next, the driving device 5340 will be described. The driving device 5340 differs from the driving device 340 in the first embodiment in the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft 5343 . Others are the same as those of the driving device 340 of the first embodiment, so the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof is omitted.

62 is an exploded front perspective view of drive 5340. FIG. As shown in FIG. 62, an elongated concave portion C1 is formed in the central portion of a pair of disc cams 5344, which are composed of a left disc cam 5344L and a right disc cam 5344R.

FIG. 63(a) is a front perspective view of the right disc cam 5344R, and FIG. 63(b) is a rear perspective view of the right disc cam 5344R. Since the right disc cam 5344R and the left disc cam 5344L are configured in symmetrical shapes, only the right disc cam 5344R will be described, and the description of the left disc cam 5344L will be omitted.

The difference between the right disk cam 5344R and the right disk cam 344R in the first embodiment is that a pair of clamping arm portions A1 that sandwich the transmission shaft rod 5343 are arranged at the connecting portion with the transmission shaft rod 5343. is.

That is, the right disk cam 5344R has, at its center position, a support cylinder portion P1 that extends from the disk portion toward the side where the circular rib 344b is arranged, and a support cylinder portion P1 that extends in the axial direction of the support cylinder portion P1. , the long hole recess C1 recessed from the disk portion in an axially symmetric long hole shape, and the axis of the support cylinder portion P1 recessed by the long hole recess C1 to a position about half the extension distance. It mainly includes a pair of holding arm portions A1 extending from the end portion of the direction toward the disk portion side along the axial direction.

The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion that supports the columnar member 5343a by making its inner diameter equal to the diameter of the columnar member 5343a of the transmission shaft 5343 . The support cylinder portion P1 includes a deformed portion P1a that is not recessed in the long hole recess C1 and remains in the same axial arrangement as the region recessed in the long hole recess C1.

The deformed portion P1a is a pair of connecting rod portions arranged to sandwich the elongated concave portion C1, and is elastically deformed when the right disc cam 5344R is axially deformed with respect to the transmission shaft rod 5343 (see FIG. 62). configured as a part to

The long hole recess C1 is formed with a width dimension slightly longer than the width dimension of the clamping arm portion A1. Therefore, the holding arm portion A1 is configured to be displaceable in a direction (longitudinal direction) perpendicular to the width direction of the recessed cross section of the long hole recess C1.

In addition, the opposing surface of the long hole recess C1 is configured to have a shape that engages with the D-shape of the fixing portion 5343a1 of the cylindrical member 5343a. That is, one side surface is formed as a flat surface, and the other side surface is formed as an arc shape along the outer shape of the cylindrical member 5343a. This can prevent the columnar member 5343a from rotating relative to the disk cam 5344 .

The holding arm portion A1 includes an engagement convex portion A1a that protrudes from the surface of the pair of arm portions facing the other arm in a direction approaching the other arm. . The engagement projection A1a engages with the tip of the cylindrical member 5343a when coupled with the transmission shaft rod 5343, and prevents the cylindrical member 5343a from coming off the disc cam 5344. As shown in FIG.

The shape of the tip of the engaging projection A1a is configured to match the circular arc shape of the engaging groove 5343a4 of the cylindrical member 5343a (see FIG. 64). As a result, the radial overlapping length (Fig. 65 (b) length in the left-right direction) can be ensured to be long.

The engaging convex portion A1a has a side surface of the right disc cam 5344R on the side closer to the connecting pin 344d in the axial direction, and a recessed surface portion C2 (a long hole recessed portion) recessed along the shaft near the shaft. It is arranged at a position that is the plane position with the side surface on the opening side of C1.

As a result, the engagement between the columnar member 5343a and the engagement projection A1a can be completed on the support cylinder P1 side (lower side in FIG. 63(b)) than the recessed surface portion C2 (FIG. 65(b)). reference). Therefore, on the outside of the recessed surface portion C2 (upper side in FIG. 63(b)), compared with the case where the e-ring is fitted in the cylindrical member 5343a, the length by which the cylindrical member 5343a protrudes from the recessed surface portion C2 is determined by the e-ring. can be shortened by the thickness of (see FIG. 65(b)).

In addition, there is no need to secure a space for fitting the e-ring (a space required for sliding the e-ring in contact with the surface) in the extending direction (direction parallel to the surface) of the right disk cam 5344R. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the width of the recess (the width in the radial direction) of the recessed surface portion C2. Thereby, the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the right disk cam 5344R can be improved.

The transmission shaft rod 5343 will be described with reference to FIG. 64 is a front exploded perspective view of the transmission shaft rod 5343. FIG. A difference between the transmission shaft rod 5343 and the transmission shaft rod 353 in the first embodiment is a cylindrical member 5343a.

The cylindrical member 5343a is formed at both ends of the columnar member 5343a so as to extend from a fixing portion 5343a1 having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disc cam 5344, and a fixing portion 5343a1 on the left side in front view, to the same portion as the fixing portion 5343a1 across the fitting groove 5343a3. A clutch operating portion 5343a2 having a D-shaped cross section formed from the cross-sectional shape, a fitting groove 5343a3 which is a groove for fitting the e-ring and which positions the disc cam 5344 in the axial direction by the e-ring, and its fitting groove. An engaging groove 5343a4, which is a groove in which the engaging convex portion A1a of the holding arm portion A1 engages when the disk cam 5344 is fitted until it reaches the e-ring fitted in the 5343a3, is mainly used. Prepare. The fitting grooves 5343a3 are arranged laterally outside the pair of plates in which the pivot holes 341b are formed in the assembled state.

The clutch operating portion 5343a2 is a portion inserted through the angle fixing hole 343c1 of the movable clutch 343c, and is a portion in which the movable clutch 343c slides under the biasing force of the coil spring 343d in the assembled state.

By fitting the e-ring into the fitting groove 5343a3 from behind, a portion of the cylindrical member 5343a whose diameter is partially increased is formed by the e-ring. The diameter of member 5343a can be made uniform.

With this diameter uniform, the columnar member 5343a is inserted into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 62) by a predetermined amount, and then the e-ring is fitted, thereby adjusting the axial direction of the columnar member 5343a with respect to the shaft support hole 341b with the e-ring. In addition, the e-ring can prevent the disk cam 5344 from axially dislocating.

Due to the configuration of the disk cam 5344 and the transmission shaft 5343 described above, the disk cam 5344 can be assembled to the transmission shaft 5343 with one touch. That is, when the disk cam 5344 is assembled to the transmission shaft rod 5343, the cylindrical member 5343a is positioned on the side of the support cylinder portion P1 of the disk cam 5344 on which the engagement protrusion A1a is arranged. It is inserted from the opposite end to the position where the engaging projection A1a fits into the engaging groove 5343a4. At this time, before the engagement protrusions A1a are inserted into the engagement grooves 5343a4 to a position where the engagement protrusions A1a are fitted, the tip of the cylindrical member 5343a enters between the engagement protrusions A1a, so that the pair of engagement protrusions A1a The clamping arms A1 are elastically deformed in such a manner that the distance between them is increased. After that, when the tip of the columnar member 5343a passes through the engagement protrusion A1a, the engagement protrusion A1a and the engagement groove 5343a4 are arranged to face each other, and the engagement protrusion A1a is fitted into the engagement groove 5343a4. Then, the holding arm portion A1 is elastically recovered, and the disk cam 5344 and the transmission shaft 5343 are assembled (see FIG. 65(b)).

On the other hand, the configuration of the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343 functions not only for one-touch assembly, but also as a destruction prevention structure in this embodiment. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. FIG.

FIG. 65(a) is a front view of the right disc cam 5344R viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and FIG. FIG. 65(c) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam 5344R taken along line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. 65(a). 66(a) is a front view of the right disc cam 5344R viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and FIG. 66(b) is a right disc cam taken along line LXVIb-LXVIb in FIG. 66(a). 5344R is a cross-sectional view.

FIG. 66 shows the right disc cam 5344R after being deformed when the player gives an overload to the unloaded right disc cam 5344R shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, in this embodiment, the columnar member 5343a is supported by the extended distal end portion of the support cylinder portion P1 at a position spaced apart from the disc portion of the right disc cam 5344R. In the vicinity of the portion, only the engaging protrusion A1a engages with the engaging groove 5343a4. Therefore, when the columnar member 5343a or the right disk cam 5344R is overloaded, the columnar member 5343a can be tilted about the extended distal end portion of the support cylinder portion P1.

As shown in FIG. 65(b), since the space of the long hole recess C1 is arranged in the direction in which the pair of clamping arm portions A1 face each other, the resistance of the cylindrical member 5343a to axial tilt displacement is reduced. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 65(c), the cylindrical member 5343a and the right disc cam 5344R extend along the axial direction of the right disc cam 5344R in the direction in which the supporting cylinder portion P1 and the connecting pin 344d are connected. , the resistance of the cylindrical member 5343a against axial tilting displacement is increased.

Therefore, when the player forcibly holds down (pulls up) the tilting device 310 and an overload is applied to the right disk cam 5344R (displacement of the connecting pin 344d via the arm member 345 (see FIG. 62)). is applied), the deformation direction of the right disk cam 5344R with respect to the cylindrical member 5343a can be restricted.

That is, the right disk cam 5344R deforms in the direction of less resistance, so as shown in FIGS. 66(a) and 66(b), when the right disk cam 5344R is overloaded, The disk portion is axially tilted and deformed about a support axis r1 connecting the connecting pin 344d and the center of the support cylinder portion P1 on a plane parallel to the surface of the disk portion. As a result, the tip position of the connecting pin 344d is displaced along the circumferential direction of the right disc cam 5344R compared to the position shown in FIG. 65(a).

67(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 5300 along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and FIG. 67(b) is an operation in the direction of arrow LXVIIb in FIG. 67(a). 5300 is a partial rear view of device 5300. FIG. In FIG. 67(b), illustration of the protective cover device 350 is omitted, and only the disk cam 5344, the arm member 345 and the releasing member 346 are illustrated. Further, in FIG. 67(a), for ease of understanding, the outer shape of the right disc cam 5344R in a state in which it is perpendicularly inserted into and fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 is illustrated by a solid line. The outline of the folded state is illustrated by imaginary lines.

FIG. 67(a) shows the second state of the tilting device 310, the player's hand holding the tilting device 310, and an enlarged state of the vicinity of the connecting pin 344d. .

In the state shown in FIG. 67(a), when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) starts operating, the left disk cam 5344L is about to start rotating, but the player restricts the displacement of the tilting device 310. Therefore, a load is generated between the arm member 345 trying to stay in place and the connecting pin 344d of the left disc cam 5344L trying to rotate. When this load is generated, the right disc cam 5344R can undergo the axial tilting deformation described above, so that the load can be alleviated.

In FIG. 67(a), the outer shape of the right disc cam 5344R after its axial tilt deformation is illustrated by imaginary lines. A change in the connection mode with the arm member 345 due to axial tilt deformation will be described with reference to an enlarged view.

In FIG. 67(a), when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) starts operating and the outer circumference of the right disc cam 5344R rotates clockwise by the dimension Rd, the arm member 345 is pivotally supported by the dimension Rd. The hole 345a and the connecting pin 344d are displaced from each other, and the right disk cam 5344R is deformed to be axially tilted in order to absorb this displacement.

Since the connecting pin 344d falls in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. The position is shifted along the circumferential direction of the plate cam 5344R. This positional deviation can partially absorb the positional deviation between the connecting pin 344d and the arm member 345 due to the rotation of the right disc cam 5344R by the dimension Rd. 342 (see FIG. 62), the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be alleviated.

As shown in FIG. 67(b), the disc cam 5344 is axially tilted and deformed so that the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346 come into contact with each other. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 342 is consumed by the frictional force generated between the release member 346 and the disk cam 5344, so that the player drives the drive motor 342 while holding the tilting device 310 fixedly. In this case, the load applied to arm member 345 connecting disk cam 5344 and tilting device 310 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 67(a), when the disk cam 5344 rotates backward (in the direction of the arrow CW), the release member 346 is pushed upward by the frictional force, but the second spring The elastic force of SP2 acts on disc cam 5344 via release member 346 . In this case, the rotation claw member 347 is blocked by the bottom plate portion 5321 and stops, so the state of the first spring SP1 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

On the other hand, when the disk cam 5344 rotates forward (the direction of the arrow CCW, see FIG. 68), the release member 346 is pushed downward by the frictional force, but the elastic force of the first spring SP1 acts against it. acts on the disc cam 5344 via the releasing member 346 and the rotating pawl member 347 . In this case, since the relative positional relationship between the rotating claw member 347 and the release member 346 does not change, the state of the second spring SP2 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

Therefore, when the releasing member 346 and the disc cam 5344 are in contact with each other and the releasing member 346 moves along the direction of movement of the disc cam 5344, the first spring SP1 or the first spring SP1 or Among the elastic forces of any of the second springs SP2, the elastic force acting on the disk cam 5344 in the direction opposite to the rotational direction of the disk cam 5344 can be increased. As a result, the load applied to the disk cam 5344 by the release member 346 can be increased, and the consumption amount of the driving force of the drive motor 342 can be increased. can be reduced regardless of the direction of rotation.

In this embodiment, the right disk cam 5344R is formed in a shape symmetrical with respect to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point (the direction perpendicular to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point). ), the right disc cam 5344R can be deformed in the same manner regardless of the direction of rotation of the right disc cam 5344R (regardless of the direction in which the connecting pin 344d is displaced from the arm member 345). It can be axially deformed by resistance.

FIG. 68(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 5300 along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and FIG. 68(b) is an operation in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. 68(a). 5300 is a partial rear view of device 5300. FIG. In addition, in FIG.68(b), illustration of the protective cover apparatus 350 is abbreviate|omitted. In addition, in FIG. 68(a), for ease of understanding, the outer shape of the right disc cam 5344R, which is vertically inserted and fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343, is shown in solid lines. The outline of the folded state is illustrated by imaginary lines.

FIG. 68(a) shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is driven by the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) from the second state and is tilted downward by an angle D2. A player's hand is shown holding a

As shown in FIG. 68(a), when the player grips the tilting device 310 during operation of the tilting device 310, the right disk cam 5344R is held regardless of whether the tilting device 310 is in the second state or not. , the tip of the connecting pin 344d can be displaced in the circumferential direction of the right disc cam 5344R, thereby reducing the load generated between the arm member 345 and the right disc cam 5344R. Therefore, the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be reduced.

The items described for the right disc cam 5344R also apply to the left disc cam 5344L.

As shown in FIGS. 67(b) and 68(b), according to the present embodiment, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) operates while the tilting device 310 is held by the player, causing an overload. Then, the right disc cam 5344R tilts in the axial direction.

Therefore, by detecting the degree of tilting motion in the axial direction, it is possible to quickly notice the occurrence of overload. That is, for example, according to the configuration of the first embodiment, if the drive motor 342 is driven for a period in which the right disk cam 344R makes one rotation, the detection hole 344eR of the right disk cam 344R passes through the right detection sensor 353R. However, when the player holds the tilting device 310, the right disk cam 344R does not rotate even if the drive motor 342 is rotated. An overload is detected because the input to 353R does not change.

In this case, since it takes a period of time to rotate the right disk cam 344R by a predetermined angle in a state in which no overload occurs until the occurrence of overload is detected, there is a problem that the detection of overload is delayed. there were.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, when the right disc cam 5344R is overloaded and tilts in the axial direction (see FIG. 66(b)), the overload occurs. Occurrences can be detected. Therefore, occurrence of overload can be detected early. As a method of detection, for example, a method using an informing device E1 fixed to the engagement rib 344c between the support cylinder portion P1 and the engagement rib 344c is exemplified (illustrated by an imaginary line in FIG. 66(a)). ).

The notification device E1 is a detection device that outputs a signal when an object comes into contact with the input portion, and is arranged in pairs at positions where a straight line connecting the pair of holding arm portions A1 and the engagement rib 344c intersect. and the input portion protrudes toward the support cylinder portion P1. In the no-load state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder portion P1 are separated from each other (see FIG. 65(b)), and in the overload state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder portion P1 are formed in a contact relationship (see FIG. 65(b)). 66(b)). Accordingly, by determining the output from the notification device E1, it is possible to quickly determine whether or not the disk cam 5344 is overloaded.

Next, an operation device 6300 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 73. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the disk cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engaging rib 344c are integrally formed. 344c and 344c are composed of separate members and configured to be relatively rotatable with each other. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. First, differences in configuration from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. FIG.

69 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device 6340 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 70 is an exploded front perspective view of the disc member 6344L1, the ring member 6344L2 and the second transmission member 6348 of the left disc cam 6344L. is. Although the configuration of the right disc cam 6344R is also different from that of the first embodiment, the right disc cam 6344R is configured in a mirror image of the left disc cam 6344L. , and the description of the right disc cam 6344R is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 69, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration of the left disc cam 6344L and the shape of the fixing member 6342a, and a second transmission device 6348 is added.

The left disc cam 6344L is provided with a circular rib 344b connecting pin 344d and a detection hole 344eL as in the first embodiment, and is pivotally supported by the cylindrical member 343a. It includes a disk member 6344L1 that is coaxially supported and rotates relative to the ring member 6344L2.

The disc member 6344L1 has the central shaft portion 344a of the first embodiment arranged at the center of the disc portion, and is spaced radially outward from the outer peripheral portion of the circular rib 344b. An annular rib 6344f is provided protruding along.

The ring member 6344L2 has a ring-shaped body 6344g having the same outer diameter as the engaging rib 344c in the first embodiment and an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the circular rib 344b. A cover plate portion 6344h that is disposed at the axial end of the ring body 6344g and covers the ring-shaped opening of the ring body 6344g, and the thickness increases from the cover plate portion 6344h to the opposite side of the ring body 6344g. and receiving gear teeth 6344i formed on and disposed radially outwardly at the thickened portion thereof.

Since the inner diameter of the ring main body 6344g is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the circular rib 344b, in the assembled state, the ring main body 6344g is fitted onto the circular rib 344b, thereby forming the central shaft portion 344a. A ring member 6344L2 is supported so as to be relatively rotatable around .

The axial end surface of the annular main body 6344g on the disk member 6344L1 side contacts the annular rib 6344f. As a result, the contact area can be reduced and the frictional resistance can be reduced as compared with the case where the annular rib 6344f is not formed and the surface is in contact with the disk member 6344L1. Therefore, relative rotation between the disk member 6344L1 and the ring member 6344L2 can be smoothly performed.

The receiving gear tooth 6344i meshes with the speed reduction transmission gear 6348c of the second transmission device 6348 . Therefore, the rotation of the second transmission device 6348 causes the ring member 6344L2 to rotate. In the present embodiment, the number of rotations of the ring member 6344L2 is three times the number of rotations of the disk member 6344L1 (the disk member 6344L1 rotates once while the ring member 6344L2 rotates three times). , the number of teeth of the second transmission gear 6348b, the reduction transmission gear 6348c and the receiving gear teeth 6344i are set).

The second transmission device 6348 is a device that is rotatably supported by the fixed member 6342a along with the transmission shaft rod 343, and includes an auxiliary column member 6348a that is arranged in a posture parallel to the cylindrical member 343a, and the auxiliary column member 6348a. A second transmission gear 6348b fixed to the member 6348a and meshed with the transmission gear 343b, and a reduction transmission gear fixed to both ends of the auxiliary column member 6348 and meshed with the receiving gear teeth 6344i of the ring member 6344L2. 6348c and .

With reference to FIGS. 71 to 73, it will be described that the tilting device 310 is lifted in a plurality of ways after the tilting device 310 is unlocked from the rotating claw member 347 in the first state.

71, 72, and 73 are cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 6300 along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a). 71 shows a state similar to the state shown in FIG. 36, and FIG. 72 shows a posture in which the ring member 6344R2 has made one rotation in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. , after rotating more than one rotation, the state in which the disk member 6344R1 rotates in the backward direction (the direction of the arrow CW) by 1/3 rotation. is illustrated. FIG. 73 shows a state in which the ring member 6344L2 rotates in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) by a predetermined angle from the state shown in FIG. 72, and the tilting device 310 moves upward.

Here, when the ring member 6344R2 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in FIG. It rises instantaneously and reaches the second state (see FIG. 34).

In the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, when the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is released, and the tilting device 310 immediately (without waiting for the rotation of the disk cam 344) moves up, the reaching position is the second state. It was limited to the position to be arranged (see FIG. 34).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the disc member 6344R1 and the ring member 6344R2 rotate relative to each other. can be changed, and the types of reachable positions of the tilting device 310 can be increased.

72, the tilting device 310 is instantaneously lifted by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315, and is tilted downward by an angle D6 from the second state. (See FIG. 73). In this manner, the tilting device 310 instantaneously (disc cam) is released from the state shown in FIG. 344 rotation) can be varied.

As a result, for example, when the tilting device 310 is configured to change the degree of expectation for the performance depending on the difference in the height to which the tilting device 310 is instantaneously raised from the first state, the attention of the tilting device 310 can be increased. can be improved. In this case, it is not limited whether the degree of expectation is increased when the tilting device 310 rises higher or when the tilting device 310 reaches a lower elevation position.

However, by keeping the ascending reaching position of the normal tilting device 310 low (see FIG. 73) and reaching the second state (see FIG. 34) when the degree of expectation reaches its maximum, the degree of expectation It is possible to associate the magnitude of the amount of displacement with which the player pushes and operates the tilting device 310, thereby making it easy for the player to understand the difference in expectations due to the displacement of the tilting device 310.例文帳に追加

In this case, it is possible to motivate the player to check to what position the tilting device 310 rises, so that the player does not have to watch the movement of the tilting device 310 until the operation timing of the tilting device 310. can be directed to Therefore, regardless of the effect mode of the tilting device 310, a game method in which the tilting device 310 is operated chaotically can be suppressed.

Next, an operation device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 85. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the disk cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engaging rib 344c are integrally formed. 7344R1 and the connecting pin 344d are arranged on separate members, and these separate members are configured to be able to form a fixed state in which they are fixed to each other and a sliding state in which they are relatively rotatable. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. First, with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75, the features of a disc cam 7344 used as a substitute for the disc cam 344 in the first embodiment will be described.

74(a) is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R in the seventh embodiment, FIG. 74(b) is a rear view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 75(a) is a front view of FIG. 75(a) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam 7344R taken along line LXXVa-LXXVa in FIG. 75(a), and FIG. 75(b) is a partial side view of the right disc cam 7344R viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. 74(a). Since the right disk cam 7344L has a symmetrical shape that is a mirror copy of the right disk cam 7344R, a description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the right disc cam 7344R includes a disc member 7344R1 having a central shaft portion 344a through which a cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 62) is inserted and fixed in the assembled state, and a disc member 7344R1. and an engaging portion 7630 that is immovable in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1 in the assembled state and fits into the equally divided concave portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2. and an engaging member 7344R3 having a

The disk member 7344R1 is formed in a cup shape having a central shaft portion 344a at the center, and has a detection hole 344eR in a portion extending radially outward from the edge of the cup in a flange shape, and an engagement rib. 344c is a member configured with a shape that is partially omitted (a portion between the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 is omitted).

The disk member 7344R supports the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 of the ring member 7344R2 in the assembled state, and has a first circular recessed portion 7410 which is a circular recessed portion centered on the central shaft portion 344a. Between the second circular recessed portion 7420, which is a circular recessed portion smaller in diameter than the first circular recessed portion 7410 and deeper in the axial direction, and between the first protruding portion 344c1 and the first retracted portion 344c2, a radial An L-shaped insertion hole 7430 is bored, and a fixing projecting radially outward from the side surface of the second circular recessed portion 7420 (the outer peripheral side of the disk member 7344R1) in the vicinity of the insertion hole 7430 A projection 7440 is mainly provided.

The insertion hole 7430 is a first rectangular long hole portion elongated along the axial direction of the disk member 7344R1 at a position displaced from an intermediate position between the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2. A long hole 7431 and a second long hole 7432 which is a rectangular long hole portion extending along the circumferential direction of the disc member 7344R1 from the end of the first long hole 7431 on the bottom side of the disc member 7344R1. and a return portion 7433 configured to protrude toward the second long hole 7432 with the first long hole 7431 side of the lower end portion of the second long hole 7432 serving as a fulcrum.

The dimension in the width direction (transverse direction) of the second long hole 7432 is smaller than the dimension in the width direction (transverse direction) of the first long hole 7431, and the width of the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3 is It is made smaller than the dimension in the direction (transverse direction).

The return portion 7433 is configured to be elastically deformable with the lower end portion of the second long hole 7432 (lower end portion in FIG. 75(b)) as a fulcrum. Due to this elastic deformation, the return portion 7433 is formed so as to be movable outwardly of the second elongated hole 7432 .

The fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1 of the engaging member 7344R3 and is configured with a protrusion height sufficient to fix the position of the coil spring SC1.

Next, referring to FIG. 76, the ring member 7344R2 will be described. 76(a) is a front view of the ring member 7344R2, FIG. 76(b) is a rear view of the ring member 7344R2, and FIG. 76(c) is a view in the direction of arrow LXXVIc in FIG. 7344R2 is a side view of the ring member 7344R2. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 76(a) to 76(c), the ring member 7344R2 includes a ring-shaped plate portion 7510 in which the connecting pin 344d is protruded, and an inner peripheral surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510. and a thick portion 7520 extending in the thickness direction of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 along and having a star-shaped through hole formed in the center.

The ring-shaped plate portion 7510 has a plate thickness dimension equal to the recess depth of the first circular recessed portion 7410 , and an outer diameter dimension slightly smaller than the inner diameter dimension of the first circular recessed portion 7410 . be. As a result, in the assembled state, the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1 can be aligned with each other while preventing excessive resistance to relative rotation.

The thick portion 7520 has a length extending from the side surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 to a length that reaches (does not interfere with) the second elongated hole 7432 in the assembled state (see FIG. 75(a)). is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the second circular recess 7420 . As a result, in the assembled state, the engagement member 7344R3 can be moved in the radial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 75(a)) while preventing the relative rotation resistance between the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1 from becoming excessive. can do.

The thick portion 7520 includes a deformed through-hole 7521 drilled along the axial direction, and recesses radially outward in the deformed through-hole 7521 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (five equal intervals in this embodiment). It mainly includes an equally divided concave portion 7522 provided.

The deformed through-hole 7521 has an inner peripheral shape that is arranged radially outward of the engaging portion 7630 when the later-described engaging member 7344R3 is pushed radially inward of the disk member 7344R1. Configured.

77(a) is a front view of the engaging member 7344R3, and FIG. 77(b) is a side view of the engaging member 7344R3 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIb in FIG. 77(a).

As shown in FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b), the engaging member 7344R3, in the assembled state (see FIG. 74(b)), is radially outward of the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2. 7620 extending in the thickness direction from the back side end of the arc-shaped plate portion 7610 (the right end in FIG. 77B) of the arc-shaped plate portion 7610; An engaging portion 7630 extending along the front-rear direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 77(b)) from the extended distal end of the portion 7620 and an arc-shaped plate portion 7610 disposed on the side facing the engaging portion 7630 and a coil spring CS1 formed from a coil spring.

The arcuate plate portion 7610 has a spring fixing projection 7611, which is a projection into which the coil spring CS1 is fitted, at a position facing the distal end portion of the engaging portion 7630 on the inner peripheral side surface.

The extension portion 7620 is a portion that is inserted through the second elongated hole 7432 in the assembled state, and when pushed radially inward against the elastic force of the coil spring CS1, the extension tip is It is configured with an extension length that protrudes inward from the inner peripheral surface of the ring member 7344R2.

The engaging portion 7630 has a dimension in the width direction that is slightly shorter than the dimension in the width direction of the first elongated hole 7431, and extends to a length that passes through the deformed through hole 7521 of the thick portion 7520 in the assembled state. (See FIG. 75(a)).

As will be described later, the engaging member 7344R3 has both a function as a member that receives a load from the release member 346 and is displaced, and a function that positions the ring member 7344R2 with respect to the disk member 7344R1. Therefore, the number of members can be reduced.

A method of assembling the right disk cam 7344R will be described with reference to FIG. 78(a) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R, and FIG. 78(b) is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb in FIG. 78(a). 78(c) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R, FIG. 78(d) is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIId in FIG. 78(c), and FIG. 78(f) is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 78(e).

78(a), 78(b), 78(c) and 78(d) show a state in which only the engaging member 7344R3 is inserted into the disc member 7344R1, and FIG. ) and FIG. 78(f) show a state in which the ring member 7344R2 and the engaging member 7344R3 are inserted into the disc member 7344R1. In order to facilitate understanding, the arcuate plate portion 7610 and the coil spring CS1 are omitted in FIGS. 78(b), 78(d) and 78(f).

As a method for assembling the right disc cam 7344R, first, the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3 is inserted into the first elongated hole 7431 (see FIGS. 78(a) and 78(b)). As described above, the widthwise dimension of the second long hole 7432 is made shorter than the widthwise dimension of the engaging portion 7630, thereby preventing the engaging portion 7630 from being erroneously inserted into the second long hole 7432. can be prevented. Therefore, erroneous assembly can be prevented.

Next, along the extending direction of the second long hole 7432, the engaging member 7344R3 is slid in the depth direction of FIG. Moving.

At this position after the movement, the fixing projection 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1, and the engaging member 7344R3 suppresses positional displacement of the disk member 7344R1 in the circumferential direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 78(d)) and engages. The member 7344R3 can be held immovable in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1.

In addition, the engaging member 7344R3 is restricted from moving in the circumferential direction by the return portion 7433 . This will be explained. First, in a state where the engaging portion 7630 is inserted into the first elongated hole 7431, the return portion 7433 is driven outside the second elongated hole 7432 (see FIG. 78(b)). Next, when the engaging member 7344R3 is slid in the extending direction of the second elongated hole 7432, the contact between the engaging member 7344R3 and the return portion 7433 in the vertical direction is released, and the return portion 7433 is moved to the second position by elastic recovery force. It enters inside the long hole 7432 (see FIG. 78(d)).

When the tip of the return portion 7433 is in contact with the extension portion 7620 of the engaging member 7344R3 in the state of entering the second long hole 7432, the contact direction is the longitudinal direction of the return portion 7433 (the deformation resistance is large). direction) (see FIG. 78(d)), movement of the extended portion 7620 (movement to the right in FIG. 78(f)) is suppressed. As a result, it is possible to restrict the movement of the engaging member 7344R3 in the circumferential direction, thereby preventing the engaging member 7344R3 from being displaced during operation.

After the engagement member 7344R3 is held by the disc member 7344R1, the ring member 7344R2 is inserted from the opening side of the disc member 7344R1 while the engagement member 7344R3 is pushed radially inward of the disc member 7344R1. do. By releasing the load from the engaging member 7344R3, the elastic force of the coil spring CS1 causes the engaging portion 7630 to move along the radially outward direction D7. This movement causes the engaging portion 7630 to be housed in the equally divided recessed portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2, thereby fixing the ring member 7344R2 to the disk member 7344R1.

Through the steps described above, the right disk cam 7344R can be easily assembled. The right disc cam 7344L has a mirror-symmetrical shape of the right disc cam 7344R, and can be assembled in the same process as the right disc cam 7344R.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81, the operation of the engaging member 7344R3 when the disk cam 7344 rotates backward will be described. 79(a), 79(b), 80(a), 80(b) and 81 are partial cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 7300 taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 79(a), 79(b), 80(a), 80(b), and 81, the releasing member 7346, the rotating pawl member 7347 and the disk cam 7344 are mainly illustrated, and the other Illustration of unnecessary parts is omitted.

The rotary pawl member 7347 in this embodiment differs from that in the first embodiment in the length of the guide elongated hole 7347b. That is, as shown in FIG. 80(a), the protruding pin 346b is configured to be the end of movement at the raised position when the engaging rib 344c abuts from below and passes through.

The releasing member 7346 differs from the first embodiment in that the upper rear portion of the main body portion (the upper right portion in FIG. 80(a)) is obliquely shaved in order to minimize interference with the engaging rib 344c.

79(a), 79(b), 80(a), 80(b) and 81 show how the disk cam 7344 rotates backward (clockwise direction in Fig. 79(a)). are shown in chronological order.

FIG. 79(a) shows a state in which the engaging member 7344R3 of the right disc cam 7344R abuts against the releasing member 7346 and the releasing member 7346 begins to rotate. ), and FIG. 80(a) shows a state in which the engaging member 7344R3 has been pushed into the disc member 7344R1 to the end, and M6-2. 80(b) shows a state in which the disk member 7344R1 has further rotated backward from the state shown in FIG. 80(a), and FIG. 81 shows the state shown in FIG. The state after the 7344R rotates backward and the engaging member 7344R3 is separated from the releasing member 7346 is illustrated. 79(a), 79(b), 80(a) and 80(b), the state ( small angle state) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 79(a), immediately after the engaging member 7344R3 and the releasing member 7346 start contacting each other, the elastic force of the coil spring CS1 is set larger than that of the second spring SP2. Therefore, the engaging member 7344R3 is not pushed inward, and is maintained in an outwardly projecting state.

As shown in FIG. 79(b), when the engaging portion 346d of the releasing member 7346 abuts against the outermost side surface of the engaging member 7344R3, the releasing member 7346 and the rotating claw member 7347 are in a small angle state. be done.

In this embodiment, the release member 7346 rotates forward, and the rotation pawl member 7347 is pressed against the side surface of the insertion hole 321c of the lower frame member 320 to form a small angle state. The disc cam 7344 is moved in such a positional relationship that the outer peripheral surface of the engaging member 7344R3 rubs against the releasing member 346 while the inner peripheral surface is in contact with the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 of the engaging rib 344c. are placed (see FIG. 80(a)).

That is, as shown in FIG. 80(a), the release member 7346 rotates toward the small angle state due to the rotation of the disk cam 7344, and when the release member 7346 becomes unable to rotate further (small angle state), the release member From 7346 , a load is applied to the engaging member 7344 R3 to push the engaging member 7344 R3 radially inward of the disk cam 7344 .

As shown in FIG. 79(b), in a state where the engaging member 7344R3 protrudes radially outward, the backward rotation cannot be continued. , the engaging member 7344R3 is pushed radially inward (see FIG. 80(a)). In this pushed state, the engaging portion 7630 is arranged radially inward of the minimum diameter portion of the deformed through-hole 7521 .

Therefore, since the load in the circumferential direction is not transmitted to the ring member 7344R2 via the engaging portion 7630, the disk member 7344R1 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. Also, the ring member 7344R2 does not follow the rotation and maintains its posture.

Due to this shift in the amount of rotation, the engaging portion 7630 moves from the originally arranged one equally divided recessed portion 7522 to the different equally divided recessed portion 7522, so that the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 , and rotates relative to each other by one concave portion (72 degrees).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81, when the right disc cam 7344R rotates further, the contact between the engaging member 7344R3 and the releasing member 7346 is released, so that the engaging member 7344R3 protrudes radially outward. , and the engaging portion 7630 is housed in the equally divided recessed portion 7522 again. In this process, the equally divided concave portion 7522 in which the engaging portion 7630 is accommodated is shifted by one.

79(a) to FIG. 81, the arrangement of the engaging rib 344c and the arrangement of the connecting pin 344d arranged in the ring member 7344R2 are equally divided into recessed portions 7522. can be relatively displaced by the arrangement interval (72 degrees) of the recessed portions.

The operation of the engaging member 7344R3 when the disc cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 82(a), 82(b), 83(a) and 83(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 7300 along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 82, the releasing member 7346, the rotary pawl member 7347, and the disk cam 7344 are mainly illustrated, and the illustration of other unnecessary parts is omitted.

FIGS. 82(a) to 83(b) show how the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 82(a)) in chronological order. FIG. 82(a) shows the state immediately before the releasing member 7346 and the engaging member 7344R3 of the right disc cam 7344R abut against each other, and FIG. 82(b) shows that the engaging member 7344R3 FIG. 83(a) shows a state in which the disk cam 7344 rotates forward from the state shown in FIG. 82(b), and FIG. (b) shows the state after the releasing member 7346 and the engaging member 7344R are separated from each other.

As shown in FIGS. 82(a) to 83(b), when the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction, the release member 7346 and the rotary pawl member 7347 rotate in the backward rotation direction (clockwise rotation in FIG. 82(a)). direction), there is no member that restricts the movement of the release member 7346 and the rotation pawl member 7347, and the release member 7346 and the rotation pawl member 7347 apply a load in the forward rotation direction due to the elastic force of the first spring SP1. will only be available.

Therefore, a load that pushes the engaging member 7344R3 radially inward does not occur, and the engaging member 7344R3 is pushed radially outward from the contact of the engaging member 7344R3 to the releasing member 7346 until it is separated from the releasing member 7346. maintain the protruding state. Therefore, when rotating the disk cam 7344 in the forward rotation direction, it is possible to prevent the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 from rotating relative to each other.

By switching the rotation direction of the disk cam 7344, it is possible to switch whether the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 rotate relative to each other. Therefore, in the direction of rotation in which relative rotation does not occur (see FIGS. 82 and 83), it is possible to repeatedly perform the effect of tilting the tilting device 310 with the same tilt width, as in the first embodiment. Unlike the first embodiment, the tilting width of the tilting device 310 can be changed in the rotation direction (see FIGS. 79, 80, and 81) that causes relative rotation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the direction of rotation of the disc member 7344R1 that relatively rotates the disc member 744R1 and the ring member 7344R2 is the direction opposite to the direction of releasing the fixation by the rotating claw member 7347 (the direction in which the fixation is not released). Since they match, the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be rotated relative to each other while the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state (see FIG. 84) (the posture is maintained constant).

As a result, a state in which the player does not pay attention (a state in which the tilting device 310 stops) is used as a state for changing the relative posture between the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 in a place invisible to the player. be able to.

With reference to FIGS. 84 and 85, it will be described that, according to the present embodiment, a plurality of modes for raising the tilting device 310 from the first state can be formed. 84 and 85 are cross-sectional views of manipulation device 7300 taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 84, the tilting device 310 can be immediately moved from the first state to the second state shown in FIG. 85 shows a state in which the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disk member 7344R1 in a displaceable phase relationship, and in FIG. 84 and 85, the state in which the equally divided concave portion 7522 is rotated relative to the disk member 7344R1 by one portion is illustrated, and in both FIGS. A contact state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, according to the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 is immediately (without rotating the disk cam 7344R2) by releasing the fixation by the rotating claw member 347 from the first state. You can change the range of movement.

That is, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 84, the tilting device 310 moves to the second state (the state where the tilting device 310 has moved to the uppermost end of the movement range).

On the other hand, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. Moves until it is sunk below the 2nd state.

Therefore, by releasing the fixation by the rotating claw member 347, the position to which the tilting device 310 reaches immediately (without rotation of the disk cam 7344) can be changed from the first state by the upward movement. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of presentations by the operation of the tilting device 310, and to improve the attention of the operation device 7300 as a presentation device.

Next, a pachinko machine 8010 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 179. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the front side of the operation device 300 is exposed, but the pachinko machine 8010 in the eighth embodiment has a covering cover 370 that covers the lower portion of the operation device 300 from the front side. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. 86, the front side of the paper surface is the front (front) side, and the back side of the paper surface is the rear (rear) side. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. ) side. Further, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the drawing (see, for example, FIG. 86) indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 8010, respectively. Also, the definition of this direction is the same in the description referring to the drawings before FIG.

First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 8010 will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 90. FIG. 86 is a front view of the pachinko machine 8010 in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 87 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened (deployed) with respect to the outer frame 11, FIG. 88 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state (deployment) in which the back pack 92 is opened from the inner frame 12 with the inner frame 12 opened from the outer frame 11, and FIG. FIG. 90 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 is opened (deployed). FIG. 90 shows the pachinko machine 8010 with the front frame 14 removed. It is a front view of. Note that, in FIG. 90, the reference numerals for the internal configuration of the game board 13 are omitted for the sake of convenience.

The outer frame 11 is formed in the shape of a frame whose upper and lower sides are made of wooden plates and whose left and right sides are made of aluminum plates and whose four sides are fixed. The pachinko machine 8010 is installed in the game hall by fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment. In the pachinko machine 8010, the outer frame 11 is not an essential configuration, but has the same inner shape as the outer frame 11 or the outer frame 11, and the inner frame 12 support structure (hinge 18 etc.) and the locking structure of the outer frame 11. It is good also as a structure with which the member which has is equipped with the game hall.

As shown in FIG. 89, the front frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12. In a front view, the left side is the rotation base end side (opening/closing base end side) and the right side is the rotation tip side. (opening/closing front end side) is rotatable forward.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 88, the back pack unit 94 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12, with the left side as the base end of rotation (opening/closing base end) and the right side as viewed from the front. It is rotatable rearward as the moving tip side (opening/closing tip side).

As shown in FIG. 87, the inner frame 12 is provided with a locking mechanism 20RK at the tip of rotation thereof, and has a function of locking the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 to the outer frame 11 so that they cannot be opened. , the front frame 14 has a function of locking the inner frame 12 so that the front frame 14 cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is unlocked by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 of the locking mechanism 20RK exposed on the front of the pachinko machine 8010 as shown in FIG. By doing so, they are canceled respectively.

The front frame 14 is rotatably attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 . As shown in FIG. 86, front door mounting brackets 57 and 58 are provided on the rotation proximal end side of the front frame 14. The front door mounting brackets 57 and 58 (the bracket 57 is a cylindrical portion and the bracket 58 is a shaft) are provided as shown in FIG. The front frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 12 by engaging the metal plate having a hole with the inner frame 12 .

Specifically, the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the front end of the inner frame 12 to the front side at a position below the hinge 19 on the upper side of the inner frame 12, and the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the tip to the back side. It is pivotally supported by a pivot plate portion 12e having a fitting recess 12e1 (see FIG. 126) provided with a fitting size. In addition, the front door mounting bracket 58 has a stepped columnar shape projecting upward from the hinge 19 on the lower side of the inner frame 12 (in a configuration in which columns with different diameters are connected vertically, the diameter of the upper column It is axially supported by being externally fitted on a support pin 19a having a shape with a small diameter.

As shown in FIG. 89, the front frame 14 is formed in a rectangular shape having substantially the same outer shape as the inner frame 12 . The front frame 14 includes a body frame 14a formed of a metal plate in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. The front frame 14 is configured by fastening and fixing various members (electrical decoration parts 8029 to 8033, etc.) and units (operation device 300, operation handle 51, etc.) to the front and rear sides of the body frame 14a.

The front frame 14 is provided with a window portion 14c having an opening smaller than that of the glass unit 16 so that the outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 16 is not exposed when viewed from the front (see FIG. 86). Since the window portion 14c is covered from the back side by the glass unit 16, the front frame 14 to which the glass unit 16 is attached covers substantially the entire front side of the inner frame 12. - 特許庁Therefore, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 89) of the front frame 14. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 89, the glass unit 16 includes a pair of front and rear transparent glasses 16a and 16b having an outer shape larger than the window portion 14c and having transparency, and a fixing frame (not shown) that integrates the transparent glasses 16a and 16b. and have. The fixed frame is made of synthetic resin and formed into an annular shape that is one size larger than the transparent glasses 16a and 16b, and the outer peripheral edges of the transparent glasses 16a and 16b are adhered to the fixed frame so that the glass unit 16 is integrated with double glazing. It is

Although the glass unit 16 is made of transparent glass 16a and 16b and is transparent and colorless, it is not limited to this and may be made of synthetic resin and transparent and colorless. As long as the game area can be visually recognized through 16, it may be formed in a colored transparent form instead of a colorless transparent form.

Around the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, as shown in FIG. 86, a plurality of decorative portions 8029 to 8033 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided. These illumination parts 8029 to 8033 light up or flash in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined reach is reached. In addition, the illumination portion 8030 on the upper side of the window portion 14c incorporates a light emitting means that lights up when a predetermined error such as a shortage of balls to be paid out and a light emitting means that lights up during prize ball payout are built in.

In addition, speaker covers 27 (thin plate members made of punching metal) are provided on the upper right side and the upper left side of the window portion 14c to cover the speaker assemblies 450 that output sound effects according to the game state. . Below the window 14c, as shown in FIG. 86, an upper tray 17 and a lower tray 50 are arranged so as to protrude forward and are vertically arranged side by side.

The upper tray 17 has the function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) and guiding them to the ball shooting unit 112a side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 50 has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 17 . A ball guide opening 53 that opens in the front-rear direction and guides the ball to the lower tray 50 is formed in the rear side surface of the lower tray 50 .

It should be noted that there is no need to separate the upper tray 17 and the lower tray 50 and provide a plurality of portions for storing game balls, and the lower tray 50 is eliminated and only the upper tray 17 is provided, and only one storage section is provided. Also good.

An operation device 300 manually operated by the players is provided on the front side of the upper tray 17 (game ball storage area). The operation device 300 is an operation device used when an effect corresponding to the player's operation is performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 or the like. The operation device 300 may be provided at a different location such as the periphery of the lower tray 50 other than the upper tray 17, or may be provided at a plurality of locations. Alternatively, a configuration in which information can be input by another operation method such as a touch sensor or a non-contact sensor may be used.

A passage forming unit 140 is attached to the rear side of the front frame 14 as shown in FIG. The passage forming unit 140 is molded of synthetic resin, and includes a front door side upper tray passage portion 141 leading to the upper tray 17, a front door side lower tray passage portion 142 leading to the lower tray 50, and a foul ball passage portion 145 ( See FIG. 92).

A put-out ball receptacle 143 that protrudes rearward and is open upward is formed in the upper corner of the passage forming unit 140 (the corner on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14). A passage entrance of the front door side upper tray passage portion 141 and a passage entrance of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 are formed by partitioning the passage 143 to the left and right by a partition wall 144 .

The foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92) forms a passage for discharging game balls that have not reached the game area among the game balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a into the lower tray 50 as foul balls.

As shown in FIG. 89, the foul ball passage portion 145 is provided with a foul ball receiving portion 146 that opens upward. A foul ball received in the foul ball receiving portion 146 is discharged to the lower tray 50 after flowing down the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92). It should be noted that the foul ball passage portion 145 may be connected to the upper plate 17 instead of the lower plate 50 so that the foul ball is discharged to the upper plate 17 .

The foul ball passage portion 145 merges with a ball removal passage 147 (see FIG. 92), which is a passage through which an unfired ball flowing down from the upper tray 17 to the lower tray 50 is guided by the player's ball removal operation. is formed as

On the rear side of the front frame 14, multi-function cover members 171 and 172, which are resin cover members fastened and fixed to the left and right corners of the upper portion, are attached to protrude toward the rear side. On the front side of the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172, a wiring connector for conducting electricity to the electrical decoration part 8030 and the speaker assembly 450, an internal substrate of the electrical decoration parts 8031 and 8032 along the front frame 14, and one end An electronic board to which the other end of the connector to which the parts are connected is connected is arranged, and the electronic board and the connector are covered with the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 .

In the portion covered by the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 of the front frame 14, there are a wiring groove 14h communicating toward the left and right electric decoration parts 8031 and 8032, and an electric decoration part 8031, 8031, 8031, 8031, 8031 and 8031, An electronic board 14i is formed (see FIG. 103) to which the wiring drawn out from the 8032 is connected, and the terminal of each wiring is pulled out rearward through the wiring through groove 14h and inserted into the electronic board 14i from the rear side. be

Therefore, when the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 are removed (see FIG. 103), electricity is supplied to the illumination section 8030 and the speaker assembly 450 from the back side of the front frame 14 (from the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 89). A connector for conductive wiring and a connector whose one end is connected to the inner substrate of the electrical decoration parts 8031 and 8032 can be easily inserted into and removed from the electronic substrate 14i.

A pair of multifunctional cover members 171 attached to the front end of the front frame 14 are arranged above and below the front end of the inner frame 12 to support the base plate 60 of the game board 13. FIG. 126) is opposed to the upper device in the front and rear direction, and can abut against each other depending on the situation, the details of which will be described later.

On the back side of the front frame 14, a container-shaped member made of a resin material and having an open front side is disposed in contact with the front frame 14 at the lower corner and formed between the front frame 14 and the front frame 14. A long cover member 173 that accommodates the wiring is attached from the rear side. The long cover member 173 is configured such that its cross-sectional area decreases as it moves from the rotation distal end side of the front frame 14 to the rotation base end side, and the lower wall portion 173a that forms the lower side of the space for accommodating the wiring is An upper wall portion 173b that is arranged parallel to the lower side of the front frame 14, is arranged above the lower wall portion 173a so as to face the lower wall portion 173a, and constitutes the upper side of the space that accommodates the wiring. Consists of shapes.

The long cover member 173 is a wall portion that is arranged to contact the front frame 14 in the same manner as the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b. An upward extending wall portion 173c extending upward from the wall portion 173b is provided.

The upward extending wall portion 173c is curved so that the end portion of the side connected to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b protrudes in a semicircular shape toward the rotation base end side of the front frame . , a space that can be bent in a semicircular shape in the opposite direction is secured from the upper end of the curved portion, and the movable base end side of the front frame 14 is opened at the upper end.

That is, the wiring accommodated in the upwardly extending wall portion 173c is gently curved in a wavy shape (a wavy shape corresponding to one cycle of a sine wave), and the front frame 14 is rotated from the upper end position of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c. Protruded proximally. Therefore, by bending the wiring at the curved portion of the wiring, it is possible to absorb the positional change of the wiring (see FIG. 96) that occurs when the front frame 14 is opened and closed. It is possible to reduce the risk of disconnection of the wiring.

On the back side of the front frame 14, there are an upwardly extending wall portion 173c of the long cover member 173 (the portion closest to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14) and a part of the main body frame 14a that is the front frame. An inverted cup portion 178 formed of a resin material and having an inverted cup shape opening downward is provided between the vertically elongated plate portion on the base end side of the rotation of 14 .

The reverse cup part 178 is, for example, a part that countermeasures against fraudulent acts such as illegally spreading the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, inserting a piano wire from near the hinge 18 on the lower side, and entering the game area. is. That is, even if the piano wire is inserted between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 from near the hinge 18 on the lower side, the tip of the piano wire enters the inverted cup shape of the inverted cup portion 178 from below. Since the movement of the piano wire can be hindered, the piano wire can be prevented from reaching the game area.

Also, since the reverse cup portion 178 and the long cover member 173 are made of a resin material, it is possible to take measures against cheating by heating the tip of the piano wire. That is, when a piano wire whose tip is heated is inserted and pressed against the reverse cup portion 178, the heat melts the reverse cup portion 178 and allows the long cover member to pass through the reverse cup portion 178. 173 can also be melted. Then, when the piano wire whose tip is heated passes through the long cover member 173, the wiring housed in the front side of the long cover member 173 is burnt out. , can make fraud easier to detect.

In particular, in this embodiment, the wall portion 178a of the reverse cup portion 178 on the side of the long cover 173 has a shape that matches the shape of the long cover member 173 and abuts (approaches) to each other. In addition, since the normal line of the lower surface of the reverse cup portion 178 in the wall portion 178a is directed downward, when the piano wire enters the reverse cup portion 178 from below, it can be pressed against the lower surface of the wall portion 178a. Since the long cover 173 can also be melted with a high probability when the reverse cup portion 178 is melted, it is possible to easily detect fraudulent acts.

The wall portion 178a has the effect of guiding the piano wire in the horizontal direction when the tip of the piano wire is not heated. That is, when the piano wire inserted through the gap forced into the rotation base end of the front frame 14 reaches the upper bottom of the reverse cup portion 178, when the piano wire is inserted deeper, the tip of the piano wire reaches the wall portion. 178a.

Since the wall portion 178a has a shape that matches the curved portion of the upward extending wall portion 173c, when the piano wire is inserted further deeply, the tip of the piano wire moves along the wall portion 178a, and the tip of the piano wire moves along the wall portion 178a. It is guided below the lower wall portion 173a. Furthermore, even if the piano wire is inserted deeply, the tip of the piano wire travels in the space below the lower wall portion 173a toward the rotating tip side of the front frame 14 (progresses in the left-right direction). can be prevented from reaching the game area.

In addition, it is possible to prevent the tip of the piano wire from reaching the game area while preventing the reaction force applied to the person who cheats via the piano wire from increasing. By arranging a detection device for detecting the entrance of the piano wire in the space below 173a, it is possible to detect the fraudulent activity before the fraudulent person escapes, making it easier to secure the fraudulent person. .

That is, even if the piano wire is guided to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, the person who commits the fraud cannot discern it, so he/she will believe that the piano wire is on the way to the game area. . Then, until the tip of the piano wire reaches the game area (for example, until the tip of the piano wire can be seen from the front side through the window part 14c), the action of inserting the piano wire further deeply is naturally given to the person who cheats (the piano wire (without raising suspicion that the plug-in is not working). Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the time it takes for a person who commits a fraudulent act to realize that the fraudulent act has been discovered and to plan an escape.

The detection device may be a photocoupler device, a magnetic sensor, or a button device. Further, the arrangement of the detection device is not limited to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, and various arrangements are permitted. For example, it may be arranged on the locking mechanism 20RK or may be arranged on the rear side portion of the operation handle 51 . In the case where it is arranged on the operating handle 51, for example, a detection device conventionally arranged on the operating handle 51 may also be used to determine whether the piano wire has entered.

The ball shooting unit 112a is a device that is exposed on the front side when the front frame 14 is opened, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 90, this ball shooting unit 112a has an electromagnetic shooting solenoid 701 provided as a shooting device, and a game ball shot by the shooting solenoid 701 is disposed between an inner rail 61 and an outer rail 62. A shooting rail 730 for guiding a game ball so as to be shot toward an area in between and a ball feeding device 720 are provided.

The ball feeding device 720 supplies the game balls stored in the upper tray 17 (see FIG. 89) onto the launch rail 730 one by one. In this case, the supplied game ball is arranged on the projecting path of the plunger 702 provided as the hitting portion in the shooting solenoid 701 . By inputting an electrical signal to the firing solenoid 701, the plunger 702 moves toward the game ball on the firing rail 730, and the game ball is launched toward the game area. The electric actuator of the ball shooting unit 112a is not limited to the shooting solenoid 701, and a shooting motor or the like may be used. A detailed configuration of the ball shooting unit 112a will be described later.

On the left side of the inner frame 12 and to the left of the launch rail 730, as shown in FIG. 90, a board 167 having a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN3 to which the dish passage forming member 160 and harnesses HN1 to HN3 are connected is arranged. is set. The inner frame 12 is provided with a through-hole extending in the front-rear direction through the portion where the disc passage forming member 160 is provided. Fixed.

The plate passage forming member 160 has a main body side upper plate passage portion 161 and a main body side lower plate passage portion 162, as shown in FIG. One end of the main body side upper tray passage portion 161 and the main body side lower tray passage portion 162 is opened toward the back side so as to be able to communicate with a through hole penetrating the inner frame 12 in the front-rear direction. A curved passage is formed in which the direction of the passage changes by 90 degrees (changes from the front-rear direction to the up-down direction) so that the end of the tube is opened downward. In this configuration, the ball dispensed from the dispensing device 133 passes through the through hole of the inner frame 12, enters the dish passage forming member 160 from one end, and is discharged from the other end. be.

When the front frame 14 is closed, the dispensed ball receptacle 143 (see FIG. 89) of the passage forming unit 140 provided on the front frame 14 enters the lower portion of the disc passage forming member 160 . A front door side upper tray passage portion 141 is arranged below the main body side upper tray passage portion 161 , and a front door side lower tray passage portion 142 is arranged below the main body side lower tray passage portion 162 .

As shown in FIG. 90, a shutter 163 is provided on the lower side of the plate passage forming member 160 to restrict the outflow of game balls from the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 and the main body side lower plate passage portion 162. . The shutter 163 is provided so as to be switchable between a blocking position for narrowing the exit portions of both passages to block outflow of the game balls and a permitting position for permitting the outflow of the game balls.

A biasing member (such as a coil spring) is attached to the inner frame 12 to bias the shutter 163 toward the blocking position. It is configured such that the shutter 163 stays at the blocking position by force. As a result, when the front frame 14 is opened in a state in which game balls are stored in the main body side upper tray passage portion 161 or the main body side lower tray passage portion 162, the inconvenience of the stored balls falling out is avoided. there is

On the other hand, when the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12, the shutter 163 is pressed against the biasing force by the outer peripheral portion of the put-out ball socket portion 143 provided in the passage forming unit 140 of the front frame 14. is pushed back to the permissible position. In this state, the main body side upper tray passage portion 161 and the front door side upper tray passage portion 141 communicate with each other, and the main body side lower tray passage portion 162 and the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 communicate with each other, so that the game balls flow down. Permissible.

The substrate 167 includes a connector CN1 to which the harness HN1 is connected, a connector CN2 to which the harness HN2 is connected, and a connector CN3 to which the harness HN3 is connected. The substrate 167 is formed by separate substrates for the portions where the connectors CN1 and CN2 are arranged and the portion where the connector CN3 is arranged. This is because the connectors CN1 and CN2 are used for transmission with the main controller 110, while the connector CN3 is used for transmission with the sound lamp controller 113, and the objects of transmission are different. By doing so, it is intended to prevent malfunction in advance.

The portion below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92. FIG. FIG. 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14 in which constituent members disposed below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 are shown exploded, and FIG. 92 is a window portion of the front frame 14. 14c is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14 in which constituent members disposed below 14c are shown exploded. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, on the front side of the main body frame 14c, is the front side of the upper tray 17 and obliquely above the lower tray 50 to the right. An operation device 300 is provided at the center of the front frame 14 in the left-right direction, and a covering cover 370 is provided on the front side of the operation device 300 .

The covering cover 370 is a member that is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 in a positional relationship that covers the lower portion of the operation device 300 from the front side, and has a lateral width that is approximately the same as the lateral width of the front frame 14 . That is, the left and right end portions of the covering cover 370 are arranged vertically below the electrical decoration portions 8031 and 8032, respectively.

The covering cover 370 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 by fastening portions 370a formed at least at the left and right ends thereof, and a main body curved portion 371 configured in a curved shape in which the left and right central portions protrude toward the front side; Extending downward from the lower edge of the main body curved portion 371 at an intermediate position between the left-right central portion and the left-right end portion of the portion 371 toward the side adjacent to each other in the width direction, they merge at the extending lower end and are viewed from front V. A hanging portion 372 configured in a letter shape and a plate-like member that closes an opening surrounded by the main body curved portion 371 and the hanging portion 372, and is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is made of a main body curved portion 371 or the hanging portion 372. a left flat support portion 374 formed as a flat surface on the upper surface of the left end portion of the main body curved portion 371; and a flat surface formed on the upper surface of the right end portion of the main body curved portion 371. and a support groove 376 which is recessed from the back side of the right side planar support portion 375 and whose recessed width becomes larger (tapered) toward the back side. Prepare for.

The main body curved portion 371 has a rounded front edge, and a rear edge that matches the front edge of the upper plate 17. When the upper plate is assembled (see FIG. 86), the main body curved portion 371 has a curved shape. 17 in the front-rear direction, and the front-side edge of the upper frame member 330 of the operation device 300 connected to the rear left edge 371a. A back middle edge portion 371b abuts against the frame member 330 in the front-rear direction, and the back middle edge portion 371b is connected to the back left edge portion 371a on the opposite side of the back left edge portion 371a. It mainly includes a rear right edge portion 371c that abuts on the ball rental operation portion 40 in the front-rear direction in the assembled state.

The drooping portion 372 covers the operation device 300 from the front side together with the curved portion 371 of the main body, and is located between the right corner cover 380 which is a plate portion on which the operation handle 51 is supported and which is arranged at the right corner of the front frame 14 . It is a portion that prevents access to the operation device 300 from the front side by forming a shape that does not create a gap (a shape that matches the contact position with the right corner cover 380). The drooping portion 372 is positioned on the front side of the recessed portion 15a, which will be described later, by screwing a screw that is inserted from below into the bottom plate on which the recessed portion 15a is formed. It is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate to be formed.

The translucent portion 373 is a portion that allows the light emitted from the operation device 300 to pass through to the front side, and is a portion that can perform an effect with the light, and is formed in a curved shape that matches the shape of the lower frame member 320 of the operation device 300. It is arranged close to the lower frame member 320 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the LED device 341f is arranged to emit light at least upward (see FIG. 32). The arrangement of the LED devices is an arbitrary matter, and in this embodiment, the LED devices 341f are arranged to emit light at least upward and downward. Specifically, there are six LEDs that emit light upward (arranged on the upper surface of the illumination support portion 341e), and two LEDs that emit light downward (arranged on the lower surface of the illumination support portion 341e). , respectively.

The light emitted from the LED device 341f that emits light downward passes through a different number of members depending on the state of the operation device 300. FIG. For example, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state (see FIG. 22), the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward passes through the tilting device 310 and the lower frame member 320, and then passes through the translucent portion 373. do. On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 32), the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward does not pass through the tilting device 310 but passes through the lower frame member 320 and then passes through. Pass through part 373 .

Therefore, for example, when the amount of light emitted from an LED that emits light downward is kept constant, the amount of light visible through the translucent portion 373 is compared to when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. Thus, it is stronger when the tilting device 310 is in the second state. Therefore, while making it unnecessary to change the amount of light emitted from the LED that emits light downward (while reducing the control load by omitting the control for changing the amount of light), the tilting device 310 can be adjusted according to the state change of the tilting device 310 . An effect of changing the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the translucent portion 373 can be performed.

As another effect control method, it is also possible to perform control to change the amount of light emitted from an LED that emits light downward in accordance with a change in the state of the tilting device 310 . For example, as the tilting device 310 changes from the second state (see FIG. 32) to the first state (see FIG. 22), the amount of light is strongly changed (stepwise), while the tilting device 310 changes to the first state (see FIG. 22). The amount of light is controlled to be weaker (stepwise) in accordance with the change from the state 1 to the second state, so that the light visible through the translucent portion 373 accompanying the change in the state of the tilting device 310 is reduced. It is possible to reduce the degree of change in the amount of light in (can be eliminated depending on the setting).

The left flat support portion 374 abuts on the lower end of the electrical decoration portion 8031 at the top and bottom in the assembled state (FIG. 86). That is, when a downward load is applied to the electrical decoration portion 8031 and the electrical decoration portion 8031 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the left plane support portion 374 toward the electrical decoration portion 8031. . As a result, it is possible to suppress downward positional displacement of the electrical decoration part 8031 .

The right plane support portion 375 abuts on the lower end of the electrical decoration portion 8032 at the top and bottom in the assembled state (FIG. 86). That is, when a downward load is applied to the electrical decoration portion 8032 and the electrical decoration portion 8032 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the right side plane support portion 375 toward the electrical decoration portion 8032. . As a result, it is possible to suppress the downward displacement of the electrical decoration part 8032 .

Although the details will be described later, the electrical decoration portions 8031 and 8032 are in contact with the lower surface of the upper panel unit 400, and when the upper panel unit 400 is displaced downward, the electrical decoration portions 8031 and 8032 are separated from each other. An upward reaction force is generated toward the upper panel unit 400 . Therefore, according to this embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported over a wide area by the electrical decoration parts 8031 and 8032 fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a, and the covering cover 370. The force required to prop up the unit 400 can be widely distributed.

The support groove 376 functions as a receiving groove for receiving the lower end portion of the electrical decoration portion 8032 entering from the rear side. In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the electrical decoration part 8032 is in a state of being inserted to the deepest part of the support groove 376. In this state, the front lower corner end of the electrical decoration part 8032 and the front side end of the right plane support part 375 are aligned. matches the position of

The details of the engagement relationship between the support groove 376 and the electrical decoration portion 8032 will be described later. By connecting the covering cover 370 and the electric decoration part 8032 by the engaging relationship described later, the covering cover 370 and the electric decoration part 8032 can be respectively fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a to form an assembled state. A separate fixing part that fastens the covering cover 370 and the electrical decoration part 8032 to each other can be eliminated.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, a resin plate-like plate member 14d is attached to the main body frame 14a (or another member (upper plate 17 The passage forming unit 140 is fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a on the back side of the plate member 14d (or on the front side of the body frame 14a) on the back side of the plate member 14d. The body frame 14a is fastened and fixed to another member (such as a member that constitutes the upper plate 17), and the metal plate-like sheet metal member 150 covers the passage forming unit 140 from the back side. It is fastened and fixed to the member 14d (or another member arranged on the front side of the main body frame 14a (a member constituting the upper plate 17, etc.) sandwiches the main body frame 14a).

Even if the passage forming unit 140 made of synthetic resin is penetrated through the sheet metal member 150 (for example, a wire or piano wire whose tip is heated is pressed and melted), the front frame is It functions as an entry prevention member that prevents entry from the front side of 14 to the inner frame 12 side. That is, even if a wire or the like whose tip is heated is pressed against the sheet metal member 150 made of metal, it will not penetrate, and the wire can be prevented from entering the rear side of the front frame 14 . .

The sheet metal member 150 is formed so as to cover the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145 on the left side in the front view, and the opened front side is the passage forming unit. It mainly includes a fitting box portion 151 to be fitted to 140 and a flat plate-like plate portion 152 covering the back surface of the lower side portions of the foul ball passage portion 145 and the ball extraction passage 147 .

Since the fitting box portion 151 covers the lower end portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145, the fitting box portion 151 covers the lower end portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion. The illustrated wire enters beyond the passage forming unit 140 not only when the passage forming unit 140 penetrates the lower end of the wire 145 in the front-back direction, but also when it penetrates in the left-right direction or the up-down direction. can be prevented.

Since the plate-like portion 152 covers the rear surface of the foul ball passage portion 145 and the ball removal passage 147, when a wire exemplified by the passage forming unit 140 is pressed against the right side of the lower plate 50 to form a through hole, Even so, it is possible to prevent an illegal member from entering the rear side of the passage forming unit 140 . In a case where such a situation occurs, for example, the operation device 300 is removed, and the exemplified wire is pressed against a portion (a portion obliquely upward to the rear of the recessed portion 15a) where the front and back thickness is reduced accordingly. A case is exemplified in which a through-hole is opened by being pressed, and the exemplified wire enters.

Further, the front frame 14 is provided with an operating portion back member 155 fastened from the back side to the left end of the passage forming unit 140, and the operating portion back member 155 is arranged with the cylinder lock 20 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). It is fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a at the upper and lower positions of the position where it is located.

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 91, the operation section back member 155 is a member configured to increase the dimension in the front-rear direction by ribs formed mainly from the outer edge of a plate member elongated in the left-right direction in the front-rear direction. A through hole 156 is drilled in the plate member so that the cylinder lock 20 can pass therethrough, and screws are drilled above and below the through hole 156 to fasten and fix the operation unit back member 155 to the body frame 14a. a pair of insertion holes 157 for connection, a pair of connection insertion holes 158 vertically aligned in a portion (left end) overlapping the back surface side of the passage forming unit 140, and a rotation proximal end from the through hole 156. and an opening/closing regulating portion 159 protruding toward the rear side on the side.

The connection insertion hole 158 is arranged so as to match the connection portion 148 formed at the left end portion of the passage forming unit 140 in the front-rear direction. Here, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 has a columnar shape with an inner diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the connecting through-hole 158 at a position that coincides with the upper connecting through-hole 158 in the front-to-rear direction. and a threaded portion 148b drilled as a hole into which a screw inserted through the connecting insertion hole 158 can be screwed at a position matching the lower connecting insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction. Prepare the Lord.

With this configuration, when the operating portion back member 155 is placed on the back side of the passage forming unit 140 and assembled, the passage forming unit 140 and the operating portion back surface are connected by passing the projecting portion 148a through the connecting insertion hole 158 on the upper side. After aligning with the member 155, the operation portion back member 155 is easily fastened and fixed to the passage forming unit 140 by screwing the screw through the lower connection insertion hole 158 into the screw portion 148b. be able to.

An L-shaped wall portion 158a is formed by forming the left edge of the left end portion of the operation portion back member 155, in which the connecting insertion hole 158 is formed, and the lower edge at right angles. On the other hand, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 includes an extending wall portion 148c extending from the plate forming the skeleton of the passage forming unit 140 to the rear side so as to partition the area. 148c is formed in an L-shape capable of coming into face contact with wall portion 158a in the assembled state (see FIG. 89).

Therefore, when assembling the operation section back member 155 to the passage forming unit 140, the projection 148a is passed through the connection insertion hole 158, and the wall 158a is positioned vertically with respect to the extension wall 148c. The position and posture of the operation section back member 155 with respect to the passage forming unit 140 can be adjusted quickly and easily by the lateral contact.

The opening/closing restricting portion 159 is a portion that faces front and rear of the board support device 600 (see FIG. 90) disposed on the inner frame 12 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), and will be described later in detail. This has the effect of regulating the closing of the front frame 14 by coming into contact with the board support device 600 or the game board 13 under predetermined conditions.

In the present embodiment, the opening/closing restricting portion 159 is a portion extending toward the back side of the operation portion back member 155 and made of synthetic resin. The shape is U-shaped. Therefore, it is more difficult to bend than when it is formed in a flat plate shape with the same plate thickness, and compared to the case where it is extended in a block shape that fills the U-shaped opening, the required amount of material is required while ensuring rigidity. can be reduced. Therefore, the plate thickness is the same as the thickness of the other portions of the operation unit back member 155 (for example, since the strength can be relied on the main body frame 14a, there is no problem even if the strength is low, and the portion is formed as thin as possible). The strength of the open/close restricting portion 159 can be ensured while improving moldability by forming the opening/closing restricting portion 159 with a plate thickness).

Note that the cross-sectional shape of the opening/closing restricting portion 159 is not limited to the U-shape as long as it is a shape that ensures rigidity and maintains the shape. For example, instead of a flat cross section, a curved (wavy) cross section, a stepped cross section, a rectangular wave cross section, or a cylindrical cross section may be used.

Further, the opening/closing restricting portion 159 is not formed as a part of the operation portion rear surface member 155, but is bent and extended from the main body frame 14a to the rear side, or is attached to the rear side from a separate member fixed to the rear side of the main body frame 14a. You may comprise from a metal part extended to. However, in the case where the open/close restricting portion 159 is made of synthetic resin as in the present embodiment, the board support device 600 (see FIG. 90), which is formed of a metal member, may Chipping or denting can be prevented. As a result, a worker who changes the state of the board surface supporting device 600 to attach and detach the game board 13 can be less likely to be injured by touching the cracks or dents formed in the board surface supporting device 600.例文帳に追加

Here, since the opening/closing regulating portion 159 is arranged closer to the rotation proximal end side of the front frame 14 than the through hole 156 in which the cylinder lock 20 is arranged, the cylinder lock arranged further toward the rotation distal end side is arranged. A long interval can be secured between the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 at 20 points. Therefore, in a state in which the opening/closing regulating portion 159 is in contact with the board support device 600 or the game board 13, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the cylinder lock 20 and the locking mechanism 20RK arranged at the leading end of the rotation are locked by mistake. can.

As a route through which a foreign object such as a wire enters, for example, a route passing through a gap in the operation device 300 is assumed. On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the operation device 300 is configured to be entirely separable from the main body frame 14a toward the front side. In other words, since the structure of the operation device 300 is completed on the front side of the main body frame 14a, it is difficult to enter the rear surface of the main body frame 14a even if the operation device 300 is traced through the gap.

A harness HN3 (see FIG. 96) for supplying power to the operation device 300 is inserted through a wiring through hole 14a1 (see FIG. 103) drilled in the front-rear direction of the body frame 14a at the right end position of the long cover member 173. However, the harness HN3 is connected to the operation device 300 via a connector (not shown) fixed to the lower corner of the right outer peripheral wall of the protective cover device 350 (see FIG. 57).

As a result, even if a foreign object such as a wire enters the inside of the operation device 300 through the gap of the operation device 300, the wire or the like can reach the harness HN3 connected to the outside of the operation device 300 having a substantially case shape. Therefore, foreign matter such as wires can be easily prevented from entering the back side of the body frame 14a.

It should be noted that the foreign matter entering the operation device 300 may be liquid. For example, a player who feels bad about the result of a game may pour drinking water or the like on the pachinko machine 10 . At that time, the operation device 300 in a convenient position is likely to fall prey to being splashed with drinking water. There is a risk of

Furthermore, if a liquid such as drinking water enters behind the body frame 14a, it may cause a failure of the electronic substrate or the like. Since the operation device 300 is separably independent, it is possible to prevent liquid such as drinking water poured on the operation device 300 from entering the back side of the body frame 14a.

A concave portion 15a is formed in a T-shape when viewed from above on the upper surface of the bottom plate of the lower tray unit 15 (the surface facing the operation device 300). The recessed portion 15a is configured as a deep recessed portion. It does not have a perfect case shape, and gaps are formed here and there (for example, see FIG. 13, the transmission hole 321a and the opening 325 correspond to the gaps). The concave portion 15a serves to temporarily store the falling liquid.

In the operation device 300, the drive motor 342 is arranged closer to the rear side of the opening 325, so the tilting device 310 functions as an umbrella (see FIGS. 13 and 17(b)) and is connected to wiring. 17(b) and 18), the drive motor 342 is exposed to liquid such as drinking water. It is possible to prevent it from being directly applied and broken down.

Also, since the voice coil motor 352 communicates in the vertical direction through the transmission hole 321a, it may be exposed to liquid such as drinking water. The liquid only adheres to the vibrating surface (upper surface), and the adhered liquid flows down the front side due to the inclination of the vibrating surface itself of the voice coil motor 352 (see FIGS. 13 and 22). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the voice coil motor 352 from breaking down.

With the above-described configuration, even if a liquid such as drinking water is splashed on the player on his way home, the next player can continue playing normally by simply wiping off the touched portion of the upper surface of the operation device 300. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the maintenance time of the operation device 300 from putting pressure on the business hours.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, a binding movable member 180 is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 on the back side of the main body frame 14a. Next, the binding movable member 180 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96. FIG. 93 to 96 illustrate a state in which the passage forming unit 140 and the sheet metal member 150 are removed from the front frame 14, as in FIG.

93(a) is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 93(b) is a front perspective view of the movable binding member 180 in which the released state and the fixed state of the movable binding member 180 are shown side by side. be. In FIG. 93(b), the movable binding member 180 in the released state is shown on the upper side, and the movable binding member 180 in the fixed state is shown on the lower side.

The binding movable member 180 is fixed in the assembled state (see FIG. 86) and is a member that binds the harnesses HN1 to HN3 extended leftward from the upper end of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c.

In the present embodiment, the harness HN1 connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 92) and the harness HN2 connected to the ball rental operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) are connected to the binding movable member 180 without a relay board. They are guided and bound to the binding movable member 180 respectively.

On the other hand, the harnesses connected to the electrical decorations 8029 to 8033, the operation device 300, or the frame button 22 (see FIG. 86) are once connected to the relay board arranged in the space on the front side of the long cover member 173. , a bundle of extension harnesses HN3 is directed from the relay board to the binding movable member 180, and the extension harnesses HN3 are bound to the binding movable member 180 (see FIG. 96).

The binding movable member 180 is a member formed of a synthetic resin material, and is rotated by a main body portion 181 fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d from the back side and a screw fastened and fixed to the main body portion 181 in the vertical direction. A movable arm portion 182 that is pivotally supported, and one side surface of the movable arm portion 182 along the lower edge of the movable arm portion 182 (the side facing the main body portion 181 in FIG. 93(a)). A pair of highly flexible binding arm portions 183 extending from the opposite side surface) and the other side surface in the rotation direction of the movable arm portion 182 (the side opposite to the main body portion 181 in FIG. 93(a) At a position (intermediate position) between a pair of locking portions 184, which are U-shaped portions in top view and can lock the binding arm portions 183, and the pair of binding arm portions 183 A temporary fixing portion 185 extending downward from the lower edge of the movable arm portion 182 and having an opening is mainly provided.

In the binding movable member 180 , the binding arm portion 183 is formed with high flexibility, while the other portion is formed at least with lower flexibility (higher rigidity) than the binding arm portion 183 .

The body portion 181 includes a portion to be fixed 181a having a substantially horseshoe-shaped cross section and a through-hole in the center through which a screw is passed, and projecting from the left and right lower corners of the portion to be fixed 181a toward the plate member 14d. A pair of detent protrusions 181b provided, and an intermediate stop portion extending downward from the lower edge of the front side end portion of the fixed portion 181a, and the extending tip thereof curving close to the plate member 14d side. 181c, a plate-shaped support plate portion 181d (see FIG. 96(a)) extending leftward along the lower edge of the fixed portion 181a, and a portion disposed on the upper portion of the support plate portion 181d. and a cylindrical fastening portion 181e formed of a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the diameter of the head of the screw to be fastened.

The plate member 14d includes a hole group 14d1 at a position where the binding movable member 180 is fixed, which is composed of through holes arranged in the same arrangement as the fixed portion 181a and the pair of anti-rotation portions 181b.

When the screws passing through the fixed portion 181a are fastened and fixed to the corresponding fastening holes of the hole group 14d1 of the plate member 14d, the pair of anti-rotation protrusions 181b are fitted into the corresponding fitting holes of the hole group 14d1. As a result, the binding movable member 180 can be prevented from rotating around the screw penetrating the fixed portion 181a during fastening, and the posture of the binding movable member 180 with respect to the plate member 14d can be determined.

The intermediate retaining portion 181c maintains the harnesses HN1 to HN3 between them and the plate member 14d. In the present embodiment, by narrowing the distance between the extension end (lower end) and the plate member 14d, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be prevented from slipping down, and the center of the harnesses can be positioned on the plate member 14d side. The curved shape along the arranged circle secures a large cross-sectional area of the region (the region sandwiched between the plate member 14d and the intermediate stopper portion 181c) that accommodates the harnesses HN1 to HN3 while suppressing stress concentration due to deformation. can do.

The support plate portion 181d forms a flat surface that guides the rotation of the movable arm portion 182, and the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e fits inside the portion on the base end side of the movable arm portion 182 to hold the movable arm portion 182 in place. Pivot (see Figure 96).

The movable arm portion 182 has a proximal end that is smoothly connected to a plane OS1 that is offset from the axial support position of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, with a portion that is externally and pivotally supported by the cylindrical fastening portion 181e as a proximal end. 182a and an elongated thin plate portion 182b provided continuously on the opposite side of the base end portion 182a from the pivotal support position.

The base end portion 182a includes the left and right ends (the portion where the straight line connecting to the axis is parallel to the plane OS1) and the back side end (the portion closest to the plane OS1) of the outer circumference of the cylindrical portion that is fitted onto the cylindrical fastening portion 181e. Extending from each of the adjacent portions are rotational sidewalls. Each side wall is formed in an arc shape in which the centers of curvature radii are arranged on the same side. equal to the thickness.

Therefore, the base end portion 182a maintains higher rigidity than the thin plate portion 182b. In this embodiment, the base end portion 182a is designed with a design concept (high rigidity) that does not intend elastic deformation, and the thin plate portion 182b is designed with a design concept (low rigidity) that intends elastic deformation depending on the situation. .

Since a pair of binding arm portions 183 are configured to have the same shape, one will be described and the description of the other will be omitted. The binding arm portion 183 has a small width portion 183a formed in the vicinity of the tip portion with a width equivalent to the width of the root, and a large width portion 183b formed wider than the small width portion 183a alternately at regular intervals. It is formed. In the fixed state, the binding arm portion 183 is inserted from below into the through hole formed between the locking portion 184 and the movable arm portion 182 (see FIG. 93(b)).

The large width portion 183b of the binding arm portion 183 is formed to be slightly thicker than the small width portion 183a. In this embodiment, a space can be secured on the inner peripheral side of the binding arm portion 183 by forming the thickened portion on the outer peripheral side in the fixed state (see the lower side of FIG. 93(b)).

The engaging portion 184 is formed in a large opening 184a formed on the side of the movable arm portion 182 and on the opposite side of the movable arm portion 182 across the large opening 184a, and has an opening width larger than that of the large opening 184a. and a small opening 184b (see FIG. 96).

The large opening 184a is sized to allow the binding arm 183 to pass through regardless of the position of the binding arm 183, and the small opening 184b allows the small width portion 183a of the binding arm 183 to pass through. , and the large-width portion 183b are of such a size that they cannot be passed through (locked).

According to this embodiment, when the binding arm portion 183 is to be moved relative to the locking portion 184, it is arranged on the side of the large opening 184a (the side where the inner area surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 becomes smaller). When the binding arm portion 183 is to be locked to the locking portion 184, by arranging it on the side of the small opening 184b, the size (tightness) of the inner area surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 can be easily adjusted. can be adjusted.

The temporary fixing portion 185 has a through hole through which a binding band can be inserted in the central portion thereof. Even if the binding arm portion 183 breaks due to long-term use and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 cannot be bound, a commercially available binding band can be inserted through the through hole of the temporary fixing portion 185 and fixed. , harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be bundled.

A movable range of the binding movable member 180 will be described. 94(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and FIG. 94(b) is a partial cross section of the front frame 14 taken along line XCIVb-XCIVb in FIG. 94(a). FIG. 95(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and FIG. 95(b) is the front frame along line XCVb-XCVb in FIG. 95(a). 14 is a partial cross-sectional view of FIG.

94(a) and 94(b) show a state in which the movable arm 182 is closest to the plate member 14d (one limit state of the movable range), and FIGS. 95(a) and 95 ( In b), the movable arm portion 182 rotates away from the plate member 14d and comes into contact with the vertically elongated metal portion constituting the left portion of the body frame 14a (the other limit state of the movable range). is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, the movable arm portion 182 is configured to be rotatable about 160 degrees about an axis parallel to the rotation axis of the front frame 14 (an axis pointing in the vertical direction). Considering the situation in which the pachinko machines 8010 are installed in the amusement arcade (a situation in which the pachinko machines 8010 are arranged side by side and are rotated by 90 degrees or more, there is a risk of collision with the adjacent pachinko machine 8010), this angle is normally used. It is sufficiently larger than the rotation angle required for the front frame 14 when opening and closing.

Therefore, during normal use, the movable arm 182 cannot be elastically deformed and cannot be rotated relative to the main body 181 (the range between the state shown in FIG. 94 and the state shown in FIG. 95). Since there is no movable arm portion 182, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the movable arm portion 182 will be deteriorated and broken due to elastic deformation.

Next, the manner in which the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported will be described. Since the arrangement of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is defined by being supported by the binding movable member 180, it is possible to prevent, for example, accidental pinching between the outer frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and disconnection.

FIG. 96(a) is a schematic rear view of the movable binding member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96(b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96(a). FIG. 96(c) is a schematic rear view of the movable binding member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96(d) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96(c).

96(a) and 96(b) show one limit state of the binding movable member 180, and FIGS. 96(c) and 96(d) show the other limit state of the binding movable member 180. is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 96, the intermediate stop portion 181c is located at a position moved from the opening opened leftward in the upper end portion of the upward extending wall portion 173c to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. be. That is, since the intermediate stop portion 181c and the opening opened toward the left at the upper end portion of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c are on the same horizontal line, the upper end portion of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c is extended from the upwardly extending wall portion 173c. The harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be extended substantially horizontally and supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c.

Since the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c near the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, which is the pivotal support position of the movable arm portion 182, the harness HN1 on the opposite side of the upward extending wall portion 173c sandwiching the intermediate stop portion 181c. . . . HN3 can be shaped along the shape of the movable arm portion 182 of the binding movable member 180 . As a result, as shown in FIGS. 96(b) and 96(d), the bending portions of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are curved, and extreme bending deformation can be prevented.

Further, by arranging the engaging portion 184 on the side close to the plate member 14d, the area surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 can be arranged on the opposite side of the plate member 14d with the movable arm portion 182 interposed therebetween. Therefore, especially when the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 96(b)), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be curved with a sufficiently large radius of curvature. As a result, disconnection due to bending of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be prevented.

97(a) and 97(b) are schematic top views of the front frame 14, the inner frame 12, the movable binding member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, which schematically illustrate the movable binding member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3. be. 97(a) shows one limit state of the movable binding member 180, and FIG. 97(b) shows the other limit state of the movable binding member 180. As shown in FIG.

97(a) and 97(b), the rotation center point P57 indicating the central axis position of the front door mounting bracket 57 (see FIG. 86) is illustrated, and the front frame 14 and inner frame 12 are schematically shown. The imaginary lines schematically show the members fixed to the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and pivotally supported at the rotation center point P57, respectively. The rotation center point P57 is shown as the rotation axis of the front frame 14. Similarly to the front frame 14, the binding movable member 180 fixed to the front frame 14 also rotates about the rotation center point P57 with respect to the inner frame 12. Rotate.

From one limit state shown in FIG. 97(a) to the other limit state shown in FIG. 97(b), the proximal end portion 182a of the movable arm portion 182 rotates around the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, thereby moving the internal Since it corresponds to the opening and closing of the frame 12 and the front frame 14, a large load is not applied to the thin plate portion 182b, and deformation of the thin plate portion 182b can be suppressed, thereby improving durability (Fig. 96 ( b), see also FIG. 96(d)).

As shown in FIGS. 97(a) and 97(b), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the binding movable member 180 are connected to the main body of the front frame 14 regardless of whether the front frame 14 is opened or closed with respect to the inner frame 12. It is routed along a route that passes near the vertically elongated metal portion (the portion with which the base end portion 182a of the movable arm portion 182 abuts in FIG. 96(d)) that constitutes the left portion of the frame 14a. That is, by forcibly detouring the harnesses HN1 to HN3, it is possible to prevent the curved portions of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from moving toward the front end of the front frame .

As a result, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from interfering with the work performed by the operator when the front frame 14 is opened and closed, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 fit ( 96(b) and 97(a)).

In this embodiment, the intermediate stop portion 181c is arranged vertically above the reverse cup portion 178 regardless of the position of the movable arm portion 182 (see FIG. 91). The harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c arranged vertically above the reverse cup portion 178. For example, by heating the tip of a wire or piano wire to a high temperature, the reverse cup portion 178 is melted and penetrated. , it is possible to take countermeasures against a fraudulent act of inserting a wire between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12. - 特許庁

That is, when the wire is pressed against the lower surface of the reverse cup portion 178, melted, penetrates the wire, and advances toward the game area, when the wire advances vertically upward from the upper bottom portion of the reverse cup portion 178, the temperature rises. The tips of the heated wires are pressed against the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the intermediate fixing portion 181c. As a result, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are burnt out and rendered non-conductive.

By controlling to output an error signal and sound an alarm (to display an error screen) when the continuity of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is interrupted, fraud can be quickly discovered. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent person from gaining fraudulent profits.

More specifically, since the harness HN1 is connected to the operating handle 51 (see FIG. 92) as described above, if the harness HN1 is burned out, the ball can be shot even by rotating the operating handle 51. Gone. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period until the fraudulent act is discovered after the fraudulent act is committed (the fraudulent act can be detected early).

In this case, after inserting a wire into the game area and tampering with the game area (for example, after bending a nail to make it easier to illegally win a prize), the ball is inserted into the first prize opening 64 (see FIG. 2) or the like. Since it is possible to make it impossible to shoot balls to a person who commits a fraudulent act of illegally obtaining a prize ball by winning a prize, it is possible to prevent an illegal profit from being given. That is, it is possible to make it impossible to commit a specific fraudulent act.

Also, since the harness HN2 is connected to the ball lending operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) as described above, when the harness HN2 is burned out, the ball lending button 42 (see FIG. 89) and the return button 43 (see FIG. 89) is disabled. Therefore, a person who commits fraud may not be able to collect the bills or balls for the balance of the card inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) due to his/her own fraud. Therefore, it can act as a deterrent against fraud.

Furthermore, in order to eliminate the risk of being unable to collect bills and balls for the balance of the card inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown), the card unit (ball lending unit) Unit) is 0 yen, but the player commits the fraudulent act without leaving the seat, so the gaming machine store can easily notice the fraudulent act.

In the first place, when the connection of the harness HN2 is cut off, a disconnection error (CR error) of the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) is output, and the disconnection error (CR error) is confirmed at the game machine shop. Thus, the possibility of fraud can be easily grasped.

98 is a front view of the passage forming unit 140. FIG. In FIG. 98, the outer shape of the sheet metal member 150 and the outer shape of the ball guide opening 53 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 98 , the ball guide opening 53 is arranged at the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the lower end of the foul ball passage portion 145 . In this embodiment, the lower end portion of the front door side lower dish passage portion 142 occupies an area of about 2/3 of the lateral width dimension of the ball guide opening 53 in the left portion of the ball guide opening 53, and the foul ball passage portion 145 is partitioned by a partition plate portion 53a so as to occupy the remaining area on the right side of the ball guide opening 53 (an area about 1/3 of the lateral width of the ball guide opening 53).

The front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 are passages extending from the payout ball receiving portion 143 and the foul ball receiving portion 146, respectively, so that the ball can flow down toward the lower tray 50. , S-shaped paths SL1 and SL2 whose extension directions are directed (switched) to the right and left sides at least once each are provided.

Due to the S-shaped path SL1, it is possible to increase the flow path length of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 while keeping the vertical dimension of the passage forming unit 140 short, so that the liquid stays inside the front door side lower tray passage portion 142. The number of possible spheres can be increased. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of balls that can stay on the upstream side of the lower tray 50 while securing a large vertical dimension of the window portion 14c (see FIG. 86). The large number of balls that can be temporarily placed on the lower tray 50 (and its upstream side) reduces the stress of ball replenishment given to the player (when the balls for 50 minutes of the lower tray run out, the balls are removed from the senryo box). It is possible to configure the pachinko machine 8010 capable of suppressing the stress caused by being requested to replenish.

The front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 are respectively provided with bend regions NEa1, NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2 as regions in which the extension direction is bent in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, and they are common. Features That is, the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 includes a first bending region NEa1 formed on the downstream side and a second bending region NEa1 formed upstream of the first bending region NEa1 and having a characteristic portion thereof reversed left and right. and an area NEa2.

Further, the foul ball passage portion 145 includes a first bending region NEb1 formed on the downstream side, and a second bending region NEb2 arranged on the upstream side of the first bending region NEb1 by reversing the right and left of the characteristic portion. , provided. In the description of the characteristic portions, the characteristics of the first bending region NEa1 will be described, and descriptions of the other bending regions NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2 will be omitted.

FIG. 99 is an enlarged front view of the first bending region NEa1. As shown in FIG. 99, in the first bending region NEa1, of the left and right side walls of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142, the side wall Na and the side wall Na disposed on the side opposite to the direction in which the S-shaped path SL1 extends left and right. , a ceiling wall Nb disposed above the side wall Na in a manner intersecting the extending direction of the side wall Na; Each of the walls Na, Nb, and Nc extends from the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side.

The adjacent wall Nc is formed by curving a surface Nc1 on the opposite side of the ceiling wall Nb along the S-shaped path SL1, so that the surface Nc1 functions as a spherical guide surface. On the other hand, the surface Nc2 (the surface facing the ceiling surface Nb) on the opposite side of the surface Nc1 regulates the traveling direction of the illegally inserted wire HM (a thin metal such as a wire or piano wire). It functions as a surface to support the surface, and the details will be described later. The adjacent wall Nc is set such that the gap Nin between the lower end of the extension and the side wall Na is larger than the width dimension (diameter) of the wire HM.

As shown in FIG. 99, the shape of the first bending region NEa1 can prevent the improperly inserted wire HM from entering deeper. That is, as shown in FIG. 99, as an entry route for the illegally inserted wire HM, there is a possible route that advances upstream of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 from the ball guide opening 53 as an entrance. A person who commits fraud pushes the wire HM against the side wall of the front-door-side lower tray passage portion 142 while proceeding.

When the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending region NEa1 by a person who commits fraud, the wire HM enters the gap Nin, but the wire HM is not pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending region NEa1. Even in this case, the wire HM advances rightward due to the S-shaped path SL1 of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142, so that the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the second bending region NEa2 and enters the gap Nin. It will be. That is, by arranging the pair of bending regions NEa1 and NEa2 with their left and right reversed, the wire HM can enter the gap Nin without exception.

FIG. 99 shows an example of the advancing route of the wire HM when entering the gap Nin. The position of the tip of the wire HM at each timing is indicated by a black circle, and the advancing direction of the wire HM at that time is indicated by an arrow. As shown in FIG. 99, the wire HM entering the gap Nin enters a tapered dead end portion formed between the ceiling wall Nb and the adjacent wall Nc. If the wire HM is caught (caught) at this point, it is possible to prevent the wire HM from advancing any further, to prevent the wire HM from being held, and to quickly discover the fraudulent act. can.

On the other hand, even if the wire HM is not caught and continues to advance, if the wire HM protrudes from the gap Nin, the tip of the wire HM protrudes downward. Even so, the tip of the wire HM travels downward. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wire HM from reaching the payout device 133 arranged on the upstream side of the payout ball receiving portion 143 or the game area arranged on the upstream side of the foul ball receiving portion 146 .

As a result, the wire HM reaches the payout device 133 (see FIG. 3) to cause the payout device 133 to malfunction, thereby obtaining an illegal payout ball, or causing the wire HM to reach the game area and the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 2). It is possible to prevent a person who commits a fraudulent act from gaining a fraudulent profit by forcibly opening a movable device such as a player and making it easier to fraudulently win a prize.

Returning to FIG. 98, description will be made. The foul ball passage portion 145 is formed such that the vertical width of the portion downstream from the confluence region CE where the ball extraction passage 147 merges is about twice the diameter of the ball (twice or more in this embodiment). As a result, when the balls flowing down the ball removal passage 147 are arranged in the confluence area CE, the balls flowing down the foul ball passage portion 145 enter the confluence passage CE (the balls enter the confluence area CE at the same time). , even if two balls are arranged vertically, the possibility of the balls being caught between the upper and lower walls and meshing with each other can be extremely reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the sphere from being hindered from flowing down in the portion downstream from the confluence area CE.

The foul ball passage portion 145 includes a passage portion 145a that is formed between the first bending region NEb1 and the second bending region NEb2 and vertically connects the bending regions NEb1 and NEb2. The width of the passage portion 145a is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere, and the passage portion 145a protrudes toward the front side as the rear side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 goes downward.

In the region upstream of the passage portion 145a, the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 is flush with the upstream end portion of the passage portion 145a, and in the region downstream of the passage portion 145a, the passage forming unit 140 The back side bottom plate portion of is positioned flush with the downstream end portion of the passage portion 145a.

That is, the foul ball passage portion 145 is set such that the front-to-rear width of the region on the upstream side of the passage portion 145a is larger than that of the region on the downstream side of the passage portion 145a. In this embodiment, the front-rear width of the foul ball passage portion 145 downstream of the passage portion 145a is set slightly larger than the diameter of the ball.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front-rear width of the foul ball passage portion 145 upstream of the passage portion 145a is set slightly smaller than twice the diameter of the ball. Therefore, when balls stay in the foul ball passage portion 145, a plurality of balls can be arranged with their positions shifted forward and backward in the upstream of the passage portion 145, so that the number of balls that can stay can be increased. Since the centers of the balls are prevented from lining up in the front-rear direction (they are slightly shifted in the left, right, up and down directions), it is possible to prevent two balls from entering the passage portion 145a at the same time.

In other words, it is possible to restrict the balls from entering the passage portion 145a one by one. As a result, even when two or more foul balls flow into the foul ball passage portion 145 in a row, the foul balls can be prevented from reaching the confluence area CE at the same time. It is possible to reduce the possibility of being sandwiched between the upper and lower walls and meshing with each other.

The foul ball receptacle 146 extends from the bottom plate on the rear side of the passage forming unit 140 toward the front side, and the left end is connected to the left side wall, and the flow-down surface of the ball faces rightward. from the inclined plate portion 146a that is inclined downward as far as the inclination plate portion 146a, the closing portion 146b that closes the foul ball receiving portion 146 vertically below the inclined plate portion 146a, and the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 below the inclined plate portion 146a. It mainly includes a curved guide plate portion 146c that extends in a plate shape toward the back side and curves in such a manner that the direction in which the guide plate extends toward the back side is directed upward.

While the ball is guided toward the foul ball passage portion 145 side (front side) along the upper surface of the curved guide plate portion 146c, the action of the inclined plate portion 146a and the blocking portion 146b moves the foul ball socket portion 146 to the front side. The passing position of the ball passing through can be shifted to the right side of the foul ball receiving portion 146 . That is, the ball that rolls down the upper surface of the inclined plate portion 146a can flow rightward, and the block portion 146b prevents the ball from passing through the left side of the foul ball socket portion 146. can be done.

As a result, it is possible to lengthen the period until the ball that has passed through the foul ball receiving portion 146 reaches the S-shaped path SL2. That is, since the vertical bounce of the ball can be finished before the ball reaches the S-shaped path SL2 (because the variation in the vertical position of the ball can be reduced), the foul ball passage part in the S-shaped path SL2 While setting the width of 145 to be small (slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere), the sphere can flow down smoothly.

The foul ball passage portion 145 is set to have a small passage width (slightly larger than the diameter of the ball) in the range forming the S-shaped path SL2 (for example, the passage portion 145a). A tool can be prevented from passing through the foul ball passage portion 145 .

Next, the structure of the front side of the front frame 14 will be described. 100 is a front exploded perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 101 is a rear exploded perspective view of the front frame 14. FIG. 100 and 101 illustrate a state in which the constituent members of the upper panel unit 400 that constitute the electrical decoration portion 8030 are disassembled from the main body frame 14a.

The upper panel unit 400 is a unit elongated in the left and right direction, and the left and right ends of the upper panel unit 400 are supported by the right panel unit 500 that constitutes the electric decoration parts 8031 and 8032 . In this support structure, at the lower end of the right end of the upper panel unit 400, similarly to the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370, a tapered supported groove 417 is recessed from the back side to the front side. (see FIG. 118) are formed, and fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) formed at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 are fitted to the left and right hooks forming the supported groove 417. As a result, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 are connected.

As a result, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 can be connected and fixed to each other by fastening and fixing to the body frame 14a, respectively, without the need to directly fasten and fix the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500. FIG. The shape of the supported groove 417 of the upper panel unit 400 defines the order of assembly to the main body frame 14a as the order in which the upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed after the right panel unit 500 is fastened and fixed. Details of the upper panel unit 400 will be described later.

In addition, the fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) provided in the heavy plate units 500R and 500L of the right panel unit 500 divided into left and right are fitted with left and right hooks forming the supported groove 417. Due to the configuration in which the parts are sandwiched and fitted, it is possible to prevent the heavy plate units 500R and 500L from being left and right separated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the right panel unit 500 from being disassembled in the assembled state (fitted state, see FIG. 86).

102 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 103 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14. FIG. 102 and 103, the upper side plate member 14e sandwiched between the main body frame 14a and the upper panel unit 400 (see FIG. 89) on the front side of the main body frame 14a, and the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 are connected to the main body frame. 14a is shown disassembled.

The upper side plate member 14e is a member that sandwiches the speaker assembly 450 between itself and the upper frame member 410 (see FIG. 101). A cylindrical fastening portion 14e1 to be fitted is provided.

The fastening portion 14e1 has a through-hole through which a screw is inserted from the rear side thereof, and the screw passing through the through-hole is fastened to the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 101) of the upper frame member 410, whereby the upper frame is This is a portion for fastening and fixing the member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e.

104 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14. FIG. Note that FIG. 104 shows a state in which the right panel unit 500, which is fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a by screws inserted from the rear side into insertion holes drilled in the body frame 14a, is disassembled from the body frame 14a. The illustration of the upper panel unit 400, the upper side plate member 14e and the multifunctional cover members 171, 172 is omitted, while the covering cover 370 is shown for reference.

As for the actual assembly procedure, the covering cover 370 is assembled to the main body frame 14a after the panel unit 500 is assembled to the main body frame 14a. Also, the right panel unit 500 has a right side wall forming the right edge of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86).

105 is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 106 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 107 is a front view of the support plate portion 510, and FIG. 109 is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. 108 shows a perspective view with the right side facing the front side, and FIG. 109 shows a perspective view with the left side facing the front side.

As shown in FIGS. 105 to 109, the right panel unit 500 includes a left stacking unit 500L and a right stacking unit 500R that are stacked in the left-right direction. 14a (see FIG. 104).

The heavy plate units 500L and 500R are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 by screws inserted through the support plate portion 510 from the back side to the front side. It is fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a (see FIG. 104) by screws inserted toward the front side.

The support plate portion 510 is formed to have an L-shaped cross section by extending a plate-like extension portion 511a from the outer edge (right edge) of the side facing the main body frame 14a to the rear side, and is assembled. In (see FIG. 86), a fixed plate 511 in which the inner wall (left wall) of the extension portion 511a abuts against the outer surface of the body frame 14a, and a substrate member 512 fastened and fixed to the fixed plate 511 on the front side of the fixed plate 511. a plurality of cover-side through holes 513 drilled in the fixed plate 511 on the left side of the substrate member 512; a plurality of lens-side through holes 514 drilled in the fixed plate 511 on the right side of the substrate member 512; and a pin support hole 515 drilled in the fixing plate 511 on the right side of the lens-side through hole 514 .

The fixing plate 511 has a base portion 511b that overlaps the substrate member 512 when viewed from the front, and the portion on the side of the substrate member 512 protrudes toward the front side in a pedestal shape. 512 is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 511 .

In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the platform 511b can abut against the heavy plate units 500L and 500R in the width direction (see FIG. 115(b)). collapse can be suppressed. That is, the posture of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R with respect to the support plate portion 510 can be easily maintained.

In the present embodiment, on the right side surface of the fixing plate 511, the extending portion 511a is displaced to the right by the plate thickness of the outer cover member 560 relative to the base portion 511b. While the outer cover member 560 abuts against the support plate portion 510 in the front-rear direction, the left side surface of the fixing plate 511 is formed up to the rear side end as a surface that is substantially at the same plane as the side surface of the base portion 511b. The back side end of the inner cover member 520 can be arranged at the surface position of the back side end of the support plate portion 510, and in the assembled state (see FIG. abuts on the left side surface 511c of the .

The substrate member 512 is an electronic substrate (printed substrate) on which a plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged on the front side. In this embodiment, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged in a row curved in accordance with the curved shape of the light guide member 540 with a predetermined interval (11 [mm] interval in this embodiment) between adjacent LEDs 512a. . That is, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged inside the shape in which the light guide member 540 is projected from the front, and emit light from directly behind the light guide member 540 toward the light guide member 540 with their optical axes parallel to each other. Illuminate (see FIG. 107).

Since the width of the end surface of the light guide member 540 on the side of the LED 512a is longer than the width of the LED 512a (the lateral width of the light emitting portion) (see the imaginary line in FIG. 107), the light emitted from the LED 512a passes through the light guide member without leakage. The light enters 540 and exits from one of the surfaces of the light guide member 540. The entry and exit of light and its path will be described later.

The cover-side through-hole 513 is a hole for positioning the back fastening portion 527 arranged on the inner cover member 520 and through which a screw fastened to the back fastening portion 527 is inserted from the back side. The inner cover member 520 is fixed to the support plate portion 510 by fastening screws to the back fastening portion 527 .

The lens-side through-hole 514 is a hole for positioning the back fastening portion 556 provided on the outer lens member 550 and through which the screw fastened to the back fastening portion 556 is inserted from the back side. The outer lens member 550 is fixed to the support plate portion 510 by fastening screws to the back fastening portion 556 .

The pin support hole 515 is a through hole through which the projecting portion 566 of the outer cover member 560 is inserted. The pin support hole 515 has a horizontal width slightly larger than the diameter of the protrusion 566 and a vertical width approximately twice the diameter of the protrusion 566 . Therefore, while the left and right positions of the outer cover member 560 are strictly defined, the work efficiency when the outer cover member 560 is brought into contact with the support plate portion 510 and fastened and fixed can be improved.

That is, in a fastening preparation state in which the heavy plate units 500L and 500R abut against the support plate portion 510 from the front side, when the plate units 500L and 500R are slightly displaced vertically with respect to the support plate portion 510 (projecting portion 566 ), the projecting portion 566 can be inserted into the pin support hole 515 . Accordingly, by inserting the protruding portion 566 into the pin support hole 515 and then moving the heavy plate units 500L and 500R up and down with respect to the support plate portion 510 by the amount corresponding to the positional displacement, the positional displacement is eliminated and fastening is facilitated. Fixation can be performed.

As shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the left stacking unit 500L includes an inner cover member 520 that constitutes the right edge of the window portion 14c (see FIG. 86) and is made of a light-impermeable resin material. and an inner lens member 530 fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 from the right side and made of a transparent colorless resin material.

The right stacking unit 500R faces the light guide member 540 arranged to face the left stacking unit 500L in the left-right direction, and the front side end is arranged to face the light guide member 540 in the front-rear direction. An outer lens member 550 made of a transparent white resin material, and a light guide member 540 and the outer lens member 550 arranged on the right side of the outer lens member 550 and made of a resin material that does not transmit light. and an outer cover member 560 that is fastened and fixed.

Next, details of each member will be described. 110 and 111 are exploded front perspective views of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. FIG. 110 shows a perspective view with the right side facing the front side, and FIG. 111 shows a perspective view with the left side facing the front side. is shown exploded.

The inner cover member 520 includes a main body plate portion 521 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape, and an upper fastening portion 522 arranged at the upper end of the main body plate portion 521 and fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560 . , a lower fastening portion 523 disposed at the lower end of the body plate portion 521 and fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560; a plurality of openings 524 opened in the body plate portion 521; A plurality of short fastening portions 525, which are cylindrical portions that are attached and into which screws for fixing the inner lens member 530 to the inner cover member 520 are screwed; A plurality of long fastening portions 526, which are cylindrical portions inserted through and into which screws for fixing the outer cover member 560 to the inner cover member 520 are screwed, and a plurality of long fastening portions 526 that protrude from the right side of the main body plate portion 521 and are viewed from the back side. It mainly includes a plurality of rear fastening portions 527 into which screws for fixing the support plate portion 510 are screwed.

The main body plate portion 521 has a wave-shaped front end portion 521a, and a connection plate portion 521c that connects the front end portion 521a and the back-side base portion 521b at the short width portion of the wave shape (portion closer to the back side). Prepare.

The back-side base portion 521b has an inner side surface 521b1 that comes into face contact (matches in shape) with the left side surface of the base portion 511b of the support plate portion 510 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).

The connecting plate portion 521c is a plate-like portion that is arranged in an attitude that inclines leftward toward the rear side, and the opening portion 524 is defined by the connecting plate portion 521c.

In the present embodiment, the connecting plate portions 521c are not arranged at regular intervals in the vertical direction, but are arranged such that the intervals increase in order from the lower side toward the upper side (see FIG. 114). Thereby, the opening widths of the plurality of openings 524 can be made different, and the presentation effect of light can be made different for each opening 524 .

The upper fastening portion 522 is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed. and a fitting groove 522b.

The fitting groove 522b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower fastening portion 523 includes a fastening portion 523a, which is a cylindrical portion into which screws for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 are screwed, and a fitting groove 523b recessed in the left-right direction on the left outer surface. That is, the outer cover member 560 is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 by two screws inserted at the upper end and one screw at the lower end.

The fitting groove 523b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claw portions forming the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370 (see FIG. 92) are fitted.

The openings 524 are arranged in parallel at four upper and lower positions and function as windows for viewing the inner lens member 530 in the assembled state. Each outer shape portion of the opening 524 is formed in a curved shape projecting rightward with the connection plate portion 521c as an end (left end). That is, each opening 524 is recessed rightward from the left end of the connecting plate portion 521c (see FIG. 114).

The short fastening portion 525 is arranged at the boundary portion between the back-side base portion 521b and the connecting plate portion 521c (see FIG. 110). This boundary portion corresponds to the portion where the surface (left side surface) of the inner cover member 520 protrudes leftward in the design of this embodiment (see FIG. 111). The surface of the back-side base portion 521b is recessed and curved to the right as designed between the boundary portions described above. That is, the surface of the back side base portion 521b is formed in a wavy shape that undulates to the left and right as it advances in the vertical direction.

In this case, the short fastening portion 525 is arranged on the back side of the portion projecting to the design surface side. When the inner cover member 520 is formed to have a uniform thickness, the back surface of the design-like protruding portion is, conversely, formed with a recess that tends to become a dead space. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by arranging the short fastening portion 525 in the recess of the inner cover member 520, the dead space can be effectively utilized, and the space on the back side of the inner cover member 520 (on the side of the inner lens member 530) can be effectively utilized. Efficiency can be improved.

The front and rear end portions of the inner lens member 530 are formed to follow the shape of the front and rear end portions of the inner cover member 520 . That is, the inner lens member 530 has a front end portion 531a of a main body plate portion 531 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape and has a corrugated shape that substantially matches the shape of the front end portion 521a of the inner cover member 520. be done.

The front-side end portion 531a forms a curved surface that extends rightward from the front-side edge of the main body plate portion 531, and is perforated in the front-rear direction at the position where the curve forming the wave shape changes to the front-rear direction. and support holes 531b and 531c through which the projecting portion 551b (see FIG. 109) of the outer lens member 550 is inserted.

The support hole 531b is formed in the corrugated front portion of the front end portion 531a, and a through hole 531b1 through which a screw for fastening and fixing the short fastening portion 525 of the inner cover member 520 passes is formed on the rear side thereof. That is, since the screw is fastened behind the support hole 531b, even if a load is applied to the vicinity of the support hole 531b, it is possible to prevent the support hole 531b from being deformed or displaced.

The support hole 531c is formed in the wavy rear portion of the front end portion 531a, and an inclined rib portion 532 extending to a position where the light guide member 540 can come into contact is arranged on the rear side thereof. . That is, since the rigidity behind the support hole 531c is reinforced by the inclined rib portion 532, even if a load is applied to the vicinity of the support hole 531c, the support hole 531c is prevented from being deformed or displaced. be able to.

The main body plate portion 531 has a through hole 531d which is sized to allow the long fastening portion 526 to pass through and is drilled in the horizontal direction at a position between the support holes 531b and 531c in the vertical direction. By inserting the long fastening portion 526 into the through hole 531d, the inner cover member 520 and the inner lens member 530 can be aligned.

The inclined rib portion 532 is arranged at a position (right side position) corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, and is formed by a pair of upper and lower plate portions 532a extending rightward from the upper and lower edges of the connecting plate portion 521c. , and a plurality of reinforcing plate portions 532b vertically connecting the pair of upper and lower plate portions 532a.

The upper and lower plate portions 532a extend so as to fill the gap between them and the light guide member 540. As shown in FIG. That is, since the inner lens member 530 has a shape that protrudes leftward toward the back side like the inner cover member 520, the left and right widths become longer toward the back side (front side end portion in top view). is a triangular shape with a tip).

The inner lens member 530 includes an overhanging portion 533 that overhangs leftward from the main body plate portion 531 so as to pass through the opening portion 524 . The protruding portion 533 includes a light scattering portion 533a on the side opposite to the protruding side, which protrudes in a wavy shape and has a wavy curved surface with a shape that scatters light.

The light guide member 540 is made of a thermoplastic resin, and has a halftone dot pattern on both left and right sides in which recessed portions that change the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED 512a arranged on the back side to the left and right directions are arranged in a grid pattern. A so-called light guide plate is formed. That is, at least part of the light emitted from the LED 512a to the rear end portion of the light guide member 540 is redirected in the left-right direction via the light guide member 540, and is emitted to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550. be. In addition, the light guide member 540 is thermally bent into a curved shape corresponding to the arrangement of the LEDs 512a (see FIGS. 105 and 107), and the width dimension in the thickness direction is changed from the end face on the back side (LED 512a side) to the front side. It is formed from a shape that gradually tapers toward the end face.

Here, the concave portion is a processed portion for changing light from a so-called edge light type light source (in this embodiment, the LED 512a) into uniform surface light emission. The concave portion is a notch-shaped concave portion recessed from the left and right sides, and reflects or refracts the incident light from the LED 512 a so that the incident light is emitted from the surfaces of the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540 .

In this embodiment, as an example, the recessed portion is formed by a thermoplastic mold plate having a pattern in which conical portions having an inclination angle of 45° with respect to the bottom surface and a bottom circle diameter of about 1 mm are arranged in a grid pattern at intervals of about 3 mm. It is formed by pressing (heat pressing) against resin. Of the light emitted from the LED 512a, the light reaching the concave portion is reflected by the concave portion and emitted from the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540 in a substantially vertical direction.

The thermoplastic resins used in the present invention are not particularly limited, but those having transparency are preferable, and acrylic resins (methacrylic resins), polycarbonate resins, polyvinyl chloride resins, amorphous polyester resins, amorphous olefin resins, etc. Examples include resins, polystyrene resins, and AS resins (acrylonitrile-styrene copolymer compounds). Among these resins, by using an acrylic resin in particular, it is possible to obtain the light guide member 540 having a high average brightness and a small decrease in brightness distribution.

In this embodiment, the light guide member 540 has a thickness of 5 mm at the end on the LED 512a side. By setting the thickness between 3 mm and 8 mm, it is possible to efficiently guide the light from the LED 512a, improve shape retention after thermal bending, and obtain practical strength.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the light guide member 540 has a corrugated front end portion that is slightly displaced from the front end portion 531a of the inner lens member 530 toward the rear side, and has a wavy shape. are also formed from undulating corrugations.

The left and right wave shapes are not strict in the present invention. The degree of corrugation is not particularly limited, but the radius of curvature (R) of the curved portion is preferably 200 mm or more and 700 mm or less. By setting such a radius of curvature (R), it is possible to provide a design capable of imparting a three-dimensional degree of freedom while reducing distortion after heat bending and maintaining good practical mechanical properties. .

Although details of the wavy shape undulating to the left and right will be described later (see FIG. 114), it is positioned leftward at a position corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, and the position corresponding to the adjacent connecting plate portion 521c. The wavy shape is located rightward (located away from the inner cover member 520) at a position between .

The wavy shape in the left-right direction is formed by thermally bending the base material having the recessed portions, as described above. As the method of thermal bending of the present invention, a metal having a concave surface (female mold) and a convex surface (male mold) that are curved while being heated to a heating temperature of 10 to 40°C above the deflection temperature under load of the thermoplastic resin used as the base material. It is made by pressing the substrate into a mold. More specifically, when the thermoplastic resin contains an acrylic resin as a main component, the heating temperature can be 110° C. or higher and 150° C. or lower. Specifically, it is preferably performed at 130° C. or higher and 150° C. or lower.

At this time, the heating temperature of the base material is lower than the melting point of the thermoplastic resin. By setting the temperature of the base material during heating to the deflection temperature under load + 40°C or lower and the melting point or lower, the shape of the light guide pattern provided on the surface of the base material is not destroyed, and the light from the light source is emitted before and after the heat bending process. can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in luminance and an uneven luminance distribution in the light guide plate. Further, by setting such heating temperature conditions, it is possible to suppress distortion of the light guide plate.

The light guide member 540 includes a curved plate-shaped main body plate portion 541 that constitutes a light guide plate, and screws extending vertically from the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 541 and fastened to the outer cover member 560 are inserted. and a fastening portion 542 that is provided.

The light guide member 540 does not have a portion that penetrates in the left-right direction at positions other than the fastening portion 542 and the concave portion 541 a for retreating from the long fastening portion 526 . That is, since the light guide member 540 is composed of a single plate without a hole at least inside the projection plane on which the opening 524 is projected in the left-right direction, the rendering effect of the light passing through the opening 524 is improved. be able to. The rear-side end of the light guide member 540 is substantially flush with the rear-side end of the inner lens member 530 .

The outer lens member 550 includes a main body plate portion 551 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape, and a fastening portion 542 of the light guide member 540 which is disposed at the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 551 and internally supported. An inner fitting portion 552, a plurality of insertion holes 553 that can be configured as through holes through which screws fastened to the outer cover member 560 are inserted, and an area surrounded by the plurality of insertion holes 553 projects to the right to provide an outer cover. A protruding portion 554 visible through the member, a plurality of through holes 555 through which the long fastening portion 526 of the inner cover member 520 is inserted, and a main body plate portion 551 protruding from the rear side. It mainly includes a plurality of rear fastening portions 556 into which screws for fixing the support plate portion 510 are screwed.

The shape of the front and rear ends of the outer lens member 550 follows the shape of the front and rear ends of the light guide member 540 . That is, the outer lens member 550 has a front end portion 551a that extends leftward from the front edge of the main body plate portion 551 and forms a curved surface that substantially matches the shape of the front end portion of the light guide member 540. It has a corrugated shape and is arranged slightly shifted to the front side with respect to the front side end of the light guide member 540 . In this embodiment, the front end portion of the light guide member 540 and the front end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 are formed so as to be spaced equally apart in the front-rear direction at any position in the vertical direction. be.

The front-side end portion 551a projects toward the front side at the position where the curve forming the wave shape is switched to the front-rear direction, and is fitted into the support holes 531b and 531c in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). A setting portion 551b is provided.

On the surface of the front end portion 551a opposite to the side facing the light guide member 540, a bulging portion 551a1 (see FIG. 115(a)) that bulges toward the front side in a semicircular shape in a side view is formed vertically. are formed countless times. The bulging portion 551a1 functions to scatter the light emitted from the front end surface of the light guide member 540, so that even if the LEDs 512a are arranged at a predetermined interval, the light guide member 540 The light emission on the front side end surface can be made into a band-shaped light emission mode that is continuous in the vertical direction.

The insertion hole 553 is arranged in a recessed deep portion that is recessed inwardly (inwardly of the surface of the main body plate portion 551 ) as the shape of the overhanging portion 554 . Thereby, the fastening of the outer lens member 550 to the outer cover member 560 can be strengthened, and the outer lens member 550 can be prevented from being peeled off from the outer cover member 560 .

In the right double plate unit 500R, the rear fastening portion 556 into which screws for fastening and fixing with the support plate portion 510 are screwed is provided on the outer lens member 550 and is not provided on the outer cover member 560. FIG. Therefore, the outer cover member 560 can be arranged as close as possible to the right edge of the support plate portion 510 (the outer edge of the pachinko machine 8010) (it can be arranged regardless of the screw diameter or screw arrangement). can). As a result, the area facing the player (the area on the left side of the right panel unit 500) can be enlarged.

The surface of the main body plate portion 551 facing the light guide member 540 is curved in accordance with the surface shape (curved shape) of the light guide member 540, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the light guide member 540 and main body plate portion 551 are in contact with each other (see FIG. 114(b)).

As a result, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being displaced in the direction in which it faces the main body plate portion 551 . In addition, since the body plate portion 551 is directly fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 , the support plate portion 510 and the light guide member 540 are aligned via the body plate portion 551 .

Therefore, it is possible to prevent misalignment between the LED 512a arranged on the substrate member 512 fixed to the support plate portion 510 and the light guide member 540, and the light from the LED 512a enters the light guide member 540 with high accuracy. can be made

The outer cover member 560 has a main body plate portion 561 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape, and a receiving surface capable of receiving the fastening portion 522a of the inner cover member 520 at the upper end portion of the main body plate portion 561. It has a long hole formed in an oval shape with a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 522a and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width, and a plurality of screws are inserted from the opposite side. A receiving surface capable of receiving the fastening portion 523a of the inner cover member 520 at the upper fastened portion 562 having the screw receiving portion 562a and the lower end portion of the main body plate portion 561, and the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 523a A lower fastened portion 563 formed in an elongated hole shape with a vertical width slightly larger than the vertical width and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width, and having a screw receiving portion 563a through which a screw is inserted from the opposite side, and a main body plate portion 561 at the front side end of the inner cover member 520, a receiving surface capable of receiving the long fastening portion 526, the vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the long fastening portion 526, and the vertical width A plurality of screw receiving portions 564 are formed in an elongated hole shape with a long width and through which screws are inserted from the opposite side, and an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the projecting portion 554 of the outer lens member 550 is formed. It mainly includes an opening 565 and a plurality of projecting portions 566 projecting from the body plate portion 561 toward the back side.

The upper to-be-fastened portion 562 includes a fitting groove 562b recessed in the lateral width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 522b of the upper fastening portion 522 . The fitting groove 562b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower part to be fastened 563 has a fitting groove 563b recessed in the horizontal width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 523b of the lower fastening part 523 . The fitting groove 563b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claw portions forming the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370 (see FIG. 92) are fitted.

That is, the right panel unit 500 is connected to the upper panel unit 400 and the covering cover 370 by fitting through the upper and lower fitting grooves 562b and 563b. Since the right panel unit 500 contacts the upper panel unit 400 and the cover 370 vertically (see FIG. 86), the cover 370 protrudes the right panel unit 500 toward the front. The upper panel unit 400 can be supported by the right panel unit 500 that is stably supported. Therefore, the allowable weight of the upper panel unit 400 can be increased.

The opening 565 is formed in a shape into which the overhanging portion 554 of the outer lens member 550 is fitted (formed with an inner shape equivalent to the outer shape of the overhanging portion 554). Therefore, it is possible to narrow the access path to the lateral gap between the opening 565 and the protruding portion 554 , thereby suppressing an illegal act of peeling the outer lens member 550 from the outer cover member 560 .

A method of assembling the left board unit 500L and the right board unit 500R will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. FIG. FIG. 112(a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 112(b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the right panel unit 500 taken along line CXIIb-CXIIb of FIG. 112(a), and FIG. 113a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 113(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit 500 taken along line CXIIIb-CXIIIb of FIG. 113(a).

112(a) and 112(b) illustrate a state in which the projecting portion 551b is arranged on the back side of the support hole 531b, and FIGS. A state in which the portion 551b is inserted into the support hole 531b is illustrated.

To assemble the right panel unit 500, the main body plate portion 531 of the left stacking unit 500L and the left end of the front end portion 551a of the right stacking unit 500R are brought into contact with each other in the left-right direction (see FIG. 112(b)). ), the left stacking unit 500L is approached from the front side of the right stacking unit 500R, and the protrusions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b.

In this way, a configuration is adopted in which the left stacking unit 500L and the right stacking unit 500R are fixed by inserting and fitting the projections 551b and 551c into the support holes 531b at the front end of the right panel unit 500. By doing so, the degree of freedom in designing the front end of the right panel unit 500 can be improved.

For example, in this embodiment, as a result of adopting the above configuration, the left stacking unit 500L and the right stacking unit 500R are arranged at the front end of the right panel unit (front side of the light guide member 540). can reduce the number of screws that fasten and fix the , thereby reducing the area where light is blocked by the screws. It can be made easy to visually recognize in a strip|belt shape.

Further, for example, in the present embodiment, by reducing the number of screws (fastening points) that fasten and fix the left stacking unit 500L and the right stacking unit 500R at the front end of the right panel unit 500, it is possible to prevent misleading during fastening. It is possible to reduce the range in which the light guide member 540 may be damaged by applying a load to the light member 540 . Therefore, the range in which the light guide member 540 can be arranged can be expanded to near the front end of the right panel unit 500 (near the tapered end). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being discontinued and visually recognized near the front end of the right panel unit 500 .

When the left plate unit 500L is approached from the front side of the right plate unit 500R and the projecting portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b, the inclined rib portions 532 of the inner lens member 530 of the left plate unit 500L and , and the light guide member 540 of the right stack unit 500R form surfaces that are parallel to each other along the front-rear direction, and are in a positional relationship in which the surfaces can contact each other. That is, the contact surface between the inclined rib portion 532 and the light guide member 540 functions as a guide surface (guide) when moving the left stacking unit 500L in the front-rear direction with respect to the right stacking unit 500R. Assembly of the panel unit 500 can be easily performed.

Here, a method for disassembling the right panel unit 500 for maintenance or the like will be described. As described above, in the right panel unit 500, the left layered plate unit 500L and the right layered plate unit 500R are assembled to the support plate portion 510 by fastening and fixing, and there are at least two possible procedures for the assembly. .

The first procedure is a method of fastening and fixing the left plate unit 500L and the right plate unit 500R to each other and then fastening and fixing them to the support plate section 510. The second procedure is a method of fastening and fixing the right plate unit 500R. is fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 alone, then the left plate unit 500L is brought closer to the right plate unit 500R, the projecting portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b, and the left plate unit 500L is placed on the right side. In this method, the plate unit 500R and the support plate portion 510 are respectively fastened and fixed. These two procedures can be similarly adopted when the right panel unit 500 is disassembled.

As described above, since assembly and disassembly can be performed in two procedures, the operator who performs maintenance or the like can disassemble or assemble the right panel unit 500 according to which procedure depends on the parts that need to be replaced. can be selected, and the working time can be shortened.

It should be noted that, regardless of which procedure is used for disassembly, the left board unit 500L and the right board unit 500R must be slid relative to each other in order to disassemble the left board unit 500L and the right board unit 500R. There is a need. This is because it is necessary to release the engagement between the projecting portions 551b and 551c and the support hole 531b. When the left stacking unit 500L and the right stacking unit 500R are to be slid relative to each other in the plane direction, at least one of them needs to be disassembled from the support plate section 510 .

In this manner, the projections 551b, 551c and the support holes 531b are fitted into the right panel unit 500 by prying (disassembling) the right panel unit 500 from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86). 500 and is useful for preventing fraudulent acts that enter the inside of the pachinko machine 8010.

That is, when the front side portion of the right panel unit 500 is fixed by tightening screws, the right panel unit 500 can be easily disassembled by removing the screws, and cheating can be easily performed. As in this embodiment, the left stacking unit 500L and the right stacking unit 500R of the right panel unit 500 are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 by screws that are inserted from the back side of the support plate portion 510, and the screws are attached to the front surface. By making it difficult to disassemble the left panel unit 500L and the right panel unit 500R unless they are removed from the back side of the frame 14 (see FIG. 104), the right panel unit 500 can be removed from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010. can be difficult to disassemble. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act of entering the pachinko machine 8010 through the inside of the right panel unit 500 .

With reference to FIG. 114, the shape of light guide member 540 of right panel unit 500 and its effect in presentation will be described. 114(a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 114(b) is a rear view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 114(c) is a side view of the right panel unit 500. . 114(a) to 114(c), illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted.

The light guide member 540 is irradiated with light emitted from the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 105) of the support plate portion 510 from the rear side, and the light incident on the light guide member 540 is directed to the left and right by the action of the light guide member 540. be redirected. At this time, the light is emitted in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the light guide member 540 .

Since the light guide member 540 has a curved shape that undulates in the left-right direction (see FIG. 114(b)), light is condensed on the concave side, and light is diffused on the convex side. For example, at a position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 among the plurality of openings 524, the light guide member 540 has a concave shape with a curvature radius R1 on the opening 524 side (left side). The light emitted from the optical member 540 to the opening 524 side can be condensed and produced. Thereby, the intensity of the light visually recognized through the opening 524 can be improved.

In addition, since the opposite side (right side) thereof has a convex shape, at a position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 among the plurality of openings 524, the light guide member 540 faces the outer lens member 550. It can be used for production by diffusing the light emitted to.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the vertical position is the same, there is a difference in the mode of light production (whether light is condensed or diffused) performed on the left and right sides of the light guide member 540. It can be provided, and the production effect can be improved.

It should be noted that the difference in the mode of light production is not caused only by the curved shape of the light guide member 540, but various modes are exemplified. For example, by dividing the shape of the notched concave portion of the light guide member 540 according to regions, or by dividing the thickness of the light guide member 540 according to regions, it is possible to change the mode of light production on both the left and right sides. .

The light guide member 540 is always concave on the opening 524 side at a position facing the opening 524 , and the radius of curvature of the concave surface changes according to the size of the opening 524 . That is, the curvature radius of the concave surface of the light guide member 540 is also the same as that of the second opening from the top, corresponding to the fact that the upper three openings 524 have a larger vertical width as the openings 524 move upward. The curvature radius R2 at the position corresponding to the portion 524 is shorter than the curvature radius R1 (R1>R2), and similarly the curvature radius R3 at the position corresponding to the third opening 524 from the top is , is shorter than the radius of curvature R2 (R1>R2>R3).

As a result, even if there is no change in the arrangement interval of the LEDs 512a arranged on the substrate member 512, the number of the LEDs 512a that emit the condensed light differs for each opening 524. The amount of light emitted can be varied for each opening 524 . That is, according to the present embodiment, the upper opening 524 can increase the amount of visible light compared to the lower opening 524 .

In addition, the curvature radius R4 at the position corresponding to the lowest opening 524, that is, the fourth opening 524 from the top is formed to be the same as the curvature radius R1 (R4≈R1), and the center of the concave surface The normal line coming out from the shape is a shape that points slightly upward. Therefore, the amount of light visible through the openings 524 at the upper and lower ends can be increased, and the light production can be sharpened. Can be directed upwards.

As shown in FIG. 114(c), the vertical widths W1 to W4 of each opening 524 are illustrated as lengths connecting the midpoints of the upper side and the lower side of the opening 524 in a side view. The width of the opening 524 facing the portion with the curvature radius R1 is the vertical width W1, the width of the opening 524 facing the portion with the curvature radius R2 is the vertical width W2, and the width of the opening 524 facing the portion with the curvature radius R3. The width of the openings 524 facing each other is the vertical width W3, and the width of the openings 524 facing the portion with the radius of curvature R4 is the vertical width W4.

In this embodiment, among the openings 524, the lower openings 524 are formed such that the vertical widths W1 to W4 are reduced (W1>W2>W3>W4). That is, in the portions of the curvature radii R1 to R3, the relationship between the magnitudes of the curvature radii R1 to R3 and the magnitudes of the vertical widths W1 to W3 of the opening 524 are related. As a result, the vertical width W1 of the opening 524 is increased at locations where the degree of light condensing is weak (for example, a portion with a radius of curvature R1) so that the light is sufficiently incident on the opening 524, while the light is condensed. In a portion where the intensity of light is strong (for example, a portion with a radius of curvature R3), the vertical width W3 of the opening 524 is made smaller than the vertical width W1 to avoid too much light entering the opening 524 . Therefore, with the configuration of this embodiment, the light emission mode of each opening 524 can be made uniform.

The center point of each radius of curvature R1 to R4 shown in FIG. is arranged at approximately the middle position of

The light guide member 540 is convex leftward in the region KE of the boundary of the opening 524 . Here, the region KE is a strip-shaped region extending in the front-rear direction, and is defined as a region whose upper and lower ends do not interfere with adjacent openings 524 . That is, as shown in FIG. 114(c), the upper end of the region KE coincides with the lower end of the opening 524 adjacent above it, and the lower end of the region KE coincides with the opening 524 adjacent below it. matches the top edge of the . Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 512a to the area KE in the front-rear direction travels while being hidden by the connecting plate portion 521c in the left side view of the right panel unit 500 (see FIG. 114(c)).

In the area KE, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, so that even if the light gathering effect is reduced, the light is visible to the player. The difference in the amount of light is small.

On the other hand, by making the area KE convex to the left instead of the flat surface, the light guide member 540 can be formed in a curved shape with no corners, and stress concentration can be prevented. durability can be improved.

In addition, by forming a convex shape on the left side in the region KE, a concave shape can be formed on the right side. can be formed. As a result, it is possible to improve the presentation effect of the presentation of light visually recognized through the opening 565 .

That is, it is possible to change the light visually recognized through the opening 565 while suppressing the change in the light visually recognized through the opening 524 depending on whether or not the light is incident on the region KE from the LED 512a. .

For example, by turning off the LEDs 512a that make light incident on the area KE and turning on the other LEDs 512a, it is possible to irradiate the insides of the openings 524 and 565 with light without gaps. At this time, the right side of the light guide member 540 above and below the area KE is concave, so that the light emitted to the right from above and below the area KE intersects on the right side of the outer cover member 560. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the outer lens member 550 from being seen darkly in the region KE.

In addition, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at a position corresponding to the inner side of the area KE, the light emitted from the area KE is condensed and emitted in an edge shape, and the edge is visually recognized by the player. You can increase the amount of light. Therefore, it is possible to sharpen the light emission mode of the projecting portion 554 (see FIG. 106).

It should be noted that the light guide member 540 may be configured as a flat surface at the boundary of the opening 524 . In this case, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at a position corresponding to the inner side of the region KE, the corresponding portion (the region corresponding to the region KE) of the projecting portion 554 (see FIG. 106) emits light in a strip shape. can be made

The region KE has a shorter front-to-rear width of the right panel unit 500 (a shorter distance from the LED 512a) than the upper and lower portions thereof. Therefore, the light incident on the area KE easily reaches the front end portion even if the amount of light is weak. The light that reaches the front end portion may be used to produce an effect.

That is, a light effect is prepared that is not visible through the connecting plate portion 521c, but is visible through the front end portion 531a (see FIG. 105) of the inner lens member 530 (visible from the front side of the right panel unit 500). By setting the degree of expectation for the big hit of the effect to be high, the position of the player's eyes can be moved away from the game board 13 rather than the front end of the right panel unit 500.例文帳に追加As a result, the degree of eyestrain of the player can be reduced, and the player can play games for a long time without stress.

Here, the light incident on the area KE is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c when viewed from the left side, but is viewed by the player through the outer lens member 550 (see FIG. 106) from the right side. Therefore, a player who sits on the left side of the right panel unit 500 and plays the pachinko machine 8010 is not visually recognized, but a clerk who is viewing the right panel unit 500 from the right side is notified by visible light. be able to.

As a result, while the cheating player is not noticed, the clerk can execute an error notification that can be easily noticed, so that the cheating player is prevented from trying to escape. can be prevented.

By reversing the left-right shape of the right panel unit 500, the light effect in the area KE may be made visible only to the player and not visible to the store clerk.

115(a) is a schematic side view of the light guide member 540, and FIG. 115(b) is a cross-sectional view of the light guide member 540 along line CXVb-CXVb of FIG. 115(a).

The light guide member 540 has a shape that gradually tapers from the end face (thickness of about 5 mm) on the LED 512a side toward the front side. The maximum end of the front side of the light guide member 540 (the portion farthest from the LED 512a) is designed to be 3 mm for the purpose of maintaining mechanical strength, and the horizontal width dimension is the same gradient over the entire area in the vertical direction. to shrink.

Therefore, the front end face of the light guide member 540 is not formed with the same width dimension (thickness). That is, the end surface of the portion of the inner lens member 530 facing the support hole 531b (see FIG. 111) is closer to the LED 512a than the end surface of the portion facing the support hole 531c (see FIG. 111). Since the distance from the end surface is increased, the tapered portion is excessively tapered and the width dimension (thickness) is reduced. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the difference between the luminescence mode visually recognized near the support hole 531b and the luminescence mode visually recognized near the support hole 531c.

Here, in the present embodiment, since the vicinity of the support hole 531c is sandwiched vertically between the portions near the support hole 531b and is arranged in a recessed position toward the rear side, the difference in the distance in the front-rear direction and the portion near the support hole 531b Due to the shadow created by , the portion near the support hole 531c is darker than the portion near the support hole 531b and is easily visible.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the end face of the light guide member 540 at the portion facing the support hole 531c is larger than the end face of the light guide member 540 at the portion facing the support hole 531b. Since the width dimension (thickness) is formed large, it is possible to ensure a large area of the surface that receives light emitted from the LED 512a and emits light.

Therefore, even if the amount of light emitted from any of the LEDs 512a among the plurality of LEDs 512a is the same, the amount of light visible near the support hole 531c is increased by increasing the amount of light visible near the support hole 531b. It is possible to reduce the degree of darkness due to differences in front-to-rear distance and shadows. As a result, with the front end 531a of the inner lens member 530 as the forefront, the degree of light emission visually recognized at the front end of the right panel unit 500 can be easily made uniform over the vertical direction (the difference in intensity is reduced). )can do.

116 is a partial rear view of right panel unit 500. FIG. 116, illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted, and the light guide member 540 can be visually recognized. In addition, in FIG. 116, an example of the path (advancing direction) of light emitted through the light guide member 540 is illustrated by an imaginary arrow.

As shown in FIG. 116, the light emitted from the light guide member 540 toward the inner lens member 530 is condensed due to the curved shape of the light guide member 540, and passes through the inner lens member 530 to be slightly It is diffused and progresses outward.

Conversely, light emitted toward the outer lens member 550 is diffused as a result of the curving of the light guide member 540 . Therefore, while the arrangement of the LEDs 512a that generate light incident on the light guide member 540 is constant, the light emission modes (sparse and dense, bright and dark) can be made different on both surfaces of the light guide member 540 . In other words, the player can be made to visually recognize the light in a light emission mode different from the light emission mode expected from the arrangement interval of the LEDs 521a.

In addition, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 side (player side) is not emitted directly to the side by bending the inner lens member 530 as shown in FIG. 115(b). (See the phantom line arrow in FIG. 115(b). The phantom line arrow in FIG. 115(b) indicates an example of the traveling direction of the light passing through the light guide member 540.). As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the light, and it is possible to improve the effect of the lighting effect.

Returning to FIGS. 100 and 101, description will be made. The upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a via the upper side plate member 14e, and has fitting grooves 522b and 562b (FIGS. 108 and 109) arranged at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 at the lower right end thereof. ) and is supported from below, and is arranged at the upper end of the front frame 14 .

117 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit 400, and FIG. 118 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit 400. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the upper panel unit 400 includes an upper frame member 410 fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e with the speaker assembly 450 interposed therebetween (see FIG. 100), and a front surface of the upper frame member 410. The illumination unit 401 is arranged on the side and fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410, and the speaker assembly 450 is arranged on the back side of the upper frame member 410 and sandwiched between the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e. , is mainly provided. 117 and 118, illustration of the speaker assembly 450 is omitted (see FIGS. 100 and 101).

The illumination unit 401 is a unit whose front side surface is decorated with a model name, etc., and includes a board on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged. Light production is performed by emitting light from the enclosed LED.

The illumination unit 401 includes a box-shaped main body 402 made of a light-transmitting resin material, a wavy wall 403 formed on the rear outer wall of the main body 402, and the wavy wall 403. A plate-like portion 404 extending from the lower edge to the back side in a horizontally long plate shape, and a portion above the plate-like portion 404 that protrudes from the corrugated wall portion 403 to the back side in a cylindrical shape and is inside the cylindrical shape. A cylindrical portion 405 having a shape penetrating the waved wall portion 403, and a plurality of fastening portions 406 disposed on the back side of the main body portion 402 and to which screws inserted through the upper frame member 410 are fastened. , is mainly provided.

The main body part 402 is formed in a box shape in such a manner that the front and rear dish-shaped members overlap each other with their open sides, and a space is formed inside. It should be noted that the enclosed LED is arranged on an electronic substrate, and the electronic substrate is fixed to the main body portion 402 .

The wavy wall portion 403 engages with the wavy wall portion 412 formed on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410 to easily determine the assembly position in the left-right direction, thereby facilitating the work of assembling the illumination unit 401 to the upper frame member 410. It is the part that improves the performance.

The plate-like portion 404 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower surface of the corrugated wall portion 412 of the upper frame member 410 , and is a portion that suppresses vertical displacement of the electrical decoration unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410 . The front side wall of the upper frame member 410 is recessed with a horizontally long groove that sandwiches the plate-like portion 404 from above and below.

The cylindrical portion 405 has a function as a through-hole for wiring through which the wiring of the electronic board on which the LEDs contained in the body portion 402 are arranged is passed to the upper frame member 410 side.

The illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410 by fastening screws to a plurality of fastening portions 406 through the upper frame member 410 . Here, when the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100), a closed space containing the speaker assembly 450 is formed between the upper side plate member 14e and access to the inside is made possible. formed to be difficult. That is, the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e and the body frame 14a after the electrical decoration unit 401 is fastened and fixed.

119 is an exploded front perspective view of upper frame member 410, and FIG. 120 is an exploded rear perspective view of upper frame member 410. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the upper frame member 410 is formed of a main body member 411 to which the illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed, and a curved shape along the lower edge of the main body member 411. A lower edge plate member 420 fastened and fixed from the rear side along the lower edge, and a right corner support member 430R fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the rear side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the right corner of the main body member 411. , a left corner support member 430L fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the front side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the left corner of the main body member 411, and a left corner support member 430L that is fitted to the main body member 411 from the rear side to a position that protrudes from the opening 414 to the front side. and a lens member 440 which is inserted and pressed from the back side by the right corner support member 430R so as to be restrained from coming off to the back side and which constitutes the illumination portion 8033.

The main body member 411 is a member elongated in the left and right direction, in which openings are formed on both left and right sides thereof for passing vibration waves (sound) generated from the speaker assembly 450, and the speaker covers 27 are arranged so as to cover the openings. On the front side, a wavy wall portion 412 formed in a wavy shape when viewed from above, and a portion of the wavy wall portion 412 facing the tubular portion 405 of the illumination unit 401 is larger than the outer shape of the tubular portion 405. It mainly includes a support through hole 413 penetrating with a slightly larger inner shape, and an opening 414 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right corner.

The wavy wall portion 412 is formed in substantially the same wavy shape as the wavy wall portion 403 of the electrical decoration unit 401 . This makes it possible to easily perform alignment in the horizontal direction when fitting the illumination unit 401 into the main body member 411 from the front side of the upper frame member 410 .

The tubular portion 405 is inserted through the support through hole 413 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). As a result, the wiring projecting through the cylindrical portion 405 can be passed through the support through-hole 413 to the rear side of the main body member 411 . Therefore, the other end of the wiring, one end of which is connected to the electronic board included in the illumination unit 401, can be connected to the terminal on the back side of the main body member 411, so that the front frame 14 is closed. It is possible to prevent the other end of the wiring from being detached.

The support through hole 413 defines the position of the tubular portion 405 when the tubular portion 405 is inserted. Thereby, the support through-holes 413 can be used for positioning the electrical decoration unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410 .

The opening 414 is an opening that allows the lens member 440 to be visually recognized when viewed from the front. The upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) is provided with an LED 14e2 at a position that coincides with the lens member 440 in the front-rear direction.

The main body member 411 has, on its back side, a wavy side portion 416 formed in a wavy shape when viewed from above, a supported groove 417 recessed from the back side at the lower end surface of the right corner, and a recessed portion from the back side at the lower end surface of the left corner. a supported groove 418 formed at a position close to the upper end, a fastening portion 419 formed at a symmetrical position near the upper end and formed so that a screw can be screwed therein; A fastening portion 419b is mainly provided.

The wavy side portion 416 has a shape that matches the shape of the opposing position of the lower edge plate member 420 (the shape of the wavy wall portion 422 formed at the front end portion of the lower edge). This makes it possible to easily position the lower edge plate member 420 in the left-right direction when fastening and fixing the lower edge plate member 420 to the main body member 411 .

The supported groove 417 has a shape in which the left and right hook portions can be fitted into the fitting groove 522b and the fitting groove 562b (see FIGS. 105 and 106) of the right panel unit 500, and the fitting state (see FIG. 86) is formed. ), a load (such as weight) applied from the upper panel unit 400 can be applied to the right panel unit 500 via the surface where the supported groove 417 is formed.

The supported groove 418 has a shape that can be fitted to the upper end portion of the electrical decoration part 8031. In the fitted state (see FIG. 86), the upper panel unit 400 is connected to the upper panel unit 400 via the surface in which the supported groove 418 is formed. It is configured to be able to apply a load (such as weight) given from to the electrical decoration part 8031 .

The fastening portion 419 is disposed at a position where screws inserted through the through holes 463a and 483a (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 can be fastened, and protrudes in a rib shape from the base to a position where the tip does not reach. and an enlarged rib 419a.

As will be described later, screws inserted through through holes 463a and 483a are fastened and fixed to the fastening portion 419 so that the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper side plate member 14e are attached to the main body frame 14a. (see FIG. 125(a)), the details of which will be described later.

In the present embodiment, the enlarged ribs 419a are three same-shaped ribs arranged at 120° intervals around the fastening portion 419 along the fastening direction of screws to the fastening portion 419 .

The second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) is connected to the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) of the upper side plate member 14e and the recessed portions 462 and 482 (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 at the lower position of the main body member 411. , and is formed at a position corresponding to recessed portions 462 and 482 (see FIG. 122) of speaker assembly 450 at an upper position of main body member 411, details of which will be described later.

The lower edge plate member 420 includes a main body member 421 formed by bending a long plate, a wavy wall portion 422 formed in a wavy shape in a bottom view at the front side edge of the lower edge of the main body member 421, and After extending from the upper edge of the waved wall portion 422 toward the front side, the L-shaped extending portion 423 extends upward from the extended end portion thereof and is formed to have an L-shaped cross section, and the main body plate portion 421 . It mainly includes an opening 424 which is arranged at a position equidistant left and right from the left and right center position (the upper end position of the curved shape) and which is configured by a plurality of small-diameter through holes penetrating in the vertical direction.

In a state in which the wavy wall portion 422 and the wavy side portion 416 of the main body member 411 are in front and back contact, the lower surface of the L-shaped extension portion 423 abuts the upper surface of the lower plate 416a having the wavy side portion 416 on the back surface, A part of the L-shaped extension portion 423 that extends upward is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, it is possible to increase the substantial plate thickness of the upper panel unit 400 at the portion where the L-shaped extension portion 423 and the lower plate 416a abut on the upper and lower sides, thereby improving the strength.

The opening 424 in the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 123) is an opening through which the vibration wave (sound) output from the rear side of the speaker 451 to the inside of the speaker assembly 450 passes (is emitted to the outside). The right corner support member 430R and the left corner support member 430L are provided with circular openings 430R1 and 430L1, which are circular openings through which vibrations generated toward the front side of the speaker assembly 450 pass.

The right corner support member 430R has a laterally long rectangular through hole 430R2 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the opening 414 of the upper frame member 410 in the front-rear direction. The player can visually recognize the light emitted to the lens member 440 through the through hole 430 R 2 through the opening 414 .

121 is an exploded front perspective view of speaker assembly 450, and FIG. 122 is an exploded rear perspective view of speaker assembly 450. FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 121 and 122, the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by imaginary lines for easy understanding.

The speaker assembly 450 is composed of a pair of left and right assemblies 450R and 450L, which are fastened together to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) by screws inserted through connecting holes 469. The lower end is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e. Since the speaker assembly 450 is composed of a pair of speaker assemblies 450R and 450L having substantially symmetrical shapes, the speaker assembly 450R will be described and the speaker assembly 450L will be omitted.

The speaker assembly 450R includes a speaker (cone-shaped speaker) 451, which is an acoustic device that converts an electrical signal into an audible sound wave, and a front flange 452 of the speaker 451 inserted through a through hole 466. The front side assembly 460 is fastened and fixed from the front side, and the front side assembly 460 is formed with an outer shape that substantially matches the outer shape of the front side assembly 460 in a front view, and a space is formed between the front side assembly 460 in the assembled state (see FIG. 100). a side assembly 480;

The speaker 451 is attached to the front assembly 460 so as to block the through hole 466 of the front assembly 460, and emits an effect sound related to the game. A speaker connection wire 453 (for example, an electric wire made up of a copper wire and a coating that covers the copper wire) passes through a through hole drilled in the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 102), and the end of the speaker connection wire 453 By connecting the connector to the electronic board 14i (see FIG. 102), it is configured to be connected to the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4).

A front portion of the speaker 451 is covered with a protective cover 454 made of a synthetic fiber material that allows passage of sound emitted from the speaker 451 . The speaker 451 covered with the protective cover 454 is attached to the front assembly 460 with its front portion aligned with the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, the front part of the speaker 451 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86) through the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86), and the reproduced sound from the speaker 451 cannot be heard. You can play back and output with high sound quality without any loss. In addition, the protective cover 454 can suitably protect the front portion of the speaker 451 without degrading the sound quality.

The front assembly 460 includes a main body 461 formed in a cup shape that is elongated in the left and right direction and whose back side is open, and a plurality of semicircular concave ends extending from the upper and lower side edges of the main body 461 toward the center of the vertical width. and a recessed portion 462 and an extended plate 463 extending from the rear side edge of the recessed portion 463 b having the same shape as the recessed portion 462 toward the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 461 toward the upper and lower width outside. , a wiring passage recess 464 recessed from the back side end of the body portion 461 toward the front side, a light passage through hole 465 formed through the upper right corner of the body portion 461 in the front-rear direction, and the body portion 461. A circular through hole 466 through which the speaker 451 is inserted on the right side, a plurality of passage forming ribs 467 extending from the cup-shaped bottom plate (front side plate) of the main body 461 to the back side, and a rear A plurality of fastening portions 468 in which screws inserted through the side assembly 480 are fastened and fixed, and connecting holes 469 in which screws for fastening the left and right speaker assemblies 450L and 450R together to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) are inserted. and a front recessed portion 471 that is recessed from the back side toward the front side at the lower end portion of the tip side main body portion 461T.

The main body portion 461 is divided in the left-right direction into a base end-side main body portion 461B disposed on the side where the through hole 466 is formed, and a left-right center side of the base end-side main body portion 461B (see FIG. 121). left), and a distal end side main body 461T connected to the center in the left-right direction of the intermediate main body 461M (left side in FIG. 121). A space is continuously formed between the proximal side main body portion 461B, the intermediate main body portion 461M, and the distal side main body portion 461T and the rear side assembly 480 .

The main body portion 461 includes a rear side wall portion 461H formed as a wall portion that surrounds substantially the entire circumference of the outer shape when viewed from the front. The rear side wall portion 461H has an edge portion without barbs on the inside (an edge portion on the inside where no flange or the like is formed).

The recessed portion 462 is a recessed portion in which the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is disposed on the center side of the circle, and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1. be done.

The extension plate 463 has through holes 463a through which screws are inserted from the rear side. The screws inserted through the through-holes 463a are inserted from the back side of the main body frame 14a through the common-fastening holes 14a2 and the common-fastening holes 14e3 (see FIG. 102) of the upper side plate member 14e, and are inserted through the through-holes 483a and 483a of the rear assembly 480 and It passes through the through hole 463a and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 120) of the main body member 411. As shown in FIG.

That is, in the speaker assembly 450R, a screw inserted through the through hole 463a through the upper side plate member 14e is screwed into the main body member 411 from the rear side of the main body frame 14a. It is pressed against the rear assembly 480 . Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is fastened together with the body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the body member 411, thereby being firmly fixed to each other.

According to this configuration, the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to the metal body frame 14a with the upper side plate member 14e interposed therebetween (fastened and fixed to a hard material with the resin material interposed therebetween). Thereby, the acoustic effect of the speaker 451 can be improved.

The wire passage recess 464 forms part of an opening through which a speaker connection wire 453 connected to the speaker 451 is passed. The recess width of the wire passage recess 464 is formed smaller than the cross-sectional outline of the covered portion of the speaker connection wire 453 . As a result, pressure is applied to the covered portion of the speaker connection wire 453 passing through the wire passage recess 464 , thereby preventing a gap from occurring between the wire passage recess 464 and the speaker connection wire 453 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is lowered due to sound leakage from the opening through which the speaker connection line 453 passes. 121 and 122, the illustration of the rear side wall portion 461H is omitted (broken) for the sake of convenience, and the wiring passage concave portion 464 is illustrated so as to be visible.

Here, in this embodiment, the wiring passage recess 464 is formed not in the rear assembly 480 but in the front assembly 460 to which the speaker 451 is assembled. The speaker connection line 453 that is connected to the speaker 451 in advance can be easily passed through the wiring passage recess 464 . As a result, the workability of assembling the speaker assembly 450 can be improved.

The light passing through-hole 465 is a through-hole through which the light emitted from the LED 14e2 arranged on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) toward the lens member 440 passes.

The passage-forming rib 467 abuts on the passage-forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 without any gap in the front and rear, and bends multiple times into the space formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 (see FIG. 123). is the rib that forms the This curved path is a path through which vibration waves (sound) emitted from the speaker 451 to the rear side pass. A front side end portion of the passage forming rib 467 is connected to a front side plate of the main body portion 461 . This prevents the formation of a gap on the front side of the passage forming rib 467 .

The front recessed portion 471 is formed in a size that surrounds the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) (protruding slightly outward from the outer shape).

The rear assembly 480 includes a body portion 481 formed in a cup shape that is elongated in the left and right direction and has an open front side, and a semicircular tip end recessed from the upper and lower side edges of the body portion 481 toward the center of the vertical width. A plurality of recessed portions 482 and an extended plate extending from the rear side edges of the recessed portions 482 and the recessed portions 483b having the same shape as the recessed portions 482 to the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 481 toward the upper and lower width outer sides. 483, a wiring pressing convex portion 484 projecting toward the front side of the body portion 481, a light passing through hole 485 formed through the upper right corner of the body portion 481 in the front-rear direction, and a cup-shaped portion of the body portion 481. A plurality of passage forming ribs 487 extending from the bottom plate (rear side plate) to the front side and fastening portions 468 of the front assembly 460 are formed as through holes through which screws are inserted at positions corresponding in the front-rear direction. and a rear recessed portion 491 recessed from the front side toward the back side at a position corresponding to the front recessed portion 471 of the front assembly 460 in the front-rear direction.

The body portion 481 extends in a plate shape toward the front side in such a manner as to surround the outer periphery of the body portion 481 at a position moved inward by the plate thickness of the body portion 461 of the front assembly 460 from the outer shape of the rear side plate. A front side wall portion 481H is formed in a shape that fits inside the inner side surface of the rear side wall portion 461H.

Since the speaker assembly 450R has a double wall portion that is fitted with the rear side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H on the entire outer periphery, it is possible to prevent air from leaking from the outer peripheral position. . As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is lowered due to sound leakage from the outer peripheral position.

The front side wall portion 481H has a pair of auxiliary protrusions projecting toward the front side beyond the wire pressing protrusions 484 at positions sandwiching the wire pressing protrusions 484 on the left and right with a gap that allows the speaker connection line 453 to pass through. 481 Ha.

The auxiliary protrusions 481Ha are a pair of protrusions that prevent the position of the speaker connection wire 453 temporarily fixed in the wire passage recess 464 from being shifted when the rear assembly 480 is assembled to the front assembly 460 . That is, the inner side surfaces of the pair of auxiliary protrusions 481Ha are tapered so that they widen to the left and right toward the front side (tip side) (see FIG. 124(c)). Even if it comes off and shifts to the left or right, the shift can be corrected by the taper of the pair of auxiliary projections 481Ha.

As a result, the speaker connection wire 453 can be returned to the wire passage recess 464 in the process of assembly, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 100), the speaker connection wire 453 is formed from the wire passage recess 464 and the wire pressing projection 484. can be easily accommodated in an opening in the

The recessed portion 482 has the same outer shape as the recessed portion 462 in a front view, and the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is arranged on the center side of the circle. It is a concave portion and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1.

The extension plate 483 has through holes 483a through which screws are inserted from the rear side. The screws inserted through the through-holes 483a are inserted from the back side of the body frame 14a through the common-fastening holes 14a2 and the common-fastening holes 14e3 (see FIG. 102) of the upper side plate member 14e, and pass through the through-holes 483a and the front assembly 460. It passes through the hole 463a and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411 (see FIG. 101).

That is, the speaker assembly 450R is extended from the back side of the body frame 14a to the extent that the screw is tightened by screwing a screw inserted into the through hole 483a through the upper side plate member 14e into the fastening portion 419 of the body member 411. The installation plate 483 is pressed against the extension plate 463 of the front assembly 460 . Accordingly, the speaker assembly 450R is fastened together with the body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e and the body member 411, and is firmly fixed to each other.

The wiring pressing protrusion 484 is protruded along the upper edge of the rear side plate of the main body 481 and formed with a width that fits inside the wiring passage recess 464. The protruding length is slightly shorter than the outer diameter of the covered portion of the speaker connection wire 453 .

That is, by passing the speaker connection wire 453 through the opening surrounded by the wire pressing protrusion 484 and the wire passage recess 464, the covering portion of the speaker connection wire 453 is compressed, and the wire press protrusion 484 and the wire passage recess 464 are compressed. It is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the opening formed by being surrounded by 464 and the speaker connection line 453 . As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is lowered due to sound leakage from the opening through which the speaker connection line 453 is passed.

The light passing through-hole 485 is a through-hole through which the light emitted from the LED 14e2 arranged on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) toward the lens member 440 passes. The light passing through-hole 485 is formed of a circular opening that surrounds one LED. The light passage through-hole 465 has a larger cross-sectional shape than the light-passing through hole 485, and is tapered so that the cross-sectional shape becomes larger toward the front side. ), the light passage through-holes 465 and 485 communicate in the front-rear direction.

The passage-forming ribs 487 are formed at the same position as the passage-forming ribs 467 of the front assembly 460 in a front view, and are in contact with each other without gaps in the front and rear. It is a rib that forms a curved path (see FIG. 123). This curved path is a path through which vibration waves (sound) emitted from the speaker 451 to the rear side pass.

The passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H and formed at front and rear end portions and surface positions of the front side wall portion 481H. That is, the back side end portion of the passage forming rib 487 is connected to the back side plate of the main body portion 481 . This prevents the formation of a gap on the rear side of the passage forming rib 487 .

Here, the passage forming rib 487 is designed to have dimensions such that the front side end abuts the passage forming rib 467 and a compressive force is generated in the front-rear direction. That is, the passage forming rib 487 is subjected to a compressive force directed toward the back side from the passage forming rib 467, and the passage forming ribs 467, 487 are elastically deformed in the front-rear direction due to the compressive force to close the gap therebetween. (See FIG. 124(b)).

At this time, if the passage-forming rib 487 has a low rigidity in the left-right direction and bends in the left-right direction, the compressive force may not work well and the gap may not be closed. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the passage-forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H, the rigidity in the left-right direction is increased by the strength of the front side wall portion 481H (furthermore, in the assembled state (see FIG. 100), the overlapped rear surface is reduced). strength to be reinforced by the side wall portion 461H). Therefore, the rigidity in the lateral direction of the passage forming rib 487 can be strengthened, and the lateral bending of the passage forming rib 487 can be suppressed, so that the gap between the passage forming rib 467 can be closed well. can be done.

The rear recessed portion 491 is formed to have a shape inverted from the front recessed portion 471 and forms an opening together with the front recessed portion 471 . The opening is formed in a size surrounding the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) (protruding slightly outside the outer shape). It is placed in a position surrounding the outer shape.

123(a) is a rear view of the front assembly 460 and FIG. 123(b) is a front view of the rear assembly 480. FIG. In FIGS. 123(a) and 123(b), the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by an imaginary line for easy understanding, and the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480, which are arranged to face each other, are shown on surfaces facing each other. is deployed toward the front side of the paper. 123(a) and 123(b) are folded along a line (not shown) drawn vertically in the left-right center of the paper surface, so that the contact positions of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are adjusted. can be matched. That is, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e can be brought into contact with each other in the front-rear direction.

When the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are assembled (speaker assembly 450, see FIG. 100), the speaker assembly 450 has an acoustic chamber on the rear side of the base end main body 461B of the front assembly 460. formed. Then, with the acoustic chamber as the base end, an acoustic passage as a passage path for the vibration wave Ws (sound) output from the back side of the speaker 451 extends toward the tip side main body portion 461T. This acoustic path is configured as a curved path by path forming ribs 467 and 487 .

As shown in FIGS. 123(a) and 123(b), the passage forming ribs 467 are formed laterally inward (to the left) of the wire passage recesses 464 through which the wires pass, and alternately vertically toward the left. and rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e arranged at a plurality of locations (five locations in this embodiment).

By forming the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e on the inner side (left side) of the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e are formed at the time of assembly. , and the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e of the rear assembly 480 can be prevented from being caught.

Since the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e are connected to the main body 461 and the rear side wall 461H, the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e enhance the rigidity of the main body 461. can be done.

Each of the rib portions 467 a , 467 b , 467 c , 467 d , 467 e together with the passage forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 form a bent passage through which the vibration wave Ws generated from the rear side of the speaker 451 passes.

Here, when a horizontally long cavity is formed without the passage forming rib 467, the vibration wave generated from the speaker 451 proceeds linearly. going to proceed.

That is, as shown in FIG. 123(a) as an example of the traveling path, the vibration wave Ws travels to the left side (arrow L side) and the nearest rib portion (for example, rib portion 467b) in the left-right direction is arranged on the lower side, the traveling direction between the ribs is the upper left direction (directions of arrows L and U).

On the other hand, after the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) of the passage forming rib 467 is arranged on the lower side, the vibration wave Ws is arranged on the left side (arrow L side) of the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) that is closest in the left-right direction. , rib portion 467c) are arranged on the upper side, the traveling direction is the lower left direction (directions of arrows L and D).

Therefore, when the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e are arranged alternately in the vertical direction as in the present embodiment, the traveling path of the vibration wave Ws can be a path that is bent vertically, Compared to the lateral width of the space, it is possible to secure a longer traveling path length of the vibration wave Ws.

As a result, it is possible to easily adjust the travel path length of the vibration wave Ws until it passes through the opening formed by the pair of recessed portions 471 and 491, thereby suppressing the generation of standing waves due to the vibration wave Ws. be able to.

In addition, in this embodiment, the recessed portions 462 and 463b can also produce the same effect as the passage forming rib 467 does. That is, the vibration wave Ws is caused to move in the upper left direction between the recessed portion 462 arranged in the immediate vicinity of the front recessed portion 471 and the recessed portion 463b arranged above and on the right side (arrow R side). (Arrows L, U directions).

Therefore, the recessed portions 462 and 463b have the effect of regulating the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws in addition to the effect of assembling.

As shown in FIG. 123(b), the passage forming ribs 487 are formed inward in the left-right direction (left side) from the wiring pressing protrusion 484 that presses down the wiring, and are arranged at a plurality of locations (main ribs) staggered vertically toward the left side. In the embodiment, rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are arranged at five locations).

Since the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are connected to the main body 481 and the front side wall 481H, the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e strengthen the rigidity of the main body 481. can be done.

Here, each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is formed to have a shape that coincides with each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front assembly 460 in the front-rear direction. ), they are arranged facing each other in the front-rear direction.

The actions of the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are similar to the actions of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e described above, so description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in this embodiment, the recessed portions 482 and 483b can also produce the same effect as the passage forming rib 487 does. That is, the vibration wave Ws is placed between the recessed portion 482 arranged in the immediate vicinity of the rear recessed portion 491 and the recessed portion 483b arranged above and on the right side (arrow R side). It can be advanced in the direction (arrow L, U direction). Accordingly, the recessed portions 482 and 483b have the effect of regulating the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws in addition to the effect of assembling.

Here, the space formed inside the speaker assembly 450R is narrowed in vertical width as the distance from the speaker 451 increases, and is narrowed once at the position where the recessed portions 462, 482 and the recessed portions 463b, 483b are vertically aligned. Further, at a position away from the speaker 451 , the vertical width is expanded at once, and then communicates with the opening formed by the concave portions 471 and 491 . Thereby, the acoustic effect can be improved.

In this embodiment, in the longitudinal direction of the speaker assembly 450, the base end side body portion 461B side to which the speaker 451 is assembled is sealed by the front side assembly 460 and the rear side assembly 480, so output from the rear side of the speaker 451 The generated vibration wave Ws (sound) seeks an exit and advances toward the distal end side body portion 461T, which is the opposite side in the longitudinal direction. The vibration wave Ws (sound) that has reached the tip-side body portion 461T passes through the opening formed by the front-side recessed portion 471 and the rear-side recessed portion 491 and the opening portion 424 (see FIG. 120) of the lower edge plate member 420 in this order. As a result, the sound is emitted to the outside of the speaker assembly 450R (the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86)).

That is, the speaker assembly 450 is configured as a bass-reflex type speaker box, and the rear portion of the speaker 451 includes an internal path of the speaker assembly 450, an opening formed by the concave portions 471 and 491, and an opening 424 ( 120), the pachinko machine 8010 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010, so the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 can be reproduced and output with high sound quality without being muffled. can be done.

The bass reflex type speaker assembly 450 resonates the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 to invert the phase, and the sound output from the front side of the speaker 451 and the sound output from the front side of the speaker 451 are in phase with each other. Sound can be emitted from the opening formed by That is, the bass-reflex type speaker assembly 450 can emphasize the sound output from the back side of the speaker 450 by superimposing the sound output from the front side and the sound output from the front side by superimposing them in the same phase without canceling each other due to the opposite phase. That is, it becomes possible to amplify heavy bass. As a result, the pachinko machine 8010 according to the present embodiment is capable of performing realistic effects, and can heighten the player's interest and excitement in the game.

In this embodiment, since the upper panel unit 400 in which the opening 424 is formed is arranged on the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 91), the low frequency sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 is transmitted through the speaker assembly. The internal space of 450 is used as an enclosure, and is released to the front side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 100) (released downward to the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86)). As a result, it is possible to appropriately provide the player playing the game on the front side of the front frame 14 with the effect of the low sound emitted from the front frame 14 toward the front side.

The sound of the vibration wave Ws (sound) can be tuned by setting the volume of the speaker assembly 450 and setting the path length of the vibration wave Ws. For example, in the present embodiment, the vibration wave Ws has a path avoiding the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e of the front assembly 460 and the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e of the rear assembly 480. is defined. Therefore, by individually setting the arrangement of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d and 467e and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d and 487e and the vertical extension length, the vibration wave Ws (voice ) can be tuned.

In the present embodiment, the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e of the front assembly 460 and the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e of the rear assembly 480 serve the above-mentioned purposes as well. It is arranged at a portion where a load is applied when the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed, and reinforces the speaker assembly 450 .

For example, the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d are arranged near the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488, so that the fastening portion 468 and the vicinity of the through hole 488 can be reinforced. It is possible to prevent the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 from being damaged by the load applied to the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 when the screws are screwed.

Further, the extension plates 463, 483 are sandwiched and pressed between the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 and the upper side plate member 14e in the assembled state (see FIG. 125(a)). 467 d and 487 d are arranged closer to the extension plates 463 and 483 than the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488 which are closest thereto. Therefore, even after the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are fastened and fixed by screwing screws into the fastening portions 468, the fastening portions 419 are inserted through the through holes 463a and 483a of the extension plates 463 and 483. are screwed into the upper frame member 410, the upper side plate member 14e and the main body frame 14a. Deformation of the side assembly 480 can be prevented. That is, the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 can be reinforced by the ribs 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d.

Also, for example, the rib portions 467b and 487b are connected to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482, respectively. Here, the recessed portions 462 and 482 are portions where the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIGS. 102 and 125) of the upper side plate member 14e is positioned downward in the assembled state, and the speaker assembly 450 is positioned on the upper side plate member. 14e, recessed portions 462 and 482 of speaker assembly 450 ride on fastening portion 14e1. Therefore, an upward load is applied to the upper ends of the concave portions 462 and 482 from the fastening portion 14e1 as reaction force generated when the fastening portion 14e1 supports the weight of the speaker assembly 450. FIG.

Therefore, it is thought that the recessed portions 462 and 482 are likely to be damaged. It is possible to reinforce the load applied to the portions 462 and 482 and improve the durability of the recessed portions 462 and 482 .

An opening 424 (see FIG. 120) formed from a plurality of small-diameter through holes functions as a bass reflex port. Here, compared to the case where the opening 424 is formed from a single large-diameter through hole, fraudulent acts such as illegally entering the pachinko machine 8010 through the opening 424 with a wire, piano wire, or the like are prevented. It can be made easier to control.

In addition, in such fraudulent acts, wires, piano wires, etc. are illegally entered into the game area and nails are deformed. and the opening formed by the rear recessed portion 491, and the opening formed by the wire passing concave portion 464 and the wire pressing convex portion 484. A gap in the opening formed by the wire pressing projection 484 is closed by the speaker connection wire 453 . Therefore, when a wire, a piano wire, or the like enters the speaker assembly 450 through the opening formed by the front side recessed portion 471 and the rear side recessed portion 491, the speaker assembly 450 may be displaced through an opening other than the place where the wire or the piano wire entered. It is possible to make it difficult for the tip of a wire, piano wire, or the like to reach the game area through a through-hole formed as an opening for passing the speaker connection wire 453 through the upper side plate member 14e.

In addition, the through holes formed as openings for passing the speaker connection wires 453 through the upper side plate member 14e are arranged near the left and right ends of the upper side plate member 14e according to the arrangement of the speakers 451, so that wires and piano wires are not required. It is possible to lengthen the distance between the opening formed by the front side recessed portion 471 and the rear side recessed portion 491 , which is the location where the sound and the like enter the speaker assembly 450 .

Therefore, even if such a fraudulent act is performed, the success rate of the fraudulent act can be lowered, and it is possible to easily prevent fraudulent profit from being generated.

124(a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly 450R, FIG. 124(b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly 450R along line CXXIVb-CXXIVb of FIG. 124(a), and FIG. 124(c). 124(a) is a top view of speaker assembly 450R viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVc in FIG. 124(a), and FIG. 124(d) is a partial bottom view of speaker assembly 450R viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVd in FIG. 124(a). be. 124(a) and 124(c), the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by an imaginary line for easy understanding, while the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated in the partially enlarged view of FIG. is omitted.

As shown enlarged in FIG. 124(b), the inner side surface 461Hi (lower surface in FIG. 124(b)) of the rear side wall portion 461H of the front assembly 460 has a tapered shape that slopes inward toward the rear side. An outer side surface 481Ho (upper surface in FIG. 124(b)) of the front side wall portion 481H of the rear assembly 480 has a tapered shape that inclines inward toward the rear side, and is fitted with the inner side surface 461Hi in the assembled state. It is said that As a result, the work efficiency of inserting the front sidewall portion 481H of the rear assembly 480 into the rear sidewall portion 461H of the front assembly 460 can be improved.

In FIG. 124(b), the position of the front end of the rib portion 487c in the assembled state is illustrated by a solid line, and the position of the front end of the rib portion 487c before assembly is illustrated by an imaginary line. That is, in the assembled state, the rib portion 487c receives a compressive load from the rib portion 467c and is elastically deformed. A compressive force acts from the rib portion 487c toward the rib portion 467c due to the restoring force generated by this elastic deformation, so that the gap between the rib portions 467c and 487c can be filled. The rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e, 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are designed to have a dimensional relationship in which a compressive load is generated between the rib portions in contact with each other.

As shown in FIG. 124(c), the intermediate main body portion 461M is formed shorter in front-rear dimension than the proximal side main body portion 461B and the distal end side main body portion 461T. Therefore, the cross-sectional area of the passage through which the vibration wave Ws can pass can be made smaller (squeezed) in the intermediate main body portion 461M compared to the distal end side main body portion 461T. Thereby, the improvement of an acoustic effect can be aimed at.

As shown in FIG. 124(d), the internal space of the tip side body portion 461T disposed above the opening formed by the front side recessed portion 471 and the rear side recessed portion 491 is the interior of the intermediate body portion 461M. A large space is ensured in a form that bulges in the front-rear direction compared to the space. As a result, the vibration wave Ws that has reached the distal end side main body portion 461T can be temporarily retained in the distal end side main body portion 461T and released at a low speed. As a result, it is possible to improve the acoustic effect, for example, it is possible to make it easier to hear deep bass by the vibration wave Ws.

FIG. 125(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the main body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e along line CXXVa-CXXVa of FIG. 124(a). b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the body frame 14a, and the upper side plate member 14e along line CXXVb-CXXVb of FIG. 124(a).

As shown in FIG. 125(a), the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 is fastened and fixed to the fastening portion 419 by screws inserted through the through holes 463a and 483a. This is a portion that sandwiches the upper side plate member 14e with the body frame 14a. That is, by arranging the enlarged rib 419a on the front surface of the extension plate 463, it is possible to prevent the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper side plate member 14e from being displaced in the front-rear direction. , the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper side plate member 14e, and the metal body frame 14a can be firmly fixed.

As shown in FIG. 125(b), the second fastening portion 419b is fastened to the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e at the lower position of the upper frame member 410, and the speaker assembly is attached at the upper position of the upper frame member 410. It is formed at a position corresponding to recessed portions 462 and 482 of 450 .

The second fastening portion 419b and the fastening portion 14e1 are disposed inside the recessed portions 462 and 482 (passing through the recessed portions 462 and 482 in the fastening direction without coming into contact with each other). It is configured as a portion that fastens and fixes the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14 e without the side assembly 480 .

The body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e are fastened together to the second fastening portion 419b at the upper position of the main body member 411, and the upper side plate member is fastened to the second fastening portion 419b at the lower position of the main body member 411. 14e is fastened and fixed, and the body frame 14a is not fastened and fixed.

Further, at the upper position of the main body member 411, the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) is arranged inside the concave portions 462 and 482 (the portion extending toward the rear side is arranged inside). At a lower position of the main body member 411, the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) is arranged inside the concave portions 462 and 482 (the portion extending toward the front side is arranged inside).

In this embodiment, since the separate left and right speakers 451 are arranged in the independent speaker assemblies 450R and 450L, the reproduction output from the speakers 451 arranged in the speaker assemblies 450R and 450L on the other side is reproduced. In addition to avoiding conflict with the sound to be played, it is possible to reproduce transparent sound with high quality without muddying the reproduced sound.

In this embodiment, the extension plate 483 of the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e are in contact with each other at the upper part of the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 125(a)). In the lower part, the rear surface of the rear assembly 480 and the front surface of the upper side plate member 14e are separated from each other, and the front surface of the upper side plate member 14e protrudes toward the front side in a portion arranged to face the lower end of the rear assembly 480, The projecting portion and the lower end of the rear assembly 480 abut on each other in the front-rear direction. That is, the speaker assembly 450 is not configured to be in contact (sticky) with the upper side plate member 14e over the entire surface, but is in a line-contact manner particularly at the lower end.

In this case, the portion that protrudes from the upper side plate member 14e and contacts the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 can function as an insulator, so that the acoustic effect of the sound output from the speaker 451 can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the portion that protrudes from the upper side plate member 14e and contacts the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 is formed integrally with the upper side plate member 14e (made of synthetic resin), but is limited to this. There is nothing to be done.

For example, a metal member may be provided between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e, a member made of ebony, or a glass member may be provided. Alternatively, a member made of concrete may be provided, a soft resin material may be provided, or another commercially available member may be provided.

In particular, when arranging a metal member, it is desirable that the specific gravity is high. For example, it is desirable to employ cast iron, zinc, brass, lead, steel, and the like. By using these metals, it is possible to add depth to the sound.

Moreover, it is desirable that the member has high hardness. Examples include cast iron, steel, glass, and ceramics. By using these members, the rise performance of sound can be improved.

As for the shape, they may protrude in the shape of an elongated plate, may protrude in the shape of spikes, or may protrude in a form with rounded ends. Also, the upper side plate member 14e and the speaker assembly 450 are not limited to being fixed, and may be connected in a floating manner.

The arrangement of the portion functioning as the insulator described above is not limited to the rear surface of the lower end portion of speaker assembly 450 . For example, the rear surface of the upper end of the speaker assembly 450, the rear surface of the right and left ends of the speaker assembly 450, the side surface or the front surface of the speaker assembly 450 may be used.

For example, when arranged on the rear surface of the upper end portion, a member functioning as an insulator is cylindrical, arranged between the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e, and a screw to be inserted through the through hole 483a is inserted. Positioning may be done by In this case, it is possible to eliminate the need for a separate locking member for positioning the member functioning as an insulator, and the rear assembly 480, the upper side plate member 14e, and the insulator function depending on the degree of tightening of the screw inserted through the through hole 483a. It is possible to adjust the sound effect by adjusting the degree of contact with the member (the load applied to each other).

At this time, even if the screws inserted through the through-holes 483a are loosened, the speaker assembly 450 remains in the same position as the screws inserted through the connecting holes 469 (see FIG. 123(a)) and the connecting holes 469. The upper side is fixed by a screw inserted through a through hole provided on the opposite side of the connecting hole 469 in the left-right direction in terms of shape, or through a through-hole provided at the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 at the left-right position where the through hole is arranged. Since it is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14e, it is possible to prevent the speaker assembly 450 from coming off the upper side plate member 14e.

Regarding the fixing of the upper frame member 410 to the upper side plate member 14e, the upper side frame member 410 is inserted into the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) of the upper side plate member 14e from the rear side in addition to the screws inserted through the through holes 483a. The screw is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 125(b)) to fasten and fix. As described above, in the fastening and fixing between the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, no load is applied to the speaker assembly 450. Therefore, by firmly fastening and fixing the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, It is possible to prevent the upper frame member 410 from coming off from the upper side plate member 14e while loosely tightening the screws inserted through the through holes 483a (adjusting the degree of tightening).

The relationship between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e is similar to the relationship between the speaker assembly 450 and the body frame 14a connected and fixed to the speaker assembly 450 via the upper side plate member 14e. That is, the metal body frame 14a can be made to function as an insulator, and the material and contact relationship can be designed in the same manner as described above.

126 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12, FIG. 127(a) is a rear view of the game board 13, and FIG. 127(b) is a front view of the inner frame 12. . 127(b) shows the inner frame 12 with the game board 13 removed.

First, in order to explain the procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the support portions 12a and 12b will be explained. As shown in FIG. 126, at the upper and lower corners of the inner surface of the left wall of the inner frame 12, a left end front support portion 12a and a left end rear support portion 12b are spaced forward and backward for the purpose of supporting the left end portion of the game board 13. are placed.

The left end front support portion 12a is formed with an inclined surface 12a1 that inclines backward toward the left from the right end of the rear end surface that is arranged to face the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89). A flat surface 12a2 extending in the left-right direction is formed leftward from the left end. In the assembled state, the flat surface 12a2 and the front surface of the game board 13 are in surface contact.

The rear left end support portion 12b has a rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front. . The left end rear support portion 12b includes an elastic support portion 12b1 having one end disposed inside thereof and a portion protruding from the front end surface of the cup-shaped portion.

The elastic support portion 12b1 is arranged in a posture of projecting toward the front side as it goes to the left in the state of its natural length. That is, the elastic support portion 12b1 forms a tapered shape that expands to the side (rightward) where the game board 13 is arranged in the left-right direction together with the inclined surface 12a1 of the left front support portion 12a. As a result, it is possible to improve workability when an operator assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 . Next, a procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129. FIG.

128(a) and 128(b) are cross-sectional views of the inner frame 12 taken along line CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa of FIG. 127(b), and FIGS. 3 is a side view of the board support device 600 and the game board 13 schematically showing the game board 13. FIG. 128 and 129 show the process of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 in chronological order, and FIG. 128(b) and 129(a) show the game board 13 just before the assembly to the inner frame 12 is completed, and FIG. 129(b) shows the game board 13 after the assembly to the inner frame 12 is completed. illustrated. 128 and Z39, the configuration of a part of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12 is omitted for easy understanding.

When the worker assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, first, the game board 13 is temporarily placed on the upper surface of the plate passage forming member 160, and after the upper and lower positions of the game board 13 are aligned to some extent, the left end of the game board 13 is placed. is slid between the left end front support portion 12a and the left end rear support portion 12b. At this time, as shown in FIG. 128(a), the game board 13 is slid into the inner frame 12 in a posture rotated about an axis facing the vertical direction, so that the left end front support on the front side is provided. Although there is a possibility that the portion 12b and the game board 13 interfere with each other, in the present embodiment, since the inclined surface 12a1 is formed on the front left end support portion 12a, the game board 13 and the front left end support portion 12b interfere with each other. The range (position) can be reduced. Thereby, workability can be improved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(b), the game board 13 is moved around the left end of the game board 13 (specifically, the contact position between the rear edge of the inclined surface 12a1 and the front surface of the game board 13). It is rotated so as to approach the inner frame 12. - 特許庁In the course of this rotation, the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged to face the flat surface 12a2, and a biasing force is applied toward the game board 13 from the elastic support portions 12b1. That is, the front surface of the game board 13 is pressed against the flat surface 12a2 by the biasing force applied from the elastic support portion 12b1. Thereby, the game board 13 can be temporarily fixed to the inner frame 12 .

In the process of rotating the game board 13, the vertical position of the game board 13 is regulated by the support bottom portion 12c of the inner frame. The support bottom portion 12c is a plate-like portion formed on the inner frame 12 along the left-right direction in a position and length corresponding to the lower bottom surface of the game board 13, and supports the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 90). A plurality of guide ribs 12c1, which are supported from below and whose front upper end portions are cut as inclined surfaces, are provided in the left-right direction.

With this configuration, in the process of changing the state from FIG. 128(a) to FIG. 128(b), the rear edge of the lower bottom surface of the game board 13 passes through the front edge of the guide rib 12c1 in top view. Since the game board 13 rides on the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 each time, the rotation of the game board 13 can be progressed smoothly by causing the game board 13 to ride on the guide rib 12c1 in order from the left side. . Therefore, the workability of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

The inclination angle of the inclined surface with respect to the upper surface of the guide rib 12c1 is set to approximately 15°, which is larger than the backward inclination (approximately 10°) when the pachinko machine 8010 is installed in the amusement arcade. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inclination of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 from reversing in the front-rear direction due to the backward inclination of the pachinko machine 8013 at the time of installation, so that the game can be played regardless of the backward inclination of the pachinko machine 8013 at the time of installation. Workability when the board 13 is assembled to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

In addition, the inclination angle of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 is not limited to this, and may be formed at an inclination angle equivalent to the backward inclination at the time of installation of the amusement arcade. In this case, the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 on which the game board 13 rides can be made horizontal.

In the state shown in FIG. 128(b), as shown in FIG. 129(a), the game board 13 is sandwiched between the board support devices 600 which are arranged vertically and are in a released state to be described later, and the rear surface of the game board 13 rotates. It abuts on the front surface of the rear claw member 640 .

Here, in the released state, the board support device 600 allows the pre-rotation pawl member 620 and the pre-regulation pawl member 630 (parts arranged on the front side of the position where the game board 13 is fixed) to enter the game board 13. Since it is configured to be retracted from the path, the workability of assembling the game board 13 can be improved.

Then, as shown in FIG. 129(b), by pushing the vicinity of the right end portion of the game board 13 toward the back side, a load is applied to the post-rotation pawl member 640 through the game board 13, and the board surface support device 600 is displaced. , and the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12.例文帳に追加That is, when the game board 13 is fixed, the state of the upper and lower board support devices 600 changes substantially at the same time.

The game board 13 is supported by the support bottom portion 12c and its vertical position is regulated. As shown in FIGS. 129(a) and 129(b), between the released state and the fixed state of the board support device 600, the board support device 600 does not come into contact with the lower end of the game board 13 (the game The board 13 is not pushed up by the board support device 600), and the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change. Therefore, the floating connector 13a and the receiving connector 12d can be stably attached and detached as the board support device 600 is changed between the released state and the fixed state.

Here, when the vicinity of the right end of the game board 13 is pushed to the rear side, the game board 13 rotates around the vicinity of the left end. The long width dimension of the game board 13 weakens the force required when applying a load to the inner frame 12, so that even a weak worker can assemble the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 without any problem.

When the game board 13 is assembled to the inner frame 12, the left end of the game board 13 is supported by the left end front support part 12a and the left end rear support part 12b at two upper and lower positions (see FIG. 126). 13 is insufficiently fixed (at least one of the upper and lower board support devices 600 is not fixed), the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed to the inner frame 12, Also, the extent to which the game board 13 falls forward can be reduced.

For example, when the upper board surface support device 600 is in the released state (see FIG. 134(a)), the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is pushed in to close against the inner frame 12, and the game board 13 The degree of tilting back and forth can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the board surface support device 600 from changing due to the recoil when the front frame 14 is pushed in to close it with respect to the inner frame 12 (the possibility can be reduced).

In a state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12, the left end of the game board 13 is fixed by the support parts 12a and 12b, the right end is fixed by the board support device 600, and the lower end is vertically positioned on the support bottom 12c. is regulated.

In a state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 129(b)), it is arranged at the lower end of the back side of the game board 13 and connected to various members and various devices arranged on the game board 13. A floating connector 13a which is connected to the wiring of the game board 13 and is supported on the game board 13 so as to be able to change its position in the surface direction of the game board 13, and a control board which is disposed on the inner frame 12 near the board surface support device 600 on the lower side. The receiving side connector 12d to which the wiring connected to the unit 91 (see FIG. 3) and the like is connected on the back side is connected in the rotation direction of the game board 13. FIG.

The floating connector 13a and the receiving side connector 12d are arranged in an inclined posture so that the connection direction is directed along the rotation direction of the game board 13 in order to reduce connection resistance in the rotation direction of the game board 13. (Refer to FIG. 126 for the receiving connector 12d).

The inner frame 12 includes a board surface supporting device 600 in which a pair of upper and lower members are arranged facing each other near the right corner of the inner frame 12 . Since the pair of upper and lower board support devices 600 have the same configuration and are arranged facing each other, one of the board support devices 600 will be explained, and the other board support device 600 will be omitted.

130(a) is a front perspective view of the board support device 600, FIG. 130(b) is a back perspective view of the board support device 600, and FIG. 131(a) is a front perspective view of the board support device 600. 131(b) is a rear perspective view of the board support device 600. FIG. 130(a) and 130(b) show a fixed state in which the board support device 600 fixes the game board 13, and FIGS. 131(a) and 131(b) show A release state in which the fixation of the game board 13 is released is illustrated. As shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, the board support device 600 displaces the open side of the U-shape formed by the front rotating claw member 620 and the rear rotating claw member 640 in the front-rear direction.

132 is an exploded front perspective view of the board support device 600, and FIG. 133 is an exploded rear perspective view of the board support device 600. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the board support device 600 has a frame member 610 formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from above, and a first shaft member P61 inserted and fixed to the frame member 610 so as to be rotatable. A pivotally supported pre-rotation pawl member 620 and a pre-regulation pawl member rotatably supported by a second shaft member P62 arranged on the front side of the pre-rotation pawl member 620 and inserted through and fixed to the pre-rotation pawl member 620. 630 and a post-rotation pawl member 640 rotatably supported by a third shaft member P63 arranged on the rear side of the pre-rotation pawl member 620 and fixed through the pre-rotation pawl member 620 .

The frame member 610 includes a main body plate portion 611 formed in a rectangular frame shape by bending a sheet metal member at right angles at its corners, and a pair of parts of the main body plate portion 611 that are arranged opposite to each other on the left and right sides. A pair of support holes 612 formed through the plate portion 611a in a straight line, and an arcuate hole 613 formed in the plate portion 611a along an arc around the support hole 612 above the front side of the support hole 612. , an arc recess 614 recessed from below in the plate portion 611a along an arc centered on the support hole 612 on the back side of the support hole 612, and is inserted and fixed to the plate portion 611a at a position vertically above the support hole 612. A rod-shaped regulating rod 615 and a pair of flange-like extensions extending left and right from the plate portion 611a and fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12 by screws inserted through the through holes 616a in the assembled state (see FIG. 127(b)). and a fixing plate 616 of .

The support hole 612 is a through hole through which the first shaft member P61 is inserted and fixed. The first shaft member P61 is formed as a cylindrical metal rod-shaped member with an enlarged diameter end on the insertion base end side. , are fixed in the support holes 612 . Since the second shaft member P62 and the third shaft member P63 are the same as this fixing method and the shape of the shaft member, the description thereof will be omitted. When the first shaft member P61 is inserted through the support hole 612, the first shaft member P61 is also inserted through the supported hole 622 of the pre-rotation claw member 620 at the same time.

Similar to the frame member 610, the pre-rotation claw member 620 includes a main body plate portion 621 formed by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner to form a T-shape in a side view, and a part of the main body plate portion 621. A pair of supported holes 622 that are formed through the plate portions 621a that are arranged opposite to each other on the left and right and are axially supported by the first shaft member P61, and through the plate portions 621a on a straight line at the upper corners on the front side. A pair of support holes 623 formed and through which the second shaft member P62 is inserted and fixed, and a pair of support holes 623 formed through the rear side portion of the plate portion 621a on a straight line and through which the third shaft member P63 is inserted and fixed. and a hole 624 .

When the second shaft member P62 is inserted through the support hole 623, the second shaft member P62 is also inserted through the supported hole 632 of the pre-regulation claw member 630 at the same time, and the third shaft member P63 is inserted into the support hole 624. , the third shaft member P63 is also inserted through the supported hole 642 of the post-rotation pawl member 640 at the same time.

The main body plate portion 621 is composed of a long portion 621a1 that is arranged to face the left and right and is elongated in the front-rear direction, and an extension portion 621a2 that extends vertically from the front end of the long portion 621a1. A pair of plate portions 621a formed in a T-shape when viewed from the side, a connecting plate portion 621b connecting and fixing the upper edges of the plate portions 621a, and a surface of the connecting plate portion 621b from the back side end portion of the connecting plate portion 621b. and a rear side extension plate 621c that extends downwardly by about 45 degrees with respect to the plate portion 621a, and the extension portion 621a2 extends perpendicularly to the plate portion 621a toward the opposite side plate portion 621a from the rear side end portion of the extension portion 621a2. A hanging back plate portion 621d provided, and a front side extension plate 621e extending from the lower end of the hanging back plate portion 621d to the front side by about 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d. and are mainly provided.

The hanging back plate portion 621d is formed in a flat plate shape along a plane perpendicular to the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b. The side surface of the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b form a right angle, and the lower surface of the long portion 621a1 and the rear side surface of the hanging rear plate portion 621d are formed to be perpendicular to each other.

The rear-side extended plate 621c is arranged so that its lower surface can come into contact with the torsion spring NBb. In the present embodiment, in the released state, the torsion spring NBb abuts and the arm portion of the torsion spring NBb is separated from the body plate portion 611 (see FIG. 134(a)). By retracting upward of NBb, the torsion spring NBb starts contacting the body plate portion 611 .

As a result, when the operator starts pushing the game board 13 into the board support device 600, the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600 while preventing the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb from being generated on the operator side. Immediately before finishing, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb can be generated toward the operator. That is, it is possible to suppress the force of rotation of the game board 13 by the repulsive force immediately before the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600 while reducing the force required at the start of pushing.

The hanging back plate portion 621d is a portion that abuts on the game board 13 from the front side in the assembled state (see FIG. 89) and regulates the front and rear positions of the game board 13 . The front-side extension plate 621e functions as a guide when the game board 13 is inserted into the back side of the hanging back plate portion 621d.

A torsion spring NBa is wound around the second shaft member P62. The torsion spring NBa generates an urging force in a direction to bring the front regulating claw member 630 and the hanging back plate portion 621d closer to each other. A torsion spring NBb is wound around the third shaft member P63. The torsion spring NBb generates an urging force in a direction to move the lower end of the post-rotation claw member 640 away from the rear side wall of the body plate portion 611 .

The pre-regulation claw member 630 is arranged to face the main body plate portion 631, which is formed in the shape of a letter in a side view by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at the corner portion, and a part of the main body plate portion 631, which is arranged to be opposed to the left and right. A pair of supported holes 632 penetrating the plate portion 631a on a straight line and supported by the second shaft member P62, and a front connecting plate 631b connecting the plate portion 631a to the lower end of the front connecting plate 631b are inclined to the front side. It is mainly provided with an inclined extension plate 633 extending in the same direction and a curved surface 634 curved as the upper end surface of the plate portion 631a.

The oblique extension plate 633 is a plate portion arranged to face the front frame 14, and is the portion closest to the front frame 14 in the front-rear direction when the board support device 600 is in the released state.

The curved surface 634 is a surface that abuts against the regulating rod 615 in the assembled state (see FIG. 126), thereby regulating the free posture change of the front regulating claw member 630 .

The post-rotation claw member 640 includes a main body plate portion 641 formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in a side view by bending a sheet metal member at right angles at corners, and a part of the main body plate portion 641, which is arranged opposite to the left and right. A pair of supported holes 642 penetrating through the plate portion 641a on a straight line and supported by the third shaft member P63, and a front connecting plate 641b connecting the pair of plate portions 641a to the rear side from the lower end portion thereof. and an inclined extension plate 643 that is inclined and extended.

The front connecting plate 641b is a portion that abuts on the back side of the game board 13 and regulates the front and rear positions of the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89).

The inclined extension plate 643 is a portion that receives a load from the game board 13 when the game board 13 is pushed in, and is inclined at an angle of contact with the back surface of the game board 13 in the released state (see FIG. 129(a)). It is formed.

134(a), 134(b), 135(a) and 135(b) are side views of the board support device 600. FIG. 134(a), 134(b), 135(a), and 135(b) show the process of changing the board support device 600 from the released state to the fixed state in chronological order. 134(a), 134(b), 135(a) and 135(b), the multi-function cover member 171 arranged close to the board support device 600 and fixed to the board support device 600 The arrangement of the game board 13 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

That is, FIG. 134(a) shows the released state of the board support device 600, and FIG. 135(b) shows the fixed state of the board support device 600. As shown in FIG. In addition, in the fixed state shown in FIG. 135(b), the third shaft member P63 is arranged right behind the first shaft member P61 (on the rear side in the horizontal direction). As a result, the post-rotation pawl member 640 rotates too much around the first shaft member P61 (the third It is possible to prevent the shaft member P63 from moving above the first shaft member P61. Therefore, the post-rotation claw member 640 can be accurately moved to the position in the fixed state.

Here, as described above, the pre-regulation claw member 630 is applied with a biasing force in the direction of approaching the hanging rear plate portion 621d by the torsion spring NBa. Therefore, when no other external force acts, the pre-regulation claw member 630 is arranged close to the hanging rear plate portion 621d. On the other hand, the contact between the curved surface 634 of the pre-regulation claw member 630 and the regulation rod 615 restricts the posture change of the pre-regulation claw member 630 .

That is, as shown in FIGS. 134(a), 134(b), 135(a) and 135(b), as the board support device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state, the rotation front claw member 620 While the front side on which the extended portion 621a2 is arranged tilts, the front regulating claw member 630 rises in a manner to separate from the hanging back plate portion 621d.

More specifically, the regulating rod 615 is in the front side portion of the curved surface 634 and is in contact with the resistance portion 634a that intersects the circle centered on the second shaft member P62 (FIGS. 134A to 134A). 135(a)), the front side end of the regulation front claw member 630 rises as the rotation front claw member 620 tilts. In other words, the pre-regulation pawl member 630 moves in the direction opposite to the moving direction of the pre-rotation pawl member 620 .

On the other hand, a non-resisting portion 634b, which is a portion continuously provided on the back side of the resisting portion 634a and has an arc shape along a circle centered on the second shaft member P62, is arranged to face the regulating rod 615, When the regulating rod 615 and the curved surface 634 are no longer in contact with each other in the circular direction about the second shaft member P62, the rising motion of the front regulating pawl member 630 is released, and the front regulating pawl member 630 faces the inclined extension plate 633. The tip portion is arranged close to the hanging back plate portion 621d (see FIGS. 135(a) to 135(b)).

In the angular range (the range between FIGS. 134(a) and 135(a)) in which the pre-regulation pawl member 630 is raised, the front side end portion of the pre-regulation pawl member 630 is positioned relative to the pre-regulation pawl member 630. Even if a downward load, which is a load in the direction of tilting the robot, is applied, the change in the posture of the regulating front pawl member 630 when it operates due to the downward load causes a change in posture in the direction facing the downward load (in the rising direction). As a result, the reaction force against the downward load becomes excessive, and the change in the posture of the regulated front claw member 630 against the downward load is regulated.

In addition, since the game board 13 abuts against the rear surface of the rear side extension plate 621c, the rotation of the front claw member 620 is restricted by the game board 13 unless the game board 13 is pushed inward.

As a result, the rotation of the pre-rotation pawl member 620 due to the downward load applied to the pre-regulation pawl member 630 can be suppressed. Therefore, for example, when a load is applied to the front regulating claw member 630 from the front frame 14, the tilting motion of the front claw member 620 can be suppressed. In this embodiment, when the board surface support device 600 is released, the multifunctional cover member 171 arranged on the front frame 14 is positioned so as to abut on the inclined extension plate 633 of the front claw member 630 . , the shape of the front connection plate 631b, and the length and inclination angle of the inclined extension plate 633 are set.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 134(b), the game board 13 abuts on the back surface of the back side extension plate 621c, so that when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side, the back side extension plate Rubbing friction occurs between 621c and the game board 13 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the game board 13 from moving (tilting) toward the front in the state of FIG. 134(b). Therefore, when a lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end of the game board 13 moves (tilts) toward the front side due to the reaction. can be suppressed.

Here, when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed in the release state of the board surface support device 600, in the case of a structure in which the front rotation claw member 620 rotates due to the load from the front frame 14, it is arranged on the front frame 14. Depending on the manner of contact between the provided multifunctional cover member 171 and the front regulating claw member 630, the board surface support device 600 may reach the fixed state, and the board surface support device 600 may not reach the fixed state and may be stabilized at an incomplete angle. may occur.

Assuming that the board support device 600 is stabilized at a halfway angle and that the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) can be closed in that state, the space between the rear surface of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) and the front surface of the game board 13 The distance between the two becomes shorter, which may interfere with the game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration that suppresses the rotation of the front claw member 620 due to the load from the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89), the multi-function When the cover member 171 and the front regulating claw member 630 abut against each other, the front frame 14 is prevented from being closed. As a result, it is possible to make the store clerk who is performing the work of closing the front frame 14 aware that the board support device 600 is not in the fixed state.

Upon noticing this, the clerk pushes the game board 13 until the board surface support device 600 is in a fixed state. You can stabilize the distance from the front.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 135(a), the multifunctional cover member 171 provided on the front frame 14 and the restricting front claw member 171 are in a state immediately before the rotation front claw member 620 is fixed. Depending on the manner of contact of the member 630, it is unlikely that the board surface support device 600 will reach the fixed state, or that the board surface support device 600 will not reach the fixed state and will be stabilized at an incomplete angle. The board support device 600 reaches a fixed state).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the multifunctional cover member 171 projects to a position where it can contact the front regulation claw member 630 when the front frame 14 is in the closed position, and in the state shown in FIG. 135(a), The pre-regulation claw member 630 is configured so that the posture is not regulated by the regulation bar 615 .

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 135(a), the contact between the rear surface of the rear side extension plate 621c and the game board 13 is released, and the rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is not restricted by the game board 13. None.

That is, when a downward load is applied to the pre-regulation pawl member 630 in a state immediately before the pre-rotation pawl member 620 is fixed, the tilting operation of the front side end portion of the pre-rotation pawl member 620 is allowed. there is

As a result, when the game board 13 is placed at the position just before the board surface support device 600 is fixed (for example, when the clerk's force to push the game board 13 is slightly insufficient), 90% of the game board is stable. In this case, when a load is applied to the board surface support device 600 from the multifunctional cover member 171 arranged on the front frame 14 Then, the board support device 600 can be changed to a fixed state by the load.

Therefore, the workability of fixing the game board 13 to the board support device 600 can be improved. In this embodiment, the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state so that the back surface of the game board 13 and the inclined extension plate 643 of the board support device 600 are in contact (Fig. 134(a) )), the game board 13 can be fixed by pushing the game board 13 to the rear side. That is, the post-rotation pawl member 640 is displaced by the game board 13, the pre-rotation pawl member 620 is rotated accordingly, and the board support device 600 is changed to the fixed state. According to this method, since a downward load is not applied to the front side end portion of the pre-regulating pawl member 630, the state of the board support device 600 can be changed from the released state to the fixed state with little resistance.

In the state shown in FIG. 135(a), the front surface of the game board 13 and the surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d of the board support device 600 facing the game board 13 come into contact with each other in the front-rear direction. When the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side in this state, it moves (tilts) while pushing the hanging back plate portion 621d away. The biasing force of the torsion spring NBb given to is given as resistance against movement (tilting) of the game board 13 toward the front side. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) toward the front side in the state shown in FIG. 135(a). Therefore, when a lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end of the game board 13 moves (tilts) toward the front side due to the reaction. can be suppressed.

Between the state shown in FIG. 135(a) and the state shown in FIG. 135(b), the front regulating pawl member 630 is tilted by the urging force of the torsion spring NBa, and the non-resisting portion 634b is disposed facing the regulating rod 615. (See FIG. 135(b)). In this state, when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side and the game board 13 pushes the hanging back plate portion 621d to rotate the pre-rotation claw member 620, the first shaft member P61 is the center. In the direction along the circular arc, the non-resisting portion 634b abuts against the regulation bar 615, and the resistance against movement (tilting) of the game board 13 to the front side increases accordingly.

As a result, between the state shown in FIG. 135(a) and the state shown in FIG. 135(b), the possibility of the game board 13 moving (tilting) toward the front side can be reduced. Therefore, when a lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end of the game board 13 moves (tilts) toward the front side due to the reaction. can be suppressed.

The non-resisting portion 634b of the curved surface 634 extends from the portion that abuts the regulating rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 135(a) to the portion that abuts the regulating rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 135(b). A curved surface is formed with a gradually increasing radius around the biaxial member P62.

135(a), the inclined extension plate 633 is pushed rearward by the multifunctional cover member 171, and when the pre-rotation claw member 620 is rotated, the second shaft member P62 is displaced. The non-resisting portion 634b and the regulating rod 615 are momentarily separated from each other. Therefore, the resistance applied to the front regulating pawl member 630 from the regulating rod 615 is momentarily reduced, and the front regulating pawl member 630 vigorously approaches the hanging rear plate portion 621d due to the biasing force of the torsion spring NBa. The state changes to the state shown in (b).

Therefore, as in this embodiment, in the fixed state of the board support device 600 shown in FIG. 135(a), the front frame 14 is set to the closed position in the state immediately before the board support device 600 is fixed, so that the multifunctional cover member 171 can be replaced by the front regulating claw member 630 or the inclined extension plate 633. , and then the board support device 600 can be brought into a fixed state.

In this embodiment, when the game board 13 is not fixed to the board support device 600, the front frame 14 can be arranged at the closed position regardless of the state of the board support device 600. That is, in a state in which the back side surface of the back side extension plate 621c does not contact the game board 13 and the rotation of the front claw member 620 is not restricted by the game board 13, the board surface support device 600 and the multifunctional cover member 171 134(a) to the state shown in FIG. 135(a). Therefore, even when the game board 13 is not arranged (for example, when it is desired to temporarily close the front frame 14 when replacing the board surface), it is possible to avoid restricting the closing of the front frame 14. , can improve the work efficiency of workers.

When the board support device 600 is changed from the fixed state to the released state, the inclined extension plate 633 is pulled upward in the front direction to rotate the pre-regulation pawl member 630 against the biasing force of the torsion spring NBa. At this time, since the load received from the regulating rod 615 is small (the curved surface 634 and the regulating rod 615 are not in contact with each other in the direction of rotation), the front regulating pawl member 630 can be rotated with a light force, and the rotation continues. By doing so, the board support device 600 can be placed in the released state.

When the board support device 600 is released while the game board 13 is fixed, the game board 13 is pushed forward by the displaced post-rotation claw member 640 (see FIG. 134(a)). Therefore, the workability of removing the game board 13 can be improved compared to the case where the front and rear positions of the game board 13 do not change when the board support device 600 is in the released state.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 129(a) and 134(a), the upper end surface of the game board 13 abuts the lower surface of the rear side extension plate 621c of the board surface support device 600 in the released state. This eliminates the risk of the game board 13 falling forward when both the upper and lower board support devices 600 are in the released state.

It should be noted that the upper and lower board support devices 600 can be switched between the released state and the fixed state one by one. Here, in the configuration in which the game board 13 moves back and forth as the state of the board support device 600 changes, as in the present embodiment, if the board support device 600 is operated one by one, the front and rear positions of the game board 13 will not match up and down. , the load applied to the game board 13 may become excessive.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the operation of the pre-regulation claw member 630 and the operation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 640 are operated when the board support device 600 is brought into the released state. does not match In other words, as shown in FIGS. 135(a) and 135(b), the pre-rotation pawl member 620 and the post-rotation pawl member supporting the game board 13 are compared with the amount of displacement of the pre-regulation pawl member 630. The amount by which 640 is displaced is smaller.

Therefore, when the pre-regulation claw member 630 is displaced to such an extent that the pre-regulation claw member 630 does not return to the fixed state (to the extent that the return is regulated by the regulation rod 615), the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 640 are displaced. Since the amount of displacement can be suppressed, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the front-rear position of the game board 13 at the portion supported by the upper and lower board support devices 600 . Therefore, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

Further, the same effect is produced because the post-rotation pawl member 640 is rotatably supported by the pre-rotation pawl member 620 . That is, during the transition from the fixed state (see FIG. 135(b)) to the released state (see FIG. 134(a)), the post-rotation pawl member 640 is pushed against the biasing force of the torsion spring NBb and the pre-rotation pawl member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 640 can be displaced in the direction of widening the angle between them.

Therefore, compared with the displacement amount of the pre-rotation pawl member 620, since the displacement amount of the game board 13 pushed out by the post-rotation pawl member 640 can be suppressed, 13 can be prevented from shifting in the front-rear position. Thereby, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139, the relationship between the board support device 600 arranged on the lower side and the front frame 14 will be described. 136 to 139 are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine 8010 along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 136 to 139, the front frame 14 is illustrated in a simple shape and the closed state of the front frame 14 is illustrated.

136 shows the released state of the board support device 600, FIG. 137 shows the fixed state of the board support device 600, and FIG. 139 shows the rotated state, the state immediately before the board support device 600 is fixed, and the thickness of the game board 13 supported by the board support device 600 is shown in phantom lines. be done.

136 to 139, the relationship between the board support device 600 and the opening/closing restricting portion 159 fixed to the front frame 14 will be described. 138 and 139, the open/close restricting portion 159 cross-sectionally viewed in FIGS. 136 and 137 is illustrated by imaginary lines for easy understanding.

As shown in FIG. 136, when the board support device 600 is in the released state, if the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 136), the interference between the open/close regulating portion 159 and the board support device 600 is avoided. However, the game board 13 and the operating portion back member 155 above the opening/closing restricting portion 159 interfere with each other. Therefore, in the released state of the board support device 600, the front frame 14 is permitted to be closed when the game board 13 is removed, but the front frame 14 cannot be closed when the game board 13 is placed. is regulated.

As shown in FIG. 137, when the board support device 600 is in a fixed state, if the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 137), the interference between the opening/closing regulation part 159 and the board support device 600 is avoided. . In addition, by arranging the game board 13 on the back side compared to the arrangement when the board support device 600 is in the released state, the game board 13 interferes with the operation part back member 155 above the opening/closing regulation part 159. is avoided. Therefore, in the fixed state of the board support device 600, the front frame 14 is permitted to be closed regardless of whether the game board 13 is present or not.

As shown in FIG. 138, when the pre-rotation claw member 620 of the board support device 600 is rotated from the released state to the fixed state side by a predetermined angle, if the front frame 14 is placed at the closed position (see FIG. 138), The opening/closing restricting portion 159 and the inclined extension plate 633 of the board support device 600 interfere with each other.

In this state, even if an attempt is made to rotate the pre-rotation claw member 620 by applying a load toward the rear side to the inclined extension plate 633, the action of the regulating rod 615 prevents the pre-rotation claw member 620 from rotating in the direction of rotation. (Clockwise direction in FIG. 138) and the direction of rotation of the front regulating pawl member 630 (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 138) are opposite to each other, so that the reaction force becomes excessive. It is as described above (see FIG. 134(b)).

Therefore, in the state of the board support device 600 shown in FIG. 138, regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13, closing the front frame 14 is restricted. In particular, when the game board 13 is arranged, there is a possibility that the lower end of the front side of the game board 13 and the rear side extension plate 621c may come into contact with each other in the vertical direction (see FIG. 138). The effect of restricting the closing of the frame 14 is strengthened.

As shown in FIG. 139, when the pre-rotation claw member 620 of the board support device 600 is in a state immediately before being fixed, when the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 139), the open/close restricting portion 159 and the , and the inclined extension plate 633 of the board surface support device 600 interfere with each other.

Further, in this state, when an attempt is made to rotate the pre-rotation claw member 620 by applying a load toward the rear side to the inclined extension plate 633, the action of the regulating rod 615 causes the pre-rotation claw member 620 to rotate. The direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 138) and the rotational direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 138) of the front regulating pawl member 630 are never opposite to each other, and the normal load can be easily pushed in as described above. (See FIG. 135(a)).

Therefore, in the state of the board support device 600 shown in FIG. 139, by pushing the front frame 14, the front regulation pawl member 630 can be pushed in via the opening/closing regulation part 159, and the board support device 600 can be fixed. Therefore, closing the front frame 14 is permitted.

140 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame 11 and inner frame 12, and FIG. 141 is an exploded rear perspective view of the outer frame 11 and inner frame 12. FIG. 140 and 141 illustrate a state in which the cover member that closes the rear surface of the ball shooting unit 112a and the back pack 92 is disassembled from the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG.

The detailed structure of the ball launching unit 112a will now be described with reference to FIGS. 142-148. FIG. 142(a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting unit 112a, and FIG. 142(b) is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting unit 112a. Figures 143(a) and 143(b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball firing unit 112a. In addition, FIG. 143(a) shows a disassembled state after the cover member 721 is opened, and FIG. 143(b) shows a state in which the ball receiving member 731 is disassembled and then turned back and forth. . That is, in FIG. 143(b), the rear side of only the ball receiving member 731 is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, the ball shooting unit 112a includes a base member 710 made of metal or die-cast, and a base member 711 made of resin attached to the base member 710. 142(a) partially covering the front surface of the base member 710 and an open state (see FIG. 23(a)) opening the front surface of the base member 710. and a ball feeding device 720 having a cover member 721 that

The base member 710 is a member that supports the cover member 721. The base member 711 is engaged with the base member 710 by a hook or the like that is elastically deformable, is disposed on the front side of the base member 710, and is formed of synthetic resin or the like. , a firing solenoid 701 disposed on the front side, a firing rail 730 that guides the ball P8 shot by the firing solenoid 701 toward the game area, and a ball receiving member 731 to regulate the posture. a fastening portion 716 which is cylindrically projected toward the front side at an intermediate position of the bulging portion 716a which bulges in a straight line toward the front side from the base member 710 and into which a screw for fastening and fixing the ball receiving member 731 is screwed; mounting holes 718 and a plurality of positioning protrusions 719 .

The base member 711 has a pair of receiving portions 712 at the right corner through which the rod-shaped portion 722 is inserted, and a locking portion 713 drilled on the opposite side of the receiving portions 712 in the left-right direction so that the hook portion 723 can be locked. , and a projecting portion 714 projecting toward the front side close to the right side of the locking portion 713, and arranged to face the attracting force generating solenoid 741 when the cover member 721 is closed (see FIG. 142(a)). It mainly includes a defect determination convex portion 715 that is convexly provided.

The protruding portion 714 is a portion that covers the upper surface side of the cutting metal member 725 when the cover member 721 is closed (see FIG. 142(a)), and extends to the left inner side of the ball passage opening 724 when the cover member 721 is closed. A facing plane 714a formed as a plane facing the side surface 724c and parallel to the left inner side surface 724c, and a surface on the left-right opposite side of the facing plane 714a and inclined rightward toward the rear side. and a surface 714b.

When the attraction force generating solenoid 741 is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, the malfunction determination convex portion 715 does not contact the attraction force generating solenoid 741, but the fastening force generating solenoid 741 is loosened ( It abuts against the cover member 721 when it is floating above the cover member 721 , and is formed with a protrusion height that restricts the rotation of the cover member 721 .

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cover member 721 from being closed when the fastening of the attractive force generating solenoid 741 is loosened. It is possible to make the user aware that the fastening of the generation solenoid 741 is loose. Therefore, it is possible to perform repair (fasten and fix the attracting force generating solenoid 741 to the cover member 721 without loosening) before a problem occurs in the ball shooting unit 112a.

The ball feeding device 720 includes a cover member 721 rotatably and axially supported by a base member 711, a regulating state for regulating the flow of the ball P8 entering the cover member 721, and a control state for the ball P8 (see FIG. 144). and a switching device 740 that is controlled to change state between a permissive state that permits flow down to the launch rail 730 .

The cover member 721 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and formed into a cup shape with the back side (the front side of the paper surface in the posture of FIG. a rod-shaped portion 722, a hook portion 723 formed in a hook shape on the left-right opposite side of the rod-shaped portion 722, and a ball P8 (see FIG. 144) passes through the position displaced from the hook portion 723 toward the rod-shaped portion 722 side. a ball passage opening 724 having a possible size and extending in the front-rear direction; and a shaft rod portion 726 that pivotally supports the ball guide arm member 742 of the switching device 740 .

The switching device 740 includes an attraction force generating solenoid 741 fastened and fixed to the cover member 721 and a synthetic resin member having one end loosely fitted to the shaft portion 726. The attraction force generating solenoid 741 generates magnetic force. A ball guide arm member 742 that rotates and changes its posture depending on whether or not the ball guide arm member 742 rotates; A guide sloping portion 744 which is a part of the guide arm member 742 and which is arranged below the ball passage opening 724 and slopes downward as it moves away from the ball passage opening 724, and the ball P8 can be accommodated upward from the base of the guide sloping portion 744. and a regulating projecting portion 745 which is extended by an interval and whose extended end projects toward the ball passage opening 724 along a plane orthogonal to the axial rod portion 726 .

The ball passage opening 724 is an opening that forms a passage through which the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) can be guided. A rib portion 724b, which is arranged above the flow-down plate portion 724a so as to face it and extends downward from the upper surface of the ball passage opening 724 in the form of a rib, the extended front end surface of which is inclined downward toward the rear side, and the flow-down plate portion 724a. It mainly includes a left inner side surface 724c that is connected to the left end portion and whose surface is formed along the vertical direction. With these configurations, the ball P8 that has flowed into the ball passage opening 724 flows down toward the rear and rightward.

In the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142(a)), when the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) enters the ball passage opening 724, the ball P8 comes into contact with the inclined surface 714b. It flows down to the back side while being displaced to the right along. Therefore, since the sphere P8 flows down from the metal member for cutting 725 in a manner separating from the metal member for cutting 725 in the left-right direction, the metal member for cutting 725 is disposed in a manner to protrude inside the sphere passing opening 724, but the sphere P8 and the metal for cutting are separated from each other. Collision with the member 725 can be prevented.

The firing rail 730 is a rail member that extends upward from the middle position of the base member 710 toward the left side. In the vicinity of the lower end of the rail member, a ball receiving member 731 is arranged with an interval shorter than the diameter of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144).

The ball receiving member 731 is a long plate member that is regulated in a posture in which the extending direction of the launch rail 730 and the elongated direction are parallel, and that is fastened and fixed to the base member 710. A through hole 731a formed as an elongated hole along the direction and for passing a fastening screw, and a straight line (a straight line passing through the through hole 731a and facing the direction of the elongated hole of the through hole 731a) like the bulging portion 716a. and a restricting groove 731b formed with a width slightly larger than the width of the bulging portion 716a and a groove depth slightly larger than the bulging height of the bulging portion 716a.

When the ball receiving member 731 is fastened to the base member 710, the position of the through hole 731a to be fastened and fixed to the fastening portion 716 is selected. The ball P8 (see FIG. 144) can be slid along the drawn straight line, thereby adjusting the standby position (separation distance from the plunger 702) of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144). Therefore, by adjusting the position of the ball receiving member 731, the firing strength of the ball P81 (the firing strength when the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 86) is rotated by the same amount) can be easily adjusted. Since the regulating groove 731b of the ball receiving member 731 is guided by the bulging portion 716a, the posture of the ball receiving member 731 can be maintained unchanged.

The firing rail 730 is formed by bending a metal plate to have a substantially M-shaped cross section, and has a rolling plate portion 730a formed to have a substantially V-shaped cross section and extending obliquely upward to the left, and a rolling plate portion 730a. It has mounting plate portions 730b and 730c hanging down from the front and rear sides of the plate portion 730a. Attached to member 710 .

A rail guard 733 made of a synthetic resin material is provided in the longitudinal direction between the mounting plate portions 730b and 730c to prevent noise and vibration caused by contact between the metal rail and the metal game ball. suppressed.

The rolling plate portion 730a has a rolling surface with a substantially V-shaped cross-section, and contacts the two front and rear portions of the peripheral surface of the ball P8 (see FIG. 146(b)) to push the ball P8 upward. configured to guide.

FIGS. 144(a) to 144(c) are front views of the ball launching unit 112a showing in chronological order how the ball is delivered by the ball delivery device 720. FIG. 144(a) to 144(c), illustration of the cover member 721 is omitted for easy understanding.

144(a), the switching device 740 of the ball feeding device 720 is in the regulated state (the power supply to the attracting force generating solenoid 741 is stopped and the ball guide arm member 742 is lowered by gravity). , the regulating projecting portion 745 is arranged at a position corresponding to the back side open end of the ball passage opening 724, contacts the game ball P8 that has entered the ball passage opening 724, and flows down from the back side open end. is regulated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(b), when the switching device 740 is changed to the allowable state (state in which power is supplied to the attracting force generating solenoid 741 and the ball guide arm member 742 is raised), the regulating protruding portion 745 retreats above the sphere, and the restriction on the flow of the sphere P8 is released, so that the sphere P8 flows above the guide inclined portion 744. As shown in FIG. In this state, the sphere P8 abuts against the front side wall of the base member 711 to prevent it from further flowing down, and stays on the upper surface of the guide slope 744 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(c), the ball guide arm member 742 returns to the regulated state, so that the ball P8 riding on the guide slope portion 744 descends to a position where it does not come into contact with the front side wall of the base member 711. be done. As a result, the ball P8 is guided to the back side according to the inclination of the guide inclined portion 744 and is guided to the launch rail 730. As shown in FIG.

Since the state of the ball guide arm member 742 in FIG. 144(c) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 144(a), even in the state shown in FIG. flow is regulated. Thus, balls can be fed to launch rail 730 one ball at a time. The ball P8 entering the ball passage opening 724 is the ball supplied from the opening formed at the downstream end of the upper tray 17 (see FIG. 86) and the ball stored in the upper tray 17. be.

145 is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725. FIG. The cutting metal member 725 is a metal plate member fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, and includes a through hole 725a through which a screw to be screwed into the cover member 721 can be inserted, and a flow-down plate portion 724a. A cut with an acute angle is formed between the lower blade portion 725b having an upper side substantially along the upper surface of the lower blade portion 725b, and the same plate as the plate on the proximal side of the lower blade portion 725b. and an upper blade portion 725c extending from.

The upper blade portion 725c is formed so that the tip thereof is inclined toward the back side more than the lower blade portion 725b, and the lower side projects upward from the flow-down plate portion 724a. The lower side of the upper blade portion 725c slopes downward toward the proximal side (left side), and the upper side of the lower blade portion 725b slopes upward toward the proximal side (left side). That is, the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b form a tapered shape when viewed from the front.

The notch between the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b is for cutting a string member such as a kite string fixed to the ball. Next, with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147, how the yarn Y8 is treated when the yarn Y8 is fixed to the ball P8 and entered will be described.

FIG. 146(a) is a front view of the sphere-launching unit 112a, FIG. 146(b) is a partial top view of the sphere-launching unit 112a as viewed in the direction of arrow CXLVIb in FIG. 146(a), and FIG. ) is a front view of the ball shooting unit 112a, and FIG. 147(b) is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725, showing the relationship between the thread Y8 and the cutting metal member 725 in the state of FIG. 147(a). 148 is a partial front view of ball launching unit 112a, inner rail 61 and outer rail 62 after launching ball P8. In addition, in FIGS. 146 and 147, illustration of some constituent members of the ball shooting unit 112a is omitted for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 146(a) and 146(b), the ball P8 guided to the launch rail 730 stays in contact with the left lower edge of the ball receiving member 731 (see FIG. 146(a)). ), a current is applied to the firing solenoid 701 from this state, and the plunger 702 protrudes vigorously, thereby applying a firing force to the ball P8 and launching the ball P8 along the firing rail 730 (Fig. 147(a)). )reference).

Here, the ball P8 is launched with one end of the string Y8 fixed to the ball P8, and the other end of the string Y8 left at hand is moved to pull the string Y8 while the ball P8 is in the game area. , loosening, etc., is known to cause the ball P8 to be repeatedly detected by the winning opening.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8 can be cut using the momentum of the ball P8. More specifically, when the ball P8 is placed at the firing standby position (see FIG. 146(a)), the thread Y8 rides on the upper surface of the flow-down plate portion 724a in such a manner that it is drawn to the right as it goes toward the rear side. (See FIG. 146(b)).

When the ball P8 is launched in this state, the yarn Y8 is moved by being pulled by the ball P8 rolling on the launch rail 730 passing under the flow-down plate portion 724a. Since it moves along the upper surface, the yarn Y8 enters the lower side of the upper blade portion 725c that overhangs the flow-down plate portion 724a, and enters the cut formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c. .

While the player is gripping the front end (the other end) of the string Y8, a load is applied to one end of the string Y8 fixed to the ball P8 as the ball P8 is launched, causing the string Y8 to is subjected to a large tensile force. As a result, the thread Y8 is pressed against the cut formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c, and is finally cut (see FIG. 148). As a result, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act of repeatedly detecting the ball P8 in the prize winning opening.

If the launch strength of the ball P8 is weak, there is a possibility that the string Y8 will not be cut due to insufficient tensile force applied to the string Y8. The ball flows backward between the rail 61 and the outer rail 62, passes through the foul ball receiving portion 146, flows down the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 98), and is discharged to the lower tray 50 (see FIG. 86). Therefore, in this state, no matter how much load is applied to the thread Y8, the ball P8 does not pass through the prize-winning opening, so that the fraudulent act of repeatedly detecting the ball P8 in the prize-winning opening can be eliminated.

Next, the rendering operation unit 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 to 179. FIG. 149 is a front view of the game board 13, FIGS. 150 and 151 are exploded front perspective views of the effect operation unit 1000, and FIG. 152 is an exploded rear perspective view of the effect operation unit 1000. FIG. The game board 13 shown in FIG. 149 is different from the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2 in that the petal motion device 800 is visible from the upper frame portion of the center frame 86. are substantially the same.

A performance operation unit 1000 shown in FIGS. The effect operation unit 1000 includes a petal operation device 800, a side base material 1000S, a substrate cover 1000C, a back plate 1100, and a forward/backward motion unit 900 arranged on the back plate 1100, and the like.

The advance/retreat operation unit 900 vertically moves the petal operation device 800 by the driving force of the drive motor 921 (advance/retreat operation, i.e., movement toward the inside of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 and movement toward the inside of the display area of the third pattern display device 81, movement including at least one of the movement of retracting toward the outside of the display area of the pattern display device 81), and the petal movement device 800 is connected to one end, and the other. is pivotally supported by the back plate 1100 and the driving force of the driving motor 921 is transmitted through the arm gear 924 to rotate the driving side arm member 910, and the driving side arm member 910 is driven. A driving motor 921 that generates a driving force, a transmission means 920 that is composed of a plurality of gears that transmit the driving force of the driving motor 921 to the driving side arm member 910 , and the driving side arm member 910 rotates in conjunction with the driving side arm member 910 . A thin plate-shaped slide plate 930 that slides in the left-right direction with a second slide plate 930, a second thin plate-shaped effect member 940 that rotates in conjunction with the sliding motion of the slide plate 930, and the drive side arm member 910 on the left and right opposite side, It mainly includes a long plate-like driven side arm member 950 that connects the back plate 1100 and the petal motion device 800 .

Next, the structure of the petal motion device 800 will be described. 153 is a front view of petal motion device 800, and FIG. 154 is a cross-sectional view of petal motion device 800 taken along line CLIV--CLIV of FIG. In addition, in FIG. 154, the supporting base material 801 is schematically illustrated by imaginary lines.

The petal motion device 800 is configured such that members such as petals 802 are supported by a supporting base material 801 . As shown in FIG. 152, the support base material 801 is arranged on the back side of the petals 802 and the like, and although the overall shape is hidden by other members and is not shown in the drawing, it is made of a resin material and is a substantially rectangular plate. It comprises a shaped portion and a substrate disposed on the back surface of the plate-shaped portion.

A central motor 804 is fixed from the rear side at a position near the upper right portion of the central body portion of the supporting base material 801 , and the drive shaft of the central motor 804 extends forward through a narrow gap formed in the supporting base material 801 . A first gear 804G (see FIG. 156), which will be described later, is fixed to the tip of the projection.

An opening 801P is formed in the central main body of the supporting base 801 at a position slightly below and to the left of the central motor 804, and is arranged to the right of the opening 801P. A screw insertion portion 801S having an insertion hole and a screw insertion hole at the tip is integrally formed. Around the screw insertion portion 801S, a doughnut-shaped recessed portion 801D (see FIG. 152) is recessed from the front side to the rear side in a donut shape through which an arc plate 880d for detection of a loose fitting device 880, which will be described later, can pass. It is formed.

An oil damper 805 is fixed from the front side below the central motor 804 to the support base 801 (see FIG. 152) to which the central motor 804 is fixed (see FIG. 156).

A decorative member 807 is arranged and fixed on the front side of the supporting base material 801 so as to cover the peripheral area from the front while opening the vertically long, roughly oval area in the central portion. The decorative member 807 is divided into a horizontally long upper portion forming an upper end region and a substantially U-shaped lower portion forming a region below the upper end portion.

In this embodiment, the support base 801 has a shape that extends slightly vertically as a whole. The operation space can be reduced if the 801 is formed in a shape that is long in the vertical direction rather than in the shape that is long in the horizontal direction.

At this time, the central motor 804 and the oil damper 805 are linked to the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G concentrically arranged so as to overlap the position of the opening 801P as described later. It can be arranged at any position as long as it is on the outer periphery of the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G and does not interfere with each other. It is placed on the right (see FIG. 156).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 154, by collecting the weight on the right half of the petal motion device 800 that is supported in a slightly tilted posture toward the front side, it is possible to prevent the left half on the opposite side from sagging downward. can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gap between the support base 801 and the drive-side arm member 910 (see FIG. 152) connected to the left half of the support base 801. driving force can be appropriately transmitted to the support base 801 by

155 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal motion device 800, and FIG. 156 is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal motion device 800. FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 155 and 156, illustration of the supporting base material 801 is omitted in order to facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the petals 802 are made of resin molded to imitate the shape of one of the five petals separated from each other, which constitutes a hibiscus flower in an open state as a whole. , and has a plate-like flat plate member 803 on the back side.

157(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the petal 802, the flat plate member 803 and the slide member 820, and FIG. 157(b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal 802, the flat plate member 803 and the slide member 820. FIG.

Each of the petals 802 has a substantially arcuate front shape that extends radially in the arranged state, and has a shape that gently bulges forward from the center to the outer periphery (see FIG. 154). ).

The surface of the petal 802 is formed with irregular unevenness including a large number of wrinkles, and the periphery also has an irregularly uneven shape when viewed from the front. Strictly speaking, the five petals 802 do not have the same shape, and although there are slight differences in unevenness and the like, they are formed in roughly the same shape. Most of the petals 802 have a specific color (red), but are almost transparent, and the outer peripheral edge is darkened in the specific color (red) without forming a particular boundary with the inner region. Coloring is done.

Each petal 802 is integrally formed with a threaded portion 802S extending cylindrically rearward and having a screw hole inside, at two locations near the outer circumference of the rear side surface of each petal 802 and at the center portion in the radial direction. there is

The petals 802 are arranged from the rear side portion 802a to the rounded tip side (counterclockwise side when viewed from the front, right side of the paper surface of FIG. 157(a)) from the position fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 803. The front side portion 802b arranged on the sharp tip shape side (the clockwise side when viewed from the front, the left side of the paper surface of FIG. 157(a)) is arranged on the front side. In other words, the front side 802b is positioned closer to the rear cover 886 of the loose fit device 880 than the rear side 802a.

The front side 802b of each petal 802 is superimposed on the front side of the rear side 802a of one adjacent petal 802, and the rear side 802a is superimposed on the rear side of the front side 802b of the other adjacent petal 802, thus five petals. petals 802 are arranged so that the tips on the inner peripheral side are directed toward the same center and gathered.

The petal 802 has a shape in which the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b are displaced in the front and rear direction, so that the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b are overlapped in the front and rear direction at the gathered position (see FIGS. 174 and 175). Since the positional relationship can be matched, the difference in shape (difference in size) in the entire petal 802 between the collected position and the fully opened position (see FIGS. 178 and 179) can be made remarkable.

The five petals 802 as a whole have a disk-shaped (doughnut-shaped) posterior side surface with a circular opening S1 in the center (see FIG. 155).

As shown in FIGS. 155, 156 and 157, the flat plate members 803 are long plate-shaped resin members separated from each other and fixed to the five petals 802 respectively.

Each of the flat plate members 803 has a front shape extending from the center to the outer peripheral side in a substantially rectangular shape in the arranged state, and further has a shape in which the outer peripheral edge extends forward.

In the vicinity of the opening S1 (in the vicinity of the inner periphery) of the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in the arranged state, a pair of screw-in portions 803S extending cylindrically to the rear and having screw holes therein are arranged in the circumferential direction (flat plate). It is integrally formed at a position separated in the lateral direction of the member 803 .

The screw-in portions 803S are formed on both side walls in the circumferential direction (transverse direction) of each flat plate member 803 so as to be substantially flush with each other. A slide rib 803a which is perpendicular to the straight line connecting 803S and extends rearward from the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in a rectangular shape extends to both sides along the surface direction circumscribing the peripheral surface of the screw-in portion 803S. , formed integrally with the peripheral wall of the screw-in portion 803S.

As shown in FIG. 157(b), on the rear side of each flat plate member 803, there are screw insertion holes at two locations corresponding to the screw-insertion portions 802S of the petals 802. A screw insertion portion 803H having an insertion hole for positioning the screw insertion portion 802S is integrally formed.

The screw-in portion 802S of the corresponding petal 802 is brought into contact with the screw insertion portion 803H of each flat plate member 803 from the front, and a screw is screwed in from the rear. fixed respectively.

158 is a front view of the slit member 810, and FIG. 159 is a front perspective view of the slit member 810. FIG. 155 and 156 will be referred to in the description of FIGS. 158 and 159 as appropriate. A slit member 810 is arranged behind the flat plate member 803 as shown in FIGS.

As shown in FIG. 158, the slit member 810 is a plate-shaped member made of resin having a front shape in which five similar shaped portions are continuous in an annular shape, and a circular opening 811 is bored in the center. As shown in FIG. 159, a substantially cylindrical front side peripheral wall portion 812 and a rear side peripheral wall portion 813 (see FIG. 156) extend from the periphery of the circular opening 811 in both front and rear directions.

Returning to FIG. 156, description will be made. On the rear side peripheral wall portion 813, two adjacent two out of five equally spaced places in the circumferential direction and one place in the middle of the three places excluding the two are cylindrically shaped in the front and rear direction. A screw-in portion 813S having a screw hole is formed integrally therewith, and a positioning boss 813a extends from the tip edge of the portion where the screw-in portion 813S is not formed among the above five locations. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is configured to protrude in the outer diameter direction at five locations corresponding to the screw-in portion 813S and the positioning boss 813a. One of the purposes of this bulging portion is to suppress sliding friction, the details of which will be described later.

The slit member 810 has a central slit 814 and side slits 815 as shown in FIG. Each of the central slits 814 is formed to linearly extend further outward from a position slightly outside the circular opening 811 . However, with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811, the center slit 814 is rotated by an angle θ11 (approximately 15° in this pachinko machine 8010) in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. It extends along the inclined direction D12.

Both side slits 815 are formed to extend in parallel on both sides of the central slit 814 with a slight gap.

In this manner, a set of three slits, that is, the central slit 814 and the two-side slits 815 on both sides thereof, is formed at five points in the circumferential direction at equal intervals (72° intervals). Note that each end of the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 may be formed in a round shape (semicircular shape) when viewed from the front, or may be formed in a rectangular shape.

In the present embodiment, one end of the outer edge of the two-side slit 815 located on the outermost side in the set of these three slits, that is, among the four corners of the three slits, the two corners on the smaller diameter side are the two-side slits. It has a substantially rectangular shape extending in the direction of extension of 815 (with a rectangular cut). This rectangular extension (cut) is for inserting the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 803. As shown in FIG.

The slit member 810 is connected to the side ends of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 are formed, and has an outer diameter smaller than the outer peripheral side ends of the central slit 814 and both side slits 815. is provided with an arc plate 816 formed in an arc shape whose center coincides with the center of the circular opening 811 .

As a result, the arc plate 816 enhances the rigidity of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 are formed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress deformation of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 are formed in the circumferential direction and the axial direction.

Further, as described above, as shown in FIG. 158, the set of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 extends along the direction D12 inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811. , five sets of central slits 814 and two side slits 815 are arranged more densely so that the slit member 810 has a compact outer shape.

In other words, compared to the case where the five sets of central slits 814 and both side slits 815 were arranged and formed so as to extend radially along the radial direction D11 without being inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811. , the five sets of central slits 814 and both side slits 815 can be laid out more densely when they are arranged and formed so as to extend along the inclined direction D12 as described above. The peripheral shape can be made smaller.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156 , slide members 820 are arranged in the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 from behind the slit member 810 . As shown in FIG. 157, the slide member 820 is a member made of resin having a long plate-like front shape. A molded extending portion, a central portion that is thicker than the effecting portion at a position between the extending portions, a screw insertion hole 821 drilled in the extending portion, and the center of the slide member 820. A guide pin 822 that protrudes from the front side and is inserted through the central slit 814 in the assembled state, a slide pin 823 that is fixed in such a manner as to protrude from the center of the slide member 820 to the back side and penetrate back and forth, Prepare.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the sliding member 820 is positioned so that the central slit 814 and the longitudinal direction of the slit member 820 intersect each other at right angles with the extending direction of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 . and the slits 815 on both sides.

On the other hand, the threaded portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 is fitted from the front side into the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 of the slit member 810 . In the fully inserted state, the threaded portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 protrudes rearward from the rear side surface of the slit member 810 very slightly. In this state, screws with washers (washer head screws) 824 are inserted through the screw insertion holes 821 on both sides of the slide member 820 from the rear side, and are screwed into the screw portions 803S of the plate member 803 and fixed.

As a result, the slide member 820 is fixed to the rear side of the flat plate member 803 with the slit member 810 interposed therebetween. At this time, the guide pin 822 of the slide member 820 is inserted into the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 with little clearance, and the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 803 is almost aligned along the corresponding outer edges of the slits 815 on both sides of the slit member 810. inserted without gaps.

As a result, the flat plate member 803 is slidably held in the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 of the slit member 810. At this time, the flat plate member 803 does not rotate around the guide pin 822, and is in a fixed outward orientation. is regulated by the slide rib 803a.

160 is a front perspective view of slide member 820 and central motor 804, and FIGS. 161(a) and 161(b) are rear perspective views of slide member 820 and central motor 804. FIG. Note that the illustration of the fourth gear 880G is omitted in FIG. 161(a). 155 and 156 will be referred to in the description of FIGS. 160 and 161 as appropriate.

A rotating plate 830 is further arranged from the rear side of the slit member 810 to which the flat plate member 803 is slidably attached as described above. As shown in FIGS. 160 and 161, the rotating plate 830 is a resin disk having a circular pivot opening 831 in the center.

As shown in FIG. 160, the rotating plate 830 has a peripheral wall extending forward from the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 on the front side, and has a guide rail 832 formed around the peripheral wall.

A peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 extends forward from the front side surface of the rotating plate 830, and the peripheral wall extends along the surface direction of the rotating plate 830 so as to form an elongated loop when viewed from the front. It is formed integrally with the rotating plate 830 .

The extension height of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is the same as the extension height of the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 . The width of the inner side of the guide rail 832 is such that the slide pin 823 can be inserted with a slight clearance of play. The edge corner portion at the extending end of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is formed so as to be rounded.

The guide rail 832 extends clockwise in a front view along a direction substantially midway between the tangent line and the normal line of the pivot opening 831 from a position in contact with the outer side of the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831. , and extends to a position near the outer periphery of the rotating plate 830 while curving in an arc further toward the clockwise direction in front view (see FIG. 175(a)).

The end of the guide rail 832 on the pivot opening 831 side, that is, the peripheral wall of the portion that contacts the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 at the central end, is formed so as to be integrally continuous with the peripheral wall on the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831. The front end portion thereof protrudes forward from the front end portion of the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 .

Around the peripheral wall of the pivot opening 831, four more guide rails 832 are formed in the same manner as described above. It extends so as to expand in a spiral shape from the surroundings to the outside.

As shown in FIG. 161, on the rear side of the rotating plate 830, a second gear 830G extending rearward from the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 in the form of a peripheral wall and having teeth on its outer periphery is integrally formed. The second gear 830G is arranged so as to mesh with the first gear 804G and is rotationally driven by the central motor 804. As shown in FIG.

The rotating plate 830 is attached so that the pivot opening 831 is fitted to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 as shown in FIG. 154 . At this time, the rear ends of the five slide pins 823 projecting rearward from the slide member 820 are inserted into the five guide rails 832 (see FIG. 174(c)).

Since the outer peripheral surface of the rear side peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is locally bulged at five locations as described above, the inner peripheral surface of the pivot opening 831 of the rotary plate 830 is linearly rather than surface-wise. As a result, the pivot opening 831 of the rotary plate 830 is fitted over the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 with little frictional resistance, and the rotary plate 830 is smoothly rotatably supported.

Further, as shown in FIG. 161(a), a third gear 810G having a slightly smaller diameter than the second gear 830G and a larger diameter than the pivot opening 831 is concentrically arranged and fixed on the rear side of the second gear 830G. , are arranged to mesh with the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 .

A circular pivot opening 810a is formed in the center of the third gear 810G. A screw insertion hole 810b is drilled at a position corresponding to the screw-in portion 813S, and a positioning hole 810c is drilled at a position corresponding to the two positioning bosses 813a.

The third gear 810G is arranged so as to be superimposed on the rear side of the second gear 830G fitted on the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810. The positioning boss 810G 813a (see FIG. 156) is positioned by inserting it into the positioning hole 810c, and fixed by screwing a screw (not shown) into the screw-in portion 813S (see FIG. 156) through the screw insertion hole 810b.

As a result, the slit member 810 is linked to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and is braked by the oil damper 805. is held by the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 so as not to come off.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156 , a central shaft rotating device 850 is arranged from the front side of the slit member 810 . The central shaft rotating device 850 mainly includes a central shaft member 851 that is fastened and fixed to the support base material 801 (see FIG. 154), and a loose fitting device 880 that is rotatably loosely fitted around the central shaft member 851. Prepare for.

162 is an exploded front perspective view of the central shaft rotating device 850 and loose fitting device 880, and FIG. 163 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central shaft rotating device 850 and loose fitting device 880. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the central shaft member 851 includes a shaft portion 852 formed in an incomplete cylindrical shape in which a part of the cylindrical peripheral wall is cut along the axial direction, and a shaft portion 852 of the shaft portion 852. A disk-shaped flange 855 is provided at the front end to increase the diameter, and the shaft portion 852 and the flange 855 are integrally formed.

A central portion of the flange 855 communicates with the inside of the shaft portion 852 and opens in a circular shape, thereby forming a bore portion 856 that penetrates the inside of the shaft portion 852 in the front-rear direction. Around the bore portion 856 on the front side surface of the flange 855, a front side threaded portion 857 having a screw hole inside and a threaded portion 857 on the side of the bore portion 856 from the front side threaded portion 857 are provided at two locations on the left and right sides of the bore portion 856. A holding portion 858 that has a counterbore at a deviated position and is drilled toward the rear side, and two columnar support projections 859 that slightly extend slightly forward are integrally formed. . The front end of the front threaded portion 857 and the base of the support projection 859 have the same extension height.

On the inner peripheral surface of the inner cavity portion 856, there are cylindrically extending along the axial direction of the shaft portion 852 so as to be parallel to two opposing locations, extend further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852, and extend inside. A rear screw-in portion 853 having a screw hole is integrally formed. Further, rear positioning bosses 854 are integrally formed at positions equidistant from both rear screw-in portions 853 on the rear end of the peripheral wall of the shaft portion 852 so as to protrude rearward.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163 , an LED board 861 is arranged on the front side of the central shaft member 851 . The LED board 861 is a substantially disc-shaped board having a slightly smaller diameter than the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851 .

A screw insertion hole 862 and a positioning hole 863 are formed in the LED board 861 at positions corresponding to the front screw portion 857 and the front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851, respectively.

By inserting the front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851 into the positioning hole 863 of the LED board 861 and positioning it, and inserting the screw through the screw insertion hole 862 of the LED board 861 into the front screw part 857 of the central shaft member 851 , the LED substrate 861 is fixed so as to cover the front side of the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851 .

In addition, an insertion hole 864 is formed in the LED board 861 at a position corresponding to the holding portion 858 of the central shaft member 851 and has a size that allows the threaded portion 869 of the central decorative member 868 to be fitted therein.

As shown in FIG. 162, on the front side surface of the LED substrate 861, there are a central point and a number of points arranged at equal intervals on concentric circles extending in multiple (double) directions around this one point. The LEDs 865 are arranged and fixed so as to emit light forward.

Sideways LEDs 866 are arranged and fixed at a large number of positions arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction near the outer periphery on the front side surface and the rear side surface of the LED board 861, and emit light outward along the radial direction of the LED board 861. It is designed to The lateral LEDs 866 on the front side surface of the LED substrate 861 and the forward LEDs 865 are alternately arranged concentrically. A connector connection portion 867 is arranged and fixed to the rear side surface of the LED substrate 861 so as to face rearward.

A central decorative member 868 is arranged on the front side of the LED substrate 861 . The central decorative member 868 has a specific color (yellow), but is made of a resin material that is almost transparent. It has a pair of threaded portions 869 in which screw holes are formed.

The threaded portion 869 is arranged at a position corresponding to the insertion hole 864 of the LED board 861 . A screw portion 869 passing through an insertion hole 864 of the LED substrate 861 abuts against the holding portion 858 of the flange 855 with the LED substrate 861 sandwiched therebetween, and a screw is screwed into the screw portion 869 from the back side of the flange 855. Thereby, the central decorative member 868 is fastened and fixed to the flange 855 . Thereby, the central decorative member 868 functions as a retainer for the LED substrate 861 .

The loose fitting device 880 includes a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 formed in a flanged cylindrical shape having an inner peripheral surface with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851, and a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 coaxial with the small-diameter cylindrical member 881. A large-diameter cylindrical member 882 formed of a flanged cylindrical shape having an outer peripheral surface with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the front side peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810, the small-diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large-diameter It mainly includes a body cylindrical member 883 which is a flanged cylindrical member sandwiched between the cylindrical members 882 and rotatably and loosely fitted to the small-diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large-diameter cylindrical member 882 .

The main body cylindrical member 883 is provided with screw-in portions 883S, which extend cylindrically in the front-rear direction and have screw holes therein, integrally at two of the four locations equally spaced in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion. The positioning boss 883a extends from the tip edge of the portion where the threaded portion 883S is not formed among the above-mentioned four portions.

The main body cylindrical member 883 is configured to bulge in the outer diameter direction at four locations corresponding to the screw-in portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a. In addition, on the main body cylindrical member 883, rib-like projections are projected in the outer diameter direction at the corresponding four intermediate positions in the circumferential direction with a projection length similar to that of the screw-in portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a. A sliding rib 883b is formed extending across.

The flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 is formed with an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the LED board 861, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 149), the decorative member 884 covering the LED board 861 from the front side and the decorative member 884 are arranged on the outside. A back cover 886 which is fastened and fixed near the diameter, forms a cup shape with an empty bottom rising toward the front from the outer peripheral side of the fastening portion, abuts on the flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 from the rear side, and is fastened and fixed. , are provided.

The back cover 886 is entirely plated (yellow in this pachinko machine 8010) on the front and back surfaces, so that the side surfaces are mirror-finished. Therefore, for example, by reflecting the light of the lateral LEDs 866 arranged on the back side surface of the LED substrate 861 near the outer periphery, it is possible to perform light emission effects.

The decorative member 884 is a member that emits light by being irradiated with light from the LEDs 865 and 866 arranged on the LED substrate 861. The decorative member 884 is shaped like a hibiscus flower and transmits light in a specific color (red). a front side plate portion made of a resin material having a specific property, and a rear side plate portion formed of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material, the rear side plate portion forming a disc shape with a peripheral wall standing upright on the rear side thereof. An opening 885 having a size that allows the central decorative member 868 to be inserted is formed in the central portion.

The body cylindrical member 883 configured in this manner is rotatable relative to the central shaft member 851 . The loose fitting device 880 is fastened and fixed to a fourth gear 880G arranged behind the third gear 810G (see FIG. 156).

On the rear side of the third gear 810G, as shown in FIG. 161(a), a fourth gear 880G having a slightly smaller diameter than the third gear 810G and a larger diameter than the pivot opening 831 is concentrically arranged and fixed. It is meshed with a pair of intermediate gears 808 that are rotatably supported by the supporting base material 801 and mesh with each other.

One gear of the intermediate gear 808 meshes with the third gear 810G, and the other gear that meshes with the one gear meshes with the fourth gear 880G. That is, the fourth gear 880G rotates through the intermediate gear 808 in the opposite direction to the third gear 810G.

A circular pivot opening 880a is formed in the center of the fourth gear 880G, and around the pivot opening 880a, screw insertion holes are provided at positions corresponding to the two screw portions 883S of the main body cylindrical member 883. Positioning holes 880c are drilled at positions corresponding to the two positioning bosses 883a.

The fourth gear 880G is arranged so as to be superimposed on the rear side of the third gear 810G externally fitted on the main body cylindrical member 883 of the central shaft rotating device 850. 883a (see FIG. 163) is positioned by inserting it into the positioning hole 880c, and fixed by screwing a screw (not shown) into the screw-in portion 883S (see FIG. 163) through the screw insertion hole 880b.

As a result, the loose fitting device 880 is interlocked with the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and is braked by the oil damper 805, and the fourth gear 880G is prevented from slipping off, and the slit The member 810 is held by the body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 so as not to come off.

The fourth gear 880G includes a detection arc plate 880d extending rearward in an arc around the rotation shaft on the outer peripheral side of the screw insertion hole 880b and the positioning hole 880c. The detection arc plates 880d are arranged at five locations with equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

The detection arc plate 880d is housed in the donut-shaped recessed portion 801D (see FIG. 152) in the assembled state (see FIG. 154), and is arranged to detect a member passing through the donut-shaped recessed portion 801D. It is detected by a coupler type detection sensor 801C. That is, in the present embodiment, the rotation angle (minimum angle 72° detection can be performed and rotations greater than 72° can be ensured by detection).

Assembly of the central shaft rotating device 850 will be described. The shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 to which the LED substrate 861 is arranged and fixed and the main cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are inserted into the circular opening 811 of the slit member 810 from the front side. When the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 and the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are fully inserted, their rear ends slightly protrude rearward from the pivot opening 810a of the third gear 810G.

A rear positioning boss 854 projecting further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852 is inserted into a positioning notch (not shown) in the support base 801 (see FIG. 152) for positioning. Further, the central shaft member 851 is fixed to the support base 801 by inserting the rear side threaded portion 853 protruding rearward into the insertion hole of the screw insertion portion 801S in the support base 801 and screwing.

At this time, wiring is connected to the connector connecting portion 867 of the LED board 861, and the wiring is led out rearward through the bore portion 856 of the central shaft member 851 and the opening 801P of the support base 801 (not shown).

With the mounting structure described above, the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 is fixed so as to protrude forward from the support base member 801, and as shown in FIG. The rear side peripheral wall portion 813 is fitted onto the large diameter cylindrical member 882 so that the front side peripheral wall portion 812 is fitted onto the large diameter cylindrical member 882 .

At this time, the outer peripheral surface of the main body cylindrical member 883 is locally bulged at eight places along the circumferential direction by the screw-in portion 883S, the positioning boss 883a, and the sliding rib 883b. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is fitted to the main cylindrical member 883 with little frictional resistance, and the slit member 810 is thereby brought into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the slit member 813 in a line rather than a planar manner. Smoothly rotatably pivoted.

164 is a rear perspective view of the petal motion device 800, the driving side arm member 910 and the driven side arm member 950, and FIG. 165 is a front perspective view of the rear plate 1100. FIG. The petal motion device 800 vertically moves (advances and retreats) by receiving a load in the vertical direction from the drive-side arm member 910 . 150 to 152 will be referred to as appropriate in the description of FIG. 164 and subsequent figures.

The back plate 1100 is a laterally elongated rectangular member that is fastened and fixed to the deepest part inside the back case 200 (see FIG. 88) that is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the game board 13. A support column 1110 that protrudes in the front side in a columnar shape, a gear housing portion 1120 that is recessed above the support column 1110 so that a plurality of gears can be accommodated from the front side, and a vertical straight line at the center position of the left and right. a rail fixing part 1130 arranged in the , and a support long hole 1140 drilled as a long hole inclined downward as it approaches the rail fixing part 1130 on the left and right opposite sides of the support column 1110 with the rail fixing part 1130 interposed therebetween, Mainly provide

The support column 1110 is a cylindrical portion that rotatably supports the drive-side arm member 910. The support column 1110 has a pair of left and right holes in the vicinity of the outer circumference of the front end portion thereof, into which screws can be screwed. A screw-in portion 1111 is formed, and a pair of upper and lower positioning bosses 1112 extending to the front side on the same plane as the tip end edge of the screw-in portion 1111 are provided.

As shown in FIG. 164, the driving side arm member 910 is composed of a long rod-shaped main body member bent in a V-shape when viewed from the rear, and one end thereof is perforated in a circular shape in the front-rear direction and has a support column. 1110, a rotary shaft hole 911 rotatably supported by 1110; A transmission long hole 913 is drilled in a linear long hole shape from the bending point of the long main body member toward the rotation shaft hole 911 side, and the other end of the long main body member supports the petal motion device 800. A support portion 914 is mainly provided.

The drive-side arm member 910 includes an inner fitting convex portion 925 that is fitted in the transmission long hole 913 and a flange portion 926 that protrudes radially outward to a position detected by the detection sensor 1162 . In conjunction with it, it rotates about the support column 1110 as an axis.

The gear housing portion 1120 is a recessed portion in which the gear of the transmission means 920 is housed. A first accommodation portion 1121, a second accommodation portion 1122 connected to the first accommodation portion 1121, and a drive-side arm member arranged opposite to the first accommodation portion 1121 with the second accommodation portion 1122 interposed therebetween. It mainly includes a third accommodation portion 1123 in which an arm gear 924 fitted with 910 is accommodated.

The rail fixing portion 1130 is a portion that supports an operation rail 1000R (see FIG. 150, illustration is omitted in FIG. 165) that is supported so as to be vertically slidable by stacking a plurality of metal plates in the front-rear direction. It has an insertion hole 1131 through which a screw for fastening and fixing the rail 1000R to the back plate 1100 can be inserted, and a positioning boss 1132 that fits into the operation rail 1000R and positions the operation rail 1000R. placed on a line. The rigidity of the motion rail 1000R keeps the attitude of the petal motion device 800 constant.

The support elongated hole 1140 is an elongated hole for slidably supporting the driven side arm member 950, and is inclined at an angle of about 50° in a front view so as to descend toward the left. An extension wall 1141 extending to the front side is provided.

As shown in FIG. 164, the driven-side arm member 950 is composed of a long bar-shaped main body member that is formed in a substantially straight line when viewed from the rear. It mainly includes a supported convex portion 951 slidably supported in the support slot 1140 of the face plate 1100 and a support portion 952 that supports the petal motion device 800 at the other end.

A cylindrical collar is loosely fitted in the supported convex portion 951 , and a screw is fastened to a threaded portion 951 a formed at the tip of the supported convex portion 951 in a state in which the collar is fitted in the long support hole 1140 . Thus, the driven side arm member 950 is slidably supported by the back plate 1100 . That is, the inner diameter of the collar is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the supported projection 951 and the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the width of the support slot 1140 .

166 is an exploded front perspective view of the back plate 1100, the side base material 1000S and the second effect member 940, and FIG. 167 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive side arm member 910, the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940. be.

The slide plate 930 is slidably supported in the lateral base 1000S by a plurality of (three in this embodiment) supported elongated holes 931 drilled in the front-rear direction in the form of elongated holes extending in the left-right direction. It is connected to the connecting convex portion 912 of the drive-side arm member 910 through a base-end-side elongated hole 932 that is drilled in the front-back direction in the shape of a vertically-extending elongated hole provided on the left-end side, and is provided on the right-end-side. It is connected with the second effect member 940 through a tip side insertion hole 933 drilled in the front-rear direction.

The base-side elongated hole 932 has a stopping portion 932a formed at its upper end along the trajectory of the connecting projection 912 rotating around the support column 1110, and extends vertically downward from the lower end of the stopping portion 932a. Mainly includes a displacement portion 932b.

As shown in FIG. 166, the side base member 1000S is a columnar portion arranged in a substantially triangular shape in a front view on the left side of the back plate 1100 in a front view, and has a threaded portion 1151 into which a screw can be screwed. a plate-shaped member that is fastened and fixed to the support column portion 1150 that has a fastening plate portion 1001S that is disposed at a position corresponding to the support column portion 1150 and has an insertion hole through which a screw can be inserted; The support projections 1002S are provided in a columnar shape to the rear side in a positional relationship (three locations) corresponding to the arrangement relationship of the supported elongated holes 931, and the support projections 1002S are provided circularly in the front-view right corner in the front-rear direction. A shaft support hole 1003S that rotatably supports the second effect member 940 together with the shaft support hole 1003S, and an arc recess 1004S that is recessed in an arc shape having the same center as the center of the shaft support hole 1003S, and similarly the center of the shaft support hole 1003S. and a protruding streak portion 1005S protruding toward the front side along an arc shape having the same center.

The support projection 1002S is formed in a cylindrical shape with a diameter smaller than the width of the supported elongated hole 931 of the slide plate 930, and a flanged cylindrical collar extends from the tip of the supported projection 1002S and the supported elongated hole 931. It is arranged in the gap between them, and in this state, it is configured as a part that supports the slide plate 930 so as to be slidable by screwing a retaining screw from the tip of the support projection 1002S.

The shaft support hole 1003S is a circular hole that rotatably supports the second effect member 940, and the arc recessed portion 1004S and the protruding portion 1005S are arranged for the purpose of smoothing the rotational movement of the second effect member 940. It is the part that In addition, the protrusion 1005S does not contact when the second effect member 940 is in the regular position, but is formed with a protrusion height that allows contact when it is displaced from the regular position or bent. be done.

The second effect member 940 has a main body part whose lower end is bifurcated and whose upper end is formed in a circle centered on the shaft support 941. A shaft support pillar 941 which is provided in a columnar shape and is pivotally supported with a collar interposed in the shaft support hole 1003S, and an auxiliary projection which is arranged close to the shaft support pillar 941 and is provided in a columnar shape to the rear side. A part 942 is mainly provided.

The shaft support 941 is a cylindrical portion formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the collar whose outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S. It has an inlet 941a (see FIG. 152). A disc-shaped cover member 945 having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S is arranged at the tip of the shaft support portion 941 inserted into the shaft support hole 1003S with the collar interposed therebetween, and the threaded portion 941a is screwed. The lid member 945 plays a role of retaining by screwing a screw into the . Thereby, the second effect member 940 is pivotally supported by the side base material 1000S.

The auxiliary convex portion 942 is inserted through the distal end side insertion hole 933 of the slide plate 930 (see FIG. 169), and is prevented from coming off the slide plate 930 by fastening and fixing a circular resin collar to the distal end thereof. . That is, the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 are interlocked by the connection of the auxiliary convex portion 942 and the tip end side insertion hole 933 .

The auxiliary protrusion 942 is a protrusion that displaces near the center of the width of the arc recess 1004S, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with a diameter slightly smaller than the width of the arc recess 1004S. As a result, even if the second effect member 940 is about to bend, the auxiliary projections 942 come into contact with the arc recesses 1004S to generate resistance, thereby suppressing bending deformation.

Description will be made with reference to FIG. The rear plate 1100 has three screw-in portions 1161 into which screws can be screwed when fastening a plate-shaped support plate 921a that supports the drive motor 921, and a radial outward direction from the arm gear 924 within a predetermined angle range. A detection sensor 1162 that detects the flange portion 926 projecting to the top, a shaft support 1163 that rotatably supports a collar that guides the coil spring SP8 that generates an urging force in the direction of lifting the petal motion device 800, and a long support hole. a cover support portion 1164 arranged in a triangular shape in a front view so as to be able to support the board cover 1000C at the lower right side of 1140; A threaded portion 1166 into which a screw for fastening the substrate cover 1000C is screwed is mainly provided.

Similarly, the side base material 1000S includes threaded portions 1006S and 1007S into which screws for fastening the substrate cover 1000C are screwed. The screw-in portion 1006S is arranged in the direction of movement of the second effect member 940 with a slight gap from the second effect member 940 arranged at the end of movement (see FIG. 168). Therefore, for example, even if the auxiliary convex portion 942 is broken due to long-term use and the portion that restricts the counterclockwise rotation of the second effect member 940 in front view is missing, the screw-in portion 1006S can 2 Displacement of the production member 940 can be regulated.

In this way, the board cover 1000C is not fixed to a single member, but is fastened and fixed to each of the side base material 1000S and the rear plate 1100 which are arranged in a back-and-forth layered manner and fastened to each other. 1000C, the side base material 1000S, and the back plate 1100 can be firmly fixed to each other. This makes it easy to suppress vibration and displacement of the substrate cover 1000C and the side base member 1000S even when the petal motion device 800, which is a heavy device, is moved up and down by rotating the drive-side arm member 910. can be done.

Next, referring to FIGS. 168 to 173, the vertical motion of the petal motion device 800 by the forward/backward motion unit 900 will be described. 169, 171 and 173 are rear views of the petal motion device 800 and the advance/retreat motion unit 900. FIG.

168 and 169 illustrate a state in which the drive-side arm member 910 is arranged on the upper end side of the movement range, and FIGS. ) is arranged at the connecting position between the stop portion 932a and the displacement portion 932b of the proximal side elongated hole 932, and in FIGS. is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 169 and 173, when the driving side arm member 910 is located at the end of the movement range, the transmission elongated hole 913 of the driving side arm member 910 is aligned with the inner fitting convex portion 925 of the arm gear 924 (see FIG. 173). 151) as a base point and extends in the tangential direction of a circle centered on the rotation axis of the arm gear 924 . Therefore, when the drive motor 921 is started, only the inner fitting convex portion 925 is displaced, and the drive side arm member 910 has a range in which the posture is maintained (an idle rotation range), thereby reducing the resistance when the drive motor 921 is started. can do.

In FIGS. 170 and 171, the petal motion device 800 is slightly lowered compared to the state shown in FIGS. 168 and 169, while the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 are kept in the same position. That is, when the drive-side arm member 910 rotates in the downward direction, the petal motion device 800 operates prior to the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 .

From FIGS. 170 and 171 to FIGS. 172 and 173, it is visually recognized that the petal operating device 800 and the second effect member 940 are interlocked due to the interlocking of the drive side arm member 910 and the slide plate 930. can be made

Here, by moving the second effect member 940 to the position where the petal motion device 800 was originally arranged, the second effect member 940 acts as if following the petal motion device 800. It can be visually recognized as if

Next, the collection and rotation operation of the petal motion device 800 will be described. 174(a) is a front perspective view of the petal motion device 800, FIG. 174(b) is a front view of the petal motion device 800, and FIG. 174(d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotary plate 830. FIG.

175(a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, FIG. 175(b) is a rear view of the petal motion device 800, and FIG. 175(c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803. 175(d) is a rear perspective view of the petal motion device 800. FIG.

Similarly, FIG. 176(a) is a front perspective view of the petal motion device 800, FIG. 176(b) is a front view of the petal motion device 800, and FIG. 176(c) is a central shaft rotation device 850. 176(d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotating plate 830. FIG.

177(a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, FIG. 177(b) is a rear view of the petal motion device 800, and FIG. 177(c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803. 177(d) is a rear perspective view of the petal motion device 800. FIG.

Similarly, FIG. 178(a) is a front perspective view of the petal motion device 800, FIG. 178(b) is a front view of the petal motion device 800, and FIG. 178(c) is a central shaft rotation device 850. 178(d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotating plate 830. FIG.

179(a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, FIG. 179(b) is a rear view of the petal motion device 800, and FIG. 179(c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803. 179(d) is a rear perspective view of the petal motion device 800. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 172, when the petal motion device 800 is lowered by the up-and-down motion and is at the lowest position, it changes from the initial position (collected position) shown in FIGS. 178 and 179 to the fully open position, and then perform a rotating operation (second operation) at the fully open position. operation) and return to the initial position (collecting position).

At the initial position (concentrated position), as shown in FIG. 174(d), the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 157) is aligned with the inner end of the central slit 814 in the slit member 810 (the end on the side of the circular opening 811). 174 and 175, the five petals 802 are at the central decorative member 868 in the center, and the flowered hibiscus as a whole. It is in a state of gathering to form a flower.

When the petals 802 are at the initial position (concentrated position) as described above, the central motor 804 rotates the first gear 804G counterclockwise as shown by the arrow A9 in FIG. As the second gear 830G (see FIG. 175(d)) is interlocked with the second gear 830G (see FIG. 175(d)), the rotating plate 830 is driven to rotate clockwise as indicated by an arrow A10.

At this time, as described above, the rotating plate 830 is fitted around the front side peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810 at the pivot opening 831 with little frictional resistance. can rotate. On the other hand, the slit member 810 is rotatably fitted on the large-diameter cylindrical member 882 of the loose fitting device 880 through the circular opening 811 as described above. Since it is braked in conjunction with the gear 805G of the oil damper 805, it is held so that it cannot rotate with a torque small enough to initiate the above-described rotary plate 830. FIG.

Therefore, when the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804, at first only the rotating plate 830 is rotationally driven as described above, and the slit member 810 is held in a stopped state (see FIGS. 176 and 177). ).

When the rotating plate 830 is driven to rotate as described above, as shown in FIG. Along with this, a force is applied to the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 157) in the direction of being pushed outward along the radial direction while being guided by the guide rail 832 .

At this time, since the movement of the slide pin 823 is restricted by the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 as shown in FIG. move under the guidance of

At this time, since the slide pin 823 is guided by the rotating guide rail 832, some torque is also applied to the slit member 810, but the braking force of the oil damper 805 exceeds this torque. While the slit member 810 is held stationary, the slide pin 823 linearly moves outward along the central slit 814 as the rotary plate 830 rotates.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the five sets of petals 802 start expanding radially outward from the concentrated position. In this expanding operation, as described above, the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 is tilted counterclockwise by an angle θ11 with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811 as shown in FIG. Since it extends along D12, a relatively large load is applied to the slide pin 823 moving outward. faster to

That is, by inclining the central slit 814 in the counterclockwise direction in front view, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively large, but the slide pin is moved by a relatively small amount of rotation (angle) of the rotary plate 830. 823 can be moved by a predetermined distance, so that the petals 802 can be expanded more efficiently.

Here, for example, assuming that the central slit 814 extends radially along the radial direction D11 without this inclination, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small compared to the case described above, while the slide The moving speed of the pin 823 becomes relatively slow, and furthermore, for example, assuming that the central slit 814 is inclined in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front with respect to the radial direction D11, the load on the slide pin 823 decreases and the moving speed increases. Both declines become more pronounced.

At this time, as described above, the guide rail 832 extends clockwise from the central end along the direction D15 between the tangent line and the normal line of the pivot opening 831 as shown in FIG. After that, it extends outward from the direction D15 while curving in an arc toward the clockwise side in the front view, and the five guide rails 832 extend outward in a spiral shape as a whole. .

As the guide rail 832 inclines clockwise in this manner, the load on the slide pin 823 decreases and the moving speed decreases. Furthermore, the more the guide rail 832 curves in the arc shape toward the clockwise side in front view than the direction D15, the more remarkable the decrease in the load on the slide pin 823 and the decrease in the moving speed.

That is, in the case of the central slit 814 described above, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively large and the moving speed is relatively high by inclining the slide pin 823 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. In the case of the rail 832, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small and the moving speed is relatively slow by inclining clockwise in a front view and curving in an arc shape.

In the case of the guide rail 832, as described above, the peripheral wall extending forward from the front side surface of the rotary plate 830 is formed in a groove shape, and the tip of the slide pin 823 is fitted from the front side. Therefore, if a large load is applied between the guide rail 832 and the slide pin 823, the slide pin 823 may deviate from the guide rail 832 during movement. Therefore, it is configured to reduce the load on the slide pin 823 while sacrificing the moving speed of the slide pin 823 to reduce it.

On the other hand, in the case of the central slit 814, since the slide pin 823 penetrates therethrough, there is little fear of deviation. is configured to

In this way, by reducing the load on the slide pin 823 with the guide rail 832, troubles such as deviation are prevented and power transmission is ensured. , and has a structure in which roles are divided.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, when the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end, which is the outer movement limit of the central slit 814 (see FIG. 178(d)), the five pairs of petals 802 reach the fully open position. It spreads radially to reach a fully open state, and the spreading operation ends.

In this fully open state, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the five petals 802 move radially apart, so that they are continuously visible outside the decorative member 884 when viewed from the front. A petal 802 is arranged in the . As a result, the decorative member 884 and the petals 802 are viewed as one piece like a slightly larger hibiscus flower compared to the case where only the decorative member 884 is visually recognized (see FIG. 174(b)). 178(b)).

When the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end of the central slit 814, which is the outer movement limit of the central slit 814, and can no longer move outward, the slide pin 823 is locked to the outer end of the central slit 814. Therefore, a small torque that is less than the braking force of the oil damper 805 prevents the rotary plate 830 from rotating further in the same direction as before. Therefore, by stopping the operation of the central motor 804, it is possible to maintain the fully open state after the expansion operation is completed.

After completion of the opening operation, the center motor 804 transmits rotational power in the same direction to the rotary plate 830, and when the torque applied to the rotary plate 830 exceeds the braking force of the oil damper 805, the slit member 810 shakes off the damping by the oil damper 805 and starts rotating in the counterclockwise direction as indicated by arrow A12 in FIG. 178(d) together with the rotary plate 830. In this way, after the opening operation, the petal 802 rotates counterclockwise in a fully opened state as indicated by an arrow A13 in FIG. 178(b).

At this time, if the central motor 804 is not stopped after the expanding operation and the rotary plate 830 is continuously applied with rotational power, the expanding operation and the rotating operation can be performed immediately without any interval. can be transferred.

When the petal 802 rotates counterclockwise in front view in the fully open state as indicated by arrow A13, the decorative member 884 rotates in the opposite direction (clockwise in front view) as indicated by arrow A14 in FIG. 178(b). rotate to Therefore, compared to the case where the decorative member 884 is stopped, the movement amount (relative movement amount) of the single petal 802 with respect to the predetermined position of the decorative member 884 becomes larger. The rotation speed can be made to appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

When the above rotation operation is completed, the central motor 804 rotates the first gear 804G in the clockwise direction as indicated by the arrow A15 in FIG. While being braked by the oil damper 805 and held in a stopped state, first only the rotary plate 830 is rotationally driven in the clockwise direction as indicated by the arrow A15 in FIG. 179(b). are assembled in the opposite direction.

That is, the slide pin 823 returns from the outer end, which is the outer movement limit of the central slit 814 , to the inner end, which is the inner movement limit of the central slit 814 . 174 and 175, and returns to the gathering state to complete the gathering operation.

Thereafter, the central motor 804 may be stopped to terminate the operation of the petal motion device 800. However, the central motor 804 may be operated continuously without being stopped, or after the central motor 804 is stopped. 179(b), the first gear 804G is rotated clockwise as indicated by arrow A15 in FIG. 179(b). Rotate clockwise when viewed from the front.

When the petals 802 rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front as indicated by arrow A16, the decorative member 884 rotates in the opposite direction (counterclockwise when viewed from the front) as indicated by arrow A17 in FIG. 174(b). rotate to Therefore, compared to the case where the decorative member 884 is stopped, the movement amount (relative movement amount) of the single petal 802 with respect to the predetermined position of the decorative member 884 becomes larger. The rotation speed can be made to appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

By controlling the central motor 804 as described above, the gathering operation can be stopped and then shifted after an interval, or can be changed immediately so as to be continuous without an interval. can also be

Here, in this embodiment, since the rotation of the fourth gear 880G is detected by the detection arc plate 880d passing the detection sensor 801c (see FIG. 153), the rotation angle of the central motor 804 is not controlled. , the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine whether or not the petal motion device 800 is rotating by determining the output of the detection sensor 801c.

Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183. FIG. In the eighth embodiment, a tunnel-shaped foul ball passage portion 145 closed by walls on all sides is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d. The unit 9140 is configured in such a manner that a notch 9145b is formed in the wall portion forming the foul ball passage portion 9145, and the sheet metal member 9150 protrudes along the notch 9145b. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. Differences from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183. FIG.

180 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140 in the ninth embodiment, FIG. 181 is a rear perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140, and FIGS. 182 and 183 are front views of the ball firing unit 112a. be. As shown in FIGS. 180 and 181, the passage forming unit 9140 has an internal configuration of the foul ball passage portion 9145 and a lower end portion and a front portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 in comparison with the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment. The vertical positional relationship of the lower end portion of the door side lower tray passage portion 9142, the shape of the lower end portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142, and the configuration of the partition plate portion 53a are different.

That is, first, the foul ball passage portion 9145 includes a notch 9145b that is recessed from the front side end of the passage forming unit 9140 toward the rear side in the lower curved inner portion of the S-shaped path SL2. . Then, the sheet metal member 9150 includes a thin plate blade portion 9153 in which a portion extending upward from the upper portion of the plate portion 152 is bent toward the front side so as to cover the notch 9145b from above.

The notch 9145b is formed in a series of ranges including the end of the S-shaped path SL2 in the recess direction, and the depth of the recess is approximately the same as the radius Ra of the sphere.

The upper surface of the thin plate blade portion 9153 is in contact with the lower surface of a top stop projection (not shown) projecting from the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) toward the back side, and the upward force generated from the interior of the foul ball passage portion 9145. configured to withstand the load.

This thin plate blade part 9153 passes the thread Y8 through the foul ball passage part 9145, and by pulling or loosening the thread Y8, illegally manipulates the ball inside the game area to take countermeasures against fraudulent profits. It is arranged for the purpose of cutting the thread Y8 passed through the foul ball passage portion 9145. Possible cheating is described here.

Returning to FIG. 148, description will be made. As described above, the ball launching unit 112a of the eighth embodiment is provided with the cutting metal member 725 for cutting the string Y8 fixed to the ball. This cutting metal member 725 is a member that attempts to cut the yarn Y8 fixed to the ball by utilizing the momentum of the ball being shot, but if the momentum of the ball is weak, the yarn Y8 will be cut. The ball was sometimes launched without

On the other hand, this ball does not reach the game area, flows down to the foul ball receiving portion 146 , passes through the foul ball passage portion 145 , and is discharged to the lower tray 50 . Therefore, there is no risk that the ball will enter the game area directly.

On the other hand, for example, if the balls P8 and P9 are fixed to both ends of the thread Y8, a new problem arises. That is, as shown in FIG. 182, the ball P8 fixed to one end of the thread Y8 is weakly struck, and in a state where the ball P8 is guided to the foul ball receiving portion 146, the other end of the thread Y9 is hit. When the fixed ball P9 is guided to the firing rail 730, the thread Y8 is placed on the back side of the cutting metal member 725 (on the side of the firing solenoid 701). Y8 is not cut by the metal member 725 for cutting.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 183, if the ball P9 is hit vigorously, the ball P9 reaches the game area without being cut by the string Y8. The previously shot ball P8 passes through the foul ball passage portion 145, is discharged to the player's front side, and is stored in the lower tray 50 (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, a person who commits fraud can pull or loosen the string Y8 by grabbing the ball P8 stored in the lower tray 50 and moving the ball P8. 63 (see FIG. 2), etc., and gain illicit benefits.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the thread Y8 to which the balls P8 and P9 are fixed at both ends thereof is used to commit a fraudulent act as described above, the thin plate blade is attached to the foul ball passage portion 145 through which the thread Y8 inevitably passes. By arranging the portion 9153, the yarn Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

That is, when a person who commits fraud pulls the thread Y8, the thread Y8 rubs against the thin plate blade portion 9153, thereby damaging the thread Y8 and cutting the thread Y8 at an early stage (see FIG. 180). ). At this time, as in this embodiment, the notch 9145b that exposes the thin plate blade portion 9153 is formed on the front side, that is, on the side where the thread Y8 is pulled when the thread Y8 is pulled from the front side. When the thread Y8 is pulled, the thread Y8 can be arranged inside the notch 9145b, and the thin plate blade portion 9153 can rub the thread Y8.

Further, as described above, the thin plate blade portion 9153 contacts the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) on the opposite side of the foul ball passage portion 9145, thereby increasing the resistance force against the upward load. This prevents the thin plate blade portion 9153 from warping or bending when a load is applied to the thin plate blade portion 9153 toward the outside of the foul ball passage portion 9145 when the thread Y8 is pulled. be able to. Therefore, most of the load applied from the thread Y8 to the thin plate blade portion 9153 can be used to damage the thread Y8.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the recess depth of the notch 9145b is about the radius Ra of the sphere P8. At the same time, the ball P8 is prevented from colliding with the thin plate blade portion 9153 . As a result, the thin plate blade portion 9153 can be prevented from being cracked or chipped due to collision with the ball P8, so that the durability of the thin plate blade portion 9153 can be improved.

Secondly, in the passage forming unit 9140 , the lower end of the foul ball passage portion 9145 is positioned lower than the lower end of the front door side lower dish passage portion 9142 . More specifically, they are arranged with a vertical difference of about the radius Ra of the sphere. This makes it easier for the yarn Y8 to be damaged by the payout ball. That is, since the person who commits the fraudulent act is afraid that the fraudulent act will be discovered, after holding the ball P8, in order to prevent the clerk from suspicion, the person should hold the ball P8 near the body (for example, in the pocket of the trousers). ), it is easy to cheat by pulling or loosening the thread 8. In this case, the thread Y8 is maintained in a state of extending toward the player along the upper surface of the side wall of the lower tray 50 (in contact with the upper surface). At this time, the thread Y8 is stretched through a position above the bottom surface of the ball guide opening 53 by about the diameter of the ball (see FIG. 86).

When a prize ball is paid out in this state, the ball discharged from the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 to the lower tray 50 collides with the lower tray 50 and bounces around. The bottom plate 50 (see FIG. 1) flows down toward the right while stepping on the thread Y8 disposed on the front side of the 53 and hitting the thread Y8, and the bottom opening disposed behind the ball removing lever 52. flow down through That is, by arranging the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 above the lower end of the foul ball passage portion 9145 (by increasing the upper limit position for jumping around), the front door side lower tray The ball discharged from the passage portion 9142 to the lower plate 50 can contact the thread Y8, increasing the possibility of damaging the thread Y8 and cutting the thread Y8 at an early stage.

Thirdly, the bottom surface of the lower end portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 is formed with a right inclined surface 9142a which is inclined downward toward the right. The right sloping surface 9142a makes it easy to impart a rightward velocity to the ball discharged from the ball guide opening 53 to the lower tray 50 through the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 .

As a result, the ball can be directed toward the yarn Y8 before the momentum (kinetic energy) of the ball delivered to the lower tray 50 declines. That is, the right inclined surface 9142a can forcibly impart a rightward (foul ball passage portion 9145 side) velocity component to the ball discharged along the front-rear direction to the lower tray 50. It is possible to increase the percentage of balls that step on the thread Y8 or hit the thread Y8.

In addition, fourthly, in the present embodiment, the lower end portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 occupies an area of about 2/3 of the lateral width dimension of the ball guide opening 53 at the left portion of the ball guide opening 53, The lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 occupies the remaining area on the right side of the ball guide opening 53 (an area of about 1/3 of the lateral width of the ball guide opening 53), and a boarding restricting stepped portion is provided at the boundary thereof. 9053a is formed.

As shown in FIG. 180, the boarding restricting stepped portion 9053a consists of the right end (right edge) of the right inclined surface 9142a formed as the lower bottom portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 and the foul disposed on the right side of the right inclined surface 9142a. It is configured as a plane portion that connects the left end (left end side) of the bottom portion near the exit of the ball passage portion 9145 and extends in the vertical direction.

A space V9 having a vertical width larger than the diameter of the ball is formed above the riding restriction stepped portion 9053a on the back side of the ball guide opening 53, and the space V9 forms the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 and the foul ball passage portion. 9145 are communicated. Therefore, before passing through the ball guide opening 53, the ball that has passed through the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 can flow rightward along the space V9. Therefore, the ball can be easily brought closer to the thread Y8.

Note that the vertical width of the boarding restricting stepped portion 9053a is set to be equal to the radius Ra of the sphere. As a result, the ball that rolls in the foul ball passage portion 9145 and comes into contact with the riding restriction stepped portion 9053a can be restricted from riding up to the right inclined surface 9142a side. In other words, the riding restricting stepped portion 9053a allows the passage of the ball in the horizontal direction in the space V9 in one direction (direction from left to right) and restricts it in the other direction (direction from right to left). Acts as a directional valve.

Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186. FIG. In the eighth embodiment, a tunnel-shaped foul ball passage portion 145 closed on four sides by walls is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d. The unit 10140 is configured such that a notch 10145c is formed in the wall forming the foul ball passage 10145, and the sheet metal member 10150 protrudes along the notch 10145c. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. Differences from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186. FIG.

Figures 184 to 186 are front perspective views of the passage forming unit 10140 in the tenth embodiment. 184 shows the passage forming unit 10140 viewed obliquely from the upper right, FIG. 185 shows the passage forming unit 10140 seen from the oblique upper left, and FIG. A state seen obliquely from below is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 184 to 186, passage forming unit 10140 differs from passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment only in the internal configuration of foul ball passage portion 10145. FIG.

That is, the foul ball passage portion 10145 includes a notch 10145c recessed from the front side end of the passage forming unit 10140 toward the rear side in the upper curved inner portion of the S-shaped path SL2. The sheet metal member 10150 is provided with thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 extending toward the front side in a manner covering the lower portion of the notch 10145c.

The notch 10145c is formed in a series of ranges including the recessed direction end of the S-shaped path SL2, and the recessed depth is set to be approximately twice the radius Ra of the sphere (see FIG. 180) (diameter). be. In addition, the notch 10145c has a through hole drilled in the front-rear direction along the rolling plate portion 10145d below the rolling plate portion 10145d in which the ball is guided to the passage portion 145a. The thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 of the sheet metal member 10150 are inserted from the rear side.

In the present embodiment, the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) is arranged inside the notch 10145c and has an outer shape of the front view shape of the foul ball passage portion 10145 before the notch 10145 is formed. An auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is provided so as to protrude from the side surface on the back side of the . 184 and 185, the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and is omitted from the drawing in FIG.

The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is provided so as to fill the notch 10145c halfway (approximately the radius of the sphere Ra (see FIG. 180)). It is about the radius Ra of P8. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball flowing down the foul ball passage portion 10145 from colliding with the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154, so that the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are cracked or chipped by colliding with the ball P8. , and the durability of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 can be improved.

A projecting distal end 14d3 of the auxiliary projecting portion 14d2 is formed in an inclined shape extending toward the back side toward the foul ball receiving portion 146 side (toward the right side). Therefore, in the notch 10145c, the width (front-to-rear width) of the gap on the rear side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protruding portion 14d2 becomes wider as it is closer to the passage portion 145a. As a result, the thread Y8 arranged in the passage portion 145a can be easily introduced into the clearance on the rear side of the projecting tip 14d3 of the auxiliary projection 14d2, which is the clearance in which the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are arranged.

The first thin plate blade portion 10153 is a thin plate portion projecting from the back side edge of the notch 10145c to the front side, and the second thin plate blade portion 10154 is located on the front side of the first thin plate blade portion 10153. 10153 and a part that constitutes a forked blade portion, and extends leftward from the right end of the front side edge of the first thin plate blade portion 10153 in a manner that is slightly upwardly inclined. As a result, an acute-angled concave portion 10155 having an acute angle is formed between the first thin-plate blade portion 10153 and the second thin-plate blade portion 10154 .

Note that the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are metal members arranged for the purpose of cutting the thread Y8, like the thin plate blade portion 9153 in the ninth embodiment.

The acute-angled concave portion 10155 is arranged on the rear side of the projecting tip 14d3 and on the front side of the rear side edge of the notch 10145c. As a result, when the thread Y8 enters the rear side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protrusion 14d2, the thread Y8 can be made to enter the acute-angled recess 10155 and be easily damaged.

Since the second thin plate blade portion 10154 arranged on the front side is arranged on the upper side compared to the first thin plate blade portion 10153, the thread Y8 is pulled obliquely downward on the front side by the person who commits the fraudulent act. can easily enter deep into the acute recess 10155 .

A plate-like portion connected to the right side of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 is configured to abut against the lower surface of the rolling plate portion 10145 d and withstand the upward load generated from inside the foul ball passage portion 10145 .

The extended end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 are arranged to face opposite left and right sides at a bending point where the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 10145 bends in the left and right opposite directions. be. That is, at these two points, the thread Y8 is pulled in the left-right opposite direction.

For example, a person who commits a fraudulent act releases the ball P8 that has come out at hand, and the ball P8 flows backward through the foul ball passage portion 10145 and is discharged through the game area, thereby avoiding the discovery of the fraudulent act. However, according to this embodiment, a load is applied to the thread Y8 or the ball P8 in the left-right opposite direction at the extended end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2. Therefore, it is possible to easily cause a situation in which the backflowing ball P8 is caught on the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 and stays there.

As a result, the ball P8 and the thread Y8 remain inside the foul ball passage portion 10145, and the length of time during which the thread Y8 is exposed to the game area can be shortened, thereby making it possible to expedite the detection of fraud.

Note that an adhesive member (glue, trimming, etc.) may be disposed deep in the acute recess 10155 to adhere to the thread Y8 that has entered the acute recess 10155 . In this case, even if the string Y8 that is attached to the ball P8 that has come to the hand of the cheater is cut, the string is adhered to the adhesive member provided in the acute recess 10155, and the ball P9 is returned to the game area. Since the yarn Y8 is not ejected from the yarn Y8 and is maintained there, it is possible to hasten the discovery of fraudulent use of the yarn Y8.

Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 190. FIG. In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which a ball (foul ball) that has a weak launch strength and has not reached the playing area is discharged to the lower tray 50. A foul ball receiving port 2164 is provided. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

187 is a front view of the inner frame 12 and the disc passage forming member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 188 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 187 and 188, the outer rail 2062 is arranged at the lower left corner of the game board 13 and is made of a resin material so as to have the same arc shape as the outer rail 62 in the eighth embodiment on the game area side. A tip member 2062a is formed and arranged close to the ball firing unit 112a, and a guide member formed up to the vicinity of the left end of the inner frame 12 in a positional relationship having a gap V11 between which the ball can flow down. 2062b.

A foul ball passage 2062c communicating with a foul ball receiving port 2164 formed at the right corner of the interior of the main body side upper dish passage portion 161 is formed downstream of the gap V11. The foul ball passage 2062c is formed with a width slightly larger than the width that one ball can pass through, and a spare of the return ball prevention member 68 is arranged above it.

In this embodiment, the main body side upper tray passage portion 161 is moved to the left to the position where the main body side lower tray passage portion 162 is disposed in the above-described embodiment. formation is omitted. That is, the balls paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) disposed on the back side of the game board 13 are exclusively supplied to the upper tray 17 via the upper tray passage portion 161 on the main body side. When the number of balls on the upper tray 17 exceeds the allowable amount, a full-tank switch (not shown) protruding inside the ball flow path on the downstream side of the dispensing device 133 is turned on by the load of the balls. It is configured so that the ball payout from 133 is stopped.

That is, in this embodiment, both the ball that has passed through the foul ball passage 2062c and the ball paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) are supplied to the upper tray 17. FIG. Therefore, when considering the above-described fraudulent act of sticking balls to both ends of the thread Y8 and passing one of the balls through the foul ball path 2062c to make the thread Y8 enter the game area along the foul ball path 2062c. In addition, the action of damaging the yarn Y8 by striking the yarn Y8 with the payout ball can be produced regardless of the state of the balls accumulated on the upper plate 17. - 特許庁This makes it easier to cut the yarn Y8 at an early stage.

189 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of outer rail 2062. FIG. In FIG. 189, a spare of the return-ball prevention member 68 disposed above the foul-ball passage 2062c is disassembled and shown side by side as a rear perspective view. Further, FIG. 188 will be referred to as necessary in the description of FIG.

The return ball prevention member 68 is temporarily fastened to the game board 13 with a long metal screw B11 in a posture in which the base member 68b1 of the support member 68b that supports the tilting gate member 68a is arranged on the front side.

Specifically, the guide member 2062b is hollowed on the back side of the return ball prevention member 68. As shown in FIG. In the cavity, a support cylindrical portion 2062b2 is formed which protrudes from the rear side surface of the guide member 2062b toward the front side in a cylindrical shape and has an inner wall formed with a threaded groove into which the long screw B11 is screwed. A closing plate 2062b4 that closes the cavity of the guide member 2062b from the front side abuts against the front end of the supporting cylindrical portion 2062b2. A long screw B11 is inserted through a through-hole drilled as a mounting hole and a through-hole 2062b5 drilled in the blocking plate 2062b4 so as to align with the through-hole. By inserting, the return ball prevention member 68 is fastened and fixed to the guide member 2062b.

The upper surface and the left surface of the closing plate 2062b4, which are the sides that contact the guide member 2062b, are formed so as to match the shape of the end surface of the guide member 2062b, while the lower surface avoids interference with the support member 68b. The right surface (surface on the front side in FIG. 189) is formed as an inclined surface with the same gradient as the increased gradient portion 2062d of the guide member 2062b.

The slope increasing portion 2062d is sloped downward toward the tip member 2062a with respect to the surface forming the outer frame of the play area of the guide member 2062b. That is, the straight line L11 extending toward the tip member 2062a along the surface of the gradient increasing portion 2062d is below the upper end portion of the surface (upper surface) forming the outer frame of the game area of the tip member 2062a (in this embodiment, , about ⅓ of the diameter of the sphere) intersects the tip member 2062a.

With this configuration, when the ball is shot toward the game area, the gradient increasing portion 2062d is retracted from the path of the ball, and the lower tip of the gradient increasing portion 2062d collides with the ball. can be avoided. On the other hand, when the ball that did not reach the game area flows backward, the upper end portion of the tip member 2062a protrudes inside the path of the ball rolling on the gradient increasing portion 2062d, so the ball moves left and right in the gap V11. It is possible to reduce the possibility of passing through and returning to the ball shooting unit 112a side beyond the tip member 2062a.

A side surface 2062d1 on the front side of the gradient increasing portion 2062d can form a cut 2062b1 with a width smaller than the diameter of the sphere and allowing the thread to enter (approximately 2 mm in this embodiment) between the closing plate 2062b4 and the closing plate 2062b4. It is recessed to the back side up to the position. The cut 2062b1 is formed at a point where the path of the ball hit into the game area and the foul ball passage 2062c intersect at an acute angle.

The supporting cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side in front view is provided with a semicircular notch 2062b3 on the side facing the gradient increasing portion 2062d on the front side of the side surface 2062d1. This notch 2062b is provided for the purpose of exposing the long screw B11.

In this way, the long screw B11 to be screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side in front view is exposed at the front and rear positions where the notch 2062b1 is formed. When the thread Y8 having the balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends thereof is passed through the foul ball passage 2062c, the thread Y8 can rub against the long screw B11 in the event of a fraudulent act.

That is, due to the arrangement of the notch 2062b1, the thread Y8 is pressed against the long screw B11 arranged deep in the notch 2062b1 when subjected to a load that pulls both ends (see FIG. 190(a)). In this state, the thread Y8 is slid in the longitudinal direction, so that the thread Y8 is rubbed against the long screw B11, and the thread Y8 can be quickly cut.

In this embodiment, the notch 2062b1 is arranged closer to the front than the position through which the center of the sphere passes. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notch 2062b1 from being arranged at a position (vertical lower part of the center of the ball) where the ball to be shot contacts the outer rail 2062, so that the notch 2062b1 collides with the ball to be shot. It is possible to prevent the direction of the ball from being affected.

Also, a person who commits cheating through the thread Y8, to which the balls P8 and P9 are fixed at both ends, through the foul ball passage 2062c, will not be able to handle the end of the thread Y8 that protrudes toward the player side (the ball P8 is fixed). 182) is pulled forward to adjust the position of the ball P9 in the game area. Therefore, by arranging the cut 2062c closer to the front side, it is possible to make it easier for the yarn Y8 to enter the cut 2062c compared to when the cut 2062c is arranged closer to the back side.

A button-type switch SW11 having a detecting portion projecting downward is disposed in a cavity formed in the guide member 2062b. The button switch SW11 is configured as a switch that can be pushed under a load extremely weaker than the load generated when the gate member 68a rotates with the weight of the weight portion 68a2. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the button type switch SW11 will interfere with the operation of the gate member 68a. The button type switch SW11 is for detecting the attitude of the gate member 68a, and is arranged so as to be able to switch between ON and OFF when the attitude of the gate member 68a changes.

Figures 190(a) and 190(b) are partial front enlarged views of foul ball passage 2062c. FIG. 190(a) shows a state in which the weight portion 68a2 of the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68 is tilted toward the foul ball passage 2062c by the weight of the weight portion 68a2. A state is illustrated in which the weight portion 68a2 is pushed up by the passing ball, and the opening/closing portion 68a1 side of the gate member 68a is tilted toward the foul ball passage 2062c side. Further, in FIG. 190(a), the route of the thread Y8 used in the fraudulent act is shown for reference, and the button type switch SW11 is shown to be ON, and FIG. 190(b) shows the button type switch. It is illustrated that SW11 is turned off.

As shown in FIG. 190(b), the return-ball preventing member 68 only gives a slight resistance to the passing ball, and gives enough resistance to stop the ball passing through the foul-ball passage 2062c. Not. This is because the ball flows away under its own weight, and even if the width of the foul ball passage 2062c is narrowed by tilting the opening/closing portion 68a1 as shown in FIG. Since the state shown in 190(a) is restored, the state shown in FIG. 190(a) is restored by the next timing when the ball is guided to the foul ball passage 2062c (0.6 seconds at the shortest). because it can

On the other hand, the ball-return preventing member 68 provides great resistance to an object that does not flow away like a ball, for example, an object that advances while filling the passage, such as an endoscope. This is a structure as an anti-fraud measure.

For example, the tip of a device such as an endoscope advances through the foul ball passage 2062c in the direction opposite to the direction in which the ball flows down, reaches the inside of the game area, and attempts to interfere with the inside of the game area (for example, Bending a nail (not shown) planted in the game board 13, grasping a ball and putting it into the winning slot, using the tip of the device as a guide plate to the winning slot, and emitting a laser from the tip (e.g. cutting nails).

FIG. 191 is a partial front enlarged view of foul ball passageway 2062c. In addition, in FIG. 191, the outline of a device such as an endoscope that is illegally intruded is illustrated by imaginary lines.

In the present embodiment, when the tip of a device such as an endoscope is advanced through the foul ball passage 2062c in a direction opposite to the direction in which the ball flows down, the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68 is displaced while advancing. Become. Here, when the state shown in FIG. 191 (the state in which the weight portion 68a2 is displaced by the distal end portion of the endoscope) shifts to the state shown in FIG. The insertion portion (long flexible portion) is still arranged below the weight portion 68a2 and maintains the weight portion 68a2 in a state of being pushed up. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to disengage the opening/closing portion 68a1, and it is possible to prevent the distal end portion of the endoscope from advancing further.

Here, if the endoscope is forcibly advanced to destroy the gate member 68a and enter the inside, it is impossible to prevent fraud. On the other hand, in this case, since the button type switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state, an alarm may be sounded when the button type switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state for a predetermined period of time. , fraud can be detected early.

Also, when the button type switch SW11 is in the OFF state, control may be performed so that the dispensing of balls from the dispensing device 133 (see FIG. 87) is stopped. Even in this case, in normal use, the state in which the button type switch SW11 is turned off occurs only at the timing when the foul ball passes (see FIG. 190(b)), and the button type switch SW11 is turned on immediately. (see FIG. 190(a)), the period during which the ball is not put out from the payout device 133 can be shortened as much as possible, and the player can be prevented from feeling a sense of discomfort. On the other hand, when the gate member 68a is illegally destroyed, the state in which the dispensing of balls from the dispensing device 133 is stopped can be maintained.

It should be noted that the member arranged above the foul ball passage 2062c need not be the return ball prevention member 68, and may be another movable member. However, by arranging the return ball prevention member 68 as in this embodiment, if the return ball prevention member 68 on the side of the game board 13 is cracked or bent due to long-term use, can be exchanged for As a result, compared with the case where the replacement member of the return ball prevention member 68 is simply purchased as an option, it has the effect of being able to play a role in preventing fraudulent acts before replacement, and the trouble of forgetting and searching for a storage place can be saved. It is possible to achieve the effect of Further, it is not necessary to include the entire structure of the return ball prevention member 68, and for example, the gate member 68a may be pivotally supported by a fixed shaft (the support member 68b may not be provided).

Also, if the return ball prevention member 68 cracks or bends and is replaced, whether or not the above-described fraudulent act prevention effect is achieved depends on the degree of damage to the return ball prevention member 68. From the point of view of the person committing fraud, it is difficult to maintain a deterrent to fraudulent activity by not knowing whether or not the replacement has been made, and even if it has been replaced, the degree of damage cannot be known. can.

Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 to 197. FIG. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the petal motion device 800 rotates only at the gathered position or the fully opened position has been described, but the petal motion device 2800 in the twelfth embodiment can rotate even at the expanded position. configured in a manner. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 192 is a rear perspective view of the loose fitting device 2880 in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 192, the back cover 2886 of the loose fitting device 2880 has a flange portion 2887 extending radially outward from the outer edge of the rear end and a and a restricting portion 2888 projecting from the extended tip of the flange portion 2887 toward the rear side. The loose fitting device 2880 of this embodiment differs from the loose fitting device 880 of the eighth embodiment only in the rear cover 2886, and other parts are the same as the loose fitting device 880. .

The restricting portion 2888 protrudes to a position (intermediate position) between the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 . That is, the restricting portion 2888 protrudes to a position where it can contact with the front side portion 802b but cannot contact with the rear side portion 802a.

In this embodiment, a single flange portion 2887 and a single restriction portion 2888 are arranged, but these may be scattered at a plurality of locations on the back cover 2886 . Next, actions of the flange portion 2887 and the restricting portion 2888 will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 and 194. FIG.

193(a) and 193(b) are front views of the petal motion device 2800, and FIGS. 194(a) and 194(b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 810 and the slide member 2820. . 193 and 194 show an operation example of the petal operating device 2800 in chronological order. is illustrated.

194(a) and 194(b), the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are cross-sectionally viewed for convenience, and the pair of screw-in portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are cross-sectionally viewed in the same cross section. Also, in FIG. 193, the petal 802 whose posture is changed by the action of the restricting portion 2888 is shown in white (the same applies to FIGS. 195 and 196).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 194(a), a pair of threaded portions 2803S arranged inside the slits 815 on both sides are provided with opposite threaded portions centered on the screw insertion portion 803H. It has a sloped surface 2803T that slopes away from 2803S.

The inclined surface 2803T is formed to be inclined by about 30° with respect to the direction in which the slide member 2820 slides. The action of the restricting portion 2888 on the petals 802 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 193(a) and 193(b), the petal 802 is slid in a posture in which the restricting portion 2888 is arranged radially outward along the moving direction of the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 ( Rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) is rotated counterclockwise in a front view), restricting portion 2888 and front side portion 802b of petal 802 come into contact, and petal 802 receives a load from restricting portion 2888.

When the petals 802 are further slid (rotating the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) counterclockwise when viewed from the front) while the petals 802 are receiving the load from the restricting portion 2888, the petals 802 receive the load. To do so, change your posture.

At this time, the slide member 2820 fastened and fixed to the petals 802 is in the normal posture shown in FIG. 194(b), the posture can be changed to an inclined posture with respect to the central slit 814 and the slits 815 on both sides. Petals 802 undergo posture changes as much as possible.

As the slide member 2820 and the petals 802 change their postures in this manner, the load from the restricting portion 2888 is shed, while the resistance between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 810 changes.

That is, in the normal posture shown in FIG. 194(a), only the narrow slide ribs 803a of the slide member 2820 are in contact with the slits 815 on both sides. can move smoothly in the longitudinal direction.

On the other hand, in the inclined position shown in FIG. 194(b), the sliding member 2820 contacts the slits 815 on both sides with the slide rib 803a against the outer inner wall and with the inclined surface 2803T against the inner inner wall. (pressed), the frictional resistance increases. In addition, since the width of the inclined surface 2803T is formed to be larger than that of the slide rib 803a, the increase in frictional resistance is remarkable. Since the inclined surfaces 2803T are in contact with the inner walls of the slits 815 on both sides from both sides in the lateral direction of the slits 815 on both sides, the frictional resistance increases regardless of the rotation direction of the rotary plate 830. .

Therefore, in the tilted posture shown in FIG. 194(b), the movement resistance of the slide member 2820 against the movement of the slits 814 and 815 in the longitudinal direction increases, so that the slide member 2820 reaches the ends of the slits 814 and 815. without waiting, the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) can be made to exceed the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) (the slide member 2820 in the normal posture and the movement resistance of the slide member 2820 in the inclined position).

In this case, the slit member 810 shakes off the damping by the oil damper 805 and starts rotating together with the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 155). That is, from the state shown in FIG. 193(b), the rotation in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is started. Since this direction corresponds to the direction in which the petals 802 move away from the restricting portion 2888, the load applied to the petals 802 from the restricting portion 2888 can be released.

195 is a front view of petal motion device 2800. FIG. Note that FIG. 195 shows a state after the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) continues to rotate in the same direction from the state of FIG. 193(b).

As shown in FIG. 195, the petal actuator 2800 can be rotated in the expanded position. At this time, the rear cover 2886 rotates in a direction (clockwise when viewed from the front) opposite to the rotating direction of the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 155). 195, the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) is greater than the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156), so the position during expansion is maintained. In this state, the petals 802 can be rotated forward and backward.

196(a), 196(b) and 197 are front views of the petal motion device 2800. FIG. 196(a), 196(b), and 197 show how the petals 802 move from the spreading position to the collected position in time series.

In FIG. 196(a), the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. When the rotating plate 830 rotates further in the same direction from this state, as shown in FIG. returned.

Furthermore, when the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) rotates in the same direction, the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) exceeds the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotary plate 830. The rotational motion of 802 subsides and the petals 802 slide toward the gathering position.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the petals 802 can be automatically rotated at the spreading position and then returned to the collected position.

Although the case where the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 expands at the position where it abuts against the restricting portion 2888 has been described, if the petal 802 is rotated by a slight angle (the rotating plate 830 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, ), contact between the front side portion 802b and the restricting portion 2888 can be avoided, so it is also possible in this embodiment to move the petal 802 to the fully open position and rotate it at the fully open position.

The restricting portion 2888 may be placed at a position where it does not come into contact with the petals 802 at the gathered position or at the fully opened position, or at a position where the petals 802 slightly change their posture even if they come into contact with the petals 802 rotating at the fully opened position. By locating the position where the restricting portion 2888 can be slipped through and the load can be received, the restricting portion 2888 can be prevented from hindering the rotation of the petals 802 in the fully open position.

Further, as shown in this embodiment, by arranging the restricting portion 2888 at a position protruding from the back cover 886 in a front view, the restricting portion 2888 can be used as part of the effect device. For example, by arranging a star-shaped pattern on the front side of the regulating portion 2888, when the petal 802 expands, it can be used as a mark as to whether it passes through a position near or far from the star-shaped pattern. Depending on the distance, the petal 802 can be expanded to the maximum and rotated, or can be expanded halfway and rotated.

Then, for example, by performing an effect in which the degree of expectation for a big win varies depending on the degree of expansion during rotation, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the degree of distance between the star-shaped pattern and the petals 802. It is possible to make the pattern of the mold function as a production part. Thereby, the regulation part 2888 can be used as part of the effect device.

Note that the restricting portion 2888 may be arranged at a position hidden by the rear cover 886 when viewed from the front. In this case, it is not necessary to design the shape of the restricting portion 2888 in terms of design, so the degree of freedom in designing the restricting portion 2888 can be improved.

At the fully open position, the petal 802 abutting against the regulating portion 2888 and slightly changing its posture may be used as an effect (for example, an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win). In this case, depending on whether the petals 802 are simply rotating, or are rotating while abutting the restricting portion 2888 and causing a slight change in posture (flutteringly), it is possible to change the meaning and content conveyed to the player. .

In the present embodiment, the position where the petal 802 abuts against the restricting portion 2888 is the leading end position. The degree of spreading varies. Therefore, even with the configuration in which the restricting portion 2888 is fixed to the rear cover 2886, it is possible to change the extent of expansion of the petals 802 when the attitude thereof changes.

Next, another example of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199. FIG. In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the slit member 810 rotates along with the rotating plate 830 regardless of the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830 in the expanded position has been described. The slit member 3810 of 3800 is configured to be switchable between the case where the slit member 3810 rotates together with the rotary plate 830 and the case where the rotary plate 830 rotates independently, depending on the rotation direction of the rotary plate 830 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

198(a), 198(b), 199(a) and 199(b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 3810 and the slide member 2820 in another example of the twelfth embodiment. 198 and 199 show, in chronological order, an operation example of the petal motion device 3800 when the rotary plate 830 rotates clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 198(a) when viewed from the front. 198(a), 198(b), 199(a) and 199(b), the arrangement and shape of the guide rails 832 of the rotating plate 830 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

When rotating plate 830 is rotated counterclockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. Since it is the same as the twelfth embodiment that the slit member 3810 and the rotary plate 830 rotate together, exceeding the resistance applied, the description is omitted here.

198 and 199, the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are cross-sectionally viewed for convenience, and the pair of threaded portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are cross-sectionally viewed in the same cross section.

Here, when the rotary plate 830 is rotated clockwise in front view, the slide pin 823 is inserted through the guide rail 832 of the rotary plate 830 , so that the slide member 2820 that receives the load from the guide rail 832 Along with the displacement, it is displaced in the lower right direction in FIG. 198(a) (see FIG. 198(b)). In this embodiment, additional concave portions 3814a, 3815a, and 3815b are formed on the side that receives the slide member 2820 that displaces in this way.

That is, the slit member 3810 is different from the slit member 810 in that, of the walls extending along the radial direction of the central slit 814, the wall portion on the clockwise side in front view is recessed so as to widen the width of the central slit 814. Among the wall portions extending along the radial direction of the central recessed portion 3814a provided and the both side slits 815 arranged on the clockwise side of the central slit 814 when viewed from the front, the two side slits 815 are formed in the wall portions on the clockwise side when viewed from the front. A clockwise side recessed portion 3815a that is recessed so as to widen the width in the lateral direction of the center slit 814, and a wall portion that extends along the radial direction of both side slits 815 that are arranged on the counterclockwise side of the central slit 814 when viewed from the front. Among them, it mainly includes a counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b that is recessed in the wall portion on the clockwise side in a front view so as to widen the width of the slits 815 on both sides in the lateral direction.

The clockwise recessed portion 3815a is arranged to face the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 2803 in the state shown in FIG. 198(a).

In the state shown in FIG. 198(a), the central recessed portion 3814a extends continuously from the position facing the guide pin 822 of the slide member 2820 to the rotation center side of the slit member 3810 (lower side in FIG. 198(a)). formed in

The central recessed portion 3814a has a recess depth greater than that of the clockwise recessed portion 3815a and a radial length greater than that of the clockwise recessed portion 3815a.

In the state shown in FIG. 198(a), the counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b is arranged to face the inclined surface 2803T of the flat plate member 2803 toward the rotation center of the slit member 3810 (lower side in FIG. 198(a)). is continuously formed.

The counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b is deeper than the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a and has a longer radial length than the central recessed portion 3814a.

The action when the rotating plate 830 of the petal motion device 3800 configured as described above rotates clockwise when viewed from the front will be described. First, when the rotating plate 830 starts to rotate clockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. 198(b)).

As a result, the contact between the counterclockwise side walls of the both-side slits 815 and the flat plate member 2803 is released, so that the frictional resistance between the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member 3810 is reduced.

When the rotating plate 830 is further rotated clockwise in front view, the sliding member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move toward the contact portion between the recessed portion 3815a on the clockwise side and the slide rib 803a (the sliding member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member 3810, the first contact portion) is used as a fulcrum to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIGS. 199(a) and 199(b)).

Note that the center slit 3814a and the counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b are deeper than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a. contact with the central recessed portion 3814a and contact between the screw-in portion 2803S and the counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b.

Further, the sliding member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are recessed to a depth that does not abut the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 during the rotation described above. A turning side recessed portion 3815a is recessed.

Therefore, the load applied to the slit member 3810 via the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 is reduced, and the load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 falls below the resistance applied to the slit member 3810 from the oil damper 805. . As a result, the slit member 3810 and the rotary plate 830 do not rotate together.

As shown in FIG. 199(b), the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 of the slit member 3810 and the direction connecting the pair of threaded portions 2803S (longitudinal direction of the flat plate member 2803) are perpendicular to each other. When the radial center side slide rib 803a housed in the clockwise side slits 815 abuts against the walls of the both side slits 815, the sliding member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move around the abutting portion as a fulcrum when viewed from the front. Rotate counterclockwise. As a result, the slide rib 803a that has entered the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a moves counterclockwise in a front view from the base end of the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a.

That is, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move radially (see FIG. 194(a)). The flat plate member 2803 can be moved radially toward the center.

Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the state shown in FIG. , the rotating plate 830 rotates independently and the attitude of the slit member 3810 is maintained.

As a result, the slide member 2820, the flat plate member 2803, and the petals 802 fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (see FIG. 193(a)) can be made to perform movements that could not be realized in the twelfth embodiment.

In other words, in the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the opening operation accompanying the rotation of the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise in front view (FIG. 194(b) )), until the changed posture is restored, the flat plate member 2803 and the petal 802 fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (see FIG. 193(a)) rotate (rotate together with the slit member 3810). 195, 196(a) and 196(b)).

On the other hand, in another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the opening operation accompanying the rotation of the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise in front view (Fig. 198 ( a)), and by rotating the rotary plate 830 clockwise in front view, the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be restored (see FIG. 199(b)). That is, until the changed posture is restored, the flat plate member 2803 and the petal 802 fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (see FIG. 193(a)) are rotated (rotated along with the slit member 3810). can be omitted.

Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are changed during the expansion operation accompanying the rotation of the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise when viewed from the front (Fig. 198(a)), by rotating the rotating plate 830 clockwise from an arbitrary state (phase or orientation) in front view, the flat plate member 2803 and the flat plate member 2803 that match that arbitrary state (phase or orientation) are rotated. From the position of the clamped petals 802, the slide member 2820 and plate member 2803 can begin to move toward the gathered position. As a result, the flat plate member 2803 and the petals 802 fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (see FIG. 193(a)) rotate (see FIG. 195) in the middle of expanding (see FIG. 198(a)), and then reach the concentrated position. (See FIG. 197), the arrangement of the petals 802 can be diversified when the petals 802 gather and the movement of the petal movement device 3800 can be diversified.

Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 200 to 203. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the curved surface forming the front side portion of the lower frame member 320 is formed of a plate with no opening has been described. A plurality of through holes 8326 a to 8326 c are formed through the wall portion 8326 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Figures 200, 201, 202(a) and 202(b) are front perspective views of the operation device 8300 in the thirteenth embodiment. 200 and 202(a) illustrate the second state of the tilting device 310, FIG. 201 illustrates the first state of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 202(b) illustrates the tilting device 310 in the first state. A state in the middle of changing from state 1 to state 2 is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, in the operation device 8300 of this embodiment, the difference in the curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 is not explained in comparison with the operation devices 300 to 7300 of the above-described embodiments. There is, and the rest of the configuration is almost already explained in the operation devices 300 to 7300 in each of the above-described embodiments. Therefore, the details of the lower frame member 8320 will be described below, and other configurations will be limited to a few supplementary descriptions.

The curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 is a curved plate-like portion arranged to face the protective lens member 311i of the tilting device 310 in the first state in the front-rear direction, and is bored in a substantially oval shape at the left-right central position. and a first through hole 8326a formed on the left and right sides of the vibration device 5400. When viewed in a direction orthogonal to the rotation axis of the tilting device 310 and along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321, the cross-sectional shape of the bottom plate portion 321 has a horizontally long rectangular cross-sectional shape. A pair of second through holes 8326b drilled along the bottom plate portion 321 and connecting the upper surface and the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 321 at surface positions, and a pair of third through holes 8326b drilled at the left and right corners to have a vertically long rectangular cross-sectional shape when viewed from the front. It mainly includes a through hole 8326c.

Each of the through holes 8326a to 8326c has the purpose of facilitating the downward passage of liquid such as drinking water, and the purpose of facilitating removal of coin-shaped foreign objects inserted into gaps V13 and V14 of the operation device 8300 described below. and a through hole. For example, a coin-shaped foreign object may cause a player to stop the operation of the tilting device 300 when he/she feels that the operation of the tilting device 300 is a hindrance, or may cause the tilting device 310 and the upper frame to interfere with the tilting device 310 and the upper frame. It may be fitted into the gaps V13 and V14 between the member 330 and the member 330 .

Here, since the operation device 8300 includes the tilting device 310 configured to be operable, slight gaps V13 and V14 are formed between the upper frame member 330 and the tilting device 310 . By doing so, the operation of the tilting device 310 can be made smooth, but on the other hand, the possibility of foreign objects being inserted into the gaps V13 and V14 increases.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 is configured to rotate around a ring member BR1 (see FIG. 14B) arranged at the end on the back side, that is, supported by the upper frame member 330. Since the tilting position is closer to the rear end, the longer the tilting device 310 is in the front-rear direction, the more likely it is to be misaligned (deformed) to the left or right near the end on the front side. Note that this misalignment (deformation) includes, for example, misalignment using rattling caused by adding design errors incorporated from the design stage between members, and misalignment caused by slightly deforming each member. (variant) is included.

Therefore, in normal use, the gap V13 between the left and right sides of the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 is designed not to be large enough to insert a coin-shaped foreign object (for example, a one-yen coin). Also, when the tilting device 310 is displaced to one of the left and right sides (for example, to the left), the gap V13 created on the other side (for example, to the right) is formed between the upper frame member 330 and the left and right sides of the tilting device 310 during normal use. The gap V13 has a size obtained by summing the gaps V13 formed between and, and can be a size that allows a coin-shaped foreign object to be inserted.

That is, the gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame members 330 on both left and right sides of the tilting device 310 during normal use is set to be less than half the thickness of the coin-shaped foreign matter (for example, 0.5 mm or less for a 1-yen coin). Otherwise, if the tilting device 310 is misaligned to the left or right, a coin-shaped foreign object may be inserted.

Also, the gap V14 between the front end portion of the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 in the front-rear direction is also formed by the tilting device 310 using the backlash near the ring member BR1 (see FIG. 14(b)) of the tilting device 310. Since the gap V14 can be easily enlarged by applying a load toward the rear side to shift (deform) the gap V14, a coin-shaped foreign object can be inserted into the gap V14 as well.

In this embodiment, when the tilting device 310 tilts with a coin-shaped foreign object inserted in either the left or right gap V13 or the front-rear direction gap V14 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330, the coin There is a possibility that a foreign object with a shape may enter the lower frame member 8320 .

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 202(a) and 202(b), when the left and right wall portions of the tilting device 310 are formed in a shape that narrows left and right inward toward the vertical center, the tilting device 310 easily fits the fingers of the player. On the other hand, in the second state (see FIG. 202(a)), the coin-shaped foreign object fitted in the gap V13 protrudes outward from the constriction of the case main body 311. A downward load is applied from the lower frame member 8320, making it easier to enter the lower frame member 8320.

If the tilting device 310 is operated with a coin-shaped foreign object inserted in the gaps V13 and V14, the operating resistance becomes excessive, which may cause a problem in driving the tilting device 310. FIG. In addition, rubbing between the coin-shaped foreign matter and the protective lens member 311i may deteriorate the translucency of the protective lens member 311i, which may interfere with the light emission effect.

In the first place, if a coin-shaped foreign object gets caught inside and restricts the operation of the tilting device 310, the operation device 8300 cannot perform the intended effect, so the coin-shaped foreign object is inserted into the gaps V13 and V14. It is desirable to remove it as soon as possible when it is discovered, but if the lower frame member 320 is not formed with a through hole, it is necessary to disassemble the operation device 300 in order to remove the coin-shaped foreign matter.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed in the curved wall portion 8326, so that coin-shaped foreign matter can be removed through the through holes 8326a to 8326c. The shape and arrangement of the through holes 8326a to 8326c will be described below.

203(a) is a front view of the operation device 8300, FIG. 203(b) is a side view of the operation device 8300 as viewed in the direction of arrow CCIIIb in FIG. 203(a), and FIG. FIG. 203(d) is a bottom view of the operation device 8300, FIG. 203(d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 8300 along line CCIIId-CCIIId of FIG. 203(a), and FIG. 83 is a cross-sectional view of the manipulation device 8300 along line CCIIIe-CCIIIe; FIG.

The first through hole 8326a has the same center in the horizontal direction as the center in the horizontal direction of the vibrating device 5400, and is drilled with a lateral width larger than the lateral width of the vibrating device 5400 (the first accommodating portion 5431 of the vibrating device 5400, see FIG. 58). be. Therefore, even if liquid such as drinking water is poured into the vicinity of the left-right central position of the gap V14, the liquid is discharged through the first through hole 8326a before reaching the vibrating device 5400. Liquids can be prevented from reaching the vibration device 5400 .

The lower edge of the first through hole 8326a is arranged below the upper surface of the extended portion 311h (see FIG. 12) of the tilting device 310 in the first state. Therefore, when a coin-shaped foreign object fitted in the gap V14 is on the upper surface of the extension portion 311h, the upper surface of the extension portion 311h is inclined (horizontally when viewed vertically in the second state). an inclination D81 downwardly inclined toward the center of the left and right in the first state of the tilting device 310 due to being curved toward the tilting device 310; 201), coin-shaped foreign matter can be easily removed through the first through hole 8326a.

As a result, the size required for the first through hole 8326a can be minimized while the coin-shaped foreign matter can be easily removed, so that the lower frame member 8320 can be designed freely. . For example, the strength of the lower frame member 8320 can be easily ensured compared to the case where the first through-hole 8326a needs to be widened to the left and right.

In this embodiment, the size of the first through hole 8326a is such that the portion above the upper surface of the extension portion 311h (see FIG. 12) of the tilting device 310 in the first state is assumed to be a coin-shaped foreign object. It is assumed that the size is equal to or larger than the size of the target object. That is, in the present embodiment, the portion above the upper surface of the extension portion 311h of the tilting device 310 in the first state is formed with a horizontal width and a vertical width of approximately 30 [mm].

The first through hole 8326a is located on the front side of the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. The spherical shell portion 313a is a portion that transmits light emitted from the LED device 341f (see FIG. 25). In the present embodiment, except for the spherical shell portion 313a, the plate portions of the lens member 313, which are continuously arranged on the left, right, top and bottom of the spherical shell portion 313, are mirror-finished in the present embodiment (mirror-finished members is fixed), the light passing through the spherical shell portion 313 is reflected.

With this arrangement, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the first through hole 8326a is used to make a difference in the amount of light that passes through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) and is visually recognized by the player. In particular, the first through hole 8326a removes the resin member that weakens the amount of light, so that the central portion in the left-right direction can be visually recognized brightly.

When a coin-shaped foreign object is placed at a position that partially closes the first through hole 8326a, the amount of light that passes through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) and is visually recognized by the player is It is weaker than when there is no foreign matter (a coin-shaped foreign matter becomes a shadow). That is, since it is possible to make it easy to notice that the coin-shaped foreign matter remains on the lower frame member 8320 by using the amount of light and the shadow of the coin-shaped foreign matter as a clue, the coin-shaped foreign matter is not noticed and the lower frame can be easily detected. The possibility of remaining on the member 8320 can be reduced. This effect is obtained not only when viewed through the first through hole 8326a, but also when viewed through the second through hole 8326b or the third through hole 8326c.

The second through-hole 8326b is configured as a through-hole that can discharge a coin-shaped foreign object fallen on the bottom plate portion 321 in a direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321 . Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lateral width of the second through hole 8326 is about 30 [mm], and the bottom plate portion 321 is formed with a width of about 2 [mm] in the normal direction.

Since the second through-hole 8326b is arranged near the center of the bottom plate portion 321 in the left-right direction, even after a coin-shaped foreign object slides down along the curved shape of the front edge of the bottom plate portion 321, it can be easily removed. Coin-shaped foreign matter can be removed immediately.

Since the second through holes 8326b are arranged on both the left and right sides of the vibrating device 5400, for example, the liquid such as drinking water flowing along the curved wall portion 8326 or the bottom plate portion 321 reaches the vibrating device 5400. The second through-hole 8326b can be utilized for forward outward discharge.

The third through-hole 8326c has a center axis along the left and right edges of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 203(a)), and removes coin-shaped foreign matter that has entered the gap V13 along the left and right side walls of the tilting device 310. It is formed as a through-hole that can be removed in its upright state (posture).

That is, the length of the third through-hole 8326c in the longitudinal direction needs to be set to a size that allows coin-shaped foreign matter to be discharged when viewed in the direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. , the third through-hole 8326c has a length of about 30 mm and a width of about 2 mm when viewed along the surface of the bottom plate 321 .

When removing the coin-shaped foreign matter, the worker can access the through holes 8326a to 8326c simply by removing the covering cover 370 to expose the operation device 8300 in a front view (see FIG. 92). The covering cover 370 has a fastening portion 370a (see FIG. 91) of the main body curved portion 371 fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 by a screw inserted in the front-rear direction, and a drooping portion 372 recessed by a screw inserted in the vertical direction. Since it is only fastened and fixed to the bottom plate on which the installation portion 15a is formed, the covering cover 370 can be easily removed by removing the screws while the front frame 14 is open (see FIG. 89). Therefore, the working time can be shortened.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, it is possible to easily remove coin-shaped foreign objects that have entered the gaps V13 and V14 of the operation device 8300 without disassembling the operation device 8300 .

The harness HN3 connected to the operation device 8300 is connected to a connector portion 8353 that opens outward to the right at the lower right corner of the body cover 351 (see FIG. 203(b)). Including each embodiment described above, only the harness HN3 is connected to the operation device 8300 for transmitting and receiving signals to and from the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4).

Therefore, even if a coin-shaped foreign object cannot be taken out, the operation can be easily performed by removing the screw that fastens the front frame 14 and the operation device 8300 and then removing the harness HN3 from the connector portion 8353. Device 8300 can be removed from front frame 14 . Therefore, if a replacement for a normal operation device 8300 is prepared, the operation device 8300 in which a coin-shaped foreign object is caught can be quickly replaced with a normal operation device 8300 .

As a result, even if a coin-shaped foreign object enters the operation device 8300 and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is stopped due to malfunction, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be quickly restarted.

Next, referring to FIG. 204, a fourteenth embodiment will be described. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the board support device 600 does not receive the load from the front frame 14 when it is in the fixed state has been described. The load from the front frame 14 is received via the front-rear displacement member 2652 arranged so as to be able to abut on the front frame 14 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

204(a) and 204(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame 12 in the fourteenth embodiment taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 204(a) shows a state in which the front frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 12 (illustration of the front frame 14 is omitted), and in FIG. 204(b), the front frame 14 is shown closed with respect to the The shape of the inner frame 12 is shown in FIG. 204(a), and the shapes of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 in FIG. 204(b) are simplified and illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 204(a) and 204(b), the inner frame 12 in this embodiment includes a load transmission device 2650 as a difference from the eighth embodiment. The load transmission device 2650 includes a vertical displacement member 2651 arranged so that the front side of the plate portion (the plate portion arranged on the rear side) of the main body plate portion 611 that is fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12 can be vertically displaced; A longitudinally displacing member 2652 arranged to be able to abut on the lower end of the vertically displacing member 2651 and supported so as to be displaceable in the longitudinal direction; A support portion 2654 fixed to the plate portion 611a, which is a portion that sandwiches the member 2652 from above and below so as to be displaceable at two front and rear portions, and a front side of the front-rear displacement member 2652 that abuts on the support portion 2654 and the locking portion 2653. and a biasing member 2655, such as a coil spring, that applies a biasing force toward.

The vertical displacement member 2651 can be switched between a state in which it abuts against the torsion spring NBb in the fixed state of the board support device 600 and a state in which it separates. That is, at the lower position shown in FIG. 204(a), it retreats from the torsion spring NBb, and at the upper position (position displaced upward from the lower position) shown in FIG. Deform the torsion spring NBb. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 204(a), the upper end of the vertical displacement member 2651 is positioned at a position with a slight gap from the torsion spring NBb at the lower position. is set.

The front-rear displacement member 2652 is placed at a front position (see FIG. 204(a)) where it is pushed forward by the biasing force of the biasing member 2655, and at a position where it is pushed backward by the front frame 14. 204(b)).

Here, an inclined surface 2652a is formed at the rear end portion of the front-rear displacement member 2652 and is inclined downward toward the end side. The inclined surface 2652a extends from a vertically downward position of the vertical displacement member 2651 when the longitudinal displacement member 2652 is arranged at the front position to a vertically downward position of the vertical displacement member 2651 with the longitudinal displacement member 2652 arranged at the rear position. , is a continuous inclined plane.

The inclined surface 2652a has an inclination angle and a forming range such that the vertical displacement member 2651 is positioned downward at the front position of the front/rear displacement member 2652, and the vertical displacement member 2651 is positioned at the upper position at the rear position of the front/rear displacement member 2652. set.

With the above-described configuration, in this embodiment, by closing the front frame 14, the vertical displacement member 2651 is arranged at the upper position, and the torsion spring NBb is deformed to the side where the load is increased by the thickness in the front-rear direction. be able to.

As a result, it is possible to increase the load that the post-rotation pawl member 640 applies to the game board 13 from the rear side, making it easier to maintain the state in which the game board 13 is in contact with the hanging back plate portion 621d of the pre-rotation pawl member 620. The distance D14 between the front surface of the game board 13 and the rear surface of the front frame 14 (the rear surface of the glass unit 16 fixed to the front frame 14) can be easily defined. Therefore, it is possible to easily define the thickness of the game area, and to stabilize the flow of the ball.

Here, the specifications required for the board support device 600 in the eighth embodiment and the board support device 600 in this embodiment are the same, namely that the game board 13 is fixed. At the time of fixing, the board surface support device 600 pushes the game board 13 toward the front side by the biasing force of the torsion spring NBb, and presses it against the hanging back plate portion 621d to fix it.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, the torsion spring NBb is further compressed by closing the front frame 14, so a spring having a lower elastic modulus than the spring used in the eighth embodiment is adopted as the torsion spring NBb. can do.

Therefore, when the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600, the load (reaction force) applied to the operator from the torsion spring NBb can be reduced, and the load required when fixing the game board 13 to the board support device 600 can be reduced. Since it is possible to reduce the force that causes this, it is possible to improve the operator's degree of freedom in selection and workability.

Next, referring to FIG. 205, a fifteenth embodiment will be described. In the eighth embodiment, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are laid above the reverse cup portion 178 to prevent the intrusion into the inside of the reverse cup portion 178 by melting the reverse cup portion 178 with a heated piano wire. A case has been described in which burning due to a heated piano wire is detected to detect fraud at an early stage. It is configured to detect the heat and prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from burning.

205(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIGS. 205(b) and 205(c) are rear views of the fraud detection device 2280. FIG. In addition, FIG. 205(b) shows a state in which the shape memory spring 2288 is maintained in a contracted shape, and FIG. be done. 205(b) and 205(c), the fraud detection device 2280 is cross-sectionally viewed at an intermediate position in the front and rear of the main body box portion 2281. As shown in FIG.

The fraud detection device 2280 includes a main body box portion 2281 which is configured in a box-like shape with openings on the back side and the bottom side and is superimposed on the reverse cup portion 2178, and a back side so as to cover the back side opening of the main body box portion 2281. and a rear lid member 2282 attached from the main body box portion 2281 and the rear lid member 2282 .

The body box portion 2281 is made of a metal material, and includes an extension portion 2283 that extends from the lower right corner and contacts the left surface of the wall portion 2178a of the reverse cup portion 2178, and an opening that narrows upward from the lower corner. A constricted portion 2284 extending from the inner wall, a projecting portion 2285 protruding upward from the vicinity of the edge of the upper end opening of the constricted portion 2284, and a recessed portion 2285 recessed from the back side of the left side wall portion of the main body box portion 2281. A first conductive portion 2286 that is housed in a recessed portion in which one end protrudes outside the main body box portion 2281 and the other end extends in the left and right direction inside the main body box portion 2281, and the right side wall portion of the main body box portion 2281 It is housed in a recess recessed from the back side, one end protrudes outside the main body box part 2281, and the other end extends in the left-right direction inside the main body box part 2281 and contacts the upper surface of the first conducting part 2286. A second conduction part 2287 formed with a length that allows contact, a torsion spring SP15 that generates a biasing force that presses the second conduction part 2287 against the first conduction part 2286, and a shape memory spring 2288 supported by the portion 2285 and arranged below the second conducting portion 2287 .

The fraud detection device 2280 is a device for outputting an error signal when heat is detected. The first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 are each connected at one end of separate wiring to the portion protruding outside the main body box portion 2281 by a method such as soldering, and the other end of the wiring is connected to the main control device. 110 (see FIG. 4). Then, the contact between the first conducting portion 2286 and the second conducting portion 2287 is released (see FIG. 205 ( c)), the conduction is cut off, and the interruption of the conduction is used as an input and controlled to output an error signal.

When the error signal is output from the main control device, a loud alarm is output from the speaker 451 (see FIG. 120), or the ball dispensing device 133 (see FIG. 87) stops the dispensing of balls, etc., and continues. It is controlled so that it is impossible to play a game by

Details of the fraud detection device 2280 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 205( a ) to 205 ( c ), the body box portion 2281 of the fraud detection device 2280 covers the left side and the upper side of the inverted cup portion 2178 . Here, in the inverted cup portion 2178 in this embodiment, the formation location of the wall portion 2178a is displaced to the left as compared with the eighth embodiment, and the extended portion 2283 is provided between the long cover member 173 and the elongated cover member 173. There is a gap that can be accommodated.

The extended portion 2283 fills the gap between the wall portion 2178a and the long cover member 173, so that even if the wall portion 2178a is melted by the tip of the heated piano wire, the piano wire still covers the long cover member 173. can be prevented from penetrating.

According to this configuration, the piano wire that enters the inverted cup portion 2178 from below, melts the upper wall portion, and advances further is guided by the constricted portion 2284 and reaches the shape memory spring 2288 that is arranged at the upper opening of the constricted portion 2284. be guided.

The shape memory spring 2288 is made of a shape memory alloy such as a nickel-titanium alloy, and has the property of maintaining its deformed shape in a low temperature state and returning to its pre-memorized shape when heated to a predetermined transformation temperature or higher. . In this embodiment, the shape memory spring 2288 has a transformation temperature set to about the melting point of the reverse cup portion 2178 (approximately 80°), and the tensile shape (see FIG. 205(c)) is stored in advance. .

Therefore, when the shape memory spring 2288 is heated to the transformation temperature or higher by the heated piano wire, the shape memory spring 2288 returns to the tensile shape, so that the second conductive portion 2287 is pushed up, and the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 is disconnected and an error signal is output. Therefore, early detection of fraud can be achieved.

An extension portion 2288a extending from the upper end of the shape memory spring 2288 to the front side is inserted into a guide elongated hole 2282a that is vertically elongated and is drilled in the front and back direction in the back cover member 2282, and extends to the front side. overhang. When the shape memory spring 2288 returns to the low temperature state after being in the tension state, the operator pushes down the extension part 2288a to deform the shape memory spring 2288 and contract the shape memory spring 2288 (see FIG. 205(b)). ) can be changed back again. That is, even after the fraudulent act is discovered, it can be repeatedly used for early detection of the fraudulent activity.

Next, referring to FIG. 206, a sixteenth embodiment will be described. In the eighth embodiment, even if the shape of the concave portion provided in the light guide member 540 is uniform, the light guide member 540 is formed to be curved so that the traveling directions of the light emitted from both sides are different. , the right panel unit 2500 in the sixteenth embodiment has recesses with different shapes for each region. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 206(a) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 2500 in the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 206(b) is an upward concave portion provided in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIb of FIG. 206(a). FIG. 206(c) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 schematically showing the portion 2543b, and FIG. 206(c) schematically shows the downward recessed portion 2543c recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIc of FIG. 206(a). FIG. 206(d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of a light guide member 2540 schematically shown in FIG. 206(a), and FIG. 206(e) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540, and FIG. 206(e) schematically shows an upward concave portion 2543e provided in the light guide member 2540 in the area CCVIe of FIG. 206(a). It is a partially enlarged perspective view. Note that the illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted in FIG. 206(a).

As shown in FIG. 206(a), the light guide member 2540 is formed in a plate shape extending straight in the vertical direction. In this embodiment, the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) arranged on the substrate member 512 are arranged vertically in a straight line according to the shape of the light guide member 2540. FIG.

On both surfaces of the light guide member 2540, concave portions are formed in the arrangement described above in the eighth embodiment. can be changed.

That is, with the bottom of the curve of the inner lens member 530 as a reference, an area CCVIb arranged above and on the side of the inner lens member 530, an area CCVIc arranged above and on the side of the outer lens member 550, and an area CCVIc arranged below and on the side of the inner lens member 530. The shape of the concave portion 2543 is changed between the area CCVId arranged on the side and the area CCVIe arranged below and on the outer lens member 550 side.

As shown in FIG. 206(b), in the area CCVIb, an upward concave portion 2543b is formed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543b has a flat surface on the lower side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and a curved surface on the upper side and the rear side. is formed.

Here, the lower plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a. It is difficult to reflect in the left-right direction at the position. Therefore, the upward concave portion 2543b refracts light only at the curved portion and emits the light to the outer lens member 550 side, but the emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIb and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in an upwardly inclined direction, as shown in FIG. 206(a).

As shown in FIG. 206(c), in the area CCVIc, a downward concave portion 2543c is formed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into ⅛ equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543c is heat-pressed in a posture in which a flat surface is arranged on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side where the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and a curved surface is arranged on the lower side and the rear side. is formed.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a. , it is difficult to reflect in the left-right direction. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2543c refracts light only at the curved portion and emits the light to the inner lens member 530 side, but the emitted light is likely to be refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIc and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction, as shown in FIG. 206(a).

As shown in FIG. 206(d), a downward concave portion 2543d is formed in the area CCVId by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543d has flat surfaces on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and curved surfaces on the lower side and the rear side. is formed.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a. , it is difficult to reflect in the left-right direction. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2543d refracts light only at the curved portion and emits the light to the outer lens member 550 side, but the emitted light is likely to be refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVId and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG. 206(a).

As shown in FIG. 206(e), in the region CCVIe, an upward concave portion 2543e is formed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into ⅛ equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543e has a flat surface on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side where the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and a curved surface on the lower side and the rear side. is formed.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a. , it is difficult to reflect in the left-right direction. Therefore, the upward concave portion 2543e refracts light only at the curved portion and emits the light to the inner lens member 530 side, but the emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIe and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in an upwardly inclined direction, as shown in FIG. 206(a).

The concave portions formed on both surfaces of the light guide member 2540 in the region facing the bottom of the curve of the inner lens member 530 have the same shape as in the eighth embodiment (an inclination angle of 45° with respect to the bottom surface and a bottom circle diameter of approximately 1 mm cone). Therefore, the light emitted from this portion to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550 is slightly refracted vertically and travels in a substantially horizontal direction.

According to the present embodiment, with the configuration described above, as shown in FIG. 206(a), the light is allowed to travel toward the inner lens member 530 in the direction in which the light is collected, and toward the outer lens member 550 in the direction in which the light spreads. can be made That is, while the light guide member 2540 is formed in the shape of a flat plate, it is possible to give a difference in the traveling direction of the light emitted from both sides thereof, so that the left-right width of the right panel unit 2500 can be suppressed and the lighting performance can be achieved. You can improve the effect.

Next, the seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 to 281. FIG. In the first embodiment described above, the bottom surface of the lower tray unit 15 is formed flat, but in the pachinko machine 10010 according to the seventeenth embodiment, the bottom surface of the lower tray unit 6400 is formed with a convex portion. As a result, the transportability of the front frame 10014 including the lower tray unit 6400 is improved. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

207 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10010 in the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG. 208 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10010. FIG. In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 10010 in the state shown in FIG. 207, the front side of the paper surface is the front (front) side, and the back side of the paper surface is the rear (rear) side. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 10010 in the state shown in FIG. ) side. Further, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the drawing indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10010, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 207 and 208, the pachinko machine 10010 includes an operation device 10300 shown in FIG. A lower plate unit 6400 that covers the lower side of the frame 10014, a horizontal effect device 6700 that covers the left and right parts of the front frame 10014 and mainly performs light emission effects, and an upper part of the front frame 10014 that mainly covers the light effect and effects. It is mainly provided with a presentation device 6500 for executing sound presentation.

The glass unit 16 described above is arranged in the area surrounded by the horizontal effect device 6700 and the upper effect device 6500, and the game area in which the game balls flow down is formed on the back side of the glass unit 16. It is similar to the embodiment. In order to avoid complicating the drawings, FIG. 207 omits the illustration of the rear side of the glass unit 16, and FIG. 208 shows the glass unit 16 and the game board 13 (see FIG. 2). The inside of the outer frame 11 (see FIG. 3) can be visually recognized from the opening in which the glass unit 16 is arranged.

209 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10010. FIG. FIG. 209 illustrates a direction view along the longitudinal direction of the lever member (for example, lever member 10340 (see FIG. 80)) of the operation device 10300 (radial direction view of the rotation shaft of the lever member of the operation device 10300). be.

The operation device 10300 includes a left front cover 10321 and a right front cover 10322 which are formed in the shape of a thin plate and are flexible enough to bend and deform. As shown in FIG. 209, the housing recess 17a is formed as a substantially left-right symmetrical recess in which the depth of the recess toward the rear side increases as the center of the housing 17a is approached. 10300 are arranged so as to coincide with the left and right centers.

Rear-side ends of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fitted and supported in the housing recess 17a. Therefore, the fitting position moves toward the rear side as it approaches the left-right center. In other words, the fitting position moves toward the body frame (metal body portion 10014a) of the front frame 10014 as it approaches the left-right center.

Therefore, at the lateral center position where the amount of load transmitted during operation of the operation device 10300 tends to be large, the vertical displacement of the fitting position is suppressed by shortening the front-to-rear position from the metal main body 10014a to the fitting position. It is possible to suppress the displacement of the operation device 10300 in the vertical direction (load direction).

On the other hand, at the left and right positions (positions left and right from the center) where the amount of load transmitted during operation of the operation device 10300 tends to be small, even if the front and rear positions from the metal body portion 10014a to the fitting position are lengthened, the operation can be performed. The effect of suppressing vertical displacement of the device 10300 is not hindered, and by arranging the fitting position in this way, a space can be formed between the fitting position and the metal body portion 10014a. It is possible to secure a large area for arranging the upper plate 17, the frame button 22, and the like.

210 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10010. FIG. 210 shows a state in which the front frame 10014 is opened toward the front side with respect to the outer frame 11, centering on the left end portion pivotally supported by the hinge 19. As shown in FIG.

The front frame 10014 has a rod-shaped portion pivotally supported by the hinge 19 , and the rod-shaped portion is configured to be attachable to and detachable from the hinge 19 . The front frame 10014 can be separated from the inner frame 12 by removing the bar from the hinge 19 . Since the components to be newly described are arranged in the front frame 10014, the following description will focus on the front frame 10014. FIG.

211 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 212 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014. FIG. 211 and 212 illustrate a state in which the lower tray unit 6400 and the operation device 10300 are removed from the front frame 10014. FIG.

The front frame 10014 is a frame-shaped metal member that forms a skeleton, and includes a metal body portion 10014a integrally formed with the front door mounting bracket 58. is fastened to the That is, both the lower tray unit 6400 and the operation device 10300 are provided with a fastening portion (female screw forming portion) that opens toward the metal body portion 10014a (rear side). Through holes are drilled at positions corresponding to . The lower tray unit 6400 and the operation device 10300 are fastened and fixed to the front frame 10014 by inserting the fastening member (male screw) through the through hole from the back side of the metal main body 10014a and screwing the fastening member into the fastening portion.

As shown in FIGS. 211 and 212, the operation device 10300 is held between the upper tray 17 and the lower tray unit 6400. As shown in FIGS. That is, the upper tray 17 holds the operation device 10300 from above and behind the operation device 10300 , and the lower tray unit 6400 holds the operation device 10300 from below and in front of the operation device 10300 . The configuration in which the operation device 10300 is held by the front frame 10014 will be described in order below.

213 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 214 is an exploded front view of the front frame 10014. FIG. 213 and 214, illustration of the upper half of the front frame 10014 and the lower tray unit 6400 is omitted. In FIG. 213, the operation device 10300 is disassembled from the metal main body 10014a and is viewed from the rear side. An assembly direction line connecting the fastening point is illustrated by an imaginary line.

When the operation device 10300 is assembled into the front frame 10014 so as to be fitted from the front side, the bottom surface of the bottom member De arranged below the inner case member 10330 has a plate-like shape protruding toward the front side of the front frame 10014. It abuts so as to ride on the upper surface of the projection T10.

A bottom member De that is fastened and fixed to the bottom surface of the inner case member 10330 from below is arranged on the lower side of the operation device 10300 . The bottom member De mainly includes a fitting recess De1 (see FIG. 212) that is open to the front side, and a recess De2 that is open on the side (lower side) opposite to the inner case member 10330 side and the back side. Prepare.

The concave portion De2 is formed in a U-shape in a rear view with an open bottom, and is formed in a size that can be fitted into the plate-like convex portion T10. By fitting with the portion De2, the operation device 10300 can be aligned with the front frame 10014. FIG. Further, since the plate-like protrusion T10 is formed in a thick plate shape, the vertical position of the operation device 10300 can be maintained by the rigidity of the plate-like protrusion T10. It should be noted that the fitting here means that the bottom member De can be positioned with respect to the plate-shaped convex portion T10 regardless of the presence or absence of the gap.

At the tip of the plate-shaped protrusion T10, a pair of left and right cylindrical protrusions projecting toward the front side in a thin columnar shape and a fastening screw can be screwed at an intermediate position between the pair of cylindrical protrusions. A female screw hole is formed.

The pair of columnar projecting portions are inserted into recesses formed in the corresponding wall portions (front side wall portions) of the recessed portion De2 for the purpose of aligning the plate-shaped projecting portion T10 and the bottom member De. A fastening screw that is screwed into the female screw hole is inserted into an insertion hole that is drilled at a corresponding position in the concave portion De2. The bottom member De is fastened and fixed.

As described above, the concave portion De2 formed in the rear half portion of the bottom member De rides on the plate-like convex portion T10, while the opposite front half portion (see FIG. 215(a)) serves as a plate-like support. It is arranged above the planar plate-like portion 6426a of the portion 6426. As shown in FIG. That is, the front half portion of the bottom member De is arranged to vertically face the plane plate-like portion 6426a with the resin member 6427 interposed therebetween, and is formed so as to be able to contact the resin member 6427 .

It should be noted that the term "contactable" here is not limited to any situation. For example, the operation device 10300 may normally be in contact with the resin member 6427 due to its own weight. A mode in which the resin member 6427 and the bottom member De come into contact when the operation device 10300 is displaced downward due to the execution of a vibration presentation may also be adopted.

After the operation device 10300 is fitted into the front frame 10014 , the operation device 10300 is fixed to the front frame 10014 by tightening the fastening screws that are inserted through the front frame 10014 from the rear side.

That is, the inner case member 10330 of the operation device 10300 has a plurality of (three in this embodiment) fastening portions 10333 formed so that fastening screws can be screwed therein, and one of the fastening portions 10333 is covered. It mainly includes a metal plate portion 10334 which is a metal plate having an insertion hole through which a fastening screw can be inserted and which can receive a compressive force due to fastening and fixing.

The fastening portion 10333 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the edge portion of an insertion hole H10a that is drilled in the metal main body portion 10014a with a diameter that allows the fastening screw to pass therethrough. An intermediate plate made of hard resin is disposed on the front side of the metal body portion 10014a, and a through hole is formed in the intermediate plate around the insertion hole H10a, so that the fastening portion 10333 can be connected through the through hole. It can be brought into contact with the metal body portion 10014a.

Here, the through hole of the intermediate plate is made larger than the other through holes H10a around the through hole H10a corresponding to the fastening portion 10333 in which the metal plate portion 10334 is arranged. The shape of this through-hole is designed to have a size that does not interfere with the metal plate portion 10334 that is provided on the rear side of the fastening portion 10333 .

As a result, as the operation device 10300 is fastened to the front frame 10014, the metal plate portion 10334 can be brought into close contact with the metal body portion 10014a. That is, since the metal plate portion 10334 and the metal body portion 10014a can be electrically connected, it can be given the same role as a so-called ground wire. As a result, the safety of the player who operates the operation device 10300 can be ensured.

By arranging the metal plate portion 10334 therebetween, the metal plate portion 10334 can have the function of a washer. Thereby, the operation device 10300 can be firmly fixed to the metal body portion 10014a.

In addition, the shape of the metal plate portion 10334 is not limited to the present embodiment, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, instead of forming a through-hole, a pair of claws straddling the screw-in hole of the fastening portion 10333 may be provided. In addition, when the claws are formed to be shifted forward and backward, it is possible to have the function of a spring washer and to increase the fastening strength.

Locations where the operation device 10300 is fastened to the front frame 10014 are concentrated on the back side except for the insertion holes 6801R and 6801L. By concentrating the portions required for fastening on the back side, the degree of design freedom on the front side can be improved, and the design can be improved.

On the other hand, simply fastening and fixing the operation device 10300 on the back side is a problem because the operation device 10300 tends to be displaced downward when a load is applied to the front side of the operation device 10300 in a sinking direction (downward direction). Therefore, in the present embodiment, a structure is adopted in which the front side of the operation device 10300 is restrained from sinking displacement while concentrating the fastening points on the rear side. This will be explained in order below.

First, the action of the fitting recess De1 will be described. In the operation device 10300, the fitting recess De1 formed on the lower front side fits with the fitting portion 6426d (see FIGS. 211 and 212). As a result, the vertical movement of the front side portion of the operation device 10300 is restricted by the fitting portion 6426d, and sinking displacement is suppressed.

Next, the action of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 213 and 214 , the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have plate-shaped protruding portions on the rear side edge of the upper half portion arranged on the rear side of the swing operation member 10310 .

That is, the left front cover 10321 includes a plate-like projecting portion 10321c projecting in a plate shape along the rear side edge of the upper half, a plurality of partial projecting portions 10321d further projecting from the plate-like projecting portion 10321c, Mainly provide

Similarly, the right front cover 10322 has a plate-like protruding portion 10322c that protrudes in a plate shape along the rear side edge of the upper half portion. Note that the right front cover 10322 does not have a portion corresponding to the partial projecting portion 10321d, and the periphery of the plate-like projecting portion 10322c can be arbitrarily designed.

The plate-like overhanging portions 10321c, 10322c and the partial overhanging portion 10321d are configured as portions to be inserted and fitted into the housing recess 17a. Here, the configuration of the accommodation recess 17a of the present embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, the accommodation recess 17a has a lower edge projecting portion 10017b projecting to the front side with substantially the same projecting width across the left and right of the accommodation recess 17a, and a left and right extension of the accommodation recess 17a. At a position on both sides below the lower edge overhanging portion 10017b at a position slightly longer than the plate thickness of the plate-like overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c, they are arranged opposite to the lower edge overhanging portion 10017b so as to project toward the front side. A plurality of opposing protruding portions 10017c forming grooves between them and the lower edge protruding portion 10017b, and a plurality of positioning holes 10017d drilled in the front-rear direction as elongated holes whose upper sides are aligned with the lower edge protruding portion 10017b. and an escape hole 10017e drilled in the front-rear direction at a position parallel to the right opposing projecting portion 10017c.

When the operating device 10300 is assembled into the housing recess 17a, the plate-like projecting portions 10321c and 10322c are inserted into the grooves between the lower edge projecting portion 10017b and the opposing projecting portion 10017c, and the plurality of partial projecting portions 10321d are inserted. are inserted into the plurality of positioning holes 10017d, respectively, so that the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fitted and supported in the housing recess 17a.

In this case, the plate-shaped projecting portions 10321c and 10322c are fitted into the grooves between the lower edge projecting portion 10017b and the facing projecting portion 10017c, thereby displacing the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 in the vertical direction. is suppressed.

In addition, by inserting (fitting) the plurality of partial projecting portions 10321d into the plurality of positioning holes 10017d, it is possible to easily align the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 with respect to the accommodation recess 17a. As a result, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be prevented from being displaced in the vertical and horizontal directions.

Furthermore, the housing recess 17a is formed in an arch shape that is open on the front side, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are housed inside the arch with their surfaces in contact with each other. can be suppressed from being displaced in the left-right direction or in the back side direction.

With this configuration, the swing operation member 10310 of the operation device 10300 is positioned upward, and displacement of the operation device 10300 is suppressed when the player applies a backward load to the swing operation member 10310. (Early return to original position).

Here, when the player operates the swing operation member 10310, it is mainly operated with the left hand. When operating the arranged operation device 10300, the left hand is stretched obliquely to the right front, so it is rare that the load during the operation does not have a left-right component.

Therefore, since a load in the left-right direction is applied to the swing operation member 10310 at the same time as the load in the rearward direction is applied, the operation device 10300 may be displaced in the rearward and lateral directions.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the operation device 10300 is surrounded by the arch-shaped portion of the housing recess 17a, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are arranged therebetween. The restoring force of the possible deformation of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is generated in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction in the direction of returning the operation device 10300 to the original position. As a result, even if the operation device 10300 is displaced, the position can be quickly restored.

From the above configurations, it is possible to suppress displacement of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 with respect to the accommodation recess 17a. That is, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the operation device 10300 with respect to the accommodation recess 17a.

The escape hole 10017e functions as a through-hole through which the fixing assembly 6802 of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, which will be described later, is inserted. By forming the escape hole 10017e, the fixing assembly 6802 can be disposed at a position that protrudes outward from the plate-like projecting portion 10321c.

Next, the surroundings of the operation device 10300 will be described. First, the outline of the internal structure of the operation device 10300 will be described. 215(a), 215(b), 216(a) and 216(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 10300 taken along line CCXVa-CCXVa of FIG. 207. FIG.

FIG. 215(a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 10310 is arranged in the upward position (initial position in this embodiment), and FIGS. , a state in which the swing operation member 10310 is arranged in the downward position (the depressed position in this embodiment).

As shown in FIGS. 215(a) and 215(b), the operation device 10300 includes a lever support shaft to which a lever member 10340 that pivotally supports a swing operation member 10310 with a pivot rod 10363 is fixed to an inner case member 10330. It is journalled at 10331d1. Therefore, the swinging operation member 10310 that can be operated by the player is displaced along with the movement of the shaft support rod 10363 arranged on an arc locus centered on the lever support shaft 10331d1, and Displacement is possible in combination with displacement in the rotational direction, and the displacement is caused by the operation of the player.

That is, by gripping the swinging operation member 10310 arranged in the upward position and applying a load toward the rear, the swinging operation member 10310 can be pushed in in a manner of rotational displacement about the pivot rod 10363. (push operation).

Also, by gripping the swinging operation member 10310 arranged in the upward position and applying a load toward the front side downward, the swinging operation member 10310 is pushed down in a manner of rotational displacement about the lever support shaft 10331d1. (press down operation).

In addition, when the swing operation member 10310 is arranged in the downward position, the action of the posture correction device 10312 (the action of applying a load to the swing operation member 10310 in the direction away from the wall member 10322b) causes the swing operation. A posture in which the member 10310 is pushed backward with respect to the lever member 10340 (a posture in which the member 10310 is rotated backward from the initial position by an angle θ17y with respect to the lever member 10340) is assumed. Therefore, since the angle of change in posture of the swing operation member 10310 is smaller than the rotation angle of the lever support shaft 10331d1, it is possible to suppress the change in the vibration direction of the vibration device 10366 due to the rotational displacement of the lever member 10340. .

Further, when the lens member 10317 displaceably supported by the swing operation member 10310 is pushed (push operation) while the swing operation member 10310 is arranged in the downward position, the load at the time of the operation pushes the lens member 10317. The operation member 10310 can be rotated about the shaft support rod 10363 and tilted forward to change the vibration direction of the vibration device 10366 to the direction Y17c (see FIG. 216(b)).

In this way, the present embodiment is configured so that loads for operation can be applied to the swing operation member 10310 from a plurality of directions. It can be configured differently.

The lever member 10340 is rotationally driven around a lever support shaft 10331d1 by a drive motor. As a result, even if the swing operation member 10310 is pushed down and placed in the downward position, the drive motor controls the rotation of the lever member 10340 so that the swing operation member 10310 can be returned to the upward position.

A vibrating device 10366 composed of a voice coil motor that generates linear vibration is provided at the tip of the lever member 10340, and the vibration of the vibrating device 10366 is applied to the lens member 10317 by direct or indirect contact. configured to be transmitted.

The vibrating device 10366 is a device that causes a pair of members to move toward and away from each other in a linear direction by means of an electromagnetic force. A disc-shaped plate in which a cylinder having an outer diameter smaller than the inner peripheral surface of the bobbin member and a cylinder having an inner diameter larger than the outer peripheral surface of the bobbin member are coaxially arranged. and a pressing member to be connected (a member arranged on the lens member 10317 side). The pressing member is made of a magnetic material whose polarity changes in the axial direction of the inner cylinder.

Vibration device 10366 is configured to generate linear vibration along direction Y17a along a straight line passing through the center of pivot rod 10363 . In addition, in this embodiment, the direction Y17a is configured to match the direction of displacement of the lens member 10317 .

As a result, the energy of the vibration of the vibrating device 10366 can be utilized to the maximum extent to vibrate (displace) the lens member 10317, and the effect of the vibration of the vibrating device 10366 can be improved.

Next, details of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 will be described in order. 217 is a front perspective view of the operation device 10300, and FIG. 218 is a rear perspective view of the operation device 10300. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 217, a left front cover 10321 and a right front cover 10322 are arranged behind the swing operation member 10310 of the operation device 10300 . The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have curved outer ends (ends opposite to the swing operation member 10310), and the center of the radius of curvature of the curved surface is arranged on the swing operation member 10310 side. be. As a result, a large space can be secured around the swing operation member 10310, so that the movable range of the swing operation member 10310 can be secured, and the swing operation member 10310 can be grasped by the player. Make sure you have enough space to put your finger in.

In addition, since the bending of the end portion is formed in a series so as to surround the swing operation member 10310, the design can be improved, and the deformation of the curved shape portion can be divided and generated as a whole. , the allowable range of deformation of the curved portion can be widened.

As shown in FIGS. 217 and 218, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have insertion holes 6801R and 6801L drilled in the front-rear direction so that fastening screws fastened to the left and right ends of the housing recess 17a can be inserted, and a fixing assembly 6802 for fixing the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 inseparably from the inner case member 10330 with fastening screws.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to the housing recess 17a through insertion holes 6801R and 6801L arranged at both left and right ends. Both the left and right ends are farthest from the load applied to the operation device 10300 (mainly the load in the direction along the plane perpendicular to the left-right direction passing through the center in the left-right direction), and the load is less likely to be transmitted. It is possible to suppress loosening of the fastening screws that are inserted through the 6801R and 6801L and fastened and fixed to the housing recess 17a.

The fixing assembly 6802 is formed on the interface between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. As shown in FIG. The plate-shaped overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c are shifted to the right from the point where the plate-like overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c are located on the rearmost side. That is, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are not formed in a shape that can be disassembled at the left-right center, but the left front cover 10321 is formed beyond the left-right center to the right side, and the right front cover 10322 is formed on the right side of the left-right center. stay in position. In other words, the left front cover 10321 is formed in a wider range than the right front cover 10322 .

In the present embodiment, the boundary between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 on the rear side is displaced from the center in the left-right direction, so that one member (main body) is placed in the central portion (the portion located on the rearmost side) of the accommodation recess 17a. In the embodiment, the alignment with the housing recess 17a can be completed by inserting the left front cover 10321), which makes assembly easier than when alignment is performed using both members.

Further, by shifting the position of the fixing assembly 6802 from the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to reduce the load transmitted when the operation device 10300 is operated. Here, the swing operation member 10310, which is operated by the player, can be arranged close to the back side of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 (particularly close to the upward position (see FIG. 218)). Since it is a portion, there is a possibility that the fastening screw may loosen due to the transmission of the load when the operation device 10300 is operated. In contrast, in the present embodiment, the fixed assembly 6802 is displaced left and right from the left-right center where the load during operation is maximum, so that the transmitted load is reduced compared to the load during operation. As a result, loosening of the fastening screws in the fixed assembly 6802 can be suppressed.

In this way, by shifting the fixing assembly 6802 from the left-right center to the left and right and similarly shifting the boundary between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, it is possible to improve the assembly efficiency and prevent loosening of the fastening screws. can be made less likely to occur.

Both the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are not directly fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330 at the fixing assembly 6802 . That is, in the fixing assembly 6802 , the fastening screw inserted through the right front cover 10322 is fastened to the left front cover 10321 .

However, for the inner case member 10330, the fixing assembly 6802 is inserted through a through hole formed in the upper plate portion of the inner case member 10330 (illustrated by imaginary lines in FIG. 220), and the upper plate portion is sandwiched from both sides by the fixing assemblies 6802 (see FIG. 218). By configuring in this way, compared to the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are respectively fastened to the inner case member 10330, the fastening points formed on the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be reduced.

Thereby, the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be utilized. That is, when many fastening points are provided on the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322, the rigidity of the fastening screws makes it difficult for the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 to bend, and there is a risk that they may be easily damaged.

On the other hand, in order to make it easier to flex while maintaining the fastening points, the plate thickness of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 should be reduced. There is a risk of

In contrast, by reducing the fastening locations as in the present embodiment, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be sufficiently bent without being affected by the rigidity of the fastening screws. Accordingly, the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be utilized without excessively thinning the plate thickness of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 .

219 and 221 are exploded front perspective views of the operation device 10300, and FIGS. 220 and 222 are exploded rear perspective views of the operation device 10300. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 219 and 220, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are integrated with the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324, respectively, and can be disassembled to the left and right.

As shown in FIGS. 221 and 222, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324, respectively, at one point (long adjustment holes 10323a and 10324a) in the front-rear direction. be done.

Therefore, before the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to each other, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are relatively movable with respect to the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324, respectively. , the assembly positions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily adjusted. This will be explained below.

The operation device 10300 is arranged on the front side of the inner case member 10330 in such a manner that the rear side thereof is formed along the curved surfaces of the cover members 10344 and 10345 (see FIG. 215) and the left and right edges of the cover members 10344 and 10345 are hidden. a left front cover 10321, a right front cover 10322, and a left cover member 10323, a right cover member 10324 fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330 from the left and right directions.

The left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are respectively provided with long adjustment holes 10323a and 10324a which are drilled in the front-rear direction and elongated in the left-right direction at the outer upper end portions.

The long adjustment holes 10323a and 10324a are holes for fastening and fixing the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322, respectively. Even if the shapes vary, the lateral positions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 with respect to the swing operation member 10310 can be easily adjusted.

The front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 are fastened and fixed in the long adjustment holes 10323a and 10324a in the front-rear direction, and are fastened and fixed in the left-right direction at the end faces facing each other in the left-right direction.

As shown in FIG. 219, the right front cover 10322 has a fitting recess 10322a recessed rightward from the end surface of the right front cover 10322 that abuts against the left front cover 10321, and is retained in the front-rear direction by the fitting recess 10322a. and a wall member 10322b mounted in a manner such that, in a state where the right front cover 10322 and the left front cover 10321 are assembled (see FIG. 217), leftward movement is stopped by the end surface of the left front cover 10321 so that the wall Member 10322b is retained within mating recess 10322a.

With such a configuration, when replacing the wall member 10322b, the wall member 10322b can be replaced only by removing the right front cover 10322 (the wall member 10322b receives the load from the posture correction device 10312 (see FIG. 215). is repeatedly received). Therefore, maintenance efficiency can be improved.

First, the procedure of assembly work will be described. The front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 are assembled to the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324, respectively (corresponding to shifting from FIGS. 221 and 222 to FIGS. 219 and 220). After being fastened and fixed, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are aligned by fastening the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 to the inner case member 10330, and then the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened. Fixed.

Here, when the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 cannot move relative to the left cover member 10323 and the right front cover member 10324, when correcting the positional deviation of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, the left cover member 10323 and the right front cover 10323 need not move. It is necessary to correct by loosening the fastening of the right cover member 10324 to the inner case member 10330 and shifting the arrangement of the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 .

In anticipation of this, when the left front cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are not fully fastened to the inner case member 10330, but rather weakly fastened and fixed to determine the positions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, the left front cover 10321 And after fastening and fixing the right front cover 10322 (downstream of the assembly procedure), the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330 (upstream of the assembly procedure). However, since the work itself becomes complicated, it is not preferable in terms of simplification (simplification) of the work.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are movable relative to the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324. After fastening and fixing to the member 10330, the positions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be adjusted. Therefore, assembly work can be simplified.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover member 10322 are provided with shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R, respectively, whose front edge portions are arranged to face the guide portion 10344a of the upper cover member 10344. As shown in FIG. The shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R have the role of closing the gap between the upper cover member 10344 and the inner case member 10330 (see FIG. 220), and allow the piano wire to enter the gap and enter the pachinko machine 10010. As a countermeasure against fraudulent actions and mischievous actions of pouring liquid, the gap between the guide portion 10344a is designed to be small (in this embodiment, the clearance is designed to be 0.3 mm).

On the other hand, if the positional relationship between the shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R and the guide portion 10344a is displaced due to the influence of the load (impact) during operation, and the gap is closed, the guide portion 10344a and the shielding plate portion are closed when the operation device 10300 is operated. 6803L and 6803R rub against each other, and there is a risk of generation of resin shavings. Resin shavings have little effect as long as they are small, but if a large amount of shavings clog the detection groove of a light transmission type switch represented by a so-called photocoupler, the shavings may block light and induce erroneous detection. It is thought that there is Therefore, there is a possibility that the degree of freedom of selection of switches that can be used is limited.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the fixing assembly 6802 as a fastening portion of the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 is positioned at the center of the left and right (where the maximum load during operation and during operation occurs). Since it is arranged at a position left and right away from, it is possible to reduce the impact and load transmitted to the fastening portion, and it is possible to make it difficult for the fastening screw to loosen.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the positional relationship between the shield plate portions 6803L and 6803R and the guide portion 10344a, and it is possible to prevent the generation of shavings of the resin, thereby suppressing erroneous detection. In this embodiment, a photocoupler type detection switch FC is arranged on the front side of the shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R.

Note that the detection switch FC is a switch for detecting a pushing operation of the swing operation member 10310 in the backward rotation direction, and is fixed to the connecting portion 10344c. A thin metal plate MB is fixed inside the swing operation member 10310 so as to face the detection switch FC.

When the swinging operation member 10310 is pushed backward, the metal plate MB enters the detection groove of the detection switch FC and the detection light is blocked, so that it is determined that the pushing operation has been performed. be able to. In this embodiment, neither the detection switch FC nor the metal plate MB is subjected to a load, so durability can be improved compared to the case where a load is applied.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 include curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R formed as continuous curved surfaces on the front sides of the shield plate portions 6803L and 6803R, and fan-shaped portions below the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R in a front view. It mainly includes lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R that are continuously formed as plate portions.

The curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R have a curved shape (that is, the lever support shaft 10331d1 (Fig. 215 ) with a central angle of about 90 degrees).

The lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R are provided with protruding interfering portions 6805a that protrude from the rear side surface to the rear side. The protruding interference portion 6805a is arranged slightly inward of the inner edge Rm1 of the left cover member 13331 and the right cover member 13332 in the left-right direction, and faces the front surfaces of the left cover member 13331 and the right cover member 13332 in the front-rear direction. It is formed to protrude toward the back side.

As a result, when the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 and the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are assembled (see FIG. 220), the protruding interference part 6805a can be displaced to the left and right outside. Regulated by Rm1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 from being displaced laterally outward, thereby preventing the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 from being separated from each other and disassembled.

The front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 are portions that connect the outer peripheries of the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R and the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R, respectively, and spread outward in a front view, with the tip of the spread leading to the front side. It has curved portions 6806L and 6806R.

The left front cover 10321 has a plurality of fastening portions 6802L, 6807L, 6808L which are formed at the right end so that fastening screws can be screwed in and arranged vertically. In addition, the right front cover 10322 has a plurality of insertion holes 6802R, 6807R, and 6808R arranged vertically at the left end and through which fastening screws can be inserted.

The left front cover 10321, the right front cover 10322, and the inner case member 10330 are fixed to each other by a plurality of fastening portions and insertion holes distributed in the vertical direction (direction along the operation direction of the operation device 10300). As a result, the load and impact caused by the operation of the operation device 10300 can be distributed to each fastening portion, and loosening of fastening screws can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since it is possible to suppress the occurrence of misalignment at the position of the gap between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, the design portion that is easily visible to the player (in particular, the design that is easily visible in front view) Lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R and connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R (see FIG. 207) can be prevented from deteriorating in performance. These fastening portions and insertion holes have different roles. They will be described in order below.

The fastening portion 6802L and the insertion hole 6802R are assembled in such a manner as to sandwich the insertion hole H23a that is drilled in the left-right direction in the portion protruding from the upper surface of the inner case member 10330, and are fixed with the inner case member 10330 sandwiched by fastening screws. . It should be noted that instead of the so-called "fastening together" aspect, the tip of the cylindrical portion extending rightward from the fastening portion 6802L is fastened and fixed in a manner that abuts on the left surface of the plate portion in which the insertion hole 6802R is formed. . In other words, the fastening does not apply a compressive load to the portion where the insertion hole H23a is formed.

In addition, a gap is provided by designing the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion extending rightward from the fastening portion 6802L to be slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the insertion hole H23a. Even if the inner case member 10330 is displaced downward due to the load applied to the operation device 10300 during operation, the fastening portion 6802L and the inner case member 10330 can operate independently within the range of the gap described above. Therefore, when the inner case member 10330 is slightly displaced, it is possible to prevent the fixed assembly 6802 from being similarly displaced.

It should be noted that the extension length of the tubular portion extending rightward from the fastening portion 6802L may be slightly shortened so that a compression load may be applied to the portion where the insertion hole H23a is drilled during fastening. . In this case, since the restoring force of the portion where the insertion hole H23a is drilled increases the fastening force, loosening of the fastening screw in the fixed assembly portion 6802 can be avoided.

The fastening portion 6807L is a portion into which a fastening screw is inserted through an insertion hole H23b drilled in the left-right direction in a portion of the inner case member 10330 that protrudes toward the front side. The left front cover 10321 is fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330 by screwing in the fastening screw. Note that, in the present embodiment, the portions where only the left front cover 10321 and the inner case member 10330 are fastened and fixed are only fastening portions by the fastening portion 6807L and the insertion hole H23b.

The insertion hole 6807R is a through hole through which a fastening screw is inserted to be fastened and fixed to a fastening portion T23a formed so as to be screwable in the left-right direction at a portion of the inner case member 10330 that protrudes toward the front side. By screwing in the fastening screw, the right front cover 10322 is fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330 . In the present embodiment, only the fastening portion T23b and the insertion hole 6807R are the only locations where the right front cover 10322 and the inner case member 10330 are fastened and fixed.

The fastening portion 6808L and the insertion hole 6808R are portions that are directly fastened and fixed by screwing a fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 6808R into the fastening portion 6808L. Note that, in the present embodiment, the portions where only the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed are only fastening portions by the fastening portions 6808L and the insertion holes 6808R.

As described above, in the present embodiment, fastening portions and insertion holes are formed at a plurality of locations along the forming direction of the opposing portions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. configured differently. As a result, when assembling the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 to the inner case member 10330, it is not necessary to fasten the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 at once, so the assembling work can be facilitated. The assembly procedure is described below.

First, if one of the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 is attached to the inner case member 10330 and fastened at even one place, either the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 is prevented from coming off from the inner case member 10330. be able to.

In this case, either the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 may be attached first. When the left front cover 10321 is attached first, the left front cover 10321 can be fixed to the inner case member 10330 by screwing a fastening screw into the fastening portion 6807L through the insertion hole H23b. When the cover 10322 is attached first, the right front cover 10322 can be fixed to the inner case member 10330 by screwing the fastening screw into the fastening portion T23a through the insertion hole 6807R.

Next, the other of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is attached to the inner case member 10330 and similarly fastened at one point, whereby the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are independently fastened to the inner case member 10330. can.

After that, although the order is not specified, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be integrally fixed to the inner case member 10330 by screwing the fastening screws into the fixing assembly 6802 and fastening them. Further, only the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 can be fastened and fixed to each other by screwing fastening screws into the fastening portion 6808L and the insertion hole 6808R.

In this way, by also forming portions where the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 are fastened together, compared to the case where the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 are assembled to the inner case member 10330 only by fastening and fixing, The number of fastening points can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the operation of fastening the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322, all fastening screws are configured to be inserted from right to left. Therefore, compared with the case where the fastening screws are inserted in both left and right directions, the efficiency of the fastening work can be improved.

In addition, the screwing directions of the fastening screws fixed to the fastening portions 6802L, 6807L, and 6808L are unified in the horizontal direction along the rotation axis of the lever member 10340. As shown in FIG. In the operation device 10300, the operation direction of each operation portion is the direction along the plane orthogonal to the direction of the rotation axis of the lever member 10340. This direction is perpendicular to the operation direction of . That is, when the load or impact during operation is generated along the direction of operation, there is no component in the screwing direction of the fastening screw. As a result, it is possible to prevent the tightening screw from loosening due to a load or impact when operating the operation device 10300 .

In the present embodiment, the operation device 10300 includes a plurality of operation portions (including portions operated by operation; for example, the swing operation member 10310, the lens member 10317, the lever member 10340, etc.). Since it is designed to operate in a direction orthogonal to the rotation axis of the member 10340, the screwing direction of the fastening screw is set to the left-right direction along the rotation axis of the lever member 10340. FIG.

On the other hand, if the operating portion does not operate on a plane orthogonal to the direction of the rotation axis of the lever member 10340 (for example, if there is an operating portion that is pushed in the left and right oblique directions), each operating portion A direction found as a balance (average) of the operation directions (for example, an intermediate angle direction) may be set as the direction of fastening, or an operation portion where operation instructions are frequently given (operation instructions are rarely generated) may be set as the fastening direction. The fastening direction may be set by ignoring the operation part that only performs the fastening.

223(a) is a front perspective view of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, and FIG. 223(b) is a rear perspective view of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 223(a) and 223(b), the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have a gap between the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R for arranging the lever member 10340 (see FIG. 220). A plurality of surfaces opposed to each other are in contact with each other vertically, except for the portion where the contact portion is formed and the portion where the fitting recess 10322a is formed.

In the contact portion, a plate-like portion extends rightward from the left front cover 10321 on the side that is not visually recognized by the player. That is, for example, the shielding plate portion 6803L has a lower overlapping portion 6803La extending rightward along its lower surface (see FIG. 223(a)).

Since the shielding plate portion 6803R is supported by the lower overlapping portion 6803La, the downward displacement of the shielding plate portion 6803R with respect to the shielding plate portion 6803L is restricted. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L, and it is possible to suppress the liquid from passing between the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L.

In this embodiment, the inner case member 10330 (see FIG. 218) arranged below the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L, the lever member 10340 in which the rear side portion is accommodated, and the lever member 10340 are driven. Liquid can be prevented from coming into contact with the drive motor, transmission mechanisms such as cams and gears that transmit the driving force of the drive motor, and electrical systems (such as substrates) that drive the drive motor.

In addition, while the cuts of the shield plate portions 6803R and 6803L are formed on the right side of the center of the swing operation member 10310, the cuts (connecting surfaces) of the left and right members constituting the inner case member 10330 are formed on the swing operation member. It is arranged on the same plane as the left and right central position of 10310 . Therefore, even if liquid passes between the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L, the liquid can be prevented from immediately reaching the gap between the left and right members forming the inner case member 10330. FIG.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the drive motor that drives the lever member 10340 is arranged on the left side of the center of the inner case member 10330 (the portion that bulges to the left from the inner case member 10330). (see FIG. 218), even if the lower portion between the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L gets wet, the liquid that wets that portion can flow downward along the right outer surface of the inner case member 10330. Wetting of the drive motor can be avoided.

Further, for example, the lower plate portion 6805L includes a rear overlapping portion 6805Lb extending rightward along the rear surface below the fitting recess 10322a. Since the rear overlapping portion 6805Lb supports the lower plate portion 6805R from behind, the lower plate portion 6805R is restricted from being displaced rearward with respect to the lower plate portion 6805L. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the formation of a gap between the lower plate portions 6805R and 6805L, and it is possible to suppress the liquid from passing between the lower plate portions 6805R and 6805L.

The liquid that has passed below the lower plate portions 6805R and 6805L reaches the plate-like support portion 6426 (see FIGS. 232 and 234). There is a possibility that the liquid may flow between the main body box portion 6421 of the forming member 6420 toward the through hole 6412 or along the recessed shape portion 6414 . In particular, if the liquid flows downward from the through-hole 6412, the liquid may flow downward from the lower surface of the outer frame of the front frame 10014 and splash the player or wet the box.

In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the through hole 6412 is sandwiched between the lower tray forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430. Therefore, the passage of the liquid is easily prevented by sandwiching without a gap. By suppressing the liquid from passing between the lower plate portions 6805R and 6805L as in the embodiment, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the liquid will splash on the player or wet the box. A pachinko machine 10010 that can be played comfortably can be configured.

As shown in FIGS. 223(a) and 223(b), the shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R, the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R, and the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R are arranged in a streak-like manner to be pushed out from the front surface side to the rear surface side. It has a streak-like portion D23 formed in the . The streak D23 is visually recognized as a concave portion on the front surface and as a convex portion on the back surface due to its formation mode.

The streak portion D23 has a role of adjusting the rigidity of the shielding plate portions 6803L, 6803R, the curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R, and the lower plate portions 6805L, 6805R. That is, compared to the case of forming a simple thin plate, the rigidity along the direction in which the streak D23 is formed is increased while maintaining (or reducing) the rigidity in the direction orthogonal to the streak D23. improve (anisotropic). This will be explained using the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R as an example.

The curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R are arranged between the lever member 10340 and the housing recess 17a (see FIG. 213) and have a role of filling the gap. Here, the operation device 10300 including the lever member 10340 is configured to be displaceable downward by a slight amount due to a load or impact during operation, in order to prevent the reaction force returned to the player during operation from becoming excessive. On the other hand, for the purpose of keeping the arrangement of the upper plate 17 unchanged, the accommodation recess 17a is configured to be non-displaceable.

That is, when the operation device 10300 is operated, a gap may occur between the lever member 10340 and the housing recess 17a. In the present embodiment, the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R are vertically extended (elastically deformed or flexed) to accommodate changes in the distance between the lever member 10340 and the housing recess 17a. can be prevented from occurring.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the linear portions D23 are formed along the vertical direction in which the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R are deformed (the direction in which the load is mainly directed during operation), thereby reducing deformation resistance in the vertical direction. Since it is made large (because the rigidity is made large), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of vibration and excessive deformation when restoring the shape. Thus, one purpose of designing the streak-like portion D23 in this embodiment is to take countermeasures against problems that may occur when the operation device 10300 is operated.

Since the streak portions D23 of the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R are formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front, when a downward load is applied at the center, both the left and right sides can withstand the upward force (a tensile force is generated). . That is, even if a downward load is applied when the operation device 10300 is operated and displacement occurs, the displacement can be quickly restored.

On the other hand, even if a load occurs in the direction perpendicular to the streak D23, the deformation that is permissible based on the flexibility of the resin occurs, so that the load is transmitted to the V-shaped design member 6450 arranged on the downstream side. can be reduced.

The connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R are provided with streak-like portions D24 that are formed in a streak-like manner so as to be pushed out from the front side to the back side. The streak D24 is visually recognized as a concave portion on the front surface and as a convex portion on the rear surface due to its formation mode.

The end muscle portion D24 mainly includes left and right muscle portions D24a formed on the left and right sides and a center muscle portion D24b formed on the center side, which are formed as countermeasures against loads in different directions.

The left and right muscle part D24a is a muscle-like part arranged above the fastening part 6807L (the uppermost part of the fastening part on the front side), and is formed in a shape that slopes down toward the back side. This downward slope corresponds to the direction of the load such as the operation of pushing the lens member 10317 of the swing operation member 10310 (along the direction of the load). That is, by improving the rigidity of the connecting bending portions 6806L and 6806R in the direction of the left and right muscle portions D24a by the left and right muscle portions D24a, it is possible to improve the resistance to the operation load.

As for the inclination angle of the left and right muscle portions D24a, the left and right muscle portions D24a are formed such that the angle with respect to the front-rear direction is gradually increased in comparison with the left and right muscle portions disposed on the left and right center sides. That is, the streaks extend in a plurality of directions. As a result, regardless of the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310, the resistance to the load when the lens member 10317 is operated can be improved.

In addition, the formation width of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R where the left and right muscle portions D24a are formed is shorter in the left and right sides than in the left and right central sides. That is, since the formed width is shorter on the side (left and right sides) where the inclination in the front-rear direction corresponds to a larger force, the amount of deformation allowed for the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R is reduced, and the resistance is increased. be able to. As a result, it is possible to improve the resistance to the load in the direction in which the load during operation tends to increase (the direction in which the hand is swung down), which is inclined with respect to the front-rear direction.

On the other hand, the central muscle portion D24b is a muscle-like portion arranged downward from a position equivalent to the fastening portion 6807L (the uppermost part of the fastening portion on the front side), and has a shape that slopes upward toward the back side. formed from This upward slope corresponds to the direction of the load when (the inner case member 10330 of) the operation device 10300 falls forward.

That is, by increasing the rigidity of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R in the direction of the central muscle portion D24b by the central muscle portion D24b, the operation device 10300 (the inner side of the operation device 10300) is bent by the load when the lever member 10340 is tilted about the rotation axis. It is possible to improve the resistance against forward tilting displacement of the case member 10330).

In addition, the center muscle D24b is formed of a total of seven, one in the center and three on each of the left and right sides, and the left and right center muscles D24b incline toward the left and right center as they go toward the back side. As a result, when the operation device 10300 (the inner case member 10330 thereof) is tilted forward due to the load during the tilting operation about the rotation axis of the lever member 10340, even if the lateral displacement is also generated, Resistance to displacement (resistance in the left-right direction) can be improved.

The central muscle portion D24b is formed denser than the left and right muscle portions D24a. As a result, particularly in the connection bending portions 6806L and 6806R, bending in the left-right direction (deformation that expands and contracts along the left-right direction) is smaller than bending in the up-down direction (deformation that expands and contracts along the up-and-down direction). large deflection.

Therefore, for example, when a downward load is applied to the lower tray unit 6400 (see FIGS. 208 and 212) and the lower edges of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R are pushed down by the V-shaped design member 6450 (position of the lower edge) When the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R are deformed in such a manner that the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R are displaced downward, the upper and lower intermediate portions and the upper edge portions of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R are bent in the horizontal direction, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 The load (stress) applied to the can be relieved (stress concentration can be avoided).

Even in the case of such flexural deformation, the plate-shaped overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c formed continuously from the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R are surrounded from the back side to the left and right front sides. 10017b and the facing projecting portion 10017c (see FIGS. 213 and 214). Also, it is possible to make it difficult for a gap to occur between the right front cover 10322 and the housing recess 17a.

In addition, by varying the easiness of bending of the connecting bending portions 6806L and 6806R depending on the direction, the vibration of the vibrating device 10366 of the operation device 10300 and the load caused by the operation of the operation device 10300 can be transferred to the downstream side (V-shaped design member 6450, see FIG. 232) can be changed depending on the direction of vibration or load.

That is, vibration in the vertical direction and operation load can be easily transmitted to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 207) and the lower tray 50 via the V-shaped design member 6450, while vibration in the horizontal direction and operation load can be easily transmitted. The load (for example, the load generated when the hand holding the ball collides with the swing operation member 10310 when transferring the ball from the lower tray 50 to the upper tray 17) is transmitted to the operation handle 51 and the lower tray 50. can be made difficult. As a result, even when the player unintentionally applies a load to the swing operation member 10310, the vibration and load are transmitted to the operation handle 51 and the lower plate 50, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable. can.

Further, the connecting curved portions 6806L, 6806R are continuously formed on the left and right outer sides of the curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R, and the plate-like projecting portions 10321c, 10322c formed on the upper edges of the curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R are elongated in the left and right direction. 214).

Here, in the case where the vicinity of the left and right ends is shifted in the front-rear direction due to a molding error or the like in comparison between the shapes of the plate-shaped overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c and the shapes of the lower edge overhanging portion 10017b and the facing overhanging portion 10017c. (For example, when the upper ends of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R on the front side protrude toward the front side of the housing recess 17a), the plate-like overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c are bent loosely (the left and right ends are displaced toward the back side). It is preferable that the molding error can be dealt with by deforming so as to

In this respect, in the present embodiment, the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R are formed with the streak portions D23 along the vertical direction, so that the lateral rigidity of the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R is compared to the vertical rigidity. lowered by Therefore, when the plate-shaped projecting portions 10321c and 10322c are deformed to the side where the curve becomes loose, the deformation of the plate-shaped projecting portions 10321c and 10322c can be assisted by the deformation of the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R. , the width of deformation of the plate-shaped projecting portions 10321c and 10322c can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the size of the forming error that can be dealt with.

In this way, the streak portion D23 does not improve (reduce) the rigidity in the forming direction and the vertical direction (horizontal direction), thereby taking measures against problems that may occur when the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are assembled. be able to.

For these reasons, due to the streak D23, problems that may occur when assembling the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 (same as when assembling the operation device 10300, see FIG. 213) and problems that may occur when operating the operation device 10300 and can correspond to both.

Returning to FIG. 212, description will be made. In this embodiment, a flat plate portion (a plate-like portion in which a ball guide opening 53 (see FIG. 214) is formed) along the metal body portion 10014a is provided on the lower left front portion of the metal body portion 10014a of the front frame 10014. and a plate-shaped upper plate portion extending to the front side so as to be bent at the upper end portion configured in an upper portion of the upper portion of the flat plate portion so as to slope downward toward the right. A rear covering portion 10014b formed of a resin material in a manner is provided. That is, the rear covering portion 10014b is formed to have a substantially L-shaped cross section in a plane perpendicular to the straight line along the arrow LR.

The rear covering portion 10014b is a portion that defines the upper limit position and the right limit position of the lower plate 50. As shown in FIG. That is, the rear end portion of the lower plate 50 abuts (is connected to) the flat plate portion, and the right end portion of the lower plate 50 abuts (is connected to) the upper plate portion. Balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17, so-called foul balls, etc., are stored in the area (space) formed in this manner on the side where the lower plate 50 and the rear covering portion 10014b face each other. will be Next, the details of the lower tray unit 6400 that constitutes the lower tray 50 will be described.

224 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower tray unit 6400, and FIG. 225 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower tray unit 6400. FIG. Note that in FIG. 225, each part of the lower tray unit 6400 is illustrated at an angle as viewed from below.

As shown in FIGS. 224 and 225, the lower tray unit 6400 is a cover unit fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a in a manner covering the front side of the metal main body 10014a of the front frame 10014 (see FIGS. 211 and 212). A base member 6410, a lower plate forming member 6420 that is fitted to the covering base member 6410 from above to form the lower plate 50, and a plate-shaped device that is attached to the covering base member 6410 from below. A ball ejecting device 6430 fastened and fixed to the forming member 6420, and one attached to the covering base member 6410 at the left end of the covering base member 6410 in such a manner as to prevent the lower tray forming member 6420 from coming off from the rear side. , an intermediate holding member 6440 fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a on the opposite side (rear side) thereof, and a V which is arranged on the upper front side of the covering base member 6410 and formed of a resin material to have a V shape when viewed from the front. Character design member 6450 is mainly provided.

The covering base member 6410 includes a main body portion 6411 having a substantially flat lower bottom surface and a substantially box-like shape with an open rear surface and an open upper surface. A through hole 6412 is left to pass through, a protruding shape portion 6413 protrudes downward from the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 on the central side of the main body portion 6411 in the left-right direction with respect to the through hole 6412, and the protrusion is formed. A recessed shape portion 6414 is mainly provided on the back side of the shaped portion 6413 so that the plate thickness of the protruded shape portion 6413 is approximately the same as that of the other portion of the main body portion 6411 .

By configuring the concave shape portion 6414, it is possible to prevent the plate thickness from becoming excessively large in the vicinity of the protruding shape portion 6413, so that the yield of resin molding is improved and stress concentration occurs in the protruding shape portion 6413. can be suppressed. The protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 have a plurality of advantageous effects at the location where the operation device 10300 is held from below, details of which will be described later.

The through-hole 6412 has a size substantially equal to the width of the bottom shape of the lower plate 50, which will be described later, and is much larger than the size of a bottom opening 6432 opened by sliding the ball extraction lever 52.

In this way, by forming the through hole 6412 large in advance, the discharge speed of the balls from the lower tray 50 can be adjusted to correspond to the playability realized by the pachinko machine 10010 without replacing the covering base member 6410. It is possible to correspond to the ejection speed of the ball to be played.

That is, the discharge speed of the balls from the lower tray 50 depends on the opening area of the bottom opening 6432. For example, if the size of the through hole 6412 is the same as that of the bottom opening 6432, the discharge speed of the balls depends on it. It cannot be made any larger. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the through hole 6412 is formed large in advance, if the size of the bottom opening 6432 is changed within a range not exceeding the through hole 6412 or the arrangement of the bottom opening 6432 is changed ( By changing the designs of the lower tray forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 , it is possible to change the discharging speed (discharging mode) of balls from the lower tray 50 without replacing the covering base member 6410 . In other words, the ball ejection speed (ejection mode) can be changed without changing the appearance of the lower tray unit 6400 visually recognized by the player (without changing the design).

The demand for changing the ball ejection speed is not limited to the case where the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 10010 are changed. For example, in amusement arcades, the pachinko machine 10010 may be installed in a manner that requires the dispensed balls to be transferred to the senryo box, or may be installed in a manner that does not require the dispensed balls to be transferred to the senryo box (a so-called “personal” machine). in the case of ).

When it is necessary to transfer the discharged balls to the senryo box, if the balls are discharged at high speed, there is a risk that the balls will overflow from the senryo box. It is desirable that

In this embodiment, the bottom opening 6432 is formed of a circular opening with a diameter of about 35 [mm], and from a comparison of the opening area and the shape of a sphere (a sphere with a diameter of about 11 [mm]), The upper limit of balls ejected simultaneously from the opening is limited to about seven.

On the other hand, when it is not necessary to transfer the put-out balls to the senryo box, there is no need to worry about the balls overflowing from the senryo box, so the desired upper limit of the discharge speed of the balls greatly changes in the increasing direction. In such an installation mode, the put out balls flow into the automatic counting machine installed in each pachinko machine 10010, so an example of the upper limit of the discharge speed is The operating speed of the ball-running device is exemplified.

By forming the through-hole 6412 large in this way, there is an advantage that the ball ejection speed can be changed without changing the design in the front view, but there is a possibility that the strength of the main body portion 6411 is lowered. There is In particular, the bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 is a portion where a load (mainly a downward load) when the player operates the operation device 10300 may be transmitted, so the size and arrangement of the through holes 6412 However, there is a risk that the load during operation will be limited to a tolerable level.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 are assembled to the covering base member 6410 in a manner that compensates for the reduction in strength due to the through holes 6412 . The lower tray forming member 6420 and the ball ejecting device 6430 are fastened and fixed to each other with the lines shown in phantom lines in FIGS. , the edge portion of the through hole 6412 is pressed against the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 . As a result, the peripheral portion of the through-hole 6412 (for example, the laterally elongated frame portion located behind the through-hole 6412) can be reinforced with the strength of the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430.

The design mode in which the edge portion of the through hole 6412 is pressed against the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 is not limited at all. For example, it may be designed such that the edge portion of the through-hole 6412 and the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 are in contact with each other before the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 are fastened (the state is arranged at the fastening preparation position). (See FIG. 233), there is a gap between them before they are fastened, but the design mode may be such that the gap can be filled by tightening the fastening screw and pressure can be applied.

Also, the portion to be pressed does not have to be the entire periphery of the edge portion of the through hole 6412, and may be a part of the edge portion. In this case, especially in the vicinity of the operation device 10300 (the right side portion in the vicinity of the protruding shape portion 6413) and the back side portion (the long plate portion arranged behind the through hole 6412) where there is a risk of receiving a shock every time it is opened and closed. , a large load is likely to occur, so it is preferable to adopt a pressing design mode.

By sandwiching the edge portion of the through-hole 6412 between the lower tray forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 in this way, the strength of the edge portion of the through-hole 6412 can be sufficiently secured, so that the bottom opening 6432 is formed. The bottom opening 6432 can be arranged at any position without worrying about the strength reduction due to the opening. That is, the degree of freedom in arranging the bottom opening 6432 can be improved.

The lower tray forming member 6420 includes a main body box portion 6421 in which the lower tray 50 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface, a discharge port 6422 opened in the bottom surface of the main body box portion 6421 in the vertical direction, and a main body box portion. An L-shaped plate portion 6423 protruding from the back side of the bottom surface of the 6421 in an L-shape when viewed from the bottom, and a ball ejection device 6430 protruding downward in a cylindrical shape inside (front side) the range surrounded by the L-shaped plate portion 6423. A plurality of fastening portions 6424 to which fastening screws for fastening are screwed, a pair of guide ribs 6425 extending in a rib shape along the left-right direction with the edge of the discharge port 6422 as a base end, and a main body box portion 6421 It mainly includes a plate-like support portion 6426 extending rightward from the right end of the plate-like support portion 6426 and a flexible resin member 6427 placed on the upper surface of the plate-like support portion 6426 .

The outlet 6422 is formed at the front end and right end of the lower plate 50 . The upper surface of the bottom of the lower tray 50 is configured as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the outlet 6422. Balls that have flowed into the lower tray 50 from the pachinko machine 10010 flow down toward the outlet 6422. Since the exit 6422 is arranged on the front side near the player, the balls can be taken out smoothly from the lower tray 50 even when the number of balls stored in the lower tray 50 is small.

The discharge port 6422 is formed in the vicinity of the plate-like support portion 6426 where the load from the operation device 10300 is likely to occur. measures are being taken, and the details will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 225, the L-shaped plate portion 6423 has different projecting lengths depending on the left and right positions. That is, the upper surface of the lower base of the main body 6411 is formed in a substantially flat shape, while the lower surface of the lower base of the lower tray 50 is inclined downward toward the right. 6412, the projecting length of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 needs to be shortened toward the right, and this corresponds to this. With this correspondence, in the assembled state (see FIG. 207), the protruding end (lower end) of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 is brought into contact with the edge of the through hole 6412 (either in line contact or surface contact). ).

The fastening portions 6424 are formed at two locations on the front side end portion where the load from the player is likely to occur, and one location on the rear side end portion where the load is likely to occur when the front frame 10014 is opened and closed. By preferentially providing a fastening point at a location where a load is likely to occur, it is possible to limit the fastening location and prevent misalignment of the lower plate forming member 6420 due to misalignment when a load is generated. .

In addition, since the fastening portion 6424 is arranged near the L-shaped plate portion 6423, it is fastened inside the through hole 6412 (that is, the through hole for positioning the fastening screw to be passed through the main body portion 6411 is not provided). It is possible to easily maintain the contact between the L-shaped plate portion 6423 and the edge of the through hole 6412 of the covering base member 6410 (the relative position can be easily maintained). can be done). Therefore, it is possible to improve the positional stability of the lower tray forming member 6420 while eliminating the need to form through holes other than the through holes 6412 .

The guide rib 6425 serves both to guide the movement of the ball extracting lever 52 and to reinforce the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 . In particular, in this embodiment, the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 is formed in the shape of a plate elongated in the left and right direction, and it is conceivable that reinforcement along the left and right direction is required. Since it slides along the left-right direction coinciding with , the movement guidance of the ball extracting lever 52 and the reinforcement of the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 are preferably realized.

Since the guide ribs 6425 are formed in pairs as described above, the applied load can be dispersed. Also, even if one of them is damaged, as long as the other remains, there is no problem in using it, so the useful life of the lower tray unit 6400 can be extended.

The material of the resin member 6427 can be arbitrarily designed. For example, it may be made of urethane, silicone, or any other flexible member having an appropriate repulsive force (shape restoring force).

The ball discharging device 6430 includes a plate-like main body plate portion 6431 in which the above-described ball extracting lever 52 is arranged, a circular bottom opening 6432 vertically penetrating the main body plate portion 6431, and a lower plate forming member. A plurality of fastening holes 6433 which are arranged at a position vertically overlapping the fastening portion 6424 of the fastening portion 6420 and are tightened by screwing fastening screws into the fastening portion 6424, and a rectangular frame shape surrounding the fastening holes 6433. and a fitting frame portion 6434 whose outer shape is slightly smaller than the inner shape of the through hole 6412 of the covering base member 6410 .

The ball extraction lever 52 has a grip portion 52a projecting forward so that the player can operate it in a laterally sliding manner, and a closing plate portion 52b that closes the discharge port 6422 in the assembled state (see FIG. 207). and a pair of rib-shaped portions protruding upward from the upper surface of the closing plate portion 52b and extending along the left-right direction, the guided ribs 52c being guided by the guide ribs 6425; are integrally molded from a hard resin material.

The bottom port 6432 is disposed vertically opposite to the discharge port 6422 of the lower tray forming member 6420, and the closing plate portion 52b of the ball extraction lever 52 is arranged therebetween. As described above, when not operated, the ball extraction lever 52 is arranged between the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432. Therefore, the degree of decrease in strength due to the formation of the opening is determined by the closure plate. It can be reduced by the rigidity of the portion 52b.

This can prevent the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 from becoming fragile. It is possible to prevent the durability of the lower tray unit 6400 from deteriorating while adopting the configuration.

The details of the fastening mode between the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 will be described. The main body plate portion 6431 has a flange portion 6431a that protrudes outward from the fitting frame portion 6434 in three directions (flat side and both left and right sides) except for the front side. In the assembled state (see FIG. 207), the fitting frame portion 6434 is fitted in the through hole 6412 of the covering base member 6410 with a gap therebetween. The portion 6431 a abuts on the lower surface portion of the edge portion of the through hole 6412 .

On the other hand, the inner surface of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is formed in a shape that can be contacted from the outside of the fitting frame portion 6434 in the front, rear, left, and right directions, and the lower end portion of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 , abuts on the edge portion of the through hole 6412 in the vertical direction, as described above.

In this way, the ball ejection device 6430 can be positioned on the covering base member 6410, and the lower plate forming member 6420 can be positioned on the ball ejection device 6430. Each component can be fixed by passing a fastening screw through the hole 6433 and tightening it. Therefore, assembly work can be facilitated.

The intermediate holding member 6440 has a plurality of through holes 6441 protruding on the front side through which fastening screws to be fastened and fixed to the covering base member 6410 are inserted, and a metal body portion 10014a (see FIG. 211). A plurality of fastening portions 6442 protruding on the rear side, which are portions where screws inserted through the formed through-holes are fastened and fixed, and a portion that interferes with the left upper end portion of the covering base member 6410 in the front-rear direction. and an interference portion 6443 formed in a dovetail plate shape.

226 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower tray unit 6400, and FIG. 227 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower tray unit 6400. FIG. Figures 226 and 227 show the exploded state of the V-shaped design member 6450 from Figures 224 and 225 .

The V-shaped design member 6450 has a groove shape that is open on the back side and has a groove shape in which the opening width becomes narrower toward the center in the left-right direction, and a V-shaped main body portion 6451 that is disposed downward toward the center in the left-right direction, A plurality of insertion holes 6452 formed as through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted in the lower edge of the body portion 6451, positioning portions 6453 formed in the vicinity of the central portion of the lower edge of the body portion 6451, and right and left sides of the body portion 6451. A plurality of overhanging fastening portions 6454 projecting toward the back side near the end portion and formed so that fastening screws can be screwed in, and a plate shape extending in the width direction of the groove of the main body portion 6451 on the right side of the main body portion 6451. A plurality of right reinforcing ribs 6455 aligned in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 6451 and a plate-shaped member extending in the width direction of the groove of the main body portion 6451 on the left side of the main body portion 6451 are aligned in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 6451 . and a plurality of left reinforcing ribs 6456 that

The V-shaped design member 6450 is formed to have higher rigidity than the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 described above. As a result, it is possible to limit the locations where through-holes are likely to be formed by those who commit fraudulent acts to allow illegal members to enter the inside of the pachinko machine 10010 . That is, compared with the case of making a through-hole in the V-shaped design member 6450, it is less difficult to make a through-hole in the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322. The right front cover 10322 can be directed to be emptied.

Therefore, it is possible to narrow down the places to be periodically checked in order to discover fraud. That is, according to this embodiment, since the through holes are likely to be formed in the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, it is possible to eliminate the need to check the V-shaped design member 6450. FIG. As a result, compared to the case where the V-shaped design member 6450 and the covers 10321 and 10322 need to be equally checked, the burden of checking can be reduced.

The body portion 6451 is formed to be thin, and is flexurally deformable in the direction of narrowing the groove width (flexurally deformable in a state of being crushed vertically). Since the V-shaped design member 6450 is fitted to the lower edges of the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 of the operation device 10300, vertical displacement that may occur when operating the operation device 10300 is caused via the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322. transmitted. When this vertical displacement occurs, the V-shaped design member 6450 is flexurally deformed in the direction of narrowing the groove width of the groove of the main body 6451 , so that at least part of the vertical displacement of the operation device 10300 is caused by the bending of the V-shaped design member 6450 . can be absorbed.

That is, at least part of the load transmitted from the operation device 10300 can be manipulated by deformation of the V-shaped design member 6450 and then transmitted downstream thereof (for example, the covering base member 6410). Therefore, since the load transmitted to the body portion 6411 of the covering base member 6410 arranged below the V-shaped design member 6450 can be suppressed, the amount of displacement of the member below the V-shaped design member 6450 can be reduced by the operation. Also, the degree of vibration can be suppressed.

The positioning portion 6453 includes a fastening portion 6453L formed so that a fastening screw can be screwed in on the left side with respect to the left-right center, and a plate-like projecting portion protruding toward the back side on the opposite side of the fastening portion 6453L. 6453R.

The insertion hole 6452 is a portion that is fixed to the covering base member 6410 by screwing a fastening screw into the recess formed on the front side of the covering base member 6410 while the fastening portion of the covering base member 6410 is inserted from the front side. be. That is, the V-shaped design member 6450 is assembled so as to approach from the back side of the covering base member 6410 (an example of the movement locus of the V-shaped design member 6450 is shown in phantom lines in FIGS. 226 and 227).

At least some of the plurality of insertion holes 6452 (lower right insertion hole 6452 in this embodiment) are invisible in the assembly state when viewed from the direction in which the fastening screw is inserted into the lower plate forming member 6420 (Fig. 230(b)). That is, when the lower plate forming member 6420 is assembled to the covering base member 6410, the fastening screws inserted through at least some of the insertion holes 6452 cannot be loosened, and the covering base member 6410 is separated from the V-shaped design member. Since it is necessary to disassemble the lower plate forming member 6420 as a preliminary step to disassembling 6450, the number of man-hours required to disassemble the V-shaped design member 6450 can be increased.

In addition, the lower plate forming member 6420 is bored in the front longitudinal portion 6426c, which will be described later, in the front-rear direction. It has an insertion portion 6426c1 that is fixed to the . In addition, the operation device 10300 is arranged in such a manner as to shield the insertion portion 6426c1 in rear view (see FIG. 232).

Therefore, as a premise for disassembling the lower tray forming member 6420, it is necessary to remove the operation device 10300 and move the insertion portion 6426c1 from the blocking position. That is, in order to disassemble the V-shaped design member 6450, the man-hours required for removing the operation device 10300 and disassembling the lower tray forming member 6420 can be increased. As a result, it is possible to suppress illegal actions such as illegally removing the V-shaped design member 6450 and entering the interior through the created gap.

The plate-like projecting portion 6453R abuts on the upper surface of the front longitudinal portion 6426c of the plate-like support portion 6426 in the assembled state (see FIG. 230(b)). That is, the downward displacement of the plate-shaped projecting portion 6453R is suppressed by the plate-shaped support portion 6426, and conversely, the upward displacement of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is suppressed by the plate-shaped projecting portion 6453R.

As a result, for example, even when the operation device 10300 (see FIG. 208) is given a load in the lifting direction by the player, the fitting concave portion De1 (see FIG. 219) of the operation device 10300 and the fitting portion 6426d can be displaced. , the front side portion of the plate-like support portion 6426 is displaced in the upward direction as the operation device 10300 is displaced in the upward direction.

Since this displacement is suppressed by the plate-like projecting portion 6453R, upward displacement of the operation device 10300 can be suppressed.

The left and right protruding fastening portions 6454 are portions into which fastening screws are inserted through resin intermediate members (not shown) fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a of the front frame 10014. The fastening positions are , the rear side of the fastening position of the fastening portion 6453L (the side close to the metal body portion 10014a).

The right reinforcing rib 6455 and the left reinforcing rib 6456 function as ribs that reinforce the main body portion 6451 in the groove width direction, and have a thin shape that is also flexibly deformable. It also has a function as a buffering means (displacement transmission suppressing means) that suppresses the As shown in FIG. 227, the left reinforcing ribs 6456 are arranged closer together than the right reinforcing ribs 6455 . They will be described in order below.

228(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the right reinforcing rib 6455, and FIG. 228(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the left reinforcing rib 6456. FIG. Note that FIGS. 228(a) and 228(b) show cross sections taken along a plane dividing the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 in the thickness direction. Further, the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 are designed to have the same thickness, but are designed to change the dimensions in the groove width direction and the groove depth direction according to the groove width of the main body 6451. Since the basic configuration is common, a typical example will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 228(a), the right reinforcing rib 6455 is a plate-like portion extending from the bottom of the groove of the body portion 6451 to the back side, and is a joint portion that is joined to the upper plate portion of the body portion 6451. 6455a, an upper facing portion 6455b that is arranged parallel to and faces the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 and forms a gap, and a mode in which the separation width increases toward the rear side with respect to the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451. and a lower facing portion 6455c arranged to face each other in an inclined manner.

The upper facing portion 6455b is a portion where the lower edge portion of the right front cover 10322 is fitted between the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 and the load from the right front cover 10322 is transmitted. Since the main body portion 6451 and the upper facing portion 6455b are arranged substantially parallel, contact with the right front cover 10322 at one point can be avoided, and the load can be dispersed in the front and rear positions. As a result, the load capacity of the right reinforcing rib 6455 can be increased.

Note that in this embodiment, the gap between the upper facing portion 6455b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 is formed so as to be equal to the thickness of the lower edge portion of the right front cover 10322 . As a result, the lower edge of the right front cover 10322 after fitting can be prevented from separating from the upper facing portion 6455b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451, and collision and rubbing can be prevented. Therefore, generation of powder (dust) can be suppressed.

The distance between the lower facing portion 6455c and the lower plate of the main body portion 6451 increases toward the side closer to the operation device 10300 (the rear side, the side where the displacement of the right front cover 10322 tends to increase), so that the right side is reinforced. The permissible amount of downward displacement of the rib 6455 itself can be increased, and collision (abutment) with the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 can be avoided when displacement occurs.

Therefore, since the right reinforcing rib 6455 serves as a cushioning member, it is possible to reduce the rate at which the displacement and load transmitted through the right front cover 10322 are transmitted to the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 .

In the present embodiment, the operation handle 51 is arranged downstream (lower right) of the right reinforcing rib 6455 starting from the right front cover 10322. The right reinforcing rib 6455 serves as a buffer member, so that the operating handle 51 can be operated. It is possible to reduce the rate at which the load, displacement, and vibration accompanying the operation and driving of the device 10300 are transmitted to the operation handle 51 . As a result, it is possible to secure a game property in which the player can freely operate the operation handle 51 without any sense of incongruity.

As shown in FIG. 228(b), the left reinforcing rib 6456 is a plate-like portion extending from the bottom of the groove of the main body 6451 toward the rear side, and is a connecting portion that is connected to the upper plate portion of the main body 6451. 6456a, an upper facing portion 6456b arranged parallel to and facing the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 to form a gap, and an overhanging portion 6456c projecting toward the rear side from the rear side edge of the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451. , and a lower facing portion 6456d arranged parallel to and facing the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 to form a gap.

The upper facing portion 6456b is a portion where the lower edge portion of the left front cover 10321 is fitted between the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 and the load from the left front cover 10321 is transmitted. Since the main body portion 6451 and the upper facing portion 6456b are arranged substantially in parallel, contact with the left front cover 10321 at one point can be avoided, and the load can be dispersed in the front and rear positions. Thereby, the load bearing capacity of the left reinforcing rib 6456 can be increased.

Note that in this embodiment, the gap between the upper facing portion 6456b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 is formed so as to be equal to the thickness of the lower edge portion of the left front cover 10321 . As a result, the lower edge of the left front cover 10321 after fitting can be prevented from separating from the upper facing portion 6456b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451, and collision and rubbing can be prevented. Therefore, generation of powder (dust) can be suppressed.

The projecting portion 6456c has an upper edge portion that is inclined in a direction (downward) away from the upper surface portion of the main body portion 6451 toward the rear side. As a result, the projecting portion 6456c is formed not as a portion that always contacts the lower edge of the left front cover 10321, but as a portion that contacts only when the downward displacement amount of the left front cover 10321 is increased to some extent. That is, the projecting portion 6456c can function as a portion (fail-safe) for suppressing the displacement when the displacement amount of the left front cover 10321 becomes abnormally large.

Note that the upper surface of the overhanging portion 6456c may be formed at the same level as the upper surface of the upper facing portion 6456b. In this case, the length of the front-rear position capable of distributing the load transmitted through the left front cover 10321 can be increased, so the load bearing capacity of the left reinforcing rib 6456 can be further increased.

The lower facing portion 6456d is a portion that contacts the upper surface of the rear covering portion 10014b (see FIG. 212) of the front frame 10014 when the rear covering portion 10014b (see FIG. 212) is inserted between the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451. is. Since the lower facing portions 6456d of the plurality of left reinforcing ribs 6456 abut against the rear covering portion 10014b, the transmitted load can be dispersed, and the amount of downward displacement of the rear covering portion 10014b can be reduced. .

As a result, the arrangement of the back covering portion 10014b can be easily maintained, so that the space above the lower tray 50 (a space in which balls are stored and a space in which the player may put his/her hand) is It can be prevented from being narrowed.

That is, the back covering portion 10014b is connected to the left front cover 10321 via the V-shaped design member 6450, but the load transmitted from the operation device 10300 side via the left front cover 10321 displaces the back covering portion 10014b. can be suppressed. As a result, for example, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the surface constituting the lower plate 50 is displaced and collides with the game ball to generate abnormal noise.

As described above, the left reinforcing ribs 6456 are densely arranged compared to the spacing of the right reinforcing ribs 6455 . Therefore, it is configured to be able to cope with a larger load. In the present embodiment, the weight of the player's hand touching the balls stored in the upper tray 17 arranged on the left side is likely to be applied, and the left side reinforcing ribs 6456 are densely arranged where the load tends to be uneven on the left and right sides. It is possible to deal with uneven loads by arranging the

As described above, in the present embodiment, the shapes of the right reinforcing rib 6455 and the left reinforcing rib 6456 are different, so that different types of loads can be handled. That is, in the right reinforcing rib 6455, a sufficient gap is formed between the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 and the lower facing portion 6455c to cut off the transmission of the load, thereby preventing instantaneous load or impact from the operation device 10300. can be prevented from being transmitted to the operation handle 51, while the left reinforcing rib 6456 disperses and supports the load, so even if the weight is placed on the upper plate 17 for a long time, the rear It is possible to prevent the covering portion 10014b from being displaced. As described above, in this embodiment, the shape of the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 is designed so as to cope with the load mode that tends to cause problems.

229(a) is a top view of the lower tray unit 6400, FIG. 229(b) is a front view of the lower tray unit 6400, and FIG. 230(a) is a bottom view of the lower tray unit 6400. 230(b) is a rear view of the lower tray unit 6400, FIG. 231(a) is a right side view of the lower tray unit 6400 as viewed in the direction of arrow L, and FIG. 231(b) is a lower tray unit. 6400 is a left side view when viewed in the direction of arrow R. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 229(a) and 230(b), the plate-like support portion 6426 of the lower tray forming member 6420 is arranged so as to straddle the recessed shape portion 6414 of the covering base member 6410 to the left and right. , the plate-like support portion 6426 is placed in surface contact with the upper bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 , while being spaced apart from the recessed shape portion 6414 . Details of the projecting shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 will be described below.

The protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are portions that bulge (extend) downward from the lower surface, similar to deformation when a portion of the main body portion 6411 of the covering base member 6410 is pressed from above. It is a part that constitutes the front and back, and the shape of one of the front and back is similar to the shape of the other. In other words, the outer shape of the protruding shape portion 6413 when viewed from the bottom and the inner shape of the recessed shape portion 6414 when viewed from the top are formed as a shape whose scale is changed by an amount that can ensure the plate thickness of the main body portion 6411 . be. Therefore, it is possible to easily imagine the shape of the other from the shape of one.

As shown in FIG. 230(a), the projecting shape portion 6413 gradually increases in lateral width toward the front side. As shown in FIG. 229(a), the plate-like support portion 6426 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is arranged closer to the front side than the center of the concave shape portion 6414 in the front-rear direction. The plate-like support portion 6426 can be supported at the portion where the left-right width of the recessed shape portion 6413 and the concave shape portion 6414 is large. As a result, when the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is displaced in a manner of sinking downward, the main body portion 6411 can be partially and sufficiently bent, which will be described later in detail.

Here, in a playable state, the operation device 10300 is placed on the plate-like support portion 6426, and the plate-like support portion 6426 can be vertically displaced as the operation device 10300 is operated by the player. In relation to this displacement, the plate-like support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411 are made of a resin material, and a load is generated between the plate-like support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411 of the covering base member 6410. Shavings may be generated due to collision or rubbing.

If shavings are generated around the operation device 10300, for example, the shavings may get into the gap and the clearance cannot be secured, resulting in malfunction, or the shavings may enter the detection area of the detection sensor and induce an erroneous detection. Therefore, it is desirable to suppress the generation of shavings.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, by reducing the contact area between the plate-like support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411, it is possible to suppress the generation of shavings and reduce the amount of the generated shavings.

As described above, in this embodiment, the plate-like support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411 are not directly fastened and fixed. This is based on the purpose of preventing direct transmission of the displacement of the plate-like support portion 6426 to the body portion 6411 .

That is, when a downward load is applied to the operation device 10300 and the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is displaced downward, the displacement is received by the projecting shape portion 6413 and the recess shape portion 6414, thereby Displacement of other parts such as can be made unnecessary.

On the other hand, when a load in the lifting direction is applied to the operation device 10300 and the plate-like support portion 6426 is displaced upward, the displacement is received by the plate-like projecting portion 6453R (see FIG. 232), causing the V-shaped design member. Since it is converted into the deformation of 6450, displacement of other parts such as the main body part 6411 can be made unnecessary.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the plate-like support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411 are not directly fastened and fixed, and the load applied to the operation device 10300 is only indirectly transmitted to the main body portion 6411. With such a configuration, deformation or breakage of the main body portion 6411 can be prevented.

As shown in FIGS. 231(a) and 231(b), the lower surface of the protruding shape portion 6413 is formed as a flat surface along the front-rear direction, while the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 of the covering base member 6410 is the front side. It is formed as an inclined plane that slopes upward toward the edge. This configuration works well, for example, when the front frame 10014 is stored alone.

When the front frame 10014 is stored alone, it is generally considered that the front frame 10014 is placed on a floor made of concrete or flooring in such a manner that the lower surface of the front frame 10014 contacts the floor. At this time, it is considered preferable to have the entire lower surface in contact with the floor from the viewpoint of stability and avoiding concentration of the load, but in this case, dirt on the floor may adhere to the entire lower surface. The lower surface of the main body part 6411 is difficult to see from the player, but since it is a product, it is preferable to avoid staining it.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the lower surface of the protruding shape portion 6413 is formed as a flat surface along the front-rear direction, and the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes upward toward the front side. When the shaped portion 6413 comes into contact with the floor surface, a gap is created between the floor surface and the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 . can do. Therefore, when the amusement center installs the front frame 10014 in a playable state, it is sufficient to wipe off only the dirt on the projecting shaped portion 6413, and it is not necessary to wipe the entire lower surface of the main body portion 6411. .

In addition, the projecting shape portion 6413 also functions as a finger hooking portion for hooking a finger when carrying the front frame 10014 . Conventionally, since the lower plate portion is arranged in the center of the front frame in the left and right direction, it is easy to lift the front frame by hooking the lower plate portion and assemble it to the rear frame (outer frame 11, inner frame 12). However, in the front frame 10014 of the present embodiment, since the lower plate 50 is arranged on the left side in the horizontal direction (opening/closing axis side), it is difficult to lift the front frame 10014 by hooking the lower plate 50 and assembling it. configuration.

On the other hand, if the front frame 10014 is lifted by hooking the operation handle 51, the weight of the front frame 10014 will be applied to the root side of the operation handle 41, and the operation handle 51 may be damaged. is not preferred.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a protruding shape portion 6413 that also functions as a finger hook is arranged at the left-right central position so that it is recommended to lift the front frame 10014 by hooking the bottom surface of the lower tray unit 6400 . The worker can easily assemble the front frame 10014 to the rear frame by lifting the front frame 10014 by hooking the projecting shape portion 6413 and pivoting it on the rear frame.

By setting the work procedure to include the work of wiping off the dirt before and after the point of putting the finger, the worker can be made aware of the places where the dirt needs to be wiped off in relation to the carrying operation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent forgetting to wipe off dirt.

Here, the gap between the floor surface and the main body portion 6411 is configured as a gap that is neither too much nor too little according to the amount of deformation that is expected in the protruding shape portion 6413 . More specifically, due to the shape of the lower surface of the main body part 6411, the gap between it and the floor surface becomes larger toward the front side, and the projecting shape part 6413 is formed wider toward the front side. , which corresponds to an increase in the amount of deformation (amount of deflection) due to the load.

That is, when the front frame 10014 is placed on the floor, even if the protruding shape portion 6413 is bent and deformed by the weight of the front frame 10014, the gap between the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 and the floor should be easily secured. can be done. On the other hand, when the protruding shape portion 6413 is flexurally deformed to the limit and the gap between the bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 and the floor surface disappears, the entire bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 can be easily brought into contact with the floor surface. Therefore, the weight of the front frame 10014 can be supported by the entire lower surface of the main body portion 6411 .

Therefore, even if the front frame 10014 placed on the floor is heavier than expected, or if an excessive load is applied to the front frame 10014 placed on the floor, the body portion 6411 is partially It is possible to prevent the load from concentrating on the

Moreover, the amount of deformation that can be deformed is increased toward the front side of the projecting shape portion 6413 . It works well even during game execution. For example, when exchanging the senryo box, the amusement store clerk slides the senryo box back and forth on the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 and the lower side of the projecting shape portion 6413. At this time, the senryo box and the lower surface of the front frame 10014 move. There may be collisions. If the shock and load due to this collision are accumulated in the structural members as fatigue, the structural members will be destroyed (for example, cracked) when the allowable amount is exceeded, making it difficult to continue playing the game. There is

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the deformable amount of the protruding shape portion 6413 increases toward the front side where it is likely to collide with the senryo box. Therefore, the impact and load caused by the collision with the senryo box can be easily relieved by deformation (flexural deformation), and breakage of the protruding shape portion 6413 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to easily maintain a comfortable gaming environment for the player.

In addition, on the left and right sides of the protruding shape portion 6413, the lower bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 is inclined so as to rise toward the front side (see FIG. 231(a)). As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility of collision between the 1,000-car box and the main body 6411 on the left and right sides of the protruding shape part 6413 when the 1,000-car box is replaced. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the lower bottom surface of the main body part 6411 will be damaged, so that it is possible to easily maintain a comfortable gaming environment for the player.

232 is a rear view of the lower tray unit 6400. FIG. In FIG. 232, the assembled state of the left front cover 10321 and the right cover 10322 is illustrated, and the outer shape of the operation device 10300 other than that is schematically illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 232, the lower edges of the left front cover 10321 and the right cover 10322 are attached to the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 (upper facing parts 6455b and 6456b (FIGS. 228(a) and 228()) of the V-shaped design member 6450. b) supported by )).

Since the main body portion 6451 of the V-shaped design member 6450 is formed in a V-shape when viewed from the rear, and the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 are plate-shaped extending in the groove width direction of the main body portion 6451, the reaction force from the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 is oriented in a direction (upward oblique direction) having a directional component that returns the left front cover 10321 and the right cover 10322 to the left-right center. For example, the restoring force from bending deformation of the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 is directed obliquely upward.

As a result, not only vertical displacement of the operation device 10300 but also horizontal displacement can be accommodated. For example, as in the present embodiment, even if the movement direction of the operation portion of the operation device 10300 (for example, the swing operation member 10310) does not have a horizontal component, the downward load given by the player It may have a directional component, and when such a load is applied, the entire operation device 10300 may be displaced downward and slightly displaced (vibrated) in the left-right direction.

On the other hand, the left front cover 10321 and the right cover 10322 can respond to the horizontal displacement of the operation device 10300 by flexing and deforming based on their curved shapes (absorbing the horizontal displacement or using a restoring force). Further, the reaction force from the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 is directed upward and toward the left-right center, so that the operation device 10300 can be quickly returned to the position before displacement. Therefore, it is possible to easily maintain the design of the front frame 10014 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 207).

233(a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit 6400 along line CCXXXIIIa-CCXXXIIIa in FIG. 229(a), and FIG. 233(b) is a lower tray unit 6400 along line CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb in FIG. 229(a). 233(c) is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit 6400 along line CCXXXIIIc-CCXXXIIIc of FIG. 229(a). 233(a) to 233(c), the vicinity of the edge of the through hole 6412 in the cross section is shown enlarged.

As shown in FIGS. 233(a) to 233(c), in the assembled state of the lower tray unit 6400, the edge portion of the through hole 6412 is aligned with the lower tray forming member 6420 (on the rear side, the protrusion of the L-shaped plate portion 6423). It is pressed against the set end (lower end)) and the ball discharging device 6430 (the flange 6431a thereof). As a result, the peripheral portion of the through hole 6412 can be reinforced with the strength of the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 .

The inner surface of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 (see FIG. 225) of the lower plate forming member 6420 is formed in a shape that can contact from the outside of the fitting frame portion 6434 (see FIG. 224) in the front, rear, left, and right directions. As described above, the lower end of the plate portion 6423 abuts on the edge portion of the through hole 6412 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 233(c)). As a result, the edge portion of the through-hole 6412 can be reinforced, so that the degree of freedom in designing the through-hole 6412 can be improved.

As described above, the ball extraction lever 52 is arranged between the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 when not operated. It can be reduced by the rigidity of the portion 52b (see FIG. 233(b)).

This can prevent the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 from becoming fragile. It is possible to prevent the durability of the lower tray unit 6400 from deteriorating while adopting the configuration.

As shown in FIGS. 233(a) to 233(c), the shape of the concave portion 6414 is formed in such a manner that the width of the concave portion 6414 increases toward the front side and the depth of the concave portion increases. That is, the recessed shape portion 6414 is formed so as to bend more easily toward the front side.

As a result, it is possible to impart sufficient bending performance to the recessed shape portion 6414 in the vicinity of the front side where the load generated when the player operates the operation device 10300 tends to increase, so that the operation device 10300 can be operated with sufficient flexibility. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the covering base member 6410 that supports the operation device 10300 is damaged (for example, cracked) due to the load. This will be explained in detail.

The operation device 10300 is a device that can be operated in multiple operation modes, as described above. The operation timing and operation mode are notified by a display device or the like, and the player is made to operate the operation device 10300 in accordance with the notification, thereby drawing the player into the game. Here, the frequency of notification for each operation mode is not constant.

For example, as an example of control, the swing operation member 10310 is controlled to stop at the initial position from the start of the game until a specific ready-to-win effect is executed (see FIG. 215(a)). This state occupies most of the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310 during business hours.

In this state, the player performs a pushing operation (push operation) of the lens member 10317 in order to respond to a notification prompting an operation in the display effect (a notification such as "press the button!") or to switch stages. be. Therefore, most of the load caused by the operation is the load caused when the lens member 10317 is pushed, and the load along the direction Y17a (see FIG. 215(a)). Since the occurrence frequency of notification is high, the occurrence frequency of this load is high.

On the other hand, when a specific ready-to-win effect is executed, the operation device 10300 is drive-controlled to vertically displace the swing operation member 10310, for example, the swing operation member 10310 is arranged at the downward position. 215(b)), the notification prompting the operation is executed.

In this case, the operation direction is a direction Y17b (see FIG. 215(b)) that is further inclined by an angle θ17y in the front-rear direction compared to the state in which the swing operation member 10310 is arranged in the upward position. A load is generated along the Since the occurrence of notification is limited to the execution of a specific ready-to-win effect, the frequency of occurrence is low.

That is, the frequency of occurrence of the load along the direction Y17a is controlled to be higher than the frequency of occurrence of the load along the direction Y17b. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the shape of the recessed shape portion 6414 is such that the width of the recessed portion 6414 increases toward the front side, and the depth of the recess increases toward the front side. It is formed so that the correspondence performance of is high.

That is, compared to the case where a common shape is used in the front-rear direction, it is possible to configure it so that it can cope with the difference in the frequency of occurrence of loads at appropriate locations, and the applied load causes excessive deformation or insufficient deformation. It can be made easy to avoid becoming easily damaged.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the side closer to the player and the side on which the load is more frequently generated during operation are both the front side. , is formed deep, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the initial position of the swing operation member 10310 is set to the downward position, the frequency of load generation during operation is reversed. , By forming a deep bottom, compared to the case where the shape is common in the front and back direction, it can be configured so that it can respond to the difference in the frequency of occurrence of loads at the appropriate place, and excessive deformation due to the applied load It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of deformation and the tendency to be easily damaged due to insufficient deformation.

As shown in FIG. 233(b), which corresponds to the central cross section of the resin member 6427, the hanging plate-like portion 6426b contacts the main body portion 6411 vertically outside the left and right width end portions of the recessed shape portion 6414. touch.

As a result, compared to the case where the hanging plate-like portion 6426b is in contact with the upper edge of the recessed shape portion 6414, the ratio of the load from the operation device 10300 to be transmitted to the recessed shape portion 6414 can be reduced. . Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the recessed shape portion 6414 from being damaged by the load when the operation device 10300 is operated.

In addition, as a response to the load, not only the deflection of the recessed shape part 6414 but also the deflection of the plate-like part from the upper edge of the recessed shape part 6414 to the contact position of the hanging plate-like part 6426b and the main body part 6411 is used. Therefore, the load capacity can be increased.

FIG. 234 is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit 6400 along line CCXXXIV-CCXXXIV in FIG. 229(a). As shown in FIG. 234, the plate-shaped support portion 6426 of the lower tray forming member 6420 includes a flat plate-shaped portion 6426a on which the resin member 6427 is placed, and downward from the left and right and rear edges of the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a. A hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b that hangs down in a plate-like shape, and a front longitudinally elongated portion that is connected to the front side edge of the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a and formed taller than the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a and that is open at the bottom. 6426c and a fitting portion 6426d extending from the front longitudinal portion 6426c to the back side and fitted with the operation device 10300. As shown in FIG. In the description of FIG. 234, FIGS. 224 to 229 are referred to as appropriate.

The planar plate-like portion 6426a is formed wider than the lateral width of the recessed shape portion 6414 and configured to cover the front half portion of the recessed shape portion 6414 . A hanging plate-like portion 6426b is formed between the flat plate-like portion 6426a and the main body portion 6411 of the covering base member 6410 (between the upper and lower sides). That is, the planar plate-like portion 6426a does not contact the main body portion 6411, and the extending end portion of the hanging plate-like portion 6426b formed in a U-shape when viewed from the bottom (see FIG. 225) contacts the main body portion 6411. , the position of the planar plate portion 6426a with respect to the covering base member 6410 is determined.

In this way, since the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a and the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b are not block-shaped, but are formed in a box shape with an open bottom, the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a and the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b are easily flexurally deformed. It is configured. Therefore, not only the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 of the main body portion 6411 are flexurally deformed, but also the planar plate portion 6426a and the hanging plate portion 6426b can also be flexurally deformed, and the plate-like support portion 6426 and the covering base member 6410 (the main body portion 6411, the projecting shape portion 6413, and the recess shape portion 6414) arranged below the operation device 10300 are Damage can be further prevented.

The hanging plate-like portion 6426b extends up to the top surface of the bottom portion of the main body portion 6411, but does not extend into the recessed shape portion 6414. As shown in FIG. That is, there is a space between the hanging plate-like portion 6426b and the recessed shape portion 6414 (see the bottom of the rear end portion of the planar plate-like portion 6426a in FIG. 234). As a result, it is possible to maintain a state in which there is no framework inside the recessed shape portion 6414, so that the deformation of the projecting shape portion 6413 is not hindered.

In addition, the space between the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b and the recessed shape portion 6414 also serves as a drain. For example, even if the liquid enters from the gap between the operation device 10300 and the lower tray unit 6400, the liquid running along the rear side of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 can enter the front portion of the recessed shape portion 6414. As a result, the flow of liquid entering behind can be weakened. As a result, the front frame 10014 can easily prevent liquid from entering.

The front lengthwise portion 6426c is a portion that receives a load from the operation device 10300 by the fitting portion 6426d that extends to the rear side, and the front side lower portion is supported by the V-shaped design member 6450. As shown in FIG. As a result, the load applied by the player to the operation device 10300 can be distributed not only by the main body portion 6411 but also by the V-shaped design member 6450, so that the load applied to each component can be reduced. can.

A space is also generated between the front vertically elongated portion 6426c and the recessed shape portion 6414. As shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to maintain a state in which there is no framework inside the recessed shape portion 6414, so that the deformation of the projecting shape portion 6413 is not hindered.

The space between the front longitudinal portion 6426c and the recessed shape portion 6414 also serves as a drain. For example, even if the liquid enters from the gap between the operation device 10300 and the lower tray unit 6400, the liquid running along the rear side of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 can enter the front portion of the recessed shape portion 6414. As a result, the flow of liquid entering behind can be weakened. As a result, the front frame 10014 can easily prevent liquid from entering.

The fitting portion 6426d is elongated in the lateral direction so as to be fittable with the fitting recess De1 (see FIG. 212), and receives a load from the operation device 10300. As shown in FIG. The fitting portion 6426d includes a pair of plate-like reinforcing ribs 6426d1 coupled to the lower surface and the front longitudinally elongated portion 6426c formed on the extended base end side.

Since the reinforcing rib 6426d1 can suppress the vertical displacement (deformation) of the fitting portion 6426d, even if a load that displaces the operation device 10300 downward is applied, the rigidity of the fitting portion 6426d can withstand it. As a result, excessive displacement of the operation device 10300 can be prevented.

Here, the operation member 10300 is placed on the upper side of the resin member 6427. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the load associated with the player's operation and vibration of the operation member 10300 is transmitted to the plate-like support portion 6426 via the resin member, and is transmitted to the covering base member 6410 disposed downstream thereof. The support portion 6426 is supported by the bottom surface of the body portion 6411 (see FIG. 233).

In this embodiment, the bottom surface of the body portion 6411 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes upward toward the front side (see FIG. 234). The directional component can be directed to the front side (the load can be released to the front side).

That is, it is possible to avoid problems that may occur due to the load generated from the operation device 10300 being transmitted to the back side (outer frame 11 side and inner frame 12 side). For example, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) shakes, which affects the flow of the shot balls, or the board boxes 100 to 104 and the electronic board break due to the load being transmitted. can be prevented from occurring.

Next, the presentation effect device 6500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 235 to 264. FIG. 235 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 236 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 10014. FIG. 235 and 236, illustration of the lower tray unit 6400 and the operation device 10300 described above is omitted, and a state in which the upper effect device 6500 is disassembled forward from the metal main body 10014a is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 235, the presentation device 6500 is a device that covers the front side of the acoustic devices 6610 arranged in a pair on the left and right sides, and includes an illumination substrate 6570 in which light emitting means such as LEDs are arranged. , and each constituent member serving as a mediator for delivering light emitted from the LED to the player.

As shown in FIG. 236, a plate-shaped metal spring member (plate spring) 6584d is arranged on the back side of the presentation effect device 6500 to generate an urging force in the separating direction with respect to the metal body portion 10014a. This makes it possible to increase the fastening force of the fastening screw that fastens the presentation device 6500 to the metal main body 10014a (stable fastening and fixing).

237 is an exploded front perspective view of the presentation effect device 6500, and FIG. 238 is an exploded rear perspective view of the presentation effect device 6500. FIG. 237 and 238 illustrate a state in which the upper cover member 6510 of the presentation device 6500 is disassembled upward.

The upper effect device 6500 includes a plate-shaped upper lid member 6510, front units 6520 to 6550 occupying the front portion below the upper lid member 6510, and rear units 6560 to 6560 disposed behind the front units 6520 to 6550. 6580 and .

The upper cover member 6510 is a member that covers the upper surface of the presentation device 6500 and is fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a, and is a main body plate that is configured as a semi-elliptical plate-like portion obtained by dividing an oval that is long in the left and right direction into the front and rear portions. a portion 6511, a plurality of insertion holes 6512 vertically drilled near the edge of the front side of the main body plate portion 6511 and configured so that fastening screws can be inserted through them, and extending downward from the rear side portion of the main body plate portion 6511. A female screw hole is formed from the rear surface of the extension tip, and a plurality of fastening portions 6513 configured so that a fastening screw inserted through the metal main body portion 10014a can be fastened to the female screw hole is mainly provided.

The upper lid member 6510 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a at the back side portion where the fastening portion 6513 extends, and the other components of the presentation device 6500 are supported by fastening screws inserted through the insertion holes 6512. In other words, the mechanical rigidity of the upper lid member 6510 can be used to suppress the downward displacement of the front end portion of the effect device 6500 .

The fastening portion 6513 has a plate-shaped plate portion 6513a connected to the body plate portion 6511 on the front side thereof. As a result, it is possible to prevent the main body plate portion 6511 from being deformed or displaced in a state of falling forward.

The fastening portion 6513 is inserted into the acoustic device 6610, and the plate portion 6513 is arranged to face the front surface of the plate in which the insertion hole of the acoustic device 6610 is formed. With this configuration (see corresponding FIG. 125(a) described above, the fastening portion 419 corresponds to the fastening portion 6513, and the plate portion 6513a corresponds to the enlarged rib 419a), the upper lid member 6510 has the acoustic device 6610 and the metal body portion 10014a. can be prevented from coming off.

The upper lid member 6510 is recessed from the upper surface to the lower surface side, and the concave-convex shaped portion 6514 formed in a manner that protrudes downward from the lower surface is formed as a decoration on the entire surface. The concave-convex shape portion 6514 can increase the force of resisting the load in the direction perpendicular to the plane (the shape is not maintained) compared to the case where the top cover member 6510 of the same thickness is configured by a plate-shaped member with a smooth surface. can be made easier).

239 is an exploded front perspective view of the presentation effect device 6500, and FIG. 240 is an exploded rear perspective view of the presentation effect device 6500. FIG. 239 and 240, the illustration of the upper lid member 6510 of the effect device 6500 is omitted, and a state in which the front side units 6520-6550 are disassembled in front of the rear side units 6560-6580 is illustrated. In this embodiment, the front side units 6520 to 6550 are moved diagonally forward and downward with respect to the rear side units 6560 to 6580. can be decomposed, the details of which will be described later.

In the present embodiment, the front units 6520 to 6550 have the role of receiving, refracting, and transmitting light emitted from light emitting means such as LEDs, and the rear units 6560 to 6580 have the role of emitting light such as LEDs. It has a role as a means and a role of supporting an electrical board on which a light emitting means such as an LED is arranged. First, the rear units 6560-6580 will be described in detail.

FIG. 241(a) is a front view of the rear units 6560 to 6580, FIG. 241(b) is a front view of the electrical board 6570, and FIG. 242 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear units 6560 to 6580. 243 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear units 6560-6580.

As shown in FIGS. 241 to 243, each of the rear units 6560 to 6580 includes a partitioning member 6560 formed to partition the internal space into a plurality of sections when viewed from the front, and a plurality of LEDs for irradiating the partitioning member 6560 with light. A pair of electrical decoration substrates 6570 and a pair of electrical decoration substrates 6570 that are stacked on the back side of the partitioning member 6560 and are arranged with a slight gap from the electrical decoration substrate 6570 in the inner region of the outer shape and are surface-supported in the outer shape portion. and a rear support member 6580 of .

It should be noted that the surface support with a slight gap means that the posture of the electrical board 6570 can be maintained, and the partition member 6560 and the rear support member 6580 are supported so as to be displaceable back and forth by the gap. means that

The partitioning member 6560 is disposed close to and facing the front side of the electrical board 6570, and is configured to divide the light emitted from the respective illumination parts 6574 to 6576 of the electrical board 6570 from the vicinity of the electrical board 6570. be. By partitioning in this way, the light emitted from each of the illumination units 6574 to 6576 can be visually recognized for each partition, and even when the light emission modes of the light emitted from each of the illumination units 6574 to 6576 are significantly different. Also, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player.

The partitioning member 6560 includes a facing plate portion 6561 arranged to face the electrical board 6570 , a central light hole 6562 drilled in the left and right central portion of the facing plate portion 6561 , and a left and right lower portion of the facing plate portion 6561 drilled. Left and right light holes 6563 provided, a plurality of fastening portions 6564 to which fastening screws inserted through the back support member 6580 are fastened, and a pair of large-diameter cylindrical portions 6565 extending to the back surface of the opposing plate portion 6561. , a central cylindrical portion 6566 extending toward the front side of the opposing plate portion 6561 in a rectangular shape surrounding the central light hole 6562, and a long cylindrical shape extending toward the front side of the opposing plate portion 6561 surrounding the left and right light holes 6563. Extending left and right cylindrical portions 6567 and a plate-like connection that is formed from a T-shaped plate portion in a front view and connects the facing plate portion 6561, the central cylindrical portion 6566, and the left and right cylindrical portions 6567 on the front side of the facing plate portion 6561. A part 6568 is mainly provided.

The opposing plate portion 6561 includes flange portions 6561a to 6561c projecting from the upper edge portion toward the rear side in a left-right long shape. The first flange portion 6561a is formed above the central hole 6562 for light. The second flange portion 6561b is formed as a pair of left and right flange portions, and extends from the left and right end portions of the first flange portion 6561a to the vicinity of the fastening portion 6564 from positions separated by gaps. The third flange portion 6561c is formed as a pair of left and right, and extends from a position on the opposite side of the end portion of the second flange portion 6561b across the fastening portion 6564 to near the left and right end portions of the plate-like coupling portion 6568.

Each of the flange portions 6561a to 6561c has a role as a shielding plate that prevents light from entering and exiting between the partition member 6560 and the electrical board 6570, and the gaps thereof are provided at least in the electrical board 6570. It is configured at a location where the light emitted from the LED is unlikely to leak. In other words, this portion is a portion where even if light is incident from the outside, it is difficult for the light to mix with the light emitted from the LED.

The cut between the first flange portion 6561a and the second flange portion 6561b is formed between the center light hole 6562 and the left and right light holes 6563. A portion where the image is not arranged is a break. Therefore, since there is no LED that causes light leakage in the first place, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a phenomenon in which light leaks through the cut.

The break between the second flange portion 6561b and the third flange portion 6561c is formed at the location where the fastening portion 6564 is arranged, and the location where the substitute portion that blocks light is arranged is intentionally regarded as the break. It is what I did. That is, even if the light travels through the cut, the light that is about to pass through the cut is blocked by the fastening portion 6564, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of light leaking through the cut.

Here, the flange portions 6561a to 6561c can be configured as a series of continuous portions, but in that case, the rigidity of the flange portions 6561a to 6561c cannot be sufficiently ensured, and the downward load applied to the partition member 6560 cannot be secured. It is necessary to counteract the force generated by the fastening screw that fastens and fixes the fastening portion 6564 (assuming a downward load applied to a member arranged in front of the partitioning member 6560, gravity, and a load given by a player). occurs. In this embodiment, as the number of fastening portions 6564 increases, not only does the number of man-hours for tightening the fastening screws increase, but also the surface area of the electrical board 6570 decreases, limiting the locations where LEDs can be arranged. This reduces the design freedom of the 6570.

On the other hand, by dividing the flange portions 6561a to 6561c into lengths sufficient to ensure rigidity, the rigidity of the flange portions 6561a to 6561c can withstand the downward load applied to the partition member 6560. FIG. Therefore, the number of fastening portions 6564 can be limited, and the number of working steps can be reduced, and the degree of freedom in designing the electrical board 6570 can be improved.

Further, in this embodiment, the length in the longitudinal direction is designed according to the degree of rigidity required for the flange portions 6561a to 6561c. In this embodiment, the effect device 6500 is formed in a semi-elliptical shape in which the width in the front-rear direction becomes longer toward the left-right center when viewed from above (see FIG. 237). Generally, the load given by the player (for example, the hanging load) is applied at the front side end of the effect device 6500, so the load given by the player at the left-right central portion of the effect device 6500 is maximum. , and gradually decreases toward the left and right ends.

On the other hand, the flange portions 6561a to 6561c have different lengths. Specifically, compared to the lateral length of the first flange portion 6561a formed in the central portion where the load is maximum, the lateral length of the second flange portion 6561b arranged on the left and right is longer, Further, the third flange portions 6561c arranged on the left and right sides are longer than the left and right lengths of the second flange portions 6561b. That is, the lateral length is the shortest in the lateral center and gradually increases toward the lateral ends. As a result, the load given to the presentation effect device 6500 can generate a sufficient counterforce.

As a result, deformation and displacement of the partitioning member 6560 can be suppressed, so that the relative relationship (positional relationship) between the partitioning member 6560 and the electrical board 6570 can be stably maintained. Note that the maintenance of the relative relationship (positional relationship) is not limited to the case of preventing the displacement of the electrical board 6570 due to a decrease in the force holding the electrical board 6570 due to the deformation or displacement in the separation direction. It also includes the case of preventing the electrical board 6570 from being damaged or deformed due to the load in the direction of compression being applied to the electrical board 6570 due to the displacement.

The center light hole 6562 and the left and right light holes 6563 are a plurality of through holes drilled corresponding to the patterns of the LEDs arranged on the electrical board 6570 . The central light hole 6562 is configured as a set of through holes slightly larger than the outline of a single LED, while the left and right light holes 6563 are configured as a set of through holes sized to surround multiple LEDs. .

The fastening portion 6564 is fastened and fixed to the front plate portion 6581 of the back support member 6580 , and the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is formed to protrude from the fastening portion 6564 toward the back side. Thereby, the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is inserted through the positioning hole 6581b of the front plate portion 6581, and the partition member 6560 and the rear support member 6580 are aligned.

The large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 has a front-side cylindrical portion extending toward the front side in a cylindrical shape of the same diameter, and has an insertion hole 6565a at the bottom of the front end thereof, through which a fastening screw can be inserted. A fastening screw passing through the inside of the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is inserted through the insertion hole 6565a from the back side, and the fastening screw is fastened and fixed to the partitioning unit 6540, which will be described later. With this configuration, the step of inserting the fastening screw through the insertion hole 6565a and screwing it into the partitioning unit 6540 can be performed while the rear units 6560 to 6580 are assembled (see FIGS. 239 and 240). can.

The central tubular portion 6566 and the left and right tubular portions 6567 are extended until they reach the rear-side ends of the front units 6520-6550. Therefore, most (or all) of the light passing through the central tubular portion 6566 and the left and right tubular portions 6567 enters the front units 6520-6550.

The plate-like coupling portion 6568 is a portion to which the load is transmitted via the upper cover member 6510 (see FIG. 237) when a load (for example, a hanging load) is applied to the presentation device 6500. The upper surface is arranged at a position slightly higher than the upper end of the . As a result, since the plate-like coupling portion 6568 bears the load before the central tubular portion 6566, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the central tubular portion 6566 is subjected to a load, and the central tubular portion 6566 is not deformed or displaced. It is possible to make it easier to avoid a situation where

The plate-like connecting portion 6568 extends downward until the plate-like portion reaches the left and right cylindrical portions 6567 . As a result, when a load is transmitted to the plate-like connecting portion 6568 via the upper cover member 6510 (see FIG. 237), the resistance generated by the plate-like portion reaching the left and right cylindrical portions 6567 also resists the load. can do. In this case, since it is formed of the plate-like portion, it is possible to generate a counter force by bending deformation of the plate-like portion itself, so that displacement and deformation of the left and right cylindrical portions 6567 can be suppressed.

The electrical board 6570 is a so-called printed circuit board, and includes a plate-like board portion 6571 and a portion bored or notched in the board portion 6571, through which the fastening portion 6564 of the partitioning member 6560 is inserted. a large-diameter insertion portion 6573 which is drilled in the substrate portion 6571 and through which the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partitioning member 6560 is inserted; b) is formed from a uniform rectangle), and a plurality of LEDs arranged symmetrically with respect to the first illumination part 6574, and the vertical center of the substrate part 6571 a second illumination portion 6575 arranged near the portion, a third illumination portion 6576 arranged symmetrically along the lower end portion of the substrate portion 6571, and a connector 6577 for connecting electrical wiring (not shown). Prepare the Lord.

As shown in FIGS. 241(a) and 241(b), each lighting section 6574 to 6576 is formed of a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light to the front side along the front-rear direction. are arranged according to the physical positional relationship. That is, the first lighting section 6574 is positioned corresponding to the central light hole 6562 , the second lighting section 6575 is positioned surrounded by the left and right light holes 6563 , and the third lighting section 6576 is positioned below the partition member 6560 . They are each arranged at a position below the edge. Thereby, each lighting section 6574 to 6576 illuminates a separate area partitioned by the partitioning member 6560 . The first illumination section 6574 and the second illumination section 6575 illuminate the area inside the partitioning member 6560 , while the third illumination section 6576 illuminates the area outside the partitioning member 6560 .

It should be noted that the third lighting section 6576 is illustrated as being partially shielded by the partitioning member 6560 when viewed from the front. As will be described later, the light emitted from the third illumination unit 6576 travels obliquely downward by the light receiving member 6558, so that the light emitted from the third illumination unit 6576 is prevented from being blocked by the partition member 6560. As a result, the third lighting section 6576 and the partitioning member 6560 can be arranged to at least partially overlap in the front-rear direction.

The thickness of the base plate portion 6571 is designed so that the fastening force in the fastening between the fastening portion 6564 of the partitioning member 6560 and the rear support member 6580 does not act on the fastening insertion portion 6572 . That is, the electrical board 6570 is supported between the partitioning member 6560 and the rear support member 6580 without being fastened and fixed.

The fastening inserting portion 6572 is formed in a vertically elongated oval shape (or a shape obtained by cutting an oval in half) when viewed from the front. As a result, it is possible to improve assembly efficiency, and the details will be described later.

The back support member 6580 is a member that covers the acoustic device 6610 from the front side, and is a pair of members that are configured to have substantially symmetrical shapes. A flange portion 6582 extending from the upper edge of the plate portion 6581 to the front side, an upper plate portion 6583 having the same plane as the upper surface of the flange portion 6582 and extending in a plate shape to the rear side, and a front plate. A rear box portion 6584 connected to the left and right edges (edges opposite to the side where the pair of members face each other) and the lower edge of the portion 6581 and formed in a box shape opened to the rear side, and a pair of rear boxes. A lower box portion 6585 which is a part of the portion 6584 and which is formed in a box-like shape having a smooth upper surface and opening downward on the side near the rear box portion 6584 on the other side, the lower box portion 6585 and a front plate portion. 6581 and is arranged to face the mating member (back support member 6580), and between the opposing plate portion 6586 and the lower box portion 6585, a cut vertically penetrating. A notch portion 6587 that is a notch is mainly provided.

The front plate portion 6581 has a plurality of fastening supports each including an oval rib capable of supporting the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 and an insertion hole through which a fastening screw fastened to the fastening portion 6564 is inserted. A portion 6581a and a through hole formed in a vertically elongated oval shape with a left-right width slightly longer than the diameter of the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partitioning member 6560 and arranged at a position overlapping the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 in the front and rear. Multiple positioning holes 6581b and a plurality of screw insertion portions 6581c through which fastening screws for fastening and fixing the front side units 6520 to 6550 can be inserted, mainly drilled in the lower edge portion forming the boundary between the rear box portion 6584, and Similar to the screw insertion portion 6581c, a plurality of long positioning holes 6581d are drilled along the lower edge forming the boundary with the rear box portion 6584 and used for positioning the front units 6520 to 6550, and A wiring hole 6581e is provided at a location corresponding to the connector 6577 of the decoration board 6570 and through which electrical wiring can be passed back and forth.

The rib of the fastening support portion 6581a has an inner width in the left-right direction that constitutes the minor axis and is slightly longer than the outer diameter of the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560, while an outer width in the left-right direction is equal to that of the electrical board 6570. is longer than the left-right width of the fastening insertion portion 6572. Therefore, in the assembled state (see FIG. 235), the fastening portion 6564 is inserted inside the elliptical rib of the fastening support portion 6581a, and the electrical board 6570 is surface-supported by the tip of the elliptical rib. (See FIG. 244(a)).

The screw insertion part 6581c and the long positioning hole 6581d are holes used for assembling the rear support member 6580 and the front units 6520-6550, and are opened along the moving direction of the front units 6520-6550. In other words, the screw insertion portion 6581c and the long positioning hole 6581d are formed in a downwardly inclined manner toward the front side (see FIGS. 244(a) and 246(b)).

The front side units 6520 to 6550 are assembled to the rear side units 6560 to 6580 along the direction of inclination in which the screw insertion portion 6581c and the long positioning hole 6581d are formed, and the fastening screws are screwed in along the direction of the downward inclination. (see Figure 247).

This makes it easier to avoid interference between the front units 6520 to 6550 and the electrical board 6570 compared to the case where they are opened in the front-rear direction, and the positions of the screw insertion part 6581c and the long positioning hole 6581d are brought closer to the electrical board 6570. Therefore, when the front plate portion 6581 is formed with the same size, a wide installation area for the electrical board 6570 can be secured, and when the electrical board 6570 is formed with the same size, The area for forming the screw insertion portion 6581c and the long positioning hole 6581d can be narrowed (they can be formed compactly).

The flange portion 6582 is a portion that abuts on the upper surfaces of the flange portions 6561 a to 6561 c of the partition member 6560 . When a downward load (hanging load) is applied to the partition member 6560, the flange portion 6582 functions as a portion that suppresses the partition member 6560 from falling forward.

The upper plate portion 6583 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fastening portion 6513 (see FIG. 238) and includes a plurality of fitting recessed portions 6583a that are recessed so as to be fittable with the fastening portion 6513 . The fitting recessed portion 6583a is open at the top and rear and is formed in a rectangular shape (a shape corresponding to the shape of the plate portion 6513a on the front side of the fastening portion 6513) in the left-right direction.

The rear box portion 6584 includes an overhanging portion 6584a that overhangs the front side from the front plate portion 6581, a sound transmission portion 6584b made of punching metal that covers an opening formed in the overhanging portion 6584a, and a right member. A light-receiving portion 6584c formed of a light-transmitting member disposed at the right end of the projecting portion 6584a, and a position closest to the center of the upper end (a position near the front plate portion 6581) and assembled (See FIG. 207) is inserted through a pair of plate-like metal spring members 6584d formed so as to generate an urging force in a direction repelling from the metal body portion 10014a and through the insertion hole 6512 (see FIG. 237) of the upper lid member 6510. and a pair of fastening portions 6584e to which fastening screws are fastened.

The projecting portion 6584a has an upper edge that follows the shape of the lower edge of the electrical board 6570 (see FIG. 241), and its upper surface constitutes a guide surface that guides the front units 6520-6550.

The sound transmission portion 6584b is a portion through which sound waves generated from the acoustic device 6610 (see FIG. 235) pass. The sound transmission portion 6584b is arranged at a position facing the vibrating membrane 6611 (see FIG. 235) of the acoustic device 6610. As shown in FIG.

The light-receiving part 6584c receives the light emitted from the lighting part 10014c (see FIG. 235) formed from a single LED arranged in the upper right corner of the front frame 10014, and shows it to the player as a light-emitting effect. is. The lighting unit 10014c is controlled to emit light in a manner different from that of the electrical board 6570 in this embodiment. That is, while the light emission effect of the illumination board 6570 is executed during a variable effect with a high occurrence probability, a normal change effect and reach effect, a demonstration effect, etc., the light emission effect of the lighting unit 10014c has a high probability of occurrence. It is executed when an extremely low and extremely advantageous effect for the player occurs. Therefore, the player's attention to the lighting section 10014c can be improved.

The lower box portion 6585 is a portion into which the front units 6520 to 6550 enter from below, and includes a fastening portion 6585a to which a fastening screw inserted from the rear side of the metal body portion 10014a is fastened.

The notch portion 6587 is one side of a through hole through which sound emitted from the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 vertically drilled in the lower surface of the left and right central portion of the acoustic device 6610 (the portion farthest from the diaphragm 6611) passes through. to form That is, the sound emitted from the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 passes through the through hole formed by the support plate portion 10014d that supports the back side of the acoustic device 6610 and the notch portion 6587. FIG.

The sound that passes through the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 is output as a sound directed toward the back side as the diaphragm 6611 vibrates, in contrast to the sound directed toward the front side as the diaphragm 6611 vibrates. This is the sound that passes through the internal cavity of the acoustic device 6610 (corresponding to the duct of the bass reflex speaker) and is emitted to the outside from the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 . By providing a plurality of sound output paths in this manner, sounds with different timbres can be generated at the same time.

FIG. 244(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member 6560, the decorative substrate 6570, the rear support member 6580 and the acoustic device 6610 along line CCXLIVa-CCXLIVa in FIG. 241, and FIG. 244(b) is CCXLIVb in FIG. Fig. 245(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the dividing member 6560, the electrical board 6570, the back supporting member 6580, and the acoustic device 6610 along the line CCXLIVb, and Fig. 245(a) is the dividing member 6560 and the electrical board along the CCXLVa-CCXLVa line in Fig. 241 6570, a back support member 6580, and an acoustic device 6610, and FIG. 245(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member 6560, the electrical board 6570, the back support member 6580, and the acoustic device 6610 along line CCXLVb-CCXLVb in FIG. FIG. 246(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of a partition member 6560, an illumination board 6570, a back support member 6580 and an acoustic device 6610 taken along line CCXLVIa-CCXLVIa in FIG. 241, and FIG. 246(b). 241 is a partial cross-sectional view of the partitioning member 6560, the decorative board 6570, the back support member 6580, and the acoustic device 6610 along line CCXLVIb-CCXLVIb of FIG.

244(a) to 246(b), the periphery of the flange portion 6582 is shown enlarged. As can be seen from this enlarged view, a slight gap is formed between the upper end of the electrical board 6570 and the lower edge of the flange portion 6582 . As a result, even if the back support member 6580 vibrates due to the transmission of vibration of the acoustic device 6610, the vibration of the electrical board 6570 due to the vibration of the back support member 6580 (vibration width) can be suppressed. .

As shown in FIGS. 244(a) and 245(a), the fastening screw inserted through the fastening support portion 6581a of the rear support member 6580 is screwed into the fastening portion 6564 of the partitioning member 6560 with the electrical board 6570 interposed therebetween. By inserting, the partitioning member 6560 and the back support member 6580 are fastened and fixed, but the fastening force is not transmitted to the electrical board 6570 . That is, the electrical board 6570 is only aligned with the fastening insertion portion 6572 in the fastening portion 6564, and is not fixed to the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 at the fastening portion.

In addition, while the ribs of the fastening support portion 6581a are in contact with the rear surface of the electrical board 6570, the dividing member 6560 is separated from the electrical board 6570 at the front and rear positions thereof. That is, in this embodiment, since the electrical board 6570 is not sandwiched between the front and rear positions, the electrical board 6570 can be displaced (for example, tilted) in the front-rear direction.

In addition, the lower edge of the electrical board 6570 is not supported by the rear support member 6580 or the partition member 6560 . This also applies to FIGS. 244(b) to 246(b) described below.

As shown in FIG. 244(b), the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is inserted through the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 of the electrical board 6570 and the positioning hole 6581b of the back support member 6580. As shown in FIG. Here, the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 and the positioning hole 6581b are formed in an oval shape that can form a gap below the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 . Similarly, the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a is formed in an elliptical shape to the extent that a gap can be formed below the fastening portion 6564 (see FIG. 244(a)). A description will be given of the fact that by forming in this way, the assembly of the dividing member 6560 to the rear support member 6580 is facilitated.

For example, when the ribs of the fastening support portion 6581a are formed with an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the fastening portion 6564 as in the conventional art, the dividing member 6560 is aligned with the back support member 6580 vertically and horizontally. need to be assembled.

However, in this embodiment, since the electrical board 6570 is arranged in a non-fixed state between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580, the back support member 6580 of the electrical board 6570 is not fixed when the partition member 6560 is assembled. It is also necessary to align the position with respect to, and there is a possibility that the work will be difficult.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as described above, the fastening insertion portion 6572, the large-diameter insertion portion 6573, the ribs of the fastening support portion 6581a, and the positioning holes 6581b are elongated oval shapes (or halved oval shapes). , the assembly can be performed even if the vertical alignment is not accurate.

As an example of an assembly order, first, the electrical board 6570 is attached to the partition member 6560 so that the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partition member 6560 is inserted into the large diameter insertion portion 6573 of the electrical board 6570 . In this case, the arrangement of the electrical board 6570 with respect to the partitioning member 6560 does not need to be determined in the longitudinal direction of the large-diameter insertion portion 6573, and may be at any position.

In the present embodiment, the flange portions 6561a to 6561c are formed at positions where they can contact the electrical board 6570, so that when the electrical board 6570 is assembled to the dividing member 6560, the dividing member of the electrical board 6570 is formed. Positional deviation with respect to 6560 is greatly suppressed.

Next, the fastening portion 6564 of the partitioning member 6560 is inserted through the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a of the rear support member 6580 . At this time, the arrangement of the fastening portion 6564 with respect to the fastening support portion 6581a does not need to be determined in the longitudinal direction of the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a, and may be at any position. That is, it is sufficient to perform rough positioning (for example, positioning to the extent that the connector 6577 (see FIG. 243) is passed through the wiring hole 6581e (see FIG. 242), or positioning with a sufficiently long allowable width in the vertical direction). It is possible to improve the working efficiency of inserting the 6564 inside the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a.

Next, the partitioning member 6560 is moved with respect to the rear support member 6580 in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) of the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a, and the fastening portion 6564 and the through hole of the fastening support portion 6581a are aligned. Then, the fastening screw is screwed in (see FIG. 244(a)).

In this state, even if the electrical board 5670 is misaligned, the dividing member 6560 can be lowered by its own weight to a position where the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 supports the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 (see FIG. 244(b)). and aligned with the back support member 6580 .

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the electrical board 6570 is arranged in a non-fixed manner between the partitioning member 6560 and the back support member. By forming the fastening insertion portion 6572, the large-diameter insertion portion 6573, the ribs of the fastening support portion 6581a, and the positioning hole 6581b in a vertically elongated oval shape (or a shape that is half an oval shape) in spite of the assembly mode, , the assembly efficiency can be improved. In addition, even if the electrical decoration board 5670 is displaced, it is configured to be corrected to its original position by its own weight. can be prevented from declining.

The enlarged hole 6562a will be described with reference to FIG. 245(b). The central light hole 6562 has an enlarged hole 6562a arranged in an inverted T shape (four places, see FIG. 241) in the left and right central part, and an approximately gourd-shaped (substantially pot-shaped) outside of the enlarged hole 6562a. (located at eight locations, see FIG. 241) and direct entry holes 6562b. The direct entry hole 6562b will be described later with reference to FIG.

The enlarged hole 6562a is a long rectangular through-hole through which the light emitted from the first lighting unit 6574 passes, and the portion forming the outer edge is raised to the front side, and the inner wall is the front side (the side away from the light source). It is formed so as to incline so that the distance between the two faces widens as it goes to the left.

Thereby, the irradiation width of the light emitted from the first lighting section 6574 can be defined. That is, it is possible to change how the light is shown to the player by the design aspect of the enlarged hole 6562a (inclination angle of the inner wall, raised height, etc.).

In this embodiment, the front end of the enlarged hole 6562a raised to the front side is raised to a position where it abuts on the closed portion 6521c of the transparent tubular member 6521 (see FIG. 263). This allows the light that has passed through the enlarged hole 6562a to enter the transparent cylindrical member 6521 without leaking.

FIG. 246(a) illustrates the screw insertion portion 6581c, and FIG. 246(b) illustrates the positioning long hole 6581d. As described above, the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning long hole 6581d are formed in a manner in which the front side units 6520 to 6550 are inclined downward toward the front side. 6580 and fastened.

Since the front units 6520 to 6550 are assembled along the screw insertion portion 6581c and the long positioning hole 6581d, the degree of freedom in arranging the constituent members can be improved compared to the case where they are assembled in the front-rear direction.

For example, as shown in FIG. 246(a), the electrical board 6570 can be positioned to cover the area on the front side of the screw insertion portion 6581c, so the size of the electrical board 6570 can be secured. . On the other hand, since the area below the rear side of the front units 6520 to 6550 can be widely used, the size of the rear box portion 6584 and the acoustic device 6610 to be accommodated can be secured.

In particular, in this embodiment, the screw insertion portions 6581c and the long positioning holes 6581d on the right and left outer sides where the diaphragm 6611 of the speaker is arranged are formed so as to be inclined downward toward the front side, so that the diaphragm 6611 can be made large. can be formed (see Figures 235 and 246).

As shown in FIGS. 246(a) and 246(b), the upper edge of the screw insertion portion 6581c and the lower edge of the long positioning hole 6581d are inclined downward toward the front side, while the upper edge is inclined forward and backward. The reason why it is formed along (not inclined) is that the drawing direction of the resin mold used when manufacturing the back support member 6580 is the front-rear direction.

In other words, in order to simply construct the resin mold (consist of two resin molds that are separated in the front-rear direction), the screw insertion portion 6581c and the long positioning hole 6581d are formed in the rear support member 6580 for fastening. It is necessary to have a shape that can be formed in the same extraction direction as the supporting portion 6581a, the fitting concave portion 6583a, and the like. In the present embodiment, since the pulling direction is set to the same front-rear direction as the forming direction of the fastening support portion 6581a and the fitting recessed portion 6583a, the shape of the screw insertion portion 6581c and the long positioning hole 6581d is distorted. It is formed in a shape that changes in the hole forming direction (depth direction).

In particular, the screw insertion portion 6581c is a through-hole through which a fastening screw to be screwed into the back-side fastening portion 6555 (see FIG. 240) is inserted, and is a portion that receives the load that occurs due to fastening and fixing. The shape of the screw insertion portion 6581c is such that the thickness of the upper edge of the portion to which the load is applied due to fastening is made thinner toward the center of the hole, so that the load is unbalanced between the upper edge and the rest. is likely to occur, and there is a risk that the tightening screw may become loose depending on the state of use and the number of years of use.

In order to prevent the fastening screw from loosening, it is possible to adopt a fastening screw with a large head diameter. . In other words, if a fastening screw with a large head diameter is used only at the problematic fastening point, the fastening screw cannot be used as a common component, resulting in high costs. , the material required for the fastening screw is bulky, resulting in high cost in terms of material cost.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front wall 6620 of the acoustic device 6610, which is opposed to the head of the fastening screw inserted through the screw insertion portion 6581c, is formed in the front wall 6620 in a recessed shape ( A retaining plate portion 6621 formed as a plate upper portion parallel to the plate portion in which the screw insertion portion 6581c is formed is provided.

The retaining plate portion 6621 can secure a region where the head of the fastening screw can be arranged between the back support member 6580 and the retaining plate portion 6621 . In addition, since the retaining plate portion 6621 is arranged in the direction in which the head of the fastening screw is displaced when the fastening screw is loosened, it restricts further advancement of the fastening screw and prevents the fastening screw from coming off. can be prevented.

The retainer plate portion 6621 is formed with a dimension that leaves a slight gap from the head of the screw when the fastening screw is not loosened. Therefore, it is possible to avoid transmitting the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 through the head of the fastening screw.

On the other hand, when the fastening screw is loosened, the movement of the fastening screw is restricted by the abutment, so that the gap between the retainer plate portion 6621 and the head of the fastening screw is filled. When sound is output from the acoustic device 6610 at this time, the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 can be transmitted to the front unit 6520 to 6550 via the heads of the fastening screws.

In addition, the front wall 6620 includes a plurality of contact avoidance recesses 6622 recessed behind the through holes of the fastening support 6581a (see FIG. 242) in the assembled state (see FIG. 207). The contact avoiding concave portion 6622 is designed to avoid contact with the head portion of the fastening screw that is inserted through the fastening support portion 6581a and screwed into the fastening portion 6564 (see FIG. 243) (there is a slight gap between the head portion and the head portion). dimension).

This can prevent the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 from being transmitted to the partition member 6560 via the fastening screw. In addition, since the axial direction of the through hole of the fastening support portion 6581a is the front-rear direction, which is the same as the direction in which the resin mold is pulled out, the thickness of the plate portion to which the fastening force of the fastening screw is applied is constant in the direction of the hole. A fastening force can be generated. Therefore, the possibility of loosening of the fastening screw inserted through the fastening support portion 6581a is low. It can occur in recess 6622 .

That is, when the fastening screw is loosened, the progress of the fastening screw is restricted by the abutment, so that the gap between the contact avoiding concave portion 6622 and the head of the fastening screw is filled. When sound is output from the acoustic device 6610 at this time, the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 can be transmitted to the front unit 6520 to 6550 via the heads of the fastening screws.

As described above, it is possible to grasp the transmission of vibration caused by contact between the head of the fastening screw and the retaining plate portion 6621 or the contact avoiding concave portion 6622 due to the loosening of the fastening screw. It is possible to notice the occurrence of loosening, and it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the fastening screw is left loose.

For example, transmission of vibration may be configured to generate abnormal noise or detect vibration.

As described with reference to FIGS. 244(a) to 246(b), in this embodiment, the electrical board 6570 is arranged close to the rear support member 6580, but is arranged without being fixed to the rear support member 6580. be done. As a result, the acoustic device 6610 and the electrical decoration board 6570 can be placed close to each other with the back support member 6580 interposed therebetween, while the vibration of the back support member 6580 caused by the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 is transmitted to the electrical decoration board 6570 . It is possible to avoid breaking the substrate 6570 .

Here, the partitioning member 6560 is connected to the back supporting member 6580 at a position excluding the presentation part (that is, the illumination parts 6574 to 6576) of the electrical decoration board 6570. For the purpose of securing a large area, the area of the connecting portion between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 is likely to be narrowed.

As a result, there is a tendency for the partition member 6560 to be insufficiently fixed. If the 6560 vibrates, there is a risk that the presentation effect will be poor, the fastening part will loosen, or the partitioning member 6560 itself will be damaged.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, vibration of the partitioning member 6560 is suppressed by fixing the partitioning member 6560 from another direction. This will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 247 is a schematic side view of the presentation effect device 6500. FIG. FIG. 247 schematically illustrates fastening locations, fastening directions, and fastening directions of the components of the presentation device 6500 . That is, in FIG. 247, the fastening screw is indicated by a T, the horizontal line of the T indicates the head of the fastening screw, and the vertical line extending from the center of the horizontal line indicates the screw portion of the fastening screw.

As shown in FIG. 247, the presentation device 6500 is configured such that front side units 6520 to 6550 surround the front and bottom surfaces of the rear side units 6560 to 6580, and the front side units 6520 to 6550 are supported by the upper cover member 6510. However, the upper cover member 6510 is only fastened to the rear support member 6580 and the front units 6520 to 6550 and is not fastened and fixed to the partition member 6560 .

This avoids reinforcing the rigidity of the upper lid member 6510 . In this embodiment, since the upper lid member 6510 is formed in a thin plate shape (see FIG. 238), when the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 is transmitted through the back support member 6580, the upper lid member 6510 moves in the thickness direction ( It is easy to displace (deform) in the vertical direction.

Along with this displacement (deformation), the front-rear width of the upper lid member 6510 is shortened. For example, when the upper lid member 6510 is deformed so as to be curved with respect to the front-rear center thereof, the front-rear interval between the through-holes 6512 that are formed away from each other in the front-rear direction is shortened. As a result, a load that displaces the partitioning unit 6540 to the rear side is generated, and a compressive load in the front-rear direction can be applied to the partitioning member 6560 .

That is, since the partitioning member 6560 can be sandwiched between the rear support member 6580 and the partitioning unit 6540 and a load can be applied, even if the partitioning member 6560 vibrates due to the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, the vibration can be suppressed. can be done.

Here, even if the width of the upper lid member 6510 in the front-rear direction is shortened, when the lower side of the partitioning unit 6540 is displaced to the front side (displaced to the side away from the partitioning member 6560), the partitioning unit 6540 gives the partitioning member 6560 a The applied load is likely to be insufficient, and there is a risk that the action of suppressing vibration of the partitioning member 6560 will be insufficient.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the displacement of the lower end of the partitioning unit 6540 in the front-rear direction is restricted by the guided unit 6550, it is possible to prevent the lower side of the partitioning unit 6540 from being displaced to the front side. This makes it possible to sufficiently secure the load applied from the partitioning unit 6540 to the partitioning member 6560 .

At this time, since the fastening screw is fastened and fixed in the direction along the plate surface of the extension plate portion 6552 at the end portion of the guided unit 6550 (see FIG. 254(a)), the acoustic device 6610 via the back support member 6580 can be set along the plate surface of the extended plate portion 6552 .

As a result, the curved deformation of the guided unit 6550 can be suppressed, and the front and rear fastening points can be suppressed from moving in the front-rear direction. Therefore, even when vibration is transmitted to the guided unit 6550, the function of suppressing the longitudinal displacement of the lower end of the partitioning unit 6540 can be sufficiently ensured.

As shown in FIG. 247, by devising the fastening point, the electrical board 6570 can be arranged close to the acoustic device 6610, which is likely to vibrate, in an unfixed state, thereby preventing the electrical board 6570 from being damaged. It is possible to suppress the vibration of the partitioning member 6560 by transmitting the vibration to the partitioning member 6560 that prevents the electrical board 6570 from being separated from the acoustic device 6610 (or the back support member 6580) beyond the allowable amount.

That is, it is possible to improve the shape maintenance performance of the presentation device 6500 while improving the durability of the electrical decoration board 6570 arranged close to the acoustic device 6610 .

One purpose of setting the fastening direction of the fastening screw in this embodiment is to correspond to the amount of displacement of the upper lid member 6510 . That is, the upper cover member 6510 is fixed at the back side by the fastening portion 6513 and is extended in the front and rear in a thin plate shape, so that the upper cover member 6510 is easily bent and displaced in such a manner that the amount of displacement on the front side is larger than that on the back side. It is for things.

For example, when a downward load is applied to the front end of the upper lid member 6510, the shape of the upper lid member 6510 causes the center of the radius of curvature to be arranged below the upper lid member 6510 with the back side end as the starting point. can be bent and displaced at In this case, the upper cover member 6510 itself is subjected to a tensile load in the front-rear direction, while the other members arranged below it are subjected to a compressive load.

Since the direction of this compressive load is along the surface of the upper lid member 6510, it is along the front-rear direction on the back side, which is the base end side, but as the amount of displacement increases (toward the front side), It follows the direction of downward inclination toward the front side.

In the present embodiment, the fastening direction of the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 6547b of the insertion plate portion 6547 is the direction inclined downward toward the front side with respect to the front-rear direction. The direction of the compressive load caused by the displacement of the member 6510 can be brought closer.

As a result, in addition to being able to generate a sufficient resistance to the compressive load at the fastening position, the component of the compressive load applied in the direction of shearing the fastening screw (the direction perpendicular to the fastening direction) is reduced, so the fastening screw breaks. can be suppressed.

A fastening screw whose fastening direction is inclined downward toward the front side is used for fastening the plate guide unit 6550, and the plate guide unit 6550 is arranged close to the lower side and the rear side of the electrical board 6570. (See screw insertion portion 6581c and the like in FIG. 246(a)). In this embodiment, the electrical board 6570 is arranged in a non-fixed manner and is easily displaced. That is, even if the electrical board 6570 is displaced, excessive displacement of the electrical board 6570 can be regulated by enabling contact with the plate guide unit 6550 when the amount of displacement becomes excessive.

In addition, since the plate guide unit 6550 is arranged close to the back side of the electrical board 6570 (the side on which the acoustic device 6610 is arranged), the displacement of the electrical board 6570 to the back side can be particularly suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electrical board 6570 from approaching the acoustic device 6610 as a vibration source.

In this embodiment, the fastening parts (fastening support part 6581a, insertion hole 6565a, etc.) whose fastening direction is along the front-rear direction are gathered on the left-right center side (see FIG. 242), and the fastening direction is downward toward the front side. The fastening portions (screw insertion portion 6581c, insertion plate portion 6547, etc.) along the direction of inclination are gathered on the left and right outer sides (see FIGS. 242 and 256) and are not arranged close to each other.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the influence of deformation (displacement) that occurs in one fastening portion on the other fastening portion. That is, even if loosening occurs in the fastening portion along the front-rear direction and displacement in the front-rear direction occurs, the portion affected by the loosening can be limited to the fastening portion along the front-rear direction. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a load in a direction (along the front-rear direction) that is inclined with respect to the fastening direction on the fastening portion along the direction. As a result, loosening of the screws can be suppressed.

In addition, by fixing the longitudinally long portion of the left-right central side with a fastening portion whose fastening direction is along the front-rear direction, the resistance force of the effect device 6500 against the load in the downward direction can be improved.

On the other hand, it is thought that a fastening portion whose fastening direction is inclined downward toward the front side tends to have lower resistance to a load in the downward direction than a fastening portion whose fastening direction is along the front-rear direction. In this embodiment, the resistance to the load in the push-down direction is reduced by arranging the fastening portions along the direction in which the fastening direction inclines downward toward the front side on the left and right outer sides that are short along the front-rear direction. While minimizing the influence of this, it is possible to secure an arrangement area for the electrical board 6570 and the acoustic device 6610 .

FIG. 248 is a cross-sectional view of the rear units 6560-6580 along line CCXLVIII-CCXLVIII in FIG. 241(a). In addition, a specific part is expanded and illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 248, in the electrical board 6570, the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 abuts the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partition member 6560 in the left-right direction. In addition, while the front and rear surfaces are in contact with the left and right side portions of the partitioning member 6560 and the left and right side portions of the back support member 6580, the contact positions are formed so as not to coincide with each other.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to improve the durability of the electrical board 6570 and adjust the susceptibility to displacement. They will be explained in order below. First, the improvement in durability of the electrical board 6570 will be described.

Here, if the front and rear surfaces of the electrical board 6570 are in contact with the partitioning member 6560 and the rear support member 6580 at the same positions, for some reason (error during resin molding, poor fastening, etc.), the partitioning may occur. When the distance between the contact portions of the member 6560 and the back support member 6580 becomes shorter than the plate thickness of the electrical board 6570, a compressive force is applied to the electrical board 6570. There is a risk that the decorative substrate 6570 will break.

In addition, even if no compressive force is applied to the electrical board 6570 during assembly, the back support member 6580 vibrates due to the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 during movement, causing a load (for example, a compressive load). may be applied, and there is a risk that the electrical board 6570 may break due to this load.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front and rear surfaces of the electrical board 6570 do not come into contact with the dividing member 6560 and the rear support member 6580 at the front and rear positions (there are places where they come into contact at different positions). Even if a load is applied to the electrical board 6570 in the manner described above, the load is not a load that compresses the electrical board 6570 but a load that bends the electrical board 6570 . Therefore, the electric decoration board 6570 is flexurally deformed, so that the possibility of the electric decoration board 6570 cracking can be reduced.

Next, adjustment of the ease of displacement of the electrical board 6570 will be described. The fastening portion 6564 (see FIG. 243) of the partitioning member 6560 and the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 are inserted through the electrical board 6570 to prevent misalignment. placed (see FIG. 243).

In addition, since the electrical board 6570 abuts (contacts) the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 in the lateral direction, the contact resistance between the electrical board 6570 and the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is ensured. Since the large-diameter cylindrical portion 65656 is formed to have a diameter larger than that of the fastening portion 6564, the contact area is naturally increased, and sufficient frictional resistance can be ensured.

Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the occurrence of displacement of the electrical board 6570 in the vicinity of the left-right central portion of the electrical board 6570 . Therefore, even when the surrounding members vibrate due to the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, the direction of the light emitted from the first lighting section 6574 of the electrical board 6570 can be easily maintained.

On the other hand, on the left and right sides (especially the lower side) of the electrical board 6570, neither the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 nor the fastening portion 6564 are arranged, and no compressive load is generated from the front and back. Displacement can be easily generated compared to the left and right central portions of the 6570.

Therefore, when the surrounding members vibrate due to the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, the direction of the light emitted from the second lighting section 6575 and the third lighting section 6576 of the electrical board 6570 can be easily changed.

In this embodiment, since the left and right acoustic devices 6610 are arranged as a pair, the vibration mode of the electrical board 6570 changes based on the vibration mode of each acoustic device 6610 . That is, the case where the sound is output only from the right acoustic device 6610 and the right side of the illumination board 6570 is preferentially vibrated, and the case where the sound is output only from the left acoustic device 6610 and the left side of the illumination board 6570 is preferentially vibrated. The electrical board 6570 can be vibrated in at least three different vibration modes by outputting sounds from both the left and right acoustic devices 6610 and vibrating the left and right sides of the electrical board 6570 .

Next, front side units 6520 to 6550 will be described. 249 is an exploded front perspective view of the front units 6520-6550, and FIG. 250 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front units 6520-6550. In addition, in FIGS. 249 and 250, illustration of reference numerals for detailed configurations is omitted in order to facilitate understanding.

249 and 250, an optical transmission unit 6520 that transmits light incident from the first lighting section 6574 of the electrical board 6570 to the front side, and an outer frame that surrounds the optical transmission unit 6520 and forms an outer frame. The figure shows a disassembled state of the member 6530, the partitioning unit 6540 that abuts on the partitioning member 6560 in the front and rear to similarly partition the light, and the guided unit 6550 that is guided on the upper surface of the projecting portion 6584a of the back support member 6580. be.

When performing light emission through the front units 6520 to 6550, the light transmission unit 6520 receives the light from the first illumination section 6574, the division unit 6540 receives the light from the second illumination section 6575, and the guided unit 6550 receives light from the third lighting section 6576 . Next, the partitioning unit 6540 and guided unit 6550 will be described in detail.

251(a) is a front view of the partitioning unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, FIG. 251(b) is a rear view of the partitioning unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, and FIG. 252(b) is a rear view of the partitioning unit 6540; FIG. 253(a) is a front view of the plate guide unit 6550; FIG. 253(b) is a plate guide 6550 is a rear view of unit 6550. FIG.

254(a) is a cross-sectional view of the partitioning unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 taken along line CCLIVa-CCLIVa in FIG. 251(b), and FIG. 254(b) is taken along line CCLIVb-CCLIVb in FIG. 251(b). 254(c) is a cross-sectional view of the dividing unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 along line CCLIVc-CCLIVc in FIG. 251(b).

255 is an exploded front perspective view of the compartment unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, and FIG. 256 is an exploded rear perspective view of the compartment unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550. FIG.

The division unit 6540 includes a milky-white member 6541 formed of a milky-white light-transmitting resin material and having a substantially inverted triangular shape when viewed from the front, and an optical transmission unit 6520 formed through the central portion of the milky-white member 6541 in the front-rear direction. A through-hole 6542 formed so that the rear portion can be inserted through, a pair of fastening portions 6543 projecting inward from the through-hole 6542 to which the optical transmission unit 6520 is fastened and fixed, and an outer frame member 6530. A plurality of insertion holes 6544 through which fastening screws to be fastened and fixed can be inserted, and a pair of post-guide fastening portions that are cylindrically extended to the rear side and are fastened with fastening screws that pass through the insertion holes 6565a of the partitioning member 6560. 6545, a pair of box-shaped light receiving portions 6546 formed in a box shape opened to the back side along the left and right lower edges of the milky white member 6541, and extending downward from the lower edges of the box-shaped light receiving portions 6546. A plurality of insertion plate portions 6547, which are plate-like portions and are formed with insertion holes 6547b through which fastening screws for fastening and fixing the division unit 6540 to the plate guide unit 6550 are formed, and colorless transparent light. It mainly includes a transparent covering member 6548 that is formed from a transparent resin material in a shape that covers the front side of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 and that is fitted and supported by the milky white member 6541 .

The partition unit 6540 has a front side edge formed in a curved shape that bulges to the front side when viewed from above, similarly to the upper lid member 6510, is formed in a substantially inverted triangle shape when viewed from the front, and is centered on the rear side when viewed from the side. 254(a)).

The opalescent member 6541 has a pair of fastening portions 6541a on its upper surface to which fastening screws inserted through the insertion holes 6512 (see FIG. 237) of the upper lid member 6510 are fastened. The fastening portion 6541a and the upper lid member 6510 are fastened and fixed.

The front side of the through-hole 6542 is inclined downward toward the back side corresponding to the inclination of the contact plate portion 6525 (see FIG. 258(b)) of the optical transmission unit 6520, which will be described later. As a result, the front end portion of the through hole 6542 and the contact plate portion 6525 (see FIG. 258(b)) can be brought into contact with each other, thereby preventing the attitude of the optical transmission unit 6520 from changing. can be done.

The fastening portion 6543 is formed with the fastening hole facing the front side. That is, the fastening screw is screwed in from the front side. Further, the post-guidance fastening portion 6545 is formed with the fastening hole directed toward the back side. That is, the fastening screw is screwed in from the rear side.

The box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 is a portion arranged to face the second illumination portion 6575 (see FIG. 241(b)) of the electrical board 6570. , a jagged decoration with a short lateral width is formed. This jagged shape is formed by a concavo-convex shape in which ridges having a triangular cross section are densely aligned.

This shape can scatter (diffuse) the light incident from the back side, so that the box-shaped light receiving section 6546 and the transparent covering member 6548 covering the front side thereof can emit light uniformly when viewed from the front.

Note that this jagged shape is described as a process performed on the surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, shape processing in which dot shapes are densely formed, or wavy striped shape processing may be used.

The insertion plate portion 6547 includes a U-shaped wall portion 6547a formed in a U-shape with an upper side opened in a rear view, an insertion hole 6547b drilled in the front-rear direction, and a lower side of the insertion hole 6547b. and a protruding rib 6547c protruding toward the front side in a semi-elliptical shape surrounding the .

By aligning the U-shaped wall portion 6547 a with the front side fastening portion 6554 of the guided unit 6550 , the partitioning unit 6540 can be easily assembled to the guided unit 6550 .

The insertion plate portion 6547 is formed with an insertion hole through which a fastening screw to be screwed into the threaded portion 6554a (see FIG. 256) is inserted, and is a portion that receives the load that occurs during fastening and fixing. The shape of the insertion hole formed in the insertion plate portion 6547 is such that the thickness of the upper edge of the portion to which the load associated with fastening is applied is The thickness is reduced toward the center of the hole (see FIG. 254(b)).

In this case, load imbalance is likely to occur between the upper edge portion and the other portions, so there is a risk of loosening of the fastening screws when small displacements occur repeatedly between the partition unit 6540 and the plate guide unit 6550. be.

In order to prevent the fastening screw from loosening, it is possible to adopt a fastening screw with a large head diameter. . In other words, if a fastening screw with a large head diameter is used only at the problematic fastening point, the fastening screw cannot be used as a common component, resulting in high costs. , the material required for the fastening screw is bulky, resulting in high cost in terms of material cost.

In contrast, the present embodiment is configured to prevent the plate guide unit 6550 from being displaced with respect to the partition unit 6540 at a plurality of locations. That is, firstly, the screw-in portion 6554a of the plate guide unit 6550 is supported by the projecting rib 6547c of the partition unit 6540, thereby preventing downward displacement of the plate guide unit 6550 (FIGS. 247 and 254). (b)).

Secondly, the front upper end of the plate guide unit 6550 engages in the front-rear direction with the rear lower end of the transparent covering member 6548 locked to the milky white member 6541 by the locking protrusion 6548b. (See FIG. 254(b)). This can prevent the plate guide unit 6550 from being displaced toward the front side with respect to the partition unit 6540 .

Thirdly, the lower end portion of the insertion plate portion 6547 is configured to come into surface contact with the upper surface of the main body resin member 6551 of the plate guide unit 6550 (see FIG. 254(b)). Thereby, upward displacement of the plate guide unit 6550 with respect to the partition unit 6540 can be prevented.

Since displacement of the plate guide unit 6550 with respect to the partitioning unit 6540 can be suppressed mainly by the first to third contact structures, it is possible to suppress loosening of the fastening screw screwed into the screw-in portion 6554a. can be done.

The transparent covering member 6548 is formed in a substantially V shape when viewed from the front. A plurality of locking protrusions 6548b projecting to the side in a plate shape are provided. The left and right central portions of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 are notched from the rear side to the front side, and the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a enters so as to fill this gap.

On the upper surface of the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a, a jagged decoration is formed in the same manner as the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546. As shown in FIG. As a result, even if the central portion of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 is designed to be notched, the notched portion can be supplemented by the decorative shape of the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a. can emit light uniformly.

Note that this jagged shape is described as a process performed on the surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, shape processing in which dot shapes are densely formed, or wavy striped shape processing may be used.

Here, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the lower bottom surface of the guided unit 6550 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes upward toward the rear side (see FIG. 254(c)), and the lower edge plate-shaped portion In order to form the lower edge plate portion 6548a at the lower bottom surface of the guided unit 6550 and the plane position, the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a is formed as an inclined surface that rises and inclines toward the rear side, like the lower bottom surface of the guided unit 6550. .

If an attempt is made to form this inclined surface with the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546, the extraction direction of the mold for forming the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 becomes complicated. That is, the extraction direction is in the front-rear direction near the through hole 6542, while in the vicinity of the lower edge of the box-shaped light-receiving part 6546, the direction is upwardly inclined toward the back side. Moreover, the manufacturing process may become complicated.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the inclined surface is not formed by the milky-white member 6541, but formed by a transparent covering member 6548 instead (see FIG. 254(c)). Furthermore, in the assembled state, a white partitioning member 6560 is arranged opposite to the back side of the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a of the transparent covering member 6548 that constitutes the inclined surface. can be visually recognized with a uniform color (white).

As a result, the extraction direction of the molding die for the milky-white member 6541 is unified in the front-rear direction, and the shape of the transparent covering member 6548 that covers the front side of the milky-white member 6541 is inclined to the side that interferes in the front-rear extraction direction. The transparent covering member 6548 has a shape (the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a of the transparent covering member 6548 has a shape that is inclined in the direction in which it enters the division unit 6540 in front view), and the transparent covering member 6548 emits light in a uniform light emission mode. can be seen by people.

In other words, the division unit 6540 is tapered toward the back side (the space between the top and bottom is narrowed), and the back portion of the milky white member 6541 and the lower edge plate portion 6548a of the transparent covering member 6548 are adjacent to each other. Since the same decorative shape (cut) can be continuously applied to the top surface of the display (see the enlarged view of FIG. 240), a uniform lighting effect can be achieved.

In this case, it is difficult to set the direction in which the transparent covering member 6548 is removed from the mold in the front-rear direction. Therefore, by setting the direction along the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a (the upwardly inclined direction) as the extraction direction of the mold, a manufacturing process in which resin is molded with a mold whose extraction direction is the front-rear direction (one direction). The transparent covering member 6548 can be manufactured in the same manufacturing process.

Therefore, the milky-white member 6541 and the transparent covering member 6548 can be easily manufactured, and the portion visible through the transparent covering member 6548 can be uniformly illuminated.

The latching protrusion 6548b is a portion latched to the upper edge of the bulging portion toward the front side at a position corresponding to the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 of the milky white member 6541 . That is, when the transparent covering member 6548 is attached to the milky-white member 6541 , the locking protrusion 6548 b is locked to the milky-white member 6541 .

The guided unit 6550 includes a main body resin member 6551 which is formed of a colored and opaque resin material in a substantially V shape when viewed from the front and is guided along the upper surface of the projecting portion 6584a of the back support member 6580, and the body resin member 6551. An extended plate portion 6552 extending in a plate shape toward the back side along the lower edge of the left-right central portion, and a pair of left and right exhaust pressure passage holes 6553 drilled at the back side end portion of the extended plate portion 6552. , a plurality of front fastening portions 6554 arranged along the left and right upper edges of the main body resin member 6551 and opposed to the insertion plate portions 6547 of the partition unit 6540, to which fastening screws are fastened and fixed; A plurality of back-side fastening portions 6555 arranged along the lower edge and to which fastening screws passing through the screw insertion portion 6581c (see FIG. 241(a)) of the back support member 6580 are fastened and fixed, and the back-side fastening portions 6555 A plurality of insertion ribs 6556 protruding in the form of ribs between them and inserted into the long positioning holes 6581d (see FIG. 241(a)) of the back support member 6580, It mainly includes a through-hole 6557 and a pair of light-receiving members 6558 formed of a colorless and transparent light-transmissive resin material and fitted and fixed in the plurality of through-holes 6557 .

The direction in which the guided unit 6550 is guided along the upper surface of the protruding portion 6584a of the back support member 6580 is the mold removal direction. That is, each structural member is formed along a direction of inclination that slopes upward toward the rear side or along a direction perpendicular to the direction of inclination.

The exhaust pressure passage hole 6553 is formed at a position facing the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 (see FIG. 235) of the acoustic device 6610 . That is, the sound output through the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 reaches the player after passing through the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6553 .

The exhaust pressure passage hole 6553 is not formed as a single large hole in the range facing the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 (see FIG. 235), but is formed with a plurality of small hole shapes (the range is divided into small holes). are formed). As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts of entering a thin wire material such as a piano wire.

In addition, the exhaust pressure passage hole 6553 is formed so that the width of the hole becomes narrower toward the end of the hole and toward the rear side. As a result, the hole can be clogged with the fine wire, so that after entering the exhaust pressure passage 6553, the fine wire is further advanced to the back, or when the fine wire is hooked on a specific member to apply a load, It is possible to increase the movement resistance of the fine wire. As a result, it is possible to extend the time required for the fraudulent act, thereby suppressing the fraudulent act.

The front fastening portion 6554 includes a threaded portion 6554a to which a fastening screw is fastened, and positioning wall portions 6554b formed in a pair of wall shapes on the left and right sides of the threaded portion 6554a. The positioning wall portions 6554b are arranged to face each other at an interval slightly longer than the width of the U-shaped wall portion 6547a. Therefore, by inserting the U-shaped wall portion 6547a into the positioning wall portion 6554b, the division unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 can be aligned.

The light receiving member 6558 is a portion guided along the upper surface of the lower edge of the main body resin member 6551 (along the direction inclined with respect to the front-rear direction), and has an L-shaped cross section perpendicular to the longitudinal direction. a guided portion 6558a, a plurality of rear box-shaped portions 6558b which are formed in a box-like shape with a bulged front side of the guided portion 6558a and an open rear side, and which are formed to be able to be inserted into the through holes 6557; An upper edge extending portion 6558c extending in a plate shape toward the back side along the upper edge of the center side end portion of the portion 6558a (the end portion on the side facing the pair of light receiving members 6558) is mainly provided.

The light receiving member 6558 is a member that receives light emitted from the third lighting section 6576 (see FIG. 241(b)) of the electrical board 6570 . The inner surface of the rear box-shaped portion 6558b is formed with the above-described decorative jagged shape. As a result, light can be refracted many times inside the rear box-shaped portion 6558b. However, the entire rear box-shaped portion 6558b can be visually recognized as uniform light. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the number of LEDs is small (the feeling of a point light source can be diminished).

In addition, as described above, the light receiving member 6558 is attached in a posture that is inclined with respect to the front-rear direction (a posture that is inclined so that the traveling direction of light is aligned with the mounting direction of the plate guide unit 6550 (the light receiving surface is inclined toward the plate guide unit 6550). ), the light emitted in the front-rear direction from the LEDs arranged in the third illumination portion 6576 of the electrical board 6570 on the back side of the light receiving member 6558 is received. When passing through the member 6558 , the light can be refracted and traveled in a direction obliquely downward toward the front side of the light receiving member 6558 .

Note that this jagged shape is described as a process performed on the surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, shape processing in which dot shapes are densely formed, or wavy striped shape processing may be used.

The rear box-shaped portion 6558b is formed so that the one arranged on the left and right outer side has a shorter bulging length toward the front side than the one arranged on the left and right inner side. As a result, the front surface of the rear box-shaped portion 6558b can be formed along the curved shape of the front side edges of the dividing unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 connected thereunder.

The upper edge extending portion 6558c is a portion for facilitating assembly of the guided unit 6550 and the dividing member 6560. As shown in FIG. A main body resin member 6551 of the guided unit 6550 arranged to face the partitioning member 6560 is formed in a planar shape particularly at the central extended plate portion 6552, and since there is no partition, alignment with the partitioning member 6560 is required. hard to go In contrast, in this embodiment, the upper edge extension 6558c functions as a partition that partitions the area above the extension plate 6552, so that the partitioning member 6560 can be easily aligned.

Returning to FIG. 249, description will be made. In the description so far, the portion that receives the light emitted from the second lighting section 6575 and the third lighting section 6576 arranged on the left and right has been described. The optical transmission unit 6520, which is the part that receives the light emitted from the first illumination section 6574, will be described below.

257(a) is a front view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530, FIG. 257(b) is a rear view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530, and FIG. 258B is an exploded rear perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530. FIG.

The outer frame member 6530 is a member made of a colored (orange in this embodiment) light-impermeable resin material. A substantially gourd-shaped (substantially pot-shaped) opening 6532 drilled in the front-rear direction in the central portion, and a projecting rib 6533 along the lower edge of the main body 6531 and protruding on the rear side in a rib-like shape. , and a plurality of fastening portions 6534 which are disposed at positions corresponding to the insertion holes 6544 (see FIG. 254) of the partition unit 6540 and formed so that fastening screws inserted through the insertion holes 6544 can be screwed therein.

Since the main body portion 6531 of the outer frame member 6530 is opaque to light, the opening portion 6532 is the only portion of the outer frame member 6530 that transmits light. The shape of this opening 6532 corresponds to the arrangement pattern of the first lighting section 6574 . In other words, the edge of the opening 6532 is formed in a shape (enlarged shape) similar to the shape surrounding the LED of the first illumination portion 6574 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 241(a)).

The light emitted from the first illumination section 6574 passes through the transparent tubular member 6521. Since the shape of the transparent tubular member 6521 is formed differently depending on the difference in the front and rear positions, the light emitted from the first illumination section 6574 is formed in front of the opening 6532. It is possible to allow a player who views from the top view to view light of a pattern different from the arrangement pattern of the first lighting unit 6574 .

For example, the upper plate portion of the transparent tubular member 6521 is formed such that its width increases as it approaches the opening 6532 (both left and right edges are inclined in the wide direction). The light seen from the front of the opening 6532 in the vicinity of the position where it overlaps with the upper plate part in the front and rear is seen in a pattern that spreads horizontally compared to the arrangement pattern of the first lighting part 6574 .

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to narrow the arrangement range of the first lighting unit 6574 that emits light behind it while widening the range of light visually recognized by the player. Therefore, while suppressing the size of the first lighting unit 6574 (or the electrical board 6570), it is possible to perform an effect of visually recognizing light in a wide range. The details of the shape of the transparent tubular member 6521 will be described later.

The protruding rib 6533 is cut out at a position corresponding to the locking projection 6548b (see FIG. 255) of the transparent covering member 6548, and is disposed at a location where the formation of the locking projection 6548b is omitted. In this embodiment, the protruding rib 6533 and the locking projection 6548b are formed on the same curve when viewed from the front (they are formed on the same curve as the lower edge of the outer frame member 6530 so as to complement each other). is done).

259 is an exploded front perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520, and FIG. 260 is an exploded rear perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520. FIG. The optical transmission unit 6520 includes a transparent tubular member 6521 formed in a bottomed tubular shape extending in the front-rear direction from a colorless transparent light-transmitting resin, and a flat surface disposed in the middle of the transparent tubular member 6521. A flange portion 6522 extending outward along the outer periphery in a flange shape, and a cup-shaped member 6523 formed of a colorless and light-transmitting resin and covered with the transparent tubular member 6521. , a shielding member 6524 made of a colored (white in this embodiment) light-impermeable resin material and formed in a cylindrical shape so as to be able to pass through the portion opposite to the side where the cup-shaped member 6523 is covered, and the shielding member 6524. A contact plate portion 6525 formed as a flat plate surface portion capable of surface contact with the flange portion 6522 at the front side end portion, and an outer surface extending to the front side along the left and right edges and the lower edge of the contact plate portion 6525. A frame extension portion 6526 is mainly provided.

The bottomed cylindrical member 6521 is a member that extends in a cylindrical shape in the front-rear direction, and has a curved shape in which the left and right wall portions are constricted inward. A region surrounded by a back contour portion 6521a formed by overlapping contours, a plurality of light receiving projecting portions 6521b projecting from the back contour portion 6521a toward the back side at positions facing the LEDs, and the back contour portion 6521a , a plurality of light passage holes 6521d drilled in the blocking portion 6521c at positions facing the LED, and at least the width of the upper wall and the interval between the left and right walls facing the front side It mainly includes a body tube portion 6521e that becomes longer as it approaches, and a frame-shaped extension portion 6521f that extends toward the front side of the flange portion 6522 along the shape of the body tube portion 6521e.

The light-receiving projecting portion 6521 b is a portion inserted into the central light hole 6562 of the partitioning member 6560 . That is, by reducing the distance between the partitioning member 6560 and the electric board 6570 (see FIG. 263), the first illumination part is attached to the light-receiving projecting part 6521b without leaving a gap as large as the thickness of the opposing plate part 6561 of the partitioning member 6560. Light can be incident from 6574 LEDs. This makes it easier to generate total reflection.

In this way, the light emitted from the LEDs of the first lighting unit 6574 is incident at a close distance, is totally reflected, and travels toward the front side. The light emitted from the LED travels in the air by the area inside the recess of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 and the rear box-shaped portion 6558b which are recessed in the direction away from the LED, and passes through the box-shaped light receiving portion. 6546 and the front side wall portion of the rear box-shaped portion 6558b are illuminated. Therefore, compared to the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574, the light emitted from the second illumination unit 6575 and the third illumination unit 6576 has a lower light intensity and can be visually recognized by the player as uniform light. can.

The division unit 6540 in which the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 is formed is made of a light-transmissive milky-white resin material, and the light-receiving member 6558 in which the rear box-shaped portion 6558b is formed is made of a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin material. Since it is formed, the appearance of the light emitted from the second irradiation section 6575 and the third irradiation section 6576 can be changed step by step.

The frame-shaped extension 6521f has a shape similar to that of the back contour 6521a, but because the frame-shaped extension 6521f has the main tubular portion 6521e in between, the frame-shaped extension 6521f has a shape similar to that of the back contour 6521a. and is enlarged.

Therefore, compared to the size of the area in which the LEDs in the first lighting section 6574 are arranged, the player can visually recognize the light as the light that illuminates a large area.

The shape of the extension tip of the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f is such that each point is arranged at approximately the same distance as the bottom back surface (back surface) of the cup-shaped member 6523 . That is, depending on the shape of the cup-shaped member 6523, the shape of the extension tip of the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f is designed. As a result, the frame-shaped extended portion 6521f can be illuminated in a uniform light emission mode.

The flange portion 6522 has a pair of right and left insertion holes 6522a having a size that allows insertion of the circular screw portion of the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251(a)) of the partition unit 6540 .

The cup-shaped member 6523 has a flat rear surface and is formed into a cylindrical shape with a bottom that can support the fastening portion 6543 at a position that overlaps the insertion hole 6522a in the front-rear direction. A pair of end fastening portions 6523a to which the portion 6543 is fastened and fixed, a decorative shape portion 6523b in which a light diffusion shape (decorative shape consisting of a triangular cross-sectional ridge) is formed on the back bottom of the cup shape, and its decorative shape portion and a flat surface portion 6523c formed in a flat surface shape in a region surrounding the periphery of 6523b.

The decorative shape portion 6523b diffusely reflects the light irradiated to the cup-shaped member 6523 from the back side. As a result, a player who views the cup-shaped member 6523 from the front side can visually recognize the cup-shaped member 6523 as if it is emitting surface light, so that the visibility of the cup-shaped member 6523 in the front view can be improved.

Since the flat surface portion 6523c is formed in a region opposed to the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f (see FIG. 263), the light passing through the thick interior of the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f is not reflected diffusely and is reflected from the front surface. You can pass it sideways. This allows the player to visually recognize the light traveling through the frame-shaped extension 6521f as a clear light.

The shielding member 6524 has a rear side end formed in the same shape as the central cylindrical portion 6566 of the partitioning member 6560, and is recessed with a size capable of guiding the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251(a)) of the partitioning unit 6540. A pair of left and right guide recesses 6524a are provided.

The contact plate portion 6525 includes a pair of right and left insertion holes 6525a having a size such that the circular screw portion of the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251(a)) of the partition unit 6540 can be inserted.

The outer frame extension portion 6526 is formed with an inner shape that is slightly larger than the flange portion 6522 so as to accommodate the flange portion 6522. The length is equal to or greater than the sum of the thickness of the edge of the side plate-shaped portion.

That is, in the assembled state of the optical transmission unit 6520, the plate-like portions of the flange portion 6522 and the cup-shaped member 6523 are accommodated inside the outer frame extension portion 6526 (see FIG. 258(a)). can be stably maintained. Furthermore, the circular threaded portion of the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251(a)) of the partition unit 6540 is inserted through the insertion hole 6525a, the insertion hole 6522a, and the terminal fastening portion 6523a in this order, and fastened and fixed. The assembled state of 6520 can be maintained more firmly.

According to the optical transmission unit 6520, the light incident from the rear side end surface of the light receiving projecting portion 6521b is totally reflected within the thickness of the main body cylindrical portion 6521e to travel forward, and the front side end portion of the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f is reflected. , and illuminate the cup-shaped member 6523 . Since the distance between the cup-shaped member 6523 and the frame-shaped extended portion 6521f is set short, the player who views the light from the front side of the cup-shaped member 6523 can see the light in a line shape (at the corner of the cup-shaped member 6523). It can be visually recognized in a luminescence mode in which the light is emitted in the shape of an outline along the line). As a result, the difference between the light emission mode of the cup-shaped member 6523 and the uniform light emission mode seen in the above-described transparent covering member 6548 can be emphasized, so that a well-modulated light emission effect can be executed. This will be explained in detail below.

261 shows six views of the transparent tubular member 6521, and FIG. 262 shows six views of the optical transmission unit 6520 in the assembled state. Since the optical transmission unit 6520 is configured symmetrically, the left side view is omitted.

261(a) is a front view of the transparent tubular member 6521, FIG. 261(b) is a top view of the transparent tubular member 6521, and FIG. 261(c) is a bottom view of the transparent tubular member 6521. 261(d) is a right side view of the transparent tubular member 6521 as viewed in the direction of arrow L, and FIG. 261(e) is a rear view of the transparent tubular member 6521. FIG.

262(a) is a front view of the optical transmission unit 6520, FIG. 262(b) is a top view of the optical transmission unit 6520, and FIG. 262(c) is a bottom view of the optical transmission unit 6520. 262(d) is a right side view of the optical transmission unit 6520 as viewed in the direction of arrow L, and FIG. 262(e) is a rear view of the optical transmission unit 6520. FIG. In addition, in FIG. 262(e), the illustration of the pattern of the ornamental shape portion 6523b is omitted for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 261(b) and 261(d), the transparent cylindrical member 6521 has a shape in which the left and right sides and the lower bottom face are inclined so that the left and right width and the top and bottom width gradually increase toward the front side. It is said that On the other hand, since the drawing direction of the resin mold is set in the front-rear direction, the portion that interferes with the resin mold in the drawing direction cannot be formed as an inclined surface.

For example, even if the outer surface of the main body cylindrical portion 6521e is formed as an inclined surface, it does not interfere when the resin mold on the back side is moved in the drawing direction (backward). , the inner surface of the outer portion 6521a is formed as a surface (non-inclined surface) along the front-rear direction (see FIG. 263). ).

Similarly, even if the inner surface of the main body cylindrical portion 6521e is formed as an inclined surface, it does not interfere when the resin mold on the front side is moved in the drawing direction (forward), but the frame-like shape formed on the front side portion does not interfere. If the outer surface of the extending portion 6521f is similarly inclined, it interferes when the resin mold is moved. (See FIG. 263).

Here, in the present embodiment, the boundary between the resin mold on the front side that is drawn forward and the resin mold on the back side that is drawn backward is constituted by the closing portion 6521c and the flange portion 6522. A surface is formed, and on the other hand, the above-described non-inclined surface is formed. It is formed on the side that becomes shorter and shorter.

As a result, while the transparent cylindrical member 6521 has the gradually increasing shape as described above, it is possible to suppress the change in the plate thickness due to the change in the front-rear position. It is possible to suppress the change in the forward/backward position of the traveling mode. Therefore, when light is made to enter the inside of the thickness and total reflection occurs at the boundary where the light first reaches, then the total reflection can be easily repeated until the light reaches the front end of the transparent tubular member 6521. can be suppressed, the player viewing the transparent cylindrical member 6521 from the front side can see sufficient light.

The guide recessed portion 6524a is formed so that its vertical width becomes smaller (tapered) toward the front side. As a result, compared to the case where the upper and lower widths are equal in the front-rear direction, when the optical transmission unit 6520 and the partitioning unit 6540 are assembled (see FIGS. 249 and 250), the fastening portion of the guiding recessed portion 6524a is larger than that of the fastening portion. Since 6543 (see FIG. 255) can be easily inserted, the degree of difficulty in assembly can be reduced.

FIG. 263 is a partial cross-sectional view of rear units 6560-6580, acoustic device 6610 and optical transmission unit 6520 taken along line CCLXIII-CCLXIII in FIG. In FIG. 263, for convenience of explanation, the state in which the optical transmission unit 6520 and the acoustic device 6610 are arranged in the assembly position with respect to the rear units 6560 to 6580 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 263, the light-receiving protruding portion 6521b of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 is formed with a dimension such that there is a slight gap when it is inserted into the direct insertion hole 6562b of the partitioning member 6560, and the tip thereof It is inserted up to the plane position of 6561. Accordingly, the distance between the first lighting section 6574 and the light receiving projecting section 6521b can be set without being affected by the plate thickness of the opposing plate section 6561 .

The light-receiving projecting portion 6521b is formed in a plate shape whose longitudinal direction is the direction along the shape of the rear outer shape portion 6521a (see FIG. 260). The dimension in the lateral direction that intersects the longitudinal direction is set to be substantially equal to the width dimension of the LEDs of the first illumination section 6574 that are arranged to face each other.

As a result, in the lateral direction of the light-receiving protruding portion 6521b, only light (light having a very small angle with respect to the optical axis) traveling substantially straight toward the front side from the first illumination portion 6574 is allowed to enter, and other light is prevented from entering. can be prevented.

The incident light in this way easily travels toward the front side through the thick interior of the transparent tubular member 6521, and even when it is reflected at the boundary, the angle formed by the transparent tubular member 6521 and the direction of the light is small. Since total reflection is likely to occur, it is possible to suppress the light from weakening before reaching the end of the transparent tubular member 6521 on the front side.

The longitudinal dimension of the light-receiving projecting portion 6521b is set to be approximately twice the lateral dimension. Therefore, with respect to the spread direction of the surface of the transparent tubular member 6521, the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 and having a large angle from the optical axis is compared to the case where the thickness direction of the surface is explained. can also be incident on the light-receiving projecting portion 6521b.

On the other hand, the rear outer shape portion 6521a coupled with the light receiving projecting portion 6521b in the longitudinal direction does not contact the opposing plate portion 6561 and is arranged with a slight gap. As a result, among the light emitted from the first lighting unit 6574, the light incident from the end surface of the back outer shape portion 6521a (the light with a large angle between the optical axis and the traveling direction of the light) is reflected to the player. You can avoid being seen.

That is, it is possible to allow the player to visually recognize only the light that passes through the light-receiving protruding portion 6521b and travels through the thickness of the main body cylindrical portion 6521e, and cuts out other light (weak light). In other words, by setting the longitudinal direction of the light-receiving projecting portion 6521b, it is possible to set the limit value of the angle based on the optical axis of the light incident on the main body cylindrical portion 6521e.

The light emitted from the LED of the first lighting unit 6574 that is not arranged to face the light-receiving projecting portion 6521b passes through the enlarged hole 6562a and passes through the light-passing hole 6521d (see FIG. 260) of the transparent tubular member 6521. It passes through and irradiates the cup-shaped member 6523 (see FIG. 260). Since this light does not pass through the thickness of the member but travels through the air, it can be visually recognized by the player as uniform light.

The raised tip of the enlarged hole 6562a and the closed portion 6521c are in front and rear contact. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the leakage of light from the gap between the raised tip and the closing portion 6521c.

Next, with reference to FIG. 264, how light passing through the thickness of the transparent tubular member 6521 of the optical transmission unit 6520 will be described. FIG. 264(a) is a schematic front view showing the layout of the first lighting unit 6574, and FIG. 264(b) schematically shows the layout of light visually recognized through the optical transmission unit 6520. It is a schematic front view. 261 and 263 will be referred to as needed in the description of FIG.

First, as described above, the shape of the transparent tubular member 6521 is formed such that the width gradually increases toward the front side, so that the light passing through the thickness of the transparent tubular member 6521 (with total reflection) The light (light emitted from the eight edge light emitting portions 6574a on the left and right outer sides) is visually recognized as an enlarged shape (substantially gourd shape) formed by the arrangement of the edge light emitting portions 6574a.

In addition, as described above, the light in the thickness direction of the transparent tubular member 6521 travels to the front side end portion without being weakened, so even when the optical transmission unit 6520 is viewed from the front, it corresponds to the arrangement of the edge light emitting portion 6574a. The position to be illuminated emits strong light (lights like a point light source).

Here, the distance between the light sources is longer than the actual distance L17a between the edge light emitting portions 6574a. However, the effect of lighting tends to be insufficient. This problem is caused by the fact that the distance L17b between the strong light emitting arrangements of the visually recognized light is longer than the actual distance L17a between the arrangement of the edge light emitting parts 6574a. It is difficult to solve the problem even if the distance between the LEDs is narrowed.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as described above, the light from the edge light emitting portion 6574a travels radially in the direction along the side surface of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 (longitudinal direction of the light receiving projecting portion 6521b). , the light emitted from adjacent LEDs overlaps, and the intensity of the light viewed at the position between the light sources is reinforced.

As a result, line-shaped light can be visually recognized in a front view of the light transmission unit 6520 even in a portion (between the LEDs) where the LEDs of the first lighting unit 6574 are not arranged (imaginary line in FIG. 264(b) reference). Therefore, it is possible to improve the state in which the light is visually recognized as a point.

In particular, the two left and right LEDs arranged at the lower end of the first lighting section 6574 are arranged at the border position between the side surface 6521e1 and the bottom surface 6521e2 of the main body cylindrical section 6521e (see FIG. 262(e)). Therefore, the light traveling above the optical axis overlaps with the light from the LEDs above it, and the light traveling below the optical axis passes through the bottom surface 6521e2 to reach the lower side of the frame-shaped extension 6521f. Overlapping in the left and right center.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 264(a), the light transmission unit 6520 is turned on as shown in FIG. A line of light can be visually recognized in the center of the left and right of the lower side.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, while reducing the arrangement space of the first lighting unit 6574, the shape formed by the light visually recognized through the light transmission unit 6520 is increased. It is possible to weaken the degree of visibility and make a clear line-shaped light visible.

When the optical transmission unit 6520 is viewed from the front, the interior of the cup-shaped member 6523 is made difficult to see due to the decorative shape applied to the bottom of the cup-shaped member 6523. It is difficult to grasp the position where Therefore, even if the position where the light intersects is uncertain, it is possible to prevent the effect of the lighting effect from deteriorating.

In addition, if the position where the light overlaps is near the tip of the frame-shaped extended portion 6521f, it can be visually recognized as if a new point light source was arranged between the LEDs of the edge light emitting portion 6574a. That is, since it is possible to give the illusion that more LED light sources are arranged than the actual number of LEDs, even a small number of LEDs emit light to the same extent as when a large number of LEDs are used. The production effect of the production can be improved.

The light emitted from the surface light emitting portion 6574b (four LEDs on the left and right central sides of the first illumination portion 6574) arranged inside the transparent tubular member 6521 in a front view emits light from the inside of the transparent tubular member 6521. pass through. Here, the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion 6574b does not travel through the thickness of the transparent cylindrical member 6521, and in addition, the shape of the enlarged hole 6562a (see FIG. 245(b)) arranged oppositely radially along the

Therefore, the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion 6574b is visually recognized as planar light spreading as an area A17 centering on the LED of the surface light emitting portion 6574b in a front view. In addition, the light is irregularly reflected by being irradiated on the decorative shape portion 6523b (see FIG. 260) having a jagged shape on the back side of the cup-shaped member 6523, and is visually recognized as planar light when viewed from the front.

That is, not only the area where the light emitted radially from the surface light emitting portion 6574b reaches (see the imaginary line in FIG. 264(b)), but also the decorative shape portion 6523b on the back side of the cup-shaped member 6523 on the outside thereof. The formed region (for example, the region between the region A17 and the frame-shaped extended portion 6521f in front view) can be illuminated brightly.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 can be visually recognized as edge-like light and planar light, which have different impressions. In addition, it is possible to prevent the boundary from becoming dark by irradiating the boundary between the edge-like light and the surface-like light with diffusely reflected light. Therefore, the visually recognized impression of light can be changed step by step and continuously.

Here, various modes are exemplified as changes in the visual impression of light. For example, it may be a change in the impression of the lighting situation such as brightness or blinking, or a change in the color of the light.

Note that this jagged shape is described as a process performed on the surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, shape processing in which dot shapes are densely formed, or wavy striped shape processing may be used.

The division units 6540 that are visually recognized on the left and right sides of the cup-shaped member 6523 in a front view have a curved shape that bulges to the front side in a front view and a side view, as described above. Therefore, the light visually recognized on the left and right sides of the cup-shaped member 6523 travels in a direction away from the cup-shaped member 6523 to the left, right, and up and down (in a direction of diffusion based on the point on the back side).

Furthermore, the light-receiving members 6558 arranged on the lower left and right sides of the partition unit 6540 have front side edges located on the back side toward the outer left and right sides as described above. , in a direction away from the cup-shaped member 6523 in the left-right direction and in the up-down direction (the direction of diffusion based on the point on the back side).

As a result, the player can be given an impression that the light becomes larger as the player approaches the player, compared to the case where the light is directed only in the forward and backward direction, and the light production effect is enhanced. can be improved.

Next, the horizontal effect device 6700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 265 to 281. FIG. 265 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 266 is an exploded front perspective view of the horizontal effect device 6700. FIG.

265, the upper effect device 6500, the operation device 10300, and the lower plate unit 6400 are omitted, and the direction view from the front right is illustrated in a state in which the horizontal effect device 6700 is disassembled from the metal body portion 10014a. 266, the lateral effect device 6700 is viewed obliquely from the front left.

As shown in FIGS. 265 and 266, the horizontal rendering device 6700 is a rendering device arranged on the front side of the left and right vertically elongated portions of the metal main body 10014a, and is a vertically elongated elliptical shape divided in half in a side view. formed from the shape

The horizontal effect device 6700 is a pair of left and right devices with similar shapes, but the internal configuration is the same. Description is omitted.

266, the lateral effect device 6700 has a covering device covering the front side of the base member 6710 fitted to the metal main body 10014a so that the front and back stacking relationship can be seen at the upper end of FIG. It is configured in such a manner that units 6730-6760 are arranged.

Fastening between the base member 6710 and the metal body portion 10014a will be described. When the base member 6710 is assembled to the metal main body portion 10014a, positioning protrusions (not shown) projecting from the back surface of the base member 6710 are inserted into the positioning recesses 10014e formed in the metal main body portion 10014a. Then, the fastening screw inserted through the through-hole of the metal body portion 10014a is fastened and fixed to the fastening hole (not shown) formed on the back side of the base member 6710 .

Of the constituent members of the horizontal effect device 6700, only the base member 6710 is fastened and fixed to the metal body portion 10014a. In other words, among the constituent members of the horizontal effect device 6700, except for the base member 6710, none of the constituent members are fastened and fixed to the metal body portion 10014a.

As shown in FIG. 266, on the side facing the game area, the main body curved portion 6751 of the curved plate member 6750 completely covers the side surface of the base member 6710 (the position where the back side edge of the base member 6710 and the surface position) formed up to The rear end portion of the curved plate member 6750 is disposed close to and opposed to the glass unit 16 in the front and rear, as shown by the unit on the left side in FIG. 265 .

Due to this arrangement, it is possible to easily perform an effect in which the light emitted from the vicinity of the rear end portion of the curved plate member 6750 and the light emitted from the rear side of the glass unit 16 are integrally visible. can do.

267 is an exploded front perspective view of the horizontal effect device 6700, and FIG. 268 is an exploded rear perspective view of the horizontal effect device 6700. FIG. FIGS. 267 and 268 illustrate a state in which the covering units 6730 to 6760 are disassembled from the base member 6710 toward the front side.

As shown in FIG. 267, an electrical board 6720 on which a plurality of LED chips D1 capable of emitting light are mounted is arranged on the front side of the base member 6710. Covering units 6730-6760 are assembled to base member 6710 in a covering manner.

That is, the horizontal effect device 6700 is a device that functions as one of the lamp display devices 227 (see FIG. 4), and supports an illumination board 6720 whose light emission is controlled by the sound lamp control device 113 and the illumination board 6720. and a light-receiving-side unit composed of cover units 6730 to 6760 that receive the light emitted from the light-emitting-side unit and allow the player to visually recognize the light-emitting-side unit. . First, the light emitting unit will be described.

269(a) is a front view of the base member 6710 and the electrical board 6720, FIG. 269(b) is a left side view of the base member 6710, and FIG. 269(c) is a right side of the base member 6710. 269(d) is a top view of the base member 6710, FIG. 269(e) is a bottom view of the base member 6710, and FIG. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of a base member 6710 and an electrical board 6720 taken along line CCLXIXf-CCLXIXf;

As shown in FIGS. 269(a) to 269(f), the base member 6710 includes a flat plate-like support plate portion 6711 arranged opposite to the electrical board 6720 and arranged on the back side of the electrical board 6720, and an electrical A frame-shaped projecting portion 6712 projecting toward the front side of the support plate portion 6711 in a frame shape along the outer shape of the decorative substrate 6720, and a positioning projecting portion projecting further toward the front side than the frame-shaped projecting portion 6712. 6713, a plurality of insertion holes 6714 through which fastening screws can be inserted at positions outside the electrical board 6720 and close to the electrical board 6720 in a front view, and insertion holes 6736 at two upper and lower positions. A pair of fastening portions 6715 to which the inserted fastening screws are fastened, and the portion of the support plate portion 6711 (the stepped portion of the outer frame plate portion 6717) on the right side of the frame-shaped projecting portion 6712 (surrounding the game area A plurality of positioning holes 6716 are drilled as vertically long long holes in the region of the opposite side of the window portion and the opposite side of the glass unit 16), and a plate-like shape stepped from the right edge of the support plate portion 6711 to the back side. and an inner frame plate portion 6718 extending in a plate shape from the left edge of the support plate portion 6711 to the rear side.

The frame-shaped protruding portion 6712 is arranged such that the protruding tip thereof faces the rear surface portion of the electrical decoration substrate 6720 near the outer shape portion, and makes surface contact with the electrical decoration substrate 6720 . As a result, a space is provided between the support plate portion 6711 and the rear surface side of the electrical decoration substrate 6720 except for the vicinity of the outer shape portion (see FIG. 269(f)). Therefore, an air layer (heat insulating layer) can be provided between the support plate portion 6711 and the electrical board 6720 .

As a result, even if the base member 6710 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a and the heat transferred to the metal main body 10014a can be transferred to the base member 6710, the amount of heat transferred to the decorative board 6720 is can be suppressed (reduced to a low level), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as malfunction due to the electric board 6720 becoming hot.

The positioning projecting portions 6713 are portions for aligning the electrical board 6720 with respect to the base member 6710 by being inserted into the positioning holes 6722 formed at two locations of the electrical board 6720 . That is, the electrical board 6720 is provided with a positioning hole 6722 at a position corresponding to the positioning projecting portion 6713 based on the arrangement of the base member 6710 and the electrical board 6720 in the assembled state (see FIG. 269(a)). is set.

The insertion hole 6714 has a cup-shaped portion into which the fastening portion 6744 of the flat plate member 6740 of the covering units 6730 to 6760 and the fastening portion 6753 of the curved plate member 6750 can be fitted from the front (see FIG. 268). It is a through hole formed so as to be matable and through which a fastening screw to be fastened and fixed is inserted.

The fastening portion 6715 is fitted and aligned with the insertion hole 6736 of the light receiving member 6730 (see FIG. 271), and is formed so that a fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 6736 can be screwed therein. The light receiving member 6730 is fixed to the base member by being fastened and fixed to the fastening portions 6715 at two upper and lower locations.

The alignment holes 6716 are holes through which the projecting portions 6743 and 6766 (see FIG. 268) of the covering units 6730 to 6760 are inserted. The covering units 6730 to 6760 are composed of a pair of thin plate-like members (a flat plate member 6740 and a curved plate member 6750) arranged opposite to each other on the left and right sides, and formed in a substantially cup shape that opens to the rear side (see FIG. 268). ), and is fixed to the base member 6710 at the rear side (edge-like portion).

Here, the joints between the base member 6710 and the covering units 6730 to 6760 are located at portions (outer shape portions) that can be touched by the player, and the load given by the player (for example, the It can be displaced by the load generated by As described above, since it is fixed to the base member 6710 at the thin-walled rear side end portion, when a load directed in the thickness direction (for example, left-right direction) of the flat plate member 6740 or the curved plate member 6750 is applied, deformation occurs. or a positional deviation with respect to the base member 6710 may occur. In order to prevent this, the fixing points (fastening points) between the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 and the base member 6710 may be increased, but there is a possibility that the number of man-hours for the assembly operation increases.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while suppressing an increase in the number of fixing points, by inserting the projecting portions 6743 and 6766 into the plurality of positioning holes 6716, the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 are fixed to the base member. It is possible to suppress positional deviation (horizontal direction positional deviation) with respect to 6710 .

In addition, since the inner side surface (left side surface) of the main body plate portion 6741 of the flat plate member 6740 is arranged in proximity to the outer side surface (right side surface) of the frame-shaped projecting portion 6712, the player can move the flat plate member 6740 to the left. Even if a directional load is applied, the plane of the flat plate member 6740 abuts against the frame-like protruding portion 6712, so that the movement of the flat plate member 6740 is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the covering units 6730 to 6760 from being deformed or displaced with respect to the base member 6710 .

Therefore, it is possible to improve the durability of the horizontal effect device 6700 while suppressing an increase in the man-hours of the assembly work. Note that the body plate portion 6741 is provided with an unevenness forming portion 6741a in which fine unevenness is formed in a contact range with the frame-shaped projecting portion 6712, thereby distributing the load, which will be described later in detail. .

The outer frame plate portion 6717 is arranged to face the right side surface of the metal body portion 10014a, is in surface contact with the right side surface of the metal body portion 10014a, and covers the right side of the metal body portion 10014a. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the metal body portion 10014a from being visually recognized by the player.

The outer frame plate portion 6717 includes support recesses 6717a that are recessed along the front-rear direction from part of the positioning holes 6716 . The support recess 6717 a is recessed along the left side of the alignment hole 6716 on the front side of the alignment hole 6716 , and is recessed along the right side of the alignment hole 6716 on the rear side of the alignment hole 6716 .

The supporting recessed portion 6717a is formed to have dimensions such that it fits with the protruding portion 6743 or is opposed to the projecting portion 6743 with a slight gap in the assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (see FIG. 265). Therefore, compared to the case where the projecting portion 6743 is supported only by the alignment hole 6716, the area capable of supporting the projecting portion 6743 can be increased (supported by the surface of the support recess 6717a). The displacement of the 6740 with respect to the base member 6710 can be suppressed. In other words, the flat plate member 6740 can be stably supported on the base member 6710 .

The inner frame plate portion 6718 is a portion arranged to face the main body curved portion 6751 of the curved plate member 6750, and is formed in a planar shape facing the game area side (inside).

The illumination board 6720 is a so-called printed circuit board, and includes a main body plate portion 6721 formed in a plate shape, positioning holes 6722 drilled in the main body plate portion 6721, and arbitrary holes in the main body plate portion 6721. and a plurality of LED chips D1 mounted in a pattern.

The body plate portion 6721 is held by the base member 6710 without being fastened and fixed. That is, the positioning projecting portion 6713 (see FIG. 269(c)) is inserted into the positioning hole 6722 to restrict the movement in the left, right, up and down directions, and the movement in the front and rear direction is restricted by the base member 6710 and the light receiving member 6730 (FIG. 280). See) are restricted from moving.

A similar chip is mounted on the LED chip D1 in this embodiment, but in relation to the area illustrated by the imaginary line in FIG. , can be divided into two types.

That is, the LED chip D1 has an edge light emitting portion D1a arranged inside the frame of the imaginary line shown in FIG. 269(a) and a surface light emitting portion D1b arranged outside the frame of the imaginary line. Prepare the Lord. The difference between these light-emitting portions D1a and D1b is that the light emitted from the light-emitting portion D1a is easily visible as linear (edge-like) light, while the light emitted from the light-emitting portion D1b is easily visible as planar light. This corresponds to the difference in the light emission mode visually recognized by the player, which will be described later in detail.

Next, covering units 6730 to 6760 (see FIG. 267) arranged on the front side of the electrical board 6720 will be described. FIG. 270 is an exploded front perspective view of covering units 6730-6760, and FIG. 271 is an exploded rear perspective view of covering units 6730-6760.

270 and 271 from the state shown in FIGS. 267 and 268, the covering units 6730 to 6760 are made of a light-transmitting resin inside, and the light passing through the inside of the covering units 6730 to 6760 is is provided with a light-receiving member 6730 that can bend the light-receiving member 6730 and covers the electric decoration substrate 6720 from the front side, and is configured to cover the front with another component.

272(a) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730, FIG. 272(b) is a front view of the light receiving member 6730, and FIG. 272(c) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730, 273(a) is a partially enlarged view of the light receiving member 6730 in the range CCLXXIIIa of FIG. 272(a), and FIG. 273(b) is a partially enlarged view of the light receiving member 6730 in the range CCLXXIIIb of FIG. 272(b). be.

274(a) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730, FIG. 274(b) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730, and FIG. 274(c) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730. be.

272(a) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 as seen from the left side, FIG. 272(c) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 as seen from the right side, and FIG. 274(c) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 as seen from the left. Also, in FIG. 272(b), the covering units 6730 to 6760 are collectively illustrated for easy understanding.

The light-receiving member 6730 is a member made of a light-transmitting resin material. An inner extension portion 6732 extending from the inner edge (left edge in FIG. 272) of the light-receiving surface portion 6731 in the assembled state (FIG. 207) to the rear side so as to be bent, and the outer edge of the light-receiving surface portion 6731 in the assembled state. 274), and a plurality of elongated rib-like protrusions (in this embodiment, 5 points) and the base end of the long rib 6734 (the side coupled to the light receiving surface portion 6731) and the front and back of the light receiving surface portion 6731 are extended in a long fin shape from the front of the position. a plurality of fins 6735 (five in this embodiment), a plurality of insertion holes 6736 arranged at the upper and lower ends and through which fastening screws fastened to fastening portions 6715 (see FIG. 269(a)) are inserted, and curved It mainly includes a fitting portion 6737 having a shape that can be fitted to the decorative projecting portion 6751a of the plate member 6750 (see FIG. 276).

The light-receiving surface portion 6731 is a portion that refracts the light emitted from the LED chip D1, and has a decorative pattern with complicated cuts on the back side. The decorative pattern has elongated projections arranged along a plurality of concentric circles with different diameters, centering on a portion opposed to the surface light emitting portion D1b (see the enlarged view in FIG. 274(b)). ). Here, the outer peripheral surface of the projection with a small diameter at the position facing the surface light emitting portion D1b is inclined outward (a mode in which light irradiated from behind is refracted outward along the surface of the light receiving surface portion 6731). (see FIG. 275(b)), and the outer peripheral surface of the large-diameter projection is similarly inclined (the light traveling along the surface of the light-receiving surface portion 6731 is refracted toward the front side of the light-receiving surface portion 6731). 275(b)).

Therefore, the light emitted from the surface emitting portion D1b is refracted near the shaft of the elongated protrusion, travels toward the outer diameter side of the elongated protrusion, and then is further separated from the axis of the elongated protrusion with a large diameter. A wide range of the light receiving surface portion 6731 can be caused to emit light by refracting at a point and proceeding to the front side.

Furthermore, on the front side of the light receiving surface portion 6731, a basic shape that is triangular in front view and has a substantially central portion that bulges toward the front side is formed in a manner that is regularly and densely aligned. A decorative recessed portion 6731a recessed in a substantially hexagonal pyramid shape is provided at the front side position of D1b.

The decorative recessed portion 6731a can change the strength of surface light emission in the light receiving surface portion 6731 (the strength can be changed stepwise). That is, the shape of the decorative recessed portion 6731a converges light on the center side of the recessed portion, so that the decorative recessed portion 6731a can be visually recognized in a strong luminescence mode compared to other portions.

The inner extension portion 6732 and the outer extension portion 6733 are configured such that the extension ends are in contact with the electrical decoration substrate 6720 in the front and rear, and the extension end portions of the inner extension portion 6732 extend over the entire top and bottom. While abutting on the electrical board 6720 , the extended end of the outer extending portion 6733 is partially not abutted.

In other words, the outer extending portion 6733 has a separation end portion 6733a that is separated from the electrical board 6720 without coming into contact with the electrical board 6720 by forming the extended length as short as the plate thickness of the electrical board 6720 . In this embodiment, the spaced end 6733a allows air to flow well into and out of the area between the electrical board 6720 and the light-receiving member 6730, thereby preventing heat buildup.

In addition, when the inner extending portion 6732 is in contact with the electrical board 6720 over the entire top and bottom, the LED chip D1 arranged to protrude from the surface of the main body plate portion 6721 of the electrical board 6720 is placed inside. It cannot be placed behind the extension 6732 . Therefore, the area where the LED chip D1 is arranged is restricted as the plate thickness of the inner extension portion 6732 is increased.

On the other hand, since a gap is formed between the spaced end portion 6733a of the outer extending portion 6733 and the electrical board 6720, the LED chip D1 is placed behind the spaced end portion 6733a of the outside extending portion 6732. can be placed in Therefore, it is possible to secure a maximum layout area for the LED chips D1 while securing a sufficient plate pressure of the outer extending portion 6733 .

The left and right wall portions of the outer extension portion 6733 are formed as smooth surfaces, while the wall portion on the left side of the inner extension portion 6732 (opposite side to the outer extension portion 6733) is densely formed with ridges having a semicircular cross section. A concavo-convex shape is formed that is aligned with the . As a result, the light emitted leftward through the inner extension portion 6732 is surface-emitting (spreads radially), making it easier for the player to visually recognize uniform light.

As will be described later, part of the light emitted from the electrical board 6720 to the front side passes through the inner extending portion 6732, and the intensity of the light varies from region to region. That is, at the peripheral positions of the ends of the fins 6735, light D1m that is a combination of the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a and traveling along the long rib 6734 and the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b is visually recognized. However, at a position away from the fin 6735, the light traveling through the long rib 6734 does not reach the light D1p emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b, and the light D1m is more visible than the light D1p. is also perceived as strong light (the magnitude of the light intensity corresponds to the length of the arrow).

Accordingly, the magnitude of the intensity of the light visually recognized through the inner extension portion 6732 can be changed and visually recognized for each vertically arranged region. It should be noted that the difference in the form of light visually recognized through the inner extension portion 6732 is not limited to the intensity.

For example, by making the color of the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a and the color of the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b different, the color of the light visually recognized through the inner extension portion 6732 can be changed vertically. It can be visually recognized by changing for each area lined up.

The elongated rib 6734 is arranged on the front side of the edge light emitting portion D1a (see FIG. 269(a)) in the assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (see FIG. 265), and is formed with the same thickness without being tapered in the front and rear. It mainly includes a plurality of linear ribs 6734a that are substantially straight when viewed from the rear, and V-shaped ribs 6734b that are bent to have a substantially V shape when viewed from the rear.

A side surface of the long rib 6734 is formed as a smooth surface. That is, unlike the case where the surface of the long rib 6734 is notched on the line, when the light reaches and passes through the side surface of the long rib 6734, it does not spread (does not emit surface light) and is unidirectional. proceed to Therefore, it is possible to prevent the side surface of the long rib 6734 from emitting light uniformly. It is possible to reduce the degree to which it is mixed with the light emitted from D1b and visually recognized.

That is, the elongated rib 6734 is formed to be elongated in the vertical direction and configured as a portion that can be seen in the horizontal direction, while suppressing the light that has passed through the elongated rib 6734 from reaching the player's eyes in the form of surface emission. Therefore, a player who views the horizontal effect device 6700 from the left and right can easily recognize the color and brightness of the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b.

Note that this jagged shape is described as a process performed on the surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, shape processing in which dot shapes are densely formed, or wavy striped shape processing may be used.

The linear ribs 6734a are arranged two by two on the upper and lower sides, and are formed in such a manner as to extend in a direction that inclines toward the upper and lower central positions as it goes leftward (the central side of the front frame 10014, see FIG. 265). Right end 6734a2 is spaced apart from outer extension 6733 while 6734a1 is connected to inner extension 6732 .

Therefore, the light traveling inside the linear rib 6734a can pass through the left end 6734a1 and enter the inner extension 6732 directly, while the light passing through the right end 6734a2 can pass through the outer extension 6733. The energy of the light drops in the gap between

As a result, the perceived brightness differs near the left and right ends of the linear rib 6734a. That is, a portion viewed through the inner extension portion 6732 is viewed brightly, and a portion viewed through the outer extension portion 6733 is viewed darker than that.

As described above, in the present embodiment, surface light emission through the side surface of the long rib 6734 is suppressed, and the visibility of light from the left and right direction is deteriorated. The light that has entered the inner extension portion 6732 through the surface of the inner extension portion 6732 is subjected to surface emission.

Therefore, of the light emitted from the edge light-emitting portion D1a, only the light that has entered the inner extension portion 6732 through the left end portion 6734a1 can be easily recognized visually in the horizontal direction. That is, in the vicinity of the left end 6734a1, the color and brightness of the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a are visually recognized, and at a position distant from the left end 6734a1 (intermediate position), the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b is visible. Since the color and brightness can be visually recognized, the player who views the horizontal effect device 6700 from the left and right can visually recognize lights of different colors and brightness.

The V-shaped rib 6734b is arranged in the vertical center position and is connected to the inner extending portion 6732 at an intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 near the bending position, while both end portions 6734b2 are separated from the outer extending portion 6733. The bending position and the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 are slightly shifted because the edge light emitting portion D1a (see FIG. 269(a)) is arranged to face the bending position.

That is, by shifting the position where the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a is received from the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1, the light (the main light) emitted linearly in the front-rear direction from the edge light emitting portion D1a reaches the connecting position. Since the incident light can be suppressed, the loss of light incident on the fin 6735 from the V-shaped rib 6734b can be reduced.

The V-shaped rib 6734b has a function similar to that of the linear rib 6734a described above. That is, the light traveling inside the V-shaped rib 6734b passes through the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 and can enter the inner extending portion 6732 directly, while the light passing through the both end portions 6734b2 passes through the outer extending portion 6733. The energy of the light drops in the gap between

As a result, the perceived brightness is different near the left and right ends of the V-shaped rib 6734b. That is, a portion viewed through the inner extension portion 6732 is viewed brightly, and a portion viewed through the outer extension portion 6733 is viewed darker than that.

As described above, in the present embodiment, surface light emission through the side surface of the long rib 6734 is suppressed, and the visibility of light from the left and right direction is deteriorated. Light passing through and entering the inner extension 6732 is surface-illuminated through the surface of the inner extension 6732 .

Therefore, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a is limited to the light that has entered the inner extension portion 6732 through the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1, and is easily visible in the horizontal direction. That is, in the vicinity of the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1, the color and brightness of the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a are visually recognized, and at a position distant from the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 (intermediate position), the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b is visible. Since the color and brightness can be visually recognized, the player who views the horizontal effect device 6700 from the left and right can visually recognize lights of different colors and brightness.

The fins 6735 are formed so that the thickness decreases from the extended base end toward the distal side, and the distal curved fins 6735a corresponding to the linear ribs 6734a and the distal curved fins 6735b corresponding to the V-shaped ribs 6734b. , is mainly provided.

The tip curved fin 6735a has curved upper and lower inner edges, and a light diffusing portion is formed by densely forming triangular wave-like (notched) notches on the left side (the inner side of the front frame 10014). , the right side (the outer side of the front frame 10014) is formed as a smooth surface.

The tip bending fin 6735b has an extending tip inclined toward the rear side as it goes from the upper and lower ends toward the vertical center, and has an inclined surface that intersects with the front side of the bending position of the V-shaped rib 6734b. A light diffusion portion is formed by densely forming triangular wave-shaped (notched) notches on the inner side surface of the front frame 10014, and the right side surface (the outer side surface of the front frame 10014) is formed as a smooth surface.

These fins 6735 are formed so that the extension length becomes shorter toward the left side. In particular, since the left end of the curved fin 6735a is coupled to the light-receiving surface portion 6731, a large amount of light emitted from the edge light-emitting portion D1a and emitted from the front end of the curved fin 6735a light) is emitted from the fin 6735 near the light receiving surface portion 6731 . Therefore, the light can reach the inner extension portion 6732 side (back side, base side), and the left side of the light receiving member 6730 can be easily brightened.

In addition, the long rib 6734 and the inner extension part 6732 are connected behind the position where the tip curved fin 6735a is connected to the light receiving surface part 6731, and the light passing through the inside of the long rib 6734 is also extended inward. The setting portion 6732 can be illuminated. That is, in the vicinity of the position where the tip curved fin 6735a couples with the light receiving surface portion 6731, the light passing through the inside of the elongated rib 6734 and the light passing through the tip curved fin 6735a can be combined to perform a light emitting effect. , the production effect of the light emission production can be improved.

Note that this jagged shape is described as a process performed on the surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, shape processing in which dot shapes are densely formed, or wavy striped shape processing may be used.

Due to the difference in the form of formation between the left side and the right side of the fin 6735, the passage of light passing through the side can be changed. That is, the light passing through the left side can be visually recognized as uniform light due to the surface emitting effect of the notch, while the light passing through the right side is not affected by the surface emitting effect, so the light passing through the right side can be viewed as uniform light. The light can be seen as localized light. It goes without saying that the elongated ribs 6734 and the fins 6735 function as reinforcing portions for reinforcing the base member 6710 because of their shapes.

One insertion hole 6736 is exposed in the assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (FIG. 266), and only two insertion holes 6736 are arranged at the upper and lower ends of the light receiving member 6730 . Therefore, by loosening the fastening screw inserted through the exposed insertion hole 6736 and applying a load to the light receiving surface portion 6731, the position of the light receiving member 6730 can be displaced.

As a result, when the positional relationship between the long rib 6734 and the fins 6735 and the edge light emitting portion D1a of the LED chip D1 is deviated (for example, when the positional relationship is deviated due to the vibration caused by the operation of the player or the vibration accompanying the opening and closing of the front frame 10014) Since the maintenance work for returning the position to the original position can be performed without disassembling the horizontal effect device 6700, it is possible to improve maintainability (difficulty is low and time is shortened).

The fitting portion 6737 is recessed in the left-right direction in an inclined shape that tapers toward the back side, and aligns the positions and postures of the light receiving member 6730 and the constituent members of the covering units 6730 to 6760 other than the light receiving member 6730. , and is provided with a single recess 6737a so as to be further recessed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, while limiting (reducing) the number of places where the recessed portion 6737a is arranged (the place where the fastening portion 6753 is arranged) on the side of the inner extension portion 6732 (reduced), the light receiving member 6730 and the , positional deviation and attitude deviation from the constituent members of the covering units 6730 to 6760 other than the light receiving member 6730 are suppressed. This is detailed below.

Here, when the left and right side surfaces of the horizontal effect device 6700 are fastened and fixed, the fastening screws do not transmit light, so the more fastening locations there are, the more easily shadows are generated. Therefore, even if the horizontal effect device 6700 has a large surface area, the light is separated at the fastening point, and there is a possibility that the effect of the light effect is reduced. On the other hand, if the number of fastening points is reduced, the supporting force will be lowered, and there is a risk that the lateral effect device 6700 will be deformed from its base due to the load given by the player or the load generated when the front frame 10014 is opened and closed.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, while the fastening portion is limited to the concave portion 6737a, the fitting portion 6737 is fitted to the decorative projecting portion 6751a (see FIG. 276) to maintain the supporting force. ing.

As a result, the fastening portion of the horizontal effect device 6700 on the game area (glass unit 16, see FIG. 265) side (in this embodiment, it is arranged between the main body curved portion 6751 as a light effect portion and the illumination board 6720). It is possible to improve the durability of the horizontal effect device 6700 while reducing the number of fastening points).

In addition, in this embodiment, light is formed to be able to travel to the rear side through the concave portion 6737a. This will be explained with reference to FIG.

275(a) is a cross-sectional view of the lateral effect device 6700 along the line CCLXXVa-CCLXXVa in FIG. 274(b), and FIG. 275(b) is a cross-sectional view of the light receiving member 6730 along the line CCLXXVb-CCLXXVb in FIG. 274(b). It is a sectional view.

As shown in FIG. 275(a), the recessed portion 6737a is arranged on the same cross section as the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 of the V-shaped rib 6734b arranged to face the edge light emitting portion D1a. The V-shaped rib 6734b is a portion through which light emitted from the edge light-emitting portion D1a can travel (see FIG. 281), and a stripe-shaped decorative portion 6751e is formed via a fastening portion 6753 fitted in the recessed portion 6737a. It is formed so that light can travel to the rear side portion of the main body curved portion 6751 . That is, it is formed so that light can travel toward the back side of the electrical board 6720 (the side opposite to the light irradiation direction).

Here, the fastening portion 6753 is a portion to which the fastening screw is fastened, and it is considered unsuitable for lighting effect because the fastening screw is likely to be shadowed. Since the portion 6734b1 is formed, the light avoids the fastening screw in the vertical direction, so that the player can see the light while suppressing the influence of the shadow of the fastening screw. That is, by causing the light to travel from both the upper and lower sides of the fastening screw, the shadow of the fastening screw visually recognized by the player can be eliminated (thinned).

In FIG. 275(b), the light receiving surface portion 6731 is shown enlarged. Of the light emitted from the surface light-emitting portion D1b, the light traveling in a direction with a small angle with respect to the optical axis along the front-rear direction enters the light-receiving surface portion 6731 while being gently refracted, and passes through the decorative recessed portion 6731a. In the process, the light is further refracted and condensed. As a result, it is possible to increase the emission intensity of light visually recognized through the decorative recessed portion 6731a.

In this way, the light emission mode on the front side of the light-receiving surface portion 6731 is centered on the decorative recessed portion 6731a where the light intensity is increased by condensing, and the light intensity increases as the distance from the decorative recessed portion 6731a increases. It is set to be low.

At this time, since the light is condensed in the decorative recessed portion 6731a, the light is gathered toward the optical axis side compared to when the surface light emitting portion D1b is viewed separately. Compared to the case where the light emitted from D1b is visually recognized without the light receiving surface portion 6731, the intensity of the visually recognized light can be increased.

That is, due to the action of the light receiving surface portion 6731, the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b is emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b with a higher intensity (light visible near the decorative recessed portion 6731a) than when the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b is viewed directly. The intensity of the light is gradually reduced to a level lower than that of directly viewing the light, and the light with different intensities can be visually recognized by the player through the surface of the light receiving surface portion 6731 .

Returning to FIG. 270, the member covering the light receiving member 6730 will be described. A cup-shaped member with an open rear side is provided on the front side of the light receiving member 6730 . A flat plate member 6740, a curved plate member 6750, and a cover member 6760 that constitute the cup-shaped member will be described.

276 is an exploded front perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750 and the cover member 6760, FIG. 277 is an exploded front perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750 and the cover member 6760, and FIG. 279 is an exploded rear perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750 and the cover member 6760, and FIG.

After the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 are assembled from the left and right and are united by fastening and fixing, the cover member 6760 is assembled from the front side and fitted, thereby fixing each member inseparably.

The flat plate member 6740 is a member made of colorless, transparent, light-transmitting resin, and includes a main body plate portion 6741 formed of a flat plate having a shape obtained by dividing an oval shape, and the main body plate portion 6741. A fitted plate portion 6742, which is a flat plate portion arranged on a plane translated to the left from the plane and is connected to the front side edge of the main body plate portion 6741 with a step, and the rear side end portion of the main body plate portion 6741. a plurality of projecting portions 6743 protruding from the rear surface side, a plurality of fastening portions 6744 arranged at positions separated from the projecting portions 6743 and configured so that fastening screws can be screwed from the rear surface side; It mainly includes a plurality of through holes 6745 drilled in the plate portion 6741 with a size that allows the fastening screws to pass therethrough.

The body plate portion 6741 has a decorative shape that is recessed leftward from the left surface and protrudes rightward from the right surface corresponding to the recess. , coincides with the right surface of the body plate portion 6741 .

The concave-convex forming portion 6741a forms a honeycomb structure in which hexagonal pyramids arranged so as to taper leftward are filled, and produces an effect similar to that of a reflector. As a result, the strength of the rear side portion of the main body plate portion 6741 (the portion that can come into contact with the outer frame plate portion 6717 (see FIG. 268) of the base member 6710 in the assembled state) can be improved, so that an external force can be applied. It is possible to prevent it from cracking or chipping. In addition, contact friction can be reduced when the assembly of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760 is slid to assemble the base member 6710. FIG.

Therefore, after the horizontal effect device 6700 is assembled to the front frame 10014, the outer frame plate portion 6717 is damaged when a player gives an impact or a load is applied when opening and closing the front frame 10014. In addition to being able to improve the durability by making it difficult, it is possible to facilitate the assembly of the horizontal effect device 6700 .

The fitted plate portion 6742 has a plurality of groove portions 6742a cut out as thin grooves extending in the front-rear direction on the right side surface and a step between the main body plate portion 6741 and the groove portions 6742a. and a hole 6742b. The groove portion 6742a and the front-rear direction hole 6742b have a function of aligning the flat plate member 6740 and the cover member 6760, which will be described later in detail.

The projecting portion 6743 is a portion that is inserted through the alignment hole 6716 (see FIG. 269(a)) of the base member 6710, and the fastening portion 6744 is an insertion hole 6714 of the base member 6710 (see FIG. 269(a)). It is a part that is fastened and fixed by a fastening screw that passes through.

In addition, the protruding portion 6743 and the fastening portion 6744 are arranged at positions close to the outside of the right edges of the electrical board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 in a front view. In particular, the fastening portion 6744 is arranged so as to enter the recesses of the electrical board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 (see FIGS. 269(a) and 274(b)). The displacement of 6730 can be suppressed.

The through-holes 6745 are through-holes through which tightening screws to be screwed into the curved plate member 6750 are inserted, and are arranged at four upper and lower positions. Since the curved plate member 6750 can be firmly fastened to the flat plate member 6740 at four fastening positions, even if the number of fastening portions 6753 formed on the back side of the curved plate member 6750 is small, the fixing force is insufficient. can be avoided.

The curved plate member 6750 is arranged to face the main body plate portion 6741 of the flat plate member 6740, and is curved in such a manner that it swells leftward toward the back side, is formed to cover the front side of the light receiving member 6730, is colorless and transparent, and transmits light. A main body curved portion 6751 formed of a flexible resin and having a plurality of striped shapes on the inner surface thereof, and a curved plate portion disposed parallel to the right side from the main body curved portion 6751, which is the front side of the main body curved portion 6751. Corresponding to the fitted plate portion 6752 which is connected with a stepped edge and arranged opposite to the fitted plate portion 6742, a plurality of fastening portions 6753 configured so that fastening screws can be screwed from the back side, and the insertion hole 6745. a plurality of fastening portions 6754 formed so that fastening screws can be screwed thereon, a plurality of insertion holes 6755 drilled so that the fastening screws can be inserted in the front-rear direction at the front-side edge of the body curved portion 6751; A plurality of insertion holes 6756 are mainly provided in the front side edge of the fitted plate portion 6752 so that fastening screws can be inserted in the front-rear direction.

The main body curved portion 6751 has a triangular shape tapered toward the back side in a region including the fastening portion 6753 at the center of the upper and lower sides, and has a decorative projecting portion 6751a projecting rightward from the right side surface and the decorative projecting portion 6751a. A front-rear direction hole 6751b drilled in the front-rear direction in the front side portion of , a flat partition portion 6751c that divides the striped shape with a flat surface, and a central flat portion 6751d formed from a flat surface facing the front-rear direction at the vertical center position and a striped decorative portion 6751e formed in a thin striped shape on the inner surface near the rear end.

The decorative protruding portion 6751 a is configured as a portion that fits with the fitting portion 6737 of the light receiving member 6730 . Further, the front-rear direction hole 6751 b has a function of aligning the connection extension portion 6763 and the curved plate member 6750 .

Thus, the decorative projecting portion 6751a can be configured as a portion that has both a function as a decorative portion and a function as a portion that aligns with the light receiving member 6730 . As a result, even in a configuration in which only one fastening portion 6753 is provided (few) in the vertical central portion as in the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress the bending plate member 6750 from wobbling.

The flat partition portion 6751c is formed in a region including a position that coincides with the front edge portion of the tip curved fin 6735a (see FIG. 272(a)) when viewed in the front-rear direction and when viewed from the side. As a result, when the light emitted from the front edge portion of the tip curved fin 6735a is viewed from the front (see FIG. 207), the light passes through the flat partition portion 6751c, so that the light is viewed clearly. can be made

On the other hand, the light emitted to the inner side surface (the side surface facing the game area) of the tip curved fin 6735a is irregularly reflected by the plurality of striped portions partitioned by the flat partitioning portion 6751c. Therefore, when the light emitted from the inner side surface of the tip curved fin 6735a is visually recognized from the side, the light emission mode can be surface emission, and the light can be obscured and visually recognized.

The central flat portion 6751d is formed in a region including a position that coincides with the front edge portion of the tip bending fin 6735b (see FIG. 272(a)) when viewed in the front-rear direction and when viewed from the side. As a result, when the light emitted from the front edge of the tip bending fin 6735b is viewed from the front (see FIG. 207), the light passes through the central flat portion 6751d, so that the light is viewed clearly. can be made

On the other hand, the light emitted to the inner side surface (the side surface facing the game area) of the tip bending fin 6735b is irregularly reflected by the plurality of striped portions. Therefore, when the light emitted from the inner side surface of the tip bending fin 6735b is visually recognized from the side surface, the light emission mode can be surface emission, and the light can be obscured and visually recognized.

Similar to the fitted plate portion 6742 of the flat plate member 6740, the fitted plate portion 6752 has a step formed between a plurality of groove portions 6752a cut out as thin grooves along the front-rear direction on the left side surface and the body curved portion 6751. and a front-rear direction hole 6752b bored in a direction along the groove portion 6752a. The groove portion 6752a and the front-rear direction hole 6752b have a function of aligning the curved plate member 6750 and the cover member 6760, which will be described later in detail.

The fastening portion 6753 is a portion that is fastened and fixed by a fastening screw passing through the insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 269(a)) of the base member 6710 . The fastening portion 6753 is arranged at a position close to the outside of the left edge of the electrical board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 in a front view, and is arranged in such a manner as to enter the concave portion of the electrical board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 (FIG. 269 ( a), see FIG. 274(b)), the positional deviation of the electrical board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 with respect to the curved plate member 6750 can be suppressed.

The fastening portions 6754 are portions into which fastening screws inserted through the insertion holes 6745 are screwed, and are arranged at positions (four locations) corresponding to the insertion holes 6745 . Since a plurality of fastening portions 6754 are arranged, the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 can be firmly fixed only by fastening in the left-right direction.

On the other hand, the flat plate member 6740 is firmly fixed to the base member 6710 by the protruding portions 6743 and the fastening portions 6744. Therefore, when the number of the fastening portions 6753 of the curved plate member 6750 is reduced, the curved plate member 6750 wobble can be suppressed. As a result, since the number of fastening portions 6753 near the rear end of the curved plate member 6750 can be reduced, the number of locations where light is blocked by fastening screws can be reduced. large area can be secured.

The insertion hole 6755 and the insertion hole 6756 are through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted from the back side, and guide wall portions 6755a and 6756a for guiding the fastening portion 6764 (see FIG. 279) of the cover member 6760 are provided on the front side thereof. formed (see FIG. 277).

The guide wall portions 6755a and 6756a are formed such that the inner side surfaces having a slightly larger diameter than the outer diameter of the fastening portion 6764 of the cover member 6760 are arranged to face the right side of the fastening portion 6764 (the side close to the flat plate member 6740). be done. As a result, the leftward movement of the curved plate member 6750 in the assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (see FIG. 265) can be restricted by the fastening portion 6764 of the cover member 6760. It can be prevented from being removed.

The cover member 6760 is attached to the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 by sliding the fastening portion 6764 back and forth along the guide wall portions 6755a and 6756a. The cover member 6760 includes a body plate portion 6761 that is a flat plate portion that covers the fitted plate portion 6742 of the flat plate member 6740 from the right side, and a front side edge of the body plate portion 6761 that is bent to cover the curved plate member 6750 . A curved plate portion 6762, which is a curved plate portion shaped to cover the fitting plate portion 6742 from the left side, extends left and behind the curved plate portion 6762 from two positions spaced apart from the upper and lower central positions by approximately the same distance in the vertical direction. A connecting extension portion 6763 connected at an end portion and a plurality of fastening screws disposed on the back surface of the curved plate portion 6762 and inserted through the insertion holes 6755 and 6756 of the curved plate member 6750 can be screwed. A fastening portion 6764, and a proximal fastening portion formed so that a fastening screw can be screwed therein, which is disposed at the rear side end portion of the upper end portion of the curved plate portion 6762 and is inserted through the insertion hole 6714 near the upper end portion of the base member 6710. 6765 (see FIG. 279), and a plurality of projecting portions 6766 projecting from the back side end portion of the main body plate portion 6761 toward the back side.

The main body plate portion 6761 is slidable inside the groove portion 6742a at a position corresponding to the groove portion 6742a of the flat plate member 6740, and protrudes leftward in a rib shape along a straight line in the front-rear direction. It has a plurality of projecting ribs 6761a.

The protruding rib 6761a is formed to protrude rearward from the back side edge of the main body plate portion 6761, and this protruding portion is inserted through the front-rear direction hole 6742b. That is, the projecting portion is arranged to face the left side surface of the main body plate portion 6741, and movement of the main body plate portion 6741 can be restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the flat plate member 6740 from being displaced to the left with respect to the cover member 6760 in the assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (FIG. 265).

The curved plate portion 6762 is slidable inside the groove portion 6752a at a position corresponding to the groove portion 6752a of the curved plate member 6750. The curved plate portion 6762 protrudes rightward in a rib shape along a straight line in the front-rear direction. A plurality of protruding ribs 6762a are provided.

The protruding rib 6762a is formed to protrude rearward from the back side edge of the curved plate portion 6762, and this protruding portion is inserted through the front-rear direction hole 6752b. That is, the projecting portion is arranged to face the right side surface of the main body curved portion 6751, and the movement of the main body curved portion 6751 can be restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the curved plate member 6750 from shifting to the right with respect to the cover member 6760 in the assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (FIG. 265).

The connecting extension part 6763 has a projecting rib 6763a that projects rightward in a rib shape along a straight line in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the front-rear direction hole 6751b.

The protruding rib 6763a is formed to protrude rearward from the back side edge of the connecting extension portion 6763 at the connecting position, and this protruding portion is inserted through the front-rear direction hole 6751b. That is, the projecting portion is arranged to face the right side surface of the decorative projecting portion 6751a, and the movement of the body curved portion 6751 can be restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the curved plate member 6750 from shifting to the right with respect to the cover member 6760 in the assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (FIG. 265).

As described above, the fastening portion 6764 is configured as a portion capable of restricting leftward movement of the curved plate member 6750 in the assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (see FIG. 265). Careless removal can be prevented.

Thus, the cover member 6760 structurally restricts the lateral movement of the curved plate member 6750 . That is, the relationship between the projecting ribs 6762a and 6763a and the longitudinal holes 6751b and 6752b restricts the rightward movement of the curved plate member 6750, and the relationship between the fastening portion 6764 and the guide walls 6755a and 6756a restricts the curved plate member. It regulates the movement of 6750 to the left. Therefore, the arrangement of the curved plate member 6750 with respect to the cover member 6760 can be stabilized.

The base end fastening portion 6765 is disposed at the rear side end portion of the upper end portion of the curved plate portion 6762, and can be screwed with a fastening screw that is inserted through an insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 267) near the upper end portion of the base member 6710. formed in That is, a fastening screw passing through the insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 269(a)) of the base member 6710 is screwed into the base end fastening portion 6765, and the base end fastening portion 6765 is fastened and fixed to the base member 6710.

The projecting portion 6766 is a portion that is inserted through the alignment hole 6716 (see FIG. 269(a)) of the base member 6710 . In addition, the projecting portion 6766 and the base end fastening portion 6765 correspond to the illumination substrate 6720 and the illumination substrate 6720 and the cover member 6760 arranged at a position close to the outside of the right edge or upper edge of the illumination substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 in a front view. Positional deviation of the light receiving member 6730 can be suppressed.

FIG. 280(a) is a cross-sectional view of the base member 6710, the illumination substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 along line CCLXXXa-CCLXXXa in FIG. 272(b), and FIG. 280(b) is CCLXXXb in FIG. 280(c) is a cross-sectional view of the base member 6710, the electrical board 6720, and the light receiving member 6730 taken along line -CCLXXXb, and FIG. 6730 is a cross-sectional view of member 6730. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 280( a ), the front-to-rear distance between the long rib 6734 and the LED chip D 1 is suppressed to a height at which the LED chip D 1 protrudes from the surface of the main body plate portion 6721 . Therefore, the light emitted from the edge light-emitting portion D1a can be made incident on the long rib 6734 without omission, and the light can be totally reflected inside the long rib 6734 (see FIG. 281) so that the light can easily travel to the front side. .

In addition, at locations where the long ribs 6734 are not arranged, the front-to-rear spacing between the surface emitting portion D1b and the light receiving surface portion 6731 is maintained to be equal to or greater than the front-to-rear width (formation length) of the long ribs 6734 . Therefore, it is possible to widen the area where the light emitted from the LED chip D1 can reach the light receiving surface portion 6731 .

As described above, according to the present embodiment, on the premise that the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is emitted radially, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a and the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b It is possible to make it easier to visually recognize the light by distinguishing it from the light.

That is, the light emitted from the edge light-emitting portion D1a can travel as a line-shaped clear light that progresses after being totally reflected inside the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735, or the light can travel through the long rib 6734. On the other hand, the light emitted from the surface light-emitting portion D1b passes through the light-receiving surface portion 6731 and the light refracting surface portion of the inner extension portion 6732 to form uniform light (faint light). ).

As a result, compared to the production mode in which a lens for concentrating the light emitted from the illumination substrate 6720 is arranged opposite to the illumination substrate 6720 as in the related art, and the glittering light is visually recognized in a small area, this embodiment is superior. According to this, it is possible to visually recognize light (planar light) that spreads over the area of the electrical decoration substrate 6720 while visually recognizing brilliant light (line-shaped light) in a small area. In addition, it is possible to easily perform an effect in which only one or both of these different lights are visually recognized by control. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in the lighting performance.

Therefore, for example, even when the same LED chip is adopted for the edge light emitting portion D1a and the surface light emitting portion D1b, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a and the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b By varying the color and brightness of each, it is possible to perform a light emission effect rich in gradation (light emission effect of different colors and brightness).

As shown in FIG. 280(b), the side surfaces of the fins 6735 in the plate thickness direction are such that the right side (the outer side surface of the front frame 10014) is aligned with the long rib 6734 in the front-rear direction, and the left side (the front frame 10014 inner surface) is an inclined surface that tapers toward the end on the front side (closer to the right side). Therefore, the normal line of the left side face does not face directly laterally (a direction parallel to the surface of the main body plate portion 6721 of the electrical board 6720, that is, a direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction), but has a component facing the front side. turn to Thereby, the light emitted from the left side surface of the fin 6735 can be directed not only to the side but also to the front side.

As shown in FIG. 280(c), since the long rib 6734 is connected to the inner extending portion 6732, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a and incident on the long rib 6734 is directed toward the inner extending portion 6732. can be proceeded with. The propagation of this light will be described using schematic diagrams.

FIG. 281 is a schematic diagram of a base member 6710, an illumination substrate 6720, and a light receiving member 6730, which schematically shows the cross section of FIG. 280(a). In FIG. 281, arrows L23a to L23e indicating light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a are schematically illustrated.

Although the intensity of the light emitted from the LEDs decreases as the angle between the surface of the electrical board 6720 and the axis X23 orthogonal to the surface of the decorative board 6720 increases, the light itself is emitted radially. In this embodiment, the subsequent arrival position differs depending on the traveling direction of the light, so the following description will be given in order.

An arrow L23a indicates the traveling direction of light that enters the end of the long rib 6734, travels through total reflection inside the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735, and reaches the front end of the fin 6735. . Since the light reaching the fin 6735 along the arrow 23a travels through total internal reflection, it is more difficult than the case where the light is partially transmitted (emitted) from the side surface of the long rib 6734 or the fin 6735. , can reduce the light energy loss. Therefore, even when the distance from the edge light emitting portion D1a is long, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the light with sufficient brightness.

An arrow L23b indicates the traveling direction of light emitted from the left side (inner side of the front frame 10014) before reaching the front end of the fin 6735. FIG. As described above, the left side surface of the fin 6735 is processed to have a jagged shape, so that light is emitted in the form of surface emission.

An arrow L23c indicates the traveling direction of the light that passes through the elongated rib 6734, travels directly to the inner extension portion 6732, and is emitted from the surface thereof. Since this light is not refracted at the end face after entering the elongated rib 6734 and the energy loss of the light is suppressed, it can be visually recognized brightly. In addition, since the outer surface of the inner extending portion 6732 (the surface opposite to the outer extending portion 6733) is processed to have a jagged shape, light is emitted in the form of surface emission.

The arrow L23d indicates the traveling direction of the light that cannot travel inside the fin 6735 and is reflected after reaching the light receiving surface portion 6731 as the coupling position of the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735 . That is, as described above, the fin 6735 is formed so that the length in the thickness direction becomes shorter toward the front side than the elongated rib 6734, and the left side surface (the inner side surface of the front frame 10014) has Since the jagged recesses are formed, the long ribs 6734 partially protrude from the fins 6735 when viewed in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, even if the light similarly travels in the front-rear direction, it cannot enter the fin 6735 at all of the coupling positions between the long rib 6734 and the light receiving surface portion 6731. In the region near the left side surface of 6734 , entry into the fin 6735 is suppressed, and the light reaching this region is reflected by the light receiving surface portion 6731 .

After that, the arrow L23d reaches the inner extension portion 6732 and is emitted. Note that the outer surface of the inner extension portion 6732 (the surface on the side opposite to the outer extension portion 6733) is processed to have a jagged shape, so that light is emitted in the form of surface emission.

Here, as shown in FIG. 281, the light indicated by the arrow L23d includes light traveling toward the rear side of the electrical board 6720. As shown in FIG. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the electrical decoration board 6720 having the LED chip D1 that emits light to the front side on the front side can cause the back side portion of the electrical decoration board 6720 to emit light (at least, the electrical decoration Light can travel to the back side of the substrate 6720, see FIG. 281).

The inner surface of the back side end portion of the curved plate member 6750 arranged on the downstream side of the arrow L23d is formed in a lens shape in which fine semicircular cross-sections are arranged vertically in a rear view (see FIG. 276). As a result, the light traveling along the arrow L23d and reaching the rear end of the curved plate member 6750 can be emitted to the left in a uniform vertical manner, and the glass unit 16 can be brightly illuminated by this light.

Therefore, it is possible to combine the light emitted from the irradiation device arranged on the back side of the glass unit 16 toward the glass unit 16 and the light traveling along the arrow L23d to perform the light effect. design freedom can be improved.

Note that, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to reduce the difference in brightness between the light indicated by the arrow L23c and the light indicated by the arrow L23d. That is, when incident on the elongated rib 6734, the light indicated by arrow L23d is brighter than the light indicated by arrow L23c due to the difference in angle from axis X23, but the light indicated by arrow L23 is brighter than the light indicated by arrow L23c. When the light is reflected by the light-receiving surface portion 6731, energy loss corresponding to the transmitted light occurs. In this way, it is possible to reduce the difference in the brightness of the light depending on the irradiation direction, and it is possible to easily make the brightness of the inner extending portion 6732 uniform over the front and back.

Here, in the present embodiment, the configuration of the horizontal effect device 6700 arranged on the left side is almost symmetrical (or similar) to the configuration of the horizontal effect device 6700 on the right side. As a special portion that is not symmetrical, the formation of long ribs 6734 (projecting to the back) is omitted (the formation of fins 6735 is maintained). As a result, the mode of light production is adjusted for each range of the game area (glass unit 16, see FIG. 265).

This adjustment is for ensuring the visibility of the player. In other words, the intention is to maintain the effect accompanying light traveling to the fins 6735 on the left side, but to suppress the light traveling to the game area side due to the light traveling to the long rib 6734 .

That is, in order to improve the visibility of the game ball at the left side of the game area where the shot ball enters the game area, the intensity of the light emitted inward (toward the game area) from the horizontal effect device 6700 is reduced. is aimed at. As a result, it is possible to prevent in advance that it becomes difficult to visually recognize the shot ball due to the dazzling light effect, and it becomes difficult to adjust the shooting intensity and confirm the shot of the game ball.

On the other hand, on the right side of the game area, most of the balls fired rightward (strongest firing strength) flow down, and there is little need for the player to visually recognize the ball to adjust the firing strength of the ball. . In addition, since a large number of game balls in a short period of time continuously flow down a narrow spot, light is emitted to the spot and reflected on the game ball, thereby producing a presentation effect using light. can be easily improved. Therefore, it is not necessary to weaken the intensity of the light on the right side of the game area. , the production effect can be improved.

An arrow L23e indicates light emitted in a direction intersecting the longitudinal direction of the long rib 6734 and emitted in a direction having a large angle with the axis X23 (light that does not enter the long rib 6734). Indicates the direction of travel. This light is reflected by the inner surfaces of the left and right extended portions 6732 and 6733, or reaches the light receiving surface portion 6731 and emits surface light, but the long rib 6734 is very close to the edge light emitting portion D1a. Since the intensity of the light traveling in the direction of the arrow L23e is very low in the first place because it is extended to the position, it can be configured as light that is difficult for the player to visually recognize.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the light traveling along the arrow L23e from being visually recognized as being mixed with the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b, thereby preventing a reduction in the effect of the light.

Returning to FIG. 280(a), the role of the fitting portion 6737 and the light emitting effect near the fitting portion 6737 will be described. The V-shaped rib 6734b is connected to a concave portion 6737a formed inside the fitting portion 6737 at the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 (see FIG. 274). Therefore, part of the light incident on the V-shaped rib 6734b reaches the left surface of the fitting portion 6737 through both walls of the recess 6737a, similar to the contents described above with the arrows L23c and L23d.

The recessed portion 6737a is configured as a recessed portion in which the fastening portion 6753 (see FIG. 278) of the curved plate member 6750 can slide back and forth. is blocked, there is a possibility that the effect of the lighting effect is lowered.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, sufficient alignment (prevention of misalignment) can be achieved by matching the shapes of the fitting portion 6737 and the decorative projecting portion 6751a. It is possible to reduce the number of fastening screws while preventing misalignment, and to reduce locations where the effect of the lighting effect is lowered.

In addition, a concave portion 6737a is arranged near the fastening screw to avoid interference with the fastening screw, and light passing through the concave portion 6737a is emitted from the surface of the inner extension portion 6732. It prevents the surrounding area from becoming too dark. As a result, it is possible to suppress the degree of reduction in the performance effect of the light emission performance.

Next, the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 282 to 284. FIG. In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the case where the decorative board 6570 is arranged on the front side of the acoustic device 6610 above the front frame 10014 has been described. By arranging the effect device 18800 having the electric decoration board 18830 below, the light emission effect can be executed even in the lower part of the front frame 18014. - 特許庁In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

282 is a front view of the pachinko machine 18010 in the eighteenth embodiment, and FIG. 283 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 18010. FIG. The pachinko machine 18010 differs from the pachinko machine 10010 in the seventeenth embodiment in that the front frame 18014 is equipped with a rendering device 18800 in contrast to the front frame 10014 in the seventeenth embodiment, and the rest of the configuration is the same. Only the device 18800 will be described, and descriptions of other configurations will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 282 and 283, the effect device 18800 is a light-emitting device in which the back side and the top side of the lower plate unit 6400 are coupled to the covering base member 6410 on the front side. It is arranged between the operating handle 51 and the operating handle 51 .

This effect device 18800 is structurally devised so that the appearance of the light emission effect changes depending on whether or not the operation device 10300 participates in the operation effect. Next, the internal structure of the rendering device 18800 will be described in order to describe the structural contrivance.

284(a) is a cross-sectional view of the rendering device 18800 taken along the line CCLXXXIVa-CCLXXXIVa in FIG. 282, and FIG. 284(b) is an electrical board 18830 of the rendering device 18800 viewed in the direction of the arrow CCLXXXIVb in FIG. 284(a). It is a schematic diagram of. In addition, in FIG.284(b), the support aspect of the electrical decoration board 18830 is shown typically.

As shown in FIG. 284(a), the effect device 18800 is provided with a connecting base member 18810 connected to the lower tray unit 6400 and a planar gap on the front side of the connecting base member 18810. An intermediate fixing member 18820 which is a frame-shaped member and is fixed to the connecting base member 18810, an electrical board 18830 arranged in a gap between the connecting base member 18810 and the intermediate fixing member 18820, and an electrical board 18830 A light-receiving member 18840 fixed to the front side of the intermediate fixing member 18820 so that the light emitted from the LED chip D1 can travel inside, and a covering member 18850 attached so as to cover the outer surface of the light-receiving member 18840 and are mainly provided.

The connecting base member 18810 has a front wall surface facing the electrical board 18830 formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the rear surface. The inclination angle of this inclined surface is the same as the direction Y17a (see FIG. 215) of vibration of the vibration device 10366 when the swing device member 10310 of the operation device 10300 is arranged in the upward position and is in the posture before operation. It is formed at an inclination angle parallel to the inclined surface.

The illumination board 18830 is arranged in parallel with the front wall surface of the connecting base member 18810 . Therefore, the vibration direction Y17a of the vibrating device 10366 is parallel to the surface of the electrical board 18830 . The electrical board 18830 mainly includes an LED chip D1, a long hole 18831 elongated in the vertical direction, and a plate spring 18832 that generates an upward biasing force.

The elongated hole 18831 is a hole through which the fixing portion 18821 of the intermediate fixing member 18820 is inserted for supporting the electrical board 18830 . Therefore, the difference (length) between the vertical length of the long hole 18831 and the diameter of the fixing portion 18821 is designed as the length (permissible length) that allows the electrical board 18830 to be mechanically displaced.

On the front side of the electrical board 18830, LED chips D1 are arranged in an arbitrary pattern (vertices of a pentagon in this embodiment), and irradiate light in the direction normal to the surface of the electrical board 18830. FIG. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction toward the front side. On the other hand, the light-receiving member 18840 that receives this light is formed so as to change the traveling direction of the light along the front-rear direction.

That is, the player sees the light whose traveling direction is changed by the light-receiving member 18840, so that the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is inclined downward toward the front side (the player's line of sight). Even in the direction away from the ), it is possible to prevent the production effect of the light production from being lowered.

The light-receiving member 18840 is made of a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin material, and includes a plate-like portion 18841 configured to be able to close the opening on the front side of the intermediate fixing member 18820, and a plate-like portion extending from the back of the plate-like portion 18841. It mainly includes a plurality of extension plate portions 18842 extending to the .

The intermediate fixing member 18820 is made of a resin material with low light transmittance and formed into a container shape with an open front side. 18821 and a plurality of insertion holes 18822 drilled at positions and sizes capable of receiving the extended plate portion 18842 on the rear side bottom portion.

In the present embodiment, since the resin mold extraction direction of the light receiving member 18840 is set in the horizontal direction, the extended plate portion 18842 is formed in a plate shape with the same cross section in the horizontal direction. Therefore, while the LED chips D1 are arranged at the apexes of the pentagon, the LED chips D1 arranged horizontally at the intermediate position and the lower position can be associated with the common extension plate portion 18842 . Thereby, the extension plate portion 18842 can be formed as three upper and lower plate-like portions having different widths. Similarly, the insertion hole 18822 of the intermediate fixing member 18820 is also bored at three upper and lower positions with different widths.

Here, as shown in FIG. 284, the extension plate portion 18842 is formed in a curved plate shape that gradually curves, although it begins to extend along the normal direction of the plate-like portion 18841 . The curvature radius of the curve can be arbitrarily set, but in this embodiment, the curvature is set to the extent that the light emitted from the LED chip D1 of the electrical board 18830 can continue to be totally reflected until it reaches the plate-like portion 18841. Designed with a curved shape with a large radius. This makes it possible to make it easier for the light incident on the extended tip (back side end) of the extended plate portion 18842 to reach the plate-like portion 18841 while maintaining its intensity.

The covering member 18850 is a member for suppressing light leakage from a portion of the outer surface of the light receiving member 18840 where no light effect is desired, and can be realized in various ways. For example, it may be a light-shielding tape (insulating tape) that can be attached, or a cup-shaped member made of a resin material.

In this embodiment, the covering member 18850 is configured as a cup-shaped member that can be fitted from the front side. A plurality of through-holes 18851 are formed at the vertex position of to allow light to pass through.

As described above, the arrangement of the through holes 18851 does not have to be the same as the arrangement of the LED chips D1, and a similar shape with a slightly different size is possible. Considering the traveling mode of the light emitted from the LED chip D1, the formation mode of the light receiving member 18840 is more important in designing the placement of the through holes 18851 than the placement of the LED chip D1. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the through hole 18851 is designed to be formed at a position that coincides with the position of the base of the extended plate portion 18842 of the light receiving member 18840 in a front view.

The action of the effect device 18800 will be described. As described above, the electrical board 18830 is movable in the first displacement direction parallel to the surface on which the LED chip D1 is arranged, within an allowable width corresponding to the long hole 18831. It coincides with the vibration direction Y17a of the vibration device 10366 of the device 10300 .

That is, when the operation device 10300 performs a vibration presentation, the illumination board 18830 is configured to be slidable by the vibration. When the electrical board 18830 slides, the position of the LED chip D1 shifts from the edge of the extended plate portion 18842, making it difficult for the light emitted from the LED chip D1 to enter the extended plate portion 18842.

In this case, even when light is emitted from the LED chip D1, it is difficult for the light to travel through the extension plate portion 18842, so the through hole 18851 is visually recognized as dark. That is, it cannot be grasped whether the LED chip D1 is emitting light. On the other hand, in the operation device 10300, as described above, by operating the swing operation member 10310, the vibration direction Y17a of the vibration device 10366 changes to a direction different from the first shift direction.

In this case, the influence of the vibration of the operation device 10300 on the electrical board 18830 is suppressed, and the electrical board 18830 returns to the initial position (upper end position) by the biasing force of the plate spring 18832 . At the initial position of the electrical board 18830, the LED chip D1 and the rear side end of the extension plate portion 18842 are arranged to face each other, and the light emitted from the LED chip D1 enters the extension plate portion 18842 and is then totally reflected. is formed to be able to advance to the front side.

That is, even when the operation device 10300 is performing a vibration effect (when the through-hole 18851 is visually recognized darkly) in a state where light is emitted from the LED chip D1, by pushing the swing operation member 10310 , the through-hole 18851 can be visually recognized brightly.

Therefore, when the through hole 18851 is visually recognized dark when the vibration effect is performed, it is possible to grasp whether or not the LED chip D1 is emitting light by operating the swing operation member 10310. can be done. Here, for example, the LED chip D1 is controlled to emit light when a big win occurs or when the game state is shifted to a game state advantageous to the player (that is, when a change advantageous to the player occurs). , the player's interest in whether or not the LED chip D1 emits light can be enhanced.

As a result, since the player's desire to operate the swing operation member 10310 can be enhanced, when the effect of operating the swing operation member 10310 is executed, the player's willingness to participate is enhanced, and the player is actually encouraged to participate. The swing operation member 10310 can be induced to operate.

In this embodiment, the case where the electrical board 18830 is arranged outside the covering base member 6410 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the electrical board 18830 may be arranged in such a manner that it penetrates the covering base member 6410 and enters inside, and can come into contact with the operation device 10300 .

In this case, the vibration of the operation device 10300 can be easily transmitted to the illumination board 18830, and the illumination board 18830 slides not only with the vibration but also with the pushing operation (push operation) into the lens member 10317. can be configured as

In this case, for example, the LED chip D1 may be controlled to emit light at a timing other than the timing at which the pressing instruction as the notification effect is generated. When the lens member 10317 is pushed (push operation) at the timing when the LED chip D1 emits light, it is possible to realize a configuration in which it is difficult to grasp whether or not the LED chip D1 emits light from the front view.

In other words, when the lens member 10317 is pressed (push operation) at a timing other than the notification, it is possible to make it easier for the player to miss the notification that is advantageous to the player. Since it is possible to easily suppress the pressing operation to the lens member 10317 at times other than the timing at which the pressing instruction is generated, the operation device 10300 may fail early, or the operation device may be operated unnecessarily many times to generate noise. It is possible to suppress nuisance behavior.

Next, the nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the covers 10321 and 10322 of the operation device 10300 are formed so as to be divided into left and right. there is In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 285 is a side view of covers 19321 and 19322 in the nineteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 285, in this embodiment, an upper cover 19321 and a lower cover 19322 are arranged so as to surround the swing operation member 10310 (see FIG. 207). The main configuration of the covers 19321 and 19322 has substantially the same shape as the above-described covers 10321 and 10322, and the description will be made mainly as an example in which the direction of division is changed.

The covers 19321 and 19322 are formed so as to be separable along a dividing plane coinciding with the reference line X19 shown in FIG. The cover 19322 can be fastened and fixed by a fastening screw that is screwed into the fastening portion 19322a of the cover 19322 .

Here, the reference line X19 is set as a direction parallel to the vibration direction Y17a (see FIG. 215) of the vibration device 10366 before operation when the swing operation member 10310 is in the upward position. That is, since the fastening direction of the fastening screw fastened to the fastening portion 19322a is perpendicular to the vibration direction Y17a in a side view (see FIG. 285), loosening of the fastening screw due to the impact of vibration can be suppressed.

In addition, since the direction Y17a of vibration of the swinging operation member 10310 is the same as the pushing operation direction (push direction) of the lens member 10317 (see FIG. 216(a)), the pushing operation direction of the lens member 10317 and the fastening screw 285 are perpendicular to each other in a side view (see FIG. 285), it is possible to suppress loosening of the fastening screws due to impact caused by the operation of the lens member 10317 .

Next, a twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the projecting shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are formed in a flat plate shape in cross section, and the plate thickness is substantially constant at the inclined portion. The protruding shape part 16413 and the recessed shape part 16414 in the form are slightly inclined in the vertical direction. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

286 is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit 16400 in the twentieth embodiment taken along line CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb in FIG. 229. FIG. As shown in FIG. 286, in this embodiment, the inclinations of the left and right ends of the projecting shape portion 16413 and the recessed shape portion 16414 are different from those of the projecting shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 described above in the seventeenth embodiment. is set closer to the vertical direction.

In addition, the lower end portion of the protruding shape portion 16413 (corresponding to the protruding shape portion 6413 of the seventeenth embodiment) and the upper end portion of the recessed shape portion 16414 (corresponding to the recessed shape portion 6414 of the seventeenth embodiment) ( base end of the recess) are arranged on the same line in the up-down direction (vertical direction).

The hanging plate-like portion 6426b of the plate-like support portion 6426 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is in contact with and supported by the base end portion of the concave portion 16414 (upper surface of the main body portion 6411). Since a sufficient thickness for supporting the 6411 in the vertical direction (vertical direction) can be ensured, deformation of the main body 6411 due to the load during operation of the operation device 10300 (see FIG. 207) can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, the case where the inclination of the left and right ends is changed compared to the projecting shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the left and right outer surfaces of the projecting shape portion 6413 and the left and right inner surfaces of the recess shape portion 6414 may be formed along the vertical direction (the vertical direction in a cross-sectional view) without any inclination. Even in this case, the supporting thickness of the main body portion 6411 can be sufficiently secured.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by forming an inverted V shape in cross section, the direction in which the projecting shape portion 6413 and the recess shape portion 6414 are deformed when receiving an external force is shifted to the left-right center side. can be easily directed to As a result, the degree of fatigue caused by external force can be reduced compared to the case where deformation is possible in both the left and right directions, and the plate portion forming the projecting shape portion 6413 and the recess shape portion 6414 is damaged early. can be prevented. In other words, the durability of the lower tray unit 6400 can be improved.

Next, a twenty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 287 to 301. FIG. In the seventeenth embodiment described above, a case was described in which the supply of electricity to the lower tray unit 6400 was not required. Equipped with a device 21500, it is necessary to supply electricity to the lower tray unit 21400. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 287 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, operation device 10300 and lower tray unit 21400 in the twenty-first embodiment. 287, the illustration of the upper half of the front frame 10014 is omitted, and the lower tray unit 21400 and the operation device 10300 are shown disassembled from the metal main body 10014a and viewed from the rear side. .

In order to facilitate understanding, the assembling direction lines connecting the insertion holes 6801R and 6801L and their fastening portions are illustrated by imaginary lines. is partially illustrated in relation to the front frame 10014, the operating device 10300 and the lower tray unit 21400. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 287, a bottom member 21De obtained by changing the design of the bottom member De described above is fastened and fixed to the bottom side of the operation device 10300. As shown in FIG. The bottom member 21De includes, in addition to the configuration of the bottom member De described above, a projecting portion De3 that projects to the right.

The protruding portion De3 has both a function of applying a load to the vibrating device 21500 and a function of regulating the displacement of the electrical wiring 21513 connected to the vibrating device 21500 . That is, as shown in FIG. 287, the electrical wiring 21513 is routed along the underside of the protruding portion De3, so that when the lower tray unit 21400 is removed for maintenance, the electrical wiring 21513 and the right front cover are separated from each other. 10322 can be prevented from rubbing against each other.

The projecting portion De3 is formed so that the rear side thereof is inclined so that the width becomes narrower toward the projecting end, while the front side constitutes a plane parallel to a plane perpendicular to the front-rear direction. By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a gap between the metal body portion 10014a and the rear side of the projecting portion De3 while ensuring the rigidity of the projecting portion De3.

In this gap, the electrical wiring 21513 of a length necessary for removing the lower tray unit 21400 during maintenance (wiring of a length that fills the length of the distance between the lower tray unit 21400 and the metal main body 10014a) is inserted into the lower tray unit 21400. is not detached (when fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a), it is effectively utilized as a region where it is placed loosely. As a result, compared to the case where the electrical wiring 21513 is arranged in a tight space when the lower tray unit 21400 is not removed, the load received by the electrical wiring 21513 from the surroundings can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 287, the operating handle 51 is internally supported by a handle support plate 21051, and the handle support plate 21051 is fastened and fixed to the metal body portion 10014a. In the assembled state (see FIG. 208), the left edge of the handle support plate 21051 and the right edge of the lower tray unit 21400 overlap front to back. A fastening portion is not formed, and the connection with the lower tray unit 21400 is performed by engagement (fitting by fitting in the front-rear direction) rather than by fastening.

Therefore, the lower tray unit 21400 and the handle support plate 21051 are not mechanically fixed, but are configured to be relatively displaceable in the front-rear direction.

As a result, compared to the case where the right edge of the lower tray unit 21400 and the left edge of the handle support plate 21051 are fastened and fixed over the entire area, the right edge of the lower tray unit 21400 is displaced in the front-rear direction. Along with this, it is possible to prevent the left edge of the handle support plate 21051 from being displaced in the front-rear direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the vibration of the vibrating device 21500, which will be described later, from being transmitted to the operation handle 51 via the handle support plate 21051. FIG.

That is, the vibration of the vibration device 21500 can be configured to be transmitted from the lower tray unit 21400 to the player. For example, the transmission path of the vibration transmitted to the player holding the operating handle 51 is not a path through the operating handle 51, but a lower tray unit that contacts the fingers or arms of the player holding the operating handle 51. 21400 right side.

288 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower tray unit 21400, and FIG. 289 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower tray unit 21400. FIG. In FIGS. 288 and 289, portions corresponding to fixing points of the covering base member 21410, the lower plate forming member 21420, the V-shaped design member 21450, and the vibrating device 21500 are shown in phantom lines.

In addition to the configuration of the covering base member 6410 described above, the covering base member 21410 includes a plurality of (in this embodiment, one pair) formed in a region on the right side of the recessed shape portion 6414 of the body portion 6411 so that a fastening screw can be screwed therein. ) fastening portion 21415. A fastening screw inserted through a pair of upper and lower insertion portions 21535 arranged on the right side of the vibration device 21500 is screwed into the fastening portion 21415 . That is, the right insertion portion 21535 is fastened and fixed to the covering base member 21410 .

The lower plate forming member 21420 has, in addition to the configuration of the lower plate forming member 6420 described above, a support hole 21428 drilled in the front-rear direction in a plate-like portion extending upward from the upper surface of the front longitudinally elongated portion 6426c. The fastening portion 21457 of the V-shaped design member 21450 , which is the connecting portion between the V-shaped design member 21450 and the vibration device 21500 , is inserted through the support hole 21428 .

In addition to the configuration of the V-shaped design member 6450 described above, the V-shaped design member 21450 is provided in a columnar shape to the rear side as a substitute for the plate-shaped protrusion 6453R (see FIG. 227), and allows a fastening screw to be screwed into it. A fastening portion 21457 is formed, and a connecting plate-like portion 21458 is formed in a plate shape and connects between the fastening portion 21457 and the insertion hole 6452 .

The fastening portion 21457 is inserted through the support hole 21428 in the assembled state (see FIG. 208), and a fastening screw inserted through the insertion portion 21535 on the left side of the vibrating device 21500 is screwed into the fastening portion 21457 to be fastened and fixed. That is, the left insertion portion 21535 is fastened and fixed to the lower plate forming member 21420 and the V-shaped design member 21450 .

Therefore, the vibrating device 21500 is not fastened and fixed to a single member, but is fastened and fixed to a plurality of members (covering base member 21410, lower plate forming member 21420 and V-shaped design member 21450). Thereby, the fastening strength of these members can be reinforced by the vibration device 21500 .

Here, as described above, the V-shaped design member 21450 has the protruding fastening portions 6454 disposed at the left and right ends fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a via intermediate members. Therefore, it is structurally stiffer than the covering base member 21410 which is configured in a substantially bag-like shape opening to the rear side and which is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a mainly at the rear side edge portion.

That is, the covering base member 21410 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a at a plurality of positions at the lower end and the left end on the back side, while the number of fastening positions at the upper part and the right edge is suppressed (or not, Since it is formed in a thin, substantially box-like (substantially bag-like) shape, it has a structure with a high degree of freedom of displacement (low resistance), especially at the right edge.

Furthermore, since the V-shaped design member 21450 is fastened and fixed to the front upper edge of the covering base member 21410, the vertical displacement of the covering base member 21410 can be suppressed by the V-shaped design member 21450. , the degree of freedom of displacement of the covering base member 21410 can be improved in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction). As a result, the displacement of the covering base member 21410 can prevent the ball stored in the lower tray 50 from bouncing due to the vertical displacement of the lower tray 50, for example.

According to the present embodiment, the hard V-shaped design member 21450 is used as a base (reference) to vibrate the covering base member 21410 which is flexible (higher degree of freedom of displacement) than the V-shaped design member 21450. Therefore, the right side portion of the covering base member 21410 can be intensively vibrated (strongly vibrated) by driving the vibrating device 21500 .

In addition, since the transmission of vibration to the V-shaped design member 21450 and the lower plate forming member 21420 can be suppressed, the operation device 10300 vibrates due to the vibration of the vibration device 21500, and the ball stored in the lower plate 50 vibrates. Vibration due to the vibration of the device 21500 can be avoided, and from this, it can be said that the right side portion of the covering base member 21410 can be intensively vibrated (strongly vibrated) by driving the vibration device 21500 .

The connecting plate-like portion 21458 is formed in an elongated plate-like shape along the longitudinal direction of the later-described shell-like overhanging portion 21541 . As a result, the connecting plate portion 21458 and the shell-shaped overhanging portion 21541 can be brought into contact with each other along the longitudinal direction of the shell-shaped overhanging portion 21541, and a large load generating area can be secured. stress concentration (at the time of pressing) can be avoided.

In the present embodiment, in the assembled state (see FIG. 208), the shell-like projecting portion 21541 is configured in a dimensional relationship to abut (press) the connecting plate-like portion 21458 (see FIG. 298). Therefore, vibration can be received through at least the contact position between the shell-shaped projecting portion 21541 and the connecting plate-shaped portion 21458 .

This configuration is effective in a configuration in which the vibrating device 21500 is fastened and fixed to a plurality of members as in this embodiment. That is, compared to the case where the vibrating device 21500 is fastened and fixed to a single member, when fastening and fixing the vibrating device 21500 to a plurality of members, there is a possibility that deviations from the design dimensions of each member may accumulate, so the dimensions are increased. It is easy for the deviation to become large. Therefore, the arrangement of the vibration device 21500 becomes unstable, and it becomes difficult to stabilize the transmission strength of vibration.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in anticipation of the possibility of dimensional deviations, no matter how the dimensional deviations occur (regardless of the dimensions within the large and small limits), By designing the dimensions such that the projecting portion 21541 contacts the connecting plate portion 21458 (if the distance is short, the projecting portion 21541 contacts while being deformed so as to be crushed), the projecting portion 21541 is stably shaped like a shell. The projecting portion 21541 and the connecting plate-like portion 21458 can be brought into contact with each other. Therefore, vibration can be stably received.

In this embodiment, the direction of contact between the shell-shaped protruding portion 21541 and the connecting plate-shaped portion 21458 is set to the front-rear direction in the same manner as the screwing direction of the fastening screw. Therefore, even if the V-shaped design member 21450 is displaced downward by operating the operation device 10300 as described above, the V-shaped design member 21450 is displaced so as to slide relative to the shell-shaped projecting portion 21541. , and it is possible to avoid the transmission of the downward displacement. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the vibration device 21500 from being pushed down when the operation device 10300 is operated.

In this embodiment, the vibrating device 21500 is installed at a flexible portion of the covering base member 21410, so it breaks the outer shell of the pachinko machine A10 and penetrates inside (for example, a thin metal wire). Intrusion) is a location that is easily broken in the event of fraudulent activity. That is, in the present embodiment, the vibrating device 21500 is arranged at a location that is likely to be selected as an intrusion route by a person who commits fraudulent acts.

Therefore, when the covering base member 21410 is broken, there is a possibility that the vibrating device 21500 will be destroyed or disconnected at the same time. By controlling so that an error signal is output as the audio lamp control device 113 detects this, it is possible to detect fraudulent activity at an early stage.

Also, instead of the vibration device 21500, a device that outputs an error signal may be provided. It can be used for performance. That is, since the vibrating device 21500 can be used both for vibrating effects and for detecting fraud (it can be configured as a multifunctional device), it is possible to reduce the installation space of the device.

290 is an exploded front perspective view of vibration device 21500, and FIG. 291 is an exploded rear perspective view of vibration device 21500. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 290 and 291, the vibration device 21500 includes a vibration motor 21510 capable of generating vibration by controlling the rotation of an eccentric weight 21512, and a soft resin material (silicon resin, etc.). and a covering member 21520 that covers the vibration motor 21510, and a material that is harder than the covering member 21520 (for example, a resin material or a metal material) and partially covers the covering member 21520 from the rear side. a cover member 21530 formed in a shape that allows the cover member 21520 to be covered, and a flat plate-shaped opposing plate member 21540 arranged to face the cover member 21530 with the covering member 21520 interposed therebetween.

The covering cover member 21530 and the opposing plate member 21540 hold the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 so as to surround them from the front and back, and are fastened and fixed by fastening screws. That is, the covering cover 21530 has a plurality of (two in this embodiment) insertion holes 21532 through which the threaded portions of the fastening screws can be inserted, and the opposing plate member 21540 has the fastening screws inserted through the insertion holes 21532 screwed therein. A plurality of fasteners 21542 can be formed. Hereinafter, the vibrating motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 to be held will be described first, and then the details of the covering cover member 21530 and the opposing plate member 21540 will be described.

292 is an exploded front perspective view of the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520, FIG. 293 is an exploded rear perspective view of the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520, and FIG. 294 is a front perspective view of the covering member 21520. be. FIG. 294 shows a perspective view of the covering member 21520 viewed obliquely from above.

The vibration motor 21510 includes a body portion 21511 whose rotation is controlled by energization of the shaft portion, an eccentric weight 21512 fixed to the shaft portion and having a center of gravity located at a position different from the shaft portion, and a lower surface of the body portion 21511. and an electric wiring 21513 (electrically connected to a terminal formed on the lower surface) extending downward from the .

The covering member 21520 includes a cylindrical body portion 21521 formed in a cylindrical shape with an inner shape slightly smaller than the outer shape of the body portion 21511 of the vibration motor 21510, and a ridge extending vertically along the back surface of the cylindrical body portion 21521. a pair of ridges 21522 formed as , a plate-like protrusion 21523 projecting in the left-right direction along the lower surface of the tubular main body 21521, and a bottom view length from the lower surface of the tubular main body 21521 It is provided with a projecting portion 21524 that is circular and projects downward.

The protruding portion 21524 is formed in an elliptical shape having a size that encloses the connection position between the main body portion 21511 of the vibration motor 21510 and the electrical wiring 21513 in a bottom view, and the upper surface side is recessed so as to receive the electrical wiring 21513 .

That is, as shown in FIG. 294, the protruding portion 21524 extends vertically in a recessed portion 21524a that is recessed downward from the lower surface side of the tubular main body portion 21521 and in a region sandwiched between the recessed portion 21524a. A wiring through-hole 21524b is drilled, and a pair of spare holes 21524c are vertically drilled at positions opposite to the wiring through-hole 21524b with the recessed portion 21524a interposed therebetween.

With the above configuration, the electric wiring 21513 is guided to the wiring through-hole 21524b while being held in the recessed portion 21524a, and is guided in the opening direction (downward) of the wiring through-hole 21524b. That is, in this embodiment, the covering member 21520 can have the function of preventing the electrical wiring 21513 from sagging due to its own weight, the function of bundling the electrical wiring 21513 , and the function of guiding the electrical wiring 21513 . As a result, the number of binding bands required can be reduced, and material costs and manufacturing man-hours can be reduced.

In addition, since a gap is generated between the covering cover 21530 and the opposing plate portion 21540 when the covering member 21520 is not assembled, it is possible to prevent the operator from forgetting to attach the covering member 21520. . Therefore, forgetting to assemble the member for holding the electric wiring 21513 can be suppressed compared to the case where the binding band is prepared separately to hold the electric wiring 21513 .

Note that in this embodiment, the electrical wiring 21513 is connected to the input/output port 225 of the audio lamp controller 113 (see FIG. 4). That is, the vibration motor 21510 of the vibration device 21500 is configured as a part of the other device 228 and is vibration-controlled by the control signal transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

The preliminary hole 21524c is formed at a position vertically corresponding to the connection position between the electrical wiring 21513 and the main body 21511 . That is, even if the electric wire 21513 is about to come off from the main body 21511, the electric wire 21513 can be pushed into the main body 21511 by inserting a thin rod through the spare hole 21524c and pushing the electric wire 21513. can. This can prevent the electrical wiring 21513 from coming off the main body 21511 .

In this embodiment, a vibrating device 21500 is arranged in a lower tray unit 21400 (see FIG. 287). Since the lower tray unit 21400 is detachable from the metal main body 10014a, if a worker who performs maintenance work accidentally removes the lower tray unit 21400 too far from the metal main body 10014a, the electrical wiring 21513 may be damaged. Excessive load is applied, and there is a risk of disconnection. Also, if an excessive load is applied to the electrical wiring 21513 when the vibrating device 21500 vibrates, the electrical wiring 21513 may break.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the projecting portion 21524 is formed so as to cover the connection position between the electrical wiring 21513 and the main body portion 21511, the connection position between the electrical wiring 21513 and the main body portion 21511 is excessive. Displacement can be prevented.

Furthermore, before the wiring through hole 21524b, the electric wiring 21513 having a length to be held in the recessed portion 21524a is secured, so that the electric wiring 21513 can be prevented from breaking for this length. You can (you can afford it). In addition, even if a load is applied to the electric wiring 21513, the length direction of the electric wiring 21513 held in the concave portion 21524a (that is, the direction of the overhanging portion 21524) is not the connecting direction between the electric wiring 21513 and the main body portion 21511. Since the load is applied along the longitudinal direction), it is possible to prevent the electrical wiring 21513 from falling out of the main body 21511 .

In addition, as described above, even if the electrical wiring 21513 falls off from the main body 21511, the electrical wiring 21513 can be easily reconnected to the main body 21511 by inserting a thin rod through the spare hole 21524c. can. Therefore, it is possible to improve the work efficiency of maintenance work including the step of removing the lower tray unit 21400 .

In addition, in the step of inserting (assembling) the vibration motor 21510 into the covering member 21520 , the electrical wiring 21513 is arranged on the covering member 21520 side with respect to the main body portion 21511 . Therefore, since the work of inserting the electric wiring 21513 into the wiring through-hole 21524b can be performed simultaneously with the work of inserting the vibration motor 21510 into the covering member 21520, the efficiency of the assembly work can be improved.

295 is a front view of the covering cover member 21530. FIG. In the description of FIG. 295, FIGS. 290 and 291 will be referred to as needed. The covering cover member 21530 includes a body portion 21531 forming a frame whose front side and bottom side are open, the insertion hole 21532 described above, and a receiving recess 21533 which is recessed in the front side of the body portion 21531 and receives the vibration motor 21510. , a plurality of ridges 21534 extending in the front-rear direction, which are ridges projecting inward from the left and right inner surfaces of the receiving recess 21533, and a plurality of ridges 21534 extending in the front-rear direction at the upper and lower positions of the insertion holes 21532. , a covering base member 21410, a lower plate forming member 21420 and a V-shaped design member 21450 (see FIGS. 288 and 289).

The receiving recess 21533 includes a weight receiving recess 21533a for receiving the eccentric weight 21512, a main body receiving recess 21533b for receiving the main body 21511, and a weight receiving recess 21533a and the main body in such a manner that the rotation axis of the main body 21511 is arranged at the center position in the left-right direction. and a bearing receiving recess 21533c that connects the receiving recess 21533b.

The main body receiving recess 21533b is recessed by an extra length on the right side with respect to the bearing receiving recess 21533c compared to the left side. Conversely, the right side of the protrusion 21534 protrudes by an extra length compared to the left side, so that the protruding tip of the protrusion 21534 is substantially left and right with respect to the bearing receiving recess 21533c. They are placed in symmetrical positions.

As a result, as a holding mode of the covering member 21520, when the vibration motor 21510 is in a non-excited state (stopped state), it is held by the projecting tip of the projection 21534, while when the vibration motor 21510 is in an excited state (vibrating state), it is held by the main body. Deformation (displacement, flow) of the covering member 21520 can be dealt with by a deep recess formed on the right side of the receiving recess 21533b (a recess formed between the vertically arranged ridges 21534). As a result, the covering cover member 21530 can be prevented from being overloaded, and the durability of the covering cover member 21530 can be improved.

Since the rib portion 21534 is formed along the front-rear direction, the displacement of the covering member 21520 that is supported in contact with the rib portion 21534 in the left and right direction is affected by engagement with and biting into the rib portion 21534. Therefore, it is likely to occur in the front, back, left and right (horizontal direction), and is suppressed in the vertical direction.

Therefore, even in a configuration in which the body portion 21511 is arranged at the upper end of the body portion 21511 such that the eccentric weight 21512 is arranged at the upper end of the body portion 21511, and the body portion 21511 tends to tilt about the lower end when vibration occurs, the vertical component of the vibration can be suppressed. , the displacement direction of the vibration motor 21510 can be corrected in the horizontal direction.

The projecting portion 21534 is formed in the shape of a plane plate having a vertical width half that of the left and right side portions in the left and right intermediate portions of the main body portion 21531, and the projecting length increases as it approaches the intermediate portion 21531a side (back side) (cover side). The covering member 21520 can be supported from the left and right sides and from the rear side.

In addition, the ridge portion 21534 has a deep inclined portion 21534a that rises from the nearest ridge portion 21534 toward the intermediate lower surface 21531b below the intermediate lower surface 21531b that constitutes the lower surface of the intermediate portion 21531a.

The distance between the rear inclined portion 21534a and the ridge portion 21534 directly above it narrows toward the rear side. Therefore, when the vibration motor 21510 is displaced toward the rear side in the excitation state of the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 is deformed, compared to the case where the interval between the upper and lower protrusions 21534 is not narrowed, the rear inclined portion The load (reaction force) applied to the portion of the covering member 21520 that enters between 21534a and the protrusion 21534 directly above it can be increased. This can prevent the covering member 21520 from being excessively displaced to the back side.

The protrusions 21534 are not arranged completely symmetrically, but are arranged with a partial vertical shift. As a result, compared to the case where the ridges 21534 are arranged at completely symmetrical positions, it is possible to easily avoid applying a load to the covering member 21520 from both left and right directions on the same horizontal plane. , the compressive load applied to the covering member 21520 can be reduced.

Note that the protrusions 21534 may be arranged completely symmetrically. In this case, it is preferable to select a material that is not brittle as the material of the covering member 21520 .

The formation of the lower half portion of the rear side wall portion of the body portion 21531 is omitted. Therefore, as a holding mode of the covering member 21520 , displacement of the covering member 21520 is restricted in the upper half of the main body 21531 , while displacement of the covering member 21520 is allowed in the lower half of the main body 21531 .

Therefore, when the covering member 21520 is displaced to the rear side due to the excitation of the vibration motor 21510, the upper half of the protrusion 21522 is restricted by the upper half of the main body 21531 and the lower half is allowed to displace. , can be deformed so as to progress (flow) to the open area in the lower half of the main body 21531, and work to improve the vibration performance of the vibration device 21500, which will be described later in detail.

The plate-like protrusion 21523 of the covering member 21520 is supported at its right side by the protrusion 21534 of the covering cover member 21530 from below. Also, the left side is open to the covering cover member 21530 and is supported by the support extending portion 21543 of the opposing plate member 21540 (see FIG. 291). Thereby, in addition to being able to support the weight of the vibrating motor 21510 and the covering member 21520, it is possible to configure an open portion accessible from the outside on the lower side of the covering member 21520. FIG.

That is, with respect to the covering member 21520, the covering member 21530 covers the lower part from the right rear side, and the opposing plate member 21540 covers the lower part from the left front side. The lower left rear portion of the member 21520 can be opened as an opening. This open portion functions as a portion that ensures contact between the projecting portion De3 and the covering member 21520 .

The opposing plate member 21540 is a plate-like member arranged to face the covering cover member 21530 from the opening side of the covering cover member 21530, and includes a shell-shaped projecting portion 21541 formed to project to the front side, It has the fastening portion 21542 described above and a support extension portion 21543 extending from the lower left end to the rear side.

The shell-shaped overhanging portion 21541 is formed thin like the opposing plate member 21540, and a gap is formed between the overhanging tip portion and the covering member 21520, so that the shell-shaped overhanging portion 21541 Even if a load is applied in a pushing direction (toward the back) and the shell-shaped overhanging portion 21541 is deformed, transmission of a large load to the covering member 21520 can be avoided.

296(a) is a top view of the lower tray unit 21400, FIG. 296(b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit 21400 along line CCXCVIb-CCXCVIb in FIG. 296(a), and FIG. FIG. 298 is a rear view of the plate unit 21400, and FIG. 298 is a cross-sectional view of the lower plate unit 21400 along line CCXCVIII-CCXCVIII in FIG. 296(a).

As shown in FIG. 296(b), the projecting portion 21522 of the covering member 21520 and the overhanging portion De3 of the bottom member 21De are configured in such a dimensional relationship that they are in contact with each other in the front-rear direction, and the vibration motor 21510 is in a non-excited state (stopped state). ), the protruding portion De3 slightly bites into the ridge portion 21522 (the ridge portion 21522 is slightly deformed).

By applying a load from the projecting portion De3 to the ridge portion 21522, the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 in the vibrating device 21500 can be moved forward. As a result, it is possible to prevent the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 from unintentionally stopping at a position near the rear side.

FIG. 299(a) is a schematic partial top view of the lower tray unit 21400 schematically illustrating the lower tray unit 21400, and FIG. 299(b) is a lower tray unit viewed in the direction of the arrow CCXCIXb in FIG. 299(a). 300(a) is a partial schematic top view of the lower tray unit 21400 schematically illustrating the lower tray unit 21400, and FIG. 300(b) is a partial schematic side view of the lower tray unit 21400. 21400 is a partial schematic side view of the lower tray unit 21400 viewed in the direction of arrow CCCb of FIG.

FIGS. 299(a) and 299(b) show a state in which the vibrating device 21500 is placed at the front side limit position of vibration displacement, similar to the non-excited state of the vibration motor 21510, and FIGS. FIG. 300(b) illustrates a state in which the vibration motor 21510 is in an excited state and the vibration device 21500 is arranged at the rear side limit position of the vibration displacement. That is, when the vibrating motor 21510 is excited and the eccentric weight 21512 rotates and vibrates, the vibrating device 21500 is repeatedly displaced between the state shown in FIG. 299 and the state shown in FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 300, the eccentric weight 21512 is in contact with the main body 21531 in the front-rear direction, and the vibration is also transmitted directly.

299 and 300, the mode of transmission of vibration of vibration device 21500 will be described. As described above, vibration device 21500 is intentionally fastened and fixed at a plurality of parts to members having different rigidity. The purpose of this is to effectively cause the vibration of the vibrating device 21500 to occur at a specific portion.

More specifically, if the member to which the entire vibrating device 21500 is fixed is too hard, the vibration will be suppressed too much. is fixed to the hard side member, and the soft side member fixed to the other part of the vibrating device 21500 is vibrated around the fixing position as an axis. Thereby, the portion fixed to the other portion of the vibrating device 21500 can be sufficiently displaced.

That is, the insertion portion 21535 formed on the left side of the vibrating device 21500 is fastened and fixed to the V-shaped design member 21450 (hard side), and the shell-shaped overhanging portion 21541 abuts on the connecting plate-shaped portion 21458. A pass-through 21535 formed on the right side of the device 21500 is fastened to the overlying base member 21410 (soft side).

Therefore, the vibrating device 21500 vibrates in such a manner that the insertion portion 21535 formed on the right side is displaced (rotationally displaced) with the insertion portion 21535 formed on the left side as a fixed reference (axis of vibration). By being transmitted to 21410, it is possible to vibrate the position near the fingers of the player who grips the operating handle 51. FIG.

When the vibrating device 21500 is displaced to the rear side due to the vibration of the vibrating device 21500, the protrusion 21522 of the covering member 21520 is pressed against the projecting portion De3 (see FIG. 300). As a result, the ridge portion 21522 receives a load directed toward the front side from the projecting portion De3. can be increased.

In addition, when the vibrating device 21500 is displaced in such a manner that it rotates backward about the left end as the vibrating device 21500 vibrates, this displacement causes the plate-like projection 21523 on the left side to be pressed against the left side surface of the bottom member 21De (see FIG. 300). (a)). As a result, the plate-like protrusion 21523 receives a rightward load from the bottom member 21De, and the vibrating device 21500 can increase the force of returning forward in the rotational direction about the left end.

When the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 are displaced to the back side, the volume of the covering member 21520 whose displacement is restricted by the intermediate portion 21531 of the covering cover member 21530 is allowed to flow below the intermediate lower surface 21531b. Therefore, by concentrating the resin material forming the covering member 21520 between the covering member 21520 and the overhanging portion De3, the covering member 21520 can be partially hardened, so that the reaction force received from the overhanging portion De3 can be increased. can be done. Since the bottom member 21De having the projecting portion De3 is not expected to be displaced in the front-rear direction, it is difficult to imagine a situation in which the cover member 21520 is deformed due to the displacement of the projecting portion De3.

As a result, the load generated between the vibrating device 21500 and the projecting portion De3 can be limitedly increased in the excited state of the vibrating motor 21510 . In this case, when the operation device 10300 is operated, or when the vibration device 10366 (see FIG. 216) of the operation device 10300 performs vibration production, the vibration device 21500 and the projecting portion De3 are in a state in which the vibration device 21500 is de-excited. While the transmission of vibration to the vibrating device 21500 side can be suppressed by keeping the load generated between By increasing the load, the effect of assisting the vibration of the vibration device 21500 can be increased.

Therefore, in the non-excited state of the vibrating device 21500, the load transmitted to the vibrating device 21500 via the covering member 21520 can be sufficiently suppressed (the flexibility of the covering member 21520 can be fully exhibited). When the vibrating device 21500 is excited, compressive deformation (strain) is generated in the ridges 21522, so that the load (reaction force) transmitted to the vibrating device 21500 via the covering member 21520 can be increased.

On the other hand, since the ridge portion 21522 is a ridge made of a flexible resin material, it is possible to suppress displacement of the projecting portion De3 due to the pressing of the ridge portion 21522 . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the vibration from being transmitted to the projecting portion De3, so that the operation device 10300 can be prevented from vibrating due to the vibration of the vibrating device 21500. FIG.

When the vibrating device 21500 is displaced to the rear side due to the vibration of the vibrating device 21500 and then displaced to return to the front side, the shell-like projecting portion 21541 is pressed against the connecting plate-like portion 21458 . As a result, the shell-shaped projecting portion 21541 receives a load from the connecting plate-shaped portion 21458 directed toward the rear surface side, so that the vibrating device 21500 is placed on the rear surface as compared with the case where the shell-shaped projecting portion 21541 is not formed. You can increase the momentum to re-return to the side.

As described above, in this embodiment, since the displacement of the vibrating device 21500 in both the forward and backward directions is supported, the vibrating device 21500 is placed in an excited state until the vibration becomes strong enough to be felt by the player. period can be shortened.

In the above description, the state in which the vibration device 21500 is de-excited when the operation device 10300 is operated or when the vibration device 10366 of the operation device 10300 is rendered with vibration has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, the operation device 10300 may be operated while the vibration device 21500 is vibrating.

In this case, the load generated between the covering member 21520 and the protruding portion De3 increases, but the displacement direction (vertical direction) of the protruding portion De3 accompanying the operation of the operation device 10300 and the covering member 21520 and the direction of the load generated between the extension De3 and the overhang De3, interaction between the load generated by the vibrating device 21500 and the load applied to the operation device 10300 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation (adverse effect) in which the vibrating device 21500 and the operating device 10300 fail due to the simultaneous load from the vibrating device 21500 and the operating device 10300 .

FIG. 301 is a partial top schematic view of the lower tray unit 21400 schematically illustrating the lower tray unit 21400. FIG. In FIG. 301, the main body 21511 of the vibration motor 21510 is restricted to the right end of the bearing receiving recess 21533c of the covering cover member 21530, that is, the vibration motor 21510 is placed at the right limit position of the displaceable region. illustrated.

In this embodiment, since the vibration motor 21510 is held by the covering member 21530 via the covering member 21520, the vibration motor 21510 can be displaced with respect to the covering member 21530 by deformation of the covering member 21520 or the like. ing. Furthermore, as described above, the vibration device 21500 displaces (rotates) the insertion portion 21535 formed on the right side with the left insertion portion 21535 (see FIG. 290) as a reference (vibration axis). Force is applied to the right.

That is, when the vibration of the vibrating device 21500 becomes intense, the centrifugal force generated in the vibrating device 21500 displaces the vibrating motor 21510 rightward (see FIG. 301). Since the protrusion 21534 formed on the right side of the covering cover 21530 is formed in a curved shape that leans toward the left at the end on the back side (see FIG. 295), the more the vibration motor 21510 moves toward the right, the more it vibrates. The resistance received from the covering cover 21530 increases when the motor 21510 is displaced to the rear side. Thereby, the displacement of the vibration motor 21510 in the front-rear direction can be suppressed.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, even when the vibration of the vibration motor 21510 becomes excessive, the vibration is suppressed by displacing the vibration motor 21510 in a direction intersecting the main vibration direction (front-rear direction). Since the action is generated, vibration can be suppressed without controlling the vibration motor 21510 (for example, before the vibration motor 21510 is stopped by control). As a result, problems due to excessive vibration of the vibration motor 21510 can be suppressed.

In addition, by configuring the vibration motor 21510 to be able to suppress the vibration due to the displacement of the vibration motor 21510 due to the excessive vibration of the vibration motor 21510, it is possible to eliminate the need to arrange a detection sensor for detecting the displacement due to the excessive vibration of the vibration motor 21510. . As a result, the product cost of the lower tray unit 21400 in this embodiment can be reduced, and the space left by omitting the arrangement of the detection sensor can be used for wires to pass through or heat generated by the vibration motor 21510 can be dissipated. It can be effectively used as a space for

Next, the twenty-second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 302 to 381. FIG. In the first embodiment, the game machine frame has been mainly described, but in the twenty-second embodiment, the operation unit A300 that is visually recognized through the window portion 14c will be described.

FIG. 302 is a front view of the game board A13 of the pachinko machine A10 in the twenty-second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 302, the game board A13 has a base plate A60 which is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. , 62, a general prize-winning port 63, a first prize-winning port 64, a second prize-winning port 640, a variable prize-winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit A80, etc. 1).

The base plate A60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate A60 from the front side thereof. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, and the variable display device unit A80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate A60 by router processing, and are tapped from the front side of the game board A13 by tapping screws. etc. is fixed.

The central front portion of the game board A13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). Mainly referring to FIG. 302, the configuration of the game board A13 will be described below.

In front of the game board A13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is erected, and a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is placed inside the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board A13, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board A13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front of the game board A13 and is defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the resin outer edge member A73 connecting the rails (a winning opening etc. are arranged and the game is launched. area where the ball flows down).

In addition, in this embodiment, a metal plate-like member 75 (see FIG. 308) made of metal is incorporated into the outer edge member A73, thereby increasing the combined strength (rigidity) of the game board A13 and the outer edge member A73. However, the details will be described later.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the purpose of arranging the general prize winning openings 63 is different for each arrangement. This will be explained below.

In this embodiment, in the normal game, the ball is shot with the aim of winning the ball into the first winning port 64 on the route passing through the left side of the third symbol display device 81, but the first winning is performed. A part of the balls flowing down the area on the left side of the first winning opening 64 without reaching the opening 64 wins the general winning opening 63 arranged on the left side of the game area. That is, the general prize winning opening 63 arranged on the left side of the game area is arranged with the aim of influencing the game during the normal game. For example, the higher the possibility of winning the general winning hole 63, the more likely it is that a small number of balls will win the first winning hole 64 during normal times.

On the other hand, in a game during time reduction or probability change, the ball is shot with the aim of winning the ball to the second winning port 640 on the route passing through the right side of the third symbol display device 81, but the second A part of the balls flowing down the area on the right side of the second winning opening 640 without reaching the winning opening 640 wins the general winning opening 63 arranged on the right side of the game area. That is, the general winning opening 63 arranged on the right side of the game area is arranged with the aim of influencing the game during probability variation or time reduction. For example, the higher the possibility of winning to the general winning hole 63, the more it is possible to suppress the loss of balls during probability variation and time reduction.

By suppressing the loss of the balls, the next big win is obtained before the balls held on the upper tray 17 run out, even if the game is not played in a shooting mode in which the shooting of the balls is stopped with good timing during the probability change (even if the balls are continuously hit). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the stress (feeling of fatigue) that the player receives while playing the game. Therefore, even when the number of rotations to the next big win frequently increases (for example, 100 rotations or more) during the variable probability, the player can comfortably play the game.

In the game in the special game state, the ball is shot with the aim of winning the ball into the specific winning hole 65a on the route passing through the right side of the third symbol display device 81. Some of the balls flowing down the area flow down to the general winning opening 63 side (right side) instead of the specific winning opening 65a side (left side), and enter the general winning opening 63a. Since the prize balls accompanying the winning to the general prize winning port 63 are paid out as different prize balls from the prize balls to the specific winning port 65a, the player can, before the end of the special game state, In addition to the prize balls based on the number of winning prizes to the specific prize winning port 65a, the prize balls based on the number of winning prizes to the general prize winning port 63 can be obtained.

That is, the general winning hole 63 arranged on the right side of the game area is arranged with the aim of increasing the number of paid-out prize balls that the player can acquire in the special game state. Here, as the number of winnings to the general winning opening 63 increases, the time efficiency of winning to the specific winning opening 65a decreases, so the elapsed time until the special game state ends tends to become longer. In other words, the number of rounds in the special game state and the number of counts (regular number of prizes won for each round) in the special game state are the same in terms of control, depending on the location and number of the general winning ports 63 and the design of the upstream channel. Also, the time (long or short) required until the end of the special game state and the number of prize balls paid out to the player (more or less) can be varied.

In the special game state, the display mode when displaying the numbers corresponding to the number of paid-out prize balls on the third symbol display device 81 is not limited at all. For example, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on winning to the specific winning opening 65a and the number of winning balls to be paid out based on winning to the general winning opening 63 may be displayed separately, or the number of winning balls to be paid out to the specific winning opening 65a may be displayed separately. The total number of prize balls and the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning to the general prize winning opening 63 may be displayed, or a combination thereof may be displayed.

As described above, during the variable probability and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so in the variable display of the second symbol "○ ” is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer during the variable probability and the shorter working hours than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the variable probability and the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of winning a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning port 640 than when the ball enters the first winning port 64. is set. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second prize winning port 640, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize winning port 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second prize winning port 640. Aim the ball so that it passes through the left side of the variable display device unit A80 (so-called "left shot"), and by winning the first prize hole 64, you can get many chances for a big win lottery, and win a big win. It is advantageous for the player to aim to become.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning port 640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning port 640 is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, the ball is shot toward the second winning hole 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), passes through the through gate 67, and opens the electric accessory 640a. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning the second prize winning port 640 while setting the state.

In the pachinko machine A10 according to the present embodiment, the configuration of the game board A13 is left-right asymmetrical, and it is required that the balls are hit to the left and right depending on the game state, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the configuration of the game board A13 may be symmetrical (see FIG. 302). In this case, it is possible to aim for the first prize winning opening 64 by "right hitting" or to aim for the second prize winning opening 640 by "left hitting". Therefore, depending on the game state (whether the game is variable, time-saving, or normal), the player changes the way the ball is shot between ``left-handed'' and ``right-handed''. can be made unnecessary. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the annoyance of changing the way the ball is hit.

In this embodiment, the input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, etc. (see FIG. 4). The other device 228 includes a drive motor AMT1, a drive motor AMT2, a drive motor for raising and lowering the production unit A710, and the like.

Figure 303 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine A10 showing a state in which the front frame 14 is opened (deployed) with respect to the inner frame 12, and Figure 304 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine A10 with the front frame 14 removed. It is a diagram. Note that FIG. 304 shows a state in which the game board A13 is separated from the inner frame 12, and in FIGS. 303 and 304, the reference numerals for the internal configuration of the game board A13 are omitted for convenience.

Next, referring to FIGS. 305 to 323, the structures of the game board A13 and the action unit A300 will be described. 305 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board A13, the center frame A86, the lottery unit A600 and the operation unit A300, and FIG. 306 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board A13, the center frame A86, the lottery unit A600 and the operation unit A300. It is a diagram. 305 and 306, a part of the right side of the game board A13 is enlarged. 305 and 306, reference will be made to FIG. 302 as appropriate.

The center frame A86 is an annular member made of a light-transmitting resin material, fitted from the front side into the through hole 13a drilled in the game board A13, and fastened and fixed near the peripheral edge. a covering portion 86h that is covered on the top, a distributing extension portion 86a that extends from the covering portion 86h to the front side so that the ball can be distributed on the left side, and a descending slope from the upper end toward the left A left slanted portion 86b extending from the covering portion 86h to the front side in a shape that extends toward the front side from the covering portion 86h, and a right slanting portion 86c that extends from the covering portion 86h to the front side in a shape that slopes down from the upper end toward the right. and a right flow passage forming wall portion 86d extending from the covering portion 86h to the front side in a manner that extends downward from a position that is connected to the lower end portion of the right inclined portion 86c and is arranged to face the return rubber 69. , a plurality of horizontal ridges 86e projecting toward the flow path (right side) as ridges spanning the front and rear width of the right flow path forming wall 86d, and positions alternating with the horizontal ridges 86e. In relation to this, there are a plurality of front protrusions 86f protruding from the covering portion 86h toward the flow path (front side) as protrusions extending over the width of the flow path in the region between the right flow path forming wall portion 86d and the outer edge member A73. , and a separation wall portion 86g extending downward from the lower end portion of the right flow path forming wall portion 86d and configured to separate the lower right corner portion of the through hole 13a from other portions.

307(a) is an enlarged front view of the game board A13 in the area A5a of FIG. 302, and FIG. 307(b) is a partial sectional view of the game board A13 taken along line CCCVIIb-CCCVIIb of FIG. 307(a). .

When the player strongly rotates the operation handle 51 to the right to play a right-handed game, the ball flows down between the right flow passage forming wall portion 86d and the outer edge member A73. As shown in FIG. 307(a), the space between the right flow path forming wall portion 86d and the outer edge member A73 is the space that allows the ball to flow down (the diameter of the ball is 11 mm, and the space is about 16 mm). Since the ball is set to have a length with a slight gap), the ball flows down while contacting the right flow passage forming wall portion 86d or the outer edge member A73.

More specifically, the ball that has reached the return rubber 69 is bounced back to the left and right central sides of the game area by the reaction force from the return rubber 69, and collides with the right flow path forming wall portion 86d. Since the right flow path forming wall portion 86d is formed as an inclined wall that slopes down toward the right, the ball that flows down under its own weight tends to roll down the right flow path forming wall portion 86d.

In the process of flowing down, the ball rides on the horizontal rib portion 86e. In the present embodiment, the lateral ribs 86e are designed to have a projecting length of about 2 mm (a length slightly less than 20% of the diameter of the sphere) and an arrangement interval of 16 mm (a length similar to the width of the flow path). Therefore, it is possible to achieve a good balance between deceleration of the falling balls and prevention of clogging of the balls.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the front rib portion 86f is formed with the same projection length (2 mm) as the horizontal rib portion 86e at the intermediate position of the plurality of lateral rib portions 86e. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to prevent ball clogging while improving the deceleration effect by making the formation interval of the ridges half of the width of the flow path.

Usually, when the pachinko machine A10 is installed in a game parlor, it is installed slightly (about 1 degree) to the back side from the vertical state. Therefore, the covering portion 86h is arranged as an inclined wall that slopes downward toward the front side, and the ball that flows down under its own weight tries to roll down the covering portion 86h. With this configuration, compared to the case where the projecting portion is formed toward the flow path from the glass unit 16 side (front side), the front projecting portion 86f projecting from the covering portion 86h and the Collisions with spheres can be produced well. In addition, in FIG. 307(b), the inclination angle of the game board A13 is shown to be larger than usual (about 5 degrees) so that the inclination can be easily grasped.

The separation wall portion 86g is a wall portion arranged to face the lottery unit A600, and has a role of blocking and separating the area where the lottery unit A600 is arranged in the area of the through hole 13a. The assembly of the lottery unit A600 to the game board A13 will be described below.

In the area where the lottery unit A600 is arranged, the through hole 13a of the game board A13 has a small recess 13b projecting rightward from a substantially circular portion for receiving the center frame A86, and a small recess 13b extending downward to the right below the small recess 13b. A projecting large concave portion 13c is formed. In this way, by forming the small recessed portion 13b and the large recessed portion 13c as the arrangement area of the lottery unit A600 as recessed portions connected to the open portion of the through hole 13a for receiving the center frame A86, a plurality of independent through holes are formed. Compared to the case of forming (the case of occupying the area required as the width of the portion forming the boundary), it is possible to secure a wider area that can be used as the arrangement area for the center frame A86 and the lottery unit A600. Details of the lottery unit A600 will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 305 and 306, the operation unit A300 has a box-like rear surface whose front side is open from a bottom wall portion A311 and an outer wall portion A312 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion A311. It has a case A310.

A rectangular opening A311a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion A311 of the rear case A310, so that the rear case A310 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front. The opening A311a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (that is, the display area of the third pattern display device 81 can be divided in a front view).

The operation unit A300 includes a plurality of first operation units A400 arranged in the inner space of the rear case A310 in such a manner that movable devices having substantially the same configuration cover the upper peripheral edge of the inner space, and the first operation units A400. and the second operation unit A700 arranged on the lower side where the arrangement of .

Specifically, the first operation unit A400 is positioned above and on the left and right sides of the opening A311a, and the second operation unit A700 is positioned below the opening A311a. are placed. 305 and 306 illustrate the state in which the first operation unit A400 and the second operation unit A700 are attached to the rear case A310.

The rear case A310 extends as a plane plate along the back of the game board A13 (for example, arranged in parallel) at the front end of the outer wall A312, and faces the game board A13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 304). A supporting plate portion A313 is provided for supporting.

The support plate portion A313 is a columnar portion protruding from the back side of the game board A13 toward the back side, and is protruded in a shape capable of positioning the fastening convex portion 13d having a female screw portion formed in the center. A positioning convex portion A313a is provided, and an inserting screw having a size that allows the insertion of a fastening screw to be screwed into the fastening convex portion 13d is inserted at a substantially central position of the positioning convex portion A313a (a position coinciding with the female screw of the fastening convex portion 13d). A hole A313b is drilled.

That is, the game board A13 and the operation unit A300 can be integrally fixed by positioning the fastening projection 13d by the positioning projection A313a and screwing the fastening screw into the fastening projection 13d. It is possible to improve the rigidity of A13 and the operation unit A300 as a whole.

In addition, the shape of the positioning protrusion A313a is not limited at all, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, a projection having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer shape (circular in this embodiment) of the fastening projection 13d may be formed along an annular shape. It may be a convex portion along an elliptical shape along the direction in which it is formed. Further, when the fastening protrusion 13d is formed in a rectangular columnar shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning protrusion A313a is also formed along the rectangular shape correspondingly.

As shown in FIGS. 305 and 306, in this embodiment, more support plate portions A313 are provided on the left side and upper side of the rear case A310, and fewer support plate portions A313 are formed on the right side and lower side of the rear case A310. This is the result of designing the game board A13 and the operation unit A300 in consideration of the balance between the improvement in rigidity as a whole and the space efficiency.

That is, when the game board A13 is made of a light-transmitting resin material as in the present embodiment, the movable member disposed on the back side of the game board A13 can be visually recognized through the game board A13. The entire back side of the game board A13 becomes effective as an area for presentation to be arranged. On the other hand, at the location where the support plate portion A313 is formed, the internal space of the rear case A310 is eroded inwardly by the area of the support plate portion A313 when viewed from the front. This narrows the area where it can be arranged. Therefore, even if the support plate portion A313 is omitted, if the problem of strength can be maintained while being resolved, it is said that by omitting the support plate portion A313, it is possible to avoid the limitation of the arrangement range of the movable member. That is.

In this embodiment, many support plate portions A313 are arranged on the left side and the upper side of the rear case A310, which is related to the range of the game area or the like where the player can visually recognize the shot ball. That is, the support plate portion A313 is formed at a location other than the range where the shot ball is visually recognized.

More specifically, in this embodiment, the ball fired from the shooting device 112a (Fig. 304) passes between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, passes through the return ball prevention member 68, and enters the game area. It is configured to be introduced and thereafter flow down the game area. In a pinball game, the point where the most attention is considered to be the point where the ball passes, and the other outer area (for example, the area on the opposite side of the third pattern display device 81 across the outer rail 62 or the inner rail 61) ) is usually low in attention.

Therefore, the lower left and upper left with reference to the left convex arc formed by the outer rail 62 and the upper left and upper right with reference to the upward convex arc are the ranges that the sphere cannot reach. It is conceivable that the player's attention to .

In addition, in this embodiment, the outer edge member A73 and the surfaces of the lower left and upper left parts of the outer rail 62 facing the outer rail 62 are formed in a shape along the outer rail 62 and arranged on the front side of the game board A13. Since the block-shaped member 74 is made of an opaque resin material, the rear side of the game board A13 cannot be visually recognized from the front side of the game board A13 through the outer edge member A73 and the block-shaped member 74. is configured as

In the present embodiment, the support plate portion A313 is preferentially arranged at the location where the attention force is low or the location that is invisible. Actually, even in the left side and the upper side where many support plate portions A313 are formed, the support plate portions A313 are formed near the corners of the rear case A310, avoiding the central portion as the projecting end portion of the outer rail 62. be done.

In other words, the rigidity of the operation unit A300 and the game board A13 as a whole is increased by selecting the portion where the space is eroded by forming the support plate portion A313 from the portion with low visibility (low effect performance). While achieving the effect of securing the ball, it is still possible to secure a wide area within the field of view of the player who pays attention to the ball.

From this point of view, since the pachinko machine has a common configuration in which the ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a rolls along the outer rail 62 and is introduced into the game area, the range where the ball does not flow down is the lower left and the upper left. It is easy to seek in the upper part and upper right part. On the other hand, on the downstream side of the return rubber 69 as a portion that temporarily absorbs the kinetic energy of the ball and can adjust the subsequent flow mode, it is difficult to specify a common range where the ball does not flow down.

That is, on the downstream side of the return rubber 69, not only the relationship with the member forming the outer edge of the game area, but also the structure and state of the lottery unit A600 and the variable prize winning device 65 change the flow path of the ball. , it becomes impossible to determine the arrangement location of the support plate portion A313 until the specifications of the game board A13 side are determined.

Since the operation unit A300 can be designed freely compared to the configuration of the game board A13 related to the ball-putting performance of the pachinko machine A10, the design of the operation unit A300 progresses ahead of the design of the game board A13. This is normal, and this allows the internal configuration of the operation unit A300 to be elaborated. If the specification change (configuration change) of the game board A13 occurs at the end of the development schedule, and the position of the support plate part A313 is changed accordingly, not only the back case A310 but also the internal space of the operation unit A300 will be changed. This will lead to design changes of other devices installed in the system, and the cost of the design change will increase.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, formation of the support plate portion A313 is omitted at the position corresponding to the downstream of the return rubber 69 . As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the arrangement of the support plate portion A313 is changed due to the specification change (configuration change) of the game board A13.

In addition, in the area downstream of the return rubber 69, the inner space of the rear case A310 is prevented from being eroded by the support plate portion A313, and a sufficient space for disposing the first operation unit A400 for presentation is secured. In addition, since the path along which the ball flows down and the range in which the first action unit A400 is disposed can be overlapped in the front and back, the first action unit A400 can naturally enter the field of view of the player who pays attention to the ball. can let

Further, in the present embodiment, the support plate portion A313 formed behind the outer edge member A73 is formed inside (left side) of the right outermost end of the outer wall portion A312. On the other hand, the support plate portion A313 formed on the left side of the rear case A310 is formed outside (left side) of the left outermost shortest portion of the outer wall portion A312. That is, the formation mode of the support plate portion A313 (formation direction with respect to the outer wall portion A312) is left-right asymmetric.

As a result, the distance between the outermost right end of the outer wall A312 and the right end of the game board A13 can be made shorter than the distance between the outermost left end of the outer wall A312 and the left end of the game board A13. Therefore, the right end of the internal space of the rear case A310 can be moved to the right end of the game board A13.

The outer wall portion A312 on the right side has no surface facing the game board A13 except for the support plate portion A313, and the edge on the front side comes into contact with the back surface of the game board A13. In other words, the right outer wall A312 abuts the game board A13 in line contact.

Approximately the lower half of the right outer wall A312 is provided with a notch A312a that is notched (formed as a notch) toward the rear side. The notch A312a is cut below the upper edge of the lottery unit A600, and forms a gap with the game board A13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 304).

By forming the cutout portion A312a in this manner, the following effects can be obtained. For example, the gap formed by the notch A312a can function as a wire passage through which wires connected to the lottery unit A600 and the variable winning device 65 pass outward from the rear case A310. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the wiring will interfere with the side of the first operation unit A400 or the second operation unit A700 compared to the case where the wiring is routed vertically.

In addition, the gap formed by the notch A312a can be used as an arrangement space for the configuration required for the lottery unit A600 and the variable winning device 65. FIG. The configuration required for the lottery unit A600 and the variable prize winning device 65 includes, for example, a solenoid that generates a driving force, a flow path through which the ball flows, a substrate that accompanies the lighting effect, a detection sensor that detects the ball, Other structures and the like are exemplified. In the present embodiment, the discharge path ER through which winning balls are discharged from the second winning port 640 of the lottery unit A600 is configured to pass through the gap between the notch A312a and the game board A13 (Fig. 317). reference).

Further, by arranging a light emitting means such as an LED near the notch A312a, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be made easier for the player to visually recognize as light with a blurred outline. In other words, compared to the case where the entire circumference of the back case A310 is connected to the game board A13 (the boundary of the light emitted from the back side of the game board A13 is formed along the shape of the back case A310). Thus, the boundary of the light seen through the game board A13 can be obscured. As a result, it is possible to avoid the boundary of the light visually recognized through the game board A13 from depending on the shape of the rear case A310, and to improve the degree of freedom of the lighting performance.

In addition, the formation length (vertical direction length) of notch part A312a is not limited at all. For example, the notch portion A312a may be formed over the entire area (vertical width) between the upper and lower support plate portions A313.

As described above, in this embodiment, the right side of the back case A310 is not fastened and fixed to the game board A13. can't.

As a countermeasure against this, in this embodiment, a metal plate-like member 75 made of metal is disposed on the outer edge portion 73 at a position corresponding to the right end portion of the game board A13. The metal plate member 75 will be described below.

308 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board A13, the outer edge member A73 and the metal plate member 75, and FIG. 309 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board A13, the outer edge member A73 and the metal plate member 75. FIG. In FIGS. 308 and 309, the game board A13 is shown alone for easy understanding, and other members arranged on the game board A13 are omitted.

The outer edge member A73 is formed of a resin material, and includes an arcuate wall portion 73a forming an upper portion and having an arcuate inner surface, and a thin wall extending downward from a lower end portion of the arcuate wall portion 73a. and an inclined wall portion 73c having an upper surface inclined downward from the lower end of the vertical wall portion 73b toward the left. In this way, by configuring the outer edge member A73 with a single member that covers substantially the entire area in the vertical direction, the outer edge member A73 can be made more compact than the case where the outer edge member A73 is formed from a plurality of vertically divided members. It is possible to reduce the man-hours for assembling to the game board A13.

The vertical wall portion 73b has a plurality of plate-like projecting portions 73b1 projecting toward the back side along the right surface portion, and is formed by bending the front edge portion of the right surface portion into a U-shape when viewed in the up-down direction. A cylindrical projecting portion 73b3 projecting in a columnar shape toward the back side at a joint portion between a plurality of bent portions 73b2 that extend from the arc wall portion 73a and the inclined wall portion 73c, and the cylindrical projecting portion 73b3 is provided side by side for fastening. and a fastening portion 73b4 into which a screw can be screwed.

The bent portion 73b2 is arranged at an intermediate position between the plate-like projecting portions 73b1. As a result, in relation to the metal plate-like member 75, which will be described later, the holding force of the metal plate-like member 75 with respect to the vertical wall portion 73b is achieved while suppressing the number of seam penetration portions 75c formed in the metal plate-like member 75. can be improved.

In other words, compared to the case where only the three plate-like protrusions 73b1 resist bending of the metal plate-like member 75, the plate-like protrusions 73b1 and the bent portions 73b2 allow the metal plate-like member 75 to be bent. Since resistance to bending can be generated, the load generated at one location can be reduced. In addition, since the plate-like projecting portions 73b1 and the bent portions 73b2 are arranged at regular intervals, the load generated when the metal plate-like member 75 is bent can be evenly distributed. It is possible to prevent excessive load from occurring.

The metal plate-like member 75 has a body plate portion 75a that is folded back a plurality of times in the lateral direction and is formed without creases in the longitudinal direction, and the back side edge of the body plate portion 75a is bent leftward. A plurality of joint penetrating portions 75c penetrating in the front-rear direction at the joint portion between the bent portion 75b and the main body plate portion 75a and the bent portion 75b, and a plurality of joint penetrating portions 75c penetrating in the longitudinal direction at the upper and lower ends of the bent portion 75b. and an insertion hole 75e through which a fastening screw can be inserted through a plate portion formed side by side with the plate portion formed with the through hole 75d and stepped toward the front side.

The metal plate-like member 75 generates a particularly strong resistance to bending in the longitudinal direction because the bent portion 75b is formed in the vertical direction in addition to the way in which the body plate portion 75a is folded. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently reinforce the vertical wall portion 73b by arranging it integrally with the vertical wall portion 73b, which tends to bend in the longitudinal direction.

The joint penetrating portion 75c is formed to have a size that allows the plate-like projecting portion 73b1 of the vertical wall portion 73b to be inserted therethrough. In this embodiment, the vertical wall portion 73b and the metal plate-like member 75 are formed so as to be integrated by inserting the plate-like projecting portion 73b1 into the joint penetrating portion 75c.

When the metal plate-like member 75 is assembled integrally with the vertical wall portion 73b, the front side edge of the main body plate portion 75a is sandwiched between the bent portion 73b2 and the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 73b, forming a cylindrical projection. The portion 73b3 is inserted through the through hole 75d. In this manner, the metal plate member 75 and the vertical wall portion 73b are positioned relative to each other at a plurality of locations in the vertical direction. In this state, the outer edge member A73 and the metal plate member 75 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 75e into the fastening portion 73b4.

Since the metal plate-like member 75 is arranged over the vertical wall portion 73b from the above configuration, the vertical wall portion 73b can be entirely reinforced. Here, the plate-like projecting portion 73b1 and the columnar projecting portion 73b3 of the vertical wall portion 73b penetrate the metal plate-like member 75 and extend to the back side, and the tip thereof engages the game board A13. The engagement between the metal plate member 75 and the game board A13 will be described below.

The game board A13 has a plurality of recessed portions 13e that are recessed to receive the plate-like projecting portions 73b1 on the right side edge of the front surface, and the columnar projecting portions 73b3 are received on the upper and lower sides of the recessed portions 13e. and a plurality of positioning holes 13f penetratingly formed as elongated holes that can be elongated vertically.

When the outer edge member A73 and the metal plate-like member 75 are assembled to the game board A13 in an integrated state, the plate-like projecting portion 73b1 is received in the concave portion 13e, and the circular projecting portion 73b3 is received in the positioning hole 13f. and positioned. That is, the plate-like projecting portion 73b1 and the circular projecting portion 73b3 are used not only for positioning with the metal plate-like member 75, but also for positioning with the game board A13. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of pieces to be positioned.

In this embodiment, as described above, the metal plate member 75 is assembled so as to suppress the bending of the vertical wall portion 73b. The portion 73b can be formed so thin as to be easily curved in the left-right direction by itself.

Furthermore, the rigidity of the metal plate member 75 can suppress the deformation of the game board A13 (improve the rigidity). The shape of A13 can be maintained. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 309, the formation of the fastening protrusion 13d can be omitted at the right end position of the game board A13.

Therefore, the right edge of the small recess 13b and the large recess 13c can be arranged at a position short of the right end of the game board A13 (a position extremely close to the right end). As a result, the right limit positions of the through-hole 13a, the small concave portion 13b and the large concave portion 13c with respect to the game board A13 can be moved further to the right, and the shape of the opening can be enlarged.

In this case, when the game area is formed using the game board A13 having the same vertical width and horizontal width and the center frame A86 having the same opening size, the right end of the game area with respect to the game board A13 is positioned to the right. Since it can be moved to the left side, the area on the left side of the center frame A86 can be expanded. In other words, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the path along which the game ball flows (the degree of freedom in designing the position of the nail, the ball guide channel, the position of the ball passage opening, etc.).

Furthermore, a distribution device (not shown) in which balls flow down during a right-handed game (for example, a device that switches the path in the order in which the balls arrive), a lottery unit A600, and a variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 305) Since a large installation area can be secured, the degree of freedom in designing the sorting device, the lottery unit A600, and the variable winning device 65 (not shown) can be improved.

FIG. 310 is an exploded front perspective view of the lottery unit A600, and FIG. 311 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lottery unit A600. The lottery unit A600 includes the electric accessory 640a described above, and a second prize winning opening 640 that switches between a state in which the ball can pass and a state in which the ball cannot pass depending on whether the electric accessory 640a is in an open state or a closed state. It is an assembly that constitutes the

The lottery unit A600 has a main body member A610 which forms a flow-down path through which a second prize winning port 640 is formed and in which the balls flow down on the front side, and which is fastened and fixed to the game board A13 (see FIG. 305), and a back surface of the main body member A610. An engaging member A620 that is rotatably pivotally supported on the side and engages with the electric accessory 640a, a driving device unit A630 that generates a driving force for operating the engaging member A620, and a main body member A610 are arranged on the front side. A covering member A650 that defines the flow-down path of the sphere, a main irradiation device A660 that is arranged on the back side of the main body member A610 and irradiates light onto an area corresponding to the flow-down path of the sphere, and a main lighting device A660 that is arranged on the back side of the main body member A610. and an auxiliary irradiation device A670 that irradiates light on a region different from the flow-down path of the ball, which is a region where the visibility is lowered by the covering member A650 provided.

The body member A610 includes a body plate portion A611 having a plane parallel to the front surface of the game board A13 on the front side, and a left extension wall portion extending from the left edge portion of the body plate portion A611 to the front side in a wall shape. A612, a right extending obstacle wall portion A613 extending like a wall from a position including the right edge of the main body plate portion A611 to the front side, and a rectangular frame-like rear side surrounding the second prize winning opening 640 in the rear view. an extending rectangular frame A614 extending to the extending rectangular frame A614, a projecting receiving portion A615 projecting to the back side above the second winning opening 640 inside the extending rectangular frame A614, and the right side of the extending rectangular frame A614 A frame-shaped main light-emitting holding frame A616 extending to the back side including a part, and a frame-shaped auxiliary light-emitting holding frame A617 extending to the back side on the left side of the extended rectangular frame A614.

A through gate 67 is inserted through and fixed to the upper end position of the main body plate portion A611. That is, in the present embodiment, at least part of the ball that is about to enter the lottery unit A600 passes through the through gate 67 and flows downstream.

The left extending wall portion A612 is a wall portion arranged to face the separation wall portion 86g (see FIG. 305) of the center frame A86. That is, in the assembled state (see FIG. 304), the separation wall portion 86g of the center frame A86 and the left extending wall portion A612 are engaged (abutted) to ensure rigidity. As a result, the center frame A86 and the lottery unit A600 can be stably held in a mode of suppressing positional deviation while the through hole 13a is formed in a shape large enough to accommodate both the center frame A86 and the lottery unit A600.

The right extending obstacle wall portion A613 is a wall portion that forms the rolling surface of the ball. That is, the ball flowing down the lottery unit A600 rolls on the upper surface of the right extended obstacle wall portion A613 and flows downstream.

The extended rectangular frame A614 has a shaft support hole A614a that is bored as a portion that rotatably supports the engaging member A620, and the extended edge can receive the front side end of the drive unit A630. Formed from shape. That is, the driving device unit A630 is fixed to the extending rectangular frame A614 by fastening the front end portion of the driving device unit A630 assembled to the extending end of the extending rectangular frame A614.

The projecting receiving portion A615 is configured to be able to abut on the engaging member A620 and the operating member A632 of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL as the driving device of the driving device unit A630, and is a portion that defines the movement end position thereof. will be described later.

The main light emission holding frame A616 is a frame that constitutes the outer frame of the light emitted from the main irradiation device A660, and an insertion hole A616a through which a fastening screw is inserted is formed inside. A fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole A616a is screwed into a fastening portion A652a of the covering member A650. formed in position. As a result, the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole A616a can be made difficult to be visually recognized in a front view, and it is possible to avoid impairing the design of the lottery unit A600.

The auxiliary light emission holding frame A617 is a frame that constitutes the outer frame of the light emitted from the auxiliary irradiation device A670, and is formed at a position that overlaps the low transmission range A651b of the covering member A650 in front view.

The engagement member A620 is rotatably supported in the shaft support hole A614a of the extended rectangular frame A614, and is configured so that the claw-shaped portion A622 arranged at the tip of rotation engages with the electric accessory 640a. . As a result, the state (open state or closed state) of the electric accessory 640a changes as the attitude of the engaging member A620 changes. Next, details of the engaging member A620 will be described with reference to FIG.

312(a) is a side view of the engaging member A620 viewed from the direction of the rotation axis J1, and FIG. 312(b) is a side view of the engaging member A620 viewed in the direction of arrow CCCXIIb in FIG. FIG. 312(c) is a cross-sectional view of the engaging member A620 along line CCCXIIc-CCCXIIc of FIG. 312(b).

The engaging member A620 is made of a flexible resin material, and includes a pair of rotating arms A621 composed of plate-shaped portions intersecting (perpendicular to) the rotation axis J1. A claw-shaped portion A622 formed in a C-shaped claw shape, a pair of protruding shaft portions A623 projecting from the rotating arm portion A621 in a cylindrical shape around the rotation axis J1, and a rotation base of the rotating arm portion A621. A base end side connecting rod portion A624 which is a rod-shaped portion extending radially from the end side and is formed in a U-shape in front view in a manner in which the extended end is bent toward the other side and then connected. and a rod-shaped portion extending in a direction parallel to the base end side connecting rod portion A624 from the rotation distal end side of the rotating arm portion A621, and the extending end portion thereof is bent toward the other side and then joined and a distal end side connecting rod portion A625 formed in a U shape in a front view.

A pair of rotating arms A621 are arranged to face each other with a gap larger than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, it is possible to form a flow path for the ball so that the ball passes between the rotating arms A621 (see FIG. 313). be able to.

The base end side connecting rod portion A624 includes a body rod portion A624a formed with substantially the same cross-sectional shape along the longitudinal direction of the rod, and an intermediate position between the body rod portion A624a and projecting toward the distal side connecting rod portion A625 side. and a projecting restricting portion A624b provided. The protrusion restricting portion A624b is configured as a portion for restricting excessive rotation of the engaging member A620, and the details thereof will be described later.

The distal end side connecting rod portion A625 is formed so that the rod-shaped portion A625a extending parallel to the rotation axis J1 has a cross-sectional shape different from that of the proximal end side connecting rod portion A624. That is, the rod-shaped portion A625a has a surface facing the rotating arm A621 formed in a flat shape that maintains a distance from the rotating arm A621, while a surface opposite to the rotating arm A621 serves as the tip of the rotation. It is formed as an inclined surface A625b that inclines in a direction away from the rotating arm A621 toward the side. That is, the rod-shaped portion A625a is formed so that the thickness increases toward the rotation tip side, and the rigidity increases (deformation resistance increases).

In addition, the bar-shaped portion A625a has a surface opposite to the rotating arm A621, which is recessed in a manner inclined toward the surface opposite to the rotating arm A621 as it moves toward the central side in the direction of the rotation axis J1. It is formed as a recessed surface A625c provided.

The recessed surface A625c is recessed along the inclination of the inclined surface A625b. That is, when viewed in the tilt direction of the inclined surface A625b, each point of the recessed surface A625c that differs only in the thickness direction of the distal end side connecting rod portion A625 (the width direction of the surface facing the rotating arm portion A621) is the same. visible as a dot.

The recessed surface A625c is recessed corresponding to the shape of the operation member A632 so as to be able to receive the operation member A632 of the drive unit A630, details of which will be described later.

FIG. 313 is an exploded rear perspective view of the main body member A610, engagement member A620 and drive unit A630. FIG. 313 illustrates a state in which the engaging member A620 is pivotally supported in the pivotal support hole A614a of the main body member A610.

The engaging member A620 is attached to the main body member A610 by applying a compressive force to the engaging member A620, deforming the engaging member A620, and inserting the engaging member A620 into the elongated rectangular frame A614. This is carried out by removing the load and canceling the deformation in a state where the position with the shaft portion A623 is aligned.

That is, the engaging member A620 is gripped between fingers from the direction of the rotation axis J1, and a compressive force is applied to deform the projecting shaft portion A623 to such an extent that the width of the projecting shaft portion A623 becomes shorter than the inner width of the extending rectangular frame A614. The engaging member A620 can be assembled to the main body member A610 by inserting the engaging member A620 into the elongated rectangular frame A614, aligning the position, and releasing the finger.

In the present embodiment, the pair of rotating arm portions A621 are formed so as to be connected by a proximal side connecting rod portion A624 and a distal side connecting rod portion A625 which are narrower and more easily deformable than the rotating arm portions A621. Therefore, most of the deformation when applying a load for assembly can be caused to the proximal side connecting rod portion A624 and the distal side connecting rod portion A625. Therefore, it is possible to suppress deformation of the rotating arm A621 related to the function of opening and closing the electric accessory 640a, so that it is possible to prevent the engaging member A620 from malfunctioning due to deformation during assembly.

In addition, since the pair of rotating arm portions A621 are connected not by a single rod-shaped portion but by a pair of rod-shaped portions (base-side connecting rod portion A624 and distal-side connecting rod portion A625), the load is released. After that, it is possible to easily avoid the postures of the rotating arms A621 from deviating from each other.

Furthermore, by arranging a rod-shaped portion that is wider than the base end side of rotation (see FIG. 312(c)), the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL It is possible to suppress the deviation of the postures of the rotating arms A621 when they are operated by the driving force of .

In addition, by narrowing the width of the rod-shaped portion on the proximal side of rotation (see FIG. 312(c)), the deformation of the engaging member A620 necessary for assembly is shifted to the vicinity of the projecting shaft A623 on the proximal side of rotation. can be produced intensively. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the assembly of the engaging member A620 while realizing stable operation using the engaging member A620.

As shown in FIG. 313, the front end of the engaging member A620 abuts against the lower end of the projection receiving portion A615, thereby restricting further rotation. As described above, the engaging member A620 is a part for opening and closing the electric accessory 640a, and there is a possibility that the ball enters the second winning hole 640 when the electric accessory 640a is open. A ball that enters the second winning hole 640 is a surface that constitutes the engaging member A620 and the extended rectangular frame A614, is arranged opposite the engaging member A620, and is an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the back side. It flows down between the lower bottom inclined surface A614b formed as , and flows into the drive unit A630.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the rotating arms A621 are arranged at intervals longer than the diameter of the ball (11 mm), so the ball can flow between the opposing rotating arms A621. As a result, the engagement member A620 can be arranged in such a manner as to surround the ball flow-down path from above, so that the engagement member A620 and the ball flow-down path can be arranged compactly.

The driving device unit A630 is held by a box-shaped body box portion A631 with an open front side connected and fixed to the back side end portion of the extended rectangular frame A614 of the body member A610, and the upper side of the body box portion A631. an electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, an operating member A632 that slides in the front-rear direction by the excitation of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, a coil spring A633 that applies an urging force to the operating member A632, and a main body box portion A631 that is held at the lower side of the and a detection sensor A634 that detects the passage of the ball.

When the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is de-energized, the biasing force of the coil spring A633 positions the operating member A632 at the front side position (see FIG. 314(a)). The action member A632 is driven against the urging force and arranged at the rear side position (see FIG. 314(b)). The front side position of the operating member A632 is configured as a position where a disc-shaped disk portion A632a fixed to the tip of the operating member A632 abuts on the projecting receiving portion A615. Next, referring to FIG. 314, the transmission path of the driving force of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL will be described.

314(a) and 314(b) are side views of the electric accessory 640a, the engaging member A620 and the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL. In FIGS. 314(a) and 314(b), only the electric accessory 640a, the engagement member A620 and the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL are shown for easy understanding, and other configurations for holding these members are shown. Illustration is omitted.

In addition, FIG. 314(a) shows the non-excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL (closed state of the electric accessory 640a), and FIG. state) is illustrated.

When the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is de-energized and the operating member A632 is positioned at the front side position, the engaging member A620 is inclined downward (see FIG. 314(a)), and the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is energized. When the action member A632 is arranged at the rear side position, the engaging member A620 is in an upward inclined posture (see FIG. 314(b)).

The electric accessory 640a is rotatably supported by the shaft support portion A653 of the covering member A650, and has an eccentric projecting portion 640b projecting rearward from a position eccentric to the rotation axis. The eccentric projecting portion 640b is arranged so as to be able to abut on the claw-shaped portion A622 of the engaging member A620 at the top and bottom. The state of the electric accessory 640a changes.

In the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is composed of a single blade-shaped member, but as can be seen from the fact that there are two pairs of claw-shaped portions A622 of the engaging member A620, the electric accessory 640a can be connected to each other. You may make it comprise from a pair of blade-shaped member facing each other. In this case, the engagement member A620 of this embodiment can be used.

Returning to FIGS. 310 and 311, description will be made. The covering member A650 is formed from a colorless and light-transmitting resin material, and is arranged on the front side of the main body member A610 with the electric accessory 640a interposed therebetween. A main body plate portion A651 that constitutes a flow-down path of the ball between, a regulation wall portion A652 that protrudes in a wall shape to the back side of the main body plate portion A651 and regulates the flow of the ball, and the back of the main body plate portion A651 A shaft support-like portion A653 that protrudes to the side in a columnar shape and rotatably supports the electric accessory 640a.

The main body plate portion A651 includes a high transmission range A651a in which the rear side is easily visible in a front view, and a low transmission range A651b in which the light transmission is lower than the high transmission range A651a and the rear side is difficult to visually recognize.

In the present embodiment, a seal having a printed surface designed to form a high-transmittance range and a low-transmittance range is attached to the front side of the main body plate portion A651, so that the high transmittance range A651a and the Although the low transmittance range A651b is configured, the method is not limited to this. For example, the body plate portion A651 may be manufactured by two-color resin molding, or the body plate portion A651 may be ground to roughen the surface to form a low-transmittance range.

In this embodiment, the high transmission range A651a is formed on the front side (mainly the right side) of the sphere flow-down path, and the low transmission range A651b is provided with a regulation wall portion A652 that regulates the sphere flow-down. It is formed on the side (mainly on the left side). As a result, it is possible to block the player's view of the internal structure in the range where the ball does not flow, while ensuring the visibility of the ball's flowing path.

The restricting wall portion A652 includes a fastening portion A652a into which a fastening screw inserted through, for example, an insertion hole A616a is screwed for fastening and fixing with the main body member A610. Since the fastening screw screwed into the fastening portion A652a is made of metal and is non-transmissive, it easily creates a shadow when viewed from the front. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the fastening part A652a is arranged outside the ball flow path, so that the shadow generated by the fastening screw is prevented from entering the ball flow path and causing the player to feel uncomfortable. can do. As a result, it is possible to prevent the shadow of the fastening screw from degrading the concentration of the player who visually recognizes the flow of the ball.

The main irradiation device A660 includes a diffusion plate A661 housed inside a main light emission holding frame A616 of a main body member A610, an illumination substrate A662 on which light emitting means A663 such as LEDs are arranged on the diffusion plate A661 side, and A rear lid portion A664 formed with an outer shape substantially the same as the outer shape of the electrical decoration board A662 and fastened and fixed to the rear side end portion of the main light emission support frame A616.

The diffusing plate A661 is a plate-like member having an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape of the main light emission holding frame A616, and having a diffusing shape for diffusing light on both the front and back sides. It has a plurality of extending portions A661a extending in a plate shape. The extended portion A661a is a posture maintaining portion for preventing the diffusion plate A661 from tilting while being housed in the main light emission holding frame A616. When the diffusion plate A661 is about to tilt, one of the extended portions A661a abuts against the inner surface of the main light emission holding frame A616 to generate resistance in the direction of returning the tilt, so the posture of the diffusion plate A661 is maintained.

In addition, when the main irradiation device A660 is assembled to the main body member A610, the front surface of the electrical board A662 abuts the extended end portion of the extended portion A661a, thereby restricting the diffusion plate A661 from coming off to the rear side. .

The external shape of the electrical decoration board A662 is substantially the same as the external shape of the outer surface of the main light emission holding frame A616, and the external shape of the rear lid part A664 is formed to have substantially the same external shape as the external shape of the electrical decoration board A662. . That is, the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge of the electrical board A662 is held in a manner sandwiched from the front and rear by the main light emission holding frame A616 and the rear lid portion A664 (held by surface contact).

As a result, even if the rear lid portion A664 is thin and the rigidity of the rear lid portion A664 alone is low, the rigidity of the main light emission holding frame A616 can be used to stably hold the illumination board A662. can.

Here, an insertion hole A616a through which a fastening screw is inserted is formed on the front side of the diffusion plate A661. Therefore, in order to remove the fastening screws, it is necessary to remove the diffusion plate A661 from the main light emission holding frame A616.

In addition, as described above, the fastening screw is non-transmissive and tends to cause shadows. A diffusing plate A661 capable of diffusing the light is arranged. Therefore, the diffused light can reduce the shadow of the fastening screw (skip the shadow), and the shadow of the fastening screw can be made inconspicuous.

In particular, the light emitting means A663 is arranged at a position where the insertion hole A616a does not overlap the optical axis directed along the front-rear direction (a position where the outline projected in the front-rear direction does not overlap). As a result, the shadow of the fastening screw can be made thinner (the shadow is removed), and the effect of making the shadow of the fastening screw less conspicuous can be made more pronounced.

The main irradiation device A660 is arranged on the back side of the sphere flow-down path as described above, and the light emitted from the light emitting means A663 irradiates the sphere flow-down path. The light reaches the downflow path through the Therefore, compared to the light emitted from the light emitting means A663 without passing through the diffusion plate, the light can be light and spread. As a result, it is possible to reduce the feeling of fatigue given to the eyes of the player who pays attention to the path of the ball.

The auxiliary irradiation device A670 is arranged on the back side of the auxiliary light emission holding frame A617 and includes an illumination board A671 on which a plurality of light emitting means A672 are arranged, and an illumination board A671 arranged on the back side of the illumination board A671. and a rear lid portion A673 having an outer shape substantially the same as the outer shape.

The electrical board A671 is fixed in the same holding mode as the electrical board A662. That is, the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge of the electrical board A671 is held in a manner sandwiched between the auxiliary light holding frame A617 and the rear lid portion A673 from the front and back (held by contact on the surface).

As a result, even if the thickness of the rear lid portion A673 is thin and the rigidity of the rear lid portion A673 alone is low, the rigidity of the auxiliary light emission holding frame A617 can be used to stably hold the illumination board A671. can.

Here, unlike the main irradiation device A660, the auxiliary irradiation device A670 is not provided with a diffusion plate on the front side of the decorative electrical board A671. That is, the light emitted from the light emitting means A672 is irradiated onto the main body member A610 while maintaining the light emission intensity without being diffused.

Light is emitted in such a manner. In this embodiment, the light emitting means A672 is arranged at a position overlapping the low transmission range A651b in front view, so the light emitted from the light emitting means A672 is low. It is visually recognized by the player through the transmission range A651b. Accordingly, since the player sees the light weakened in the low transmission range A651b, it is possible to prevent the player's eyes from seeing the light from feeling excessive fatigue.

In addition, by maintaining the emission intensity of the light, it is possible to prevent the light from being completely blocked by the low transmission range A651b. Thereby, for example, when a character corresponding to the pachinko machine A10 is drawn in the low transmittance range A651b, the character can be illuminated brightly with the light emitted from the light emitting means A672.

315(a) and 315(b) are cross-sectional views of the lottery unit A600 along the line corresponding to the CCCXIIc-CCCXIIc line in FIG. 312(b). FIG. 315(a) shows the non-excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, that is, the closed state of the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 314(a)), and FIG. 315(b) shows the energized state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL. That is, the open state of the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 314(b)) is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 315(a), when the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is not energized, the lower end of the disk portion at the tip of the operating member A632 is in contact with the recessed surface A625c of the engaging member A620. Here, the disk portion of the operating member A632 advances to the front side to such an extent that it is arranged to face the vicinity of the widthwise middle position of the recessed surface A625c, and the recessed surface A625c moves in the front-rear direction in which the operating member A632 moves. , the load applied from the engaging member A620 to the operating member A632 is a load whose main component is in the vertical direction (direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction).

Therefore, since it is possible to make it difficult to change the posture of the engaging member A620 by moving (retracting) the operating member A632 by the load from the engaging member A620, the piano wire can be pulled out from the gap of the pachinko machine A10. It is possible to take countermeasures against fraudulent acts that try to change to the open state by inserting a wire such as a wire and applying a load to the movable accessory 640a.

Here, conventional pachinko machines have a function of outputting an error notification when an illegal act is detected. If the movable accessory 640 can be placed in the open state regardless of the ASOL state, the deterrence against fraud is not sufficient.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine A10 of the present embodiment, even if a load is applied to the movable accessory 640 and the state is about to change, the movable accessory 640a and the movable accessory 640a move through the eccentric projecting portion 640b of the movable accessory 640a. Since it is engaged with the engaging member A620 (see FIG. 314(a)), in the configuration of this embodiment in which it is difficult to change the posture of the engaging member A620, it is possible to apply a load to the movable accessory 640a. It can also be difficult to open the movable accessory 640a.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the recessed surface A625c is formed such that the rod-shaped portion A625a becomes thicker toward the rotation tip side of the engaging member A620, in response to the above-described fraudulent act that applies a load to the movable accessory 640a. Since it is inclined, when the engaging member A620 is forcibly displaced in the rising direction from the state of FIG. The abutment position of the portion A625a shifts to the thick side (rotation distal end side), and the distal end side connecting rod portion A625 becomes difficult to deform.

Therefore, each time the engaging member A620 is displaced in the rising direction, the load necessary for further displacing the engaging member A620 can be increased. It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts that attempt to open the movable accessory 640a.

Further, the plane opposite to the recessed surface A625c of the bar-shaped portion A625a is an inclined surface that slopes down toward the front side. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 315(a), when the rod-shaped portion A625a is flexurally deformed in the thickness direction by the load received from the operation member A632, the reaction force applied to the operation member A632 is increased and inclined toward the front side. can be directed to

As a result, the load in the front-rear direction applied from the bar A625a to the operating member A632 can be generated as a front load, thereby preventing the operating member A632 from retracting rearward due to the load from the bar A625a. Therefore, the rising displacement of the engaging member A620 can be regulated more reliably.

As shown in FIG. 315(b), in the excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, the lower end of the disc portion of the operating member A632 and the projecting restricting portion A624b of the engaging member A620 abut against each other, so that the body box of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL Further backward rolling movement (movement in the rising direction) of the engaging member A620 is regulated before it collides with the part. That is, the rotation of the base end connecting rod portion A624 can be restricted without causing a collision with the body box portion of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL. It is possible to avoid problems such as cracking or bending due to collision with parts.

316(a) is a top view of the action unit A300, FIG. 316(b) is a side view of the action unit A300 as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 302, and FIG. 317 is a game board A13 and the action unit. Fig. 2 is a rear view of the A300;

As shown in FIGS. 316(a) and 316(b), the front end surface of the first operation unit A400 is arranged to protrude toward the front side beyond the front end of the rear case A310. When the game board A13 is made of plywood while the first operation unit A400 is arranged in this way, it is necessary to form a depression or hole on the back side of the game board A13 to avoid interference with the first operation unit A400. However, in this embodiment, since the game board A13 is formed from the resin base plate A60, if the shape is designed in advance to avoid interference with the first operation unit A400 and the mold is manufactured, The game board A13 can be easily formed in a shape that avoids interference.

That is, in this embodiment, since the recesses are provided from the rear side to the front side along the left, right, and upper surfaces of the base plate A60 of the game board A13 (see FIG. 306), the front end surface of the first operation unit A400 is recessed. Interference between the game board A13 and the first operation unit A400 can be easily avoided while projecting to the front side from the front end of the rear case A310. As a result, the arrangement of the first action unit A400 can be brought closer to the player's side, so that the presentation effect of making the first action unit A400 visible can be improved.

As shown in FIGS. 316(b) and 317, the support plate portion A313 arranged on the upper portion of the rear case A310 is arranged inside (below) the outer surface (upper surface) of the outer wall portion A312. As a result, compared to the case where the support plate portion A313 is arranged outside the outer wall portion A312 while the outer wall portion A312 is arranged outside (upper side) at the left-right center where the support plate portion A313 is not arranged. can lower the upper end position of the rear case A310.

That is, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of arrangement of the rear case A310 relative to the game board A13 while improving the degree of freedom of arrangement of the first action unit A400 (or the second action unit A700) relative to the rear case A310.

In addition, the left and right positions where the support plate portion A313 on the top of the back case A310 is arranged are positioned outside the game area in front view as described above, so the support plate portion A313 is positioned below the outer wall portion A312. It is possible to reduce the influence (disadvantage) on the game by being placed in the position.

As shown in FIG. 317, on the right side of the rear case A310, unlike the left side, the support plate portion A313 is omitted except for the upper end position. That is, since the space occupied when the support plate portion A313 is disposed below the upper end position can be omitted, the outer wall portion A312 of the rear case A310 is moved to the right end of the game board A13 accordingly. can be done.

318 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board A13 and the operation unit A300 along line CCCXVIII-CCCXVIII of FIG. 302. FIG. As shown in FIG. 318, the base plate A60 is an area inside the outer edge extension part 60a and at least the game area compared to the outer edge extension part 60a that extends along the outer edge to the back side. The front-rear width of the center overhanging portion 60b that overhangs toward the rear side in the region where the front and rear portions partially overlap each other is formed to be shorter.

Since the front end face of the base plate A60 is formed on substantially the same plane, the rear side end of the center overhanging portion 60b is arranged on the front side rather than the rear side end of the outer edge extending portion 60a. This avoids interference between the base plate A60 and the first motion unit A400.

A recessed portion 60c is formed between the outer edge extension portion 60a and the central overhanging portion 60b, and is recessed toward the front side. It is formed to be thinner than the outer edge extending portion 60a and the central protruding portion 60b. That is, the degree of reduction in the energy of light passing through the base plate A60 can be made lower in the formation range of the recessed portion 60c than in the outer edge extension portion 60a and the central projecting portion 60b.

A center frame A86 is mounted on the front side of the base plate A60, and the covering portion 86h of the center frame A86 is formed with a gap between it and the outer edge member A73, as shown in FIG. This gap is arranged at a position overlapping with the concave portion 60c when viewed in the front-rear direction. That is, the effect of suppressing the energy reduction of light passing through the base plate A60 can be maintained even on the front side of the base plate A60.

The light whose energy reduction has been suppressed is applied to the sphere flowing down between the center frame A86 and the outer edge member A73, and is used to illuminate the sphere. As described above, in the present embodiment, the degree of decrease in energy when the light used in the effect of irradiating the ball with light passes through the game board A13 can be reduced. It is possible to execute an effect that makes the ball shine.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 318, since the inner surface of the outer edge member A73 is arranged outside the inner surface of the outer edge extending portion 60a of the base plate A60 in a front view, the flow-down path of the ball is formed as a concave. It is possible to make it easier to arrange at a position overlapping the setting portion 60c in the front and rear. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to irradiate the sphere with the light that has passed through the recessed portion 60c.

As shown in FIG. 318, the bent portion 75b of the metal plate member 75 is sandwiched between the outer edge member A73 and the base plate A60. As a result, the outer edge member A73, the base plate A60, and the metal plate member 75 can be configured integrally and mutually assisting each other from the viewpoint of rigidity.

In addition, by utilizing the fact that light is reflected on the metal when the bent portion 75b is irradiated with light, it is possible to locally increase the light emission intensity between the outer edge member A73 and the base plate A60. This light emission with locally increased intensity occurs at a location where the widthwise inner end (left end) of the bent portion 75b can be visually recognized through the outer edge member A73. 73b (see FIG. 308) (the arc wall portion 73a and the inclined wall portion 73c can be excluded).

As a result, even when light is emitted from the back side to the entire top and bottom of the metal plate member 75, the portion where the light emission intensity is locally high is limited to the vertical length range of the vertical wall portion 73b. Therefore, the player's line of sight can be easily focused on the lottery unit A600 disposed facing the vertical wall portion 73b and the formation range of the flow path above it.

319, 320, 321 and 322 are front views of the operation unit A300. 319, 320, 321 and 322, all the first operation units A400 and a plurality of first operation units A400 refer to five first operation units A400, A400A, A400B, It means A400C and A400D. In some cases, the first operation unit A400 will be described as a representative of configurations and functions that can be commonly adopted by the five first operation units A400, A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D.

In FIG. 319, all the first operation units A400 and the second operation units A700 do not protrude toward the third symbol display device 81 side, and maintain a retracted state in which they are retracted. The operation unit A400 is excited to be in a protruding state in which it projects toward the third symbol display device 81 side, and the second operation unit A700 maintains the retracted state.

In FIG. 321, all the first action units A400 maintain the retracted state, and the second action units A700 are shown to be in the protruding state in which they protrude toward the third symbol display device 81 side. The drawing shows that the first operation units A400B and A400C of the second operation unit A400B and A400C are in the retracted state, the other first operation units A400, A400A and A400D are in the extended state, and the second operation unit A700 is maintained in the extended state. be.

As shown in FIGS. 319 to 322, the plurality of first action units A400 are formed in a color that stands out to the player in the range defined by the colored (ultramarine in this embodiment) cover member A591. The front cover A410 and the first displacement member A440 (in this embodiment, the front surface of which is plated with gold) are mainly visible, and the edge of the first displacement member A440 on the side of the third pattern display device 81 are arranged so as to be closest to the adjacent first operation unit A400.

That is, since the front cover A410 and the first displacement member A440 are arranged in a posture along the radial line that spreads outward from the inner side (center) of the third pattern display device 81, the center of the radial line is The player's line of sight can be focused toward the inside of the third pattern display device 81 .

Since the side surface of the first displacement member A440 on the side of the third pattern display device 81 is closest to the adjacent first displacement member A440, as shown in FIG. (including the side surface adjacent to the first displacement member A440) is chamfered so as to taper off toward the tip side (third pattern display device 81 side). This avoids interference with the adjacent first displacement member A440.

Although the starting point of chamfering is not limited at all, in the present embodiment, the straight line extended along the lateral side surface of the first displacement member A440 is similarly extended from the adjacent first displacement member A440. Chamfering is not performed until just before the intersection where the straight line intersects, and chamfering is started just before the intersection. As a result, it is possible to secure a wide range in which the first displacement members A440 are visually recognized while avoiding interference between the first displacement members A440.

As shown in FIG. 319, in the retracted state of the first operation unit A400, the first displacement member A440 is wide in the front and rear direction so as to occupy the range from the back side of the game board A13 to the front side of the third symbol display device 81. It is arranged in a posture that becomes Therefore, compared to the case where the posture of the first displacement member A440 is limited to the posture in which the light emitting side surface (the surface facing the front side in FIG. 320) faces the front side, the area occupied by the first displacement member A440 in the front view can be suppressed, and the visual change can be increased while suppressing the amount of displacement in front view.

This configuration is effective when there is a limited range available for displacement of the first displacement member A440 in the rotation angle range of the drive gear AMG1 (see FIG. 335) rotated by the drive motor AMT1. Details will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 320, in the extended state of the first motion unit A400, the second displacement member A490 is arranged at the extended position, while the first displacement member A440 is located at the extended position (the third symbol display device 81). position away from).

More specifically, the first displacement member A440 is arranged in a posture that is wide in the front-rear direction so as to occupy a range from the back side of the game board A13 to the front side of the third symbol display device 81, and the second displacement member In order to allow the movement of the second displacement member A490 from the state of interfering with the movement trajectory of A490 (retracted state of the first operation unit A400), the second displacement member A490 is arranged closer to the game board A13 and closer to the front side than the second displacement member A490. The state changes to a state where the first operation unit A400 is extended (extended state of the first operation unit A400).

As a result, the first displacement member A440 transmits light to the player side without being blocked by the second displacement member A490 regardless of whether the first motion unit A400 is in the retracted state or in the extended state. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect to emit light. In particular, in the overhanging state of the first displacement member A440, it is possible to switch the light emitting mode of the long holes A412a (see FIG. 325) arranged around the third pattern display device 81, and the line of sight to the third pattern display device 81 is changed. can be induced, the details of which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 321, the effect unit A710 of the second action unit A700 can move up and down toward the center of the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG. In addition, the second operation unit A700 is equipped with a rotating body A720 configured to be operable regardless of the vertical position of the effect unit A710, and the rotation of this rotating body A720 executes a light emitting effect in which light travels in multiple directions. It is possible, but the details will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 322, each of the plurality of first operation units A400 is provided with an individual driving device, so each first operation unit A400 can independently change and maintain the state. That is, the combination that constitutes the retracted state and the extended state in the first operation unit A400 is not limited to that illustrated in FIG. 322, and can be set arbitrarily.

For example, it is possible to execute only the state change of any one of the first operation units A400, or it is possible to execute the state changes in different first operation units A400 in order. For example, the state change can be sequentially executed clockwise from the lower left first operation unit A400 in front view, and the state change can be sequentially executed in both directions from the third first operation unit A400B clockwise from the lower left. You can also run In this way, various effects can be performed using the first action unit A400.

Further, for example, when the second displacement members A490 of the first motion units A400B and A400C, which are in the retracted state in FIG. , the first operation units A400B and A400C, which may interfere with the second operation unit A700, can be put in the retracted state, and the other first operation units A400, A400A, A400D can be put in the extended state. As a result, compared to the case where all the first operation units A400 operate synchronously with the same driving device, it is possible to increase the variation of combinations of operations (states) of the first operation units A400 and the second operation units A700. can.

FIG. 323 is a front view of the operation unit A300. In FIG. 323, the outer shape of the game board A13, the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 are illustrated by imaginary lines. As shown in FIG. 323, the front cover A410 of the first operation unit A400 is arranged so as to effectively decorate the game area. This will be explained below.

First, when defining a game area as an area in which a ball that has passed between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 flows down, a section (a ball shooting unit The section from the 112a side to the ball return prevention member 68 (see FIG. 302)) is not included in the game area, and the outer frame of the game area is the inner rail 61 in this section. Therefore, the outer ends of the front covers A410 of the first operation units A400 and A400A (up to the second one from the lower left) arranged on the back side of the inner rail 61 are arranged near the inner rail 61 (on the outer side). (extending to outer rail 62 is not required).

On the other hand, the outer rail 62 is the outer frame of the game area in the area after the ball has passed between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 (especially the area where the ball hit to the right flows down). Therefore, the outer ends of the front covers A410 of the first operation units A400B and A400C (third and fourth units from the lower left) arranged on the back side of the outer rail 62 are near the outer rail 62 (outer side). placed in

Furthermore, the outer frame of the game area in the area where the outer rail 62 is cut off and the outer edge member A73 is arranged becomes the outer edge member A73. Therefore, the outer end of the front cover A410 of the first operation unit A400D (first lower right) arranged on the back side of the outer edge member A73 is arranged near the inner surface (outer side) of the outer edge member A73. . In this embodiment, the support plate portion A313 is omitted from the right midsection of the back case A310, and the right end of the back case A310 is brought closer to the right end of the game board A13. It will be.

That is, by forming the inner area of the rear case A310 closer to the right end of the game board A13 in front view, the first operation unit A400D can be arranged close to the right end of the game board A13. As a result, a flow path arranged near the right end of the game board A13 as a flow path for a right-handed ball to flow down (a flow path sandwiched between the right flow path forming wall portion 86d and the outer edge member A73, see FIG. 302) The first operation unit A400D can be arranged in such a manner that the outer side end of the front cover A410 is arranged on the outer side (right side) of the front cover A410.

In other words, like a general right-handed machine (for example, a pachinko machine that is not symmetrical), the right-handed channel is extremely thin compared to the left-handed channel, and is moved to the right end of the game board A13. In the case where it is arranged on the back side of the game area, as in the present embodiment, a movable device such as the first operation unit A400 can be arranged in the inner area of the back case A310 by arranging it to the right. Allows mobile devices to be placed across the entire side.

On the other hand, on the left side of the rear case A310, a guide portion sandwiched between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 is formed in a front view, and the player's line of sight is concentrated on this guide portion. Therefore, even if the support plate portion A313 is arranged on the left side of the rear case A310 as in the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid lowering the degree of improvement in the decoration of the game area. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the support plate portion A313 is arranged on the left side of the back case A310, and the support plate portion A313 is omitted on the right side of the back case A310 from the viewpoint of improving the decoration of the game area. It can be said that it is a choice.

As described above in a plurality of ways with reference to FIG. 323, since a plurality of front covers A410 are effectively arranged within the game area, the patterns and figures to be visually recognized by the player who pays attention to the game area can be visually recognized through the game board A13. can be configured with a plurality of front covers A410.

As a result, it is possible to eliminate the need to decorate the game area by sticking a sticker or the like on which a character or the like is printed on the surface of the game board A13. In addition, the area where the front cover A410 is arranged is configured so that the appearance can be changed as a part of the first operation unit A400 depending on the arrangement of each displacement member and the light emission mode of the light emitting means. It is possible to increase the variation of the aspect of decorating the game area as compared with the case where stickers or the like are stuck on the game board A13. Details of the change in appearance will be described later.

In addition, since the outside of the game area is hidden by the block-shaped member 74 (see FIG. 305), even if the part where the structure is exposed and the driving device are arranged here, it is possible to avoid the bad appearance. can.

As shown in FIG. 323, the adjacent first motion units A400 are arranged close to each other with a slight gap, and the cover member A591 disposed between them connects the adjacent first motion units A400. It is fastened and fixed to one operation unit A400. That is, in this embodiment, a plurality of (five in this embodiment) first operation units A400 arranged around the third pattern display device 81 are combined with each other to form an integrated structure.

Further, the outer side surface of the first operating unit A400 is arranged close to the inner side surface of the rear case A310 (see FIG. 324). Therefore, the rigidity of the first operation unit A400 as a whole can be improved, and the deformation of the rear case A310 can be assisted by the rigidity of the first operation unit A400. , excessive reliance on the metal plate member 75 (see FIG. 308) can be avoided. Therefore, the strength (rigidity, plate thickness) required for the metal plate-like member 75 can be reduced, so that the degree of freedom in designing the metal plate-like member 75 can be improved.

As a result, the metal plate member 75 can be easily designed into a shape that facilitates noise countermeasures and grounding (see FIGS. 303 and 304) by contact with the inner surface of the inner frame 12, which are the original functions of the metal plate member 75. can.

FIG. 324 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit A300. FIG. 324 shows a state in which a plurality of (five in this embodiment) first operation units A400 are removed from the rear case A310 toward the front side, and a second operation unit A700 is attached to the rear case A310.

The first operation units A400 are each configured to be operable in a substantially common operation mode, and a plurality of the first operation units A400 are arranged so as to partially surround the inner space of the rear case A310. As shown in FIGS. 319 and 320, each first operation unit A400 moves toward the center of the internal space of the rear case A310 (direction along the radiation emitted from the center of the internal space of the rear case A310). configured to move with

Therefore, for example, the influence given by gravity can change in each first operation unit A400, so in this embodiment, the configuration is devised so that the operation can be realized without relying on gravity, but the details will be described later. do. As described above, each first operation unit A400 has a substantially common configuration, so the first operation unit A400 arranged in the lower left will be explained in detail, and the other first operation units A400 will be explained. omitted.

FIG. 325 is a front perspective view of the first action unit A400, and FIG. 326 is a rear perspective view of the first action unit A400. As shown in FIGS. 325 and 326, the area of the first operation unit A400 is a substantially rectangular area in a front view and covered by the front cover A410. A juxtaposed area A400v is arranged side by side at the end of the area A400b.

The co-located area A400v is not an area that is supposed to be visually recognized by the player in the assembled state. In particular, a blindfold cover member A591 is provided on the central side where there is a risk of being seen by the player, and the rear side of the cover member A591 is configured to be invisible to the player.

In this side-by-side area A400v, a configuration (for example, a drive motor AMT1, a detection sensor A426 for detecting a position, wiring, a connector, etc.) that is inevitably generated along with the effect executed in the main area A400b is not intended to be visually recognized by the player. By arranging, the main body area A400b can be utilized to the maximum extent for arranging members on the assumption that the player can visually recognize the main body area A400b. In other words, it is possible to prevent the main body area A400b from being eroded by a configuration that is not intended to be visually recognized by the player, so that the width of the main body area A400b can be utilized to the fullest extent and a large member can be arranged.

327 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operation unit A400, and FIG. 328 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operation unit A400. 327 and 328 show a state in which the front cover A410 is removed.

As shown in FIGS. 327 and 328, the first operation unit A400 includes a front cover A410, a front unit FU having a first displacement member A440 capable of being displaced so as to enter between the front cover A410, and and a rear unit BU arranged on the rear side of the front unit FU.

The front cover A410 has a shape in which a thin plate is bent in a U-shape so as to cover the front side of the front unit FU on the front side of the front unit FU. , a plurality of through holes A412 drilled at positions defined by the relationship with the front unit FU, and a guide portion A413 that guides the displacement of the first displacement member A440 of the front unit FU.

The front cover A410 has the function of hiding most of the area of the front unit FU from the player, while making a specific area visible through the through hole A412, and the first displacement member of the front unit FU. It mainly has a function of guiding the displacement of the A440.

329 is an exploded front perspective view of the front cover A410, and FIG. 330 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front cover A410. As shown in FIGS. 329 and 330, the front cover A410 is configured to be stacked on the back side of the central effect part A411a of the main body A411, and is arranged to face the central effect part A411a. A diffuser plate A415 formed of a light-transmitting resin material in a plate shape corresponding to the outer shape, and an LED (substantially square chip shape in FIG. ), and a substrate fixing plate arranged opposite to the electrical board A416, fixing the electrical board A416, and fastened and fixed to the front unit FU. A417 and, mainly.

Hereinafter, the configuration of the diffusion plate A415, the decorative electrical substrate A416, and the substrate fixing plate A417 and how the configuration suppresses positional deviation will be described.

The diffusion plate A415 is not fastened with a fastening screw or the like, but is supported by being sandwiched between the main body A411 and the substrate fixing plate A417 from the front and back direction, and is arranged at an axis corresponding position A415a facing the light emitting means A416a on the back side. A wavy pattern formed from ridges concentrically spreading around is formed, and a recessed portion A415b recessed inward from the outer edge and a through hole having a diameter smaller than that of the light emitting means are drilled. and a plurality of protruding plate portions A415d protruding from the sides constituting the upper and lower ends to the back side in a plate shape.

The ridges forming the wave pattern on the back side of the diffusion plate A415 refract the light irradiated to the axis-corresponding position A415a side, so that the light travels in the radial direction of a circle centered at the axis-corresponding position A415a. It is formed from a shape that advances to the front side. That is, the light incident on the side of the axis-corresponding position A415a is visually recognized by the player at a position away from the axis-corresponding position A415a (outside in the radial direction), but not vice versa. That is, it is formed so as to prevent light incident on a position away from the axis-corresponding position A415a from traveling toward the axis-corresponding position A415a.

The recessed portion A415b is a notch formed to avoid interference between members. formed by

The small-diameter portion 415c is positioned so as not to face the through-hole A412 of the main body A411 (position facing the plate portion of the main body A411) so as to be difficult to see when viewed from the front. A through hole is formed at a position corresponding to the portion A417f, and is used for alignment of the diffusion plate A415, the decorative board A416, and the board fixing plate A417, the details of which will be described later.

The protruding plate portion A415d is fitted into the notch portion A417h of the substrate fixing plate A417 so that the diffuser plate A415 can be aligned with the substrate fixing plate A417. The projecting plate portion A415d has a projecting length of about 4 mm and a width of about 10 mm as upper limits, and has a certain degree of rigidity. It is possible to prevent the protruding plate portion A415d from bending or breaking due to a load caused by collision, rubbing, etc.), and the positioning function can be maintained for a long time.

The diffusing plate A415 has a wave pattern formed on the entire back side and can perform the function of diffusing light over the entire area. That is, the first area AC1 is an area that overlaps the decorative electrical board A416 in front view, and the second area AC2 is an area that does not overlap the decorative electrical board A416 in front view.

The optical axis of the light emitting means A416a of the electrical board A416 passes through the first area AC1, and it is possible for the player to visually recognize the strong light emitting mode as a light emitting effect. On the other hand, the second area AC2 corresponds to an area formed so as to protrude outward (to the right) of the substrate fixing plate A417 from the right side wall A417a3 of the substrate fixing plate A417. The light does not pass through the optical axis, and the light from the light emitting means A416a is weakened and reaches it.

On the other hand, the second area AC2 has a function of enhancing the effect of the lighting effect by the first displacement member A440 of the front unit FU, which will be described later in detail.

The illumination board A416 includes the above-described light emitting means A416a, recessed portions A416b recessed inward from the outer edge, a plurality of large-diameter holes A416c for positioning, and small-diameter through holes A416c. A plurality of combination fastening holes 416d arranged as a group of holes, a plurality of connectors A416e arranged on the front and back sides to which the ends of the wiring are connected, and an electric wiring FC (main connector) for supplying electricity to the first displacement member A440. The embodiment mainly includes an intermediate connector A416f to which a flat cable is connected.

The light emitting means A416a is located at a position where the intensity of the light visually recognized by the player is likely to be maximized. be. This makes it easier to ensure the intensity of the light that the player sees through the through hole A412.

The recessed portion A416b is a notch formed to avoid interference with the screw head of the fastening screw inserted through the through hole A417b to fasten and fix the substrate fixing plate A417 to the front unit FU.

The large-diameter hole A416c is a through hole with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outermost diameter of the insertion columnar portion A417f of the substrate fixing plate A417, and is bored at a position corresponding to the insertion columnar portion A417f. By inserting the insertion columnar portion A417f into the large diameter hole A416c, the electrical board A416 can be aligned with the board fixing plate A417.

The assembly fastening portion A416d is composed of a pair of small-diameter through-holes aligned vertically. The maintenance efficiency is improved by configuring the upper through-hole of the pair of through-holes so that the fastening screw is inserted through the upper through-hole.

For example, for maintenance, with the first operation unit A400 fixed to the rear case A310, the main body A411 and the diffusion plate A415 are removed, the faulty illumination board A416 is removed from the board fixing plate A417, and the normal illumination board is removed. Assuming the work of attaching the A416 to the board fixing plate A417, the decorative board A416 falls forward due to its own weight before being fastened and fixed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the upper through-hole (the side on which the displacement to the front side due to the forward tilt is large) of the pair of upper and lower through-holes of the assembly fastening portion A416d is fixed by the fastening screw. The posture can be returned to the backward falling direction by the fastening screw. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the electrical board A416 from being erroneously fixed at the time of fastening and fixing for maintenance.

In addition, the columnar portion of the substrate fastening portion A417c protruding on the front side of the substrate fixing plate A417 is inserted through the lower through-hole of the combination fastening portion A416d to position and secure the illumination substrate A416. Equipped with a function for temporary fastening. That is, even before the fastening screws are fastened, the lower through-holes are hooked on the columnar portions of the substrate fastening portions A417c, so that the decorative substrate A416 can be prevented from falling due to its own weight.

The connector A416e is arranged on the front side, and includes a first connector A416e1 to which wiring for supplying power and controlling light emission of the light emitting means A416a is connected, and a wiring connected to the detection sensor A426 fixed to the front unit FU. It mainly includes a second connector A416e2 to be connected, and a third connector A416e3 to which wiring connected to the second displacement member A490 arranged in the rear unit BU is connected.

In these connectors A416e, the position of the mating member to which the wiring is connected is fixed (first connector A416e1, second connector A416e2), or there is a sufficient distance between the connectors even if the mating member is movable ( Because of the third connector A416e3), it can be placed in any position. In the present embodiment, in order to prevent interference with other members and to prevent the risk of being visually recognized by the player, a are placed.

On the other hand, the first displacement member A440 as a mating member to which the intermediate connector A416f is connected by wiring is located in the area opposite to the electrical board A416 with the board fixing plate A417 interposed therebetween (the board fixing plate A417 and the guide plate portion A430 (Fig. 335), the gap between the connectors (the gap between the connectors) is shortened. There is a risk of giving

Unlike the connector A416e (in this embodiment, the wiring is connected to the connector A416e from below), the orientation of the intermediate connector A416f is set to the first The direction A416x, which is the movement direction of the displacement member A440, is aligned with the direction in which the electrical wiring FC can be stretched (flat cable band extends, can be easily bent, and is less likely to break). have set.

The board fixing plate A417 has a main body A417a formed in a box shape with an open front side and capable of accommodating the decorative board A416, and a ridge part for receiving the fastening part of the front unit FU on the back side of the main body A417a. Then, from a plane common to a plurality of through holes A417b configured so that fastening screws screwed into the fastening portion can be inserted, the fastening portion into which the fastening screw is screwed, and the tip surface of the fastening portion and a plurality of substrate fastening portions A417c configured by a set of small-diameter columnar portions protruding.

The main body A417a of the substrate fixing plate A417 includes a plate-shaped deep bottom plate-shaped portion A417a1 connected to the rear end portion of the substrate fastening portion A417c, and parallel to the deep bottom plate-shaped portion A417a1, and the front thereof is the substrate fastening portion A417c. and a shallow bottom plate-shaped portion A417a2 formed on the same plane as the tip surface of the fastening portion of.

That is, the rear surface of the electrical board A416 can be surface-supported by the front end surfaces of the fastening portions of the plurality of board fastening portions A417c and the shallow plate portion A417a2.

The substrate fixing plate A417 has a sharp projecting portion A417d projecting from the deep bottom plate portion A417a1 to the front side with a sharp tip, and a vertical width of the sharp projecting portion A417d at the lower left of the sharp projecting portion A417d. and a rectangular insertion hole A417e having the same width.

The sharp projecting portion A417d is arranged in the lower left portion of the intermediate connector A416f in the assembled state, and is triangular in cross section in such a manner that it is spaced from the electrical board A416 by the thickness of the electrical wiring FC, which is a flat cable. It is formed as a linearly extending ridge, and the extending direction of the ridge intersects (perpendicularly) with the direction A416x in a front view. Since the wiring connected to the intermediate connector A416f is routed through the insertion hole A417e to the rear side, the electric wiring FC connected to the intermediate connector A416f is connected to the substrate fixing plate A417 and the sharp projecting portion A417d. sandwiched between

By sandwiching and supporting the electric wiring FC between the board fixing plate A417 and the sharp projecting portion A417d in this way, the portion that receives the displacement of the electric wiring FC due to the displacement of the first displacement member A440 becomes the intermediate connector A416f. The end position of the electric wiring FC to be connected can be shifted to a position sandwiched between the substrate fixing plate A417 and the sharp projecting portion A417d. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electrical wiring FC from falling off from the intermediate connector A416f.

The substrate fixing plate A417 includes a plurality of insertion columnar portions A417f projecting from the shallow plate portion A417a2 toward the front side in a columnar shape at positions corresponding to the large diameter holes A416c, the shallow plate portion A417a2, and the shallow plate portion. A plurality of through holes A417g penetrating through the boundary between A417a2 and deep bottom plate-like portion A417a1, and a side wall A417a3 extending from the outer shape of main body A417a toward the front side can receive projecting plate portion A415d of diffusion plate A415. A plurality of notch portions A417h formed with a width and a plurality of protruding pieces A417i protruding toward the inside of the main body portion A417a along the front side end portion of the side wall A417a3 obliquely formed on the right side in front view. And prepare.

The insertion columnar portion A417f has a diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the large-diameter hole A416c of the electrical board A416c, and exceeds the thickness of the electrical board A416. and a small-diameter tip protruding from the tip of the large-diameter base with a diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the small-diameter hole A415c of the diffusion plate A415.

Accordingly, the large-diameter base portion can be used for alignment of the electrical board A416 and surface support of the diffusion plate A415, and the small-diameter tip portion can be used for alignment of the diffusion plate A415. That is, the diffusing plate A415 is aligned at the small-diameter tip portion and is surface-supported by the side wall A417a3 and the tip of the large-diameter base portion of the insertion columnar portion A417f. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the posture of the diffusion plate A415 even though it is not directly fastened and fixed.

The through-hole A417g has a function of forming an air passage and suppressing heat generation of the electrical board A416. In the present embodiment, the diffuser plate A415 is arranged in such a manner as to block the front side of the light emitting means A416a of the electrical board A416. forming As a result, the heat generation of the electrical board A416 can be suppressed without lowering the performance effect of the light emitting means A416a.

The cutout portion A417h receives the projecting plate portion A415d of the diffusion plate A415 and engages in the direction along the side wall A417a3. As a result, even if the small-diameter tip of the insertion columnar portion A417f breaks due to deterioration over time or falls off due to manufacturing defects, the diffusion plate A415 protrudes from the substrate fixing plate A417. It is possible to prevent the plate portion A415d from being displaced in the longitudinal direction (direction along the formation direction of the side wall A417a3, upper right direction). Therefore, in a support mode in which the diffusion plate A415 is not fastened and fixed as described above, it is possible to prevent the diffusion plate A415 from being displaced.

The protruding piece A417i is formed in a thin plate shape that allows the electrical board A416 to enter between it and the shallow plate portion A417a2. In this embodiment, in the assembled state, the projecting piece A417i is formed to have a projecting length that interferes with the electrical board A416 in a front view, and in addition, the projecting piece A417i is downward (diagonally downward) from the side wall A417a3. ), even if the electrical board A416 receives a load in the direction of tilting forward due to gravity or the like, the protruding piece A417i is located on the tilt tip side (upper right side) of the electrical board A416. is locked (stopped from the front side), it is possible to prevent the electrical board A416 from falling forward.

The protruding piece A417i is formed inside the internal space of the operation unit A300, and restricts the displacement of the electrical board A416 toward the front side (suppresses flapping). Therefore, it is possible to stably fix the electrical board A416 while omitting the arrangement of fastening screws inside the internal space of the operation unit A300. As a result, while avoiding a reduction in the lighting effects (due to shadows caused by the fastening screws) due to arranging the fastening screws inside the internal space of the operation unit A300 where the attention of the player tends to increase, The electrical board A416 can be stably fixed to the board fixing plate A417.

When assembling the decorative board A416 to the board fixing plate A417, the right side edge of the decorative board A416 is inserted all the way into the gap between the shallow plate portion A417a2 and the projecting piece A417i. can be smoothly assembled by pushing the electrical board A416 backward from the starting point. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 331 and 332. FIG.

FIG. 331(a) is a front view of the decorative board A416 and the board fixing plate A417, and FIG. 332(a) is a front view of the decorative board A416 and the board fixing plate A417, and FIG. 332(b) is a sectional view of the decorative board A416 and the FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of a substrate fixing plate A417;

FIGS. 331(a) and 331(b) show a state in which the electrical board A416 is inserted into the board fixing plate A417, and FIGS. 332(a) and 332(b) show the electrical board A416 is attached to the board fixing plate A417.

The electrical board A416 has chamfered portions A416g and A416h which are chamfered from the upper and lower ends of the right side of the board body. The form of the chamfered portions A416g and A416h corresponds to the length from the upper and lower ends of the right side of the substrate fixing plate A417 to the adjacent cutout portion A417h. That is, the length up to the cutout A417h at the lower end of the board fixing plate A417 is shorter than the length up to the cutout A417h at the upper end of the right side of the board fixing plate A417. Compared to the first chamfered portion A416g of the upper end portion, the second chamfered portion A416h of the lower end portion is formed at a shorter distance from the right side of the electrical board A416.

FIG. 331 shows a state in which the electrical board A416 is displaced upward along the slope of the left side of the board fixing plate A417 compared to the state shown in FIG. The upper limit of the extent of this displacement is the length of the space formed between the first chamfered portion A416g and the upper surface of the substrate fixing plate A417. edge is inserted into the gap formed by the notch A417h.

Contrary to the state shown in FIG. 331, when the electrical board A416 is displaced downward, the length of the space formed between the lower surface of the board fixing plate A417 by the second chamfered portion A416h is set as the upper limit. 332, the edge of the second chamfered portion A416h enters the gap formed by the notch A417h.

By forming the chamfered portions A416g and A416h on the decorative board A416 in this manner, the degree of freedom of the position of the decorative board A416 when inserting the decorative board A416 into the board fixing plate A417 can be improved. That is, even if the right side of the decorative board A416 and the right side of the board fixing plate A417 are not in the positional relationship shown in FIG. It can be inserted into plate A417. As a result, the electrical board A416 can be easily inserted into the board fixing plate A417.

331 to the state shown in FIG. 332, the electrical board A416 should be tilted so as to approach the board fixing plate A417 with its right side as the tilting axis. At this time, as shown in FIG. 331, the tapered insertion columnar portion A417f (FIG. 329) can be seen through the large-diameter hole A416c of the electrical board A416. ) guides the large-diameter hole 417c, thereby correcting the vertical positional deviation of the electrical board A416, and the state shown in FIG. Therefore, since the vertical deviation of the electrical board A416 is corrected without intentionally correcting the vertical deviation of the electrical board A416, the electrical board A416 can be easily assembled to the board fixing plate A417.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 325), the projecting plate portion A415d is fitted into the notch portion A417h to fill the gap. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the electrical board A416 from entering the notch A417h after assembly. That is, the notch A417h has the function of widening the gap when the electrical board A416 is assembled, and after the assembled state, the gap is filled to maintain the arrangement of the electrical board A416. can have a function.

As shown in FIG. 332(b), when the decorative board A416 is assembled to the board fixing plate A417, the projection piece A417i protrudes toward the front side of the decorative board A416 to prevent the board A416 from coming off. Since they are interfering, it is possible to prevent the right side of the electrical board A416 from falling off from the board fixing plate A417.

In this embodiment, the board fastening part A417c is not arranged near the right sides of the decorative board A416 and the board fixing plate A417 by preventing the decorative board A416 from coming off with such a retaining structure. (the arrangement of fastening screws is omitted). As a result, it is possible to secure an arrangement area for the light emitting means A416a in the vicinity of the right sides of the electrical board A416 and the board fixing plate A417, and to avoid shadows caused by the fastening screws. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the light emission performance in the vicinity of the right side of the decorative board A416 and the board fixing plate A417.

When performing maintenance work to replace the decorative board A416 because the decorative board A416 becomes defective, the decorative board A416 is moved from the state shown in FIG. 332(b) to the board fixing plate A417 as shown in FIG. must be tilted. At this time, since the decorative board A416 is surrounded by the board fixing plate A417, it is difficult to directly tilt the decorative board A416. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first connector A416e1 is arranged on the front side, and by pulling the wiring connected to the first connector A416e1 to the front, the electrical board A416 can be easily removed. It can be tilted with respect to the substrate fixing plate A417.

Furthermore, since the first connector A416e1 is disposed on the opposite side of the right end (the end facing the side wall A417a3), which is the starting point of the attitude change of the electrical board A416, the first connector A416e1 The electric board A416 can be efficiently rotationally displaced by the load applied to the wiring connected to the A416e1. In other words, it is possible to increase the moment of force applied to the electrical board A416 by the load applied to the wiring. As a result, it is possible to avoid applying an extra (excessive) load to the electrical board A416 and the wiring during maintenance work.

333 is an exploded front perspective view of the front unit FU and the rear unit BU, and FIG. 334 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front unit FU and the rear unit BU. As shown in FIGS. 333 and 334, the rear unit BU is formed in a box-like shape with an open front side, and the front unit FU is fixed to the open front side in such a manner as to cover it. That is, the second displacement member A490 arranged on the front side of the rear unit BU is configured to be able to advance and retreat through the gap between the rear unit BU and the front unit FU.

As shown in FIG. 333, only one drive motor AMT1 is provided in each first operation unit A400. The driving force of the drive motor AMT1 is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 of the front unit FU and the second displacement member A490 of the rear unit BU, thereby executing the movable effect of the first operation unit A400.

It should be noted that in the present embodiment, units that can be disassembled as units are simply referred to as the front unit FU and the rear unit BU. work in tandem rather than independently. For example, the drive motor AMT1 is arranged in the front unit FU, while the transmission gear A461 for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor AMT1 is arranged in the rear unit BU.

335 is an exploded front perspective view of the front unit FU and the rear unit BU of the first operation unit A400, and FIG. 336 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front unit FU and the rear unit BU of the first operation unit A400. be. 335 and B11 are exploded perspective views of the first operation unit A400 with the front cover A410 removed. 335 and 336, illustration of wiring HC and the like is omitted. First, an outline of the configuration of the first operation unit A400 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 335 and 336, the first operation unit A400 constitutes the front unit FU. A portion A420 is formed of a light-transmissive and colorless resin material, and is disposed on the front side of the support plate portion A420 with a gap that allows the first displacement member A440 to advance and retreat, and is fastened and fixed to the support plate portion A420. a first displacement member A440 that is guided by a gap between the guide plate portion A430 and the support plate portion A420 and is displaced forward and backward (sliding displacement, see FIGS. 339 to 344); A slide link A450, which is a mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor AMT1 to the first displacement member A440 and is displaced in conjunction with the displacement of the first displacement member A440, the drive motor AMT1 fastened and fixed to the support plate portion A420, and its and a drive gear AMG1 fastened and fixed to the drive motor AMT1.

In addition, the first operation unit A400 constitutes the rear unit BU, and includes a transmission gear group A460 that meshes with the drive gear AMG1 and rotates each component along with the rotation of the drive gear AMG1, and a transmission gear group A460. A support box portion A470 which rotatably supports the gear group A460 and is formed in a box shape with an open front side from a light-transmitting colored (black in this embodiment) resin material, and a light-transmitting and colorless support box portion A470. A rear plate portion A480 formed of a resin material and arranged with a gap on the back side of the support box portion A470 and fastened and fixed to the support box portion A470, and a gap formed on the front side of the support box portion A470 (support The gap between the plate portion A420 and the support box portion A470) is displaced (rotational displacement, rotational displacement, see FIGS. 356 to 358) by the second displacement member A490, and the drive motor AMT1 is attached to the second displacement member A490. It mainly includes a rack and pinion A510 which is a rack and pinion mechanism that transmits driving force and is fastened and fixed to the back side of the support box portion A470.

As described above, the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 have a plate-like portion (the support plate portion A420 and the bottom portion of the support box portion A470) disposed on the back side of the plate-like portion. (slide link A450, rack and pinion A510) are provided in common, and the slide link A450 and the second displacement member A490 are placed in the gap between the support plate portion A420 and the support box portion A470. are placed.

That is, the displacement members A440 and A490 and the transmission mechanism (slide link A450, rack and pinion A510) are disposed in the front and rear direction with the plate-shaped portion interposed therebetween, so that the front-side first displacement member A440 is easily bulky in the front-rear direction. Compared to the case where the slide link A450 as the transmission mechanism and the second displacement member A490 are arranged in the front and rear independent gaps, the arrangement of the plate member for forming the independent gaps can be omitted. Therefore, the front-to-rear width occupied by the displacement mechanisms of the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 can be suppressed. As a result, another rendering mechanism can be arranged in the front-to-rear gap that can be formed by suppressing the front-to-rear width, so that the rendering effect of the first operation unit A400 can be improved.

Next, each configuration of the first operation unit A400 will be described in detail. As described above, the first motion unit A400 includes the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 with different displacement modes, and the configurations required for each displacement are partially different. The configuration required to realize the displacement of the displacement member A440 will be explained, and the rest of the configuration required for the displacement of the second displacement member A490 will be explained later.

The support plate portion A420 constitutes the framework of the first motion unit A400 and guides the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440. A portion A421, a plurality of guide holes A422 penetratingly formed as elongated holes extending parallel to the direction A416x, a through hole A423 provided as a similar elongated hole in one of the guide holes A422, and a hole parallel to the direction A416x. A plurality of guide ridges A424 projecting on the front side as ridges, and a main body plate portion A421 that is recessed along a direction A416x from the right edge of the main body plate portion A421 so that the recessed end faces the front side. A concave portion A425 formed as an inclined surface that is inclined in a direction away from the right edge of the slide link A450, a detection sensor A426 that detects that the first displacement member A440 is arranged at the initial position, and a slide link A450. A shaft supporting portion A427, which has a circular cross-sectional shape capable of supporting the shaft supporting hole A452 and protrudes from the main body plate portion A421 to the rear side, and a cylindrical portion extending from the main body plate portion A421 to the rear side at a position corresponding to the arrangement of the transmission gear group A460. It mainly includes a plurality of retainer cylindrical portions A428 protruding in a shape.

The guide hole A422 includes a first guide hole A422a that guides the displacement of the first displacement member A440, and a plurality of second guide holes A422b that guides the displacement of the guided projecting portion A455c of the slide link A450.

The through hole A423 is a through hole for the spring hooking portion A455d of the slide link A450 to pass through toward the front side. lock (hook) the end of the

The other end of the coil spring ASP1 is locked (hooked) on the lower left corner of the main body plate A421, and the coil spring ASP1 generates an urging force in the contracting direction (lower left direction).

The guide ridge A424 straddles the guide groove A441g of the first displacement member A440 and has a function of guiding the displacement of the first displacement member A440. The recessed portion A425 is formed to guide the bending of the electrical wiring FC connected to the first displacement member A440, the details of which will be described later.

The detection sensor A426 is a photocoupler-type sensor arranged so as to be able to determine that the first displacement member A440 is arranged at the initial position. In this embodiment, the detection sensor A426 does not directly detect the position of the first displacement member A440, but detects the position of the detected plate portion A455e of the slide link A450.

In this embodiment, the sensor arranged to determine the placement of the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 is the detection sensor A426, and the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 are in the extended position. The arrangement of a detection sensor for determining the arrangement is omitted.

As a result, it is possible to reduce member costs and create space for arranging other displacement members. It is conceivable that a problem such as the drive motor AMT1 not stopping despite the fact that the On the other hand, even if the drive motor AMT1 does not stop, measures are taken to avoid overloading the portions involved in the displacement of the first displacement member A440 and to maintain the arrangement of the first displacement member A440. However, the details will be described later.

The retaining cylindrical portion A428 protrudes in a cylindrical shape having an inner diameter that is approximately half the outermost diameter of the transmission gear A461 of the transmission gear group A460. They are arranged to face the group A460. In other words, the retainer cylindrical portion A428 functions to prevent the transmission gear A461 from being displaced in the shaft-side detachment direction.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, a retaining screw (not shown) is fixed to the tip of the shaft support portion of the transmission gear A461. Therefore, as long as the screw does not loosen or fall off, it is possible to restrict the transmission gear A461 from being displaced in the shaft-side falling-off direction by the screw. As described above, in this embodiment, the transmission gear A461 is prevented from coming off from the shaft by the screw and the retaining cylindrical portion A428 in two stages. can be prevented.

The guide plate portion A430 has a right edge parallel to the right edge of the main body plate portion A421, and is arranged opposite to the plate-shaped main body plate portion A431 along a plane parallel to the plane formed by the main body plate portion A421. , a plurality of long rectangular recesses A432 along the direction A416x on the back side of the main body plate portion A431, and a right edge on the front side of the main body plate portion A431 toward the lower left along the direction A416x. corresponding to the width of the recessed portion A425 of the support plate portion A420 and the inclined surface A433 configured to assist the displacement of the first displacement member A440 (the rear lid portion 443 of the first displacement member A440). and a guide plate portion A434 formed in an elongated plate shape along the direction A416x with a width of .

The main body plate portion A431 has a plurality of insertion holes A431a through which fastening screws are inserted in the peripheral portion thereof. The left side edge of the main body plate portion A431 is supported by the surface (side) of the side wall portion A421a raised from the left side edge of the main body plate portion A421 of the support plate portion A420 toward the front side. The guide plate portion A430 can be stably fastened and fixed to the support plate portion A420 even though the insertion hole portion A431a arranged in the edge portion is one.

In addition, in the right edge of the main body plate A431, which is a position where the first displacement member A440 passes through the front and back when the first displacement member A440 advances and retreats, only one insertion hole A431a is arranged at a substantially central position in the vertical width. , the gap between the right edge of the main body plate portion A431 and the support plate portion A420 can be suppressed over the entire right edge portion, compared to the case where the insertion hole portion A431a is arranged at a biased position. In addition, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the first displacement member A440 as compared with the case where a plurality of insertion holes A431a are arranged.

The long concave portion A432 is a concave portion that guides the displacement-stopping projecting portion A441e of the first displacement member A440 in the direction A416x, which is the direction in which the displacement-stopping projecting portion A441e of the first displacement member A440 is displaced. It is recessed with a length substantially equal to that of the . That is, the first displacement member A440 is not only guided by the guide hole A422 of the support plate portion A420 on the rear side, but also guided by the elongated concave portion A432 on the front side.

The guide plate portion A434 has a plurality of claw portions A434a arranged on the right edge side at intervals slightly wider than the thickness of the electric wiring FC composed of a flat cable. An electric wiring FC whose end is connected to the first displacement member A440 is passed through the gap and temporarily fixed. By this. One end of the bending displacement of the electric wire FC that is bent and displaced by the displacement of the first displacement member A440 can be positioned at the claw portion A434a, and the position of the electric wire FC on the left side of the claw portion A434a can be stabilized. .

Therefore, the electric wiring FC composed of the flat cable can be maintained in a state of being brought close to the guide plate portion A434, so that the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the front side of the guide plate portion A434. However, when the electrical wire FC is also displaced in the same manner (see FIG. 346), it is possible to avoid interference between the first displacement member A440 and the electrical wire FC. The first displacement member A440 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 337 and 338. FIG.

337 is an exploded front perspective view of the first displacement member A440, and FIG. 338 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first displacement member A440. Note that FIG. 338 is shown in a different direction from FIG. 336 for convenience of explanation.

As shown in FIGS. 337 and 338, the first displacement member A440 includes a guided plate portion A441, which is a plate-like portion guided along the direction A416x between the support plate portion A420 and the guide plate portion A430, and a colored It is a plate-like portion (which is plated with gold in this embodiment) made of a light-impermeable resin material, pivotally supported by the guided plate portion A441, and displaced in conjunction with the guided plate portion A441. An interlocking plate portion A442, a rear lid portion 443 which is fastened and fixed to the rear side of the interlocking plate portion A442 to form a gap between the interlocking plate portion A442 and the interlocking plate portion A442. A diffuser plate A444 arranged to face the rear side of the interlocking plate portion A442, and a diffuser plate A444 arranged to face the rear side of the diffuser plate A444 and having an outer shape substantially equal to that of the diffuser plate A444 are arranged to face the rear lid portion 443. It is mainly provided with an electric decoration board A445.

Here, the interlocking plate portion A442, the rear lid portion 443, the diffusion plate A444, and the electrical board A445 are fixed together, so these will be described first. That is, a plurality of positioning pins A442a projecting from the rear surface of the interlocking plate portion A442 are inserted into a plurality of insertion holes A444a of the diffusion plate A444, whereby the interlocking plate portion A442 and the diffusion plate A444 are positioned relative to each other. A plurality of positioning pins A444b protruding from the rear surface of the diffuser plate A444 and the decorative electrical substrate A445 are positioned relative to each other by being inserted into a plurality of insertion holes A445a of the decorative electrical substrate A445.

Fastening screws passing through the plurality of insertion holes 443a of the rear lid portion 443 are fastened and fixed to the plurality of threaded portions A442b of the interlocking plate portion A442. The A444 and the electrical board A445 are held in a manner that allows displacement (displacement less than the height of the positioning pin) to the extent that the positioning pins A442a and A444b do not come off. As a result, the diffusion plate A444 and the electrical board A445 can be stably fixed without directly inserting the fastening screws into the diffusion board A444 and the electrical board A445.

In this embodiment, a plurality of protruding ribs 443b projecting toward the front side near the outer periphery of the rear lid portion 443 come into contact with the electrical board A445 and press against the interlocking plate portion A442 and the diffusion plate A444. It is formed with a dimensional relationship that causes a load. This pressing force can stably fix the diffusion plate A444 and the electrical board A445 to the interlocking plate portion A442.

The illumination board A445 has a plurality of light emitting means A445b such as LEDs (illustrated in a substantially square chip shape in FIG. 337) whose optical axis is directed toward the diffusion plate A444 on the front side.

The diffusing plate A444 has a wavy pattern formed by ridges that spread concentrically around an axis-corresponding position A444c arranged opposite to the light emitting means A445b on the back side, and the outer edge of the wavy pattern is the interlocking plate portion. It is formed at a position corresponding to the opening A442c of A442.

A fitting portion A444d is formed on the front side of the diffuser plate A444, and has an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape of the opening A442c of the interlocking plate portion A442. be

With this configuration, the player can visually recognize the light that has passed through the aperture A442c among the light that has passed through the diffuser plate A444 out of the light emitted from the light emitting means A445b.

The electrical board A445 has a connector A445c arranged on the back side and connected with an electrical wiring FC composed of a flat cable. The electric wiring FC connected to the connector A445c is connected to the connector A445c from the rotation tip side of the interlocking plate portion A442. As a result, the bending position of the electric wire FC can be configured on the rotation distal end side of the interlocking plate portion A442, and the degree of bending can be moderated.

The rear lid portion 443 has a ventilation opening 443c formed at a position corresponding to a connector A445c and a circuit configuration device (not shown) (capacitor, resistor, etc.), and the ventilation opening 416c in the direction A416x. and a through-hole A443d formed therethrough.

The tip of the electric wire FC connected to the connector A445c is arranged in the ventilation opening 443c where the connector A445c is located, but the electric wire FC is routed to the rear side of the rear lid portion 443 through the through hole A443d. . As a result, the electrical wiring FC can be sandwiched between the small-diameter rod-shaped portion 443e that partitions between the ventilation opening 443c and the through-hole A443d, and the electrical board A445. Wiring FC can be prevented from being displaced. The through-hole A443d also has a role of forming a space for arranging the electric wire FC, and compared with the case where the through-hole A443d is not formed with a sufficient length along the direction A416x, the electric wire FC can reduce the load on the

In addition, in the present embodiment, the thin rod-shaped portion 443e is formed to protrude toward the electrical board A445 in the same manner as the projecting rib 443b. Therefore, the space between the thin rod-shaped portion 443e and the electrical board A445 is narrowed. With such a configuration, it is possible to limit the point at which a load is applied from the rear cover portion 443 to the electrical board A445. That is, only the protruding rib 443b and the thin rod-shaped portion 443e are configured to apply a load from the rear lid portion 443 to the electrical board A445.

As a result, even if the electric wire FC is displaced by the displacement of the first displacement member A440, it is possible to prevent the electric wire FC from coming out of the connector A445c.

Next, a connection mode between the interlocking plate portion A442 and the guided plate portion A441 and details of the guided plate portion A441 will be described. The interlocking plate portion A442 includes a support shaft portion A442d that protrudes in a circular shape, a shaft support hole A442e that is a circular opening that is coaxial with the central axis of the support shaft portion A442d, and the central axis of the support shaft portion A442d. A roller member A442f, which is a resin-made member pivotally supported by the interlocking plate portion A442 so as to be rotatable about a parallel axis, and has a circular outer shape.

The guided plate portion A441 includes a main body plate portion A441a formed in a long plate shape from a resin material, a support shaft portion A441b projecting from an upper end portion of the main body plate portion A441a, and a support shaft portion A441b. A shaft support hole A441c, which is circular and coaxial with the central axis of the support shaft portion A441b, is drilled at the lower end of the main body plate portion A441a, and a long straight line from the front to the front side of the main body plate portion A441a. A plurality of projecting guide ribs A441d, a plurality of displacement stop projections A441e projecting toward the front side in an elongated shape along a direction intersecting (perpendicular to) the guide ribs A441d, and an electric wire. An inclined surface A441f inclined outward (lower left side) toward the front side at a position opposed to the electric wiring FC connected to the connector A445c of the decorative board A445, and a direction A416x on the back side of the main body plate portion A441a. a plurality of guide grooves A441g formed as small diameter grooves along the main body plate portion A441a, a recessed portion A441h recessed along the direction A416x from the upper right edge of the main body plate portion A441a, and fastening to the back side of the main body plate portion A441a and a fastening portion A441i protruding in a manner in which a screw can be fastened.

The support shaft portion A441b and the shaft support hole A441c are used for connection with the interlocking plate portion A442. As an assembly method, after the interlocking plate portion A442 is arranged so that the shaft support hole A442e of the interlocking plate portion A442 is arranged in the shape of an axis of the support shaft portion A441b, the interlocking plate portion A442 is mounted along the axis. By moving with respect to the guide plate portion A441, the support shaft portion A441b can be inserted into the shaft support hole A442e, and the support shaft portion A442d can be inserted into the shaft support hole A441c. The shaft support hole A442e and the support shaft portion A441b, and the shaft support hole A441c and the support shaft portion A442d are configured with dimensions such that a slight gap is formed therebetween so as to be rotatable.

In this embodiment, after the interlocking plate portion A442 and the guided plate portion A441 are axially supported by the above-described method, a screw for preventing slippage is fixed to the tip of the support shaft portion A441b. The diameter of the head of is larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole A442e, thereby preventing the interlocking plate portion A442 from slipping out of the guided plate portion A441.

The guide ridge portion A441d is a narrow diameter portion for narrowing the contact area with the back surface of the guide plate portion A430. As a result, the frictional force generated between the guide plate portion A430 and the main body plate portion A431 can be reduced, and the guided plate portion A441 can be smoothly displaced.

The displacement-stopping projecting portion A441e is formed with a width slightly shorter than the width of the elongated recess A432 of the guide plate portion A430, and enters the elongated recess A432 in the assembled state of the first operation unit A400 (see FIG. 324). It is formed with a protruding length.

When the guided plate portion A441 is arranged at the end of the displacement, the formation position of the displacement stopping protruding portion A441e is designed so that the displacement stopping protruding portion A441e is arranged at the end of the long concave portion A432 in the longitudinal direction. be done. Therefore, even if the guided plate portion A441 does not stop normally at the end of the displacement, the displacement of the guided plate portion A441 is restricted by locking the displacement stopping protruding portion A441e with the long concave portion A432. be able to.

The inclined surface A441f is a flat surface for receiving and guiding the electrical wiring FC connected to the connector A445c of the electrical board A445. By slanting, it is possible to suppress the load applied to the electrical wiring FC due to the displacement of the guided plate portion A441. The manner in which the electrical wiring FC composed of the flat cable is bent will be described later.

The guide groove A441g is a groove that straddles the guide ridge A424 of the support plate portion A420, and is formed with a groove width larger than the thickness of the guide ridge A424. Equipped with a projecting portion that projects in a circular shape. The distance between the tips of the projecting portions is slightly longer than the thickness of the guide ridges A424. As a result, it is possible to reduce the frictional force generated between the guide groove A441g and the guide ridge A424 while suppressing deviation of the direction in which the guide groove A441g extends from the longitudinal direction of the guide ridge A424.

The recessed portion A441h is a relief portion that is recessed to avoid interference with a portion used for fastening by a fastening screw that is inserted through the insertion hole portion A431a on the right side of the guide plate portion A430. Thus, in the present embodiment, the right end of the guided plate portion A441 can be arranged on the right side of the insertion hole portion A431a.

The fastening portion A441i is inserted through the first guide hole A422a of the support plate portion A420 in the assembled state (see FIG. 324) and connected to the displacement-side long hole A453 of the slide link A450. That is, the driving force is transmitted to the fastening portion A441i via the slide link A450, thereby displacing the first displacement member A440 including the guided plate portion A441.

Returning to FIGS. 335 and 336, description will be made. The slide link A450 includes a long link A451 rotatably supported by the shaft support A427 of the support plate portion A420, and a deformed slide member connected to the long link A451 and supported so as to be parallel movable along the direction A416x. A455;

The long link A451 is a member formed in the shape of a long rod, and has a supported shaft hole A452 drilled with a diameter that allows the shaft support portion A427 to be inserted therethrough, and a long side with respect to the shaft supported hole A452. Displacement side long hole A453 drilled in the end portion in a long hole shape along the long direction, and a long hole shape along the long direction at the end opposite to the side where the displacement side long hole A453 is arranged and a transmission side long hole A454 drilled in.

The odd-shaped slide member A455 is arranged in a recessed portion A421b of the main body plate portion A421 recessed on the front side of the base end surface of the support plate portion A420 from which the shaft support portion A427 protrudes, and the main body plate portion A421 and the long link A451 are arranged. A plate-shaped main body plate portion A455a sandwiched between the main body plate portion A455a and a transmission projection portion A455b that is projected in an outer circular shape toward the back side of the main body plate portion A455a and is inserted into the transmission side long hole A454 of the long link A451. , a plurality of guided protruding portions A455c protruding toward the front side of the main body plate portion A455a in an outer circular shape and inserted into the second guide holes A422b of the support plate portion A420; A spring hooking portion A455d that protrudes in a hook shape and is inserted through the hole A423 of the support plate portion A420 to hook (lock) the end of the coil spring ASP1, and is thin enough to enter the detection gap of the detection sensor A426. and a deformed transmitted portion A456 to which driving force is transmitted from the transmission gear group A460.

The transmission gear group A460 is composed of a pair of gears rotatably supported by the support box portion A470. On the other hand, it has a gear A462 with a pin meshed on the opposite side of the drive gear AMG1, and a same-phase member A465 following the gear A462 with a pin in phase.

The pinned gear A462 has a transmission protrusion A463 projecting from an eccentric position toward the front side in an outer circular shape, and an arc-shaped portion centered on the rotation axis of the pinned gear A462 with the transmission protrusion A463 as the base end. and an arcuate wall portion A464 formed as a wall portion.

The arcuate wall portion A464 has a central angle of approximately 230 degrees, and is shorter in length toward the front than the transmission protrusion A463. Therefore, as will be described later, although the transmitting protrusion A463 and the arcuate wall portion A464 are also portions that transmit the load to the deformed transmitted portion A456, the load generating locations are different in the front-rear direction. That is, the position where the load is generated via the transmission projection A463 (if the load is generated at multiple points, the middle point or average point) is closer to the front side than the position where the load is generated via the circular arc wall portion A464. becomes. Since the displacement mode of the first displacement member A440 can be described by the above-described configuration, the displacement mode of the first displacement member A440 will be described below.

FIG. 339(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 339(b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 339(c) is the first operation on line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc of FIG. FIG. 11 is a partial cross-sectional view of unit A400;

In order to facilitate understanding, the guide plate portion A430 is illustrated by imaginary lines in FIG. 339(a), and the transmission gear A461 and the electrical wiring FC are omitted in FIG. As for A462, only the transmission protrusion A463 and the arcuate wall portion A464 are shown, and in FIG. 339(c), the front cover A410 is shown in phantom lines. Also, in FIGS. 339(a) and 339(b), illustration of the rear unit BU is omitted unless otherwise specified. The same applies to FIGS. 340 to 345 below.

FIGS. 339(a) to 339(c) illustrate a state in which the first displacement member A440 is arranged at the retracted position before excitation of the drive motor AMT1. In this state, the deformed slide member A455 is arranged on the outermost side (left side), and the length of the coil spring ASP1 is the shortest. is the weakest.

As shown in FIG. 339(b), the deformed transmitted portion A456 is a portion that engages with the pin-equipped gear A462, and is located on the protruding position (upper right) side of the transmission projection A463, from the main body plate portion A455a to the rear surface. A protruding plate portion A456a protruding to the side in a plate shape, and a retracted position (lower left) side of the protruding plate portion A456a are arranged opposite to the protruding plate portion A456a with a space equal to or larger than the diameter of the transmission protruding portion A463. and an insertion gap A456c formed between the projecting plate portion A456a and the opposing arrangement portion A456b.

The protruding length of the protruding plate portion A456a is longer than the length of the opposing arrangement portion A456b in the same direction, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 324), the protruding portion A463 and the arc wall portion A464 are contact is possible in the moving direction.

The opposing arrangement portion A456b can abut (overlap) the transmission projection A463a in the movement direction, while it does not abut (do not overlap) the circular arc wall portion A464 in the movement direction. That is, the opposing arrangement portion A456b and the arcuate wall portion A464 are formed in a dimensional relationship that creates a front-to-rear gap.

The insertion gap A456c is configured to be able to receive the transmission projection A463, and an escape portion A456d formed in a shape along the moving direction of the transmission projection A463 is formed on the open end side. The relief portion A456d allows the transmission projection A463 to smoothly move forward and backward with respect to the insertion gap A456c (with low resistance).

In FIG. 339(b), the illustration of the transmission gear A461 is omitted, but in the actual assembled state (see FIG. 324), a pair of transmission gears A461, which are gears of the same shape, are connected to the drive gear AMG1 and the pinned gear A462. and transmits the driving force of the drive gear AMG1 to the pinned gear A462.

As shown in FIG. 339(b), a first displacement member A440 guided by a first guide hole A422a and a deformed slide member A455 guided by a second guide hole A422b are connected by a long link A451. . That is, the first displaceable member A440 and the deformed slide member A455 are displaced in opposite directions parallel to the direction A416x by the long link A451 that is rotationally displaced about the shaft support A427.

As shown in FIG. 339(b), the detected plate portion A455e enters the detection gap of the detection sensor A426 when the first displacement member A440 is arranged at the retracted position.

As shown in FIG. 339(c), the first displacement member A440 has a roller member A442f disposed between the guide wall portion A471b of the support box portion A470 and the guide portion A413 of the front cover A410. Since the arrangement of A442f is restricted between the guide wall portion A471b of the support box portion A470 and the guide portion A413 of the front cover A410, the interlocking plate portion A442 moves into the shaft support hole as the guided plate portion A441 slides. It is configured to rotate with A442e as a starting point. Operation diagrams for explaining the displacement mode of the first displacement member A440 in chronological order will be explained.

FIG. 340(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 340(b) is a back view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 340(c) is the first operation on line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc in FIG. FIG. 11 is a partial cross-sectional view of unit A400;

In FIGS. 340(a) to 340(c), the drive motor AMT1 is excited to rotate, the roller member A442f is at the same position as in FIG. A state in which it abuts on the bent corner of A471b is illustrated.

By the time the state shown in FIG. 339 changes to the state shown in FIG. 340, the pinned gear A462 rotates from the initial angle d0 by the first angle d1. With this rotation, the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protruding plate portion A456a, thereby causing the deformed slide member A455 to slide and displace, and the slide displacement to be transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451. be. As described above, the arc wall portion A464 and the facing arrangement portion A456b have a front-to-rear gap, so that the arc wall portion A464 can be arranged to overlap the facing arrangement portion A456b in the front-to-rear direction. (See FIG. 340(b)).

In the present embodiment, the straight line connecting the rotation axis of the pinned gear A462 and the center of the transmission protrusion A463 is parallel to the direction A416x at the initial angle d0, but the present invention is not limited to this. .

For example, at the initial angle d0, the straight line connecting the rotation axis of the pinned gear A462 and the center of the transmission protrusion A463 is inclined by 10 degrees with respect to the direction A416x (10 degrees in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the pinned gear A462). slanted) straight line. In this case, the section of 10 degrees from the initial angle d0 can be configured as a section in which no load is applied to the projecting plate portion A456a in the traveling direction, so that excessive driving resistance is prevented immediately after the start of rotation. can be avoided.

In other words, a section of 10 degrees from the initial angle d0 can be used as a run-up section, and the protruding plate portion A456a can be vigorously pushed after being rotated by 10 degrees from the initial angle d0. Suppression can be achieved. Also, when driving in the direction returning to the initial angle d0, a section of 10 degrees can be used as a deceleration section.

FIG. 341(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 341(b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 341(c) is the first operation on line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc of FIG. FIG. 11 is a partial cross-sectional view of unit A400;

FIGS. 341(a) to 341(c) show a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited to rotate and the roller member A442f contacts the intermediate portion of the guide wall portion A471b of the support box portion A470.

By the time the state shown in FIG. 339 changes to the state shown in FIG. 341, the pinned gear A462 rotates from the initial angle d0 by the second angle d2. With this rotation, the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protruding plate portion A456a, thereby causing the deformed slide member A455 to slide and displace, and the slide displacement to be transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451. be. As described above, the arc wall portion A464 and the facing arrangement portion A456b have a front-to-rear gap, so that the arc wall portion A464 can be arranged to overlap the facing arrangement portion A456b in the front-to-rear direction. (See FIG. 341(b)).

FIG. 342(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 342(b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 342(c) is the first operation on line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc of FIG. FIG. 11 is a partial cross-sectional view of unit A400;

FIGS. 342(a) to 342(c) show a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the longitudinal direction of the long link A451 is substantially perpendicular to the direction A416x.

By the time the state shown in FIG. 339 changes to the state shown in FIG. 342, the pinned gear A462 rotates from the initial angle d0 by the third angle d3. With this rotation, the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protruding plate portion A456a, thereby causing the deformed slide member A455 to slide and displace, and the slide displacement to be transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451. be. As described above, the arc wall portion A464 and the facing arrangement portion A456b have a front-to-rear gap, so that the arc wall portion A464 can be arranged to overlap the facing arrangement portion A456b in the front-to-rear direction. (See FIG. 342(b)).

In this embodiment, when the first displacement member A440 starts to slide along a plane perpendicular to the front-rear direction (see FIG. 342), the longitudinal direction of the long link A451 and the displacement direction of the deformed slide member A455 (the direction parallel to the direction A416x) are substantially perpendicular to each other, the first displacement member A440 can be smoothly slid in one direction (on the same plane).

That is, the direction of the load applied from the displacement-side elongated hole A453 to the fastening portion A441i is directed to one side (lower side in this embodiment) with respect to the displacement direction (direction parallel to the direction A416x) of the deformed slide member A455. can be limited. As a result, compared to the case where the load applied to the first displacement member A440 is reversed in the direction intersecting the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440 during the slide displacement of the first displacement member A440, the first displacement member A440 rattling of the slide displacement can be suppressed.

FIG. 343(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 343(b) is a back view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 343(c) is the first operation on line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc in FIG. FIG. 11 is a partial cross-sectional view of unit A400;

In FIGS. 343(a) to 343(c), the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the roller member A442f moves from the state shown in FIG. ) is shown in the figure, which is located at an approximately intermediate position of the displacement until reaching the state of .

By the time the state in FIG. 339 changes to the state in FIG. 343, the pinned gear A462 rotates by a fourth angle d4 from the initial angle d0. With this rotation, the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protruding plate portion A456a, thereby causing the deformed slide member A455 to slide and displace, and the slide displacement to be transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451. be. As described above, the arc wall portion A464 and the facing arrangement portion A456b have a front-to-rear gap, so that the arc wall portion A464 can be arranged to overlap the facing arrangement portion A456b in the front-to-rear direction. (See FIG. 343(b)).

FIG. 344(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 344(b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 344(c) is the first operation on line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc of FIG. FIG. 11 is a partial cross-sectional view of unit A400;

FIGS. 344(a) to 344(c) show a state (also referred to as an extended state) in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited to rotate and the first displacement member A440 is arranged at the extended position.

By the time the state shown in FIG. 339 changes to the state shown in FIG. 344, the pinned gear A462 rotates from the initial angle d0 by the fifth angle d5. With this rotation, the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protruding plate portion A456a, thereby causing the deformed slide member A455 to slide and displace, and the slide displacement to be transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451. be. As described above, the arc wall portion A464 and the facing arrangement portion A456b have a front-to-rear gap, so that the arc wall portion A464 can be arranged to overlap the facing arrangement portion A456b in the front-to-rear direction. (See FIG. 344(b)).

When the pinned gear A462 rotates further from the state shown in FIG. 344, the transmission protrusion A463 begins to displace in the direction opposite to the direction A416x. Here, since the arcuate wall portion A464 and the projecting plate portion A456a are formed in a dimensional relationship to abut in the direction A416x, even after the transmission projecting portion A463 separates from the projecting plate portion A456a, the arcuate wall portion A464 is in contact with the projecting plate portion A456a, displacement of the deformed slide member A455 is restricted.

The contact point between the arcuate wall portion A464 and the projecting plate portion A456a is arranged in a straight line parallel to the direction A416x passing through the rotation axis of the pinned gear A462. Therefore, the load applied from the protruding plate portion A456a to the arcuate wall portion A464 passes through the rotation axis of the pinned gear A462. can be prevented.

Furthermore, since the arcuate wall portion A464 is curved, the contact area between the arcuate wall portion A464 and the projecting plate portion A456a can be suppressed (theoretically, since line contact can be achieved, the contact area is 0). Therefore, when the pinned gear A462 further rotates from the state shown in FIG. ), it is possible to avoid the need for extra driving force for restricting the displacement of the odd-shaped slide member A455. That is, the displacement of the deformed slide member A455 can be restricted only by the driving force required to rotate the pinned gear A462.

In addition, considering the deformation due to wear of the resin material that actually constitutes the arcuate wall portion A464 and the projecting plate portion A456a, the contact area increases over time, and the contact area between the arcuate wall portion A464 and the projecting plate portion A456a increases. It is thought that the frictional force generated at To deal with this, a low-friction seal may be applied to the arcuate wall portion A464 and the projecting plate portion A456a, or a lubricant (such as grease) may be applied. In this embodiment, since the ideal contact area is formed small, the area that needs to be treated with a low-friction seal or lubricant can be reduced. Therefore, countermeasure costs can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 344(b), the outer surface of the transmission projection A463 and the outer surface of the arcuate wall A464 are formed in the same circular shape coaxial with the rotation axis of the pin gear A462. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the timing of transition from the contact state with the protrusion A463 to the contact state with the arcuate wall portion A464.

FIG. 345 is a rear view of the front unit FU. FIG. 345 shows a state in which the driving motor AMT1 is excited to rotate, the first displacement member A440 is arranged at the extended position, and the transmission projection A463 contacts the deformed transmitted portion A456.

339 to 345, the pinned gear A462 rotates from the initial angle d0 by the sixth angle d6 (360 degrees or more) (see FIG. 360). After the state of FIG. 344, the transmission projection A463 does not push the projecting plate portion A456a, and is displaced without contacting other members. Further, as shown in FIG. 345, the protruding plate portion A456a is restricted in displacement by contacting the arcuate wall portion A464, and is maintained in the state shown in FIG. ). That is, the contact between the transmission protrusion A463 and the deformed transmitted portion A456 occurs in a state where the first displacement member A440 is arranged at the overhang position.

As shown in FIG. 345, the contact position between the transmitting protrusion A463 and the deformed transmitted portion A456 is the position on the projecting position side of the first displacement member A440 with respect to the insertion gap A456c. That is, the location (insertion gap A456c) where the load is applied to the deformed transmitted portion A456 due to the displacement of the first displacement member A440 is different from the location where the deformed transmitted portion A456 in FIG. 345 is subjected to the load. As a result, even if the pinned gear A462 unintentionally over-rotates and overloads the transmission projection A463 and the deformed transmitted portion A456, the change in the shape of the insertion gap A456c can be avoided. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the displacement of the deformed slide member A455 will be affected after the overload occurs.

In the state of FIG. 345, the direction of the load applied from the transmission protrusion A463 to the odd-shaped slide member A455 is the direction (upper right direction) toward the retracted position side of the first displacement member A440. Since the deformed slide member A455 is arranged at the end of the movement range in this direction, the deformed slide member A455 is prevented from being displaced by the load applied from the transmission protrusion A463.

In this way, while avoiding displacement of the odd-shaped slide member A455, the load applied from the transmission protrusion A463 can be softened by the elastic deformation (deflection or expansion/contraction) of the opposing arrangement portion A456b.

As shown in FIG. 345, the location where the transmission protrusion A463 abuts is the side wall of the opposing arrangement portion A456b on the detection plate portion A455e side. ing. In the present embodiment, when an overload occurs in the deformed transmitted portion A456 due to excessive rotation of the pinned gear A462, the detected plate portion A455e is preferentially broken. That is, compared with the transmission protrusion A463, the detected plate portion A455e is configured to be weaker.

As a result, it is possible to avoid destruction of the structure related to the displacement of the deformed slide member A455 among the structures of the deformed transmitted portion A456 due to the load due to the excessive rotation of the pinned gear A462. Therefore, the durability of the deformed slide member A455 can be improved.

If the plate portion to be detected A455e is broken, the plate portion to be detected A455e will not be detected by the detection sensor A426 even if the first displacement member A440 returns to the retracted position. , the possibility of over-rotation of the pinned gear A462 can be assumed, and timely maintenance can be performed.

The design aspect of the detected plate portion A455e is not limited at all, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, every time the first displacement member A440 is displaced, the transmission projection A463 comes into contact with the deformed transmitted portion A456, and the drive motor AMT1 is controlled so as to be energized until a slight load is applied. It may be designed so that the plate portion A455e to be detected is broken due to accumulation of a load equivalent to the number of times of contact with the number of times of endurance operation of a portion (for example, the transmission protrusion A463) in which a crack is likely to occur. In this case, in addition to being able to assume the possibility of occurrence of excessive rotation of the pinned gear A462, it is possible to inform the replacement timing of the transmission protrusion A463, so that timely maintenance can be performed.

346(a) is a cross-sectional view of the first operation unit A400 along line CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa in FIG. 339(a), and FIG. 346(b) is a first operation along line CCCXLVIb-CCCXLVIb in FIG. 344(a). FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of the unit A400; FIG. 346(a) shows the first displacement member A440 in the retracted position (also referred to as retracted state), and FIG. 346(b) illustrates the first displacement member A440 in the extended position (extended state). ) are illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 346(a) and 346(b), an electrical wiring FC formed as a flat cable is connected to the connector A445c of the first displacement member A440. The electric wiring FC is loosely arranged in the space between the guided plate portion A441 and the rear lid portion 443. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 346(a), the inclined surface A441f of the guided plate portion A441 is formed so as not to come into contact with the electrical wiring FC. That is, the upper edge of the slanted surface A441f is positioned slightly further back than the end of the slanted surface A433 of the guide plate portion A430 (the end facing the first displacement member A440). position), and a space can be secured between the inclined surface A441f and the electrical wiring FC.

When the first displacement member A440 is in the extended state, the electric wiring FC retreats from the displacement trajectory of the second displacement member A490. be. As a result, the space VE, which will be described later, can be used both as a space into which the electric wiring FC enters and a space into which the second displacement member A490 enters, so that the space required for arrangement can be reduced.

The electric wiring FC is arranged in the space VE formed on the back side of the first displacement member A440 in the retracted state of the first displacement member A440. As a result, the first displacement member A440 functions as shielding means for shielding the field of view to the electric wiring FC, and it is possible to prevent the electric wiring FC from being visually recognized when viewed from the front, rear, left, and right. The space VE will be explained.

The space VE has an inclined posture in which the surface of the side that is visible to the player (the surface where the opening A442c on the side of the interlocking plate portion A442 is formed) is directed toward the third symbol display device 81 when the first displacement member A440 is in the retracted state. It is the back space formed by being composed of In this way, the space VE is configured in such a manner that the first displacement member A440 is formed in the shape of a plate, and that the first displacement member A440 has an inclined posture that is easily visible to the player in the retracted state in which the first displacement member A440 is widened in the front-rear direction. It is easily formed by

On the other hand, since this space VE is also a space into which a second displacement member A490, which will be described later, is displaced, it is preferable to maintain a wide field of view in a front view, considering the visibility of the second displacement member A490. Since the field of view in a front view spreads at an angle centering on the player's eyes, the outline of the space VE is preferably formed so as to be inclined away from the third symbol display device 81 toward the rear side, but this is not the case. In the embodiment, the outer shell of the space VE (boundary surface on the far side from the third pattern display device 81) is formed with a non-tilted surface in the front-rear direction for ease of manufacture.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the space VE created for improving the visibility of the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 is effectively used as an area in which the wires are laid out. As a result, when the loosened portion of the electric wiring FC is arranged on the opposite side of the third pattern display device 81 with respect to the first displacement member A440 at the projecting position, the area required for loosening the wiring (in other words, , the area between the outer wall portion A312 of the rear case A310 and the first displacement member A440) can be made unnecessary.

Therefore, compared to the case where the slack portion of the electric wiring FC is arranged on the opposite side of the third pattern display device 81 with respect to the first displacement member A440 at the projecting position, the electric wiring FC can be arranged inward of the rear case A310. The displacement end of the first displacement member A440 can be brought close to the outer wall A312 of the rear case A310 while being accommodated.

As shown in FIG. 346, the first displacement member A440 is arranged such that the front surface of the interlocking plate portion A442 is arranged on the front limit line FL in the extended position (see FIG. 346(b)), and the retracted position (see FIG. 346(a)). ), at least a portion of the interlocking plate portion A442 (mainly, the overhang position side portion) overhangs the front side beyond the front limit line FL. This overhang is such that in the process of displacing the first displacement member A440 from the retracted position, the posture change of the first displacement member A440 is completed from the retracted position (see FIG. 339(c)) ( 342(c)), the first displacement member A440 can protrude toward the front side beyond the front limit line FL, particularly on the retracted position side (left side of FIG. 346) of the first displacement member A440.

Therefore, it is necessary to form a space on the front side of the front limit line FL to avoid collision with the first displacement member A440. However, in this embodiment, the electrical board A416 is not formed on the retracted position side (left side of FIG. 346) of the first displacement member A440, thereby creating a space for the first displacement member A440 to protrude. forming In addition, by forming only the diffuser plate A415 to protrude toward the retracted position side of the first displacement member A440, the region where the light emitted from the light emitting means A416a disposed on the electrical board A416 can be seen is the electrical board A416. It avoids being limited to the formation range of A416.

In this way, by limiting the formation range of the electrical board A416 and forming the diffusion plate A415 projecting from the outer edge of the electrical board A416, the front-to-rear spacing between the electrical board A416 and the first displacement member A440 can be adjusted. While narrowing, it is possible to secure a sufficient range for visually recognizing the light emission performance by the illumination board A416.

With reference to FIGS. 347 to 352, changes in the appearance of the first operation unit A400 caused by the displacement of the first displacement member A440 will be described from the viewpoint of lighting effect. This change in appearance is caused by the fact that the first displacement member A440 is partially visible through the through hole A412 of the front cover A410 when the first displacement member A440 is arranged in the extended position (position after excitation). be.

Figures 347(a), 347(b) and 348 are front views of the first operation unit A400. In FIG. 347(a), the retracted state of the first displacement member A440 is illustrated, and in FIG. 347(b), the first displacement member A440 is arranged in the middle position of the displacement section (the position illustrated in FIG. 342). 348, the overhanging state of the first displacement member A440 is illustrated. In FIGS. 347(b) and 348, the shape of the portion of the first displacement member A440 that is hidden by the front cover A410 is illustrated by hidden lines.

A diffusion plate A415 for diffusing the light emitted from the light emitting means A416a disposed on the electrical board A416 is disposed on the rear side of the front cover A410. and a second area AC2 (see FIG. 330).

The first displacement means 440 is arranged on the rear side of the diffusion plate A415 at least at the overhang position, and the light emitted from the light emitting means A445b (see FIG. 337) and passed through the opening A442c travels toward the diffusion plate A415. Here, although the opening A442c of the first displacement means 440 is displaced to a position that overlaps the first area AC1 in front view, since the electrical board A416 is arranged in the first area AC1, the opening A442c is passed through. The light is shielded by the electrical board A416.

Therefore, the light passing through the aperture A442c can reach the diffusion plate A415 in the second area AC2. In other words, in the second area AC2, the light emitted from the light emitting means A416a (see FIG. 329) arranged on the electrical board A416 and diffused by the diffusion plate A415 and the light emitting means A445b of the first displacement means 440 (see FIG. 337) can be seen in a mixed state with the light emitted from.

More specifically, the mode of the second area AC2 includes a mode in which the light-emitting means A416a is turned on and the light-emitting means A445b is turned off, a mode in which the light-emitting means A416a is turned off and the light-emitting means A445b is turned on, and a mode in which the light-emitting means A416a and the light-emitting means A416a are turned on. It is configured to be switchable in at least four modes, ie, a mode in which both A445b are turned on and a mode in which both the light emitting means A416a and A445b are turned off.

In this embodiment, the aspect of the second area AC2 can be visually recognized through the through hole A412 of the front cover A410. It has a plurality of elongated holes A412a formed at three locations on a straight line along the portion.

As shown in FIG. 348, among the plurality of long holes A412a, the central long hole A412a is arranged to face the opening A442c of the first displacement means 440, and the long holes A412a on both sides are arranged outside the opening A442c. (Do not place facing each other). Thereby, the visibility of the light emitted from the light emitting means A445b can be improved when viewed through the central long hole A412a compared to when viewed through the long hole A412a on both sides.

For example, in a state in which the first displacement member A440 is arranged at the extended position, the light emitted from the light emitting means A445b is visible through the central elongated hole A412a, but is invisible through the elongated holes A412a on both sides. It can be configured as follows. As a result, the light emitted from the light emitting means A416a and the light emitting means A445b can be seen in a mixed state through the central long hole A412a, and the light emitted from the light emitting means A416a can be seen through the long holes A412a on both sides. (the light emitted from the light emitting means A445b is made difficult to see).

Here, the aspect (emission color, brightness, etc.) of the front cover A410 depends on the illuminating aspect of the illuminating means A416a (see FIG. 329) while the illuminating means A445b of the first displacement member A440 is turned off. . Therefore, even when the first displacement member A440 is arranged at the extended position (see FIG. 348), if the light emitting means A445b is turned off, the effect of the light emitting means 416b on the lighting effect can be reduced. That is, it is possible to displace the first displacement member A440 to the extended position without causing a change in the front view of the front cover A410.

On the other hand, when the light emitting means A445b is turned on in the state of being arranged at the projecting position 440, the long hole A412a formed at a position closer to the third pattern display device 81 in common with each first operation unit A400 is illuminated. Since the light emitting mode changes, the player's line of sight can be guided to the third symbol display device 81 side.

In addition, the effect of the change of the aspect visually recognized through the through-hole A412 is not limited to this. For example, in a state in which the first displacement members A440 of the first operation unit A400, which are arranged in a set of five pieces, are arranged in the extended position, first, the light emitting means A445b of the first displacement member A440 arranged in the lower left is turned on. Then, at the timing of turning off the light emitting means A445b, the light emitting means A445b of the first displacement member A440 adjacent clockwise in the front view is turned on, and at the timing of turning off the light emitting means A445b of the first displacement member A440 adjacent clockwise in the front view, next The light emitting means A445b of the displacement member A440 may be lighted in order such that the light emitting means A445b are lighted clockwise when viewed from the front.

In this case, by keeping the light emitting means 416b lit, the brightness of the front cover A410 itself is maintained, and only the form of the light seen through the elongated holes A412a is sequentially changed clockwise in the front view. can be executed.

Here, the light emission modes of the other first operation units A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D will be described. The first operation unit A400A is the second unit clockwise from the bottom left when viewed from the front, the first operation unit A400B is the third unit clockwise from the bottom left when viewed from the front, and the first operation unit A400C is the , is the fourth unit clockwise from the bottom left when viewed from the front, and the first operation unit A400D is the fifth unit clockwise from the bottom left when viewed from the front. The main differences of the first motion units A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D from the first motion unit A400 are the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440 and the shape of the opening A442c. Therefore, the openings corresponding to the opening A442c of the first operation units A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D are shown as openings WA, WB, WC, and WD, respectively, and other configurations are the same as those of the first operation unit A400 for convenience. sign.

Figures 349(a) and 349(b) are front views of the first operation unit A400A. Note that FIG. 349(a) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is arranged at an intermediate position (same position as shown in FIG. 342), and FIG. 349(b) shows the first displacement member A state in which the A440 is arranged in the extended position is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 349(a) and 349(b), in the first operation unit A400A, unlike the first operation unit A400, the opening WA is configured to overlap the long holes A412a at both ends when viewed from the front. Furthermore, since the width of the opening WA changes along the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440 (longer on the retracted position side), as the first displacement member A440 approaches the overhang position, the width of the opening WA and both ends increases. The overlapping area with the long hole A412a can be increased. This makes it possible to change the arrangement of the first displacement member A440 and how the light viewed through the elongated hole A412a looks in conjunction with each other.

Figures 350(a) and 350(b) are front views of the first operation unit A400B. In addition, FIG. 350(a) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is arranged at an intermediate position (the same position as shown in FIG. 342), and FIG. 350(b) shows the first displacement member A state in which the A440 is arranged in the extended position is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 350(a) and 350(b), unlike the first operation unit A400, the first operation unit A400B is configured such that the opening WB may overlap the long holes A412a at both ends when viewed from the front. In addition, the width of the opening WB is configured to change so as to repeat expansion and contraction along the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440. As a result, while the first displacement member A440 is displaced from the retracted position to the overhanging position, the overlapping area of the central long hole A412a and the opening WB is maximized in the state shown in FIG. It can be constructed such that it temporarily decreases with the displacement of A440 and then increases again in the state shown in FIG. 350(b). As a result, while the first displacement member A440 is displaced in one direction, it is possible to change the appearance of the light seen through the central long hole A412a in two directions (enlargement direction and contraction direction).

Figures 351(a) and 351(b) are front views of the first operation unit A400C. In addition, FIG. 351(a) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is arranged at an intermediate position (the same position as shown in FIG. 342), and FIG. 351(b) shows the first displacement member A state in which the A440 is arranged in the extended position is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 351(a) and 351(b), unlike the first operation unit A400, the first operation unit A400C is configured such that the opening WC may overlap the long holes A412a at both ends when viewed from the front. In addition, the width of the opening WC is configured to change so as to repeat expansion and contraction along the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440. That is, the opening WC is tapered and widened in the direction intersecting the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440 in the vicinity of the upper end.

As a result, the overlapping area between the left and right long holes A412a and the opening WC while the first displacement member A440 is displaced from the retracted position to the overhanging position is temporarily reduced and then increased again as the first displacement member A440 is displaced. can be configured as As a result, while the first displacement member A440 is displaced in one direction, it is possible to change the appearance of the light visually through the long holes A412a at both ends in two directions (enlargement direction and contraction direction).

Figures 352(a) and 352(b) are front views of the first operation unit A400D. In addition, FIG. 352(a) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is arranged at an intermediate position (the same position as shown in FIG. 342), and FIG. 352(b) shows the first displacement member A state in which the A440 is arranged in the extended position is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 352(a) and 352(b), in the first operation unit A400D, unlike the first operation unit A400, the opening WD is configured in a branched shape when viewed from the front. That is, the opening WD is formed in a branched shape in the vicinity of the lower end so as to widen toward the retracted position side of the first displacement member A440.

As a result, it is possible to divide the overlapping range of the central long hole A412a and the opening WD while the first displacement member A440 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position. That is, the mode of light visually recognized through the central long hole A412a is changed from the mode in which the entire central long hole A412a emits light uniformly (see FIG. 352(a)), and the central long hole A412a is divided into multiple ranges. 352(b)).

In addition, in the first operation unit A400D, the case where the edge of the opening WD divides the central long hole A412a has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the three long holes A412a as a whole may be configured so as to divide the visible range of light. That is, the case where the three long holes A412a and the opening WD overlap and uniform light can be visually recognized through the three long holes A412a, and the case where the opening WD is the central long hole A412a among the three long holes A412a. By overlapping only the long holes A412a at both ends without overlapping, the visible range of light is divided into the long holes A412a at the center and limited to the long holes A412a on both sides. Also good.

Returning to FIGS. 335 and 336, description will be made. The support box portion A470 includes a main box portion A471 formed in the shape of a box whose front and upper right sides are open, and a shaft hole drilled in the main box portion A471 through which the rotation shaft of the gear A462 with a pin of the transmission gear group A460 passes. A472, a shaft support hole A473 drilled so as to be able to support the second displacement member A490, a notch portion A474 formed by cutting in a shape along an arc centering on the shaft support hole A473, and the cutout portion A474. A fastening portion A475, which protrudes in a columnar shape in the vicinity of the cutout portion A474 and has a tip formed so that a fastening screw can be inserted through the through hole A482 of the rear plate portion A480, and a slide rack A511 of the rack and pinion A510. and a pinion support A477 supporting a pinion A517 meshing with the slide rack A511 supported by the rack support A476.

The main box portion A471 includes a protruding wall portion A471a protruding from the rear bottom edge portion toward the back side, and a wall portion protruding from the front upper edge portion toward the front side to form an assembly of the first operation unit A400. In the state (see FIG. 324), the guide wall portion A471b is arranged to face the roller member A442f, and the projecting wall portion A471a is arranged to face the shaft hole A472 (see FIG. 335) on the opposite side of the notch A474. A wiring guide portion A471c is provided.

Although the detailed shape of the guide wall portion A471b will be described later, the roller member A442f abuts against the edge portion of the guide wall portion A471b and guides the displacement of the first displacement member A440 in a sliding or rolling manner (FIG. 339 to Figure 344).

The wiring guide portion A471c is designed so that the shape thereof can appropriately correct the arrangement of the wiring HC, which will be described later, and the details thereof will be described later.

The second displacement member A490 and the reinforcing arm portion A518 of the rack and pinion A510 are connected through the shaft support hole A473 and the notch portion A474. In particular, the notch A474 is formed wide as a region through which the wiring connected to the second displacement member A490 passes, the details of which will be described later.

The rack support portion A476 is a pair of columnar portions protruding toward the rear side of the main body box portion A471, and includes a support columnar portion A476a inserted through the support hole A512 of the rack and pinion A510 and a slide rack A511 of the rack and pinion A510. a stepped portion A476b formed in a stepped shape extending along the slide movement direction (direction parallel to the direction A416x) and protruding toward the back side from the surface on which the support columnar portion A476a is arranged; Prepare.

The pinion support portion A477 includes a pinion shaft A477a on which the pinion A517 of the rack and pinion A510 is rotatably supported, and a wall-like (plate and an arcuate wall portion A477b extending in a shape).

Through the shaft hole A472, the pinned gear A462 of the transmission gear group A460 and the in-phase member A465 are connected. Here, with reference to FIG. 353, the connection mode of the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465 will be described.

Figure 353(a) is an exploded perspective view of the pin-equipped gear A462 and the same-phase member A465, Figure 353(b) is a front perspective view of the pin-equipped gear A462 and the same-phase member A465 on the left, and the right It is a back perspective view of gear A462 with a pin, and in-phase member A465. In addition, in FIG. 353(a), the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465 are illustrated in a posture in which the mutually connected side faces the front.

As shown in FIG. 353(a), the pinned gear A462 has a plurality of phase matching circumferential projections A462a projecting toward the same phase member A465 from the side facing the same phase member A465. Prepare.

The same-phase member A465 has a phase-matching diameter projection A465a projecting from the side facing the pin-equipped gear A462 toward the pin-equipped gear A462, and an outer circular shape from the eccentric position toward the back side. It has a transmission projection A466 that protrudes, and an arcuate wall portion A467 that is formed as an arc-shaped wall portion centered on the rotation axis of the same-phase member A465 with the transmission projection A466 as a base end. Compared with the transmission projection A466, the arc wall A467 has a shorter formation length toward the back side.

The phase matching circumferential protrusion A462a and the phase matching radial protrusion A465a will be described. The phase matching circumferential projection A462a has a plurality of arcuate wall portions formed by axially cutting a circular wall portion centered on the rotation axis of the pinned gear A462.

The phase-matching radial projection A465a has a projection projecting radially outward from a cylindrical projection having an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the phase-matching circumferential projection A462a. It is formed so as to match the angle (phase) at which the notch is made in the matching circumferential protrusion A462a. By entering the projection into the notch of the phase-matching circumferential projection A462a, the pin-equipped gear A462 and the same-phase member A465 can be connected in a state where the phase of the same-phase member A465 with respect to the pin-equipped gear A462 is matched. The pin-equipped gear A462 and the same-phase member A465 can be fixed by inserting the fastening gear along the central axis of the pin-equipped gear A462 and screwing it into the distal end portion of the phase-matching radial protrusion A465a.

Here, in the present embodiment, the angles between the notches of the phase matching peripheral projection A462a are not made uniform (120 degree intervals if divided into three as in the present embodiment), but are made uneven. The pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465 are configured to be connected only in a specific angular relationship (see FIG. 353(b)).

That is, by combining the angles between the cuts of the phase matching circumferential protrusion A462a at 100 degrees, 120 degrees, and 140 degrees (by making them uneven), the angle at which the pinned gear A462 and the same phase member A465 can be connected. A relationship can be limited to one type.

In the present embodiment, the description has been given of the case where the phasing circumferential projection A462a has three notches (phase regulating radial projection A465a), but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one or two locations may be used, or four or more locations may be used, which can be selected as appropriate in consideration of the rigidity in the assembled state of the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465.

Returning to FIGS. 335 and 336, description will be made. The rear plate portion A480 includes a main body plate portion A481 formed in a plate shape from a colorless, light-transmitting resin material, and a fastener that is drilled through the main body plate portion A481 and screwed into the fastening portion A475 of the support box portion A470. A through hole A482 through which a screw is inserted, and a plurality of alignment protrusions A483 that protrude toward the outer peripheral side of the arcuate wall portion A477b of the support box portion A470 and are used for alignment by coming into contact with the outer peripheral side. and a plurality of projecting plate portions A484 projecting from the body plate portion A481 toward the front side so as to have a plate shape along the outer shape of the movement range of the slide rack A511 of the rack and pinion A510.

The outer edge of the rear plate portion A480 (the left edge in FIGS. 335 and 336) is in surface contact with the back side edge of the protruding wall portion A471a of the main body box portion A471, and is positioned in the left-right direction by a protrusion. Only the plate part A484 functions.

On the other hand, at the inner edge of the rear plate portion A480 (the right edge in FIGS. 335 and 336), due to the contact between the alignment protrusion A483 and the arc wall portion A477b, can be aligned. As a result, while the rear plate portion A480 is properly aligned with the support box portion A470, a wide space can be secured in the vicinity of the outer edge portion by eliminating the portion for alignment from the vicinity of the outer edge portion. In the present embodiment, this secured space is utilized as a space for arranging the wiring HC (see FIG. 356(a)), the details of which will be described later.

The protruding plate portion A484 is disposed so that its protruding tip is close to the rear bottom portion of the main body box portion A471 (either in contact with it or with a slight gap that prevents wiring from passing therethrough), and is opposed to the rack and pinion A510. It functions to partition the movement range of the slide rack A511 and the outer area. As a result, the wiring HC connected to the second displacement member A490 can be prevented from entering the movement range of the slide rack A511 of the rack and pinion A510, the details of which will be described later.

354 is an exploded front perspective view of the second displacement member A490, and FIG. 355 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second displacement member A490. As shown in FIGS. 354 and 355, the second displacement member A490 includes a shaft support plate A491 formed of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material and supported in a shaft support hole A473 of the support box portion A470. A cover formed of a colorless, light-transmitting resin material is fitted to the supported support plate A491 in such a manner as to cover the supported support plate A491 from the front side. It is provided with a mounting member A492, and an electrical board A493 on which a light emitting part A493a composed of an LED or the like is disposed and which is housed in a shaft supporting plate A491 and a covering member A492.

The shaft support plate A491 has a shaft support projection A491a that protrudes toward the rear side in a circular shape and is inserted into the shaft support hole A473, and a shaft support projection A491a that is shorter in length than the shaft support projection A491a. a fastening protrusion A491b, a plurality of insertion holes A491c through which fastening screws can be inserted, and a long rectangular hole A491d drilled along the radial direction of the shaft supported protrusion A491a. , a plurality of circular (arc)-shaped support portions A491e projecting toward the front side around the insertion hole A491c, and a plurality of circular support portions A491e projecting toward the front side along the side wall portion forming the outer periphery. and a plurality of thin protrusions A491f.

When the second displacement member A490 is assembled (see FIGS. 335 and 336), the circular supporting portion A491e and the narrow projection A491f are in contact with the outer peripheral edge of the electrical board A493, and the electrical board A493 is placed on the back side. support from.

In particular, the thin protrusion A491f is formed at a portion where the shape of the electrical board A493 to be accommodated is constricted, that is, at a portion where the outer peripheral side wall of the shaft support plate A491 is recessed inward. A part where the shape of A493 is constricted can be selectively supported. As a result, it is possible to suppress the deformation of the electrical board A493 at the constricted portion where it is assumed that the stiffness is likely to be lowered by shortening the width dimension, and it is possible to avoid breakage of the electrical board A493. .

The covering member A492 is inserted into the supported portion A493b of the electrical board A493, and includes a plurality of fastening portions A492a into which fastening screws are inserted through the insertion holes A491c, and a radial direction on the base side of the fastening portion A492a. A plurality of projecting support portions A492b projecting from and coupled to the plate-like portion of the covering member A492, and a narrow projecting portion A491f of the driven support plate A491, at the side wall portion forming the outer periphery It is provided with a plurality of thin protrusions A492c protruding toward the back side in the shape of thin protrusions.

With the above configuration, the electrical board A493 is supported by the thin projections A491f and A492c at the outer periphery, and is supported by the circular support A491e and the projecting support A492b around the fastening screw. As a result, the electrical board A493 can be satisfactorily fixed to the shaft support plate A491 and the covering member A492.

In addition, the supporting mode of the electrical board A493 is not limited at all. For example, the electrical board A493 may be fixed by applying a load along the fastening direction, or a dimensional relationship that does not cause a compressive load The arrangement of the electrical board A493 may be maintained without causing a load by being formed with a dimensional relationship equivalent to the thickness of the A493.

The electrical board A493 includes a plurality of light-emitting portions A493a and a plurality of supported portions A493b that are drilled or recessed so as not to interfere with the fastening portion A492a when viewed in the front-rear direction, and arranged on the back side. and a board-side connector A493c to which an end (connector) of the wiring is connected.

The board-side connector A493 is fixed in a posture in which the wiring extends along the long direction of the long hole A491d of the shaft support plate A491. A section extending portion A491d1 extending in a direction intersecting the direction until the distance from the inner edge on the opposite side becomes shorter than the width dimension of the board-side connector A493c (or the wiring bundle to be connected), and the section extending portion A491d1. is formed as a reference, a wide protrusion A491d2 protrudes from the opposite edge of the board-side connector A493c toward the back side.

With reference to the section extending portion A491d1, the board-side connector A493c is arranged on the visual recognition area side of the third pattern display device 81 (left side in FIG. 355), and the wiring connected to the board-side connector A493c on the opposite side is long. It passes through hole A491d. That is, the wiring connected to the board-side connector A493c is sandwiched and supported between the partition extension part A491d1 and the electrical board A493.

As a result, even if the second displacement member A490 is displaced, displacement of the wiring between the board-side connector A493c and the partition extension part A491d1 can be suppressed. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the wiring will come off from the A493c.

The protruding portion A491d2 is formed with a projecting length to the extent that it enters the notch portion A474 of the support box portion A470. As a result, the wiring HC, the end of which is connected to the board-side connector A493c, can be routed so as to stand up toward the rear side of the supported support plate A491 (in the projecting direction of the projection A491d2). is arranged close to the rear surface of the supported support plate A491 and routed to the rear surface of the support box portion A470, the wiring HC can be prevented from coming into contact with the notch portion A474. Therefore, disconnection of the wiring can be avoided.

In addition, since the ridge portion A491d2 protrudes perpendicularly to the back surface of the supported support plate A491, the rising angle of the wiring HC can be shifted to the right angle side, and contact with the wiring HC can be avoided. It is possible to suppress the width of the notch A474 for the purpose. As a result, a large region (area) of the main body box portion A471 on the side of the fastening portion A475 can be secured, so that the rigidity of the main body box portion A471 can be secured and the degree of freedom of arrangement of the fastening portion A475 is improved. be able to.

Returning to FIGS. 335 and 336, description will be made. The rack and pinion A510 is meshed with a slide rack A511 supported so as to be slidable along a direction A416x, and a gear portion of the slide rack A511, and is pivotally supported on a pinion shaft A477a of the support box portion A470, and is supported by the slide rack A511. A pinion A517 that rotates in synchronism with the slide movement of the pinion A517, and a reinforcing arm portion A518 that meshes with the pinion A517 and rotates in synchronism with the rotation of the pinion A517.

The reinforcing arm portion A518 is connected and fixed to the second displacement member A490 described above, so that the second displacement member A490 is supported by the support box portion A470 so as not to be pulled out. That is, the reinforcement arm A518 is fastened to the shaft-supporting projection A491a of the second displacement member A490 at the rotation center position, and is fastened to the fastening projection A491b at the rotation tip side of the reinforcement arm A518 (see FIG. 355). . Therefore, rotational displacement of the reinforcing arm A518 is synonymous with rotational displacement of the second displacement member A490.

The slide rack A511 has a pair of support holes A512 formed in a long hole shape extending along the direction A416x and having a size that allows the support columnar portion A476a of the support box portion A470 to pass through, and a plate shape formed along the gear portion. a supported plate portion A513, a protruding plate portion A514 projecting in a plate shape toward the front side at a position separated from the support hole A512 in the longitudinal direction of the support hole A512, and a same-phase member A465 arranged opposite to the same-phase member A465. and a deformed transmitted portion A515 to which the driving force is transmitted from the member A465.

The support hole A512 is inserted through the small-diameter tip portion of the support columnar portion A476a of the support box portion A470, and the large-diameter portion on the base end side is formed with a diameter larger than the width of the support hole A512. By arranging this large-diameter portion on the front side of the support hole A512, even if the slide rack A511 is about to be displaced to the front side, the displacement can be prevented by the large-diameter portion of the support columnar portion A476a. . In this way, the slide rack A511 has a plate-like portion facing the rear bottom portion of the main body box portion A471 with a gap at least about the height of the large-diameter portion of the supporting columnar portion A476a. It is configured to be slidable along the direction A416x while being held.

The supported plate portion A513 is arranged to face the back side end portion of the stepped portion A476b of the support box portion A470 with a slight gap, and the protruding plate portion A514 is arranged with a slight gap from the rear bottom portion of the main box portion A471. are placed facing each other with a space between them. That is, even if the slide rack A511 is about to be displaced to the front side, the occurrence of such displacement can be prevented by the supported plate portion A513 and the projecting plate portion A514.

There are various reasons for the displacement of the slide rack A511 in the front-rear direction. For example, the case where the player gives an impact to the pachinko machine A10 (so-called pounding), or the case where the meshing resistance becomes excessive due to the clogging of fine particles in the gaps, etc., and the excessive load is generated at the meshing position. be.

Figures 356(a), 356(b), 357(a), 357(b), and 358 are rear views of the rear unit BU. 356(a), 356(b), 357(a), 357(b), and 358, the illustration of the rear plate portion A480 is omitted in order to facilitate understanding. A state in which the plate portion of the slide rack A511 is broken is illustrated so that the transmission portion A515 can be visually recognized. In addition, in FIG. 358, the in-phase member A465 and the deformed transmitted portion A515 are shown enlarged for easy understanding.

356(a), 356(b), 357(a), 357(b), and 358, the second displacement member A490 moves from the retracted position (see FIG. 356(a)) to the extended position (see FIG. 356(a)). 358) are illustrated in chronological order.

The second displacement member A490 is fixed to the reinforcing arm A518. When the in-phase member A465 rotates, the transmission protrusion A466 pushes the slide rack A511 along with the rotation. When the slide rack A511 is pushed forward, driving force is transmitted to the reinforcing arm portion A518 via the pinion A517. Thus, displacement of the second displacement member A490 is caused by rotation of the in-phase member A465.

The in-phase member A465 rotates in the same phase as the pinned gear A462 as described above. Therefore, in synchronism with the rotation of the in-phase member A465 described in FIGS. Rotation of the pinned gear A462 will occur, and the relationship between these will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 356(b), the deformed transmitted portion A515 is a portion that engages with the in-phase member A465, and allows the transmission projection A466 to enter and move independently (load is applied to the slide rack A511). A non-transmitting recess A515a recessed in the non-transmitting recess A515a, a connecting recess A515b having the same depth as a recess connected to the end of the non-transmitting recess A515a, and a narrower width than the connecting recess A515b. There is an insertion gap A515c, which is a recess of the same depth that is connected to the opposite side of the non-transmission recess A515a to the connection recess A515b, and a front from the slide rack A511 on the retracted position (lower left) side than the transmission protrusion A466. A protruding plate portion A515d that protrudes to the side in a plate shape and constitutes the left side surface of the insertion gap A515c, and a distance equal to or larger than the diameter of the transmission protrusion A466 on the projecting position (upper right) side of the protruding plate portion A515d. A facing arrangement portion A515e is provided so as to face the protruding plate portion A515d with a space therebetween and constitutes the right side surface of the insertion gap A515c.

The protruding length of the protruding plate portion A515d is longer than the length of the opposing arrangement portion A515e in the same direction, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 324), the protruding portion A466 and the arc wall portion A467 are contact is possible in the moving direction.

The opposing arrangement portion A515e can abut (overlap) the transmission protrusion A466 in the movement direction, while it does not abut (do not overlap) the circular arc wall portion A467 in the movement direction. That is, the opposing arrangement portion A515e and the arcuate wall portion A467 are formed in a dimensional relationship that creates a front-to-rear gap.

The side surfaces of the projecting plate portion A515d and the opposing arrangement portion A515e are configured as planes perpendicular to the moving direction of the slide rack A511 (the direction parallel to the direction A416x).

The connecting concave portion A515b has the same function as the relief portion A456d of the deformed transmitted portion A456. That is, the connecting recess A515b is configured to receive the transmission projection A466, and the side connected to the non-transmission recess A515a is formed in a shape along the moving direction of the transmission projection A466. As a result, the forward/backward displacement of the transmission protrusion A466 with respect to the insertion gap A515c can be performed smoothly (with low resistance).

Although not shown in FIGS. 356(a), 356(b), 357(a), 357(b), and 358, the in-phase member A465, like the pinned gear A462, is connected to the drive motor The driving force of AMT1 is transmitted by the driving gear AMG1 and the pair of transmission gears A461 to rotate (see FIG. 335). A displacement mode in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited to rotate the drive gear AMG1 and the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position will be described below in chronological order.

FIG. 356(a) shows the state before the drive gear AMG1 rotates, in which the slide rack A511 is arranged at the end of the movement range on the retracted position side, and accordingly the second displacement member A490 is arranged at the retracted position. is shown.

In this state, the transmitting projection A466 is out of contact with the deformed transmitted portion A515 in the moving direction (direction A416x), while the circular arc wall A467 is a contacting portion arranged to face the protruding plate A515d. At A467a, the projecting plate portion A515d abuts from the upper right (overhanging position side) along the moving direction (direction A416x). As a result, the displacement of the protruding plate portion A515d can be restricted by the circular arc wall portion A467, so that the slide rack A511 is unintentionally displaced by an external force applied while the drive motor AMT1 is in a non-excited (non-driven) state. can be prevented.

The contact points between the circular arc wall portion A467 and the projecting plate portion A515d are arranged in a straight line parallel to the direction A416x through the rotation axis of the same phase member A465. Therefore, the load applied from the protruding plate portion A515d to the arc wall portion A467 passes through the rotation axis of the in-phase member A465, so that the in-phase member A465 is rotated by the load from the protruding plate portion A515d. can be prevented.

Furthermore, since the arcuate wall portion A467 is curved, the contact area between the arcuate wall portion A467 and the protruding plate portion A515d can be suppressed (theoretically, since line contact is possible, the contact area is 0). Therefore, when the in-phase member A465 rotates from the state shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the need for extra driving force for restricting the displacement of the slide rack A511. That is, the displacement of the slide rack A511 can be restricted only by the driving force required to rotate the in-phase member A465.

In addition, considering deformation due to wear of the resin material that actually constitutes the arcuate wall portion A467 and the protruding plate portion A515d, the contact area increases over time, and the contact area between the arcuate wall portion A467 and the protruding plate portion A515d increases. It is thought that the frictional force generated at To deal with this problem, a low-friction seal may be applied to the arcuate wall portion A467 and the projecting plate portion A515d, or a lubricant (such as grease) may be applied. In this embodiment, since the ideal contact area is formed small, the area that needs to be treated with a low-friction seal or lubricant can be reduced. Therefore, countermeasure costs can be suppressed.

Examples of the external force include gravity, a load caused by earthquake vibration, and a force caused when the player hits or shakes the pachinko machine A10.

FIG. 356(b) shows a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the transmission projection A466 starts entering the coupling recess A515b. 356(a) to the state shown in FIG. 356(b), the in-phase member A465 rotates from the initial angle d10 by the first angle d11, but the transmission projection A466 remains deformed. It is not in contact with the portion A515 in the movement direction (direction A416x).

On the other hand, the arcuate wall portion A467 is still in contact with the protruding plate portion A515d at the contact portion A467a from the upper right (overhang position side) along the moving direction (direction A416x). As shown in FIGS. 356(a) and 356(b), since the contact portion A467a is formed on the outer surface of the arcuate wall portion A467, the contact portion A467a moves in the moving direction (direction A416x) of the slide rack A511. not displaced by Accordingly, even in the state of FIG. 356(b), the arrangement of the slide rack A511 is maintained at the retracted position side end of the movement range, similarly to the state shown in FIG. 356(a).

As described above, the arc wall portion A467 and the facing arrangement portion A515e have a front-to-rear gap, so that the arc wall portion A467 can be arranged to overlap the facing arrangement portion A515e in the front-to-rear direction. (See FIG. 356(b)).

FIG. 357(a) shows a state in which the driving motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the transmission protrusion A466 starts entering the insertion gap A515c. 356(a) to the state of FIG. 357(a), the in-phase member A465 rotates from the initial angle d10 by the second angle d12, and the transmission projection A466 comes into contact with the projecting plate portion A515d. touch.

In FIG. 357(a), a straight line passing through the rotation center of the in-phase member A465 and the center of the transmission protrusion A466 is parallel to the moving direction of the slide rack A511 (the direction parallel to the direction A416x). That is, since the farthest portion of the transmission protrusion A466 from the rotation center of the in-phase member A465 abuts on the projecting plate portion A515d, when the in-phase member A465 rotates beyond the state shown in FIG. The restriction by the same phase member A465 is released, and the slide rack A511 can be displaced to the extended position side (upper right side).

As described above, the arc wall portion A467 and the facing arrangement portion A515e have a front-to-rear gap, so that the arc wall portion A467 can be arranged to overlap the facing arrangement portion A515e in the front-to-rear direction. (See FIG. 357(a)).

FIG. 357(b) shows a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the transmission protrusion A466 enters the insertion gap A515c. The in-phase member A465 rotates from the initial angle d10 by the third angle d13 until it is displaced from the state of FIG. 356(a) to the state of FIG. 357(b). With this rotation, the transmission projection A466 pushes the opposed arrangement portion A515e, thereby causing the slide rack A511 to slide, and the slide displacement to be transmitted to the second displacement member A490 via the pinion A517.

In FIG. 357(b), a straight line passing through the rotation center of the in-phase member A465 and the center of the transmission protrusion A466 intersects perpendicularly with the moving direction of the slide rack A511 (the direction parallel to the direction A416x). That is, the angle obtained by subtracting the second angle d12 from the third angle d13 is 90 degrees.

As described above, the arc wall portion A467 and the facing arrangement portion A515e have a front-to-rear gap, so that the arc wall portion A467 can be arranged to overlap the facing arrangement portion A515e in the front-to-rear direction. (See FIG. 357(b)).

In FIG. 358, the drive motor AMT1 is excited to rotate, the transmission protrusion A466 pushes the opposing arrangement portion A515e, the slide rack A511 is arranged at the end of the extension position side of the movement range, and the second displacement member A490 is stretched. It is shown in the extended position.

356(a) to the state of FIG. 358, the in-phase member A465 rotates from the initial angle d10 by the fourth angle d14 (rotates by one or more rotations). With this rotation, the transmission projection A466 pushes the opposed arrangement portion A515e, thereby causing the slide rack A511 to slide, and the slide displacement to be transmitted to the second displacement member A490 via the pinion A517.

In FIG. 358, a straight line passing through the rotation center of the in-phase member A465 and the center of the transmission protrusion A466 is parallel to the moving direction of the slide rack A511 (the direction parallel to the direction A416x). That is, the angle obtained by subtracting the third angle d13 from the fourth angle d14 is 90 degrees.

As described above, the arc wall portion A467 and the facing arrangement portion A515e have a front-to-rear gap, so that the arc wall portion A467 can be arranged to overlap the facing arrangement portion A515e in the front-to-rear direction. (see Figure 358).

In FIG. 358, the farthest portion of the transmission protrusion A466 from the rotation center of the in-phase member A465 abuts against the opposing arrangement portion A515e. A511 may be displaced to the retracted position side (lower left side). In this embodiment, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 358, when the slide rack A511 is arranged at the end of the overhanging position of the movement range, the arrangement of the fourth angle d14 (see FIG. 358) is permitted. It is configured to permit rotation of the in-phase member A465 up to an angle dd1.

That is, since the transmission protrusion A466 and the protruding plate portion A515d are configured to come into contact only after the in-phase member A465 rotates by the allowable angle dd1, the transmission protrusion A466 and the projecting plate portion A515d do not contact each other until the rotation of the allowable angle dd1. Since the plate portion A515d is not in contact with the plate portion A515d and no load is transmitted, the arrangement of the slide rack A511 can be maintained at the overhang position side end portion of the movement range.

Therefore, in the series of displacement modes shown in FIGS. 356 to 358, in the control to stop the rotation of the in-phase member A465 at the fourth angle d14, the in-phase member A465 actually rotates beyond the fourth angle d14. However, if the rotation angle exceeds the allowable angle dd1, the slide rack A511 can be maintained at the extended position side end of the movement range, and the second displacement member A490 can be maintained at the extended position. can.

In other words, even if the accuracy of the stop position of the in-phase member A465 is not strict (even if there is an error equal to or less than the allowable angle dd1), the arrangement of the second displacement member A490 can be maintained at the extended position. , with a simple configuration, it is possible to increase the rotation speed of the in-phase member A465 and achieve high-precision displacement of the second displacement member A490 (the second displacement can be achieved without abruptly decelerating the in-phase member A465 and stopping it). The member A490 can be rapidly decelerated and stopped at the extended position).

In addition, by purposely causing an excess of the rotation angle from the fourth angle d14 to the allowable angle dd1 or less, the excess is used when driving the second displacement member A490 toward the retracted position (when the driving direction is reversed). It can be used as a run-up section.

Further, when the transmission protrusion A466 of the in-phase member A465 is arranged at the position of the fourth angle d14 (see FIG. 358), the transmission protrusion A466 and the opposing arrangement portion A515e are aligned in the moving direction (direction A416x and direction A416x) of the slide rack A511. By making contact in the parallel direction), it is possible to prevent the slide rack A511 from returning to the retracted position (bound displacement).

As a result, the rotation of the pinion A517 can be restricted in the state of FIG. 358 (return rotation can be prevented). It is possible to prevent the second displacement member A490 from rotating back from the extended position (see FIG. 358).

FIG. 359 is a cross-sectional view of the rear unit BU along line CCCLIX-CCCLIX in FIG. 356(a). In FIG. 359, for ease of understanding, illustration of the alignment protrusion A483 of the rear plate portion A480 is omitted, and the shape of the main body plate portion A481 is mainly illustrated.

The wiring HC connected to the second displacement member A490 will be described below with reference to FIG. Note that FIGS. 356 to 358 will be referred to as appropriate for the description of the wiring HC. The wiring HC is an electric wiring composed of a plurality of cables with a circular cross section connected to the board-side connector A493c of the second displacement member A490, and is a space surrounded by the support box portion A470 and the rear plate portion A480. is placed in

As shown in FIG. 359, the portion of the wiring HC on the side connected to the board-side connector A493c passes between the section extension part A491d1 and the electrical board A493, and extends along the protrusion A491d2 to the support box part A470. and the rear plate portion A480.

As described above, the protrusion A491d2 is formed to have a protruding length sufficient to enter the notch A474 of the support box portion A470, so that the wiring HC is guided away from the notch A474. , contact with the notch A474 is avoided. This can prevent the wiring HC from rubbing against the notch A474 and disconnecting.

On the other hand, the wiring HC is guided by the protrusion A491d2 so that it is guided closer to the rear plate portion A480, and if no countermeasure is taken, the wiring HC may rub against the rear plate portion A480 and break in a short period of time. However, in the present embodiment, the intermediate portion HCa of the wiring HC is suitably inserted between the rear plate portion A480 and the rear plate portion A480, thereby suppressing friction with the rear plate portion A480. This will be explained in detail below.

In this embodiment, the wire HC is wound around the fastening portion A475 of the support box portion A470. More specifically, the wiring HC extending from the third connector A416e3 of the electrical board A416 (see FIG. 330) is wound around the winding portion A471a1 formed so that the binding band KB can be wound around the intermediate position of the projecting wall portion A471a. The side of the second displacement member A490 that is connected to the board-side connector A493c is wrapped around the fastening portion A475 with the binding position as a reference, and the tip thereof is connected to the board-side connector A493c. .

Since the wiring HC is wound around the fastening portion A475, even in a slack state (see FIG. 356(a)), the wiring HC is separated from the fastening portion A475 (the direction in which the wiring HC bound by the binding band KB extends). can be suppressed. As a result, the load applied to the wiring HC can be reduced without forming a large gap above the fastening portion A475.

In the present embodiment, the portion around which the wiring HC is wound is the fastening portion A475, which is advantageous in terms of ease of assembly. That is, in the assembly process for fastening and fixing the rear plate portion A480 to the support box portion A470, after the wiring HC is wound around the fastening portion A475, the fastening screw is screwed into the fastening portion A475 through the rear plate portion A480. At this time, it is possible to prevent the wire HC from falling off from the fastening portion A475 before fastening and fixing is completed by the fastening screw that is in the middle of screwing.

In addition, when fastening and fixing, the back side of the support box portion A470 (the side where the fastening portion A475 protrudes) faces upward, and after the wiring HC is wound around the fastening portion A475, the rear plate portion A480 is attached to the support box portion A470. By screwing the fastening screw into the fastening portion A475, the wiring HC can be assembled while preventing the wiring HC from sagging in the gravity direction in the main body box portion A471, so that the assembly can be easily completed. . That is, compared to the case where the fastening portion A475 is designed to be assembled in a downward posture, the wiring HC is wound around the fastening portion A475 to facilitate the assembly of the support box portion A470 and the rear plate portion A480. can be

Since the winding portion A471a1 is formed on the protruding end side of the protruding wall portion A471a, the wiring HC temporarily fixed by the binding band KB is guided (pulled) toward the rear plate portion A480. As a result, when the wire HC is wound around the fastening portion A475, the wire HC comes closest to the rear plate portion A480 at the upper portion of the fastening portion A475 that is closest to the fastening portion A475 (see FIG. 359).

Then, the wiring HC is extended toward the board-side connector A493c while allowing a margin in the length of the wiring HC so that a tensile load is not applied to the wiring HC when the second displacement member A490 is displaced, and the wirings HC intersect each other. In the position, the end of the wiring HC connected to the board-side connector A493c is wound so as to slide between the already arranged wiring HC and the support box portion A470.

As a result, it is possible to construct a state in which the intermediate portion HCa abuts on the rear plate portion A480 side of the wiring HC on the substrate side connector A493c side (see FIG. 356(a)), and the wiring HC is connected to the rear plate by the protrusion A491d2. It is possible to suppress the degree of proximity to the part A480 side.

A description will be given of how the wiring HC is displaced when the second displacement member A490 is displaced. The wiring HC is not positionally fixed by the support box portion A470 or the rear plate portion A480 between the binding band KB and the board-side connector A493c of the second displacement member A490. Therefore, the entire length of the wiring HC between the binding band KB and the board-side connector A493c of the second displacement member A490 is used to cause displacement (bending) corresponding to the displacement of the second displacement member A490. Since the load (fatigue) associated with this can be made uniform, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a large local load on the wiring HC.

The board-side connector A493c is located at the retracted position compared to the shaft-supported protrusion 491a functioning as the rotation shaft of the second displacement member A490 and the reinforcing arm A518 formed on the projecting position side of the second displacement member A490. placed on the side. That is, when the second displacement member A490 is arranged at the retracted position, the support plate portion 420 that shields the line of sight directed to the second displacement member A490 is positioned inside the member (see FIG. 346(a), right) toward the substrate side. A connector A493 is provided.

As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the wiring HC protrudes outward from the outer shape of the support plate portion A420 and the support box portion A470. That is, by arranging the shaft-supporting projection A491a and the reinforcing arm A518 closer to the overhanging position side (the third symbol display device 81 side), a large amount of overhanging of the second displacement member A490 is ensured, and the wiring is It is possible to avoid the HC being visually recognized by the player.

As shown in FIG. 356(a), the board-side connector A493c is configured to be able to receive the end of the wiring HC along the radial direction of a circle centered on the supported projection A491a. The board-side connector A493c is arranged on one side of the straight line connecting the center of the supported projection A491a and the center of the fastening portion A475 (lower right side, see FIG. 356(a)). , and the other side (upper left side, see FIG. 358) are switched by displacement of the second displacement member A490.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a difference in the displacement mode of the portion of the wiring HC on the side connected to the board-side connector A493c between the outward path and the return path of the second displacement member A490. As a result, it is possible to suppress the fluctuation of the load applied to the wiring HC, thereby preventing disconnection of the wiring HC.

In addition, since the displacement mode of the portion of the wiring HC connected to the board-side connector A493c can be easily shifted toward the straight line connecting the center of the supported projection A491a and the center of the fastening portion A475, the displacement The amount can be reduced, and the absolute value of the load applied to the wiring HC can be reduced. This will be explained in detail below.

FIG. 357(b) shows a state in which the second displacement member A490 has started to be displaced from the retracted position to the overhanging position and rotated about 45 degrees. In this state, the direction in which the wiring HC connected to the board-side connector A493c extends is substantially parallel to the straight line connecting the center of the supported projection A491a and the center of the fastening portion A475.

In other words, in the present embodiment, the fastening portion A475 is arranged on the bisector of the rotation angle of the second displacement member A490 passing through the center of the supported projection A491. That is, the fastening portion A475, which is the position where the wiring HC is loosely wound, is positioned at the intermediate position of the rotation angle of the second displacement member A490, so that the amount of deformation (bending) of the wiring HC can be minimized. .

In comparison with the retracted state (see FIG. 357(a)), the local displacement of the wiring HC will be explained. slightly rising. Further, the intermediate portion HCa is arranged at a position where it does not interfere with the wiring HC extending from the board-side connector A493c in the front-rear direction.

That is, when the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. While the effect of entrapment cannot be obtained, the second displacement member A490 can be displaced at high speed without the wirings HC rubbing against each other.

Here, as the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 357(b) to the projecting position shown in FIG. Become. Therefore, as a load applied to the wiring HC, a load for maintaining the attitude along the left-right direction is generated. Therefore, the influence of the load applied by the protrusion A491d2 on the layout of the wiring HC is reduced.

Therefore, even if the intermediate portion HCa does not enter between the rear plate portion A480 and the wiring HC, excessive frictional force is prevented from being generated between the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480. That is, in the present embodiment, the intermediate portion HCa is formed between the rear plate portion A480 and the wiring HC extending from the board-side connector A493c only when there is a risk of excessive frictional force being generated between the rear plate portion A480 and the rear plate portion A480. The wiring HC is inserted into the rear plate portion A480 so as to separate the wiring HC from the rear plate portion A480.

On the other hand, when the possibility of excessive frictional force is low, as shown in FIG. It is possible to prevent excessive resistance from being generated in the displacement of the second displacement member A490, and it is possible to achieve high-speed displacement of the second displacement member A490.

In the overhanging state of the second displacement member A490 (see FIG. 358), in comparison with the state shown in FIG. The location is slightly lowered, and the location located below the fastening portion A475 is slightly raised. That is, the wiring HC is displaced so as to approach the linear side connecting the center of the supported projection A491a and the center of the fastening portion A475.

As shown in FIG. 358, in the state where the second displacement member A490 is arranged in the extended position (that is, in the state rotated by 90 degrees from the retracted position), the wire HC contacts the wire guide portion A471c, thereby changing the position of the wire HC. is corrected. The wiring guide portion A471c is designed for one purpose of reducing the load applied to the wiring HC in this corrected arrangement.

More specifically, in the overhanging state of the second displacement member A490, an arc passing through the board-side connector A493c and in contact with the lower end of the wiring guide portion A471c is formed between the fastening portion A475, which is the passage of the wiring HC, and the projecting wall portion A471a. configured to pass between As a result, the wiring HC can be prevented from being subjected to an excessive load, and the durability of the wiring HC can be improved.

FIG. 360 is a schematic diagram showing rotation angles of the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465 with reference to the initial angles d0 and d10. In the description of FIG. 360, angles d0 to d6, d10 to d14, and dd1 indicate rotation angles of the pinned gear A462 and the same phase member A465, unless otherwise described.

As described above, the first displacement member A440 is continuously displaced from the initial angle d0 to the fifth angle d5, and stops after the fifth angle d5, while the second displacement member A490 is displaced at the initial angle While stopping between d10 and the second angle d12, the displacement continues from the second angle d12 to the fourth angle d14.

Here, as shown in FIG. 360, a gap of 10 degrees is formed between the fifth angle d5 and the second angle d12. That is, in this embodiment, the rotation angle range of the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465 that generate the driving force for displacing the first displacement member A440 and the driving force for displacing the second displacement member A490 are Between the rotation angle range of the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465 for generating the driving force, an angle range in which no driving force is generated is inserted. Thereby, the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 can be stably driven.

Note that the manner of setting the angle range is not limited to this. For example, the fifth angle d5 and the second angle d12 may be the same angle. In this case, the second displacement member A490 starts displacing from the stop state at the same time that the first displacement member A440 is switched from the state of continuing displacement to the stop state. Therefore, the driving force of the drive motor AMT1 is configured so as not to cause the timing of simultaneously displacing the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490. A440 and the second displacement member A490), the load on the drive motor AMT1 can be reduced (the load applied by a single member can be reduced).

Also, for example, the second angle d12 may be arranged between the initial angle d0 and the fifth angle d5. In this case, while forming a section in which the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 are displaced simultaneously, there is a section in which it is necessary to generate driving force for both the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490. It can be limited between the second angle d12 and the fifth angle d5.

According to this embodiment, since the members that are displaced at the fifth angle d5 or the second angle d12 are switched, the pinned gear A462 And by inverting and rotating the same phase member A465, while one member (first displacement member A440 or second displacement member A490) is stopped, the other member (second displacement member A490 or first displacement member A440) can be reversed.

As described above, it is not necessary to apply a large driving force to stop one of the members (the first displacement member A440 or the second displacement member A490). That is, at the contact position for restricting the displacement of one member, the members come into line contact (rub) with each other, so theoretically no frictional force is generated. As a result, the drive force required for the drive motor AMT1 can be suppressed, so that a small drive device can be selected as the drive motor AMT1.

Further, by driving to the fifth angle d5 or the second angle d12, stopping, and rotating the driving motor AMT1 in reverse, only the first displacement member A440 is displaced, and the second displacement member A490 is maintained in the retracted state. It is also possible to drive in such a manner that

As shown in FIG. 360, the sixth angle d6 is set as an angle that does not exceed the sum of the fourth angle d14 and the allowable angle dd1. Therefore, the rotation of the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465 is mechanically restricted when they rotate by the sixth angle d6 before they rotate by the allowable angle dd1 from the fourth angle d14 (see FIG. 345). . Therefore, since the rotation does not exceed the allowable angle dd1, even if the same-phase member A465 is stopped at the fourth angle d14 with low accuracy and is likely to rotate excessively (control mode), the second displacement member A490 can be maintained in an extended position (see FIG. 358).

Note that the numerical value of the sixth angle d6 is not limited to this. For example, the sixth angle d6 may be set as an angle that slightly exceeds the sum of the fourth angle d14 and the allowable angle dd1 (for example, it may be set as an angle that exceeds the fourth angle d14 by about 20 degrees. good). In this case, while allowing the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465 to rotate by the allowable angle dd1 beyond the fourth angle d14, they continue to rotate beyond the allowable angle dd1, reaching the sixth angle d6. When reaching, the displacement of the second displacement member A490 can be immediately stopped by mechanical regulation.

As a result, the second displacement means A490 does not reach the overhanging position by performing stop control at an angle (permissible amount) that slightly exceeds the fourth angle d14. In addition, when the deviation of the stop timing of the drive motor AMT1 unintentionally increases, the second displacement member A490 may be erroneously It is possible to prevent it from being ranked.

Since the circular arc wall portion A464 is formed with a central angle of about 230 degrees as described above, even when the rotation angle reaches the sixth angle, the position for restricting the first displacement member A440 (the position of the fifth angle d5 Since the arcuate wall portion A464 is disposed up to the position where the first displacement member A440 abuts on the first displacement member A440, it is possible to maintain the displacement regulation at the projecting position of the first displacement member A440.

The state in which the arcuate wall portion A467 of the in-phase member A465 abuts the protruding plate portion A515d corresponds to the state in which the plate portion A455e is detected by the detection sensor A426 and is controlled to stop. The probability that the stop timing deviation of the drive motor AMT1 unintentionally increases near the angular state where the wall portion A467 contacts the protruding plate portion A515d is low. Therefore, the arc wall portion A467 has a smaller angle than the arc wall portion A464 (this embodiment has at about 210 degrees). As a result, the cost of materials required for the arcuate wall portion A467 can be suppressed.

Next, the second operation unit A700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 361 to 381. FIG. FIG. 361 is a front exploded perspective view of the second operation unit A700 and the rear case A310. As shown in FIG. 361, the second operation unit A700 is formed with a horizontal width exceeding the horizontal width of the visual recognition area of the display of the third pattern display device 81, and is positioned below the visual recognition area of the display of the third pattern display device 81. placed in

FIG. 362 is a front exploded perspective view of the second action unit A700, and FIG. 363 is a rear exploded perspective view of the second action unit A700. As shown in FIGS. 362 and 363, the second operation unit A700 includes an elevating unit A701 that is held by a rectangular plate-like member that is elongated in the left and right direction and that includes an elevating unit A702 configured to be capable of elevating operation, and an elevating unit A701. It is provided with an effect unit A710 that can be displaced between a retracted position and an overhanging position by the up-and-down motion of A702 and configured to be operable (performable) in a plurality of modes.

The elevating unit A701 supports a vertically elongated elevating part A702 on the left and right sides, and a pair of arm members A703 rotatably supported on the left and right ends thereof, and the arm members A703 via a drive mechanism (not shown). and a pair of drive motors A704 that transmit drive power to the.

As a mechanism for transmitting the driving force from the drive motor A704 to the arm member A703, for example, gear teeth are formed at the end of the arm member A703 on the side of the rotation shaft, and the gear teeth are fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor A704. A gear transmission mechanism in which gears mesh with each other is exemplified.

Further, an elongated hole is formed in the arm member A703, and a rotating body having gear teeth formed on its outer periphery and protruding in the axial direction at a position where a pin inserted through the elongated hole is eccentric is disposed. A gear link transmission mechanism in which the gear teeth of the body mesh with the gear fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor A704 may also be used.

Further, an elongated hole is formed in the arm member A703, and a pin formed at an end portion of an auxiliary arm member (not shown) fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor A704 is inserted through the elongated hole. , a link transmission mechanism in which the driving force is transmitted from the auxiliary arm member to the arm member A703.

In this embodiment, the drive motor A704 is arranged in the left-right direction in response to the asymmetric shape of the back side of the game board A13, which is arranged facing the front side of the second operation unit A700 (see FIG. 306). considered asymmetric. That is, by inserting the driving motor A704 into the clearance (space) on the rear side of the game board A13, the front-to-rear width necessary for disposing the game board A13 and the second operation unit A700 is suppressed.

In this way, since there is a desire to set the arrangement of the drive motor A704 according to the shape of the game board A13, in this embodiment, a gear link transmission mechanism or a gear transmission mechanism is adopted rather than a link transmission mechanism. is preferred.

Figure 364 is a front exploded perspective view of the effect unit A710, and Figure 365 is a rear exploded perspective view of the effect unit A710. 364 and 365, an annular front cover A711 that defines the rendering range of the rendering unit A710, a skirt-shaped upper cover A712 arranged below the annular front cover A711 and fastened and fixed to an upper lid portion A740 described later, A skirt-shaped lower cover A713, which is arranged on the back side under the upper cover A712 and is fastened and fixed to the elevating section of the elevating unit A701, is disassembled and separated from the front side.

In FIGS. 364 and 365, an annular rear cover A714, which is formed in an annular shape substantially equivalent to the annular front cover A711 when viewed in the front-rear direction and forms an annular internal space IE between the annular front cover A711 and the annular front cover A711, is fixed to the upper lid portion A740. A rotating body A720 rotatably disposed at the center of the circle of the annular rear cover A714 is illustrated.

The rotating body A720 is a member having a size that fits in a circle formed by the inner peripheral surface of the annular front cover A711 when viewed from the front. It is possible to receive light emitted from light emitting means A715a such as LEDs arranged on a plurality of electrical decoration boards A715. Three light-emitting means A715a are arranged at regular intervals along one side of the pentagon formed by the electrical board A715.

In the present embodiment, the electrical board A715 is composed of three LEDs or the like arranged at equal intervals along one side of the pentagon, similarly to the light emitting means A715a, and the optical axis is directed toward the front side. A front light emitting means A715b is provided. The front light emitting means A715b causes the annular front cover A711 to emit light by irradiating the rear side of the annular front cover A711 with light. In other words, the player can visually recognize the lighting effect through the light-transmitting portion partially formed in the annular front cover A711.

In this embodiment, the five flat plate-shaped decorative boards A715 each form one side of a pentagon, and the decorative boards A715 above the rotating body A720 are in a horizontal posture, and the decorative boards A715 below the left and right The lower end of A715 is arranged to face the rotating shaft side, and the light emitting means A715a is arranged in such a manner that the optical axis is directed in the normal direction of the inward surface of each electrical board A715. That is, the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a is emitted toward the center of the pentagon so as to intersect near the center of the pentagon.

Therefore, when the rotating body A720 rotates, the rotation outer portion of the rotating body A720 can be configured to cross the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a. As a result, when the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a is reflected by the rotator A720, the traveling direction of the light can be changed with the rotation of the rotator A720, so that a splendid effect can be executed. .

In this embodiment, the outer surface of the rotating body A720 is plated (gold plating, silver plating, or the like) so that the rotating body A720 can easily reflect light. The aspect of the outer surface is not limited to plating, and may be various other aspects. For example, a tape having a color that is easy to reflect may be attached.

As described above, since the body of rotation A720 rotates around the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction, the light traveling on the rotation axis is reflected on the rotation axis of the body of rotation A720 regardless of whether the body of rotation A720 is rotating. is irradiated to the same part of In the present embodiment, the upper portion of the rotating body A720 is opened by forming the light passage concave portion A722a at that location so that the light can pass therethrough, the details of which will be described later.

The annular front cover A711 and the annular rear cover A714 have recessed portions A711a and A714a forming windows through which the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a passes, and recessed portions A711a and A714a forming windows through which the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a passes. It includes semicircular recessed portions A711b and A714b that are recessed in a semicircular cross section.

The inner peripheral surface of the ring excluding the window portion formed by the recessed portions A711a and A714a and the other outer surface are plated. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a and reflected by the rotating body A720 can be further applied to and reflected by the annular front cover A711 and the annular rear cover A714. It can be visually recognized by the player as light traveling (reflecting) from the point. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of light emitting means A715a to be arranged while executing a gorgeous effect.

In this respect, it is better to make the window necessary for passing the light from the light emitting means A715a as small as possible to ensure a wide area for reflecting other light (the area to be plated). It is advantageous because it can In this embodiment, the shape of the window formed by the recessed portions A711a and A714a is slightly larger than the outer shape of the LED that constitutes the light emitting means A715a, so that the brightness of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a can be adjusted. It is possible to secure a wide area for reflecting light without damaging it.

366 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body A720 of the effect unit A710, and FIG. 367 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating body A720 of the effect unit A710. In FIGS. 366 and 367, illustration of the annular front cover A711, upper cover A712 and lower cover A713 of the effect unit A710 is omitted.

The rotating body A720 is composed of a plurality of rotating members, and is a set of members supported by a plurality of support portions A730 that support the plurality of rotating members, and has a pair of members having a substantially hemispherical outer shape. A first rotary member A721 and a second rotary member composed of a pair of members made of a colored (blue in this embodiment) light-transmissive resin material in a rotatable shape on the outside of the first rotary member A721. A728.

The first rotating member A721 is divided into front and rear parts and is formed of a resin material with low light transmittance and has a substantially hemispherical shell-like skeleton. and an annular gear member A723, which is an annular member rotatably supported in an annular recessed portion formed on the back side of the shell portion A722 on the front side, and having gear teeth engraved on the back side. , is arranged on the back side of the annular gear member A723, and is rotatably supported in a manner sandwiched between the pair of shell portions A722, and the gear teeth A724a engraved on the shaft portion correspond to the gear teeth of the annular gear member A723. It mainly includes a central rotating member A724 that is combined.

A pair of shell parts A722 are provided with light passage recessed parts A722a that are recessed in directions away from each other in their upper parts. At least in the shell portion A722 on the front side, the light passage recess A722a is formed both above and below the annular gear member A723, and most of the annular gear member A723 enters the front side beyond the recessed end of the light passage recess A722a. It is arranged in a manner that

That is, even if the through hole surrounded by the light passage recess A722a is viewed from the top, most of the annular gear member A723 is not visible in that direction, so the central rotary member A724 arranged inside the annular gear member A723 is not visible. can be visually recognized. Therefore, when the light traveling in the vertical direction passes through the through hole surrounded by the light passage recess A722a, it is possible to prevent the annular gear member A723 from blocking the light, and the light is directed to the central rotating member A724. can be reached. Here, with reference to FIG. 368, an outline of the operation mode of the first rotating member A721 will be described.

FIG. 368 is a rear view of the first rotating member A721. In FIG. 368, the illustration of the shell portion A722 on the rear side is omitted in order to make the inside visible. It is shown in engagement with member A723.

An outline of the operation mode of the first rotating member A721 will be described. As described above, the first rotating member A721 is configured to rotate around the vertically extending rotating shaft (coaxial with the central axis of the fixed gear SG). When this rotation occurs, the relative position between the annular gear member A723 arranged inside the first rotating member A721 and the fixed gear SG changes, and accordingly the annular gear member A723 and the fixed gear SG move relative to each other. Displaced (engagement relationship changes).

In this embodiment, since the fixed gear SG is non-rotatably fixed to the tip of the shaft portion A751 of the box-shaped portion A750, relative displacement with respect to the fixed gear SG is ensured by the rotation of the annular gear member A723. . When the annular gear member A723 rotates, the central rotary member A724 that meshes with the annular gear member A723 rotates along with the rotation. The rotating shaft of the central rotating member A724 extends in a direction intersecting (perpendicular to) the vertically extending shaft (coaxial with the central axis of the fixed gear SG) serving as the rotating shaft of the first rotating member A721. As the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 rotates (horizontal rotation about the vertical axis), the central rotating member A724 rotates in a different manner (longitudinal rotation about the horizontal axis). Note that the relationship between the rotation directions will be described later.

Since the rotation axis of the central rotating member A724 continues to change within the same plane along with the rotation of the shell A722 (in synchronization with the rotation angle), the central rotating member A724 can be rotated vertically and horizontally to the player. can be made to appear to rotate with Therefore, by causing the shell A722 to rotate in one direction, it is possible to cause the central rotating member A724 to rotate in multiple directions.

In this embodiment, since the number of teeth of the gear teeth A724a and the number of teeth of the fixed gear SG are the same (both are 10 teeth), the absolute value of the rotation angle of the shell portion A722 and the rotation angle of the central rotation member A724 Synchronize with the absolute value of the rotation angle. As a result, each time the shell A722 takes a posture in which the ring shape can be visually recognized in a front view as shown in FIG. As indicated by 368, the posture is such that the disc portion faces the front side (returns). Therefore, it is possible to maintain the reproducibility of the rotation effect.

Returning to FIGS. 366 and 367, description will be made. The second rotating member A728 is composed of a pair of substantially symmetrical members fastened and fixed to the support portion A730 below the first rotating member A721. A rod-shaped extending portion A728a is formed in a rod-like shape and extends upward to reach a position covering the first rotating member A721 from above through the outside of the .

The rod-shaped extended portion A728a is formed narrower than the outer shape of the first rotating member A721. A case where it can be seen (a case where it hardly overlaps with the first rotating member A721) can be configured, but the details will be described later.

The outer shape of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 is configured to be slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the annular rear cover A714, thereby shortening the gap in the vertical direction. As a result, the annular rear cover A714 functions as a retainer for the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728, and the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 can be secured while the annular rear cover A714 is arranged. Inadvertent disassembly such as pulling upward (disassembly) can be prevented.

As described above, the rotating body A720 is composed of a plurality of rotating members (the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728) fastened and fixed to the supporting portion A730, which rotate as the supporting portion A730 rotates. do. Next, this support portion A730 will be described.

FIG. 369(a) is a front exploded perspective view of the support portion A730, and FIG. 369(b) is a front exploded perspective view of the second support portion A735. FIG. 370(a) is a rear exploded perspective view of the support portion A730, and FIG. 370(b) is a rear exploded perspective view of the second support portion A735.

As shown in FIGS. 369 and 370, the supporting portion A730 includes a first supporting portion A731 having a cylindrical main body made of a colored (white in this embodiment) light-impermeable resin material, and a colorless and light-transmitting resin material. A second support part A735 formed as a set of split bodies divided in two in the radial direction, the main body of which is formed of a permeable resin material into a cylindrical shape with an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the main body of the first support part A731. A shaft rod portion A751 fixed to a box-shaped portion A750 described later is inserted into the first support portion A731 and the second support portion A735, and a deformed shaft is formed at the tip side portion of the shaft rod portion A751 It is non-removably supported by the metal ring-shaped C-ring C1 and fixed gear SG which are non-rotatably fixed by fitting with.

The first support portion A731 has a cylindrical body portion having an inner diameter slightly longer than the diameter of the axial rod portion A751 of the box-shaped portion A750 and a through hole A731a formed so that the axial rod portion A751 can be inserted therethrough; A plurality of support plate portions A732 extending in a straight line in both directions from the upper end portion of the main body portion A732 and formed with through-holes through which fastening screws can be inserted; A pair of projecting portions A733 are provided.

The protruding portion A733 is arranged at a position corresponding to a notch portion A772a of a lower layer transmission mechanism A770, which will be described later, and is a portion that enables transmission of force in the rotational direction by fitting. be. As a result, compared to the case where the pair of protruding portions A733 are formed to have the same width, it is easier to perform angle matching between the cylindrical extension portion A772 of the lower transmission mechanism A770 and the first support portion A731 at the time of fitting. can do.

As shown in FIGS. 369(b) and 370(b), the second support portion A735 includes a semi-cylindrical portion A736 forming a cylindrical portion and a plate extending in both directions on a straight line from the upper end of the semi-cylindrical portion A736. It is composed of a pair of divided bodies having a substantially symmetrical shape including a plurality of semi-supporting plate portions A737 extending in a shape and having through-holes through which fastening screws can be inserted.

The semi-cylindrical portion A736 has a recessed fitting portion A736a that is recessed upward from the lower end in a rectangular shape at the center position of the arc at the lower end side portion, and a rectangular shape that protrudes radially outward from the end portion of the arc. and a projecting fitting portion A736b.

The recessed fitting portion A736a is a recessed portion that fits into an inner protrusion A762d (see FIG. 373) of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760, which will be described later. It is a protrusion to be fitted.

At the fitting position of the recessed fitting portion A736a, the wall portion around the recessed fitting portion A736a is arranged to face the inner wall of the cylindrical ridge portion A762b. The displacement to the left is restricted, and the protruding fitting portion A736b fits into the notch portion A762c, so that the divided body constituting the second support portion A735 can be supported indivisibly.

Further, the recessed fitting portion A736a and the projecting fitting portion A736b are fitted in such a manner that they come into contact with the notch portion A762c of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 in the circumferential direction of rotation about the shaft rod portion A751. Therefore, it also functions as a transmission portion for transmitting the rotation of the large-diameter gear LG12 to the second support portion A735. Therefore, the concave fitting portion A736a and the projecting fitting portion A736b can function both to prevent the second support portion A736 from splitting and to transmit rotation to the second support portion A736.

A groove portion A735a recessed along the circumferential direction is formed on the inner surface of the semi-cylindrical portion in which the semi-supporting plate portion A737 is formed. The groove portion A735a can reduce the contact area between the inner side surface of the second support portion A735 and the outer side surface of the first support portion A731, thereby reducing the generated frictional force.

In particular, there is a risk that a load will be applied when the second rotating member A728 is fastened and fixed at a location between the half-supporting plate portions A737, and the inner diameter may be narrower than the design dimension. . On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the groove portion A735a is formed at the position between the semi-supporting plate portions A737, the second supporting portion A735 and the first supporting portion A731 come into contact with each other at locations where sliding friction is likely to occur. Area can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to effectively reduce the frictional force generated between the second support portion A735 and the first support portion A731 while minimizing the decrease in rigidity due to the formation of the groove portion A735a.

The semi-supporting plate portion A737 includes a pair of assembly protrusions A737a protruding toward the opposite side of the mating member along the direction in which the second support portion A735 is split, and a pair of positional protrusions A737a protruding from one split body. An alignment protrusion A737b, an insertion hole A737c drilled in the other divided body as a through hole having a size that allows the alignment protrusion A737b to be inserted, and a second rotating member A728 drilled in the thickness direction are fastened. It is provided with a pair of fastening holes A737d which are formed to have a size through which the portion A728b (see FIG. 367) can be inserted.

The semi-supporting plate portions A737 are aligned with each other by inserting the positioning protrusions A737b into the insertion holes A737c, and the second rotary member A728 (see FIG. 367) assembled from the outside in the dividing direction is screwed to the fastening portion A728b. are screwed in and fastened to be connected to each other. That is, since the fastening screws used for fastening and fixing the second rotating member A728 can also be used for fastening and fixing the semi-supporting plate portion A737, the number of fastening screws can be reduced.

The mounting protrusion A737a is inserted into a recess formed at a corresponding position of the second rotating member A728 and used for positioning. different from each other. That is, the interval between the assembly protrusions A737a arranged on the divided body arranged on the front side is wider than the interval between the assembly protrusions A737a arranged on the divided body arranged on the rear side.

By forming the assembling projections A737a at different intervals, each of the pair of members that constitute the second rotating member A728 can be assembled from the correct direction of the second supporting portion A735. That is, it is possible to properly fit the mounting protrusion A737a and the second rotating member A728 only when the mounting is performed in the correct direction. If the position of the two-rotation member A728 does not match the concave portion and the assembly is not completed, the user can be made aware of the error in the assembly direction.

In addition, the second rotating member A728 is largely different in the presence or absence of the fastening portion A728b, and has substantially the same configuration in other respects. Errors can occur in attempting to assemble two members of one of the sets. According to this embodiment, since the formation intervals of the assembly protrusions A737a are different (because they are not common modes), the members of the second rotating member A728 to be assembled to the second support portion A735 are both attached to one member (combined). It is possible to make the mistake of trying to assemble by using one side member) be noticed before the fastening screw is inserted.

Since the radial separation of the second support portion A735 is restricted by the cylindrical ridge portion A762b of the upper transmission mechanism A760 (see FIG. 366) before disassembly, the assembly of the first support portion A731 and the second support portion A735 is , is carried out exclusively by parallel movement in the axial direction, and along with the parallel movement, the protruding portion A733 becomes the notch portion A772a, the recessed fitting portion A736a becomes the inner protruding portion A762d (see FIG. 373), and the protruding fitting portion The joint portion A736b is fitted with the notch portion A762c. Here, due to its shape, the second support portion A735 is assembled first, and then the first support portion A731 is assembled in that state.

Here, due to the shape relationship with the mating member to be assembled, the posture when both the first support portion A731 and the second support portion A735 are assembled is not an arbitrary posture, but is limited to a specific posture. Therefore, when the first support portion A731 is assembled, the second support portion A735 may block the field of view, making it difficult to assemble the first support portion A731.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the second supporting portion A735 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and the first supporting portion A731 is made of a non-light-transmitting resin material. After assembly, the inside of the second support portion A735 can be visually recognized. In addition, since the cylindrical extension A772 of the lower transmission mechanism A770 to which the first support A731 is assembled is arranged to protrude long above the upper cover A740, the projection A733 of the first support A731 is fitted. It is possible to configure the position to be easily visible without being hidden by the upper lid portion A740.

Therefore, when the first support portion A731 is assembled, it can be easily adjusted to a suitable posture, so that the first support portion A731 and the second support portion A735 can be easily assembled.

Here, an upper lid portion A740 for arranging (accommodating) an upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and a lower layer transmission mechanism A770, which will be described later, between the box-shaped portion A750 is provided with a through hole A741 surrounding the central axis of the support portion A730. Therefore, in order to disassemble the upper cover portion A740 and modify the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770, the shaft rod portion A751 fixed to the box-shaped portion A750 must be removed from the through hole A741. It is necessary to displace the portion A740 upward with respect to the box-shaped portion A750.

At this time, while the support portion A730 is assembled, the support plate portion A732 and the semi-support plate portion A737 interfere with each other, and the upper lid portion A740 cannot be displaced upward. Therefore, it is necessary to disassemble the support portion A730 before disassembling the upper lid portion A740. Further, as described above, in order to disassemble the support portion A730, it is necessary to disassemble the C-ring C1 and the fixed gear SG. ), it is necessary to disassemble the rotating body A720 in order to disassemble the fixed gear SG.

In this way, in order to access the upper-layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower-layer transmission mechanism A770, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the upper-layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower-layer transmission mechanism A770 by configuring a plurality of members to be disassembled in order. In addition, it is possible to easily prevent fraudulent acts that cause malfunction by tampering with the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 or the lower layer transmission mechanism A770.

371 and 372 are front exploded perspective views of the upper lid portion A740 and the box-shaped portion A750. Note that FIG. 371 shows a view looking down obliquely from above, and FIG. 372 shows a view looking up obliquely from below (a view inclined at 22.5 degrees with respect to the vertical direction).

As shown in FIGS. 371 and 372, the upper lid portion A740 has a through hole A741 vertically drilled in the center position of the left and right, and supports each transmission member of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 on the lower surface facing the box-shaped portion A750. A shape (a shape such as unevenness) is formed for the purpose.

The box-shaped part A750 is arranged below the upper lid part A740 and is formed in a box-like shape with at least the upper surface side open, and the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 are arranged at the open position. is fixed to the bottom plate portion A750a of the upper lid portion A740 and extends vertically coaxially with the central axis of the through hole A741 of the upper lid portion A740. A first detection sensor A752 consisting of a detection device configured by a photocoupler system disposed in the second detection sensor consisting of a detection device configured by a photocoupler system disposed on the lower surface side of the box-shaped part A750 A753, a drive motor AMT2 whose main body protrudes to the lower surface side and is fastened and fixed, a drive gear AMG2 that is rotated by the excitation of the drive motor AMT2, and various sensors A752, A753 and the drive motor that are arranged below the bottom plate portion A750a. A relay board A754 is provided to relay wiring connected to the AMT2 or the like.

373 and 374 are exploded front perspective views of the box-shaped portion A750, the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770. 373 and 374 show the state in which the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 is separated from the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 in the vertical direction, FIG. It is illustrated in a directional view looking up.

Both the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 are configured by meshing four gears, and each gear is limited to gears of two types (sizes). That is, the lower-layer transmission mechanism A770 includes a drive gear AMG2, a small-sized small gear PG1 meshed with the drive gear AMG2, a small gear PG2 of the same shape meshed with the small gear PG1, and the small gear PG2. It is composed of a drive gear AMG2 and a large-diameter gear LG1 having the same shape.

The upper-layer transmission mechanism A760 includes a large-diameter gear LG11 having the same shape as the drive gear AMG2, a large-diameter gear LG12 having the same shape meshing with the large-diameter gear LG11, and a small-diameter gear meshing with the large-diameter gear LG12. It is composed of a small-diameter gear PG11 having the same shape as the gear PG1 and a large-diameter gear LG13 meshing with the small-diameter gear PG11 and having the same shape as the drive gear AMG2.

Detectable pieces A763 and A773 that are detected by a first detection sensor A752 and a second detection sensor A753 are formed on the large-diameter gears LG13 and LG1 arranged on the most downstream side with the drive gear AMG2 side as the upstream side.

In the process of transmitting the driving force of each of the transmission mechanisms A760 and A770, a gear with a small diameter is used. In this case, the absolute value of the rotation angle is equal to the absolute value of the rotation angle of the drive gear AMG2.

In this embodiment, detection pieces A763 extending radially outward from a head covering the gear teeth of the large-diameter gear LG13 from above are formed at two locations (180° intervals) on the circumference at equal intervals. Detectable pieces A773 extending in the axial direction from the head covering the gear teeth of the large-diameter gear LG1 from below are formed at four locations (at intervals of 90 degrees) at equal intervals on the circumference. , the detection pieces A763 and A773 are detected by both the first detection sensor A752 and the second detection sensor A753 (see FIG. 372). It returns to the state where pieces A763 and A773 to be detected are detected by both A752 and second detection sensor A753. Thus, in this embodiment, the detection timings of the first detection sensor A752 and the second detection sensor A753 can be related.

On the other hand, the reason why a plurality of detection sensors, ie, the first detection sensor A752 and the second detection sensor A753 are provided, is that there is a timing at which only one of the detection sensors is activated, the details of which will be described later. .

In the detailed description of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770, since the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 is supported by the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 at a plurality of points, the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 will be described first for easy understanding. . The lower layer transmission mechanism A770 is a transmission mechanism arranged in the lower layer of the box-shaped portion A750 and composed of four mutually meshing gears AMG2, PG1, PG2, and LG1 as described above.

A plurality of recesses A771 for fitting are formed on the upper surface side of the driving gear AMG2 of the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and a protrusion A771a is formed in one of the recesses A771 to protrude radially inward. be done. As a result, the internal shape of one recess A771 is formed to be different from the internal shape of the other recesses A771.

The small-diameter gear PG2 of the lower-layer transmission mechanism A770 includes a cylindrical extension portion A772 that extends cylindrically upward from the upper surface so as to surround the shaft portion A751. A pair of rectangular cutouts A772a are formed at the upper end of the tubular extension A772 at symmetrical positions with respect to the axial rod A751. The notch A772a is a portion to be fitted with the projecting portion A733 of the support portion, and is formed as notches having different widths corresponding to the form of the projecting portion A733.

The large-diameter gear LG1 is arranged below an intermediate plate portion A750b formed above the bottom plate portion A750a of the box-shaped portion A750, and is restricted from being removed upward by the intermediate plate portion A750b. That is, in order to remove the large-diameter gear LG1, it is necessary to remove the second detection sensor A753 that interferes with it in the vertical direction. This makes it easier to avoid the large-diameter gear LG1 from being unintentionally pulled out.

Further, by dividing the area by the intermediate plate portion A750b, it is possible to easily avoid contact between the large-diameter gear LG1 and the constituent members of the upper-layer transmission mechanism A760. As a result, it is possible to avoid transmission of the driving force between the large-diameter gear LG1 and the upper transmission mechanism A760 (on the downstream side of the transmission path of the driving force).

Next, the details of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 will be described. The upper layer transmission mechanism A760 is a transmission mechanism arranged in the upper layer of the box-shaped portion A750 and composed of four mutually meshing gears LG11, LG12, PG11 and LG13 as described above.

The large-diameter gear LG11 of the upper transmission mechanism A760 transmits driving force only when it rotates in one direction (clockwise when viewed from the top) by a one-way clutch housed inside, and rotates in the opposite direction (counterclockwise when viewed from the top). It is configured to idle when it rotates, and has a plurality of ridges A761 projecting downward from the lower surface of the one-way clutch.

The protrusion A761 is a curved wall-shaped protrusion that fits into the recess A771 of the drive gear AMG2. linear shape with reduced overhang). As a result, it is possible to assemble only in a posture in which the protrusion A771a of the drive gear AMG2 and the corresponding portion A761a of the large-diameter gear LG11 match.

The large-diameter gear LG12 of the upper-layer transmission mechanism A760 has a through hole A762a having an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the tubular extension A772 of the small-diameter gear PG2. A pair of rectangular notches A762c formed at opposite positions across the central axis of the shaft rod A751 at the protruding tip of the cylindrical protrusion A762b provided, A pair of inner projections projecting along a straight line passing through the central axis of the axial rod portion A751 and perpendicular to the straight line passing through the notch portion A762c and the central axis of the axial rod portion A751 in a top view. and a part A762d.

The cylindrical ridge portion A762b is a portion that receives the lower end portion of the second support portion A735 (see FIG. 366) and regulates the displacement of the second support portion A735 in the division direction. are portions that are fitted with the projecting fitting portion A736b and the recessed fitting portion A736a of the second support portion A735, respectively, and are configured to be capable of transmitting driving force.

The large-diameter gear LG13 of the upper-layer transmission mechanism A760 is formed along the axial direction by omitting the formation of the head portion at a position shifted in the same direction and at the same angle from the pair of detected pieces A763 described above. and a cylindrical functional portion A765 which is coaxially rotatably disposed inside the large-diameter gear LG13 and configured to be relatively rotatable with the large-diameter gear LG13.

The columnar functional portion A765 has a pair of rotation restricting projections A765a arranged symmetrically with respect to the rotation axis and supported in a groove-shaped support groove A750c formed on the upper surface of the box-shaped portion A750. Here, a functional device that functions as a so-called torque limiter (safety clutch) with respect to the large-diameter gear LG13 is accommodated inside the cylindrical functional portion A765.

That is, when the load generated between the large-diameter gear LG13 and the cylindrical functional portion A765 is smaller than the reference (slight), torque transmission is maintained, and the load between the large-diameter gear LG13 and the cylindrical functional portion A765 is maintained. It is configured to cut off the transmission of torque when the load generated between them is excessive.

In this embodiment, the drive gear AMG2 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from above, and the one-way clutch inside the large-diameter gear LG11 idles, thereby interrupting the transmission of the driving force to the upper transmission mechanism A760. A torque limiter is used to provide resistance to more reliably prevent rotation of the motor. Therefore, from this point of view, it functions in the same way as a resistance member that constantly generates resistance and a member that generates viscous resistance such as a damper gear.

On the other hand, when the drive gear AMG2 rotates clockwise in top view and the one-way clutch inside the large diameter gear LG11 rotates without idling, the driving force is transmitted through the upper transmission mechanism A760. , the transmission of torque is interrupted, and the resistance from the large-diameter gear LG13 side can be reduced, so the load applied to the drive motor AMT2 can be suppressed, and the heat generation of the drive motor AMT2 can be suppressed.

Here, when the drive gear AMG2 rotates clockwise in top view and the one-way clutch inside the large diameter gear LG11 rotates without idling, the torque limiter transmits torque at the start of rotation. , after the rotation continues to some extent (after rotating by a certain angle), the torque transmission is switched to the state of canceling. Therefore, before the switching occurs, a large load is generated between the small diameter gear PG11 and the large diameter gear LG13.

In this embodiment, the elongated gear tooth A764 is formed as a portion that receives this large load. That is, the posture of the large-diameter gear LG13 when the drive gear AMG2 starts to rotate clockwise in top view is limited to the posture in which the detection piece A763 enters the gap of the first detection sensor A752 (see FIG. 373). By doing so, it is possible to limit the gear teeth that mesh with the small-diameter gear PG11 to specific gear teeth when the drive gear AMG2 starts to rotate clockwise in top view.

By making the specific gear tooth longer in the axial direction as an elongated gear tooth A764, the load generated per unit length in the axial direction can be reduced. Thereby, the durability of the large-diameter gear LG13 can be improved.

It should be noted that the first detection sensor A752 can detect a plurality of objects by detecting the detected piece A763 of the large-diameter gear LG13. First, when the upper transmission mechanism A760 rotates for driving force transmission and then stops, it can be detected that the upper transmission mechanism A760 has stopped at an appropriate posture (angle).

Second, when the one-way clutch disposed inside the large-diameter gear LG11 is idling to release the driving force transmission to the upper transmission mechanism A760 (when the driving gear AMG2 rotates counterclockwise in top view). ), it can be detected that the release of the driving force transmission is functioning well. That is, for example, when the cutoff of driving force transmission (idling) is insufficient due to damage to the internal structure of the one-way clutch, or when the torque generation function of the torque limiter is insufficient due to a malfunction, When the driving force transmitted to the radial gear LG13 exceeds the resistance of the torque limiter, the large diameter gear LG13 rotates.

When the first detection sensor A752 detects that the piece A763 to be detected has been displaced while the driving gear AMG2 is controlled to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from above, an error signal is sent to the first detection sensor A752. can be used to find faults in one-way clutches and torque limiters.

It should be noted that the mechanism that compensates for the cancellation of the driving force transmission using the one-way clutch with the function of the torque limiter as described above is effective when the transmitted driving force is directed in the horizontal direction as in the present embodiment. be. In other words, in this embodiment, the driving force is transmitted by a plurality of transmission members that rotate around the rotating shaft extending in the vertical direction, but gravity cannot be used in this configuration.

When the driving force to be transmitted has a component in the direction of gravity, it is possible to use the weight of the member to which the driving force is transmitted to suppress the movement in the direction in which the driving force transmission is canceled. In the embodiment, the self weight cannot be used, and even a weak load caused by idling in the disengaging direction of the one-way clutch may cause transmission of driving force.

In addition, as a structure for suppressing displacement due to idling, it is conceivable to generate friction with other members, but in this case, it is necessary to generate a driving force greater than the friction to drive the members, so there is another problem. may occur. From this point of view, in this embodiment, a torque limiter is employed so that the transmission of the driving force can be reliably canceled when the driving direction is switched.

FIG. 375(a) is a top view of the upper lid portion A740, the box-shaped portion A750, the upper layer transmission mechanism A760, and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770, and FIG. 375(b) is the top lid portion A740, the box-shaped portion A750, and the upper layer transmission mechanism. FIG. 11 is a front view of A760 and lower layer transmission mechanism A770;

Transmission of the drive force of the drive motor AMT2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 375(a) and 375(b). When the drive gear AMG2 rotates due to the excitation of the drive motor AMT2, the protrusion A761 (see FIG. 374) that fits into the recess A771 (see FIG. 373) of the drive gear AMG2 also rotates.

When the rotation direction of the driving gear AMG2 is counterclockwise when viewed from above, the one-way clutch accommodated inside the large-diameter gear LG11 idles as described above, and the protrusion A761 and the large-diameter gear LG11 rotate relative to each other. Thus, even if the drive gear AMG2 rotates, the large-diameter gear LG11 maintains its state.

That is, the driving force is transmitted only through the lower transmission path DL1 through the lower transmission mechanism A770, and the transmission of the driving force through the upper transmission path UL1 through the upper transmission mechanism A760 is interrupted. Therefore, of the cylindrical extension portion A772 and the cylindrical ridge portion A762b fitted to the support portion A730 (see FIG. 369), only the cylindrical extension portion A772 rotates, and the cylindrical ridge portion A762b remains as it is. maintain.

As a result, in the assembled state of the production unit A710 (see FIG. 362), the first support portion A731 (see FIG. 369) that fits into the cylindrical extension portion A772 of the first support portion A731 and the second support portion A735 ) rotates, and the second support A735 maintains its state. Therefore, the first rotation member A721 ( 367) rotates, and the second rotating member A728 remains unchanged.

On the other hand, when the driving gear AMG2 rotates clockwise when viewed from the top, the driving force is sufficiently transmitted by the one-way clutch housed inside the large-diameter gear LG11 as described above. It rotates (integrally) in synchronization with the gear LG11. That is, when the driving gear AMG2 rotates, the large diameter gear LG11 also rotates.

That is, the driving force is transmitted not only through the lower transmission path DL1 but also through the upper transmission path UL1. Therefore, both the cylindrical extension portion A772 and the cylindrical projection portion A762b that are fitted to the support portion A730 (see FIG. 369) rotate.

As a result, in the assembled state of the production unit A710 (see FIG. 362), both the first support portion A731 and the second support portion A735 (see FIG. 369) rotate, and the first support portion A731 and the second support portion A735 rotate. Both the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 (see FIG. 367) which are respectively fastened and fixed to rotate.

Here, the rotation directions of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 will be described. First, the second rotating member A728 (see FIG. 367) is rotated by the driving force transmitted through the upper transmission path UL1. As the driving gear AMG2 rotates clockwise when viewed from the top, the large-diameter gear LG11 rotates clockwise when viewed from the top, and the large-diameter gear LG12 meshing with the large-diameter gear LG11 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the top in the opposite direction. Since it rotates, the direction of rotation of the second rotating member A728 is counterclockwise when viewed from above.

Next, the first rotating member A721 (see FIG. 367) is rotated by the driving force transmitted through the lower transmission path DL1. As the drive gear AMG2 rotates clockwise in top view, the small gear PG1 meshing with the drive gear AMG2 rotates counterclockwise in top view, and the small gear PG2 (see FIG. 373) meshes with the small gear PG1. ) rotates clockwise when viewed from the top, the rotation direction of the first rotating member A721 is clockwise when viewed from the top.

That is, the rotation directions of the first rotation member A721 and the second rotation member A728 are opposite to each other with the axial rod portion A751 as the rotation axis. As a result, compared to the case where the rotation directions of the first rotation member A721 and the second rotation member A728 are the same, it is possible for the player to visually recognize that they are rotating at a high speed (with a large angle change). Or, it is possible to make it easier to execute an effect such as making it appear as if the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 are rotating independently.

FIG. 376(a) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, FIG. 376(b) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 376(a), and FIG. c) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 376(d) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 376(c).

FIGS. 376(a) and 376(b) show the initial state of the first rotating member A721, and FIGS. 376(c) and 376(d) show the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 in the initial state. 45 degrees (first state) after being rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise in top view.

Fig. 377(a) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, Fig. 377(b) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in Fig. 377(a), and Fig. 377 ( 377(c) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 377(d) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 377(c).

FIGS. 377(a) and 377(b) show a state (second state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 has rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise in top view from the first state. 377(c) and 377(d) show a state (third state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 has rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise in top view from the second state.

Fig. 378(a) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, Fig. 378(b) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in Fig. 378(a), and Fig. 378 ( c) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 378(d) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 378(c).

FIGS. 378(a) and 378(b) show a state (fourth state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 has rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise in top view from the third state. 378(c) and 378(d) show a state (fifth state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 has rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise in top view from the fourth state.

FIG. 379(a) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, FIG. 379(b) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 379(a), and FIG. 379c) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 379(d) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 379(c).

FIGS. 379(a) and 379(b) show a state (sixth state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 has rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise in top view from the fifth state. 379(c) and 379(d) show a state (seventh state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 has rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise in top view from the sixth state.

When the shell A722 rotates 45 degrees counterclockwise in top view from the seventh state, the first rotating member A721 returns to the initial state. 376 to 379 illustrate one section (one cycle) of the rotation of the first rotating member A721.

In the initial state of the first rotating member A721 (see FIG. 376(a)), the side of the shell A722 that is visible in front view is referred to as the front shell A722F, and the opposite side is referred to as the back shell A722B. Similarly, in the initial state of the first rotating member A721, the side of the central rotating member A724 that is viewed from the front is referred to as the member front surface A724F, and the opposite side thereof is referred to as the member rear surface A724B.

376(a), 376(c), 377(a), 377(c), 378(a), 378(c), 379(a) and 379(c) , the optical axis KJ of the LED that constitutes the light emitting means A715a of the electrical board A715 (see FIG. 364) is illustrated by imaginary lines, and FIG. 376(b), FIG. 376(d), FIG. d), FIG. 378(b), FIG. 378(d), FIG. 379(b) and FIG. 379(d) illustrate a predetermined virtual plane VS. The optical axis KJ passes through this virtual plane VS.

376(d), FIG. 377(d), FIG. 378(d) and FIG. 379(d), arrows HL and VL schematically indicating light reflection directions are illustrated. The arrow HL indicates the direction in which the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724 travels after being reflected by the shell A722, and the arrow VL indicates the direction above the central rotating member A724. It represents the direction in which the light emitted from the arranged light emitting means A715a is reflected by the central rotating member A724 and travels.

As shown in FIGS. 376(d), 377(d), 378(d) and 379(d), the first rotation member A721 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from above, The direction of the arrow VL changes clockwise by one rotation when viewed from above. That is, in this embodiment, the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the central rotating member A724 is directed through the central rotating member A724 in the radial direction of a circle centered on the rotation axis of the first rotating member A721. , and its direction can be changed in a direction opposite to the direction of rotation of the first rotating member A721.

For example, this is difficult to achieve with a configuration in which the light emitting means are arranged on the side surface of the shell A722 or the central rotating member A724. For example, when the light emitting means is provided on the side surface of the shell A722, the direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means changes in the same rotational direction as the first rotating member A721.

Further, for example, since the member front surface A724F of the central rotating member A724 always faces the front side when the first rotating member A721 rotates, the normal line of the surface is The change in the direction of travel of the light irradiated in the direction does not change around the rotation axis of the first rotating member A721 (there is a change in the rotation direction with the rotation axis in the front-rear direction).

Therefore, as compared with the case of adopting the configuration in which the light emitting means is arranged on the side surface of the first rotating member A721 to perform the light emission effect, it is possible to execute the light emission effect with unexpectedness. For example, since the direction of rotation of the change in the traveling direction of the light is opposite to the direction of rotation of the first rotating member A721, the player will feel as if the rotating member is rotating at a higher speed than the actual rotation speed. can make you feel

As shown in FIGS. 376 to 379, the central rotating member A724 rotates with the rotation of the first rotating member A721, but the surface viewed by the player is limited to the member front surface A724F. Therefore, even if the fastening screw for fastening and fixing the central rotating member A724 is exposed on the back side (see FIG. 368), it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from being visually recognized by the player.

That is, the member back surface A724B of the central rotating member A724 can be configured not as an area to be visually recognized by the player but as an area for another purpose. A configuration that makes it easier to achieve the purpose of reflecting light can be selected. For example, in this embodiment, by intentionally exposing the fastening screw, it is possible to cause reflection of light using the luster of the member surface of the fastening screw.

In addition, the aspect of the member surface of a fastening screw can be set arbitrarily. For example, the surface of the fastening screw member may be painted black to facilitate shadow formation, the surface of the fastening screw member may be painted with a color to reflect the color, or the fastening screw may be coated with an LED. You may attach a light emission means, such as.

The action of light applied to the first rotating member A721 will be described. In the following description, FIG. 364 will be referred to as appropriate. The electrical board A715 having the light emitting means A715a for irradiating the first rotating member A721 with light is arranged so as to configure each side of the pentagon as described above. The optical axis KJ is arranged along the direction of The electrical board A715 (see FIG. 364) arranged above the first rotating member A721 will be described first, and the electrical board A715 located on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721 will be described later.

The illumination board A715 arranged above the first rotating member A721 is irradiated with light downward from the light emitting means A715a. This light reaches the central rotating member A724 through the light passage concave portion A722a regardless of the state of the first rotating member A721. That is, by irradiating light from the light emitting means A715a arranged on the electrical board A715 arranged above the first rotary member A721, the central rotary member A724 can always be illuminated with light.

In addition, since three LEDs are arranged side by side in the light emitting means A715a, the amount of light reaching the central rotating member A724 can vary depending on the state of the first rotating member A721. That is, in the initial state (see FIG. 376(b)), the light-passing concave portion A722a is elongated in the same direction as the direction in which the light emitting means A715a are arranged in parallel, so that the light emitted from the left and right light emitting means A715a It is easy to reach the central rotary member A724.

On the other hand, in the second state (see FIG. 377(b)), the light passing recesses A722a do not extend in the direction in which the light emitting means A715a are arranged in parallel, and the light emitted from the left and right light emitting means A715a passes through the light passing recesses. Since it is difficult to enter A722a, of the light emitted from the decorative board A715 arranged above the central rotating member A724, the light reaching the central rotating member A724 is mainly the light emitted from the central light emitting means A715a. Become. Therefore, the difference in the state of the first rotating member A721 can be associated with the difference in the emission intensity of the central rotating member A724.

From this point of view, in the initial state and the fourth state in which the member front face A724F of the central rotating member A724 is easily visually recognized in a front view, the illumination from the decorative board A715 arranged above the central rotating member A724 reaches the central rotating member A724. In the second state and sixth state where the intensity of the light is maximized and the member front face A724F of the central rotating member A724 is difficult to visually recognize in a front view, the central rotating member A724 is irradiated from the decorative board A715 arranged above the central rotating member A724. The intensity of light reaching the rotating member A724 can be minimized. That is, it is possible to change the visibility of the central rotating member A724 in a front view and the intensity of the light reaching the central rotating member A724.

The electrical boards A715 arranged on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721 are provided with light emitting means A715a with the optical axis KJ arranged on a plane (virtual plane VS) passing through the rotation axis of the shell A722. Light is emitted from the light emitting means A715a toward the first rotating member A721, but the location where the light reaches differs depending on the state of the first rotating member A721.

That is, the state in which the shell A722 is arranged between the central rotating member A724 and the light emitting means A715a (initial state (see FIGS. 376(a) and 376(b)) or the fourth state (see FIGS. 378(a) and 378(a) and 378(b))), the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a is reflected by the shell A722 and does not reach the central rotating member A724.

The outer peripheral edge of the shell A722 is curved so that the width becomes smaller as it goes radially outward. Prepare. Therefore, even in the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721, part of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a to the shell A722 is reflected by the curvature of the outer peripheral edge of the shell A722 and the arch of the connecting portion A722b. It can be made to progress toward the player by reflecting it on the curvature of the .

In addition, in the state between the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721, the shell A722 reflects the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a toward the player (reflects along the arrow HL). ), it is possible to emphasize the difference between the amount of light traveling toward the player in a state slightly deviated from the initial state and the fourth state and the amount of light in other states. That is, in the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotary member A721, the central rotary member A724 is momentarily (pulse-like) visually recognized in the dark, and in a state slightly deviated from the initial state and the fourth state, the central rotary member A724 is displayed. It is possible to execute a lighting effect of switching to a brightly visible state.

On the other hand, in the state between the initial state and the fourth state in the rotational displacement of the first rotating member A721, the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a does not entirely overlap with the shell A722. reaches the central rotating member A724.

In this way, the state in which the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a of the decorative boards A715 arranged on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721 reaches the central rotating member A724 and the state in which the light does not reach the central rotating member A724 are divided into two states. The state of the first rotating member A721 can be switched. As a result, even without controlling the light emission mode (for example, the flashing mode) of the light emitting means A715a, it is possible to perform a light emission effect in which the light that reaches the central rotating member A724 appears to be blinking.

For example, by changing the rotation speed of the first rotating member A721 while maintaining the lighting state of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a, it is possible to make the light appear to blink at different lighting or extinguishing times ( It can be visually recognized as a light emission effect with different blinking cycles).

In this case, if the central rotating member A724 cannot be followed as a still image and is driven to rotate at a speed that exceeds the degree of causing an afterimage (for example, 20 [rps]), the Regardless of the speed, the central rotating member A724 appears as if it is stopped, while the blinking period of the light applied to the central rotating member A724 can be varied depending on the difference in speed.

That is, the higher the rotation speed of the first rotating member A721, the shorter the interval until the first rotating member A721 reaches the initial state and the fourth state, and the shell A722 illuminates the light emitting means A715a (center Since the period in which the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a) arranged on the left and right sides of the rotating member A724 is blocked can be shortened, the flickering period of the light emitted to the central rotating member A724 can be shortened. Therefore, in this embodiment, by changing the rotational speed of the first rotating member A721, it is possible to perform an effect of changing the flashing period of the light irradiated to the central rotating member A724.

In the present embodiment, as shown in the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721, in a state in which the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a and the shell portion A722 are arranged to face each other, the central rotating member A724 is , the longitudinal direction overlaps with the shell portion A722 when viewed from the direction of the rotation axis (or viewed from the direction of the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a). In this embodiment, the longitudinal direction of the central rotating member A724 is parallel to the member front surface A724F or the member rear surface A724B (for example, the arrow LR direction, arrow UD direction, or arrow FB direction in FIG. 376(a). 376(b)), and the lateral direction is defined as the direction connecting the member front face A724F and the member back face A724B (arrow FB direction in FIG. 376(b)).

In other words, in the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721, the longitudinal direction of the central rotating member A724 is the same as the thickness of the shell A722 when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis (or in the direction of the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a). It becomes a posture of entering (fitting in) inside. Thereby, the light shielding effect of the shell portion A722 in the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721 can be improved. That is, by shielding the light with the shell A722, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a from reaching the central rotating member A724. , but not the central rotary member A724.

When rotating the first rotating member A721 at a constant speed, the total (ratio) of the time during which the first rotating member A721 is maintained in the initial state or the fourth state with respect to the time during which the rotation is continued is the rotational speed It's the same regardless. As a result, the change in the rotational speed of the first rotating member A721 can prevent the change in the brightness of the first rotating member A721 visually recognized by the player. That is, when the first rotating member A721 is rotated at high speed, it is possible to prevent the first rotating member A721 from being seen in the dark.

In this embodiment, by rotating the first rotating member A721 while the light emitting means A715a is turned on, the blinking period of the light reaching the central rotating member A724 can be changed. According to this, it is possible to eliminate the need to form a circuit for causing the flashing of the light emitting means A715a while achieving the same effect as in the case of flashing the light emitting means A715a itself. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the size of the electrical board A715.

As described above, the light emitting means A715a for emitting light from above the central rotating member A724 and the light emitting means A715a for emitting light from the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724 are arranged in the first direction with respect to the state of the first rotating member A721. It is configured differently in how the rotating member A721 is illuminated. Therefore, by controlling separately, it is possible to execute the lighting effect illustrated below.

For example, in the initial state (see FIGS. 376(a) and 376(b)) or the fourth state (see FIGS. 378(a) and 378(b)) of the first rotating member A721, the upper side of the central rotating member A724 By controlling the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right of the central rotating member A724 to light up or blink, the central rotating member A724 is visible darkly, and the shell part A722 is bright. Illuminating light effects can be executed.

Further, for example, only the light emitting means A715a (the central light emitting means A715a) arranged above the central rotating member A724 are lit or blinked, and the light emitting means A715a arranged to the left and right of the central rotating member A724 are extinguished. By controlling, it is possible to perform a light effect that illuminates the central rotating member A724 brightly and visually recognizes the shell A722 darkly.

Further, for example, light is irradiated from both directions in the horizontal direction, but light is irradiated only from one side (upper side) in the vertical direction (every half rotation, the light is reflected from the central rotating member A724 to the front side. A complex lighting effect can be executed by using the difference between the case and the case of being reflected to the back side). For example, blue light is emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right of the central rotating member A724, and red light is emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the central rotating member A724. For a player who views from the front, switching between a situation in which blue light is seen and a situation in which blue light and red light are mixed is switched every half rotation of the first rotating member A721. can be done.

In this case, by changing the rotation speed of the first rotating member A721 while executing the control to continuously turn on the light without flashing the light, it is possible to arbitrarily change the period in which the appearance of the light changes. .

An example of stop control of the first rotating member A721 will be described. As described above, the driving force for rotationally driving the first rotating member A721 is transmitted through the lower transmission path DL1 (see FIG. 375(b)). Since the pieces to be detected A773 (see FIG. 374) are detected by the second detection sensor A753 at intervals of 90 degrees, the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) controls each time the first rotating member A721 rotates 90 degrees. The occurrence of rotation can be determined. The state of the first rotating member A721 can be determined by dividing this determination according to the rotation direction of the first rotating member A721, accumulating the results, and determining the accumulated result separately.

That is, for example, when the driving motor AMT2 is driven to rotate in the rotation direction (positive direction) in which the shell portion A722 rotates counterclockwise in top view, each time the detection piece A773 is detected by the second detection sensor A753. while adding 1 to the numerical value of the cumulative counter, when the drive motor AMT2 is driven to rotate in the clockwise rotation direction (reverse direction) of the shell portion A722 when viewed from the top, the piece to be detected A773 is detected by the second detection sensor The numerical value of the cumulative counter is decremented by 1 each time A753 detects it.

If the numerical value of the cumulative counter is 0 or a multiple of 4, it is in the initial state; if it is (0 or a multiple of 4)+1, it is in the second state; There are 4 states, and if (0 or a multiple of 4)+3, it can be determined to be the 6th state.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, even if the rotation angle of the drive motor AMT2 cannot be designated, by determining the numerical value of the cumulative counter and controlling the stop of the drive motor AMT2, the initial state, the second The first rotary member A721 can be stopped in either of two states, a fourth state, or a sixth state.

Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect such that the postures in which the first rotating member A721 stops have different meanings. For example, it can be utilized as an effect means for notifying the difference in the degree of expectation for a big win, or notifying the time information (for example, the stopping posture changes every two hours).

In this embodiment, the case where the pieces A773 to be detected are formed at four locations at regular intervals has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The pieces A773 to be detected may be arranged at non-equidistant intervals, may be formed at three locations, five or more locations, or may be formed at one location.

Figure 380(a) is a front view of the effect unit A710, Figure 380(b) is a top view of the effect unit A710 viewed in the direction of arrow D in Figure 380(a), and Figure 380(c) It is a front view of the effect unit A710, and FIG.380(d) is a top view of the effect unit A710 viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG.380(c).

Fig. 381(a) is a front view of the effect unit A710, Fig. 381(b) is a top view of the effect unit A710 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in Fig. 381(a), and Fig. 381(c) It is a front view of the effect unit A710, and FIG.381(d) is a top view of the effect unit A710 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG.381(c).

In FIGS. 380 and 381, the state of rotation of the rotating body A720 is illustrated in chronological order. That is, the first rotating member A721 is driven in a rotating direction of rotating counterclockwise in top view, and the initial state of the first rotating member A721 in FIGS. The first state of the first rotating member A721 is shown in FIG. 380(d), and the second state of the first rotating member A721 is shown in FIGS. 381(a) and 381(b). ) respectively illustrate the third state of the first rotary member A721.

When the first rotating member A721 is driven in the rotating direction of rotating counterclockwise in top view, as described above, the driving force is transmitted through the upper transmission path UL1, so the second rotating member A728 also rotates in the first rotation. It reversely rotates at the same rotation angle as the member A721.

That is, FIGS. 380(a) and 380(b) show the initial state of the second rotating member A728 in which the rod-shaped extensions A728a are arranged on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 380(d) shows the first state of the second rotating member A728 in which the rod-shaped extension A728a is rotated 45 degrees clockwise in top view from the initial state, and FIGS. 381(a) and 381(b). 381(c) and 381(d) show the second state of the second rotating member A728 in which the rod-shaped extension portion A728a is rotated clockwise by 45 degrees from the first state. A third state of the second rotating member A728 is illustrated in which the portion A728a is rotated 45 degrees clockwise in top view from the second state.

Since the pair of rod-shaped extensions A728a are formed in a substantially rotationally symmetrical shape, the second rotating member A728 returns to the initial state by further rotating 45 degrees clockwise in top view from the third state. do.

In FIGS. 380(b), 380(d), 381(b) and 381(d), for ease of understanding, the annular front cover A711 and the annular rear cover A714 are schematic diagrams (simplified diagrams). ) in phantom lines.

In addition, in FIGS. 380(a), 380(c), 381(a) and 381(c), the outer shape of the electrical board A715 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and FIGS. 380(b) and 380(d). ), and in FIGS. 381(b) and 381(d), the virtual plane VS is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 380 and 381, as the second rotating member A728 rotates, the decorative boards A715 (two boards each on the left and right) are arranged on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721. passes through the optical axis of the light emitted from Therefore, similarly to the first rotating member A721, the traveling mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a of the electrical board A715 can be changed according to the rotation of the second rotating member A728.

Here, unlike the case where the shell A722 of the first rotating member A721 is made of a resin material with low light transmittance, the second rotating member A728 is made of a resin material with light transmittance. It does not block light when passing through the optical axis of , but acts to cause a change in light refraction mode or light color. In this embodiment, since the second rotating member A728 is made of a blue resin material, the light reaching the first rotating member A721 is changed to a blue color at the timing when the second rotating member A728 passes through the optical axis. (color mixed with blue) can be changed.

In this embodiment, the second rotating member A728 is formed in a rod shape extending in the direction along the rotation axis and bent along the circumferential direction of rotation. is configured so as not to overlap with all of the optical axes of

For example, in the state shown in FIG. 380(d), the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a arranged on the electrical board A715 arranged on the left and right upper sides of the central rotating member A724 overlaps with the second rotating member A728, and the other The optical axis of the light emitting means A715a arranged on the electrical board A715 and the second rotating member A728 do not overlap, but on the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. The optical axis of the light emitting means A715a arranged on the electric decoration board A715 and the second rotating member A728 overlap, and the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a arranged on the other electric decoration board A715 and the second rotating member A728 overlap. does not overlap with In the states shown in FIGS. 380(b) and 381(b), the second rotating member A728 is configured so as not to overlap the optical axis of any light emitting means A715a.

As a result, compared to the case where the optical axes of all the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724 and the second rotating member A728 are switched to overlap or not overlap, the central rotating member A724 The variety of modes of light arriving can be increased. That is, the mode in which the light that has passed through the second rotating member A728 reaches the central rotating member A724, the mode in which only the light arriving from the left and right upper sides passes through the second rotating member A728, and the mode in which only the light arriving from the left and right lower sides pass through the second rotating member A728. It can be increased to the aspect of passing through the second rotating member A728.

In this case, the light emitting means A715a whose optical axis overlaps with the second rotating member A728 is turned on and the light emitting means A715a whose optical axis does not overlap with the second rotating member A728 is turned off. The appearance of the central rotating member A724 can be changed depending on whether the light emitting means A715a overlapping the second rotating member A728 is turned off and the light emitting means A715a whose optical axis does not overlap with the second rotating member A728 is turned on. That is, it is possible to switch whether the central rotating member A724 emits light in a manner mixed with the color of the second rotating member A728 or emits light regardless of the color of the second rotating member A728.

In addition, the direction of the optical axis that overlaps the second rotating member A728 can be changed from the upper left and right to the lower left and right depending on the arrangement of the second rotating member A728. It is possible to switch the part of the central rotating member A724 that is illuminated in a mixed manner.

In addition, as illustrated in FIGS. 380 and 381, the second rotating member A728 is configured so as not to overlap with the light passage concave portion A722a when viewed from above. As a result, the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the central rotating member A724 does not depend on the arrangement of the second rotating member A728, and does not pass through the second rotating member A728. Head to A722a.

Therefore, for example, only the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the central rotating member A724 is turned on, and the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right of the central rotating member A724 are turned off. It can be avoided that the color of the light reaching the central rotating member A724 is changed by the second rotating member A728.

If this is achieved by the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724, the light emitting means A715a is turned on at the timing when the second rotating member A728 does not intersect the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a, and the second rotating member A728 intersects the optical axis, it is necessary to turn off the light emitting means A715a (control synchronized with the rotation of the second rotating member A728). Such control can be made unnecessary by the function of the light emitting means A715a.

The second rotating member A728 partially hides the central rotating member A724 from the field of view of the player in a posture in which the member front surface A724F of the central rotating member A724 does not face the front and the performance function of the central rotating member A724 is lowered. (see FIG. 381(a)), and is configured so that the light refracted by the second rotating member A728 can easily travel to the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the presentation function of the rotating body A720 during the continuation of the rotation.

Here, since the rod-shaped extension portion A728a of the second rotating member A728 is formed in a rotationally symmetrical shape, the shape (outer shape) in a front view can be switched at intervals of 180 degrees. That is, the shape (outer shape) of the second rotating member A728 shown in FIG. 381(a) is equivalent to the shape (outer shape) in the state where the second rotating member A728 is rotated 180 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 381(a). .

On the other hand, the first rotating member A721 rotating inside the second rotating member A728 is not in the same state at 180 degree intervals. That is, when the first rotating member A721 rotates 180 degrees from the second state (see FIG. 377(a)) shown in FIG. 381(a), the state changes to the sixth state (see FIG. 379(a)). In this embodiment, as described above, when the second rotating member A728 is positioned in front of and behind the first rotating member A721 (see FIG. 381(a)), the second rotating member A728 moves the first rotating member A728 forward and backward. Since A721 is partially hidden, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the first rotating member A721 is in the second state or the sixth state.

Then, while the second rotating member A728 and the first rotating member A721 are synchronously rotated by 45 degrees from the arrangement shown in FIG. When the member A721 is in the second state (see FIG. 377(a)), the direction in which the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the first rotating member A721 is reflected by the central rotating member A724. is directed toward the front side (see arrow VL in FIG. 377(d)), and while the central rotating member A724 is brightly visible to the player, the first rotating member A721 is in the sixth state (see FIG. 379(a) ), the direction in which the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the first rotating member A721 is reflected by the central rotating member A724 is the direction toward the rear side (FIG. 379 (d ), and the central rotary member A724 is seen darkly by the player.

In other words, changing the appearance of the first rotating member A721 (brightness of the central rotating member A724) while maintaining the same external shape of the second rotating member A728 that is visually recognized during displacement can change the lighting mode of the light emitting means A715a. It can be generated without change. In this case, by associating the difference between whether the central rotating member A724 looks bright or dark, for example, with the degree of expectation for the jackpot of the special symbol lottery, the second rotating member A728 in the state of FIG. stops, the anticipation for the subsequent operation mode can be heightened, and attention to the rotating body A720 can be improved.

In this case, while the second rotating member A728 and the first rotating member A721 are synchronously rotated by 90 degrees from the arrangement shown in FIG. , the member front surface A724F of the central rotating member A724 rotates 90 degrees from an upward posture to a forward and backward posture. Along with this, the direction of the light reflected via the central rotating member A724 gradually changes from the vertical direction to the front-rear direction until just before the rotation angles of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 reach 90 degrees. (changes in synchronism with the rotation angle of the first rotation member A721), when the rotation angles of the first rotation member A721 and the second rotation member A728 reach 90 degrees, the member front surface A724F moves in the front-rear direction. (because there is no inclination with respect to the optical axis KJ from above), the front-rear direction component of the direction of the light reflected via the central rotating member A724 becomes close to 0, and the light reflection direction returns to the vertical direction. .

In this way, in synchronization with the rotation of the first rotating member A721 from the second state or the sixth state, light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the central rotating member A724 is emitted from the central rotating member A724. It is possible to gradually increase the forward and backward component of the light when it is reflected. As a result, the longer the rotation time of the first rotating member A721, the easier it becomes to determine whether the first rotating member A721 was in the second state or the sixth state. It is possible to maintain a high level of attention to the first rotating member A721 not only at the moment it starts to rotate, but also after it rotates.

In this embodiment, the second rotating member A728 is stopped by driving the rotating body A720 in the direction in which the first rotating member A721 rotates clockwise in top view from the state shown in FIG. 381(a). It is also possible to rotate the first rotating member A721 while keeping it. In this case, the light reflected by the central rotating member A724 (light along the arrow VL) passes through the second rotating member A728 and easily reaches the eyes of the player. .

That is, in the state shown in FIG. 381(a), the posture of the first rotating member A721 can be configured in two ways with an interval of 180 degrees, and from the state shown in FIG. and rotating the first rotating member A721 while maintaining the posture of the second rotating member A728 from the state shown in FIG. A total of four ways of showing the rotating member A724 to the player can be executed.

The light reflected through the central rotating member A724 functions not only to change the brightness of the central rotating member A724 itself, but also to illuminate the members arranged around the central rotating member A724.

For example, when light is reflected to the left front side via the central rotating member A724 (see FIG. 377(d)), the left flow path (game When the light is reflected to the right front side through the central rotating member A724 (the flow path configured in the left area with respect to the center of the width of the area) can be used as light that brightly illuminates (Fig. 376 (d)), in the game area formed on the front side of the game board A13, the right side flow path (the flow path configured in the area on the right side with respect to the center of the horizontal width of the game area, mainly the right side) It can be used as a light that brightly illuminates the flow path through which the ball fired by hitting passes.

Also, for example, when the light is reflected to the left rear side via the central rotating member A724 (see FIG. 378(d)), the first It can be used as light to brightly illuminate the operation units A400, A400A, A400B, etc., and when the light is reflected to the right rear side via the central rotating member A724 (see FIG. 379(d)), the third The light can be used to brightly illuminate the first operation units A400C, A400D, etc. arranged on the right side of the front side of the pattern display device 81. FIG. In this way, the light reflected via the central rotating member A724 can be switched in a direction directed toward a different member, so that by switching the direction of the light, the player's line of sight can be guided to a different member (place). can be done.

In addition, the second rotating member A728 is configured with a vertical length capable of dividing the inner region of the annular front cover A711 in front view into left and right (see FIG. 381(a)). As a result, in a state where the second rotating member A728 is stopped, for example, in a state where the effect unit A710 is arranged on the front side of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 321), the inner side of the annular front cover A711 The display area of the third pattern display device 81 viewed through the area can be partitioned so as to be divided into left and right. In other words, the second rotating member A728 can be used not only as a member that executes an effect by rotating motion, but also as a member that divides the display area of the display device when stopped.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the rotation direction of the drive gear AMG2 is counterclockwise when viewed from above, the first rotation member A721 can be rotated while the second rotation member A728 is stopped. , the effect of rotating the first rotating member A721 can be executed in a state in which the display area of the display device is divided.

In this embodiment, the second rotating member A728 is configured to rotate only when the first rotating member A721 is driven in a counterclockwise rotating direction when viewed from the top, and rotates in the opposite direction (the first rotating member A721 rotates in the The second rotating member A728 is stopped in the driving mode of the rotational direction (view clockwise).

In other words, in one direction of rotation, the first rotating member A721 has the effect of arbitrarily changing the flickering cycle of the light reaching the central rotating member A724 by passing through the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right. In the other rotation direction, in addition to the effect of changing the blinking period, the light emission mode (color, width, etc.).

In this way, by varying the direction of rotation, it is possible to change the visibility of the lighting effect. Since the frequency with which the second rotating member A728 passes through the optical axis depends on the rotation speed of the second rotating member A728, variations in the change in the light emission mode (color, width, etc.) of the light reaching the central rotating member A724 2 Depends on the rotational speed resolution (switchable number) of the rotating member A728.

The rotation speed of the second rotating member A728 naturally has a permissible limit, and this permissible limit defines the limit of variations in the light emission mode. , the second rotating member A728 can be switched to operate or stop. Therefore, even if the rotating speed is the same, if the rotating direction is changed, the light emission mode (color, width, etc.) reaching the central rotating member A724 can be changed. can be different.

Therefore, when the first rotating member A721 or the second rotating member A728 rotates only in one direction, or when the influence on light does not change even if the rotating direction is different (for example, when there is no second rotating member A728, when the second rotating member A728 is not To double the change in the visibility of the light reaching the central rotating member A724 compared to the case where only the rotating direction of the first rotating member A721 changes and the second rotating member A728 maintains its rotation. , it is possible to increase variations in the appearance of the central rotating member A724.

Details of how the central rotating member A724 looks will be described. As described above, the central rotating member A724 repeats the operation of turning the member front surface A724F upside down while maintaining the posture in which the member front surface A724F faces the front side.

Therefore, when the central rotating member A724 cannot be followed as a still image and is driven to rotate at a speed that exceeds the degree of causing an afterimage (for example, 20 [rps]), the central rotating member A724 When viewed from the front, A724 is visually recognized as if the upside-down inverted shape of the member front A724F is united. That is, in this embodiment, the central rotating member A724 formed in a star shape with five corners is visually recognized as a star shape with ten corners.

In this embodiment, the member front face A724F of the central rotating member A724 is formed in a vertically asymmetrical shape, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the member front face A724F of the central rotary member A724 may be formed in a vertically symmetrical shape. In this case, since there is no difference between the shape that is visually recognized as an afterimage during rotation (the shape in which the upside down shapes are united) and the shape of the member front surface A724F, it seems as if the central rotating member A724 is stopped. can be visually recognized.

In addition, for example, a characteristic shape or figure is formed on either side of the rotation axis of the central rotating member A724, and this shape or figure is inverted upside down and united to evoke a different concept. You can

For example, by drawing an equilateral triangular figure on the member front surface A724F in a manner that one side overlaps with the rotation axis in a front view above the rotation axis of the central rotation member A724, when the central rotation member A724 is rotated, an equilateral triangle is drawn. By combining above and below, a diamond-shaped figure can be visually recognized, and the hiragana character "tsu" is placed on the front surface of the member A724F in a manner in which the lower end overlaps the rotation shaft in a front view above the rotation shaft of the central rotation member A724. By drawing characters (graphics) in advance, when the central rotating member A724 is rotated, the inverted shapes are united vertically, so that the character (graphics) of the number "3" can be visually recognized. As a result, it is possible to execute an unexpected effect.

In FIG. 382, an example of an effect using the second action unit A700 will be described. FIG. 382 is a front view of the annular front cover A711 and the rotating body A720. FIG. 382 shows a state in which the production unit A710 is arranged in the extended position (see FIG. 321), that is, a state in which the annular front cover A711 and the rotating body A720 are arranged on the front side of the third pattern display device 81. be.

FIG. 382 shows the second state (see FIG. 381(a)) of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728. An image displayed by the third pattern display device 81 is shown in the area inside the cover A711 (inside the circular opening).

That is, the third symbol display device 81 displays the rotating second rotary member A728V on the display. As a result, even when the second rotating member A728 is stopped, the player can visually recognize as if the second rotating member A728 is rotating.

The means for displaying the second rotating member A728V on the display is not limited to the third pattern display device 81 arranged on the back side of the second rotating member A728. For example, transmissive liquid crystals may be provided on the front side of the second rotating member A728, and the state of rotation of the second rotating member A728 may be displayed by the transmissive liquid crystals. , an illumination plate may be arranged on the illumination plate, and the figure formed on the illumination plate and the image of the third pattern display device 81 may be combined so as to be visible as the second rotating member A728V on the display. The second rotating member A728V on the display may be displayed by a combination of a plurality of display means including means.

In this state, when light is emitted from the light emitting means A715a of the decorative board A715, the player expects the mode of light production in the rotating state of the second rotating member A728, but the second rotating member A728 is stopped. Since the light effect can be executed in the mode in (1), a highly unexpected effect can be executed.

Moreover, this is not limited to the state in which the effect unit A710 of the second operation unit A700 is stopped at the overhanging position, and the same applies while the effect unit A710 is vertically displaced. For example, the effect unit A710 is configured so that the third pattern display device 81 cannot be visually recognized through the left and right positions of the rotating body A720 at the retracted position (see FIG. 320), while at the extended position the rotating body A720 The third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized through the left and right positions of (see FIG. 321).

That is, in response to the upward motion of the effect unit A710 toward the extended position, the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 and the inner side of the annular front cover A711 (the inner side of the circular opening) ) gradually widens the display area of the third pattern display device 81 that is viewed through the area. By displaying the above-described second rotating member A728V on the display in the area of the third symbol display device 81 that is gradually visually recognized, the effect unit A710 is raised while the second rotating member A728 is stopped. , it is possible to perform an effect that makes the player feel that the second rotating member A728 has started to rotate unnoticed (effect can be performed using an optical illusion).

When the effect unit A710 rises in this case, the outer shape of the rotating body A720 that is visually recognized by the player when the second rotating member A728 is actually rotating and when the second rotating member A728 is stopped can be maintained in the same way, when the light is emitted from the light emitting means A715a, the second rotating member A728 is actually rotating and the second rotating member A728 is stopped. It is possible to change the light emission mode (light reflection mode) of the rotating body A720 visually recognized by the player. As a result, it is possible to execute a highly unexpected presentation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 383, a twenty-third embodiment will be described. In the twenty-second embodiment, the second rotating member A728 passes through the optical axis KJ of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a. It is configured as a sliding member A2729 that moves in parallel. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 383 is a schematic top view showing the first rotating member A2721 in the twenty-third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 383, the slide member A2729 is configured to be slidable between a rear side position intersecting the virtual plane VS and a front side position not intersecting the virtual plane VS.

Therefore, even if the slide member A2729 is arranged at a position intersecting the optical axis KJ at the back side position, the crossing with the optical axis KJ can be eliminated by moving to the front side position. 1 It is possible to change the way light reaches the rotary member A2721. Further, since the movement of the slide member A2729 is a sliding movement in the front-rear direction, it is possible to make it difficult for a player viewing the slide member A2729 from the front side to grasp that the slide member A2729 is moving.

That is, while maintaining (retaining) the shape (outer shape) of the first rotating member A2721 and the sliding member A2729 when viewed from the front, the presentation mode of the first rotating member A2721 when the LED or the like constituting the light emitting means A715a is turned on. (How it shines) can be changed. As a result, it is possible to construct an unexpected presentation without performing control to change the LEDs to be lit.

In addition, the material of the slide member A2729 is not limited at all. For example, it may be formed from a light-transmitting resin material, it may be formed from a light-impermeable resin material, or it may be formed from a metal material.

Next, a twenty-fourth embodiment will be described. In the twenty-second embodiment, the outer surface of the arcuate wall portion A464 of the pinned gear A462 is formed in an arcuate shape along the movement locus of the transmission protrusion A463. is provided with a plurality of outer diameter protrusions A3464 projecting radially outward from the outer surface of the arcuate wall portion A464 so as to have a semicircular cross section. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 384 is a rear view of the front unit FU in the twenty-fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 384, the outer diameter protrusions A3464 are formed at four locations that divide the circumferential length of the circular arc wall portion A464 into approximately five equal parts when viewed from the rear.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the long holes (the first long hole A422a, the second long hole A422b, the displacement side long hole A453, and the transmission side long hole A454) formed to displace the first displacement member A440 are the By being formed longer than the 22nd embodiment, the first displacement member A440 is configured to be displaceable beyond the displacement end on the overhang position side in the 22nd embodiment.

In the state shown in FIG. 384, the deformed slide member A455 comes into contact with the arcuate wall portion A464 and its movement is restricted, so that the first displacement member A440 stops at the overhang position. When the pin-equipped gear A3462 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the back, the odd-shaped slide member A455 is pushed upward and to the right from the state shown in FIG. Along with this, the long link A451 rotates, and the first displacement member A440 can be configured to be displaced leftward from the overhang position.

This can be configured such that the first displacement member A440 is displaced at the timing when the second displacement member A490 is displaced (see FIG. 360).

In addition, in FIG. 384, the size of the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is shown randomly, but it is not limited to this. For example, all of them may project with the same size, or external projections A3464 with different sizes may be formed. In this case, they need not all be of different sizes.

In this embodiment, the two outer diameter projections A3464 closer to the transmission projection A463 are formed larger than the two projections farther from the transmission projection A463. Therefore, when the pinned gear A3462 is continuously rotated after the first displacement member A440 reaches the overhanging position, the displacement caused by the contact between the outer protrusion A3464 and the deformed slide member A455 is the same as the previous two times. , the latter two times are smaller. In other words, it is possible to produce an effect such that the displacement (reciprocating minute displacement) of the first displacement member A440 after reaching the overhanging position is gradually reduced.

From this point of view, the outer diameter protrusion A3464 may be formed so as to become smaller as it goes away from the transmission protrusion A463 side along the circular arc wall portion A464, or may be formed vice versa. As a result, an effect can be executed in which the displacement width of the displacement (reciprocating minute displacement) of the first displacement member A440 changes gradually.

Further, a recessed portion that is recessed radially inward from the arcuate wall portion A464 may be formed at the location where the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is formed. In this case, contrary to the description in the twenty-fourth embodiment, each time the concave portion is arranged to face the protruding plate portion A456a, the deformed slide member A455 moves downward to the left from the state shown in FIG. It can be configured such that it is pulled back by force, the long link A451 rotates accordingly, and the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the right (retracted position side) of the extended position.

Also, the formation position of the outer diameter protrusion A3464 may be varied (shifted) in the first operation units A400, A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D (see FIG. 319). As a result, when synchronizing the operation timings of the driving motors AMT1 configured in the first operation units A400, A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D (the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 start operating at the same timing) case), the timing at which the first displacement member A440 is displaced can be varied in relation to the outer diameter protrusion A3464. That is, in the control mode in which the drive motors AMT1 are excited all at once, the displacement (minor displacement) can be shifted.

For example, the timing at which each first displacement member A440 of each first operation unit A400, A400A, A400B, A400C, A400D (see FIG. 319) reaches the extended position (see FIG. 320) and each second displacement member A490 is extended. While the timing of reaching the extended position (see FIG. 320) is the same, after the first displacement member A440 reaches the extended position, the displacement (micro displacement ) can be adjusted so that it is sequentially generated clockwise from the first operation unit A400 arranged on the lower left side when viewed from the front.

As a result, the line of sight of the player who pays attention to the displacement of the first displacement member A440 can be easily guided in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. In addition, as described above, in conjunction with the displacement of the first displacement member A440, it is possible to change the aspect of the light visually recognized through the long hole A412a (see FIG. 320). The line of sight can be easily guided in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. For example, it is possible to use the order of displacement of the first displacement member A440 to produce an effect suggesting hitting to the right executed by the third symbol display device 81 or the like during a jackpot game (special game).

Next, a twenty-fifth embodiment will be described. In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the first displacement member A440 displaces the rear side of the electrical board A416 has been described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 385(a) is a cross-sectional view of the first operation unit A4400 in the twenty-fifth embodiment taken along the line corresponding to line CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa in FIG. 339(a), and FIG. 385(b) is FIG. 344(a). is a cross-sectional view of the first operating unit A4400 along the line corresponding to the line CCCXLVIb-CCCXLVIb of FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 385(a) and 385(b), the decorative member A4550 includes a plate-shaped decorative plate portion A4551 displaceably disposed on the front side of the front cover A410, and a side surface of the main body portion A411. A pair of guided parts A4552 guided by long holes A4411b drilled along a straight line parallel to the direction A416x, which are integral with a pair of connecting arm parts A4553 formed outside the front cover A410. connected and fixed.

Since the pair of guided portions A4552 are both inserted through the elongated holes A4411b, the guided portions A4552 are allowed to only displace along the elongated holes A4411b. As a result, the posture change of the decorative plate portion A4551 can be suppressed. That is, the displacement of the decorative plate portion A4551 is limited to the sliding displacement in the direction parallel to the direction A416x, which is the extending direction of the long hole A4411b.

The first displacement member A4440 has a pair of projecting portions A4442g projecting from the left and right ends of the interlocking plate portion A4442 toward the front side, and has the same configuration as the first displacement member A440 except for this.

In this embodiment, the guided portion A4552 is formed to protrude inward of the front cover A410 to a position where it can abut on the projecting portion A4442g in the displacement direction. As a result, the decorative member A4550 interlocks with the first displacement member A4440 at the timing when the projecting portion A4442g and the guided portion A4552 abut during the displacement of the first displacement member A4440.

The interlocking plate portion A4442 of the first displacement member A4440 is configured to be displaced with a change in posture during the displacement of the guided plate portion A441. The projecting portion A4442g is arranged so that it can enter. As a result, the decorative member A4550 can be displaced in both forward and backward directions (both left and right directions in FIG. 385(a)) in conjunction with the forward and backward displacement of the first displacement member A4440.

According to this embodiment, since the decorative plate portion A4551 is arranged on the front side of the front cover A410, the timing of hiding the through hole A412 with the decorative plate portion A4551 can be configured. This can physically block the light traveling through the through hole A412.

Also, unlike the first displacing member A4440 which is hidden behind the front cover A410 in the protruding position, the decorative plate part A4551 is always arranged so as to be visible to the player without being hidden by the front cover A410. Therefore, the decorative plate portion A4551 and the opening A442c of the first displacement member A4440 are configured in different shapes for each first operation unit A4400, and are configured to have a series of meanings in the retracted position. In the overhanging position, which is hidden, it is not possible for the player to visually recognize the position, and at the same time, it is difficult to give a sense of unity in the lighting mode.

That is, by configuring the decorative plate portion A4551 of each first operation unit A4440 in the same shape and the drawn figure, the first displacement member A4440 is arranged in the projecting position and is hidden by the front cover A410 (FIG. 385). The sense of unity of each first operation unit A4440 in (b)) can be created by the decorative plate portion A4551.

Further, the light emitting means is preliminarily placed at a similar position on the first displacement member A4440 of the plurality of first operation units A4400 and visible through the through hole A412 in a state where the first displacement member A4440 is arranged at the protruding position. A445b is provided, and in a state where the first displacement member A4440 is hidden as described above, the light emitting means A445b are simultaneously lighted by the plurality of first operation units A4400, thereby providing a sense of unity. can be realized.

In this embodiment, the long hole A4411b is formed using a gap area (area on the retracted position side of the first displacement member A4440) secured by not forming the electrical board A416. That is, the space created by limiting the formation range of the decorative electrical board A416 can be effectively used as a space for arranging the structure for realizing the displacement of the decorative member A4550.

The range in which the decorative member A4550 can be displaced is limited to the formation range of the long hole A4411b. That is, only the space created by limiting the formation range of the electrical board A416 can be a range in which not only the first displacement member A4440 but also the decoration member A4550 can be displaced. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of displaced members in the range where the electrical board A416 is not formed (corresponding range in front view).

Before and after the displacement of the decorative member A4550, the first displacement member A4440 undergoes a change in posture (displacement in the front-rear direction). Therefore, it is possible to secure a large amount of displacement (amount of displacement in the front-rear direction) of the first displacement member A4440 in a range where the electrical board A416 is not formed (corresponding range in front view).

The mode of the decorative member A4550 is not limited at all. For example, it may be formed from a light-transmissive resin material, or may be formed from a resin material with low light-transmittance, and an LED or the like or an electric board may be arranged inside. Also, a through hole may be formed in the decorative member A4550 in the front-rear direction. This makes it possible to visually recognize the light emitted from the electrical board A416 through the through hole.

Next, referring to FIG. 386, the twenty-sixth embodiment will be described. In the twenty-second embodiment, the circular arc wall portion A464 rotates along the displacement trajectory of the transmission projection A463, thereby restricting the displacement of the deformed slide member A455 even after the transmission projection A463 separates from the deformed slide member A455. However, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, a case in which the displacement mode is not limited to rotation will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Figures 386(a) and 386(b) are front views of the displacement device A5000 in the twenty-sixth embodiment. FIG. 386(a) shows a state in which the displacement member A5001 of the displacement device A5000 is being displaced, and FIG. 386(b) shows a state where the displacement member A5001 is arranged at the end of the displacement.

The displacement device A5000 includes a displacement member A5001 configured to be slidable along a straight line and biased leftward by an unillustrated biasing member (coil spring or the like), and a displacement member A5001 displaced along the displacement direction of the displacement member A5001. A transmission member A5002 to which a driving force for driving is transmitted, a supported member A5003 that is rotatably supported at the end of the transmission member A5002, and one side in the rotational direction from both ends of the supported member A5003 A thin portion A5004 extending and connected to each other, a roller member A5005 disposed at the opposite end of the supported member A5003 to the supported end, and a guide groove in which the roller member A5005 is guided. A5006, A5007.

The guide grooves A5006 and A5007 are composed of a first area A5006 extending along the displacement direction of the displacement member A5001 and a second area A5007 deviating from the displacement direction of the displacement member A5001 starting from the end of the first area A5006. Configured. In the present embodiment, the second region A5007 is formed in an arc shape, but it is not limited to an arc shape as long as it deviates from the displacement direction of the displacement member A5001.

The action of the displacement device 5000 will be described. While the roller member A5005 is guided in the first area A5006 of the guide groove, the displacement member A5001 is pushed to the end of the transmission member A5002 (see FIG. 386(a)).

On the other hand, at the stage where the roller member A5005 is guided in the second area A5007 of the guide groove (see FIG. 386(b)), the portion that contacts the displacement member A5001 is switched to the thin portion A5004, and in this state, the displacement member A5001 leftward displacement can be regulated.

Further, the outer shape of the thin portion A5004 is such that the position of the displacement member A5001 remains unchanged in at least one section while the roller member A5005 displaces the second region A5007 of the guide groove (the contact position of the displacement member A5001 is the displacement member A5001 ), the displacement of the displacement member A5001 during the displacement of the transmitted member A5003 can be regulated in the one section described above.

In addition, when the thin portion A5004 is configured to be deformable so as to collapse toward the supported member A5003, the repulsive force of the deformed thin portion A5004 and the urging force applied to the displacement member A5001 are balanced. Displacement member A5001 can be maintained. Thereby, even after the abutment between the supported member A5003 and the displacement member A5001 is released, the displacement of the displacement member A5001 can be suppressed.

Next, the twenty-seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 387 and 388. FIG. In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the wiring HC is loosely wound around the fastening portion A475 and supported by the fastening portion A475 so as not to fall off has been described. A case where the wiring HC is supported by the wiring guide member A6560 so as to be relatively displaceable will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Figures 387(a), 387(b) and 388 are rear views of the rear unit BU in the twenty-seventh embodiment. FIG. 387(a) shows the state where the second displacement member A490 is arranged at the retracted position, FIG. 388 shows the state where the second displacement member A490 is arranged at the extended position, and FIG. A state in which the 2-displacement member A490 is arranged at a position intermediate between the retracted position and the overhang position (about 45-degree rotation position) is illustrated. In addition, in FIGS. 387(a), 387(b) and 388, illustration of the rear plate portion A480 is omitted in order to facilitate understanding of the structure of the rear unit BU.

As shown in FIGS. 387(a), 387(b) and 388, in this embodiment, the fastening portion A475 (see FIG. 356) is not formed, and instead the wire guide member A6560 is connected to the support box portion A6470. It is supported between the rear plate portion A480 (see FIG. 359).

The wiring guide member A6560 is rotatably supported at its upper end by at least one of the support box portion A6470 and the rear plate portion A480. In this embodiment, the rear plate portion A480 is inserted in a state in which the columnar support protrusion A6471d protruding toward the back side of the support box portion A6470 is inserted into the through hole formed in the upper end portion of the wiring guide member A6560. By fixing, the wiring guide member A6560 is pivotally supported by the support protrusion A6471d so as not to fall off.

The wiring guide member A6560 is formed in a long plate shape, and is arranged to face the back surface of the support box portion A6470 with a space therebetween, and the front from the lower end portion of the main body plate portion A6561 and the middle portion of the body plate portion A6561. A plurality of projecting portions A6562 projecting to the side (supporting box portion A6470 side) are provided.

The body plate portion A6561 is arranged close to the rear plate portion A480. As a result, the space on the front side of the main body plate portion A6561 can be increased, so that a large space for arranging the wiring HC can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to avoid applying an extra load to the wiring HC.

In addition, since the main body plate portion A6561 is arranged between the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480, it is possible to prevent the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480 from rubbing against each other. In particular, in this embodiment, the wiring HC is guided toward the rear side (the rear plate portion A480 side) by the ridge portion A491d2 and the binding band KB, and the position therebetween (position sandwiched in the left-right direction). Since the main body plate portion A6561 is arranged at the rear plate portion A480, the main body plate portion A6561 can be arranged between the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480 at a position where the wiring HC is closer to the rear plate portion A480. Friction with the plate portion A480 can be effectively suppressed.

Further, by setting the position where the wiring HC is pressed against the rear plate portion A480 side to overlap with the main body plate portion A6561, the main body plate portion A6561 is displaced in the direction along the displacement in synchronization with the displacement of the wiring HC. It can make it easier for the situation to occur. In this case, the absolute value of the relative displacement between the wiring HC and the main body plate portion A6561 can be reduced, so the occurrence of rubbing can be suppressed. Therefore, the wear of the wiring HC can be prevented, and the durability of the wiring HC can be improved.

A displacement mode of the wiring guide member A6560 will be described. In the state shown in FIG. 387(a), the wiring guide member A6560 is arranged at the limit position on the retracted position side. In the state shown in FIG. 387(b), although the second displacement member A490 starts to displace, the displacement of the board-side connector A493c in the horizontal direction is small and the displacement in the vertical direction is large. It occurs vertically. Therefore, the wiring guide member A6560 maintains the posture shown in FIG. 387(a).

In the state shown in FIG. 387(b), the upward displacement of the wiring HC is defined by the upper projecting portion A6562. That is, the projecting portion A6562 can function as a portion that regulates the vertical displacement limit of the wiring HC.

In the state shown in FIG. 388, since the board-side connector A493c is mainly displaced in the horizontal direction, the wiring HC is also displaced in the horizontal direction, so that the posture of the wiring guide member A6560 changes in a state of being pushed by the wiring HC. In this case, although the wiring HC is wound around the wiring guide member A6560 with a margin, the lower limit of the displacement can be defined by the projecting portion A6562 on the lower side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wiring HC from entering (drooping down) the side of the pinion A517 or the reinforcing arm portion A518 due to excessive momentum.

In this way, by configuring the arrangement of the portion around which the wiring HC is wound (protrusive portion A6562 on the tip side of the main body plate portion A6561) to be variable, when the arrangement of the portion around which the wiring HC is wound is fixed (fastening Part A475, see FIG. 356(a)), the design length of the wiring HC can be shortened.

As a policy of changing the arrangement of the portion where the wiring HC is wound (protruding portion A6562 on the tip side of the main body plate portion A6561), to explain from another viewpoint, the displacement from FIG. 387(a) to FIG. 387(b) is By displacing the board-side connector A493c in a manner approaching the projecting portion A6552 (displacing the wiring HC toward the projecting portion A6552), the portion of the wiring HC wound around the projecting portion A6552 is displaced toward loosening. On the other hand, in the displacement from FIG. 387(b) to FIG. 388, the board-side connector A493c is displaced away from the projecting portion A6552 (the wiring HC is displaced away from the projecting portion A6552), thereby displacing the wiring HC. The portion wound around the protruding portion A6552 of is displaced to the tightening side. In this embodiment, the wiring guide member A6560 is configured to be displaceable when the state changes between FIG. 387(b) and FIG.

For this reason, the wiring guide member A6560 suppresses the displacement of the wiring HC toward the tightened side when the portion of the wiring HC wound around the protruding portion A6552 is displaced toward the tightened side (toward the widening side of the wiring HC). It can be said that it is configured so as to be displaceable to the displaced side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the radius of curvature of the portion of the wiring HC wound around the protruding portion A6552 from becoming excessively small, thereby preventing excessive deformation (bending, chipping, etc.) of the wiring HC. .

According to this embodiment, the wiring guide member A6560 that is not connected to the second displacement member A490 is displaced as the wiring HC is displaced. Therefore, for example, it is a member that interlocks with the wiring guide member A6560, and is arranged so that the player can visually recognize it in any of the states of FIG. 387(a), FIG. By arranging the decorative member on the side of the symbol display device 81 (the right side of FIG. 387(a)), the decorative member displaced by the displacement of the wiring HC can be used to perform an effect.

In this case, as described above, the second displacement member A490 and the wire guide member A6560 are not completely interlocked, and the wire guide member A6560 stops while the second displacement member A490 rotates 45 degrees from the retracted position. , the wiring guide member A6560 is configured to be displaced when the second displacement member A490 rotates further (because the displacement timing is shifted), it is as if the decorative member is the second displacement member A490. It can be visually recognized as if they are displaced independently.

For convenience of explanation, the wire HC is shown to be wound once (the wire passes through the pair of projecting portions A6562 twice), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the wiring HC may pass (not be wound) only once between the plurality of projecting portions A6562.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the tilting device 310 is pushed downward has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the state in which the tilting device 310 hangs downward may be the initial position, and the tilting device 310 may be pushed up. In this case, the force for returning the tilting device 310 to the initial position can be provided by gravity, so the torsion spring 315 can be eliminated.

In the first embodiment, the case where the voice coil motor 352 is driven after the tilting device 310 has moved to the end of the push has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the voice coil motor 352 may be driven in advance when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. In this case, the load required to push the tilting device 310 from the first state can be increased, and the change in the load can be used for effects (for example, a "button that cannot be pushed" effect can be performed. can).

In this case, even if the voice coil motor 352 has moved to the end of the operation (the end of the extension operation), the voice coil motor 352 cannot move because of the dimensional relationship that causes a slight gap between the voice coil motor 352 and the lower frame member 320 . and the lower frame member 320 are preferably arranged. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an impact sound due to the collision with the lower frame member 320 when the voice coil motor 352 operates. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the voice coil motor 352 is protruding in advance, and it is possible to make the player aware that the tilting device 310 is in the state of "the button that cannot be pushed" only after the tilting device 310 is pushed. can.

In the first embodiment, the case where the engaging rib 344c of the disk cam 344 and the connecting pin 344d are fixed relative to each other has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the engagement rib 344c may be configured as a separate member and configured to rotate relative to the disc cam 344 . In this case, for example, it is possible to change the position of the connecting pin 344d in a state where the first projecting portion 344c1 and the engaging portion 346d are in contact with each other. It is possible to change the degree to which the tilting device 310 rises immediately after changing the posture of the rotating claw member 347 . Therefore, it is possible to form more operation states of the tilting operation of the tilting device 310 than in the first embodiment.

In addition, the operating state of the tilting device 310 can be sequentially switched (the rising end can be sequentially switched) by the driving mode in which the disc cam 344 is continuously rotated in the forward direction. As a result, by operating the drive motor 342 in one direction, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the drive motor 342 and perform a complex operation mode in which the tilting device 310 is sequentially switched to a raised position.

In the third embodiment, the operation timing of the voice coil motor 352 that applies the driving force to the tilting device 310 is controlled by the operation speed and the direction of the operation of the tilting device 310. However, this is not necessarily the case. not a thing For example, the driving mode of the drive motor 5411 that drives the weight member 5412 to rotate may be controlled by the operating speed and the operating direction of the tilting device 310 . For example, until the tilting device 310 reaches the end of pushing (during the downward movement), the drive motor 5411 is fixed so that the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is positioned above the rotation axis, and the tilting device 310 pushes. The rotation operation of the drive motor 5411 may be started immediately after reaching the terminal end and immediately before starting to move upward. In this case, the repulsive force pushing back the tilting device 310 can be reduced while the tilting device 310 is repeatedly pushed, and the repulsive force pushing back the tilting device 310 can be increased when the tilting device 310 starts to move upward. .

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the housing member 5430 is fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the holding member 5430 may be fixed to the tilting device 310, and the vibrating device 5400 may be operated inside thereof. When the housing member 5430 is fixed to the tilting device 310, for example, the projecting leg portion 5424 is arranged on the side facing the bottom plate portion 5321, and when the tilting device 310 is moved downward to the pushing end, the projecting leg By setting the portion 5424 to be pressed against the bottom plate portion 5321, the shape of the flexible member 5420 in the vibrating device 5400 can be changed, and whether or not the weight member 5412 can contact the housing member 5430 can be switched. good.

In this case, the flexible member 5420 arranged inside the housing member 5430 moves in conjunction with the tilting operation of the tilting device 310, and at this time, the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes. The degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes in conjunction with the tilting speed when the tilting device 310 is operated. By increasing the amount of deformation of the weight member 5412, a state in which the weight member 5412 abuts against the housing member 5430 can be formed. That is, the player can feel the vibration not only when the tilting device 310 is pushed to the push end, but also when the tilting device 310 is operated at high speed. It is possible to increase the variation of the production of.

For example, when the player operates the tilting device 310, the third symbol display device 81 displays "Press the button." A great chance.", it is possible to provide an effect for the player to specify how to press the button (tilting device 310). In this case, whether or not the player presses the button (tilting device 310) in the specified way of pressing is set as a condition for transmitting the vibration to the player. It is possible to increase the player's willingness to operate and to prevent the operation of the button (tilting device 310) from becoming monotonous.

As for the degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420, the degree of pushing speed of the tilting device 310 may be reversed. That is, when the tilting speed of the tilting device 310 is slow, the amount of deformation of the flexible member 5420 becomes large, and the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 may be formed in a manner in which they can come into contact with each other. In this case, the slow pushing speed of the tilting device 310 can be a condition for the vibration generated by the vibrating device 5400 to be transmitted to the player, and the player is recommended to slow down the pushing speed of the tilting device 310. can do. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from pushing the tilting device 310 by force, and prevent a failure caused by pushing the tilting device 310 by force.

In the above-described fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which the player can feel the vibration generated by the vibrating device 5400 by pushing the tilting device 310, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, while the weight member 5412 of the vibrating device 5400 is arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the housing member 5430 in a state in which the tilting device 310 is not pushed in, the weight member can 5412 may be formed in such a manner as to be arranged so as to be unable to abut on housing member 5430 . In this case, while the tilting device 310 is not operated, the vibration can be transmitted to the player to make the effect lively. Therefore, it is possible to produce a premium feeling that only the player who is playing the machine can perceive the change in the production mode, excluding the surrounding players. can.

As a variation of the effect, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, the weight member 5412 and the accommodation member 5430 are arranged so that they cannot contact each other, and the weight member 5412 and the accommodation member 5430 continue. It is desirable to have both a position in which the weight member 5412 can come into contact with the weight member 5412, and this can be realized by changing the operation mode of the weight member 5412. For example, two different cases can occur due to the difference in the direction of rotation of the weight member 5412 .

In the above-described fifth embodiment, the disc cam 5344 is axially tilted and deformed so that the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346 come into contact with each other to generate a frictional force. do not have. For example, the plate portion of the main body member 341 in which the shaft support hole 341b is formed partially protrudes toward the disk cam 5344, and is configured to abut when the disk cam 5344 is axially tilted and deformed. can be In this case, since the main body member 341 is not a moving part, a greater frictional force is ensured between the disc cam 5344 and the disc cam 5344 than when the disc cam 5344 and the operable releasing member 346 are in contact with each other. be able to. Therefore, the load applied to the arm member 345 connecting the disk cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be sufficiently reduced.

In the above-described eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which both of the board support devices 600 arranged above and below the inner frame 12 are configured to be able to abut against the front frame 14, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, only one of the upper and lower board support devices 600 may be configured to contact the front frame 14 . For example, at the upper position, the portion of the multifunctional cover member 171 that interferes with the board support device 600 may be chamfered so that it does not come into contact with the board support device 600 arranged at the upper position.

In the above-described eighth embodiment, when the game board 13 is attached to the board support device 600, the case in which the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the support bottom portion 12c that supports the lower end surface of the game board 13 is configured as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the front side. It may be configured to be arranged below the upper surface of 621c. In this case, when the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state, the game board 13 is supported by the rear side extension plate 621c, and the game board 13 is supported in the process of fixing the board support device 600 therefrom. 13 can ride on the support bottom 12c. Therefore, the height at which the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state can be made lower than the height at which the game board 13 is fixed. Efficiency can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment described above, the case where the foul ball passage portion 145 is configured as a passage that bends to the left and right has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be bent back and forth, or a combination of bending back and forth and left and right. In this case, it is preferable to form a path that is long in the front-rear direction just behind the ball guide opening 53 because the ball can be discharged smoothly. In addition, by making the path curved back and forth, the range of the foul ball passage portion 145 along the surface of the game board 13 can be narrowed, thereby preventing interference between the launch path and the foul ball passage portion 145. can be made easier.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the light guide member 540 is curved so that the position facing the opening 524 is concave has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the position facing the opening 524 may be convex. In this case, the light reaching the player through the opening 524 is faintly visible. Moreover, the light guide member 540 does not need to be curved vertically, and for example, a curved portion and a straightly extending portion may be mixed in the vertical position.

In the above-described eighth embodiment, the passage forming ribs 467 and 487 form a vertically curved path, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the bending direction of the path may be left or right, or may be a combination of up, down, left and right.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha of the rear assembly 480 contacts the inner surface 461Hi of the front assembly 460 in the thickness direction, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi may be separated from each other by the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction of the rear side wall portion 461H. In this case, since the speaker connection wire 453 can be clamped between the auxiliary protrusion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi, the clamping resistance causes the speaker connection wire 453 to be pulled out of the speaker assembly 450. Therefore, even if a load of 100 psi is applied, it is possible to prevent the speaker connection line 453 from coming off the speaker 451 .

Further, the auxiliary projection 481Ha abuts on the inner side surface 461Hi in the thickness direction of the rear side wall portion 461H within a projection length range corresponding to the recess depth of the wiring passage recess 464, but the projection beyond that contacts the inner side surface 461Hi. In the range of length, a step may be formed in the middle such that the inner side surface 461Hi and the rear side wall portion 461H are separated from each other by the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction. In this case, the range where the rear side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H form a double wall is sufficiently secured, and the speaker connection line 453 can be sandwiched while suppressing sound leakage.

In the eighth embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 constitutes a double bass reflex speaker in which the base end side body portion 461B and the tip end side body portion 461T correspond to the speaker chambers, and the intermediate body portion 461M corresponds to the duct. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by expanding the width of the intermediate main body portion 461M in the front-rear direction to the same extent as that of the proximal side main body portion 461B and the distal side main body portion 461T, the proximal side main body portion 461B, the intermediate main body portion 461M, and the distal side main body portion 461T can be A large speaker room may be configured with

Also, although the base end side main body portion 461B has a larger volume than the distal end side main body portion 461T, the size relationship may be reversed, and the capacities may be the same. The placement of the speaker 451 is not limited to the left and right ends, but may be the center in the left and right direction, or a position between the left and right ends and the center in the left and right direction.

In the eighth embodiment, among the rib portions 467a to 467e and 487a to 487e forming the passage forming ribs 467 and 487, the adjacent rib portions extend in the left-right direction (the base end side body portion 461B and the tip end side body portion 461T). The connecting direction, the direction intersecting with the opening direction of the opening formed by the front side recessed portion 471 and the rear side recessed portion 491) has been described, but the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, adjacent rib portions (for example, rib portion 467d and rib portion 467c) may be configured to overlap each other when viewed in the horizontal direction. In this case, the path inside the speaker assembly 450 can be bent like a maze. It is possible to suppress cheating by making it difficult to cheat by intruding the tip into the game area and prolonging the time required for the cheating. Here, the suppression of fraudulent activity includes suppression of fraudulent activity itself, suppression of gaining fraudulent profit from fraudulent activity (successful fraudulent activity), and the like.

In the eighth embodiment described above, the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880 interlocks with the third gear 810G of the slit member 810 via the intermediate gear 808, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the intermediate gear 808 may be configured to mesh with the second gear 830G of the rotating plate 830 and the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880. In this case, since the rotating plate 830 and the loose fitting device 880 can be interlocked, the loose fitting device 880 rotates not only during the rotating operation of the petal operating device 800 but also during the spreading operation and the gathering operation. can be made As a result, the petals 802 can be slid in the radial direction and the decorative member 884 can be rotated at the same time, thereby improving the presentation effect.

Although the loose fitting device 880 is configured as a device that rotates coaxially with the rotary plate 830, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to expand and contract as the rotating plate 830 rotates, or may rotate on an axis different from the rotation axis of the rotating plate 830 .

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the second effect member 940 operates by transmitting a driving force through the slide plate 930 that slides according to the operation of the drive arm member 910, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not something that can be done. For example, by connecting the upper part of the support base 801 of the petal motion device 800 and the tip of the second effect member 940, the second effect member 940 is operated based on the displacement of the petal motion device 800. can be In this case, the slide plate 930 can be omitted.

In the above eighth embodiment, when the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the case where the operation portion back surface member 155 and the game board 13 are separated above the opening/closing regulation portion 159 will be described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the board surface supporting device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the operation part back member 155 and the game board 13 are configured to contact each other in the front-rear direction above the opening/closing regulation part 159. Also good. In this case, even if the lower board surface support device 600 is in a fixed state, if the upper board surface support device 600 is not in a fixed state, the upper end of the game board 13 is displaced to the front side (game As the right side of the board 13 tilts toward the front side, the portion of the game board 13 facing the operation section back member 155 is also displaced toward the front side, causing the operation section back member 155 and the game board 13 to interfere with each other. be able to. This prevents the front frame 14 from being closed with respect to the inner frame 12 .

In this case, when the game board 13 is installed on the inner frame 12 and the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is fixed, the board surface support device arranged on the upper side of the inner frame 12 Whether or not 600 is in a fixed state is determined by the relationship between the operation part back member 155 arranged opposite to the board surface support device 600 on the lower side and the game board 13, and the board surface arranged on the upper side of the inner frame 12 is determined. When the support device 600 is not in a fixed state, the closing of the front frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 12 can be restricted. As a result, the function of determining the state of the board support device 600 installed on the upper side of the inner frame 12 can be removed from the multifunctional cover member 171, so that the degree of freedom in designing the multifunctional cover member 171 can be improved. can. For example, the multifunctional cover member 171 may be recessed (chamfered) to a position where it does not come into contact with the board support device 600 regardless of the state of the board support device 600 . In this case, the multifunctional cover member 171 made of synthetic resin can be less likely to be damaged by colliding with the board support device 600 made of metal. can be used for a long time in other applications (for example, as a wiring cover).

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the right panel unit 500 from which the light irradiated to the end surface of the light guide member 540 is emitted from both surfaces of the light guide member 540 is arranged at the right end and front side of the front frame 14 will be described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be arranged inside the center frame 86 . In this case, for example, a state in which one surface of the right panel unit 500 is arranged on the front side and a case in which the other surface is arranged on the front side can be switched (for example, parallel to the longitudinal direction of the support plate portion 510). By configuring the right panel unit 500 to rotate about an axis, it is possible to switch the mode of the light irradiated to the center frame 86 . In addition, by switching the mode of the light irradiated to the center frame 86 and the correspondence with the moving accessory projecting inside the center frame 86, it is possible to diversify the effects.

That is, for example, among the plurality of openings 524, only the LEDs 512a at the upper and lower positions corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 are made to emit light, and the right panel unit 500 is arranged such that one surface faces the front side and the other surface Consider switching between the case of being arranged on the front side and the case of being arranged on the front side. When the surface on the side of the inner cover member 520 faces the side of the moving accessory, the moving accessory arranged opposite to the portion corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 (the portion near the end) emits light, while the outer cover member When the surface on the side of 560 faces the side of the moving object, the moving objects arranged opposite to each other over a wide area of the opening 565 (in a wide range compared to the opening 524 at the top) emit light. Therefore, by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500 without switching the LED 512a to emit light, it is possible to switch the light emitting position of the moving accessory.

In this case, for example, by moving the moving accessory in time with the timing of the change in the light-emitting part, it is possible to improve the presentation effect. For example, at the timing when the surface on the side of the inner cover member 520 faces the moving accessory, the surface on the side of the outer cover member 560 is reduced and changed so as to fit in the location corresponding to the uppermost opening 524, while the surface on the side of the outer cover member 560 faces the moving accessory. At the timing of turning the right panel unit 500, the moving accessory may be configured to expand and contract so as to expand (extend) in the longitudinal direction of the right panel unit 500. As a result, it is possible to change the position to emit light in accordance with the action of the moving accessory by switching the attitude of the right panel unit 500 while eliminating the need to switch the LED 512a that controls light emission.

In addition, in the right panel unit 500, the light emitted from the inner cover member 520 side is condensed (brightness increases, the amount of light increases, and the light emitted from the outer cover member 560 side becomes clear). Diffused (lower brightness, lower light intensity, faint emission). Therefore, by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500, it is possible to change the light emitting mode of the light emitting target (liquid crystal or moving accessory).

Furthermore, the right panel unit 500 is changed so that the front side end 551a of the outer lens member 550 faces the moving object or the liquid crystal (for example, when the right panel unit 500 is arranged on the front side of the moving object or the liquid crystal). , the front side end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 is changed to the posture that is arranged on the back side of the support plate portion 510), so that beam-like (narrow) light is emitted to the moving object and the liquid crystal. While irradiating, light can be emitted over a wide range in a direction perpendicular to the direction toward the moving object or liquid crystal. As a result, it is possible to light up a wide range of positions away from the moving role and the liquid crystal while only the details of the moving role and the liquid crystal are illuminated.

In the ninth and tenth embodiments described above, the sheet metal members 9150 and 10150 arranged in the foul ball passage portions 9145 and 10145 cut the thread Y8, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sheet metal member is partially broken by the load from the thread Y8, and the broken portion is so fragile that it falls, and the detection sensor is arranged at a position through which the broken portion falls. Also good. In this case, due to the detection of the sheet metal member by the detection sensor, an alarm is issued and the launch of the ball is forcibly stopped. It is possible to minimize the profit (loss suffered by the gaming machine hall) obtained by a person who commits fraudulent acts.

In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the inclined surface 2803T is formed as an inclined surface has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, various configurations that improve frictional force may be added. For example, the frictional force may be improved by attaching a rubber sheet to the inclined surface 2803T, or by arranging a spike-shaped hard member (a member harder than the material of the slit member 810). The movement resistance may be improved by biting into the slit member 810 .

Further, for example, when the slide member 2820 is inclined with respect to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814, the inclined surface 2803T can be inserted into the walls of the both side slits 815 arranged to face the inclined surface 2803T. may be formed. In this case, it is possible to improve the motion resistance by inserting the inclined surface 2803T into the recessed portion.

In the sixteenth embodiment described above, by changing the shape of the recessed portion 2543 formed in each region of the light guide member 2540, the direction in which light travels can be changed to the direction in which the light is collected or the direction in which the light is spread. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, upward concave portions 2543b and 2543e may be formed in all of the regions CCVIb to CCVIe. In this case, the traveling direction of the light emitted from both surfaces of the light guide member 2540 is inclined upward in all of the areas CCVIb to CCVIe. Towards, the light can be made easier to travel. As a result, the effect of attracting customers of the pachinko machine 8010 can be improved.

Further, for example, downward concave portions 2543c are formed in the regions CCVIc and CCVIe, which are regions for emitting light to the inner lens member 530, and upward concave portions 2543b are formed in regions CCVIb and CCVId, which are regions for emitting light to the outer lens member 550. may be formed. In this case, the light that travels in the opposite direction to the player playing pachinko 8010, and the light that is emitted to the outer lens member 550 is inclined upward. While it is possible to make it easier for the light to travel toward the height of the line of sight of the person walking on the floor, the light that travels toward the player side and is emitted to the inner lens member 530 is in a downwardly inclined direction. Therefore, for example, it is possible to illuminate the ball stored in the upper plate 17 with light to make the ball look gorgeous. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the players playing the game while improving the effect of attracting customers of the pachinko machine 8010 .

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the protruding shaped portion 6413 and the recessed shaped portion 6414 are formed near the left-right center has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the position may be changed according to the arrangement of the operation device 10300. FIG.

Moreover, both the one formed corresponding to the arrangement of the operation device 10300 and the one formed near the left-right center may be provided. That is, the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 for coping with the operation load of the operation device 10300, and the protruding shape portion for coping with the problems of the front frame 10014 alone (such as ease of holding and durability). 6413 and recessed shape portion 6414 may be provided separately.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the operation device 10300 configured to be operable by the player is disposed above the projecting shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 so as to be assembled (replaceable). It is not limited to this. That is, anything can be used as long as it can be assembled (exchanged). For example, it may be a sound device such as a speaker box that outputs sound, a vibrating device that is configured to be unoperable by the player and performs vibration effects, an illumination board that performs light emission effects, or a board box. It may be something that is not directly intended to be visually recognized by the player.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are formed in a groove shape extending in the front-rear direction has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, triangular or circular recesses and protrusions may be formed when viewed from above. In this case, a plurality of concave portions and convex portions may be formed, and the size of each concave portion and convex portion is designed based on the amount of the operation load applied to the operation device 10300 and the frequency with which the load is applied. can be

Moreover, even if it has the same groove shape, a plurality of grooves may be formed. In this case, by forming a large number of grooves while narrowing the width of the grooves, the effect of reducing the contact area with the operation device 10300 is the same as in the case where one wide groove is formed. can be done. When forming a plurality of grooves, each groove does not necessarily have to extend in the front-rear direction, and may be formed radially when viewed from above, for example.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the projecting portion 6413 projects below the outer shape of the front frame 10014 so that it can be used as a finger hook when carrying the front frame 10014. However, this is not necessarily the case. It is not something that can be done. For example, the gap between the lower surface of the plate-like support portion 6426 and the recessed shape portion 6414 may be formed vertically longer than the finger of the operator who carries the front frame 10014 . In this case, it is possible to insert a finger into the gap between the lower surface of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the recessed portion 6414 (it can be used as a finger hook portion), so that the front frame 10014 can be easily carried. .

In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the case where the resin member 6427 is arranged below the operation device 10300 to soften the transmission of the load of the operation device 10300 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be a member (coil spring, torsion spring, etc.) that produces an elastic biasing force, or a device for damping vibration, such as a damper.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to the upper tray 17 and the lower tray unit 6400 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be connected to the upper tray 17 and the lower tray unit 6400 via a floating mechanism. In this case, even if the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 lack softness and flexibility, it is possible to suppress transmission of the load generated in the operation device 10300 to the upper tray 17 and the lower tray unit 6400 .

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the lever member 10340 is rotationally driven around the lever support shaft 10331d1 by the drive motor has been described, but various modes of the drive motor are exemplified. For example, the load may be transmitted from the rotary gear rotated by the drive motor to the lever member 10340 by load transmission of a simple gear mechanism, or a mechanism that does not rely on the gear mechanism (for example, a rotating cam) may be interposed in the transmission path. The load may be transmitted to the lever member 10340, or the load may be transmitted to the lever member 10340 via the movable clutch 343c and the transmission gear 343b so that it can idle when an overload occurs.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed in a direction perpendicular to the plane on which the load is applied during operation of the operation device 10300 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, if there is an operation part that does not operate on the plane (for example, if there is an operation part that pushes in the left and right diagonal directions), the balance (average) of the operation direction of each operation part is The detected direction (for example, an intermediate angle direction) may be set as the fastening direction, or the fastening direction may be set for the operation portion where the operation instruction is frequently given (ignoring the operation portion where the operation instruction is rare). You can set the direction. As a result, it is possible to suppress the loosening of the fastening due to the load during operation.

In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the case where the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 are joined by fastening has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, it may be combined with an adhesive material, or may be combined by fitting by conforming shapes.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the direction of high rigidity of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 (vertical direction) is aligned with the vibration direction of the vibration device 10366 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, the vibrating direction of the vibrating device 10366 may be the horizontal direction. In this case, the shape of the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 can be easily changed due to the vibration of the vibrating device 10366. Therefore, it is possible to dynamically change the design around the operation device 10300 when the vibration is generated. can. Moreover, the mode of the vibrating device 10366 is not limited at all. For example, it may be a direct acting type represented by a voice coil motor or the like, a rotary type represented by a vibrator or the like, or a combination thereof.

Further, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be made of transparent resin material instead of opaque resin. In this case, by irradiating the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 with the light emitted from a predetermined irradiation device, the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10321 and the front right cover 10321 and the front right cover 10321 are illuminated as the shapes of the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 change. It is possible to produce an effect such that the appearance of light visually recognized through the cover 10322 is changed.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the right and left muscle portions D24a are formed with different inclinations to easily suppress bending regardless of the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, by setting the inclination angles of the left and right muscle portions D24a to be the same regardless of the position, there is a difference in the degree of rigidity between the direction in which the rigidity is improved by the left and right muscle portions D24a and the direction in which the rigidity is weakened. can make a big difference.

In this case, for example, by setting the formation direction of the left and right muscle portions D24a along the direction Y17a, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10321 and right front cover 10321 and right front cover 10321 and right front cover 10321 and right front cover 10321 and right front cover 10321 and right front cover 10321 and right front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10321 and the front right cover 10321 and 10321 and 10321 and 10321 and 10321 and 10321 and 10321 and 10321 and 10321 and the front right cover 100, and 10321 and 103210. While suppressing the deflection of the cover 10322, the deflection of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 due to the vibration generated by the vibration device 10366 when the swing operation member 10310 is arranged in the downward position is increased. be able to. That is, by changing the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310, the degree of bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 caused by the vibration of the vibration device 10366 can be varied.

Conversely, the formation direction of the left and right muscle portions D24a may be the direction along the direction Y17b. In this case, while suppressing the deflection of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 due to the vibration generated by the vibration device 10366 when the swing operation member 10310 is arranged in the downward position, the swing operation member The bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 due to the vibration generated by the vibrating device 10366 when 10310 is arranged in the upward position can be increased. That is, by changing the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310, the degree of bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 caused by the vibration of the vibration device 10366 can be varied.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 can be removed from the inner case member 10330 and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily attached has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not something that can be done. For example, the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 may be integrally formed with the inner case member 10330, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be assembled thereon. In this case, when assembled to the inner case member 10330, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily assembled by bending, and after the subsequent assembly to the front frame 10014, the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is suppressed. By doing so, the displacement suppressing effect due to the interference between the projecting interference portion 6805a and the inner edge portion Rm1 can be effective.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the plate-like projecting portion 6453R of the V-shaped design member 6450 abuts on the plate-like support portion 6426 above and below has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a fastening portion into which a fastening screw is screwed in the front-rear direction is formed at the position of the plate-like projecting portion 6453R, and the fastening screw is a plate extending above the plate-like support portion 6426 corresponding to the fastening portion. You may comprise so that it may be inserted in the insertion hole formed in a part. In this case, not only when the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is displaced upward, but also when displaced downward, the load that is the basis of the displacement can be transmitted to the V-shaped design member 6450, and the load can be distributed.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the V-shaped design member 6450 is fitted so that the dimension of the gap between the body portion 6451 and the upper facing portions 6455b, 6456b corresponds to the thickness dimension of the covers 10321, 10322 to be inserted. Although the case where it is formed with a possible thickness (dimensional relationship with almost no gap) has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the thickness dimension of the covers 10321 and 10322 to be inserted may be smaller than the dimension of the gap (they may be configured so that the gap between the members is formed during assembly). In this case, when the displacement of the covers 10321 and 10322 (the displacement of the operation device 10300) is smaller than the gap between the members, the covers 10321 and 10322 and the V-shaped design member 6450 are prevented from coming into contact (collision). Therefore, generation of powder (dust) can be suppressed.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the flange portion 6582 is formed in the shape of a flat plate has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flange portion 6582 has a hook-shaped cross-sectional shape that protrudes downward from the front side edge, and the opposing plate portion 6561 of the partition member 6560 is formed in a shape that meshes with that shape so that they fit together during assembly. You can do it. In this case, it is possible to prevent the partitioning member 6560 from moving away from the rear support member 6580 toward the front side when the partitioning member 6560 is positioned at the assembled position.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the opposite side surfaces of the enlarged hole 6562a are inclined with respect to the front-rear direction in a cross-sectional view. It is not something that can be done. For example, only one of the side surfaces may be inclined, or both side surfaces may be curved.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the player who views the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a of the transparent covering member 6548 made of a colorless and transparent resin material can see the milky-white member 6541 and the partitioning member 6560 arranged behind it. Although the case where the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a and the lower edge of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 are configured to be easily visually recognized as a series of regions has been described, this is not necessarily the case. It is not something that can be done. For example, by forming the transparent covering member 6548 by two-color molding, the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a may be formed milky white in advance.

In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the plate guide unit 6550 is fastened with a fastening screw whose fastening direction is inclined downward toward the front side, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be fastened with a fastening screw whose fastening direction is inclined downward toward the rear side. This fastening direction can be arbitrarily set according to the arrangement space required by the parts arranged near the fastening position and the selection of the side on which displacement is desired to be suppressed.

In the seventeenth embodiment described above, a configuration in which a compressive force is generated between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 due to deformation of the upper lid member 6510 has been described, but the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the partition member 6560 may be configured to be driven such that its front-to-rear width can be changed so that the degree of compressive force that can be generated as the upper lid member 6510 deforms can be changed.

That is, if the partition member 6560 is driven to shorten the front-to-rear width by displacing the back side edge of the partition member 6560 toward the front side, the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 can be aligned even if the upper lid member 6510 is deformed. A gap can still occur between them, and compressive forces can be less likely to occur. Since the compressive force is less likely to be generated, the extent to which the electrical board 6570 is held can be reduced, so that the degree of displacement of the electrical board 6570 can be changed in a situation where the upper cover member 6510 is similarly deformed.

In other words, by controlling the front-to-rear width of the partition member 6560, the behavior of the decorative substrate 6570 can be changed in a situation where the upper lid member 6510 may be deformed. It is possible to change the appearance of the emitted light.

Note that the front-to-rear width of the partition member 6560 is normally shortened (a space is left between the partition member 6560 and the rear surface support member 6580), and the front-to-rear width is widened by drive control so that the partition member 6560 and the rear surface support It may be configured to change the situation in which a compressive force can be generated between the member 6580 and the member 6580 .

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 that sandwich and support the electrical board 6570 are stacked on the front side of the front frame 10014 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. do not have. For example, the electrical board 6570 may be arranged below the back support member 6580, the electrical board 6570 may be fastened and fixed to the partition member 6560 (a member away from the acoustic device 6610), or the electrical board 6570 may The substrate 6570 may be inserted (fixed) into the light receiving projecting portion 6521b of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 that is inserted into the partitioning member 6560 . In either case, transmission of vibration from the acoustic device 6610 to the electrical board 6570 can be suppressed.

Further, the rear support member 6580 (and the acoustic device 6610) is fixed to the outer frame 11 or the inner frame 12 arranged on the rear side of the front frame 10014, while the partition member 6560 is fixed to the front frame 10014. You can do it. In this case, by opening the front frame 10014, the rear support member 6580 and the partition member 6560 can be separated from each other. It is possible to easily replace the electric decoration board 6570 that is installed or correct the misalignment.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the plate portion of the acoustic device 6610 is arranged opposite to the head of the fastening screw, and when the fastening screw is loosened, vibration is transmitted and abnormal noise is generated. Although the case where it is possible to grasp is described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when light travels near the head of a fastening screw and the fastening screw loosens, the shadow of the fastening screw may be visible from the front side. In this case, by checking the presence or absence of shadows, it is possible to grasp the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw. can be made easier.

In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the case where the fastening direction of the fastening screw is inclined vertically with respect to the front-rear direction has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the direction may be tilted left and right with respect to the front-rear direction, or there may be portions tilted vertically or horizontally.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the long ribs 6734 and the fins 6735 have been described as extending linearly when viewed from the front, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed in a curved shape, or may be formed in a mesh shape or a lattice shape.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the side surfaces of the long rib 6734 are made smooth to suppress the diffusion of light from the side surfaces has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, light leakage from the side surface may be prevented by attaching a light shielding tape to the side surface of the long rib 6734 . In this case, it is possible to easily suppress the decrease in the energy of light traveling to the fins 6735 . Also, a light shielding tape may be attached to the side surface of the fin 6735 . In this case, if the entire side surface is covered, the light at the edge of the front side can be emphasized, and if part of the side surface is covered (for example, by using light-shielding tape with polka-dot holes), Since the light can be visually recognized by the player as light conforming to the shape of the light shielding tape, it is possible to improve the presentation effect of the light traveling through the side surfaces of the fins 6735 .

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the long rib 6734 does not extend to the back side of the horizontal effect device 6700 on the left side of the pachinko machine 10010 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the long rib 6734 extends toward the back side, but the left and right ends may be formed so as not to be connected to the inner extending portion 6732 . In this case also, the intensity of light near the glass unit 16 can be suppressed.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the light traveling along the longitudinal direction of the long rib 6734 is emitted from the front-side end portion of the fin 6735 to improve the effect of the light in the front view of the fin 6735 Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a shape (notch (cut) or the like) for emitting at least part of the light traveling through the fin 6735 from the side surface of the fin 6735 in the middle of the front-rear width of the fin 6735 may be formed.

For example, as shown in this embodiment, the fins 6735 are tilted so that the thickness of the fins 6735 gradually decreases toward the front side, so that the light reaches the front ends of the fins 6735. The fin 6735 may be configured so that the light can be easily emitted from the side surface of the fin 6735 by making it easy to repeatedly reach the side surface.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the number of fastening positions of the curved plate member 6750 to the base member 6710 is reduced has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be fixed by fitting or meshing of claws based on the shape relationship. In this case, since the fastening screw can be eliminated, it is possible to prevent the shadow of the fastening screw from degrading the lighting effect.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the electrical board 18830 slides under the influence of the vibration of the operation device 10300 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a speaker box similar to the acoustic device 6610 may be arranged close to the back side of the connecting base member 18810, and the electrical board 18830 may be slid even by the vibration of this speaker box. In this case, since the vibration direction of the operation device 10300 (the direction along the direction Y17a) is different from the vibration direction of the speaker box (generally the front-rear direction), the displacement mode of the electrical board 18830 can be complicated.

In addition, by generating sound with a frequency outside the audible sound range from the speaker, a silent effect is executed in which the illumination board 18830 can be slid while maintaining a state in which the player cannot hear the sound. can do. At this time, the vibration of the illumination board 18830 is transmitted to the operation device 10300, so that the player who touches the operation device 10300 can grasp the vibration derived from the sound output from the speaker. As a result, for example, by controlling the silent effect to be executed when a change in circumstances that is advantageous to the player occurs, it is possible to increase the player's interest in touching the operation device 10300 .

In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the electrical board 18830 is floatably (slidably) supported near the operation device 10300 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the electric decoration board 6570 of the presentation device 6500 may be supported so as to be floating. In this case, it may be fixed to the front frame 10014 and floatably supported by a rod member extending from the gap between the pair of left and right acoustic devices 6610 to the front side, or a rod member fixed to the wall of the acoustic device 6610. may be floatably supported. Moreover, the sliding direction is not limited to the vertical direction, and may be horizontal or oblique.

In the nineteenth embodiment, the case where the reference line X19 is along the vibration direction Y17a has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when a plurality of vibration directions Y17a are set, the reference line X19 may be arranged along any one of the vibration directions Y17a, or between the plurality of vibration directions Y17a (for example, an intermediate line). angle)) may be configured so that the reference line X19 is along the direction.

Further, the direction of the reference line X19 may be set in consideration of the frequency of occurrence of vibration and the frequency of operation of the lens member 10317. FIG. For example, when a plurality of vibration directions Y17a and operation directions are set in the first direction and other directions, the frequency of occurrence of vibration and operation in the first direction is extremely high, and vibration in the other directions is extremely high. When the operation frequency is low, by setting the reference line X19 along the first direction, it is possible to suppress the loosening of the fastening screw that fastens and fixes the insertion hole 19321a and the fastening portion 19322a. .

In the twenty-first embodiment, a case has been described in which the vibration of the vibrating device 21500 is difficult to be transmitted to the operation device 10300 side, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operation device 10300 may be configured to transmit vibration to the same extent as the vibration transmitted to the main body portion 6411 of the covering base member 21410 . In this case, the vibrating device 21500 can vibrate a plurality of objects.

In the twenty-first embodiment, a case has been described in which the front portion of the projecting portion De3 against which the ridge portion 21522 is pressed due to the vibration of the vibrating device 21500 is formed in a plane perpendicular to the front-rear direction, but this is not necessarily the case. not a thing For example, the front portion of the protruding portion De3 may be formed as a flat surface that is vertically inclined with respect to the front-rear direction. In this case, the direction of the load applied from the overhang De3 to the vibrating device 21500 (normal direction of the front surface of the overhanging portion De3) is inclined with respect to the front-rear direction. A component in a direction intersecting the front-rear direction (vertical direction) can be added to the displacement of time (especially the displacement toward the front side). As a result, the vibration motor 21510 of the vibration device 21500 can be displaced in the vertical direction. 21534 (non-guiding direction intersecting with the guiding direction of 21534) can be configured, and the vibration mode can be complicated.

In the twenty-first embodiment, the protrusion 21534 of the covering cover member 21530 is formed along the longitudinal direction, which is the direction in which the vibration motor 21510 vibrates (the direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the eccentric weight 21512). Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the ridge 21534 may be formed along a direction that is inclined with respect to the front-rear direction, along a curved line, or along a line of arbitrary shape. . Thus, the direction in which the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 are guided by the protrusion 21534 when the vibrating device 21500 vibrates can be arbitrarily set.

In the twenty-first embodiment, the fastening portion 21457 of the V-shaped design member 21450 is fastened together through the support hole 21428 of the lower plate forming member 21420, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the length of the fastening portion 21457 may be slightly increased so that the fastening force is not applied to the support hole 21428 . This makes it difficult for the vibration of the vibrating device 21500 to be transmitted to the lower plate forming member 21420 through the plate portion having the support hole 21428, and the balls stored in the lower plate 50 vibrate as the vibrating device 21500 vibrates. Therefore, it is possible to execute the vibration presentation by the vibration device 21500 without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the formation of the support plate portion A313 is omitted on the side of the rear case A310 on which the notch portion A312a is formed, and the end face is arranged opposite to the base plate A60 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, the formation of the support plate portion A313 may be maintained on the side where the notch portion A312a is formed. In this case, while maintaining the rigidity in the assembled state of the base plate A60 and the rear case A310, it is possible to maintain the effect that the boundary of the light seen through the base plate A60 of the game board A13 can be obscured. can.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the rear case A310 is formed in a box shape with an opening on the front side, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rear case A310 may be composed of a plurality of members (as an assembly of divided members), or the outer edge may be composed of a columnar portion extending from the bottom of the back side to the front side (the wall portion is not formed). ) may be configured as follows. In this case, rigidity can be ensured by fastening and fixing the back case A310 to the third pattern display device 81 and other movable units (the first operation unit A400 and the second operation unit A700).

In the 22nd embodiment, the case where the portion adjacent to the game board A13 on the right side is formed not as a surface but as a line has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the linear portion may be formed on the left side. Further, when the linear portions are formed on both the left and right sides, the formation ratio (ratio) of one of the left and right may be made lower than that of the other.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the metal plate member 75 is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the game board A13 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the metal plate may be arranged on the inner side (game area side) of the outer edge member A73. In this case, by forming the metal plate along the curved shape on the inner side of the outer edge member A73, the function of improving the rigidity of the game board A13 and the operation unit A300 with respect to the metal plate and the game area are increased. A function to guide the falling ball can be given. Alternatively, a gap may be provided inside the outer edge member A73, and a metal member may be arranged in the gap.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the front protrusion A86f that can contact the game ball is projected from the back side of the game area toward the front side has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, a flange portion extending from the front end portion of the right flow path forming wall portion A86d of the center frame A86 to the game area side may be provided, and a ridge portion may protrude from the rear surface of the flange portion toward the rear surface side. In this case, even when the game ball flows down the position near the front side of the game area, the protrusion can be brought into contact with the game ball, so that the game ball can be efficiently decelerated.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the front surface of the electrical board A416 and the protruding piece A417i do not abut against each other when the electrical board A416 is assembled to the board fixing plate A417 is explained. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the front surface of the electrical board A416 and the projecting piece A417i may be in contact with each other, or another member (for example, a flexible rubber-like member) may be provided between the front surface of the electrical board A416 and the projecting piece A417i. ) may be interposed so that the load can be transmitted from the projecting piece A417i to the electrical board A416. As a result, the electrical board A416 can be stably supported.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the second area AC2 of the area of the diffusion plate A415 of the first operation unit A400 is arranged closer to the third pattern display device 81 side, and the second areas of the plurality of first operation units A400 are arranged. Although the AC2 is configured to surround the third pattern display device 81 from above, the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second area AC2 may be configured to be scattered around the third pattern display device 81, or may be configured to be displaceable so that the second area AC2 reaches the front and rear of the third pattern display device 81. may be arranged, and may be configured in an arbitrary arrangement.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the electrical board A445 is included in the first displacement member A440 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an illumination board and a diffusion plate on which light-emitting means such as LEDs that irradiate light to the front side are arranged may be arranged in the guide plate portion A430 and the support plate portion A420. Thus, the arrangement of the first displacement member A440 can be configured to hide the light emitting means from the player.

Also, the first displacement member A440 may be configured to move on the front side of the electrical board A416 and the diffusion plate A415. Even with such a configuration, similar effects can be obtained. In this case, the first displacement member A440 may be configured so that the electrical board A445 is not provided. For example, one or more through-holes may be formed in the thickness direction of the first displacement member A440 so that light can pass through the through-holes. According to this, since the position of the through-hole changes due to the different arrangement of the first displacement member A440, it is possible to change the position where the light irradiated to the rear side of the first displacement member A440 leaks.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the first displacement member A440 displaces one side of the electrical board A416 or the diffusion plate A415 (does not cut through the electrical board A416 when viewed from the front) has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. not a thing For example, it may be displaced so as to pass through (cut through) the illumination board A416 or the diffusion plate A415 in a front view. Further, it is not necessary for the entire first displacement member A440 to enter the rear side of the diffuser plate A415 when viewed from the front, and a part of the first displacement member A440 is configured so as not to reach the rear side of the diffuser plate A415 when viewed from the front. can be

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the electrical board A445 is included in the first displacement member A440 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the electrical board A445 may not be arranged on the first displacement member A440. In this case, by arranging the electrical board on the back side of the first displacement member A440 and irradiating light on the front side, the ventilation opening A443c of the rear lid portion A443 and the opening A442c of the interlocking plate portion A442 The light passing through can be configured to be visible to the player.

In the twenty-second embodiment, even after the transmission protrusion A463 of the pin-equipped gear A462 is separated from the deformed slide member A455, the displacement of the deformed slide member A455 is restricted by the arc wall portion A464 of the pin-equipped gear A462. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the arcuate wall portion A464 is not formed, as the transmission protrusion A463 is arranged at a position away from the deformed slide member A455, the pinned gear A462 moves to the position where the arcuate wall portion A464 should have been arranged. A shutter member configured as a separate member may be configured to protrude, and the displacement of the odd-shaped slide member A455 may be restricted by coming into contact with the shutter member.

In the twenty-second embodiment, a case has been described in which the plurality of guided protruding portions A455c arranged on the odd-shaped slide member A455 are displaced in the direction (right and left) crossing the direction A416x, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, a plurality of guided projecting portions A455c may be arranged on the same straight line parallel to the direction A416x, or may be shifted in a direction intersecting the direction A416x. In either case, the posture of the deformed slide member A455 can be stabilized.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 are displaced at different timings has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the length of the arcuate wall portion A464 of the pinned gear A462 from the transmission protrusion A463 is shortened (at the same time, the projecting plate portion A456a is lengthened so as not to hinder contact with the arcuate wall portion A464), By reducing the angular width in which the deformed slide member A455 is restricted by the circular arc wall portion A464, the first displacement member A440 is stretched in synchronism with the displacement of the second displacement member A490 from the retracted position toward the extended position. It can be displaced from the extended position to the retracted position side. At this time, by adjusting the length of the arc wall portion A464 so that the displacement of the first displacement member A440 is contained in the section where the posture of the first displacement member A440 is maintained, the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member Interference with A490 can be avoided.

Also, in this case, after the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the retracted position, does it abut on the transmission projection A463, or does it abut on the end of the circular arc wall portion A464 opposite to the transmission projection A463? depends on the operating mode of the pinned gear A462, that is, the driving mode of the drive motor AMT1. That is, by controlling the driving speed of the drive motor AMT1 (either constant speed or variable speed) and the stop timing to be different, the stop position after the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the retracted position side can be changed to The deformed slide member A455 (deformed transmitted portion A456) can be different depending on whether the deformed slide member A455 abuts on the arcuate wall portion A464 or the transmitting protrusion A463.

Here, it is assumed that the deformed slide member A455 (deformed transmitted portion A456) that transmits the driving force to the first displacement member A440 contacts at least one of the arcuate wall portion A464 and the transmission protrusion A463. It is not limited to this. For example, when the arcuate wall portion A464 and the transmission protrusion A463 are arranged in a predetermined manner, a fixed wall portion is formed that protrudes toward the deformed slide member A455 (deformed transmitted portion A456) along the direction A416x from both of them. It's okay to be there. In this case, the stop position after the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the retracted position is changed when the deformed slide member A455 (deformed transmitted portion A456) abuts on the arc wall portion A464 and when it abuts on the transmission protrusion A463. It can be made different depending on the case and the case of abutting on the fixed wall portion.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the wiring HC is arranged on the outer side of the rotating shaft of the second displacement member A490, but the arrangement is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotating shaft of the reinforcing arm A518 may be formed in a tubular shape, and the wiring HC may pass through the tubular interior to reach the board-side connector A493c. In this case, the displacement of the second displacement member A490 can prevent the portion of the wiring HC arranged on the opposite side of the second displacement member A490 from being displaced (pulled) via the tube.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the wiring HC is wound around the fixed fastening portion A475, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a flexible member having the same shape as the fastening portion A475 and made of a flexible material may be fixed to the front side of the rear plate portion A480, and the wiring HC may be wound around the flexible member. Also, the number of flexible members need not be one, and may be plural. In this case, even if the wiring HC is excessively pulled and comes into contact with the flexible member, the deformation of the flexible member can alleviate the load on the wiring HC.

Further, the wire HC may be supported by a mere columnar portion (portion not used for fastening) instead of the fastening portion A475. In this case, there may be a gap (a gap narrower than the width of the wiring HC) between the columnar portion and the rear plate portion A480. Alternatively, a binding band that is loosely wound around a fixed portion separately formed on the main body box portion A471, the rear plate portion A480, the wiring guide member A6560, or the like may be used. In this case, the displacement of the wire HC can be absorbed by the displacement allowed for the binding band, so the load applied to the wire HC can be reduced.

Further, the fastening portion A475 may not be fixed, but may be configured to be displaceable along the displacement direction of the wiring HC. In this case, the direction of displacement is not limited to this, and various modes are exemplified.

Further, the displacement of the fastening portion A475 may occur in synchronization with the displacement of the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490. For example, by displacing the second displacement member A490 in the opposite direction as it approaches the overhang position, it is possible to prevent the wiring HC from coming into the eyes of the player.

As for the method of displacing the fastening portion A475, the fastening portion A475 may be displaceably supported by the long hole, or the fastening portion A475 may be configured to tilt with the main body box portion A471 side as a fulcrum. In this case, it is preferable that the rear plate portion A480 is formed with a guide groove, a notch, or an interlocking portion so as to allow the displacement of the fastening portion A475 while maintaining the coupled state with the fastening portion A475.

Also, although the fastening portion A475 has been described as a portion around which the wiring HC is wound, the fastening portion A475 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured as a pair of wall-like support walls formed on both upper and lower sides of the wiring HC to restrict passage of the wiring HC. In this case, the width of the range in which the wiring HC can be displaced can be defined by the support wall.

In the twenty-second embodiment, one end of the wiring HC is connected to the board-side connector A493c of the second displacement member A490 from the rear side, and the other end is arranged on the front side of the board-side connector A493c. Although the case where it is connected from the back side to the third connector A416e3, which is connected to the connector A416e3, is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the board to which the other end is connected may be arranged on the side surface of the rear case A310 so as to face inward. In this case, since the wiring HC can be connected to the substrate by extending it to the side surface of the back case A310, the length required to route the wiring HC to the front side can be omitted.

Further, for example, the substrate to which the other end is connected may be arranged on the rear plate portion A480 arranged on the back side of the substrate-side connector A493c. In this case, the length required to route the wiring HC to the front side can be omitted.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the drive motor AMT1 is driven (excited) in one direction to displace the second displacement member A490 from the retracted position to the extended position. However, this is not necessarily the case. do not have. For example, the end surface of the detected plate portion A455e that abuts on the transmission projection A463 is recessed toward the opposed arrangement portion A456b, and the rotation angle of the pinned gear A462 is allowed to exceed the sixth angle. It may be configured as follows. In this case, since the in-phase member A465 can rotate from the fourth angle d14 beyond the allowable angle dd1, by driving (exciting) the drive motor AMT1 in one direction, the second displacement member A490 is moved from the retracted position. It can be displaced to the extended position and further displaced back to the retracted position. As a result, by switching the length for driving (exciting) the drive motor AMT1, the displacement mode of the second displacement member A490 can be changed from the mode in which the displaced state is maintained from the retracted position to the extended position, and the extended mode from the retracted position. After being displaced to the extended position, it is possible to switch between a mode in which the displacement is returned to the retracted position side.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the upper transmission path UL1 and the lower transmission path DL1 are described as paths through which driving force is transmitted by gears, but they are not necessarily limited to this. For example, a cam, a gear belt, or a direct-acting slider may be used.

In the twenty-second embodiment, a case has been described in which the electrical board A715 that irradiates the rotating body A720 with light is formed of a flat member, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured as a sheet-like substrate formed in a sheet-like shape from a flexible material. In this case, the substrate having the light emitting means for irradiating the rotating body A720 with light can be easily arranged on the circumference surrounding the rotating body A720.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the rotating body A720 is arranged at a position always visible to the player has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotating body A720 may be configured to be movable to an invisible position invisible to the player. In this case, the first rotating member A721 is laterally rotated with respect to the second rotating member A728 (the second rotating member A728 is stopped) while the rotating body A720 is arranged at the invisible position. By starting synchronous rotation in this state and moving it to a position visible to the player while continuing to rotate, it is possible to draw attention to the relative relationship between the rotating first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728. . As a result, during the continuation of the rotation of the rotating body A720 when executing an effect that associates the relative relationship between the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 at the time of stop with information beneficial to the player (for example, the degree of expectation for a big win). attention to the rotating body A720 can be improved.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the first operation unit A400 and the second operation unit A700 operate independently has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the effect unit A710 of the second motion unit A700 can be tilted forward from the lower end, and when the second displacement member A490 of the first motion unit A400 is in the overhanging position, the effect unit A710 can be raised and lowered to hit each other. The production unit A710 may be configured to change to an inclined posture by receiving a contact load. In this case, the arrangement of the second displacement member A490 makes it possible to execute an effect of changing the attitude of the effect unit A710. In addition, the configuration in which the effect unit A710 can be tilted is not limited at all. For example, the production unit A710 and the lifting section may be connected by a flexible member, or may be configured to be pivotally supported by the lifting section.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the shell A722 is made of an opaque material and shields the light directed toward the central rotating member A724 in the initial state or the fourth state of the first rotating member A721 has been described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shell portion A722 may be configured to have a light transmissive portion. Thereby, the relationship between the posture of the first rotating member A721 and the amount of light reaching the central rotating member A724 can be finely adjusted.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the rotation axis of the annular gear member A723 meshing with the fixed gear SG intersects with the axis of the fixed gear SG has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the annular gear member A723 may have a rack shape extending linearly (corresponding to an infinite radius of curvature), or the rotating shaft of the meshed gear member may be arranged parallel to the fixed gear SG. . Combining a first effect member in which the rotation axis of the meshed gear member intersects the axis of the fixed gear SG and a second effect member in which the rotation axis of the meshed gear member is parallel to the axis of the fixed gear SG. can perform complex performances.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the first area AC1 of the diffusion plate A415 is formed on the outer side of the operation unit A300 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by forming the illumination board A416 in a C shape that is recessed from the outside toward the inside when viewed from the front, the first area AC1 is formed closer to the inner side of the operation unit A300, and the second area AC2 is formed into the operation unit. It may be formed at a position closer to the outer side of A300. In this case, the player's line of sight can be easily guided to a position closer to the outside of the action unit A300.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the second rotating member A728 is irradiated with light from the left, right, and above has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an electrical board is arranged below the rotary body A720, and light emitted from a light emitting means such as an LED arranged on the electrical board is conducted to the second support part A735, and the second support part A735 After reaching the second rotating member A728 supported by A735 and conducting the second rotating member A728, it may be visually recognized by the player. In this case, unlike the second supporting portion A735, the first supporting portion A731 that supports the first rotating member A721 does not allow light to pass through easily. can be executed.

This assumes an effect that is difficult to achieve with the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a. That is, the optical axis KJ of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a is directed toward the first rotating member A721, and the second rotating member A728 that can be arranged between the first rotating member A721 and the light emitting means A715a transmits the light. Therefore, it is difficult to control so that the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a reaches only the second rotating member A728 and does not reach the first rotating member A721. Therefore, by conducting the second support portion A735 and allowing the light to reach the second rotating member A728, it is possible to perform an effect that is difficult to achieve with the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the first rotating member A721 supported by the first supporting portion A731 arranged inside the rotating shaft is the second rotating member supported by the second supporting portion A735 arranged outside the rotating shaft. Although the case where it is arranged inside the rotation axis of A728 has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first rotating member A721 has the side opposite to the side supported by the first supporting portion A731 extending outside the rotating shaft, and rotates from the extended end side so as to cover the second rotating member A728 from the outside of the rotating shaft. An extension may be formed in a direction parallel to the axis. In this case, the first rotating member A721 supported on the inner side of the rotating shaft can be configured to rotate on the outer side of the rotating shaft of the second rotating member A728, and an unexpected performance can be executed.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the area of the central rotating member A724 when viewed in the optical axis direction of the light emitting means A715a changes due to the rotational displacement of the central rotating member A724 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, when the central rotating member A724 expands without changing its posture, or when the moving body protrudes from the inside, the area of the central rotating member A724 when viewed in the optical axis direction of the light emitting means A715a is configured to change. good too

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the shell portion A722 intervening between the central rotating member A724 and the light emitting means A715a is rotationally displaced has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a predetermined member may be configured to advance and retreat between the central rotating member A724 and the light emitting means A715a by linear movement (sliding movement). Alternatively, the light emitting means A715a may be arranged on the predetermined member.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a is always directed toward the central rotary member A724 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a may be configured to oscillate around the central rotating member A724, and may be configured to face the central rotating member A724 at a predetermined timing.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the central rotating member A724 and the shell A722 are driven by the same drive source has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, separate driving may be used, or the timing of driving by the same driving source and the timing of separate driving may be switched.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the second rotating member A728 is configured so as not to overlap all the optical axes of the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724. It is not something that can be done. For example, the second rotating member A728 may be composed of a plate-shaped member formed so as to cover a plane passing through the rotating shaft when viewed in the direction of the rotating shaft, and may be configured to overlap the entire optical axis at a timing. In this case, when light is emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724, the influence of the attitude of the second rotating member A728 on the central rotating member A724 can be increased.

In the twenty-second embodiment, when the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 changes its posture by 180 degrees, the shape in a front view is different, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the posture is changed by 180 degrees, the shape in the front view may be the same. This makes it impossible to recognize the second state and the sixth state of the first rotating member A721 from the difference in shape of the shell portion A722.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the light emitting means A715a is arranged with the optical axis KJ on the virtual plane VS has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, a plurality of planes on which the optical axis KJ is arranged may be set. In this case, the plane through which the optical axis KJ passes does not have to pass through the rotation axis of the rotating body A720.

In the twenty-third embodiment, the case where the slide member A2729 is displaced in the front-rear direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first rotating member A2721 may be configured to be displaceable in the front-rear direction, or the light emitting means A715 may be configured to be displaceable, and the displacement of the light emitting means A715 (not limited to the front-rear direction, but mixed displacement in the front, back, left, right, up and down directions) may be used) to change the virtual plane VS. In any case, the appearance of the first rotating member A2721 when the light emitting means A715 is lit is changed while suppressing the change in the outer shape (shape) of the first rotating member A2721 and the sliding member A2729 in the front view. be able to.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment, a plurality of contact positions of the pin-equipped gear A3462 with respect to the odd-shaped slide member A455 are arranged in the circumferential direction, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, by forming the projecting tip of the transmission projection A463 to have a large diameter, the transmission projection A463 contacts the deformed slide member A455, and the external projection A3464 contacts the deformed slide member A455. may be shifted in the front-rear direction.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment, a case has been described in which the plurality of outer diameter protrusions A3464 of the pinned gear A3462 abut against the odd-shaped slide member A455 at the same position, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the protruding plate portion A456a is further extended along the longitudinal direction from the inner (opposite side of the plate portion A455e to be detected) end in the longitudinal direction (the direction perpendicular to the direction A416x in a rear view), and the extended A wall portion perpendicular to the side surface of the lower portion when viewed from the rear may be configured to extend toward the pinned gear A3462 side.

In this case, by arranging the orthogonal wall portion so as not to contact the circular arc wall portion A464 but to contact the outer diameter protrusion A3464, the orthogonal wall portion and the outer diameter protrusion A3464 At the time of contact, the deformed slide member A455 can be prevented from being displaced in the direction crossing the direction A416x, and a load in the rotational direction (load in the braking direction) can be generated on the pinned gear A3462.

Furthermore, by deforming the second guide hole A422b so as to extend in the lateral direction (into an L shape) at the longitudinal end portion, the deformed slide member A455 can be displaced in a direction intersecting the direction A416x. , the first displacement member A440 may be configured to be displaced in conjunction with . That is, the deformed slide member A455 pushed by the outer diameter protrusion A3464 enters the portion extending in the lateral direction of the second guide hole A422b, so that the transmission protrusion A455b crosses the direction A416x. and the displacement is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451.

In this case, when the deformed slide member A455 enters the portion extending in the lateral direction of the second guide hole A422b, by engaging the second guide hole A422b and the guided projecting portion A455c in the direction A416x, the deformed slide member A455 Displacement of the slide member A455 along the direction A416x can be restricted. Thus, even after the contact between the projecting plate portion A456a and the arcuate wall portion A464 is released, displacement of the odd-shaped slide member A455 along the direction A416x can be restricted.

There is no limitation to the displacement that occurs in the first displacement member A440 when the deformed slide member A455 enters the portion extending in the lateral direction of the second guide hole A422b. For example, it may be configured to generate displacement along the direction A416x, or may be configured to generate displacement in a direction crossing the direction A416x.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the outer diameter protrusion A3464 has been described as having a semicircular shape, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may have a rectangular shape, a triangular shape, a semi-elliptical shape, or an arbitrary shape. On the other hand, in consideration of durability, the shape of the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is preferably configured so as to taper (the width does not increase) toward the radially outward direction.

Note that this is the same when forming a recess instead of the outer diameter protrusion A3464. That is, while the shape may be any shape, it is preferable that it is configured so as to taper (the width does not increase) as it goes radially inward.

The shape of the outer diameter protrusion A3464 may be symmetrical or asymmetrical with respect to a straight line passing through the rotation axis. In this case, if configured in an asymmetrical shape, the displacement speed of the first displacement member A440 can be changed for each direction.

For example, in the rear view of the external projection A3464, the side surface of the arcuate wall A464 on the extension distal end side (the side opposite to the transmission projection A463 along the circumference of the arcuate wall A464) is the extension base end side. (Along the circumference of the arc wall A464 on the side of the transmission projection A463), the angle with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the arc wall A464 may be smaller than that of the side surface.

In this case, the displacement of the first displacement member A440 caused by contact with the outer diameter protrusion A3464 under the condition that the gear with pin A3462 is rotated at constant speed is It is possible to increase the speed when displacing toward the retracted position side compared to the speed when displacing toward the overhanging side. That is, the displacement speed of the first displacement member A440 can be changed for each displacement direction.

As for the case where the first displacement member A440 is displaced toward the side opposite to the retracted position, if the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is of a projecting shape, it may be displaced beyond the extended position to the opposite side of the retracted position. As shown in the example, when a concave portion is formed instead of the external projection A3464, the deformed slide member A455 slides by the size of the concave portion, and the first displacement member A440 moves to the retracted position side. After being displaced, the deformed slide member A455 is pushed out to the outer surface of the arcuate wall portion A464 and slides, thereby displacing the first displacement member A440 to the projecting position.

As for the case where the first displacement member A440 is displaced toward the retracted position, if the outer diameter protrusion A3464 has a projecting shape, the deformed slide member A455 slides by the projecting dimension, resulting in the first displacement. After the 1-displacement member A440 is displaced to the opposite side of the retracted position, the contact between the outer diameter protrusion A3464 and the deformed slide member A455 is released, and the deformed slide member A455 slides to cause the first displacement. A case where the member A440 is displaced to the overhanging position (retracted position side) is exemplified, and when a concave portion is formed instead of the external protrusion A3464, the deformed slide member A455 is formed by the size of the concave portion. A case is exemplified in which the first displacement member A440 is displaced from the extended position to the retracted position side along with the displacement.

In the twenty-seventh embodiment, the case where the main body plate portion A6561 is arranged closer to the rear plate portion A480 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the body plate portion A6561 may be arranged at a position away from the rear plate portion A480 (a position closer to the support box portion A6470), and the protruding portion A6562 may protrude toward the rear plate portion A480. . Also, the body plate portion A6561 may be configured to be thin (for example, sheet-like). In this case, it is possible to secure a wide area in which the wiring HC is displaced.

Moreover, although the case where the main-body board part A6561 was formed in an elongated shape was demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the body plate portion A6561 may have a wide plate shape. In this case, members can be arranged between the rear plate portion A480 and the wiring HC in a wide range, so that the wiring HC and the main body plate portion A6561 are synchronously displaced, thereby increasing the possibility of suppressing friction. can do.

In the twenty-seventh embodiment, the projecting portion A6562 is fixedly arranged on the main body plate portion A6561, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the projecting portion A6562 is held so as to be displaceable in the longitudinal direction of the main body plate portion A6561, and the main body plate portion A6561A is configured to rotate in accordance with the displacement of the projecting portion A6562 due to the load received from the wiring HC. can be That is, for example, a long hole (groove) through which the projecting portion A6562 is inserted is formed in the main body box portion A471, and the long hole (groove) displaces the projecting portion A6562 in the longitudinal direction of the main body plate portion A6561. Accordingly, the main body plate portion A6561 may be formed in a shape that causes rotational displacement. In this case, the arrangement of the wiring guide members A6560 can be appropriately changed according to the magnitude of the load applied from the wiring HC to the wiring guide members A6560. can be moderately reduced.

Moreover, although the case where the main body plate portion A6561 is rotatably supported has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be one that slides, or one that moves along a path combining rotation and sliding.

Although the case where the second displacement member A490 is reciprocally rotationally displaced has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second displacement member A490 may be slidably displaced, or the second rotating member A490 may be rotationally displaced by one or more rotations.

In the twenty-seventh embodiment, the case where the wiring guide member A6560 is disposed on the back side of the support box portion A6470 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, while the main body plate portion A6561 is arranged on the front side of the support box portion A6470, a long through-hole (an arc shape centering on the rotation axis of the main body plate portion A6561) that guides the projecting portion A6562 to the support box portion A6470 ) are provided, and the protruding portion A6562 may protrude to the rear side of the support box portion A6470 through the through elongated hole. In this case, a space corresponding to the volume of the main body plate portion A6561 can be provided as compared with the case where the main body plate portion A6561 is arranged between the support box portion A6470 and the rear plate portion A480. As a result, it is possible to easily secure a space in which the wiring HC is displaced, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the main body plate portion A6561 (for example, the gap between the support box portion A6470 and the rear plate portion A480 can also be configured as a thick member).

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Points where the player pushes in the direction from the back to the front>
In an operation device having operation means that a player pushes in, the operation device is arranged in a first state in a normal state and a position in which the operation means protrudes from the first state with respect to the player. and a biasing means for biasing the operating means from the first state to the second state, wherein the pushing direction of the operating means in the second state is from the depth side to the front side for the player. A gaming machine A1 characterized in that it is directed to the side.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured in such a manner that an operation means that can be operated by a player advances and retreats between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). ). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the performance is performed in a manner that heightens the player's expectation of a big win at the advance position, the player can easily operate the operation means at the advance position with a large acceleration. , it was necessary to design the operating means with high strength. In this case, there is a problem that the operation means becomes heavy as a whole and the driving means for driving the operation means becomes large.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, when the pushing operation is performed in the second state, the pushing direction of the operation means is the direction from the back side to the front side for the player, so that a straightforward up and down linear motion is performed. By causing the slippage between the player's hand and the operating means, the momentum of pushing can be released.

In addition, considering the game posture of the player, when pushing the operation means around the shoulders and elbows, it becomes difficult to apply force in the front direction, so the force applied to the operation means by the player should be naturally weakened. can be done.

In the gaming machine A1, the operation device is rotatable about an axial rod arranged on the far side for the player, tilts up and down about the axial rod, and has the operation means. The gaming machine A2 is characterized by comprising a tilting means, wherein the tilting means is arranged so that the operating means faces the opposite direction of the player in the second state.

According to the gaming machine A2, the tilting means having the operation means is configured in a manner to rotate, and in the second state, the operation means is arranged in the direction opposite to the player, so that the game can be played in the second state. It is possible to prevent a person from performing an operation of hitting the operating means.

In addition, by placing the hand near the shaft and tilting the hand around that position as a fulcrum, the operation means can be easily pushed in, so that a new pushing operation method that is less likely to be accelerated can be provided. , it is possible to prevent the operation device from being damaged by the pushing operation of the player.

The new push operation method is, for example, placing the outer side of the little finger of the left hand near the shaft, placing the hand near the operation means with the palm up and down, and then turning the thumb side toward the operation means. A method in which the tip of the middle finger is placed near the shaft and the palm is placed facing the operation means, and then a method in which the palm is dropped toward the operation means is exemplified. be done.

A gaming machine A3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine A1 or A2, in the first state, the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means is vertical.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the direction of the pushing operation of the operation means in the first state is the vertical direction. It is possible to prevent breakage due to the pushing operation in the state.

In the game machine A3, the operation device is configured so that the operation means can be automatically operated, and includes a driving means for generating a driving force for the automatic operation. A gaming machine A4 characterized in that it acts in the direction of one side and does not act in the opposite direction.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the driving force of the driving means for automatically operating the operation device acts only in the pushing operation direction, so that the driving force is directed in the direction opposite to the operation direction of the player. can be prevented from working. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being damaged by the player's operation.

For example, by configuring the button so that it can only be pushed, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being pulled in the opposite direction by the player when the button is retracted and receiving a high load.

In the game machine A4, a maintenance state that maintains the operation device in the first state or the second state can be formed, and the maintenance means is operated by the driving means. a rotating means for transmitting a driving force to the operating means, wherein the rotating means is capable of phase change between a first phase and a second phase different from the first phase while the maintaining means is maintained; In the first phase and the second phase, when the maintenance state is canceled, the range in which the operation means can move is changed, and in both the first phase and the second phase, the same rotation A gaming machine A5 configured to be capable of canceling the maintaining state.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of the game machine A4, the phase of the driving means can be changed while the maintaining means is kept in the maintained state, and in the phase after the change, the movement to release the maintained state is rotated. The movement width of the operation device can be changed by the biasing means. Therefore, it is possible to configure a plurality of operation modes by the biasing means.

In the gaming machine A5, the maintaining means is movable in the urging direction of the urging means in the maintaining state, and the moving speed of the maintaining means increases or decreases in accordance with the rotational speed of the rotating means. , a game machine A6 configured such that the operating means moves following the movement of the maintaining means.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5, the movement of the urging means in the direction of the urging force is caused only by the urging force, so the mode of movement is limited to one way. Since it is possible to add a moving mode of moving following the maintaining means to the operating means, it is possible to increase the types of moving modes of the operating means. Thereby, the degree of attention of the operation device can be improved.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A6, light-emitting means disposed inside the operation device and emitting light toward the player is provided, and the second state is more favorable than the first state. However, from a player's point of view, the game machine A7 is characterized in that the area of the operating means is reduced and the irradiation range of the light emitted by the light emitting means is expanded.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A6, the light emitting means is provided, and the second state is more illuminated by the light emitting means from the player's point of view than the first state. Since the irradiation range of the emitted light is expanded and the area of the operation means is reduced, the player can be made to pay attention to the light and the performance effect can be improved, and at the same time, it is difficult to press the operation means unless aiming. By adopting this mode, it is possible to reduce the power of the player at the time of operation.

In the gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transmissive material, and the area of the exposed portion of the light emitting means is changed by moving the operating means toward and away from the display means. Characterized game machine A8.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects of the game machine A7, the operation means is made of a non-transmissive material, and the operation means moves toward and away from the display means to emit light from the display means. Since the area of the exposed portion changes, it is possible to prevent the emitted light from reflecting on the display means and making it difficult to see the image on the display means.

<The point of making the repulsive force at normal times small while making it possible to respond to repeated hits>
A first state and a second state in which the movable range of operation to the terminal position is wider than that of the first state in the operation device having the operation means that allows the player to perform the operation to the terminal position. and includes first driving means for generating a driving force for moving from the second state to the first state, and biasing means for generating a biasing force for moving from the first state to the second state. A gaming machine B1 characterized by comprising second driving means for generating a driving force for moving the operating means from the first state to the second state in accordance with the player's operation.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured in such a manner that an operation means that can be operated by a player advances and retreats between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). ). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the force for returning the operation means to the initial position is generated by the spring, and the automatic operation of the operation means is performed by the drive motor. However, in that case, the return of the operating means is delayed, and if the player's operation is fast, the operating means does not follow the player's operation, making it difficult for the player to repeat the operation. There was a problem.

According to the gaming machine B1, by setting the biasing force to be weak, the driving force of the motor can be reduced when the operating means is moved by the first driving means. By pushing back the operation means with the two drive means, the return can be made faster, so that the player can enjoy the continuous hitting operation.

The game machine B1 is provided with repeated hitting determination means for determining whether or not a repeated hitting operation is being performed based on a sensor detection value of the stroke operation means within a predetermined time, and the second driving means is operated based on the detection value of the repeated hitting determination means. A gaming machine B2 characterized by determining whether or not to drive.

According to the gaming machine B2, whether or not to drive the second drive means is determined based on the detection value of the repeated hitting determination means, so the player does not perform repeated hitting operations (for example, single pressing operation, long pressing, and so on). It is possible to prevent the second driving means from operating even when the player is performing an operation, etc., and the player feels the load of pushing back the hand.

In the gaming machine B2, terminal detecting means for detecting the position of the operating means and whether or not the operating means is arranged at the terminal position, and detecting whether or not the operating means is arranged at a position shifted by a predetermined amount from the terminal position. position difference detection means for detecting; and movement direction determination means for determining the direction of movement of the operation means from the time relationship between the detection value of the terminal end detection means and the detection value of the position difference detection means; a game machine B3 characterized in that the second drive means is driven when the direction of movement determined by is the direction from the end of the push-in to return to the first state.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2, when the direction of movement determined by the movement direction determination means is the direction from the end of the push to return to the first state, that is, when the player's hand moves away from the button. Since the second driving means is driven at the timing of moving in the direction of separation, it is possible to generate a load that pushes back the operating means in synchronization with the movement of the player.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second driving device from operating in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the player's hand, and placing a high load on the player's hand.

In any one of game machines B1 to B3, the second drive means is composed of a voice coil motor that vibrates and displaces along a direction connecting the first state and the second state of the operation means. Game machine B4 to play.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B1 to B3, the vibration displacement of the voice coil motor can be effectively used to generate the driving force for moving the operating means.

In any one of game machines B1 to B3, a support frame for supporting the operation means is provided, and the second drive means includes a drive motor for rotating an eccentric weight and elastically supports the drive motor on the support frame. a supporting means, wherein the driving force for moving the operating means from the position of the first state toward the position of the second state increases as the operating means approaches the terminal position. The game machine B5 is characterized in that the eccentric weight abuts against the support frame in a state in which the operating means is arranged at the terminal position, thereby generating a driving force.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B1 to B3, the driving force by the second driving means is generated by the driving force generated by the supporting means and the contact between the eccentric weight and the supporting frame. By generating it separately from the driving force, it is possible to adjust the driving force applied to the operating means while maintaining the rotation of the driving motor. At this time, it is unnecessary to perform control to start or stop the rotation of the drive motor, and the rotation of the drive motor can be maintained.

In the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight moves closer to the support frame in the moving direction of the operation means and comes into contact with the support frame based on the arrangement of the operation means at the end position. A game machine B6 characterized by.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of the game machine B5, the eccentric weight moves closer to the support frame in the movement direction of the operation means and comes into contact with the support frame. By doing so, the drive motor can be moved away from the support frame in the moving direction of the operating means. As a result, the support means for supporting the drive motor moves in the direction away from the support frame (the direction toward the operation means), so that the driving force for pushing back the operation means can be further increased.

<Points of using VCM as a braking device and vibration effect device>
A detection sensor for detecting a position near the end position of the operation means, the detection sensor is composed of a plurality of sensors, measuring means for measuring the speed of the operation means from the detection interval of the detection sensors, and the measurement means threshold determination means for determining whether or not the measured value measured by is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold; The driving force generated by the repulsion means increases when the measured threshold value is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value, compared to when the threshold value measured by the threshold determination means is equal to or less than the predetermined threshold value. Characteristic gaming machine C1.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured in such a manner that an operation means that can be operated by a player advances and retreats between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). ). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, if the player's light operation is emphasized, the operation resistance will be low, and there is a risk that the operation means will be damaged by the player's operation. Although the speed can be reduced and the possibility of damage to the operating means can be reduced, there is a problem that the force required for the player's operation increases, and the operation of the operating means becomes a burden for weak players. .

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the threshold determination means determines whether the speed of the operating means is equal to or higher than the threshold, and if it is equal to or higher than the threshold, the drive force generated by the repulsion means is increased. Therefore, the operation resistance can be reduced when the speed of the operation means is equal to or less than the threshold, and the operation means can be decelerated only when necessary. Therefore, it is possible to improve operability and prevent destruction by the repulsion means.

In the game machine C1, the repulsive means includes a voice coil motor that generates a driving force in a direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operating means, and when the threshold measured by the threshold determination means is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold, and driving the voice coil motor in advance before the control for pushing the voice coil motor to the extended position is executed and the operation means is arranged at a position capable of coming into contact with the voice coil motor. Game machine C2 to play.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the voice coil motor can be driven and controlled to decelerate the operating means, and the operating means can be arranged at a position where it can come into contact with the voice coil motor. By driving the voice coil motor before moving, it is possible to suppress the impact generated between the operating means and the voice coil motor.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the gaming machine C3 is characterized in that, after the operating means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other, control is performed to increase the current flowing through the voice coil motor.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1 or C2, after the operation means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other, the operation means is controlled to increase the current flowing through the voice coil motor. While suppressing the occurrence of a large load at the moment of contact with the voice coil motor, the degree of braking the operation means can be gradually improved, and the sense of discomfort felt by the player during operation can be reduced.

In the game machine C1, the repulsion means is disposed so as to be able to come into contact with the operation means, and generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation caused by the movement of the operation means by means of spring elasticity. .

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the repulsion means generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation by means of spring elasticity. can be generated.

In the gaming machine C4, the repulsion means compares the value measured by the threshold value determining means when the value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value to the case where the value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or less than the predetermined threshold value. A gaming machine C5 is characterized in that a movable area of an end portion of said repulsion means opposite to a side contacting said operation means is narrowed.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machine C4, the movable area of the end of the repulsion means, which is the end opposite to the side that contacts the operation means, is narrowed, thereby making it possible to operate the operation means. A higher velocity can increase the elastic force generated by the repulsive means.

<Damage of the driving means is prevented by interrupting the transmission of the driving force with the clutch>
An operation device having operation means operated by a player, wherein the operation device includes drive means for generating a driving force for operating the operation means, transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the operation means, a releasing means for releasing the transmission of the driving force, the releasing means releasing the driving force when the load generated between the driving means and the operating means through the transmitting means exceeds a predetermined amount. A gaming machine D1 characterized by canceling transmission.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured in such a manner that an operation means that can be operated by a player advances and retreats between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). ). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, when the operation means is automatically operated for the effect, if the operation means is operated during the automatic operation, there is a risk that a large load will be applied to the drive system. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the canceling means cancels the transmission of the driving force when the load generated between the driving means and the operating means via the transmitting means exceeds a predetermined amount. Therefore, even if the player operates the operation means while the operation means is automatically operating, the transmission of the load to the drive system is canceled (disconnected), and the load applied to the drive system can be suppressed. can.

In the game machine D1, the driving means is capable of driving in a first direction and driving in a second direction opposite to the first direction, and during driving in the first direction, The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the release by the release means functions regardless of whether the game machine is being driven in the second direction.

Here, when whether or not the transmission of the driving force can be canceled depends on the direction of operation of the driving means, the operating means is operated by the player when the driving means is driven in the direction of operation in which the transmission of the driving force cannot be canceled. Then, there is a possibility that a large load is generated on the driving means. Therefore, the degree of freedom of performance is reduced when the operating means is operated to effect performance.

When the button is driven between the first position and the second position, the lock member that locks the button is moved in the unlocking direction or in the unlocking direction depending on whether the driving means rotates forward or backward. Toggles whether to move in the opposite direction. In this case, two modes of button operation can be created (a release pattern and a non-release pattern), but the driving force must be interrupted in both cases.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the transmission of the driving force can be canceled (disconnected) in both driving directions regardless of the driving direction of the driving means. , it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of action in the effect of automatically operating the operating means.

It should be noted that, as a method of releasing the transmission, the clutch is moved in a direction intersecting with the operating direction of the driving means. The intersecting direction is intended to exclude, for example, the circumferential direction when the drive means rotates, and the clutch may move in the rotation axis direction or in the radial direction.

The gaming machine D1 or D2 includes biasing means for biasing the driving means and the transmission means to a state in which the driving force can be transmitted, and the release means is a contact portion between the driving means and the transmission means. and engaging teeth for transmitting a driving force when they are engaged with each other. A game machine D3, characterized in that the game machine D3 has a shape that tapers away from the contact surface and is inclined with respect to the contact surface.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the urging means presses the driving means and the transmission means, and the release means applies the driving force in the engaged state on the contact surfaces of the pressing means. On the other hand, since both surfaces facing the direction of movement of the driving means are provided with engaging teeth that are tapered away from the abutment surfaces, the engagement between the engaging teeth causes the transmission means to move from the driving means. They can be separated, thereby canceling the transmission of the driving force.

Further, a biasing force is constantly applied by the biasing means between the driving means and the transmitting means, and when the transmitting means is separated from the driving means, the biasing force acts in the direction of movement of the driving means via the engagement teeth. load is applied. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change in the load applied to the driving means between the state in which the driving force is transmitted and the state in which the transmission is cancelled.

The size of the engaging portion of the engaging tooth decreases in the circumferential direction of the transmitting means as the transmitting means moves away from the driving means. Therefore, when the phase difference between the transmission means and the drive means increases, it is possible to prevent the load generated in the circumferential direction of the transmission means from becoming excessive.

In addition, in the released state, the resistance is periodically reinstated, rather than completely de-resistance away. As a result, when the player releases the button, the button can be started to operate within a short period of time.

That is, when the button is driven "as an effect", if the player is holding the button, one phase of the button operation will pass. In addition, if the player releases the hand in the middle of the game, if the player moves from the end of the first phase, the period during which the button is stopped becomes long, and the feeling that "the player starts to move because the load on the player has been released" is reduced. escape.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D3, the operation means can be started within a short period of time after the player releases the hand and the load is released. As a result, it is possible to produce a feeling that the player starts to move because the load on the player is relieved.

A gaming machine D4 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the engaging surfaces of the transmitting means and the releasing means are formed in a saw-tooth shape that engage with each other.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D3, when the load from the player is released, the release means can be easily returned to the engagement position with the transmission means at an early stage. That is, when the tip of the engaging surface has a plane parallel to the direction in which the transmission means and the release means move toward and away from each other, the transmission means and the release means collide with each other at this plane, and the release means is disengaged. It is possible to suppress the movement along the direction of approaching and separating from the means to be stopped. Therefore, after the load from the player is released, the operation means can be started to operate early.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D4, the operation mode of the operating means differs between when the driving means is continuously operated in the forward direction and when the driving means is continuously operated in the reverse direction. A gaming machine D5 characterized by:

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D4, while preparing a plurality of operation modes of the operating means, the driving force transmission can be canceled without being limited to any one operation mode. It can be carried out.

In the game machine D5, the operating mode of the operating means is the following for a predetermined period from the start of the operation of the driving means when there is a difference between whether the driving means operates in the forward direction or in the reverse direction. A gaming machine D6 is similar in that the operation after the predetermined period of time has elapsed is different.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects of the game machine D5, when there is a difference in the operation direction of the drive means in the operation mode of the operation means, the operation mode for a predetermined period from the start of the operation of the drive means is the same. Since the action after the predetermined period of time has elapsed is different, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the operating means.

Here, by combining the difference in the operating mode of the operating means with information that is beneficial to the player, such as the degree of expectation for a big win, the player is instructed to operate the operating means for a predetermined period of time until the operating mode of the operating means changes. can be supervised.

In addition, since the difference in operation mode is caused by the difference in the operation direction of the drive means, if the operation direction of the drive means can be confirmed in advance, the player can grasp the difference in the degree of expectation for the big win without watching the operation of the operation means. can be done. However, the drive means is usually hidden from the player, and the difference in the direction of action cannot be recognized from the vibration sound. can be made to watch over the operation of the operating means.

<Change the position of the protrusion of the cam based on the rotation of the cam>
An operation device having operation means operated by a player, wherein the operation device includes drive means for generating a driving force for operating the operation means, transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the operation means, first means configured to operate the operating means between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and suppressing a change in the position of the operating means from the first position; biasing means for biasing the operating means in a direction from the first position to the second position; and operating means for moving from the first position to the second position by the biasing force of the biasing means. terminating means for variably forming the movement terminating end of the first means, wherein the first means suppresses a change in the position of the operating means by engaging with the operating means; 1 means includes releasing load means for applying a load to the first means for releasing the engagement with the operating means, and releasing the engagement by the releasing load means and terminating the movement of the operating means in the terminating means. A gaming machine E1 characterized in that the change is performed by a single driving means.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a cam-operated and movable operating means is fixed at a first position, and the fixing is released by a release load means, whereby the urging force of the urging means expands and operates. , There is a game machine that can change the amount of displacement of the overhanging operation by the termination means (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the amount of displacement of the overhanging operation of the operation means is changed according to the phase of the cam when the fixation is released, the phase of the cam when the fixation is released varies in various ways. The cam for moving the means and the release load means for releasing the fixation are driven by separate driving forces. Therefore, there is a problem that a plurality of driving means are required and the space for arranging the driving means becomes large.

On the other hand, in the game machine E1, the releasing load means for releasing the fixation of the operating means is driven by the driving means for driving the operating means. As a result, the driving means for changing the terminal position of the operating means by the terminal means and the driving means for moving the release load means can be used together, so the number of driving means can be reduced.

A game machine E2 characterized in that, in the game machine E1, the change in the position of the release load means is performed based on the operation of the transmission means.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effects of the game machine E1, the position of the release load means can be changed based on the operation of the transmission means. The state of the load means can be determined. As a result, the number of detecting means such as position sensors for detecting the state of the load release means can be reduced, and the number of parts can be reduced.

As a method for switching the state of the load release means, when the transmission means is composed of a cam and the load release means is composed of a projection that rotates coaxially with the cam, there is a method of shifting the rotational cycle of the cam and the projection. , a method of desynchronizing the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the projection when the cam is arranged in a predetermined phase, and synchronizing the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the projection in other phases.

In the gaming machine E2, the release load means is arranged to be operable with respect to the transmission means by the load applied from the first means, and the operation of the release load means causes the release load means and the transmission means to operate. A game machine E3 characterized in that it is possible to switch whether or not to operate synchronously with.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects of the game machine E2, the release load means is arranged to be operable with respect to the transmission means by the load from the first means, and the release load means is operated by the operation of the release load means. Since it is switched whether or not to operate synchronously with the transmission means, the synchronous state between the release load means and the transmission means can be changed without adding a member.

In the game machine E2, the transmission means includes a rotating first rotating member, the operating means is supported eccentrically with respect to the rotating shaft of the first rotating member, and the release load means includes a rotating second rotating member. A gaming machine E4 comprising members, wherein the rotation periods of the first rotating member and the second rotating member are different.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, the first rotating member and the second rotating member are operated by a single drive means, but the rotation cycles are different, so that the second rotating means can be operated at a predetermined speed. A plurality of phases of the first rotary member can be prepared when the first means is released by coming into contact with the first means in phase.

According to this configuration, it is possible to prepare a plurality of types of end positions when the operating means is held at the first position and then released and moved toward the second position. , can expand the range of production. For example, an effect of gradually moving the end position away from the first position or an effect of gradually approaching the first position can be realized with the same configuration.

<Vibration device supported by soft case>
In an operation device having operation means operated by a player, the operation device has a first position for the operation means and a second position reached by the operation means when the player performs an operation from the first position. A game machine comprising vibrating means having a vibrating portion configured to be movable between and vibrating; and receiving means disposed so as to be in contact with the vibrating portion, wherein the operating means is disposed at the first position Then, the vibrating portion is in a separated state in which it cannot abut against the receiving means. A gaming machine F1 characterized by being in a contact state.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that are provided with operating means that can be operated by the player and vibration means that transmits vibrations to the player via the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine (for example, 2014-144218). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, regardless of whether the operation means is operated or not, when the vibration means vibrates, the vibration is transmitted to the operation means or the frame of the game machine. Alternatively, since it is transmitted to the player who touches the frame of the game machine, in the case of performing an effect of transmitting vibration immediately after operating the operation means, it is necessary to operate the vibration means after detecting the operation of the operation means. . Therefore, after the player operates the operation means, it is necessary to operate the vibration means before releasing the operation means. mode), there is a problem that the vibration may not start in time before releasing the hand, and the player may not notice the vibration.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, whether or not the vibrating portion contacts the receiving means is determined depending on whether the operating means is placed at the first position or is placed at the second position by being operated by the player. Since it changes, even when the vibrating portion is continuously vibrated, the player can feel the vibration only when the player operates the operating means. In addition, since the vibration of the vibrating portion occurs before the player performs the pressing operation, the vibrating portion can be vibrated before the player releases the hand regardless of the mode of operation by the player. Vibration can be transmitted to a person.

In the gaming machine F1, the vibration means is arranged to protrude in the occupation area occupied when the operation means is arranged at the second position in the separated state, and the operation means moves to the second position. The game machine F2 changes to the abutting state by moving the vibrating means out of the occupied area.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1, the vibration means moves based on the movement of the operation means, thereby changing from the separated state to the contact state. The strength of contact between the operating means or the receiving means and the vibrating portion can be changed, and the strength of transmitted vibration can also be changed. Therefore, the effect of changing the strength of the transmitted vibration with respect to the player's operation strength can be performed by similarly vibrating the vibrating means without any particular change in the driving mode.

A game machine F3 characterized in that, in the game machines F1 or F2, the vibration means is supported by the receiving means via support means having spring elasticity.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1 or F2, the support means can perform positioning with respect to the receiving means while suppressing the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the receiving means. As a result, it is possible to separate the receiving means and the vibrating means, prevent transmission of vibration, and suppress displacement occurring in the vibrating means during vibration.

A game machine F4 characterized in that, in the game machine F3, in the contact state, the support means expands and contracts based on the vibration of the vibrating portion.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects of the game machine F3, the elasticity of the support means can be used to increase the load generated when the vibrating portion and the receiving means come into contact with each other. That is, the extension and contraction of the supporting means can give momentum when the vibrating part moves in the direction of approaching the receiving means.

The game machine F5 in the game machine F3, wherein the support means has a deformation resistance along the operating direction of the operating means that is lower than a deformation resistance in a direction perpendicular to the operating direction of the operating means. .

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects of the game machine F3, the direction in which the support means deforms can be finely set when the operation means is operated and interferes with the support means due to the difference in deformation resistance of the support means. can.

Thus, even if the amount of movement of the operating means is slightly different, the amount of expansion and contraction of the supporting means can be made different, and the load generated between the vibrating portion and the receiving means can be made different. .

As a method for differentiating the deformation resistance, in the case where the support means is composed of a rubber member surrounding the vibrating means, a method of extending rubber legs along the movement direction of the operating means, or a method in which the support means surrounds the vibrating means. A method of manufacturing a rubber member by two-color molding to change the deformation resistance for each direction when it is composed of a rubber member; , and a coil spring that biases the vibrating means along the operating direction of the operating means.

A game machine F6 characterized in that, in the game machine F3, the portion with which the vibrating portion abuts is the receiving means, and the receiving means is configured as a separate means from the operating means.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects of the game machine F3, the vibration is not transmitted to the player through the operation means, but the vibration is transmitted to the player through the receiving means which is separate from the operation means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the driving means via the operating means and the transmitting means, thereby suppressing a state in which a load is applied to the driving means. Thereby, the durability of the driving means can be improved.

In addition, since it is possible to suppress the vibration from being transmitted to the hand of the player who operates the operation means, it is possible to prevent the player who is surprised by the vibration from stopping the operation during the operation.

As the receiving means, for example, among the frame parts of the game machine, the part near the upper tray to which the game balls are supplied, the edge part of the glass frame, etc. Examples include a portion that may be touched by hands, a housing portion that partially encloses the operation means, and the like.

<One-touch attachment between cam and shaft. Shape deformation (elastic deformation) is possible at the mounting part>
In an operation device having operation means operated by a player, the operation device is configured such that the operation means is movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and the operation means is operated by a player. and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operation means, wherein the transmission means comprises a deformation portion that elastically deforms due to an overload. Gaming machine G1 to play.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, an operating means that can be operated by a player, a driving means that generates driving force for driving the operating means, and a transmission means that transmits the driving force from the driving means to the operating means. There is a game machine provided (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when the player holds and fixes the operation means, if the drive means generates a driving force for driving the operation means, the connecting portion between the transmission means and the operation means and the transmission means There is a problem that a load is accumulated in the connecting portion between the motor and the driving means, and these connecting portions may be damaged.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G1, when the operation device is overloaded, the deformable portion of the transmission means is elastically deformed, so that the connecting portion between the operation means and the transmission means, the drive means and the transmission means It is possible to relax the load applied to the connection part with.

In the gaming machine G1, the transmission means includes a cam member that is rotatably supported, the deforming portion constitutes a connection portion of the cam member with the rotating shaft, and the elasticity of the deforming portion causes the cam member to move toward the rotating shaft. A game machine G2 characterized in that a fixing force of is generated.

According to the game machine G2, the deforming part has a role of a part responsible for elastic deformation of the cam member with respect to the rotating shaft of the transmission means and a role of a part generating a supporting force of the cam member with respect to the rotating shaft. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the configuration of the transmission member by sharing the functions. For example, separate securing members such as e-rings can be omitted.

In the gaming machine G2, the cam member has a projecting portion projecting in parallel with the rotation shaft, the projecting portion and the operating means are connected, and the elastic deformation of the deformation portion causes the cam member to On the other hand, a gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the rotating shaft is tilted.

Here, the elastic deformation of the transmission means can also be performed, for example, by displacing the projecting portion along the circumferential direction of the cam member. However, in this case, it becomes difficult to construct the cam member and the projecting portion as one member, and the number of members may increase.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G2, the elastic deformation of the deformation portion is such that the rotating shaft tilts with respect to the cam member. Compared to the case where the cam member is slid relative to the cam member, the cam member can be easily constructed from a single member, and the members can be simplified.

In the gaming machine G3, the elastic deformation resistance of the deforming portion is greater than that of the rotating shaft in comparison with the first rotating direction in which the cam member is rotated about a straight line connecting the rotating shaft and the projecting portion. A gaming machine characterized in that deformation resistance is greater in a second rotation direction in which rotation is performed around a straight line perpendicular to both a straight line connecting the projecting portion and an extending direction of the rotation shaft. G4.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G3, by making the deformation resistance of the deformation portion different for each direction, the state after the deformation portion is elastically deformed when viewed from the rotation axis direction is more Compared to the state before elastic deformation, the projecting tip of the projecting portion can be displaced in the circumferential direction of the cam member. As a result, the projecting portion of the cam member can be displaced along the direction in which the projecting portion is to move, so that the elastic deformation of the deformation portion relieves the load generated between the projecting portion and the operating means. can do.

The game machine G3 or G4 includes a friction member arranged at a predetermined distance along a direction parallel to the rotation axis of the cam member, wherein the deformation portion elastically deforms to change the posture of the cam member, The game machine G5 is characterized in that the cam member and the friction member are in contact with each other.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G3 or G4, when an overload is applied to the operation means, the deformable portion elastically deforms, thereby changing the attitude of the cam member, and the cam member and the friction member are brought into contact with each other. contact, the movement resistance of the cam member itself can be increased, thereby reducing the load applied to the connecting portion between the cam member and the operating means.

A gaming machine G6 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines G3 to G5, the gaming machine G6 comprises detection means for detecting that at least part of the cam member is tilted with respect to an axis.

Here, in a situation where the operating device is overloaded and the driving means is operating but the operating means is not, for example, the displacement expected by driving the driving means and the actual displacement of the operating means When it is detected that an overload has occurred on the basis of a deviation from , it is necessary to drive the driving means for a predetermined period of time before the occurrence of the overload is detected. This period can be shortened as the arrangement interval of the detection means for detecting displacement deviation becomes smaller, but the smaller the arrangement interval of the detection means, the more complicated the structure of the detection means and the higher the cost. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to provide a configuration that can detect the occurrence of an overload at a low cost and at an early stage.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines G3 to G5, the detection means detects whether or not at least a part of the cam member is tilted with respect to the axis. Therefore, it is possible to determine that an overload has occurred at the same time when the detecting means detects at least a part of the cam member, without the need to drive the driving means for a predetermined period while suppressing the number of additional detecting means. This makes it possible to reduce the load applied to the driving means when an overload occurs.

<Structure to prevent balls with threads. Game machine H>
In a game machine provided with a foul ball passage through which foul balls flowing back toward a launching device, among game balls shot into a game area, can pass, the foul ball passage permits passage of the falling game balls. The game machine H1 is characterized by comprising a one-way obstruction means for obstructing the movement of objects flowing backward.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine, where a thread cutting blade is arranged inside the guide path that guides the game ball from the upper tray to the launcher, and the game ball with the thread connected is driven into the game area. There is a game machine with a function to prevent (cut the thread) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-024179). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the thread is pressed against the thread cutting teeth when the ball is shot, and the thread is cut by the tension generated at that time. It may be returned to the player side as a foul ball. For this reason, for example, a cheating tool is prepared in which game balls are connected to both ends of a string, and one of the game balls connected to one end of the string is shot with a weak firing strength to flow into the foul ball passage and be returned to the player. By hitting the other game ball connected to the other end of the string into the game area while gripping one of the game balls that have been drawn, the string can be removed from the guide path and passed through the foul ball passage to the other side. Since it is possible to create a state in which one game ball and the other game ball are connected by a string, a load is applied from the outside to the string connected to the other game ball, and the other game ball placed in the game area There is a problem that there is a possibility that it may be possible to obtain illicit profits by manipulating the

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, even if a fraudulent act of applying a load to the other game ball using the string guided to the game area through the foul ball passage is performed, the one-way obstruction means However, by interfering with the movement of the string in the reverse direction of the game ball, it is possible to make it difficult to generate illicit profits.

A game machine H2 characterized in that the foul ball path in the game machine H1 has a bent portion for bending a downflow path of the game ball.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1, the string guided along the path of the game ball can be rubbed against the bent portion, so that the string can be quickly cut.

In the gaming machine H2, the bending portion is provided with a load means on the inner corner side of the bending, which does not apply a load to the game ball flowing down but applies a load to the object flowing backward.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effects of the game machine H2, it is possible to apply a load to the backflowing object (for example, a thread-like member) by the load means.

In the game machine H3, the game machine H4 is characterized in that the load means is arranged in a concave portion having a width smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect of the game machine H3, by preventing the game ball from entering the recess of the recessed part, collision between the load means and the game ball is avoided, and the load means is damaged. can be prevented.

A gaming machine H5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine H3 or H4, the gaming machine H5 comprises regulation means for regulating the movement of the load means to the outside of the foul ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H3 or H4, the restricting means restricts the outward movement of the load means in the foul ball passage. When a load is applied, it is possible to prevent the load applied to the on-line member from weakening due to the deformation of the load means to the outside of the foul ball passage.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H5, a receiving tray is provided as a tray on the front side of the front door for the foul balls to reach first, and the receiving tray is a portion for discharging the game balls paid out from the payout device. The game machine H6 is characterized in that the ball discharge part is arranged above the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines H1 to H5, the game balls paid out from the payout device pass in front of the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage. To reduce the durability of the string by intentionally hitting the put out game ball to apply the load when the string guided to the game area is used to apply the load to the other game ball. be able to.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H6, the lower end of the put-out ball discharge part that discharges the game balls put out from the pay-out device to the receiving tray, which is the tray where the foul balls reach first on the front side of the front door. , a game machine H7 characterized by being positioned below the lower end of the discharge-side exit of the foul ball passage.

According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines H1 to H6, a cheating act was performed in which a string guided to the game area through the foul ball passage was used to apply a load to the other game ball. In this case, the thread can be easily damaged by the game balls that are paid out.

<Structure of board holding down. Game machine I>
A game means used during a game, and a receiving means which is open on one side facing the game means and capable of receiving the game means from the one side, the receiving means receives the game means. A state changing means is provided for changing the gaming means from the unusable state to the usable state, wherein the state changing means changes the gaming means to the usable state. A gaming machine I1 characterized by comprising an approach means for approaching the game means from the one side when setting the above.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the state changes between a fixed state in which the game board is rotatable in a rotational direction parallel to the front surface of the game board and the game board is fixed to the inner frame, and a released state in which the game board can be removed from the inner frame. There is a game machine provided with a fixing means for holding (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2005-230420). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the fixing means is configured to be able to change its state only after the game board is pushed into the position of the use state. Therefore, there is a problem that the work efficiency may be lowered.

On the other hand, according to the game machine I1, since the state changing means has a means for approaching the game means from the receiving side (one side) when the game means is put into use, the pushing of the game board is prevented. Even if it is incomplete, the approaching means contacts the game board and applies a pushing force, thereby exerting an effect that the game board can be pushed to the use state position.

In the game machine I1, the state changing means displaces the game means to the one side as the game means is changed to an unusable state. .

According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effects of the game machine I1, the game means is displaced to the receiving side (one side) as the game means is changed to the unusable state, so that the game means can be removed. It is effective in improving the working efficiency of the work.

In the game machine I1 or I2, the state changing means makes the game means unusable and the proximity means retreats to the outside of the game means. Gaming machine I3.

According to the game machine I3, in addition to the effects of the game machine I1 or I2, the proximity means retracts to the outside of the game means, so that it is possible to improve the working efficiency of the work of removing the game means. Since this is performed along with disabling the means, the working efficiency can be further improved.

In any one of the game machines I1 to I3, the game machine I4 is provided with contact means for receiving a load from the game means when the state changing means is changed to the usable state.

According to the game machine I4, since the contact means receives a load from the game means to change the state of the state changing means to the usable state, the operation of pressing the game means against the state changing means causes the usable state as a series of flows. can change state to

In the game machine I4, the game means is supported by a shaft on one side of the receiving means and is received by the receiving means by approaching the other side, and the state changing means is the receiving means. A gaming machine I5 characterized in that it is arranged on the other side of the.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effects of the game machine I4, it is possible to efficiently apply a load to the contact means through the game means by utilizing the width dimension of the game means.

In any one of the game machines I1 to I5, there is provided blocking means for blocking the opening on the one side of the receiving means, the blocking means being unusable by the state changing means making the game means unusable. The gaming machine I6 is characterized by comprising a closing regulation part that prevents the opening on one side of the gaming means from being closed when the state is maintained.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the state changing means puts the gaming means into a usable state depending on whether or not the closing means can close the opening on one side of the gaming means. You can decide whether to As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the closing means closes the opening on one side of the game means even though the game means is maintained in an unusable state.

<The reverse cup and harness band prevent the piano wire from getting stuck. Game machine J>
A game means used during a game, and a receiving means which is open on one side facing the game means and capable of receiving the game means from the one side, the receiving means being connected to the game means. A game machine J1, characterized in that it comprises an arranging means arranged on a path that communicates with the outside, wherein the arranging means is constructed so as to be capable of suppressing entry of an object from the outside at a plurality of points.

In game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine equipped with a fraud prevention unit for preventing fraud against fraudulent acts of inserting a piano wire from the rotating shaft side of the front frame (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-26573. ). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, there is only one anti-fraud section, and there is a problem that the anti-fraud effect is not sufficient.

On the other hand, in the game machine J1, the arranging means is arranged in the path where the piano wire is likely to be inserted, and the arranging means is configured to be capable of suppressing the entry of the piano wire at a plurality of points, thereby preventing fraud. can improve the effect of

In the gaming machine J1, the placement means is different in first means for suppressing entry of members from the outside at a first location and second means for suppressing entry of members from the outside at a second location. A game machine J2 characterized by suppressing entry of a member from the outside by a method.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1, the arrangement means differs in the method of suppressing the entry of members from the outside between the first location and the second location. Entry of members from the outside can be further suppressed as compared with the case where the number of is increased.

In addition, the method of suppressing the intrusion from the outside is not limited at all. For example, a method of restricting entry by blocking a route, or a method of suppressing fraudulent activity by detecting heat and sounding an alarm may be used.

In the game machine J1 or J2, the game machine J3 is characterized in that the arrangement means comprises an intrusion control portion formed in a cup shape that opens outward of the receiving means.

According to the game machine J3, in addition to the effects of the game machine J1 or J2, the intrusion control portion is formed in the shape of a cup, so that the intruding member can be prevented from further intrusion.

In the game machine J3, the arrangement means includes support means for supporting electric wiring, and the support means is arranged downstream of the entry control section in a route from the outside to the game means. Characterized game machine J4.

According to the game machine J4, in addition to the effects of the game machine J3, when a fraudulent act of penetrating the entry control portion with high heat occurs, changes in the wiring caused by the high heat (disconnection due to heat, etc.) are detected. It is possible to easily produce the effect of suppressing the entry of the member.

In any one of game machines J1 to J4, game machine J5 is characterized in that said placement means comprises elimination means for guiding a member entering from the outside to an elimination area far from the game means.

According to the game machine J5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines J1 to J4, the member entering from the outside is guided to the resolution area far from the game means by the arranging means. Even if the degree becomes stronger, it is possible to prevent the members entering from the outside from reaching the game means.

<Structure of five decorative plates. Including fraud prevention. Game machine K>
a first means and a second means arranged oppositely along a first direction and connected by at least one side; A gaming machine comprising a third means for connecting the first means and the second means, wherein the connection direction of the connecting part is set in a second direction that intersects the first direction A gaming machine K1 characterized by:

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, first means and second means arranged to face each other and connected on at least one side, and disposed between the first means and second means along the first direction There is a gaming machine comprising a third means that However, in the above-described conventional game machine, each member is connected by an existing method such as adhesion or screwing, and when the first means and the second means are connected, the load along the first direction is the first. There is a problem that the third means may be damaged by being hung up on the third means.

On the other hand, according to the game machine K1, since the connecting direction of the connecting portion connecting the first means and the second means is set to the second direction intersecting the first direction, the third means It is possible to reduce the load applied from Thereby, it is possible to prevent the third means from being damaged.

A game machine K2 characterized in that, in the game machine K1, the connecting portion is arranged apart from the third means.

According to the game machine K2, in addition to the effects of the game machine K1, it is possible to prevent the load from being applied to the third means from the connecting portion.

The gaming machine K1 or K2 comprises connected means connected and fixed to other sides of the first means and the second means, wherein the one side of the first means and the second means is connected to the connected means A gaming machine K3 characterized by being connected by displacing the second means with respect to the first means in a third direction of approaching and fitting them to each other.

According to the game machine K3, in addition to the effects of the game machine K1 or K2, it is provided with a connected means connected to the other sides of the first means and the second means, and one side of the first means and the second means are connected and fixed by fitting caused by displacing the second means with respect to the first means in the third direction close to the connected means, so that the first means and The resistance to decomposition of the second means can be improved.

A gaming machine K4 characterized in that, in the gaming machine K3, the one side of the first means and the second means are arranged to be exposed to the outside.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effects of the game machine K3, one side of the first means and the second means are arranged to be exposed to the outside, so that the state of the fitting portion can be easily confirmed. be able to. Thereby, even if a fraudulent act of breaking the fitting portion and disassembling the first means and the second means occurs, the fraudulent act can be detected early.

In the game machine K3 or K4, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed to the connected means, and the fastening and fixing direction is the same as the third direction. .

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K3 or K4, the fastening direction between the first means and the second means and the connected means is set in the same direction as the third direction. The tightening strength can reinforce the fitting strength.

In any one of game machines K3 to K5, light irradiation means for irradiating light toward said first means or second means side and fixed to said connected means, and one of said first means or second means a light guiding means fixed to a member of the light emitting means and capable of introducing the light emitted by the light emitting means.

According to the game machine K6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines K3 to K5, it is possible to prevent positional deviation between the first and second means and the light guide means.

A game machine K7 characterized in that a game machine K7 is characterized by comprising contact means for surface contact in a region facing the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means.

According to the game machine K7, in addition to the effects of the game machine K6, a space corresponding to the size of the abutting means is maintained in the opposing region between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means. can be done. This prevents the gap between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means from changing when the first means or the second means receives a load in the opposite direction and is displaced. can be done.

This prevents the positional relationship between the first means, the second means, and the light guide means from changing even if the first means or the second means receives a load in the opposing direction when an illegal attempt is made to disassemble the first means or the second means. can do.

<Point L for utilizing curved light guiding means. As a point, unachieved>
A light guide means formed in a curved wave shape when viewed in an irradiation direction of light passing through the interior, and a projecting means arranged opposite to the light guide means and onto which the light that has passed through the light guide means is projected, The game machine L1 is characterized in that the projected means comprises a concave facing portion arranged to face the concave surface portion of the light guide means, and a convex facing portion arranged to face the convex surface portion of the light guiding means.

2. Description of the Related Art Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine equipped with a light guide plate that uniformly emits light from an end surface (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the light guide plate is formed in the shape of a flat plate, it is necessary to change the intensity of the incident light in order to partially change the intensity of the surface-emitting light. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, since the projected means has the concave surface facing portion and the convex surface facing portion, even if the intensity of the light incident on the light guide means is constant, the concave surface facing portion and the convex surface facing portion It is possible to change the light emission intensity of the projection target means depending on the part.

In the game machine L1, the projection target means is characterized in that the concave surface facing portion is made of a light-transmitting material, and the convex surface facing portion is made of a material that is less likely to transmit light than the concave surface facing portion. Gaming machine L2.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L1, by intentionally weakening the intensity of the light transmitted through the convex facing portion, the light emitted from the light guiding means is condensed at the concave facing portion. The production effect of the production by the light can be improved.

In the gaming machine L2, a reverse projection means is provided on the opposite side of the projection target means with the light guide means therebetween, and the light passing through the light guide means is projected. A gaming machine L3, wherein a portion of the light means facing the concave surface and a portion of the light guiding means facing the convex surface are made of a material having substantially the same light transmittance.

According to the game machine L3, in addition to the effects of the game machine L2, the part of the counterprojection means arranged to face the concave surface of the light guide means and the part arranged to face the convex surface of the light guide means emit light. Since they are made of a material with substantially the same transmittance, by making the same light incident on the light guiding means, the rendering mode of the light visually recognized through the means to be projected and the rendering mode of the light visually recognized through the opposite projection means can be achieved. can be different from

<Arrangement structure of the bass reflex speaker. Game machine M>
first means and second means arranged opposite to each other and fixed to form an internal space in the fixed state; acoustic means disposed so as to enter at least a portion of the internal space; A gaming machine M1, characterized by comprising bending means for constructing a bending path in an internal space.

2. Description of the Related Art Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there are game machines in which speakers are arranged at both left and right ends of a front frame, and effects are produced by sounds output from the speakers (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-16088). In such a game machine, the vibration wave that advances toward the back side of the speaker body is advanced to the left-right center position of the game machine and sent out to the outside of the game machine. , there is a problem that the path length of the vibration wave is defined by the horizontal width of the game machine.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, since the bending means constitutes a curved path in the internal space of the first means and the second means, by configuring a path longer than the length of one piece, the By removing the restriction on the left-right width, it is possible to make the vibration wave travel an arbitrary distance.

In the gaming machine M1, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed in such a manner that loads are applied in opposite directions, and the bending means is a rib-like member extending from at least one of the first means and the second means to the other. A gaming machine M2, characterized in that it has a protruding part protruding from the second means, and a protruding tip of the protruding part abuts on the other of the first means and the second means.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M1, the projecting tip of the projecting portion and the other of the first means or the second means are connected in the direction in which the fastening force is applied to the first means and the second means. It is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the projecting portion and the other of the first means and the second means due to the fastening and fixing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fluid such as vibration waves from passing through the gap in the curved path.

In the game machine M1 or M2, an opening connecting the internal space and the outside is provided, and the opening is passed through the opening to the internal space and the outside and is connected to the sound means. A gaming machine M3 characterized in that it is closed by

According to the game machine M3, in addition to the effects of the game machine M1 or M2, the opening is closed by the passing member connected to the sound means, so it is not necessary to prepare an additional closing member. The walls forming the internal space can be closed appropriately in a state where the passage member passes from the internal space to the outside.

The gaming machine M4, wherein the opening is arranged closer to the sound means than the protruding portion in the gaming machine M3.

According to the game machine M4, in addition to the effects of the game machine M3, when the wiring of the sound means is passed from the internal space to the outside through the opening, the wiring of the sound means is prevented from being caught by the projecting portion and broken. be able to.

In any one of game machines M1 to M4, support fastening means to which at least one of the first means and second means is fastened and fixed, and presentation means arranged below the support fastening means for performing presentation accompanying a game. and wherein the effect means supports the support fastening means from below.

According to the game machine M5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines M1 to M4, the supporting and fastening means is supported by the effect means from below, so that the supporting and fastening means does not have to press the space used for the effect. things can be adopted.

<Movable unit, reverse rotating flower. Petals that stop on the way. Game machine N>
a base member, a first displacement means displaceably supported by the base member, a driving means for applying a driving force to the first displacement means, a following state in which the first displacement means is displaced in a displacement direction; and a second displacement means switchable between a non-following state displacing in a direction different from the displacement direction of the first displacement means, wherein at least the second displacement means is in the following state, A game machine N1, further comprising third displacement means for displacing in a direction opposite to a displacement direction of said second displacement means by a driving force of said driving means.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, as the first displacement means expands and contracts, the second displacement means displaces in the direction of the expansion and contraction of the first displacement means, while the first displacement means operates in the vicinity of the extension end. When doing so, there is a game machine in which the second displacement means is displaced in a direction different from the expansion and contraction direction of the first displacement means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229580). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the directions of displacement of the first displacement means and the second displacement means are the same when the first displacement means expands and contracts, the performance becomes slow and the performance effect is not sufficient. there was a point

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, at least in the following state of the second displacement means, the third displacement means is displaced in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means, so that the displacement speed of the second displacement means , can be visually recognized as a velocity based on the third displacement means. Therefore, compared with the speed at which the second displacement means is actually driven, the speed of the second displacement means that the player feels can be increased.

The gaming machine N1 is characterized by comprising resistance means for generating resistance against the displacement of the second displacement means, and the resistance means is configured to be able to change a switching point between the following state and the non-following state. Game machine N2 to play.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1, the following state in which the second displacement means follows the first displacement means by the action of the resistance means, and the non-following state in which the second displacement means deviates from the following state. Since the switching point can be changed, it is possible to increase the types of modes of displacement of the second displacement means with respect to the first displacement means. Thereby, the production effect can be improved.

In the gaming machine N2, the resistance means is configured to be able to change the state of the second displacement means by using a driving force when operating the second displacement means in the non-following state. Game machine N3.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N2, the driving force for switching the state of the second displacement means can be generated by the driving means for driving the first displacement means. be able to.

A game machine N4 characterized in that, in the game machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is arranged so as to be visible from the front.

According to the game machine N4, in addition to the effects of the game machine N2 or N3, by configuring the resistance means to be visible, the resistance means has a function of changing the state of the first displacement means and is visually recognized by the player. It can also serve as a performance device.

The gaming machine N4 is characterized by comprising a rod-shaped shaft means fixed to the base member, the shaft means coaxially and rotatably supporting the first displacement means, the second displacement means and the resistance means. Gaming machine N5.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N4, since the shaft means functioning as the rotating shaft of the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means is fixed to the base member, the first displacement means, To prevent the displacement resistance from increasing excessively because the attitude of any one of the second displacement means and the resistance means changes, and the attitudes of the other members or means follow and change. can be done.

<Utilization of shell buttons and holes. As a point, unachieved>
In a game machine comprising first means and housing means capable of housing the first means, the housing means is an opening for receiving the first means when housing the first means. A gaming machine O1 comprising: a first opening; and a second opening having a width equal to or larger than a width of a gap between the first opening and the first means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that are provided with operation means that can be operated by a player and an upper plate that covers the operation means from below, and that the operation means moves up and down with respect to the upper plate. See JP-A-2012-048970). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when a foreign object is inserted into the gap between the upper tray and the operating means, there is a problem that the foreign object remains inside and may induce a malfunction. .

On the other hand, the gaming machine O1 is provided with the second opening formed with a width equal to or greater than the width of the gap between the first opening of the accommodating means and the first means. It can be easily removed to the outside of the means. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which foreign matter remains inside.

In the gaming machine O1, the housing means includes a support portion that supports the first means, and the second opening is arranged on the opposite side of the support portion with the first means interposed therebetween. game machine O2.

According to the game machine O2, in addition to the effects of the game machine O1, the second opening can be formed while maintaining the support strength of the support part.

A gaming machine O3, in the gaming machine O1 or O2, wherein the accommodating means includes a low water resistant portion having low water resistance, and the second opening is disposed around the low water resistant portion.

According to the game machine O3, in addition to the effects of the game machine O1 or O2, the water can be discharged outward along the second opening before the water reaches the low water resistance portion. That is, the second opening can be used both for the purpose of allowing a predetermined solid object to pass through and for the purpose of discharging a liquid such as water.

In any one of the game machines O1 to O3, a plurality of the second openings are formed, and the plurality of the second openings are configured from a shape based on a shape of the solid object projected in a different direction. A game machine O4 characterized by.

According to the game machine O4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines O1 to O3, the plurality of second openings are configured based on the shape of the solid object in the opposite direction. A solid object can be easily removed through the part.

A gaming machine O5 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the second opening is arranged closer to the player than the first means.

According to the game machine O5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines O1 to O4, the shadow of the solid object can be visually recognized by the player when the second opening is partially blocked by the solid object. can be made As a result, it is possible to make the player aware that the solid object is inserted between the first means and the containing means, thereby reducing the possibility that the solid object will continue to remain. .

<Points related to devising the shape of the bottom of the glass frame (front frame)>
A gaming machine comprising a first means and a first supporting means for supporting the first means, wherein the first supporting means comprises a projection-shaped portion projecting from a lower surface. P1.

Here, in game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine in which a glass frame (front frame) in which an operation handle is arranged is configured to be removable from an outer frame in which a game board is arranged (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-159837). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the bottom surface of the glass frame is formed in a flat shape, there is a risk that it may slip when the bottom surface is covered with a finger. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the game machine P1, the protruding shape part protruding from the bottom surface of the first support means functions as a part on which a finger is hooked, thereby suppressing the occurrence of a situation where the first support means slips down from the hand. Therefore, it can be improved from the viewpoint of ease of handling.

It should be noted that the arrangement of the protruding shaped portion is not limited at all, and it is sufficient if the protruding portion protrudes outward from the first support means. For example, it may protrude in the vertical direction, or it may protrude in the front side.

In the game machine P1, the second support means for detachably supporting the first support means is provided, and the protruding shaped portion is separated from the support position where the first support means is supported by the second support means. A game machine P2 characterized in that it is arranged in a row.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1, the projecting shaped portion is provided downwardly from the lower bottom surface at a position away from the position where the weight of the first supporting means is centrally applied as the supporting position. Therefore, it is possible to make the first support means easier to hold. This facilitates attachment and detachment of the first support means to and from the second support means.

In addition, the position away from the supporting position is not limited at all. For example, when the first support means is supported on the front side of the second support means, it may be positioned closer to the front side, or when the first support means is pivotally supported by the second support means at one end, the other position may be used. It may be positioned near the end, or it may be positioned on the opposite side of the pivotal support position with respect to the plate for storing the game balls.

In the game machine P1 or P2, the first support means includes a recessed shape portion that is recessed from the inside to the outside, and the first means leaves a gap between the recessed shape portion and the A game machine P3 characterized in that it is arranged opposite to the recessed shape portion.

According to the game machine P3, in addition to the effects of the game machine P1 or P2, the first means can It is possible to reduce the amount of powder (shaving powder, dust) that may be generated when the first means and the first support means rub against each other due to the positional deviation. In other words, it is possible to suppress the accumulation of powder and clogging of the movable portion, which causes malfunction, and the accumulation of powder in the detection portion of the detection device, resulting in erroneous detection.

In this way, the recessed shape part can be used not only during non-operation (for example, when the glass frame is opened to cancel an error, during maintenance, or when replacing the glass frame), but also during operation (for example, when playing games). It is effective even in the middle or in the game waiting state (demonstration screen display state, etc.).

The game machine P4 is characterized in that, in the game machine P3, the recessed shape portion is arranged inside the range where the projecting shape portion protrudes.

According to the game machine P4, in addition to the effects of the game machine P3, the portion where the recessed shape portion is formed can be prevented from becoming extremely thin compared to other portions and falling into insufficient strength. can. In addition, since the recessed portion is formed behind the projecting portion, the projecting portion can be flexed and deformed in the inward and outward directions. Cracking of the shaped portion can be suppressed.

In addition, the load applied to the projecting shaped portion includes, for example, the weight of the first support means that may be applied during transportation or temporary placement, the load applied when moving the first support means, and the load applied when the first support means is moved. An example is a load applied by a collision of objects (such as a thousand-ryo box) moved by a player or a store clerk near the support means.

In the gaming machine P4, the first means is a portion of the first support means outside the recessed shape portion and is supported in a manner of contacting the overlapping portion that overlaps the projecting shape portion in the inward and outward directions. A game machine P5, characterized by comprising a contact means, and an operating portion positioned on the contact means and configured to be operable by a player.

According to the game machine P5, in addition to the effects of the game machine P4, while maintaining the effect of the recessed shape portion, it is possible to sufficiently secure the support thickness of the overlapping position that supports the abutting means. It is possible to suppress deformation of the first support means during operation.

In the gaming machine P5, the abutting means includes impact damping means that is continuously formed between the operation part and is capable of attenuating impact, and the impact damping means is located in the recessed shape part. A gaming machine P6 characterized in that it is formed with a width that is shorter than the width.

According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P5, the impact transmitted from the operating portion to the contact means can be attenuated by the impact attenuation means, and in addition, the distance between the impact attenuation means and the overlapping portion is increased. Therefore, the impact can be attenuated also by the deformation (deflection) of the contact means.

Various aspects are exemplified as the impact attenuation means. For example, it may be a mass member formed of a flexible material, an elastic member such as a coil spring, a device such as a damper, or a damping device.

In any one of the game machines P3 to P6, the concave shape portion has a first portion facing the first means and a second portion extending from the first portion, wherein the first portion The gaming machine P7 is characterized in that the second portion is formed to have a greater degree of depression than the second portion.

According to the game machine P7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines P3 to P6, a sufficient space is provided in the first part, which is expected to be given a large load, and compared with the first part. By forming the space of the second portion, which is expected to receive a small load from the bottom, to be small, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the concave portion while maintaining high durability.

The degree of recess includes, for example, the depth of recess (the greater the degree of recess, the deeper) and the width of the recess (the greater the degree of recess, the wider).

In addition, when the structure of the first means is complicated and the load applied to the portion facing the first means is smaller than that of the other portions, a concave shape corresponding to the other portions may be used. The recessed degree of the portion may be formed to be large.

Moreover, the recess shape portion may be designed based on, for example, the magnitude of the frequency of occurrence of the load, without being limited to the magnitude of the load. In this case, the frequency of occurrence of the load may be based on the magnitude of the frequency of occurrence during the entire business hours of the game parlor, or the frequency of occurrence in a predetermined state of the gaming machine (a predetermined effect state, a game state such as a specific game state). may be used as a reference.

In any one of the game machines P1 to P7, the protruding portion is formed along the front-rear direction below the bottom portion of the first support means, and the formation range becomes wider toward the front. Gaming machine P8.

According to the game machine P8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines P1 to P7, the load resistance of the front part where the load concentrates when the first support means stands alone can be improved. The first supporting means can be stored for a long period of time without the first supporting means falling down even in a storage method in which the single supporting means is placed on the floor.

It should be noted that what is considered when designing the projecting shape is not limited to the weight of the first support means. For example, the shape of the protruding shape portion may be designed by considering the magnitude of the load generated when the first means is operated and the frequency of occurrence of the load.

The game machine P9 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines P1 to P8, the lower surface of the first support means is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined upward in a direction away from the second support means.

According to the game machine P9, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines P1 to P8, the first support means can be easily self-sustained by itself, and the contact portion with the floor is limited to the projecting shape portion. Therefore, it is possible to avoid contamination of portions other than the projecting shape portion.

<Points related to the deformation mode based on the support structure and shape of the scarf>
A gaming machine comprising operating means operable by a player, first supporting means for supporting the operating means, and second supporting means for supporting at least one of the first supporting means and the operating means, The game machine Q1 is characterized in that the first support means is deformable in a direction to narrow the gap between the operation means and the second support means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which operating means such as effect buttons are supported by a glass frame (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-106830). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, countermeasures against positional deviation occurring in the area around the operating means due to the load during operation of the operating means are insufficient. There is a problem that there is room for improvement from the point of view.

For example, when the player's weight is applied to the operation means and the operation means descends, the second support means also descends at the same time. At this time, the lowering distance of the front side portion of the second support means tends to be longer than the lowering distance of the operating means. At this time, a gap may occur between the operating means and the second supporting means in the front side portion due to the difference in the lowering distance.

On the other hand, according to the game machine Q1, even if the second support means descends excessively, the deformation of the first support means suppresses the formation of a gap between the operating means and the second support means. can do. That is, since the operating means can be allowed to descend excessively (sinking), the supporting mode of the operating means can be simplified.

Note that the operation direction is not limited at all. For example, it may be in a descending direction, an ascending direction, a pushing direction along the longitudinal direction, a rotating (turning) direction, or a combination thereof.

In addition, as a form of contact from the operation direction, various forms are exemplified other than the case where the normal line extending from the contact surface coincides with the operation direction. For example, the contact surface may be formed as a surface that spreads in a mortar shape (V-shaped cross section) in the operation direction. In this case, the operation direction can be moved toward the center of the bottom of the mortar (V-shaped) formed by the contact surface, and in addition, since the reaction force increases toward the center of the bottom, the operation means can be effectively supported. can be done systematically.

Also, a common support means for commonly supporting the first support means and the second support means may be provided. In this case, the first support means and the second support means may be connected (coupled, fitted) at a position opposite to the support position supported by the common support means.

In the game machine Q1, the first support means is made of a flexible material, and includes a support portion that supports the operation means, and a game ball that can be held. A game machine Q2 characterized by comprising a game ball holding portion connected to the game machine Q2.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a gap between the operation means and the game ball holding portion.

In addition, when the first support means is composed of a flexible member, or when it is connected to the operation means or the game ball holding portion in a floating structure, the vibration generated when the operation means is operated can directly affect the holding of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball held in the game ball holding part from being displaced every time the operation means is operated, thereby preventing abnormal noise from being generated.

Various modes are exemplified as the structure for preventing (suppressing) vibration transmission. For example, vibration transmission may be prevented in a first direction while vibration transmission is maintained in a second direction. In this case, by generating the vibration in the second direction, it is possible to deliberately generate an abnormal sound, and to execute a sound effect.

In the gaming machine Q2, the operation means includes an operation section configured to be operable by the player, and the first support means has a connecting position with the game ball holding section that increases with distance from the operation section. A gaming machine Q3 characterized in that it is arranged on the side.

In the game machine Q3, in addition to the effects of the game machine Q2, in the vicinity of the operation unit, which is a position that is likely to be displaced due to operation, the connection position is moved to the back side to reduce the absolute amount of displacement. While suppressing the occurrence of a gap between the ball holding part and the first support means, the connection position is arranged on the front side (closer to the player) in the remote part of the operation part, which is a position that is difficult to shift due to the operation. , the design can be improved.

In any one of the game machines Q1 to Q3, the operation means includes an operation portion configured to be operable by the player, a body portion supported by the first support means, and the operation portion and the body portion. and a connecting portion for connecting, wherein the operation portion is formed wider than the connecting portion, and the first support means is formed of a plurality of divided bodies, and is detachable in a direction sandwiching the connecting portion. A gaming machine Q4 characterized in that it is configured in a manner that even the connecting portion is surrounded.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, it is possible to facilitate the assembly of the first support means while sufficiently ensuring the size of the operating portion.

Various modes are exemplified for the method of fixing the first support means formed from the divided body. For example, a plurality of divided bodies may be connected to the operating means, or one divided body among the plurality of divided bodies may be connected to the operating means and another divided body may be connected to the divided body. You can let me.

Moreover, various aspects are exemplified for the fixing position and fixing manner of the divided body. For example, fitting may be used, or fastening may be used.

In the case of fastening, by fixing the divided body at a plurality of positions along the operation direction of the operation part, the impact generated when the operation part is operated can be distributed and received at the plurality of fixed positions. Since the durability of fixing the divided body can be improved, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of displacement of the first support means.

Furthermore, by setting the tightening direction to a direction that intersects (for example, is perpendicular to) the operating direction of the operating portion, the direction of the load due to the operation of the operating portion can be made different from the tightening direction of the fastening screw. It is possible to suppress loosening of the fastening screw due to impact during operation.

A game machine Q5 characterized in that, in the game machine Q4, a fastening direction of a fastening means for fastening the divided body intersects with an operation direction of the operation portion.

According to the game machine Q5, in addition to the effects of the game machine Q4, it is possible to suppress the load applied in the fastening direction when the operation unit is operated, so that the fastening by the fastening means is loosened during operation, and the divided body is fixed. can be prevented from being released.

Various modes are exemplified as the direction that intersects with the operation direction. For example, if the operation direction is a rotation direction along a circle centered on a predetermined rotation axis, the direction that intersects the operation direction is a direction that intersects a plane perpendicular to the predetermined rotation axis (for example, a predetermined rotation axis). direction along the axis of rotation) is exemplified.

Further, for example, when the operation direction is a direction along a predetermined straight line (push operation or pull-out operation), the direction intersecting the operation direction is along a plane intersecting the predetermined straight line. direction is exemplified.

In this case, when a plurality of predetermined straight lines (straight lines along the operation direction with a high proportion (frequency) of operations) are assumed during the game, at least The fastening direction may be set in a direction along one plane, or in a direction that intersects a plurality of planes, that is, a direction that intersects any of a plurality of predetermined straight lines.

In the gaming machine Q4 or Q5, the divided body has a plurality of fastening points, and a first plane including one fastening point and a second plane including other fastening points are configured as different planes. A gaming machine Q6 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q4 or Q5, even if a large load is applied to one fastening point (including the first plane), the other fastening points are simultaneously subjected to a large load. Therefore, it is possible to prevent simultaneous displacement of the split bodies and loosening of the fastening at both fastening points.

Note that the fastening portion of the divided body may be arranged at a portion where a load concentrates when the operating portion is operated. In this case as well, separate fastening points are arranged on a plane different from the plane on which the load is concentrated, so that it is possible to prevent the position of the divided body from being displaced or the fastening to be loosened due to the load during operation. can be prevented.

In any one of game machines Q4 to Q6, the operation means includes detection means configured to be capable of detecting a predetermined operation of the operation section, and the detection means is arranged at a position away from the division position of the divided body. A gaming machine Q7, characterized in that it is provided with:

According to the game machine Q7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines Q4 to Q6, the holding force tends to be insufficient at the split position, and when the operation part is moved along with the operation of the operation part at the split position, the operation part and the divided body may rub against each other and powder (such as dust) may be generated. can do. As a result, occurrence of erroneous detection can be suppressed.

In any one of the game machines Q4 to Q7, the operating means is an interference means for interfering with the divided body on the side of the divided body that separates in the dividing direction (approaching and separating direction) when the game is possible. A gaming machine Q8 characterized by comprising:

According to the game machine Q8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines Q4 to Q7, the interference means can suppress the displacement of the operating means with respect to the divided body in the dividing direction.

The interfering means may interfere with the operating means in the assembled state, but may be formed so as not to interfere with the operating means before entering the assembled state, for example, during assembly work. For example, if the split body is made of a flexible material, the split body can be bent during assembly work, so that interference with the interfering means can be easily avoided, and ease of assembly can be maintained. can do.

Further, for example, even if the divided body is made of a hard material, it may be constructed so as not to interfere with the interfering means in the process of assembling. That is, they may be formed in a shape that does not interfere with each other in the assembly direction (for example, in the direction in which the divided bodies are brought closer together for assembly) before fastening. In this case, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the divided body when the game is possible while securing the ease of assembly.

A gaming machine Q9 in any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q8, wherein the second supporting means comprises a recessed receiving portion that is recessed to receive the first supporting means.

According to the game machine Q9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines Q1 to Q8, the first support means is received in the receiving concave portion, so that the first support means is displaced under the influence of the positional deviation of the operation means. Even if they are displaced, the operating means and the first supporting means can be quickly returned to their original positions by the repulsive force from the receiving recessed portion.

A game machine according to any one of game machines Q1 to Q9, wherein the first support means is formed in a curved shape along a circle having a center of curvature radius arranged on the operation portion side of the operation means. Q10.

According to the gaming machine Q10, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q9, it is possible to secure a large area in which the operating section can be arranged, and in addition, when the player grips the operating section, it feels cramped. can prevent you from feeling As a result, it is possible to improve the design of the operating section and improve the operability of the operating section.

In any one of the game machines Q1 to Q10, the first support means includes streak-like portions processed into streaks for reinforcement, and the extending direction of the streak-like portions is formed in different directions for each region. A gaming machine Q11 characterized in that:

According to the game machine Q11, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines Q1 to Q10, the extending direction of the streaky portion is different for each region, so that the first support means having an anisotropic rigidity is provided. can be configured.

In addition, the design standard of the extending direction of the streak is not limited at all. For example, the shape of the first support means may be designed as an extending direction with a good yield, or if the load generated during operation of the operation means acts in different manners for each region, it is the best way to deal with the load. As the direction, the extending direction of the streak may be designed.

<Points regarding the support structure between the speaker and the substrate>
A game machine comprising vibrating means and light emitting means disposed at a position to which the vibration is transmitted and capable of emitting light, wherein the light emitting means has a displaceable width with respect to the vibrating means. gaming machine R1.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which speakers and light-emitting elements are arranged side by side (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-16088). However, the above-described conventional game machine has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of light emission effects.

More specifically, in the above-described conventional game machine, light-emitting elements (LEDs, fluorescent lamps, discharge tubes, etc.) are arranged behind the speakers in order to prevent the board from receiving the vibrations of the speakers. In the place where it is, it becomes dark because the light emission effect cannot be performed. In this case, in the front area where the game machine is likely to be visually recognized, the area in which the game can be produced brilliantly is narrowed. In the first place, game machines represented by pachinko machines and the like generally have their sizes determined according to standards, so it is recognized that securing a light emitting area is an important issue.

On the other hand, according to the game machine R1, since the light emitting means has a displaceable width with respect to the vibrating means, the light emitting means can receive the vibration of the vibrating device. can be brought closer to As a result, the front area can be visually recognized brightly regardless of the vibrating portion of the vibrating means.

In addition, the mode of the vibration means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an acoustic device capable of outputting sound, or an operation device having a built-in vibration device. Further, the means is not limited to the means capable of actively vibrating, and means configured to be able to vibrate (passively vibrate) against the load of an external force may be used.

Various modes are exemplified as the acoustic means. For example, there are a vibrating membrane provided in a speaker, an outlet for discharging the back pressure of vibration of the speaker seen in a bass-reflex type speaker, and a path connected from the vibrating portion to the outlet.

The vibrating device may be a rotationally driven vibrating device (for example, a vibrator) or a vibrating device that generates vibration by linear driving (for example, a voice coil motor).

In addition, the form of close arrangement is not limited at all, as long as the player can visually recognize the light of the light emitting means. For example, the light emitting means may be stacked on the vibrating means. It may be in the direction of inclination.

A game machine R2 comprising a plurality of said vibrating means, a light emitting substrate on which said light emitting means are arranged, and said light emitting substrate being stacked on said plurality of said vibrating means in said gaming machine R1. .

According to the game machine R2, in addition to the effects of the game machine R1, the light-emitting substrate tends to be displaced (vibration, displacement, etc.) due to the vibration generated when the vibrating means outputs sound. Since it is possible to change the presentation mode of the light emitting means, the displacement mode of the light emitting substrate can be varied by changing the vibrating means for outputting the sound. ) can be increased.

In addition, the number of light-emitting substrates may be one, or plural. When there are a plurality of substrates, at least one substrate for light emission should be laminated on a plurality of vibrating means. In this case, a combination of a light emitting substrate that is displaced by vibration generated by the vibrating means and a light emitting substrate that is not displaced can be provided.

In the game machine R2, holding means for holding the vibrating means is provided, the light-emitting substrate is not fixed to the holding means in the stacking direction, and the holding means moves the light-emitting device along the stacking direction. A gaming machine R3 characterized in that it is constructed so as to generate a load in a direction that suppresses the displacement of the game board.

According to the game machine R3, in addition to the effects of the game machine R2, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the light-emitting substrate and the holding means.

Note that the non-fixed mode is not limited to the case where the light-emitting substrate and the holding means are not mechanically connected. For example, even if the light-emitting substrate and the holding means are connected with screws, if the fastening force does not act (for example, simply preventing them from coming off), it can be said that they are not fixed.

Moreover, the expression "unfixed" does not assume that a large displacement is allowed. For example, by fixing two plate members that define the front and rear positions of the light emitting substrate to the holding means, the front and rear positions of the light emitting substrate are defined (the front and rear positions are stabilized and small vibrations are allowed), and the shape of the light emitting substrate determines the position of the light emitting substrate. By enclosing the direction orthogonal to the front and rear directions with a slightly larger frame-shaped frame member, it is possible to suppress displacement in directions (up, down, left, and right) different from the front and rear directions.

As a result, compared to the case where the light emitting substrate is fixed to the holding means like the vibrating means, the influence of the vibration generated by the vibrating means on the light emitting substrate can be reduced. can increase

In the gaming machine R2 or R3, a first member and a second member arranged on both sides of the light-emitting substrate in the stacking direction, fixing means for fixing the first member and the second member to the holding means, a regulating means for regulating moving directions of the first member and the second member in the stacking direction, wherein the fixing means advances toward the holding means along a direction inclined with respect to the stacking direction. A game machine R4 characterized by.

According to the game machine R4, in addition to the effects of the game machine R2 or R3, the direction in which the first member and the second member are stacked does not match the direction in which the fixing means advances, and the first member and the second member Since the movement of the fixing means in the direction of movement is restricted, even if the fixing by the fixing means is loosened (even if some of the fixing means are loosened), the displacement of the fixing means is relatively small. can reduce the displacement of the first member and the second member.

This makes it easier to maintain the positional relationship between the first member and the second member. In other words, it is possible to prevent the first member and the second member from separating or coming closer than expected.

In addition, various aspects are illustrated as an aspect to progress. For example, a rod-like member may be inserted through the through hole, or a fastening screw may be fastened to the screw hole.

In any one of the game machines R2 to R4, the light-emitting substrate has a first displacement area configured to be displaceable and a second displacement area whose displacement is suppressed compared to the first displacement area. A gaming machine R5 characterized by:

According to the game machine R5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines R2 to R4, the change in the light emission mode when the light emission substrate is displaced due to the vibration of the vibration means is changed for each area of the light emission substrate. can be made

Thus, by designing the mode of the light emitting effect in the first displacement area and the mode of the light emitting effect in the second displacement area in a different manner, an excellent effect can be achieved. For example, as the first refracting means for receiving and refracting the light emitted from the first displacement area, a surface emitting means for performing uniform light emission effect by surface emission is arranged, while receiving and refracting the light emitted from the second displacement area. As the second refracting means, an edge light emitting means is arranged to show the player a high-intensity light by totally reflecting the light incident from one edge and emitting it from the other edge. With this, it is possible to perform a novel light-emitting effect in which the light-emitting mode (for example, luminance) differs for each region.

In addition, the aspect of suppressing displacement is not limited at all. For example, the suppression mode may be defined by the positional relationship between the light-emitting substrate and the plurality of vibrating means, or the mode may be defined by the holding mode of the light-emitting substrate.

For example, regarding the positional relationship between a plurality of vibrating means and the light-emitting substrate, in an area that is equidistant from each vibrating means, the influence of one vibrating means is offset by the influence of the other vibrating means. , the displacement may be suppressed.

In any one of the game machines R1 to R5, a fastening screw for fastening and fixing and a facing portion arranged opposite to the head of the fastening screw are provided, and when the fastening screw is loosened, the head of the fastening screw is provided. A gaming machine R6 characterized in that the portion and the facing portion are arranged so as to be able to abut against each other.

According to the game machine R6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines R1 to R5, by regulating the progress of the fastening screw by the opposing portion, when the fastening screw is loosened, the fastening relationship is further deteriorated. can be prevented.

Various aspects are exemplified as to how to deal with loosening of the fastening screw. For example, when a fastening screw is loosened, it may be configured so that the looseness can be detected electrically. It may be configured so that when it is vibrated, an abnormal noise is generated and the looseness can be noticed, or the looseness can be repaired by regular maintenance without providing a special notification.

Any one of the game machines R1 to R6, comprising a first member and a second member arranged on both sides of the light emitting substrate, and connecting means fastened and fixed to the first member and the second member, The connecting means is configured in such a manner that deformation in a direction crossing the connecting direction occurs more easily than deformation in the connecting direction connecting the first member and the second member. Gaming machine R7.

Here, if the connecting means is constructed in a manner that allows deformation in the connecting direction to occur easily, the interval between the connecting positions will change in both directions, such as extending and contracting, and the advantageous and disadvantageous effects will occur in cycles. This is undesirable.

On the other hand, according to the game machine R7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines R1 to R6, the connecting means is deformed in the direction intersecting the connecting direction, so that the interval between the connecting positions is changed only to the side that shrinks. It is possible to preferentially generate a load in a direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other.

As a result, the load in the direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other can be increased only when the connecting means is deformed (for example, when a load is applied to the connecting means). While the load in the facing direction of the member and the second member is set low, the load in the direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other can be increased only when the light-emitting substrate is easily shaken by the vibration of the vibrating means. Suppression of shaking of the substrate can be achieved.

It should be noted that the manner in which deformation occurs easily in a predetermined direction is not limited at all. For example, the shape of the connecting means may be formed so that the thickness differs in each direction, or the size of the load applied to the connecting means may change in each direction.

Moreover, the mode of switching the load in the pressing direction is not limited at all. For example, a drive device may be provided to displace either the first member or the second member. According to this, the load in the direction of pressing the first member and the second member against each other can be changed at any timing by controlling the driving device.

In any one of game machines R1 to R7, the vibrating means is configured to change the direction of vibration between a first direction along the displaceable width and a second direction crossing the first direction. Characterized game machine R8.

According to the game machine R8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines R1 to R7, it is possible to configure a plurality of types of effects of the vibration of the vibration means on the light emitting means.

<Technical concept of side light emitting means. Edge light travels to the side and back of the member>
Light emitting means configured to be capable of emitting light, and light guiding means capable of guiding light, wherein the light guiding means guides the light emitted from the light emitting means in a first mode. A gaming machine S1 comprising light guiding means and second light guiding means for guiding the light emitted from the light emitting means in a mode different from the first mode.

Here, in game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured to allow LED light to enter from the end of a plate-shaped member and to be emitted from the surface of the plate-shaped member (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-159875 (see Gazette). However, the conventional game machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the effect of the lighting effect.

More specifically, as in the above-described conventional game machine, when the LED board formed from a flat plate is used to perform the lighting effect, the board can be made cheaper, which helps to reduce the cost. It was difficult to achieve both

That is, a difference in light emission mode (brightness, intensity, luminance, etc.) occurs between a position closer to the LED and a position farther from the LED, which tends to reduce the performance effect. It is possible to increase the number of LEDs in areas that tend to be (dark), but in that case, the number of LED elements required for the effect will increase with respect to the area of the LED substrate, resulting in hindrance to cost reduction. It will be. Therefore, it was unavoidable to choose between improvement in performance effect and cost reduction.

On the other hand, according to the game machine S1, since the light guide means is configured to be able to guide the light from the light emitting means in different modes, even if the distance with respect to the light emitting means is different, the presentation effect is lowered. (change) can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to improve from the viewpoint of the production effect of the lighting production while reducing the cost.

Various modes are exemplified as modes of the light guiding means. For example, it may be a light-transmitting member made of a colorless or colored transparent member, a member that emits light in a nearly uniform manner like frosted glass, or a member formed by hardening a milky-white resin or the like. It may be a white member that is transparent, a member that allows light to pass through a gap similar to a screen door or a shoji, a member that projects (projects) a display on the member itself similar to a transmissive liquid crystal, or others. The member of the mode may be used.

A gaming machine S2 in the gaming machine S1, characterized in that the light guide means is constructed so that the way of lighting changes step by step according to the difference in the distance from the light emitting means.

According to the game machine S2, in addition to the effects of the game machine S1, even when the substrate on which the light guide means is arranged is formed of a flat plate, the light guide means is configured in a plate shape forming a curved surface. In this case, it is possible to execute an effect of uniformly (uniformly) emitting light from the curved surface.

The game machine S1 or S2 includes housing means for housing the light emitting means, and a light emitting substrate on which the light emitting means is disposed, the housing means supporting the light emitting substrate and the light guiding means. is fixed at least at a first position; and shielding means configured to be able to shield between the light guide means and the player, and the first position is outside the outer shape of the shielding means. A game machine S3 characterized in that it is arranged in the direction of the game machine S3.

In the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1 or S2, the fixing at the first position can be loosened while the shielding means is still assembled, so the position of the light guiding means relative to the supporting means can be easily adjusted. can be adjusted. Therefore, it becomes easy to repair the misalignment between the light emitting means and the light guiding means, and the maintainability can be improved.

The mode of shielding by the shielding means is not limited at all. For example, while shielding the light guide means so that the player cannot touch it, it may be configured so that it can be seen, or it may be configured so that the player cannot touch or see the light guide means. You can

In addition, when the first positions are formed at a plurality of positions, all the first positions may be arranged outside the outline of the shielding means, or at least one of the plurality of first positions may It may be arranged outside the outline of the shielding means.

In the gaming machine S3, the light-emitting substrate is not fixed to the support means and the light guide means, the light guide means has a long plate shape, and the first position is the light guide means. A gaming machine S4 characterized by being arranged at an end in the longitudinal direction.

According to the game machine S4, in addition to the effects of the game machine S3, the light guide means is formed into a long plate shape, and the first position is arranged at the end in the long direction, so that the first position is loosened. By applying a load in the lateral direction of the light guide means, positional deviation of the light guide means can be easily corrected.

More specifically, the correction of the positional deviation of the light guide means is compensated for by deforming the light guide means in the lateral direction, or by slippage due to the application of a strong load. Even if only one end portion is loosened and the other end portion is kept fixed, it is possible to easily correct the misalignment of the light guide means.

In addition, in the case of the support mode in which the light guide means presses the light emitting substrate against the support means, the degree of support of the light emitting substrate by the support means can be weakened as the light guide means bends and deforms. Therefore, even if the light guide means is not removed from the support means, by loosening the fixing at the first position and bending and deforming the light guide means, the degree of support of the light emitting substrate can be weakened, and the light emitting substrate is loaded in this state. By providing , it is possible to correct the positional deviation of the light-emitting substrate.

In addition, the adjustment width of the position adjustment is not limited at all. For example, it is based on a design that is mechanically regulated so that the portion to be irradiated by the light guide means does not completely deviate from the outer shape of the light emitting means arranged on the light emitting substrate when viewed from the irradiation direction. The adjustment width may be enough to correct the positional deviation in (small adjustment width). The position of the light guiding means may be adjustable to a position where it is completely removed by sight (large adjustment range).

In this case, it is possible to change the aspect of the luminous effect visually recognized during the same effect while the light emitting means and the light guiding means have the same structure. In this case, for example, when a game machine with the same configuration is prepared so that it can be played with a different game feature (for example, when configuring a game machine with different specifications), without greatly changing the mechanical configuration of each part, Since it is possible to change the mode of the light emitting effect by adjusting the position of the light guiding means, it is possible to reduce the burden (for example, the cost) associated with the manufacture of the game machine.

In addition, the non-fixing mode is not limited at all. For example, a mode other than the case of being fixed by a fixture such as a fastening screw may generally be expressed as non-fixed. Also, the term "edge" is used to express the intention of avoiding being limited to the edge. In other words, the first position may be arranged at a position including the periphery of the ends in the longitudinal direction.

In the gaming machine S3 or S4, the shielding means is fixed to the supporting means, and the light guide means and the shielding means are configured to reduce relative positional deviation as the distance between them is shortened. A game machine S5, characterized in that it comprises a portion, and the positional deviation prevention portion comprises a fixing portion with respect to the support means.

Here, since it is necessary to connect electrical wiring to the light-emitting substrate, misalignment or chipping of the wiring directly affects malfunction of the light-emitting means. It is preferable that the substrate and the supporting means are configured so as not to be easily misaligned.

Considering the presentation effect, it is preferable that the position of the light guide means should be easy to align with the light emitting substrate, on the premise that it is not easily misaligned with the light emitting substrate. , it is also considered to be better to hold on the side of the support means. On the other hand, if there is a positional deviation between the light guiding means and the shielding means, the light guiding means and the shielding means may collide with each other, resulting in a poor appearance.

Since the shielding means is a portion that can be touched by the player, it is preferable to fix it to the supporting means as a base in consideration of strength. In this way, there were various forms of support expected for each means.

According to the gaming machine S5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S3 or S4, the positional deviation preventing portion facilitates the mutual positioning of the light guiding means and the shielding means during assembly without directly fixing them. In addition, it is possible to easily maintain the positional relationship between the light guiding means and the shielding means during the game.

In addition, the mode of the positional deviation prevention portion is not limited at all. For example, it may be concavo-convex that has the same shape and can be fitted, or the concavo-convex that can be fitted may be one whose shape along the assembly direction does not change, or a convex that tapers closer to the mating member. It may be composed of a shape and an expanding concave shape.

In any one of the game machines S1 to S5, the light guide means corresponds to a main body, a separate extension part extending from the main body to the side away from the light emitting means, and an outer shape of the extension part. and a facing extending portion extending toward the light emitting means with a cross-sectional shape of the A game machine S6 characterized by comprising a part.

According to the game machine S6, since it is possible to suppress the light emitted from the total reflection light-emitting portion from entering the portions other than the opposing extending portion, the separating extending portion and the opposing extending portion and the other portion can be suppressed. The boundary between the two can be clarified, and an effect of changing the mode of light (separating the light) can be executed at the boundary of a short width.

Note that the mode of total reflection is not limited at all. For example, it can be specified by the positional relationship between the light guiding means and the light emitting means, the direction of the irradiated light, the width of the irradiated light, the material and shape of the light guiding means, combinations thereof, and the like.

In the gaming machine S6, the light guide means includes a covering portion that covers the light-emitting substrate and an outer shape of the covering portion, and is formed in a frame shape similar to the outer shape of the light-emitting substrate. A gaming machine S7, characterized in that it comprises a frame portion that is connected to the frame portion, wherein the facing extending portion extends from the covering portion and is coupled to the frame portion.

According to the gaming machine S7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine S6, light can be incident on the frame from the connecting portion, so that the effect of the light emission presentation of the frame can be improved, and the opposing extension portion can be By functioning as reinforcing ribs, the strength of the light guiding means can be improved.

According to this, if the frame portion extends to the back of the light emitting means along the direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means, it is possible to perform an effect in which the side opposite to the emission direction is illuminated.

In the game machine S7, the opposing extension part is formed in an elongated shape along the covering part, is connected to the frame part at one end in the longitudinal direction, and extends from the frame part at the other end. A game machine S8 characterized by separating.

According to the game machine S8, in addition to the effects of the game machine S7, based on the design of the facing extension part, the end part where light can enter the frame part in the longitudinal direction and the end part where the light is restricted are separated. Since it can be constructed, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the light emitting effect using the frame.

In any one of the game machines S6 to S8, the light emitting means is arranged at the projected position of the facing extension portion and the separated extension portion, and the tip shape of the separated extension portion has an inclination angle with respect to the light irradiation direction. The game machine S9 is characterized in that the smaller the size, the closer to the ends of the cross-sectional shapes of the opposed extension portion and the separated extension portion.

According to the game machine S9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines S6 to S8, even if the tip shape of the separating extension part is inclined with respect to the plane of the light emitting substrate, the light emission intensity of the light emitting means is increased. is kept uniform, the light emitting performance can be performed without giving the player a feeling of discomfort. That is, the entire cross-sectional shape of the separated extending portion can be illuminated to the same extent.

<Technical concept of top lighting means. Points for changing the lighting method according to the distance from the light source>
a light-emitting means capable of emitting light, and a light-receiving means capable of receiving light, wherein the light-receiving means receives the light emitted from the light-emitting means in a first mode; A gaming machine T1 comprising a second light-receiving means for receiving the light emitted from the light-emitting means in a manner different from the first manner.

Here, in game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured so that LED light is incident from the edge of a planar member and emitted from the surface of the planar member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-159875 ). However, the conventional game machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the effect of the lighting effect.

More specifically, as in the above-described conventional game machine, when the LED board formed from a flat plate is used to perform the lighting effect, the board can be made cheaper, which helps to reduce the cost. It was difficult to achieve both

That is, a difference in light emission mode (brightness, intensity, luminance, etc.) occurs between a position closer to the LED and a position farther from the LED, which tends to reduce the performance effect. It is possible to increase the number of LEDs in areas that tend to be (dark), but in that case, the number of LED elements required for the effect will increase with respect to the area of the LED substrate, resulting in hindrance to cost reduction. It will be. Therefore, it was unavoidable to choose between improvement in performance effect and cost reduction.

On the other hand, according to the game machine T1, the light receiving means is configured to be able to receive the light from the light emitting means in different modes, so even if the distance with respect to the light emitting means is different, the production effect is reduced (change ) can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to improve from the viewpoint of the production effect of the lighting production while reducing the cost.

Various modes are exemplified as modes of the light receiving means. For example, it may be a light-transmitting member made of a colorless or colored transparent member, a member that emits light in a nearly uniform manner like frosted glass, or a member formed by hardening a milky-white resin or the like. It may be a white member that is transparent, a member that allows light to pass through a gap similar to a screen door or a shoji, a member that projects (projects) a display on the member itself similar to a transmissive liquid crystal, or others. The member of the mode may be used.

In game machine T1, game machine T2 is characterized in that the light-receiving means is constructed so that the way of lighting changes in stages according to the difference in the distance from the light-emitting means.

According to the game machine T2, in addition to the effects of the game machine T1, even when the board on which the light receiving means is arranged is formed of a flat plate, the light receiving means is configured in a plate shape forming a curved surface. In addition, it is possible to execute an effect of uniformly (uniformly) emitting light from the curved surface.

The game machine T1 or T2 includes housing means for housing the light emitting means, and a light emitting substrate on which the light emitting means is disposed, and the housing means is arranged to face one surface of the light emitting substrate. A game machine T3, further comprising partitioning means for partitioning an area defined by the partitioning means, wherein the light-receiving means is configured to change the lighting method for each area partitioned by the partitioning means.

According to the game machine T3, in addition to the effects of the game machine T1 or T2, the frame of the dividing means is arranged at the boundary where the lighting of the light receiving means changes, so that the lighting of the light receiving means can be changed rapidly. It is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity given to the player when the player is allowed to do so. As a result, even when the number of light-emitting substrates is small, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the light-emitting performance using the light-emitting substrates.

In the game machine T3, the game machine T4 is characterized in that the light-emitting substrate is supported by the partitioning means in a direction opposed to the biasing force applied to the light-emitting substrate so that the light-emitting substrate is aligned.

According to the game machine T4, in addition to the effects of the game machine T3, it is possible to facilitate the assembly work by facilitating the alignment of the light emitting substrate and the partitioning means. and the partitioning means can be suppressed from being misaligned.

In the game machine T3 or T4, the partitioning means has a through hole formed corresponding to the shape of the light emitting portion disposed on the light emitting substrate, and the light receiving means is an insertion through the through hole. A gaming machine T5 characterized by comprising a part.

According to the gaming machine T5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T3 or T4, the distance between the light-emitting portion and the light-receiving means can be narrowed without being affected by the size of the dividing means, and the light incident on the inside of the insertion portion can be reduced. Total reflection is facilitated, and reduction in the intensity of light emitted from the light emitting means can be prevented.

In the gaming machine T5, the partitioning means is provided with a non-insertion through-hole that is bored corresponding to the shape of the light-emitting portion arranged on the light-emitting substrate and does not receive the insertion portion, and the non-insertion through-hole is , a game machine T6 characterized in that it is formed in such a manner that an opening expands as it separates from said light emitting substrate, and is brought into surface contact with said light receiving means from the opposite side of said light emitting substrate.

According to the game machine T6, in addition to the effects of the game machine T5, the through hole through which the insertion portion is not inserted can be configured as means for emitting light emitted from the light emitting portion at a wide angle, and in addition, the light receiving means Light leakage can be suppressed by narrowing the gap between the .

In any one of game machines T1 to T6, a game machine characterized in that the light receiving means has a larger cross-sectional outline on a side farther from the light emitting means than on a side closer to the light emitting means. T7.

According to the game machine T7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines T1 to T6, the area where the player visually recognizes the light through the light receiving means can be made larger than the area where the light emitting means is formed. can be done.

In the gaming machine T7, the light-receiving means includes a light-conducting portion extending from the light-emitting means side, and a cut-out boundary surface portion intersecting with the light-conducting portion. The gaming machine T8 is characterized in that it is arranged at a position where the front-rear direction surface portion in the extending direction is shorter than the inclined surface portion.

According to the gaming machine T8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T7, even when the light receiving means is formed in a manner in which the outer shape of the cross-sectional shape increases toward the front, it is possible to form the punched boundary surface portion. Even so, the thickness of the light-conducting portion can be easily made uniform. This makes it possible to easily maintain total reflection over the extending direction of the light-conducting portion.

In the gaming machine T7 or T8, the light receiving means has a light conducting portion extending from the light emitting means side, and the light conducting portion is formed in a line shape including the base end portion of the insertion portion. Characterized game machine T9.

According to the game machine T9, in addition to the effects of the game machine T7 or T8, the light emitted from the LED of the light emitting means can be easily visually recognized as linear light (light in which light from a point light source is mixed). Therefore, the feeling of a point light source can be reduced without increasing the number of LEDs arranged.

<Point composed of two directions in which the fastening direction is inclined>
A gaming machine comprising first means and second means fixed to the first means by fixing means, wherein the fixing means includes first fixing means for generating a fixing force in a first direction; and second fixing means for generating a fixing force in a second direction that is inclined with respect to the direction.

Here, in game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine in which a front frame is configured by combining a plurality of structures with fastening screws that are inserted in the front-rear direction (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-41185). . However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the shape of the structure is regulated by the arrangement of the fixing means, and there is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the structure is reduced.

For example, when a fastening screw that is inserted in the front-rear direction is inserted through the fixing means, a light-emitting member such as an LED cannot be arranged at a position where the fastening screw is inserted in a cross section that interferes with the fastening screw when viewed from the front. That is, since the area where the fixing means can be arranged practically coincides with the limit position of the outer shape of the light emitting member, the size of the structure is limited to the position where the fixing means can be arranged.

In other words, the shape of the supporting plate that supports the light-emitting substrate from the back side must be larger than the light-emitting substrate by the size of the fixing means. This limits the size of the light-emitting substrate.

On the other hand, according to the game machine U1, since the insertion direction of the fastening screw for fixing the fixing means is composed of the first direction and the second direction that are inclined to each other, all the fixing means are aligned along the front-rear direction. As compared with the case where it is inserted, it is possible to ensure a wider performance area on the side that the player visually recognizes.

In the gaming machine U1, the fixing means is characterized in that the external surface is provided with a first surface formed along the first direction and a second surface formed along the second direction. Gaming machine U2.

According to the game machine U2, in addition to the effects of the game machine 1, since the outer surface is formed along the direction of the fixing force applied to the fixing means, even if the outer surface is likely to be deformed by an external force, sufficient resistance is provided. A force can be generated, and deformation of the outer surface can be suppressed.

A gaming machine U3, wherein at least one of the fixing locations of the fixing means is provided with suppressing means for suppressing a decrease in fixing force in the gaming machine U1 or U2.

Here, assuming that the first means and the second means are composed of a resin molded product, and that the resin mold for manufacturing is pulled out in one direction, the first direction or the second direction and the pulled-out direction are inclined to each other. Since it is inclined, there is a possibility that the fixing force of the first or second fixing means corresponding to the inclined side may be weakened.

On the other hand, according to the game machine U3, in addition to the effects of the game machine U1 or U2, the reduction of the fixing force can be suppressed by the suppressing means, so that the fastening screw used for fastening the fixing means can be used as a common part. can do.

In addition, the structure of the said suppression means is not limited at all. For example, it may be loosening preventing means for preventing loosening of fixation, or loosening restricting means for restricting further loosening when fixation loosening occurs.

In the game machine U3, the game machine U4 is characterized in that the suppressing means is provided with an informing means capable of informing of the fixation failure of the fixing means.

According to the game machine U4, in addition to the effects of the game machine U3, the notifying means notifies the fixing failure of the fixing means.

Note that the configuration of the notification means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a means for electrically notifying such as a detecting means such as a sensor, or a structural means for causing a change in appearance. Structural means include, for example, transmission change means for changing the transmission strength of vibrations generated inside the game machine to the outside of the game machine, light effect change means for blocking light emitted from the inside and generating shadows that can be seen from the outside, Vibration notification means for making the player aware of it by contacting the vibrating portion of the vibrating device to generate an abnormal sound or strengthen the vibration is exemplified.

In any one of the game machines U2 to U4, a third means disposed between the first means and the second means is provided, and the third means is a player between the first surface and the second surface. A gaming machine U5 characterized in that it is disposed between.

According to the game machine U5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines U2 to U4, the first means and the second means set the direction in which the resistance force can be generated as the component direction of the fixing force of the fixing means to a plurality of directions. Therefore, it is possible to easily hold the third means safely.

Note that the configuration of the third means is not limited at all. For example, the third means may be configured to allow the player to visually recognize the first means but not to visually recognize the second means. In this case, by setting the widening side between the first surface and the second surface to the first means side and the narrowing side to the second means side, a wide area to be visually recognized by the player is secured while the side not to be visually recognized is secured. The area occupied by the configuration can be narrowed.

The gaming machine U5 is characterized by comprising a fourth means disposed on the opposite side of the third means with the first surface interposed therebetween, wherein the first surface is formed to be inclined with respect to the front-rear direction. Gaming machine U6.

According to the gaming machine U6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U5, interference between the area occupied by the third means and the area occupied by the fourth means in a front view can be achieved. , a large area can be secured for placement.

A game machine U7 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines U1 to U6, the first fixing means and the second fixing means are arranged in pairs with a predetermined space therebetween.

According to the game machine U7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines U1 to U6, the first fixing means and the second fixing means are arranged in a set with a predetermined space therebetween. It is possible to avoid deformation along the direction in which the fixing force is generated from occurring in the other fixing means. That is, it is possible to suppress the deformation in the direction intersecting with the direction in which the fixing force is generated, so it is possible to avoid loosening of the fixing means.

<The rigidity of the game board assists the decrease in rigidity due to the notch (through hole) on the side of the back case>
In a game machine comprising a game board and facing means having edges facing the game board, the facing means has adjacent parts arranged close to the game board on the left and right edges of the game board. , and a gaming machine ZA1 characterized in that the forming aspect of the adjacent portion is left-right asymmetrical.

2. Description of the Related Art Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a game board that forms a game area and a back case in which movable units and the like are arranged (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-77627). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the internal space of the back case is eroded by the space occupied by the connection position between the game board and the back case, so it is difficult to secure a sufficient space for arranging the movable units and the like. There was a problem of difficulty.

In particular, in a right-handed machine that performs a right-handed game in a variable probability state (high probability state) or a jackpot game (special game state), the player's line of sight is often concentrated on the right side of the game area. It has been required to secure an internal space of the back case on the back side of the channel (the channel on the right side of the liquid crystal device) through which the hit game ball flows down.

On the other hand, according to the game machine ZA1, since the formation of the proximity portion is left-right asymmetric, the arrangement of the left and right edges of the facing means with respect to the game board can be made left-right asymmetric. Instead of sacrificing the internal area of the opposing means, it is possible to easily secure the internal area of either the left or right opposing means. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging the facing means with respect to the game board, to ensure sufficient space for arranging the movable units, etc., and to improve the degree of freedom in performance that is visually recognized by the player through the game board. be able to. For example, the vicinity of the edge of the game board (for example, the right-handed channel) can be illuminated by the light-emitting means of the moving accessory, or by the light emitted from the liquid crystal display device.

In addition, the form of formation of the proximity part is not limited at all. For example, it may be in contact with the game board, may be arranged away from the game board, or may be a combination thereof.

In addition, the formation mode of the proximity part is not limited at all. For example, it is possible to secure a wide area where the connecting part (contact part) used for connection with the game board is not formed, or to suppress the area occupied by the connecting part (contact part) and then the connecting part ( contact portion) may be arranged.

Moreover, the aspect of left-right asymmetry is not limited at all. For example, the area in which the proximal portion is formed may be asymmetrical, the direction of formation of the proximal portion may be left-right asymmetrical, and the functional portion provided in the proximal portion (the female screw to which the fastening screw is fastened and fixed may be The formation position, the formation direction (for example, the direction in which the insertion direction of the fastening screw is set in the front-rear direction, the left-right direction, or another direction) or the number of formations of the fastening portion to be formed, etc., may be left-right asymmetric.

In the game machine ZA1, the facing means includes an arrangement section in which the proximity section is formed at the end on the game board side and arranged to face each other in the left-right direction, and the proximity section is formed in the left-right direction with respect to the arrangement section. A gaming machine ZA2 characterized by being asymmetrically configured.

According to the game machine ZA2, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZA1, the area between the arrangement portions can be configured asymmetrically with respect to the game board. In addition, the form in which the formation direction is left-right asymmetrical is not limited at all. For example, the forming direction may be opposite to the left-right symmetrical direction (same direction for both left and right), or the forming direction may be a direction intersecting left and right (for example, a direction perpendicular to each other).

Examples of the direction of formation include the direction in which the plate-shaped portion extends (the direction in which it is provided), the direction in which the recessed portion is recessed as a notch (the direction in which it is cut), and the like.

In the gaming machine ZA1 or ZA2, the proximity portion includes a facing surface that faces the game board and a facing side that faces the game board, and is compared to the left side of the game board. The game machine ZA3 is characterized in that the portion of the game board facing the right side has a larger proportion of the facing side than the facing surface.

According to the game machine ZA3, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZA1 or ZA2, the lateral width occupied by the proximity portion can be narrowed on the right side of the game board compared to the left side of the game board.

A game machine ZA4 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines ZA1 to ZA3, the game machine ZA4 is characterized by comprising suppressing means for suppressing displacement of the game board or the opposing means in the opposing direction.

According to the game machine ZA4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines ZA1 to ZA3, the rigidity of the opposing means can be reinforced by the suppressing means. In addition, arrangement|positioning of a suppressing means is not limited at all. For example, it may be disposed at a position away from the game board (including a position in contact with the facing means) or at a position away from the facing means (including a position in contact with the game board). However, it may be arranged at a position between the game board and the opposing means (including a position in contact with at least one of the game board or the opposing means).

A gaming machine ZA5 characterized in that, in the gaming machine ZA4, the suppressing means is arranged on the gaming board side.

According to the game machine ZA5, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZA4, it is possible to maintain the strength (ensure the rigidity) of the game unit as a whole without providing a special member for the opposing means.

A gaming machine ZA6 in the gaming machine ZA4 or ZA5, wherein the suppressing means includes an overlapping portion that overlaps the outermost side surface of the opposing means in a front view.

According to the game machine ZA6, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZA4 or ZA5, it is possible to prevent sacrificing the degree of freedom in the design of the inside of the game board. It is possible to maintain the strength (ensure the rigidity) of the game unit as a whole.

In any one of the game machines ZA1 to ZA6, the facing means includes a non-contact portion that does not contact the game board at the edge of the outermost side in the predetermined direction on the game board side. Characteristic game machine ZA7.

According to the game machine ZA7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZA1 to ZA6, the gap between the game board and the non-contact part can be used as a location for the driving device of the variable winning opening, and the driving device It can be effectively used as a path for wires connected to a winning sensor or a light-emitting device, or as a location for arranging a light-emitting device.

In any one of the game machines ZA1 to ZA7, the game board is made of a resin material, and the facing means includes effect means arranged between the game board, and the front end of the effect means A gaming machine ZA8 characterized in that it can be arranged on the front side of the front end of the opposing means.

According to the game machine ZA8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZA1 to ZA7, the arrangement space of the effect means can be extended to the front side.

<Various lighting modes for movable accessories>
A game comprising light emitting means for emitting light to a predetermined light emitting region, and displacement means configured such that a first position at least partially overlapping the light emitting region when viewed from a predetermined direction is included in at least a portion of a displacement section. The gaming machine ZB1 is characterized in that the luminous area includes a possible area configured to be visually recognizable in a plurality of types of luminous modes corresponding to the arrangement of the displacement means.

2. Description of the Related Art Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured such that a light emitting means and a displacement means overlap when viewed from the front (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-159178). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, there is a problem that the light emitting means and the displacing means are visually recognized individually, and the presentation effect using the overlap is insufficient. That is, since the displacement means is arranged on the front side of the light emitting means, the light emitting means is hidden by the displacement means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZB1, since the light emitting means is configured to be visually recognizable in different light emitting modes depending on the mode of the displacement means, it is possible to diversify the presentation modes.

The mode of the displacement means includes, for example, an arrangement mode of the displacement means, a displacement mode of the displacement means, an orientation (posture) mode of the displacement means, a light emission mode of the light emitting means provided in the displacement means, and the like. exemplified. Examples of the mode of arrangement of the displacement means include a case where the displacement means partially overlaps the light emitting means, a case where the displacement means entirely overlaps the light emitting means, and the like. Examples of the displacement mode of the displacement means include a case where the displacement means is displaced toward the light emitting means, a case where the displacement means is displaced away from the light emitting means, and the like. The orientation (orientation) of the displacing means includes a case where the front surface of the displacement means faces the light emitting means side, a case where the back surface of the displacement means faces the light emitting means side, a case where the surface between them faces the light emitting means side, and the like. exemplified.

The light emission mode of the light emitting means includes a mode in which the light emitting means that emits light toward the displacement means lights, blinks, or goes out, and a mode that the light emitting means that emits light toward the side away from the displacement means lights, blinks, or goes out. are exemplified.

In the game machine ZB1, the possible area is a first state in which the displacement means is arranged at the first position and a second state in which the displacement means is arranged at a second position different from the first position, The game machine ZB2 is characterized in that it is possible to configure a case where the light emission modes viewed from the predetermined direction are different.

According to the game machine ZB2, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZB1, the light emission mode can be changed by changing the position of the displacement means. can change suddenly.

In the gaming machine ZB1 or ZB2, the light emitting means includes a substrate on which a light emitting portion is arranged, and a refracting means arranged to refract the light emitted from the light emitting portion, and the substrate A game machine ZB3, wherein the refraction means includes a first refraction section which is arranged outside the possible area when viewed in a direction, and which overlaps the possible area when viewed in the predetermined direction.

According to the game machine ZB3, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZB1 or ZB2, the mode of the light visually recognized through the first refraction unit is changed by combining the light emitted from the light emitting unit and the color and brightness based on the displacement means. can be expressed by

Further, by narrowing the formation range of the substrate, it is possible to secure a region for arranging other components such as a driving device for generating the driving force of the displacement means and a space for displacing the displacement means.

In game machine ZB3, game machine ZB4 is characterized in that the displacement means has a larger displacement at a position overlapping with the possible area when viewed from the predetermined direction than displacement at other positions.

According to the game machine ZB4, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZB3, the displacement of the displacement means is suppressed at the position where the light emitting means occupies a large space, and the displacement of the displacement means is increased at the position where the space occupied by the light emitting means is small. Therefore, the degree of freedom of displacement of the displacement means can be maximized while reducing the space occupied by the light emitting means and the displacement means.

It should be noted that the magnitude of the displacement is not limited at all. For example, the absolute value of the displacement of the displacement means may be compared, the positive and negative values may be set in opposite directions for comparison, the displacement in a predetermined direction (component) of the displacement means may be compared, The comparison may include the number of members configured in the displacement means to be displaced.

In any one of game machines ZB1 to ZB4, the displacement means includes second light emitting means for emitting light in a manner visible from the predetermined direction, and transmitting means for transmitting light emitted from the second light emitting means. The gaming machine ZB5 is characterized in that the transmission means has a shape in which a width in a direction intersecting the direction of displacement of the displacement means changes along the displacement direction of the displacement means.

According to the game machine ZB5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines ZB1 to ZB4, the width of the light of the second light emitting means visually recognized through the possible area is determined by the position of the displacement section where the displacement means is arranged. can be changed by

A gaming machine ZB6 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB5, the possible area is arranged on the center side of a window that opens so that the liquid crystal display area can be visually recognized.

According to the game machine ZB6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZB1 to ZB5, the change in the lighting mode of the possible area can be used to guide the player's line of sight toward the liquid crystal display area.

Note that the manner of arranging the possible regions is not limited at all, and various manners are exemplified. For example, it may be scattered around the window (including the case where there is only one possible area), or it may be circular (arc) surrounding the window.

A game machine according to any one of game machines ZB1 to ZB6, comprising a board on which the light emitting means is arranged, and the board is not provided with a fastening means for fastening at an end portion on the possible area side. ZB7.

According to the gaming machine ZB7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB6, it is possible to secure a space for arranging the light emitting means on the side of the possible area, and to prevent the shadow of the fastening means from occurring in the possible area. can be avoided.

A gaming machine ZB8, wherein the gaming machine ZB7 is characterized by comprising a covering means covering a space between the possible area and the board when viewed from the predetermined direction.

According to the game machine ZB8, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZB7, the covering means hides the boundary position between the possible area and the board, so that the visibility of light is not deteriorated near the edge of the board. Even if there is, it is possible to avoid showing it to the player.

In game machine ZB7 or ZB8, board holding means for holding the board is provided, the board holding means is provided with a gap forming portion for forming a gap for facilitating assembly of the board, and the gap forming portion comprises: A gaming machine ZB9 characterized by being closed in an assembled state.

According to the game machine ZB9, in addition to the effect of the game machine ZB7 or ZB8, the gap forming part can facilitate the assembly of the board, while avoiding problems such as light leakage from the gap forming part. . Also, this gap forming portion may be used for engagement with another member and utilized for positioning of the other member.

In any one of game machines ZB7 to ZB9, the board is provided with a connector section to which wiring is connected, and the connector section is arranged at a position away from the end on the possible area side. Game machine ZB10.

According to the game machine ZB10, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZB7 to ZB9, by applying a load to the wiring connected to the connector part, a moment originating from the end on the possible area side can be generated. Therefore, even if the substrate cannot be taken out directly, the substrate can be easily taken out.

<Transmission of driving force to multiple members, switching between transmission and interruption>
Displacing means configured to be displaceable, driving means for generating a driving force for displacing the displacing means, and driving force generated by the driving means is configured to be able to be transmitted to the displacement means in a predetermined state. and transmission means, wherein the transmission means comprises a transmission part for transmitting a driving force to a predetermined transmitted part of the displacement means, and in a driving state of the driving means, the transmission part A gaming machine ZC1 characterized in that the displacement of the displacement means can be suppressed when it is not in contact with the part.

In game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine in which a cylindrical portion used for driving force transmission is guided by a concave portion of a displacement member, and the arrangement of the cylindrical portion corresponds to the posture of the displacement member (for example, See JP-A-2010-234152). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the posture of the displacement member is maintained by the support by the columnar portion, it is difficult to perform other effects using the columnar portion while the posture of the displacement member is maintained. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZC1, since the displacement of the displacement means can be suppressed even when the transmission part is in the non-contact state, the transmission part can be changed to another effect while the posture of the displacement means is maintained. can be used.

In addition, the aspect of a transmission means is not limited at all. For example, a single gear or a plurality of gears arranged between the displacement means and the driving means may be used, or a mechanism such as a slider crank or a cam in which a plurality of members interact with each other may be used.

It should be noted that the manner in which displacement can be suppressed is not limited at all. For example, it may be biased by gravity or an elastic force based on a spring member, it may be locked (engaged) by a claw-like member, or it may be restrained by coming into contact with a member functioning as a stopper. A mode in which the In addition, as suppressable, a mode of reducing the displacement of the displacement means, a mode of preventing (restricting) the displacement of the displacement means, and the like are exemplified.

In the gaming machine ZC1, the transmission means includes a formation portion formed along the movement locus of the transmission portion, and the formation portion is such that the transmission portion is non-uniform with respect to the displacement means in the movement direction of the displacement means. The game machine ZC2 is configured to be able to abut against the displacement means in a state of abutment.

According to the game machine ZC2, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZC1, the displacement of the displacement means can be suppressed by the contact between the forming portion and the displacement means, so that the stability of the arrangement of the displacement means against external force is improved. be able to.

In the gaming machine ZC2, the forming portion extends from the transmission portion along the displacement direction of the transmission means, and the distance between the displacement means is longer than the distance between the transmission portion and the displacement means. A game machine ZC3 characterized by being configured as follows.

According to the game machine ZC3, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZC2, in the direction in which the displacement means and the transmission means face each other, the part where the load is generated when the driving force is transmitted and the part where the load is generated when the displacement is suppressed are divided. can be shifted.

In the gaming machine ZC3, the displacement means includes a one-side functional part formed on one side of the transmitted part in the moving direction of the displacement means, and a moving direction other side of the displacement means on the transmitted part. The one-side functional part is formed on the same plane as the movement locus of the forming part, and the other-side functional part is arranged outwardly of the movement locus of the forming part. A gaming machine ZC4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine ZC4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZC3, the moving direction in which the movement is suppressed by the formation unit can be set to one side direction.

In any one of game machines ZC1 to ZC4, the displacement means comprises first displacement means and second displacement means different from the first displacement means, and the transmission means comprises the first displacement means and the second displacement means. A gaming machine ZC5 characterized in that the transmission mode to the displacement means is configured to be changeable for each operation section.

Note that the method of switching the transmission mode is not limited at all. For example, when the driving force is transmitted to one of the first displacement means and the second displacement means, the transmission of the driving force to the other may be interrupted. It is also possible to change the ratio of the applied driving force.

According to the game machine ZC5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZC1 to ZC4, one transmission means can displace a plurality of displacement means in different displacement modes.

In the game machine ZC5, the first displacement means is arranged on one side of the transmission means, and the second displacement means is arranged on the other side of the transmission means.

According to the game machine ZC6, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZC5, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in setting the combinations of the displacement modes of the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

In addition, the combination of the displacement modes of the first displacement means and the second displacement means is not limited at all. For example, it may include the timing at which the first displacement means and the second displacement means are synchronously displaced. It may be one that does not displace.

Moreover, in the case where the timing of synchronous displacement is included, the displacement mode may be changed by changing the relative speed of the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

A gaming machine ZC7, wherein in the gaming machine ZC5 or ZC6, the displacement direction of the first displacement means and the displacement direction of the second displacement means are set in opposite directions.

According to the game machine ZC7, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZC5 or ZC6, the first displacement means and the second displacement means can be mutually recognized in the common area, so that the first displacement means and the second displacement means can be mutually recognized. Effective performance can be executed even when the performance area displaced by the means is narrow.

In addition, the aspect of a 1st displacement means and a 2nd displacement means is not limited at all. For example, a plurality of displacement means that are stacked in front and behind may be projected into a common area at different timings, or the initial arrangement may be such that while stacking in front and behind, they pass through a common range during movement of a plurality of movable members. may be configured.

<Displacement of the stop position is prevented by the load generating part catching up and making contact>
In a gaming machine comprising first displacement means configured to be displaceable and second displacement means configured to be displaceable by displacing the first displacement means in a predetermined direction, the second displacement means comprises: a load generating section that applies a load along the predetermined direction to displace the first displacement means; the first displacement means includes a loaded section that receives the load from the load generating section; The portion is separated from the loaded portion during displacement along the predetermined direction, and is configured to contact a predetermined portion different from the loaded portion of the first displacement means. ZD1.

In game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine in which a cylindrical portion used for driving force transmission is guided by a concave portion of a displacement member, and the arrangement of the cylindrical portion corresponds to the posture of the displacement member (for example, See JP-A-2010-234152). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when the cylindrical portion moves excessively due to a problem with the drive transmission, the position of the displacement member deviates from the moving end, which may give the player a sense of discomfort. was there.

On the other hand, according to the game machine ZD1, the load generating portion separates from the load receiving portion during displacement and is brought into contact with a predetermined portion different from the load receiving portion, thereby causing excessive displacement of the second displacement means. However, it is possible to prevent the first displacement means from being placed in an unintended position.

In the gaming machine ZD1, the load generating section applies a load directed from the other side in the predetermined direction to the one side in a state in which the first displacement means is arranged at one end of the displaceable section. A game machine ZD2 characterized in that it is configured to be able to grant to.

According to the game machine ZD2, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZD1, when the first displacement means is arranged at one end in the predetermined direction, the load generating section moves the first displacement means in the predetermined direction. Since a load is applied in a direction from the other side to the one side, the first displacement means can be pressed against the end portion on the one side in the predetermined direction.

In the game machine ZD1 or ZD2, a driving means configured to drive the second displacement means is provided, and the load generation section hits the first displacement means on the other side in the predetermined direction from the loaded section. Game machine ZD3 characterized by touching.

According to the game machine ZD3, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZD1 or ZD2, the second displacement means can be mechanically stopped by the contact between the load generating part and the first displacement means, so that the driving force can be stopped. Even if the accuracy of the timing is low, the end positions of the first displacement means and the second displacement means can be easily kept constant. As a result, it is possible to suppress displacement of the first displacement means and the second displacement means from the terminal positions while abruptly setting the stops of the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

In addition, by providing a portion for taking countermeasures against rare occurrences such as excessive movement of the second displacement means at a location different from the loaded portion that receives the load in each driving force transmission, the loaded portion Even if the is deformed, the fail-safe function can be exhibited without problems.

A game machine ZD4 characterized in that in any one of the game machines ZD1 to ZD3, the game machine ZD4 is characterized by comprising a restricting means capable of restricting the first displacement means at one end in the predetermined direction.

According to the game machine ZD4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines ZD1 to ZD3, while the first displacement means is regulated at one end in the predetermined direction by the regulating means, the second displacement means is the second displacement means. It can be displaced independently with respect to one displacing means.

In addition, the aspect of a control means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a claw-shaped member that moves in and out in a direction that intersects the displacement direction of the first displacement means and engages, or may be restricted by the biasing force of gravity or an elastic member, or part of the second displacement means. It may be configured by

In any one of game machines ZD1 to ZD4, a detecting means configured to detect that the first displacement means is arranged at one end in the predetermined direction is provided, and the first displacement means A gaming machine ZD5, wherein the means includes a detected portion whose position is detected, and the load generating portion is in contact with the detected portion.

According to the game machine ZD5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines ZD1 to ZD4, it is possible to limit the portion damaged by the load at the time of contact to the detected portion.

By linking the life that can be calculated from the number of displacements (the number of times of driving) of the second displacement means and the durability of the detection piece, it is possible to determine detection failures due to breakage of the detection piece. It is possible to grasp the replacement timing (maintenance timing) of the displacement means.

In any one of game machines ZD1 to ZD5, the direction of the load applied from the load generation section to the predetermined section intersects the direction of the load applied from the load generation section to the load receiving section. A gaming machine ZD6 characterized by:

According to the game machine ZD6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZD1 to ZD5, it is possible to facilitate a plurality of motion directions of the first displacement means.

A gaming machine ZD7 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD6, the loaded portion and the predetermined portion are arranged with a predetermined distance in a direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine ZD7, in any one of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD6, the loaded portion and the predetermined portion are arranged at the same position when viewed from a direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction. and the predetermined portion can be narrowed.

<Technical concept of holding by using flexibility of follow-up means>
In a game machine comprising displacement means configured to be capable of displacing a predetermined area and follow-up means for following the displacement of the displacement means, prevention of preventing a predetermined part of the follow-up means from entering the predetermined area side A game machine ZE1 characterized by comprising means.

2. Description of the Related Art Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured so that flexible wiring is routed along the direction of displacement of displacement means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-157474). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, by setting the length of the wire in comparison with the displacement means, there is an advantage that the wire is less likely to bend when the displacement means is displaced. In order to prevent this, it is necessary to form a temporary fixing portion for temporarily fixing the wiring so that the wiring is not relatively displaced at various places on the displacement means. It is normal to take a long time to assemble because it is assembled by hand. As a result, there is a problem that the degree of freedom in design and assembly efficiency may be lowered.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZE1, the following means such as wiring is prevented from being displaced to the predetermined area side by the preventing means, so that the following means is prevented from rubbing against the displacement means and being damaged. can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the need to form a plurality of temporary fixing portions on the displacement means, thereby improving the degree of freedom in designing the displacement means and improving the assembly efficiency.

In the gaming machine ZE1, the preventing means supports the following means so as to be relatively displaceable in a predetermined direction in which a distance from the displacing means changes with displacement of the displacing means.

According to the game machine ZE2, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZE1, the prevention means supports the following means in a manner displaceable in the direction in which the distance between the prevention means and the displacement means changes as the displacement means is displaced. , the load applied to the following means can be reduced as compared with the case where the position of the following means is fixed by a fixing member such as a binding band.

In addition, the aspect of a prevention means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a columnar portion around which the following means may be wound, or may be a claw-like portion capable of sandwiching the following means. Further, when the prevention means is formed as a columnar portion, for example, the columnar portion may be formed as a fastening portion used for fastening and fixing members together, or may be used for alignment when assembling members together. It may be formed as a positioning portion.

Also, the form of the follower means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an electric wiring that supplies electricity to the displacement means, or a belt-shaped member that is displaced based on the displacement of the displacement means, and a figure or pattern is drawn on the surface, and the figure or pattern is visually recognized by the player. It may be a band-like effect member that assists the effect, or an elastic means such as a coil spring that generates an urging force that assists the displacement of the displacement means.

A gaming machine ZE3 in the gaming machine ZE1 or ZE2, characterized in that the following means is configured to be capable of supplying electricity to the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine ZE3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZE1 or ZE2, it is possible to favorably supply electricity to the displacement means.

In any one of game machines ZE1 to ZE3, the predetermined direction is a direction intersecting the direction in which the displacement means is displaced, and the following means is configured to surround the prevention means. A gaming machine ZE4.

According to the game machine ZE4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines ZE1 to ZE3, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the following means protrudes greatly to one side. That is, since the range in which the following means can be displaced can be arranged on both sides of the preventing means, the area where it is necessary to avoid interference between the following means and other members can be limited to the range around the preventing means. .

Further, it is possible to eliminate the need to construct a relief portion for allowing the following means to enter from the displacement end of the displacement means to the outside in the displacement direction. Thereby, the displacement means can be arranged in a space-saving manner.

In any one of the game machines ZE1 to ZE4, it comprises a shielding means for shielding at least part of the displacement means, and the following means is connected to the displacement means at a position inside the shielding means. Gaming machine ZE5.

According to the game machine ZE5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines ZE1 to ZE4, the shielding means can prevent the connecting portion between the following means and the displacement means from being visually recognized by the player. The term "inward" as used herein means an inward direction when the outer shape is an edge portion in a front view.

In the game machine ZE5, the displacement means is configured to be rotatable about a first axis, and the first axis is arranged at the outer edge of the shield means.

According to the gaming machine ZE6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZE5, while keeping the following means out of the player's field of vision, the amount of protrusion of the displacement means from the outer shape (outer edge) of the shielding means is secured. be able to.

In the game machine ZE5 or ZE6, the prevention means is arranged on a straight line that equally divides the rotatable angle of the displacement means about the first axis and that passes through the first axis. A game machine ZE7 characterized by.

According to the game machine ZE7, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZE5 or ZE6, the absolute value of the displacement amount of the following means can be suppressed.

The game machine ZE8 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines ZE1 to ZE7, the displacement means comprises a guide part for guiding the follow-up means in a direction away from the displacement trajectory.

According to the game machine ZE8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines ZE1 to ZE7, it is possible to prevent rubbing against the displacement means and improve the durability of the following means.

A gaming machine ZE9 in the gaming machine ZE8, wherein the guide portion extends in a direction orthogonal to the outer shape of the predetermined area.

According to the game machine ZE9, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZE8, the area occupied by the follower means can be narrowed in the vicinity of the displacement means, and the gap area through which the follower means can pass can be narrowed. The rigidity of the external means for holding the displacement means can be improved compared to when the gap is large.

In any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE9, the follower means is formed in a string-like or belt-like shape, one end of which is connected to the displacement means, the other end of which is connected to the game machine, and is directed to both ends. A game machine ZE10 characterized in that the game machine ZE10 is guided from one side of the predetermined area.

According to the game machine ZE10, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines ZE1 to ZE9, a load in a pulling direction can be applied from one side of the predetermined area at both ends of the follow-up means. As a result, the follower means as a whole can be balanced with the load applied from the guide section.

In any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE10, the following means is configured to be wound around the preventing means in a loosening direction when the displacement means is displaced from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position. Machine ZE11.

According to the game machine ZE11, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZE1 to ZE10, the displacement of the displacement means is absorbed by the slackness of the follower means, thereby suppressing excessive load on the follower means. can do.

In any one of the game machines ZE1 to ZE11, an arranging means for arranging the follower means between the displacement means and a positioning unit for aligning the arranging means is provided, and the aligning unit comprises the above-mentioned A game machine ZE12, characterized in that it is arranged outside the movement locus of the following means.

According to the game machine ZE12, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines ZE1 to ZE11, it is possible to prevent the alignment part from encroaching on the displacement space of the follower means, so that the follower means is provided with the displacement of the displacer means. can minimize the load that is applied.

In the gaming machine ZE12, the following means is configured to be wound around the preventing means, and the following means has a first displacement portion (weak displacement portion) and a larger displacement than the first displacement portion. and a second displacement portion (strong displacement portion), wherein the first displacement portion is arranged between the second displacement portion and the arrangement means.

According to the gaming machine ZE13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZE12, it is possible to limit the locations where the following means are likely to be damaged by coming into contact with the arranging means. As a result, it is possible to limit the locations where reinforcement is required, so that durability can be improved at low cost.

In addition, the aspect of comparison of the magnitude of the displacement of the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion is not limited at all. For example, the linear distance between positions before and after the displacement may be compared, or when the displacement occurs in a plurality of directions, the comparison may be limited to the displacement in a predetermined direction (or on a predetermined plane).

In the game machine ZE12 or ZE13, the game machine ZE14 is characterized in that the prevention means comprises a protruding part protruding from the arrangement means, and the following means is wound around the protruding part.

According to the gaming machine ZE14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZE12 or ZE13, the fixing means can be assembled to the arranging means from above while supporting the following means that hangs down by its own weight with the arranging means. and the fixing means can be assembled easily.

<Technical concept that changes the displacement mode (transmission mode) in forward and reverse rotation>
A game machine comprising: driving means; displacement means configured to be displaceable by the driving force of the driving means; and transmission means configured to transmit the driving force generated by the driving means to the displacement means, The driving means is operable in a first driving mode for generating a driving force in a first direction and a second driving mode for generating a driving force in a second direction different from the first direction. is configured to be displaceable between a first displacement mode driven in the first drive mode and a second displacement mode driven in the second drive mode.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a first displacement means and a second displacement means that are displaced by the driving force of a common driving device, and the direction of displacement is reversed by reversing the driving direction of the driving device. There is a game machine configured as follows (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2013-146413). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the displacement mode of the first displacement means and the second displacement means only changes depending on the length of driving the driving device in the forward direction, and the driving direction of the driving device is switched between forward and reverse. Even if it did, both the first displacement means and the second displacement means were displaced. For this reason, there is a problem that the degree of improvement in performance effect due to the adoption of a device that can be driven in forward and reverse directions as the drive device is insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the game machine ZF1, by changing the direction in which the driving force is generated, the displacement mode of the displacement means can be changed. The production effect used can be sufficiently improved.

The gaming machine ZF1 is characterized by comprising light emitting means for emitting light toward the displacement means, wherein the displacement means is configured to be displaceable so as to pass through the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means. A game machine ZF2.

According to the game machine ZF2, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZF1, the position at which the light emitted from the light emitting means intersects the displacement means can be changed during the displacement of the displacement means. can perform a gorgeous production that changes with the passage of time.

In game machine ZF1 or ZF2, displacement suppression means for suppressing displacement of at least a part of said transmission means is provided, and said transmission means, in at least one of said first drive mode and said second drive mode, A game machine ZF3, comprising a suppression area in which transmission of driving force is suppressed, wherein the displacement suppression means is configured to be capable of suppressing a predetermined displacement in the suppression area.

According to the game machine ZF3, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZF1 or ZF2, the displacement suppression means unintentionally displaces the transmission means when the transmission of the driving force is suppressed, thereby displacing in an unintended displacement mode. Displacement of the means can be prevented.

Further, compared to the case where the displacement means is stopped by directly contacting the displacement means with another member, the visibility of the displacement means can be maintained at a high level. Therefore, it is possible to configure the displacement means of an appropriate displacement mode so that it is easy for the player to see.

Note that the mode of the displacement suppressing means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an engagement device that produces viscous resistance represented by a damper device, or a resistance device that produces resistance due to its own weight. If the direction is along the horizontal direction), the idling motion cannot be suppressed by the force of gravity.

In the game machine ZF3, detection means configured to be capable of detecting displacement of the displacement suppression means is provided, and the displacement suppression means generates resistance when the operating speed of the transmission means in the suppression area is lower than a predetermined speed. the resistance is suppressed when the operating speed of the transmission means in the suppression region is equal to or higher than a predetermined speed, and the detection means detects the portion to be detected of the displacement suppression means at a position where the displacement suppression means generates the resistance. A gaming machine ZF4 characterized in that it is arranged so as to be able to detect the .

According to the gaming machine ZF4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZF3, whether the detection means functions well to detect the stop position of the displacement suppression means and to suppress the displacement in the suppression area of the transmission means in the displacement suppression means. It can be used both for the detection of

In any one of game machines ZF1 to ZF4, the displacement means comprises first displacement means for rotationally displacing around a first axis and second displacement means for rotationally displacing the outside of the first displacement means around the first axis. A gaming machine ZF5 comprising displacement means, wherein displacement of the second displacement means can be suppressed in the first drive mode or the second drive mode.

According to the game machine ZF5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZF1 to ZF4, the displacement of the second displacement means can be suppressed in the first drive mode or the second drive mode. In the state where the second displacement means is arranged between the player and the first displacement means to block the field of view, and in the case where the second displacement means is arranged outside between the player and the first displacement means and the field of vision is In addition, since it is possible to displace the second displacement means in a drive mode that does not suppress the displacement, a total of three displacement modes are used to configure the performance by the displacement means. be able to.

A game machine ZF6 in any one of the game machines ZF1 to ZF5, wherein the transmission means comprises light transmission means formed of a light transmission material on the side of the connection position with the displacement means.

According to the game machine ZF6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines ZF1 to ZF5, the effect of facilitating the assembly of the displacement means by the light transmitting means and the light emitting performance by conducting light toward the displacement means. It is possible to achieve the effect of enabling

In any one of game machines ZF1 to ZF6, the displacement means includes first displacement means for rotationally displacing about a first axis, and transmission means for the first displacement means for rotationally displacing about the first axis. and a second displacement means connected to the transmission means outside the connection position of the second displacement means, wherein the second displacement means overlaps the first displacement means when viewed in the first axial direction. Characterized game machine ZF7.

According to the game machine ZF7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines ZF1 to ZF6, the second displacement means can be prevented from coming off by the first displacement means. This eliminates the need to dispose a separate retaining member.

<Vibration device next to the device (P9 Policy 1)>
A first operating means configured to be operable by the player, a second operating means arranged at a position different from the first operating means and configured to be operable by the player, and the first operating means. and a load generating means disposed on the side of the second operating means and capable of generating a load toward the first operating means and the second operating means.

2. Description of the Related Art Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a plurality of operating devices and a driving device for performing an effect of driving the operating devices (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-159178). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, each operating device is provided with a vibrating device, so the space required for arranging each operating device increases, and the number of arrangable operating devices tends to be limited. In addition, there is a problem that the cost becomes high due to an increase in the number of driving devices.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZG1, since the load generation means is arranged on the second operation means side with respect to the first operation means, the load generation means is arranged on the first operation means and the second operation means (that is, , a plurality of operating means). This makes it possible to reduce the space required for arranging the first operation means and the second operation means, and raise the upper limit of the number of operation means that can be arranged. In addition, since the number of load generating means can also be reduced, the cost for constructing the game machine can be suppressed.

Note that the form of the load generating means is not limited at all. For example, it may be means configured to vibrate (high-speed repeated displacement), means such as a pump that generates a load at a predetermined cycle, or means composed of an arm member that changes its posture by displacement of a cam. good. Moreover, the mode of load is not limited at all. For example, it may be a load that is mechanically transmitted in a contact state, or a load that is transmitted in a non-contact state (wind pressure, sound pressure, high pressure, etc.).

In the game machine ZG1, the load generation means is arranged between the first operation means and the second operation means.

According to the game machine ZG2, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZG1, the load can be transmitted to both the first operation means and the second operation means to the same extent.

In the game machine ZG1 or ZG2, the first operation means is operated to shoot game balls toward the game area, and the load generation means is a cover that at least partially covers the first operation means from a predetermined direction. A game machine ZG3, characterized in that it is arranged in the installation means.

According to the game machine ZG3, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZG1 or ZG2, the load generating means is arranged at a position where the fingers of the player operating the first operation means are sandwiched between the first operation means and the first operation means. Therefore, the load generated by the load generating means can be easily transmitted to the fingers of the player.

For example, the covering means is arranged at a position where the player's fingers can easily pass through in the process of moving the player's fingers by bringing the fingers close to the first operating means and then removing the fingers from the first operating means after completing the operation. By arranging the covering means so as to cover it from the direction where it is likely to interfere with the fingers, it is possible to make it possible to easily transmit the load of the load generating means to the player, especially while the fingers are moving.

In addition, for example, by arranging the covering means at a position where the finger touches with a high probability when the player operates the first operating means, the load of the load generating means is reduced during the operation of the first operating means. It is possible to configure a state that is easy to convey to the player.

This idea is different from the idea of arranging the load generating means in the first operating means. That is, since the load generating means is arranged on the side of the second operating means with respect to the first operating means, the load generating means is arranged at a position different from that of the first operating means.

In the gaming machine ZG3, intervening means interposed between the load generating means and the first operating means and the second operating means, and configured to transmit a load to the first operating means and the second operating means and the intervening means is constructed so that the strength of vibration transmission to the first operation means is higher than the strength of vibration transmission to the second operation means.

According to the gaming machine ZG4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZG3, the load transmission can be concentrated on the side of the first operating means.

In game machine ZG4, game machine ZG5 is characterized in that the intervening means is configured to change the intensity of load transmission by displacing the load generating means as the load generating means is driven.

According to the gaming machine ZG5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZG4, the strength of the load transmitted through the intervening means is improved when the load generating means is driven compared to when the load generating means is not driven. Therefore, while suppressing the degree of interlocking operation (vibration) between the first operation means and the second operation means due to the load or the like applied to the pachinko machine by the player, the first It is possible to execute an effect of strongly operating (vibrating) the operating means and the second operating means.

A game machine ZG6 characterized in that, in any one of game machines ZG1 to ZG5, holding means for holding the load generating means displaceably is provided, and the holding means is provided with a guide portion for guiding the displacement of the load generating means. .

According to the gaming machine ZG6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines ZG1 to ZG5, the safety of the player can be ensured by defining the displacement direction of the load generating means. That is, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems such as the unintentional collision of the displaced member displaced by the vibration of the load generating means with the player.

In addition, regardless of the structure of the load generating means itself, if it is guided in the desired direction, the load generating means can be displaced in the desired direction. The degree of freedom of means can be improved.

In game machine ZG6, game machine ZG7 is characterized in that said holding means is constructed in a manner that allows displacement of said load generation means in a crossing direction crossing the direction guided by said guide portion.

According to the gaming machine ZG7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZG6, the load generating means can be configured to be displaced in the crossing direction when switching between the non-driving state and the driving state. , the load generating means can be displaced in different manners. As a result, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the load generating means.

Various modes are exemplified as modes for allowing the displacement. For example, a second holding means for guiding the holding means may be provided, and the guiding direction of the second holding means may intersect the guiding direction of the guide portion. It may be configured to interpose a flexible member, and the displacement may be caused by deformation of the flexible member.

<Vibration means for covering means (P9 policy 2)>
frame means configured in a frame shape; covering means for covering at least a part of the frame means from the front side; The game machine ZH1 is characterized in that the means comprises an allowance portion for allowing displacement, and is configured to be able to transmit the vibration of the vibrating means via the allowance portion.

2. Description of the Related Art Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a front frame and vibration means arranged in front of the front frame (see, for example, JP-A-2015-159837). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, it is necessary to suppress the vibration of the vibration means to the extent that the vibration of a predetermined strength or more is not transmitted to the front frame side (internal mechanism side), and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of vibration performance. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the game machine ZH1, the vibrating means is arranged in the covering means, and the displacement of the covering means is allowed, so that the vibration can be transmitted to the player through the covering means. On the other hand, by absorbing the vibration by displacing the covering means, it is possible to suppress the transmission of the vibration to the side of the frame means. As a result, the allowable degree of vibration strength of the vibrating means can be increased.

In addition, the mode of the allowance part is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured in a connection mode assuming displacement of slides, rings, gears, etc., and displacement may occur when the slides, links, gears, etc. operate. It may be configured flexibly, and displacement may occur when an overload is applied.

In the game machine ZH1, the covering means is configured so that the allowable amount of displacement in the vertical direction is smaller than the allowable amount of displacement in the horizontal direction. .

According to the gaming machine ZH2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZH1, while maintaining the effect of the allowable portion in the horizontal displacement, the player can move the covering means in the direction of gravity, such as by placing his/her hand on the covering means. When a load is applied, it is possible to prevent the covering means from being displaced excessively and disturbing the posture of the player. That is, by reducing the permissible amount of displacement in the vertical direction, the structural stability of the product can be achieved.

In game machine ZH1 or ZH2, game machine ZH3 is characterized in that said covering means is configured in the shape of a bag with said frame means side opened.

According to the game machine ZH3, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZH1 or ZH2, since the side of the frame means is configured in the form of a bag that is open, the edges of the bag and the frame means are arranged to face each other. It is possible to reduce the contact area between the covering means and the frame means which are in contact with each other to transmit vibration. As a result, transmission of vibration to the frame means side can be suppressed, so that transmission of vibration to main substrates, ball passages, and main electrical components disposed on the frame means side can be avoided.

In any one of the game machines ZH1 to ZH3, the vibrating means includes an arrangement portion arranged on the side of the frame means, the frame means comprises a support portion for supporting the arrangement portion, and the arrangement The gaming machine ZH4, wherein the portion has a lower deformation resistance than the support portion.

According to the game machine ZH4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZH1 to ZH3, the displacement range of the vibration means is limited while suppressing the transmission of vibration to the frame means side, and furthermore, the arrangement portion is Compared to the case of a rigid structure, it is possible to generate biting by utilizing the fact that deformation resistance is low, and it is possible to ensure a large absolute value of the amount of displacement of the vibrating means toward the frame means. Thereby, it is possible to easily displace the covering means in which the vibrating means is disposed.

In any one of game machines ZH1 to ZH4, the covering means includes a first covering section and a second covering section having a lower deformation resistance than the first covering section, and the vibrating means includes , and a contact portion connected to the first covering portion and the second covering portion and capable of locally contacting the first covering portion.

According to the game machine ZH5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZH1 to ZH4, by locally contacting the first covering portion with high deformation resistance and the contact portion, the contact position can be changed. can be used as a fixed point (reference point) of vibration. That is, it is possible to increase the absolute value of the displacement of the vibrating means and the second covering portion with respect to the contact position.

In any one of game machines ZH1 to ZH5, a ball shooting operation means operated to shoot game balls toward a game area is provided, and the covering means has at least a space between the ball shooting operation means and the ball shooting operation means. A gaming machine ZH6 characterized by interposing a predetermined member.

According to the game machine ZH6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines ZH1 to ZH5, it is possible to suppress the vibration transmission to the ball shooting operation means.

<The point that is characterized by blocking the light itself by the displacement of the character>
In a gaming machine comprising a light emitting means and an illuminated means to which the light emitted from the light emitting means is emitted, changing the appearance of the illuminated means while leaving the outer shape of the illuminated means when viewed from a predetermined direction. Characterized game machine ZI1.

2. Description of the Related Art Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine equipped with a light emitting means that is mounted on a movable accessory and is configured to be capable of executing a light emitting effect (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-208360). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, there is no displaceable member disposed so as to interfere with the optical axis of the light emitting means, and it is necessary to control the light emitting means in order to change the mode of the light emitting effect. However, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of the method of realizing the lighting effect because the data capacity is compressed and the board becomes large due to the control.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZI1, for example, the displacement means is configured to be displaceable between the first position and the second position. By configuring so as to be able to do so, it is possible to switch the mode of the light emitting effect by displacing the displacing means. Therefore, it is possible to change the mode of the lighting performance without controlling the light emitting means, and it is possible to reduce the size of the substrate by eliminating the need for data for control and the circuit for control. can. As a result, it is possible to improve the technique for realizing the lighting effect.

In addition, the mode of displacement is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be a rotation, a linear slide, or a displacement along a predetermined curve. When the displacement mode of the displacement means is a linear slide, the displacement means is more effective when the direction of the slide coincides with the predetermined direction than when the direction of the slide intersects the predetermined direction. Maintaining the outer shape can be facilitated.

In addition, the aspect of the irradiated means is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured to rotate on a rotation axis that intersects the optical axis, and the projected area may change depending on the difference in posture, or even if there is no change in posture, the member may be configured to protrude from the inside and be scaled. The displacement may change the relative projected area.

The aspect of the displacement means is not limited at all. For example, it may be constructed so as to be rotationally displaced around the irradiated means, or may slide on a plane to enter the side of the irradiated means (between the light emitting means).

In addition, the mode in which the outer shape of the displacement means is left is not limited at all. For example, the displacement means may be visually recognized as if it is stopped, or the absolute value of the displacement amount may be smaller than that of the irradiated means, so that the displacement of the displacement means is not recognized by the player. Any form is fine.

Also, the displacement means may be displaced in relation to the light emitting means. The light emitting means may be configured to face the irradiated means at any timing of the displacement.

The aspect of the light emitting means is not limited at all. For example, the position may be fixed, or may be displaceable. In the displaceable state, the light emitting means may be arranged in the displacement means, or the light emitting means and the displacement means may be displaced separately (independently). Also, the irradiation direction may be fixed, or the irradiation direction may be variable.

As for the mode of displacement of the light emitting means, the light emitting means may be slid in such a manner that the optical axis is directed toward the means to be irradiated and move toward and away from the means to be irradiated, or the means to be irradiated may be moved around the means to be irradiated while the optical axis is directed to the means to be irradiated. It may be something that rotates.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting means is not limited at all. For example, it may be one that always maintains a lighting state, or one that can be switched between lighting and lighting.

In game machine ZI1, game machine ZI2 is characterized in that the difference in appearance of said means to be illuminated is caused by said means to be illuminated reflecting light emitted from said light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine ZI2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZI1, it is possible to immediately recognize the difference in the means to be irradiated when the light emitting means emits light, so it is possible to improve attention to the timing of light irradiation. . According to this, the means to be irradiated may be either displaceable means or non-displaceable means.

A gaming machine ZI3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine ZI1 or ZI2, the degree of difference in appearance of said means to be irradiated changes based on the displacement of said means to be irradiated.

According to the game machine ZI3, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZI1 or ZI2, it is possible to improve the attention to the means to be irradiated.

Note that the mode of displacement that is the basis for the difference in appearance of the means to be irradiated is not limited at all. For example, constant (periodic) displacement continuing at a constant speed or irregular displacement may be used. Also, the displacement may be instantaneous, or may be slow (so slow that it is difficult for the player to grasp the displacement, for example, a displacement of 1 [mm/min]).

A gaming machine ZI4 characterized in that in any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, the illuminated means can be configured to change the direction in which the light from the light emitting means is reflected.

According to the game machine ZI4, in any one of the game machines ZI1 to ZI3, while maintaining the outer shape of the irradiated means, the light reflected through the irradiated means can illuminate and make the area stand out.

In any one of game machines ZI1 to ZI3, game machine ZI5 is characterized in that the direction of light reflected by said means to be irradiated is the same, but at least one of light quantity and color of light is different. .

According to the game machine ZI5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZI1 to ZI3, it is possible to improve the attention to the light emitting mode of the means to be irradiated.

In any one of the game machines ZI1 to ZI5, the optical axis is configured to be able to irradiate the means to be irradiated with light in an irradiation mode in which the optical axis does not interfere with the movement trajectory of the displacement means arranged around the means to be irradiated. A gaming machine ZI6 characterized by comprising shielding light emitting means.

According to the game machine ZI6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZI1 to ZI5, by irradiating the light from the non-shielding light emitting means, the light can be applied to the irradiated means regardless of the arrangement of the displacement means. , it is possible to prevent the irradiated means from being seen darker than necessary.

In any one of the game machines ZI1 to ZI6, the means to be irradiated can be placed in a blocking position capable of blocking the first means to be irradiated and the light emitted from the light emitting means toward the first means to be irradiated. wherein the area of the light emitting means as viewed in the optical axis direction of the first irradiation means is larger than that in the case where the second irradiation means is not arranged at the shielding position. , a gaming machine ZI7 characterized in that it is configured to be smaller when said second irradiated means is placed at said shielding position.

According to the game machine ZI7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines ZI1 to ZI6, it is possible to make it difficult for the light to reach the first irradiated means. That is, the effect of shielding light can be improved. It should be noted that the change in the area of the first irradiated means may occur only when the light is emitted from the light emitting means.

In any one of game machines ZI1 to ZI7, the light emitting means is configured to irradiate the means to be irradiated with light from a plurality of optical axes, and the means to be irradiated can intersect the plurality of optical axes at a predetermined position. A gaming machine ZI8 characterized by:

According to the game machine ZI8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZI1 to ZI7, the amount of light received by the means to be irradiated is increased by increasing the optical axis of the light emitting means (for example, by increasing the number of LEDs). can be made

In any one of game machines ZI1 to ZI8, drive means configured to be capable of synchronously driving the irradiated means and displacement means disposed around the irradiated means, the irradiated means being displaced A gaming machine ZI9 is characterized in that a predetermined first surface faces the same side, and the displacement means is configured to cyclically displace the first position and the second position. .

According to the game machine ZI9, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZI1 to ZI8, while suppressing a large change in the visibility of the irradiated means, the light emitting mode ( For example, the timing of switching between light and dark can be changed by changing the speed of the displacement means.

In addition, the displacement mode of the irradiated means is not limited at all. For example, sliding displacement or rotational displacement may be used. The rotational displacement may be, for example, rotational displacement occurring along a rotational axis along the display surface of the display device, or rotational displacement occurring along a rotational axis orthogonal to the display surface of the display area.

In any one of the game machines ZI1 to ZI9, at least one of the displacement means arranged around the irradiated means and the irradiated means has a surface on the light emitting means side, and the displacement means is arranged at the second position. A game machine ZI10 is characterized in that the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be changed to the side of the player accordingly.

According to the game machine ZI10, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines ZI1 to ZI9, the light emitted from the light emitting means is emitted depending on whether the displacement means is arranged at the first position or the second position. It is possible to increase the difference in the extent to which the light traveling toward the player side.

Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3, M1 to M5, N1 to N5, O1 to O5, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q11, R1 to R8, S1 to S9, T1 to T9, U1 to U7, ZA1 to ZA8, ZB1 to ZB10, ZC1 to ZC7, ZD1 to In any of ZD7, ZE1 to ZE14, ZF1 to ZF7, ZG1 to ZG7, ZH1 to ZH6, ZI1 to ZI10, the game machine Z1 is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3, M1 to M5, N1 to N5, O1 to O5, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q11, R1 to R8, S1 to S9, T1 to T9, U1 to U7, ZA1 to ZA8, ZB1 to ZB10, ZC1 to ZC7, ZD1 to In any of ZD7, ZE1 to ZE14, ZF1 to ZF7, ZG1 to ZG7, ZH1 to ZH6, ZI1 to ZI10, the game machine Z2 is a pachinko game machine. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3, M1 to M5, N1 to N5, O1 to O5, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q11, R1 to R8, S1 to S9, T1 to T9, U1 to U7, ZA1 to ZA8, ZB1 to ZB10, ZC1 to ZC7, ZD1 to In any one of ZD7, ZE1 to ZE14, ZF1 to ZF7, ZG1 to ZG7, ZH1 to ZH6, ZI1 to ZI10, the game machine is a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Machine Z3. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines equipped with light emitting means configured to be able to execute light emitting effects (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-208360).
However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of the light emitting effect. The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the lighting effect.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of Technical Concept 1 is a gaming machine comprising light emitting means and means to be irradiated with light emitted from the light emitting means, wherein the external shape of the means to be irradiated when viewed in a predetermined direction is , the appearance of the irradiated means is changed.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, in which the difference in appearance of the means to be irradiated is caused by the means to be irradiated reflecting the light emitted from the light emitting means.
The gaming machine of technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the degree of difference in appearance of the irradiated means changes based on the displacement of the irradiated means.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, the light emitting effect can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, light reflection can be used to improve the light emitting effect.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1 or 2, it is possible to improve the light emitting performance based on the displacement of the irradiated means.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
11 outer frame (second support means)
12 inner frame (receiving means)
13, A13 game board (game means)
14 front frame (closure means, part of frame means)
14d2 Auxiliary projection (part of recess)
17 upper plate (part of receiving plate)
50 lower plate (part of receiving plate, part of game ball holding part)
51 operation handle (part of the first operation means, operation means for ball launch)
68 return ball prevention member (one-way obstruction means)
81 Third pattern display device (display means)
145, 9145, 10145 Foul ball passage (foul ball passage)
159 opening and closing regulation part (closure regulation part)
173 long cover member (part of elimination means)
178 Inverted cup portion (part of arrangement means, first means, intrusion control part, part of elimination means)
180 binding movable member (part of arranging means, second means, supporting means)
300, 2300, 3300, 4300, 5300, 6300, 7300, 10300
Operation device (part of second operation means)
310, 2310, 3310, 4310 tilting device (tilting means, operating means, first means)
311gL, 3311gL Left side detection piece (part of continuous hit determination means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
311gR Right detection piece (part of continuous hit determination means, part of end detection means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
312a1 Operation surface (part of operation means)
314 shaft (shaft)
315 torsion spring (biasing means)
324L Left side detection sensor (part of continuous hit determination means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
324R right side detection sensor (part of continuous hit determination means, part of end detection means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
330 upper frame member (part of housing means)
331 opening (first opening)
332 upper bearing (part of support)
340, 5340, 6340 drive device (drive means, first drive means)
341 body member (part of friction member)
341f LED device (light emitting means)
343 transmission shaft (part of transmission means)
343a Cylindrical member (part of transmission means)
343b transmission gear (part of drive means, part of release means)
343b2 Clutch part (engagement tooth)
343c Movable clutch (part of transmission means, part of release means)
343c2 Clutch part (engagement tooth)
343d coil spring (biasing means)
344, 6344, 7344 disc cam (part of transmission means, part of termination means, part of release load means)
344c Engagement rib (part of release load means)
344d connecting pin (protruding part)
345 arm member (part of transmission means, part of termination means)
346, 2346, 7346 release member (part of maintenance means, part of first means, part of friction member)
347, 7347 Rotating pawl member (part of maintenance means, part of first means)
352 voice coil motor (second drive means, repulsion means)
410 upper frame member (support fastening means)
451 Speaker (Sound Means)
453 Speaker connection wire (passing member)
460 front assembly (first means)
464 Wiring passage recess (part of opening)
467 passage forming rib (bending means, projecting portion)
480 rear side assembly (second means)
481Ha auxiliary projection (part of opening)
484 Wiring pressing protrusion (part of opening)
487 passage forming rib (bending means, projecting portion)
500 right panel unit (directing means)
500L left stack unit (first means)
500R right stack unit (second means)
510 support plate portion (connected means)
512a LED (light irradiation means)
531b, 531c Support hole (part of connecting part)
532 inclined rib portion (abutment means)
540 light guide member (third means, light guide means)
551b projecting portion (part of connecting portion)
600 board support device (state changing means)
620 Rotating front pawl member (approaching means)
640 post-rotation claw member (contact means)
801 Support substrate (base member)
802 petals (a part of the second displacement means)
804 central motor (driving means)
830 Rotating plate (first displacement means)
851 central shaft member (shaft means)
880 loose fitting device (third displacement means)
2062c Foul Ball Passage (Foul Ball Passage)
2347 rotating plate member (part of maintenance means)
2348 slide pawl member (part of retaining means)
2888 Regulating part (resisting means)
4321d upper detection sensor (detection sensor)
4321e lower detection sensor (detection sensor)
5320 lower frame member (part of support frame)
5344 disc cam (part of transmission means, part of termination means, part of release load means, cam member)
5400 vibration device (vibration means, repulsion means)
5411 drive motor (low water resistant part)
5412 weight member (vibration part, part of repulsion means)
5420 flexible member (part of support means, repulsion means)
5430 accommodation member (receiving means, part of repulsion means, part of support frame)
6344L1, 6344R1 disk member (first rotating member)
6344L2, 6344R2 Ring member (second rotating member)
7344L1, 7344R1 disc member (part of transmission means, part of termination means)
7344L3, 7344R3 Engagement member (release load means)
8320 lower frame member (part of housing means)
8326a First through hole (part of second opening)
8326b Second through hole (part of second opening)
8326c Third through hole (part of second opening)
9142a right slanted surface (a part of the payout ball discharge part)
9150, 10150 sheet metal member (one-way obstruction means, load means)
9145b, 10145c Notch (part of recess)
10014 front frame (part of first support means, part of holding means)
10014a metal body (part of holding means)
10145d rolling plate portion (restricting means)
10310 swing operation member (part of operation means, part of operation part)
10321 left front cover (part of first support means)
10322 right front cover (part of first support means)
10330 Inner case member (part of contact means, part of main body)
10340 Lever member (part of connecting part)
10366 Vibration Device (Part of Vibration Means)
6400 lower plate unit (part of game ball holding part)
6411 main unit (permitting unit)
6413 Protrusive shaped portion 6414 Concave shaped portion 6427 Resin member (impact damping means)
6451 main body (part of receiving recess)
6455 right reinforcing rib (part of receiving recess)
6456 left reinforcing rib (part of receiving recess)
6510 Upper lid member (part of connecting means)
6520 optical transmission unit (part of light receiving means)
6521b Light-receiving projecting portion (part of first light-receiving means, part of insertion portion)
6521d light passage hole (a part of the second light receiving means)
6521e Body tube (a part of the light conducting part)
6522 Flange (blanking interface)
6540 compartment unit (part of light receiving means, part of first means, part of fixing means)
6545 post-guidance fastening part (part of fixing means, second fixing means or first fixing means)
6547c Projecting rib (part of restraining means)
6548 transparent covering member (part of restraining means)
6550 plate guide unit (part of second means, part of fixing means)
6552 extension plate (part of outer surface)
6554a Threaded portion (part of fixing means, first fixing means or second fixing means)
6555 back side fastening part (part of fixing means, first fixing means or second fixing means)
6558 light receiving member (part of light receiving means)
6560 Partitioning member (first member, part of first means, part of containing means, part of partitioning means)
6562a enlarged hole (part of non-penetrating through-hole)
6562b direct entry hole (part of through hole)
6565 Large-diameter cylindrical part (part of control means)
6570 Decorative board (part of light emitting means, part of light emitting board)
6574a Edge light emitting part (part of light emitting means)
6574b surface light emitting part (part of light emitting means)
6580 back support member (second member, part of first means, part of containment means)
6610 Acoustic Device (Part of Vibration Means, Part of Notification Means, Part of Fourth Means)
6621 retaining plate part (part of facing part, part of suppression means, part of notification means)
6622 contact avoidance recess (part of facing part, part of suppression means, part of notification means)
6710 base member (part of containment means)
6720 Decorative board (part of light emitting means, part of light emitting board, part of third means)
6730 light receiving member (part of light guiding means)
6731 light receiving surface (part of second light guide means, part of main body, covering part)
6732 inner extension (part of frame)
6733 Outer extension (part of frame)
6734 long rib (a part of the first light guide means, facing extension part)
6735 fin (a part of the first light guide means, a separate extension part)
6736 insertion hole (part of support means)
6737 Fitting portion (part of misalignment prevention portion)
6740 flat plate member (part of containment means, part of shielding means)
6750 curved plate member (part of housing means, part of shielding means)
6751a Decorative projecting portion (part of positional deviation prevention portion)
6760 cover member (part of housing means, part of shielding means)
6802L fastening part (part of support part)
6802R insertion hole (part of support)
18830 Decorative substrate (part of light emitting means)
D1a edge light emitting part (part of total reflection light emitting part)
D23 streak D24 end streak (part of streak)
E1 notification device (detection means)
FC detection switch (part of detection means)
P1a deformed part (deformed part)
Rm1 inner edge (part of interference means)
S52 end area (occupied area)
SL2 S-shaped path (bend)
V13, V14 Gap 21051 Handle support plate (predetermined member)
21410 covering base member (part of covering means, second covering section)
21450 V-shaped design member (part of covering means, first covering section)
21500 vibrating device (part of vibrating means)
21510 Vibration motor (load generating means)
21520 covering member (part of intervening means)
21522 ridge (a part of the installation part)
21530 covering cover member (part of intervening means, retaining means)
21534 ridge (part of guide)
21540 Opposing plate member (part of intervening means)
21541 shell-shaped overhang (abutting portion)
De3 overhang (supporting part)
A310 back case (opposing means)
A312 Outer wall (part of adjacent part, arrangement part, opposite side)
A312a notch (part of edge, part of adjacent part, opposite side, non-contact part)
A313 Support plate part (part of edge part, part of proximity part, facing surface)
A73 Outer edge member (part of suppression means)
75 Metal plate-shaped member (part of suppressing means)
A86 center frame (part of the window)
A400 first action unit (a part of production means)
A411 main body (a part of covering means)
A415 diffusion plate (refractive means)
A416 electrical board (substrate)
A416a light emitting means (light emitting part)
A416e1 1st connector (connector part)
A417 substrate fixing plate (substrate holding means)
A417h notch (gap forming part)
A426 detection sensor (detection means)
A440, A4440 first displacement member (part of displacement means)
A444 diffusion plate (transmitting means)
A445b light emitting means (second light emitting means)
A450 slide link (part of displacement means, part of first displacement means)
A455b Transmission projecting portion (part of predetermined portion)
A455e Plate portion to be detected (a part of the portion to be detected)
A456a Protruding plate portion (one side functional portion, loaded portion)
A456b Opposing portion (other side functional portion, part of predetermined portion)
A456c Insertion gap (transmitted part)
A462, A3462 Gear with pin (part of transmission means, second displacement means)
A463 Transmission protrusion (part of transmission means, transmission part, load generating part)
A464 Arc wall portion (forming portion, part of restricting means)
A465 In-phase member (part of transmission means)
A470 support box (part of shielding means)
A475 fastening part (part of prevention means, projecting part)
A480 rear cover (part of placement means)
A483 Positioning protrusion (positioning part)
A490 second displacement member (part of displacement means)
A491a Shaft supporting projection (first shaft)
A491d2 ridge (part of guide)
A511 slide rack (part of second displacement means)
A715a luminous means (unshielded luminous means)
A720 rotating body (displacement means)
A721, A2721 First rotating member (first displacement means, part of irradiated means, part of first irradiated means)
A722 shell part (part of irradiated means, part of first irradiated means, part of second irradiated means)
A724 central rotating member (part of irradiated means)
A728 Second rotating member (second displacement means, part of irradiated means, part of second irradiated means)
A735 second support (part of transmission means, light transmission means)
A752 first detection sensor (detection means)
A763 piece to be detected (part to be detected)
A765 Cylindrical functional part (a part of displacement suppressing means)
A2729 slide member (part of irradiated means, second irradiated means)
A3464 Outer diameter protrusion (part of transmission means, transmission part, load generating part)
A4550 decorative member (part of displacement means)
A5001 displacement member (part of displacement means)
A5002 transmission member (part of transmission means)
A5003 Supported member (part of transmission means, part of transmission part)
A5004 thin part (a part of forming part)
A6560 Wiring guide member (part of prevention means)
A6562 projecting part (part of prevention means)
AC1 first region (a part of light emitting region)
AC2 second region (part of light emitting region, first region, first bending portion)
AMT1 drive motor (driving means)
AMT2 drive motor (driving means)
HC wiring (following means)
HCa Intermediate part (part of predetermined part, part of weak displacement part)
KJ optical axis UL1 upper transmission path (part of transmission means, suppression area)
DL1 lower transmission path (part of transmission means)

Claims (1)

light-emitting means, irradiated means configured to be rotatable about a predetermined rotation axis and irradiated with light from the light-emitting means, and movement capable of rotating together with the irradiated means about the predetermined rotation axis comprising means and
The brightness of a predetermined portion of a member included in the operating means when viewed in the predetermined direction is maintained while the external shape of the illuminated means viewed in the predetermined direction is the same during the rotational movement of the irradiated means and the operating means. changed,
light from the light emitting means via the operating means can pass through the irradiated means;
During the rotating operation, the outer shape of the irradiated means as viewed in the predetermined direction is maintained in a symmetrical shape centering on the specific portion of the predetermined rotation axis, and the appearance of the light through the irradiated means can be changed. configured,
A gaming machine, wherein the light emitting means is arranged outside the irradiated means and the operating means.

Images